■)  ^ 


^^ 


36        k^ 


V 


JOHNA.SEAVERNS 


TUFTS    UNIVERSITY    LIBRARIES 

3   9090   013   401    829 


V/ebster  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  Medicine 
Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University  ^ 

200  Westboro  Road  x 

North  Grafton,  MA  01538  ■- 


Special  Session.  )  SENATE.  (Ex.  Doc 


(  Ex.  Doc 

I    No.  1. 


KEPOET 


OF 


THE    SECRETARY    OF    WAR, 


COMMUNICATINQ 


THE    REPORT 


CAPTAIN  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN, 

(FIRST  REGIMENT  UNITED  STATES  CAVALRY,) 


ONE    OF    THE    OFFICEIIS    SENT    TO 


THE  SEAT  OF  WAR  IN  EUROPE, 


1855  AND  1856. 


WASHINGTON: 

A.    O.    P.    NICHOLSON,     PRINTER. 
1857. 


n^ 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Report  upon  the  operations  in  the  Crimea 5 

Reports  upon  the  European  engineer  troops 25 

Report  upon  the  French,  Austrian,  Prussian,  and  Sardinian  infantry 40 

Report  upon  the  Russian  army — • 

Chapter  1.  Organization,  uniform,  recruiting,  rations,  &c 61 

Chapter  2.  The  instruction  and  tactics  of  cavalry 82 

Chapters.  Equipment,  arms,  stahles,  horses,  &c.,  of  cavalry 119 

Chapter  4.  On  the  Russian  infantry 152 

Report  on  the  Prussian  cavalry 207 

Report  on  the  Austrian  cavalry 221 

Report  on  the  French  cavalry 242 

Report  on  the  English  and  Sardinian  cavalry .. 270 

Report  on  the  United  States  cavalry 277 

Regulations  and  instructions  for  the  field  service  of  cavalry,  in  time  of  war,  for  the  United  States  army 284 

Index 357 


EREATA. 

Page  53,  line  4.  For  measurer's  read  treasurer's. 
Page  58,  line  29.  For  Scliamhorst  read  Scliarnhorst. 
Page  78,  line  28.  For  Czapha  read  Czapka. 
Page  88,  line  14.  For  old  style  read  United  States. 
Page  95,  line  42.  For  old  style  read  United  States. 
Page  121,  line  2.  For  L'au  read  L'an. 
Page  122,  line  37.  For  slaras  read  haras. 
Page  322,  line  42.  For  when  read  where. 


REPORT 


THE   SECRETAKY  OF  WAR, 


COMMDNICATINO, 


In  compliance  (in  part)  with  a  resolution  of  the  Senate,  the  report  of  Captain  George  B.  McClellan, 
one  of  the  officers  sent  by  order  of  the  War  Department  to  the  seat  of  tvar  in  Europe  in  1855 
and  1856. 


Febeuakt  27,  1857.— Eead. 

March  14,  1857. — Ordered  to  be  printed,  and  that  five  thousand  additional  copies  be  printed,  one  thousand  of  which 
shall  be  for  the  use  of  the  War  Department. 


War  Department, 
Washington,  February  25,  1857. 
Sir  :  The  resolution  of  the  Senate  of  the  13th  instant  requests  the  Secretary  of  War  to  com- 
municate "copies  of  all  reports  which  may  have  heen  made  to  the  department  by  the  ofSce'i's 
who  were  sent  to  the  seat  of  war  in  Europe  in  1855  and  185G." 

In  consequence  of  other  important  duties  having  heen  assigned  to  two  of  the  officers  referred 
to,  (Major  Delafield,  of  the  Engineers,  and  Major  Mordecai,  of  the  Ordnance,)  upon  their  return 
from  Europe,  they  have  not  yet  been  able  to  complete  their  reports.  The  report  of  the  other 
officer  (Captain  George  B.  McClellan,  of  the  Cavalry,)  having  been  completed,  is,  in  compliance 
with  the  resolution,  herewith  transmitted. 

I  have  the  honor  to  be,  very  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

JEFFEKSON  DAVIS, 

Secretary  of  War. 
Hon.  J.  M.  Mason, 

President  of  the  Senate  pro  tern. 


REPORT 


TJPON   THE 


OPERATIONS  IN  THE  CRIMEA. 


BELiEVlNa  that  the  oiHcers  of  the  army  have  a  right  to  know  the  opinions  formed  hy  one  of 
their  number  who  enjoyed  the  oj^portunity  of  visiting,  in  an  official  character,  the  scene  of  the 
recent  contest  in  the  East,  I  somewhat  reluctantly  undertake  the  task  of  attempting  to  give  a 
succinct  account  of  those  general  points  of  the  operations  in  the  Crimea  which  are  most  important 
and  interesting  in  their  professional  bearing. 

For  many  and  obvious  reasons  no  attempt  will  be  made  to  enter  into  details.  The  task  would 
be  an  endless  one  were  the  means  at  hand ;  and  nothing  but  an  accurate  survey,  or  very  minute 
and  frequent  examinations,  of  every  part  of  the  vast  field  on  which  these  operations  occurred, 
combined  with  the  advantage  of  having  been  an  eye-witness  of  the  events  themselves,  and  the 
circumstances  under  which  they  took  place,  could  justify  any  one  in  undertaking  to  give  a 
detailed  account  of  the  campaign  of  the  Crimea.  It  is  known  that  circumstances  rendered  it 
impossible  for  the  commission  to  reach  the  seat  of  war  until  a  short  time  after  the  fall  of  the 
Malakoff.  I  have  reason  to  expect  that  the  other  members  of  the  commission  will  enter  into  con- 
siderable detail  with  regard  to  the  condition  and  nature  of  the  Russian  defences  as  they  existed 
at  the  close  of  the  siege,  the  amount,  calibre,  and  effect  of  the  artillery  employed,  &c. 

Although  fully  aware  that  it  is  much  easier  to  criticize  operations  after  the  result  is  known 
than  to  direct  them  at  the  time,  I  shall  not  hesitate  to  invite  attention  to  what  appear  to  be 
evident  mistakes  on  either  side ;  this,  not  for  the  purpose  of  finding  fault,  or  instituting  com- 
parisons, but  with  the  hope  that  it  may  serve  to  draw  the  attention  of  our  officers  to  the  same 
points,  and,  perhaps,  assist  in  preventing  similar  errors  on  our  own  part  hereafter. 

From  the  general  interest  felt  in  the  late  war,  it  is  more  than  probable  that  every  officer  of 
our  army  followed  step  by  step  the  movements  of  the  allies  from  Gallipoli  to  Varna,  from 
Varna  to  Old  Fort,  and  thence  to  the  scene  of  the  gigantic  strife  in  the  Heracleidan  Chersonese. 

It  may  seem  absurd  to  compare  small  affairs  with  great,  but  it  cannot  fail  to  be  a  source  of 
satisfaction  to  reflect  upon  the  fact  that  in  the  operations  against  Vera  Cruz,  the  first  thing  of 
that  nature  we  had  ever  undertaken,  we  completed  a  difficult  line  of  investment  on  the  second 
day  after  landing,  while  the  experienced  troops  of  the  allies  required  nearly  seven  days  to  land 
and  march  about  15  miles  to  the  Alma ;  bearing  in  mind  that  they  landed  without  knapsacks, 
(the  English  at  least,)  with  nothing  but  a  scanty  field  material,  and  that  they  were  in  constant 
communication  with  their  fleet.  It  was  twenty-seven  days  after  the  battle  of  the  Alma  that 
they  opened  fire  upon  Sebastopol,  although  the  distance  frorq  the  Alma  to  Balaklava  did  not 
exceed  30  miles  ;  and  their  siege  train  was  with  the  fleet,  and  landed  in  the  secure  harbors  of 
Kamiesch  and  Balaklava.     In  spite  of  the  delays  arising  from  mistakes  in  forwarding  our  siege 


6  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

train,  wliich  was  landed  on  an  oi^en  beach,  at  a  time  when  violent  northers  frequently  suspended 
work  and  cut  oif  all  communication  with  the  fleet,  we  opened  fire  upon  Vera  Cruz  on  the 
thirteenth  day  after  landing. 

Before  entering  upon  the  siege  of  Sebastopol,  it  may  be  well  to  refer  to  the  battles  which 
varied  the  monotony  of  that  long  period,  during  which  both  parties  evinced  so  much  gallantry 
and  endurance  in  the  usual  operations  of  attack  and  defence,  relieved  often  by  the  gallant 
sorties  of  the  garrison  on  the  one  hand,  and  on  the  other  by  the  desperate  assaults  of  the 
besiegers.  In  the  battle  of  the  Alma,  important  chiefly  because  it  established  the  morale  of 
the  attacking  party,  the  allies  seem  to  have  been,  judging  from  the  statements  of  both  sides, 
of  about  double  the  force  of  the  Kussians.  It  does  not  appear  that  the  position  was  really  a 
remarkably  strong  one,  nor  that  it  was  at  all  improved  by  artificial  means.  The  only  field 
works  were  a  few  trifiing  barbette  parapets  in  front  of  some  of  the  batteries  ;  while  the  slopes 
leading  to  the  position  seem  often  to  have  been,  particularly  on  the  Russian  left,  too  steep  to 
permit  the  effective  operation  of  the  weapons  of  the  defenders.  Of  the  relative  gallantry  of  the 
troops  composing  the  allied  army  this  is  no  proper  place  to  speak.  It  need  only  be  said 
that  the  column  conducted  by  General  Bosquet  decided  the  retreat  of  the  Russians,  since  it 
turned  their  left  flank.  Of  the  propriety  of  this  movement  doubts  may  be  entertained,  consid- 
ering always  the  subsequent  movements  of  the  allies.  It  would  seem  natural  that  two  plans 
ought  to  have  been  considered  by  the  allied  generals :  the  first,  to  cut  ofi"  the  Russian  army 
from  Sebastopol,  and  following  the  battle  by  a  rapid  advance  ujjon  the  city,  to  enter  it,  at  all 
hazards,  over  the  bodies  of  its  weak  garrison,  effect  their  purposes,  and  either  retire  to  the  fleet 
or  hold  the  town  ;  the  second,  to  cut  off  the  Russian  army  of  operations  from  all  external  succor 
on  the  part  of  troops  coming  from  the  direction  of  Simpheropol,  to  drive  them  into  the  city,  and 
enter  at  their  heels. 

To  accomplish  the  first  plan,  the  attack  of  Bosquet  was  proper,  but  should  have  been  followed 
up  by  such  an  unremitting  pursuit  as  that  which  succeeded  the  battle  of  Jena.  To  gain  the 
second  object,  it  would  have  been  proper  to  attack  the  Russian  right,  and  endeavor  not  only  to 
cut  them  off  from  Simj^heropol,  but  to  throw  them  into  the  sea  by  pushing  forward  the  allied 
left  so  far  and  so  rapidly  as  to  cut  them  off  from  Sebastopol,  and  thus  annihilate  them.  Neither 
of  these  plans  was  fully  carried  out.  The  Russians  retired  in  perfect  order,  abandoning  only 
one  or  two  dismounted  guns,  thus  justifying  the  supposition  that  their  general  ajjpreciated 
much  more  fully  than  did  the  allies  the  delicate  nature  of  his  position. 

It  must  be  stated  that,  during  the  battle,  the  garrison  of  Sebastopol  consisted  merely  of  four 
battalions  and  the  sailors  of  the  fieet.  The  condition  of  its  defences  at  that  time  will  hereafter 
be  alluded  to. 

In  considering  the  operations  of  the  Russians  at  this  period,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
nearest  harbor  to  the  north  of  Sebastopol  that  could  at  all  answer  as  a  depot  for  the  operations 
of  a  siege  was  the  poor  one  of  Eupatoria,  forty-eight  miles  distant ;  and  that  to  the  south  of  the 
city,  the  only  harbors  were  Balaklava  and  the  series  between  Cape  Chersonese  and  the  city. 
It  ■Cras  clearly  the  interest  of  the  Russians  to  oblige  the  allies  to  attack  on  the  north  rather  than 
on  the  south  side  ;  for  the  reasons  that  the  former  was  already  in  an  efficient  state  of  defence, 
requiring  open  trenches  to  reduce  it,  while  the  latter  was  open;  and  more  especially  that  their 
long  line  of  commimication  with  Eupatoria  and  the  rear  of  their  position  would  have  remained 
exposed  to  the  constant  attacks  of  the  reinforcements  which  might  soon  be  expected  by  the 
Russians,  while  the  city  could  still  be  supplied  by  the  more  circuitous  route  of  the  valley  of 
Baidar,  the  allied  force  being  too  small  to  complete  the  investment.     It  was  impossible  for  the 


EEPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    MTLELLAN.  7 

Russians  to  oppose  the  landing ;  because  an  army  on  land  could  never  keep  pace  with  the  move- 
ments of  a  fleet.  The  only  reasonable  plan  was  to  remain  in  position  at  Sebastopol,  and  act 
according  to  circumstances  as  soon  as  the  allies  showed  their  hand.  But  the  landing  being 
once  eflected,  the  Russian  general  should  have  annoyed  and  harassed  them,  by  day  and  night, 
by  unremitting  attacks  by  his  Cossacks  and  other  light  troops. 

Instead  of  ofiering  battle  at  the  Alma,  two  other  plans  were  open  for  the  consideration  of  the 
Russian.  In  any  event  to  destroy  the  harbors  of  Balaklava,  Kamiesch,  &c.,  and  then,  first,  to 
leave  in  Sebastopol  the  garrison  necessary  to  secure  it  against  assault  by  a  detachment  of  the 
allied  army,  and  with  the  rest  of  his  available  troops  to  operate  on  the  left  flank  of  the  allies, 
in  which  case  his  superior  knowledge  of  the  ground  ought  to  have  enabled  him  at  least  to  delay 
them  many  days  in  a  precarious  position  ;  second,  to  remain  in  the  vicinity  of  the  city,  occupy 
the  plateau  to  the  south  of  it,  and  allow  the  allies  to  plunge  as  deeply  as  they  chose  into  the 
cul  de  sac  thus  opened  to  them. 

A  couple  of  vessels  sunk  in  the  narrow  mouth  of  the  harbor  of  Balaklava,  or  the  employment 
of  a  few  tons  of  powder  in  blasting  the  clifis  which  enclosed  its  entrance,  would  have  effectually 
prevented  all  access  to  it.  A  few  vessels  sunk  in  the  common  entrance  of  the  harbors  of 
Kamiesch  and  Kazatch,  and  the  same  thing  at  Strelitzka  bay,  would  have  rendered  them  also 
inaccessible.  This  should  have  been  regarded  as  a  necessary  part  of  any  system  of  defence  for 
Sebastopol,  and,  if  carried  out,  would  have  placed  the  allies  in  a  most  unenviable  position. 
The  result  of  their  expedition  would  have  been  disastrous  in  the  extreme  ;  and  they  might  well 
have  esteemed  themselves  fortunate  if  permitted  to  retrace  their  weary  journey  to  the  Old  Fort, 
there  to  re-embark  and  consider  more  promising  plans  of  campaign.  I  am  not  acquainted  with 
the  early  career  of  the  Russian  commander,  but  cannot  resist  the  conviction  that  the  history  of 
his  operations  will  but  present  another  example  of  the  impropriety  of  intrusting  military  opera- 
tions to  any  other  than  a  professional  soldier,  or  at  least  of  the  danger  of  attempting  to  combine 
in  one  person  any  such  dissimilar  professions  as  that  of  the  sailor  and  the  soldier.  The  moral 
courage  and  energy  of  the  admiral  in  the  early  part  of  the  siege,  and  his  sagacity  in  detecting 
the  merits  of  Todtleben,  are  above  praise,  but  cannot  efface  the  impression  that  he  failed  to  take 
a  sufiiciently  enlarged  and  military  view  of  the  events  he  so  largely  controlled. 

To  resume  the  movements  of  the  allies.  The  battle  of  the  Alma  was  fought  on  the  20th 
of  September ;  the  two  following  days  were  spent  on  the  field  of  battle ;  the  23d  and  24th 
were  occupied  in  marching  a  little  more  than  ten  miles  to  the  Balbek ;  the  25th  and  half 
of  the  26th  were  passed  here,  when,  at  noon  of  the  latter  day,  the  flank  march  to  the  south  side 
was  commenced  by  the  curious  arrangement  of  sending  the  English  artillery  in  advance, 
without  escort,  through  a  woods.  This  very  original  order  of  march  was  well  nigh  attended 
with  disastrous  consequences ;  for,  as  the  head  of  the  column  approached  the  main  road  at 
Mackenzie's  farm,  a  strong  Russian  column  passed  by.  Fortunately  for  the  English  batteries, 
the  Russians  must  have  neglected  observing  the  roads  ;  and  being  ignorant  of  the  true  state  of 
affairs,  steadily  pursued  their  march  towards  Baktschi  Serai,  thus  losing  an  opportunity  of 
striking  a  brilliant  blow  without  risk  to  themselves. 

Finally,  after  darkness  set  in,  the  head  of  the  English  column  reached  the  banks  of  the 
Tchernaya  at  the  Traktir  bridge,  the  rear  closing  up  very  late  at  night,  broken  down  by  disease, 
burning  with  thirst  and  exhausted  by  fatigue.  Next  day  the  march  was  resumed;  losing 
many  men  by  the  cholera,  and  much  disorganized  by  the  fatigues  of  the  preceding  day,  they  at 
length  reached  the  welcome  haven  of  Balaklava  just  as  an  English  steamer  glided  in.  Thus, 
on  the  2Yth,  the  communication  with  the  fleet  was  regained,  and  the  first  episode  of  the  cam- 


8  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

paign  terminated.  Tlie  French  followed  the  movement,  the  armies  ascended  the  jilateau, 
Kamiesch  was  occupied  ;  and  now,  instead  of  taking  advantage  of  the  exposed  condition  of  the 
south  side,  the  allies  commenced  the  labor  of  landing  and  moving  up  their  siege  material, 
opening  the  trenches,  &c. 

To  appreciate  the  position  of  the  English  army  on  the  night  it  reached  the  Tchernaya,  it 
must  he  borne  in  mind  that  it  had  in  its  rear  the  precipitous  heights  of  Mackenzie,  several 
hundred  feet  in  elevation,  with  hut  a  single  road  leading  to  the  summit,  and  that  they  were 
thus  cut  off  from  the  immediate  assistance  of  the  French.  If  the  English  had  been  attacked 
this  night,  the  result  must  have  been  disastrous  to  them  in  the  extreme.  Had  the  harbor  of 
Balaklava  been  destroyed,  and  the  attack  been  made  during  the  next  day's  march,  it  is  probable 
that  their  annihilation  would  have  been  the  result. 

In  considering  this  march,  it  is  somewhat  difficult  to  determine  which  party  committed  the 
greatest  faults — the  allies  in  so  exposing  themselves,  or  the  Kussian  in  failing  to  avail  himself 
of  the  opportunities  offered. 

Thus  far  the  allied  generals  displayed  none  of  the  qualities  of  great  commanders ;  their 
measures  were  half-way  measures,  slow  and  blundering  ;  they  failed  to  keep  constantly  in  view 
the  object  of  the  expedition,  and  to  press  rapidly  and  unceasingly  towards  it. 

From  the  moment  the  allies  occupied  Balaklava  and  Kamiesch,  the  conduct  of  the  Eussian 
general  deserves  high  commendation,  and  was  in  striking  contrast  with  that  of  his  antagonists. 

The  affair  of  Balaklava  has  been  so  often  discussed,  yet  so  imperfectly  explained  by  the  innu- 
merable military  and  civil  inquiries  to  which  it,  and  all  connected  with  it,  have  been  subjected, 
that  it  would  seem  idle  for  one  who  visited  the  scene  nearly  a  year  after  it  occurred  to  pretend 
to  comment  upon  it ;  but  it  may  be  permitted  to  say,  with  regard  to  the  ground  over  which  the 
English  light  cavalry  charged,  that,  if  the  eye  were  not  raised  from  the  soil  under  foot,  no 
more  favorable  place  could  be  selected  for  a  charge  of  cavalry — it  was  on  the  smooth  turf  of  the 
flat  and  level  bottom  of  a  wide  valley  ;  but,  upon  turning  the  glance  to  the  ground  to  the  north 
and  east,  imagining  the  Kussians  in  the  positions  which  they  occupied  on  the  25th  October, 
1854,  it  is  difficult  to  divine  how  any  officer  could  direct  such  a  charge  to  be  made  ;  destruction 
was  inevitable,  and  nothing  could  be  gained.  No  doubt  there  often  are  cases  in  which  one  arm 
of  service  may  consistently  be  required  to  sacrifice  itself  for  the  benefit  of  the  others,  hut  this 
was  not  such  a  case.  The  most  appropriate  criticism  upon  this  exhibition  of  insane  and  useless 
valor  seems  to  be  that,  no  doubt,  made  by  a  well  known  French  general:  "C'est  bien  mag- 
nifique,  mais  ce  n'est  pas  la  guerre!"  The  Eussians  have  been  criticised  for  effecting  "too 
much  and  too  little"  in  the  affair  of  Balaklava ;  too  much  in  indicating  to  the  allies  the  weak- 
ness of  their  right;  too  little  in  not  availing  themselves  of  this  weakness  to  carry  Balaklava. 
It  is  probable  that  their  object  was  chiefly  to  slacken  the  operations  of  the  seige  by  making  a 
diversion  ;  but  it  does  not  appear  that  they  acted  with  all  possible  energy  on  this  occasion. 

As  things  went  at  Inkermann,  the  result,  as  far  as  the  English  were  concerned,  appears  to 
have  been  due  to  that  steady  and  magnificent  courage  of  their  race,  which  has  so  often  palliated 
or  overbalanced  the  follies  and  unskilfulness  of  their  commanders,  whether  in  victory  or  defeat. 
Their  conduct  on  that  day  was  worthy  of  the  nation  which  gained  credit  alike  at  Malplaquet 
and  Landen,  Blenheim  and  Fontenoy,  Waterloo  and  Corunna. 

The  position  of  Inkermann  is  the  key  point  of  the  northeastern  angle  of  the  plateau  of  the 
Chersonese;  it  commands  the  road  ascending  the  plateau  by  Cathcart's  ravine,  the  only  approach 
from  the  north  side,  and  the  road  which  follows  the  Careening  Bay  ravine,  the  only  approach 
from  the  city  in  that  vicinity  ;  it  is  the  most  elevated  ground  in  the  neighborhood,  and  is  sua- 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN.  9 

ceptible  of  a  strong  defence  from  whatever  direction  it  may  be  attacked.  Were  it  occupied  by 
the  Russians,  the  siege  of  the  Karabalnaia  became  impossible,  and  the  position  of  the  allies 
dangerous  in  the  extreme  ;  if  strongly  occupied  by  the  allies,  their  right  became  perfectly  secure. 

Could  the  Russians  have  anticipated  a  siege  of  Sebastopol,  it  would  have  been  an  unpardon- 
able error  not  to  have  occupied  the  Inkermann  by  a  small  permanent  work.  How  little  they 
were  prepared  for  an  attack  by  land  will  probably  be  shown  in  the  sequel ;  but  as  things  were, 
it  appears  to  be  a  grave  error  not  to  have  intrenched  the  position  from  the  beginning.  It  was 
still  more  inexcusable  on  the  part  of  the  allies  to  have  omitted  the  occupation  of  the  position  in 
force  ;  nor,  with  proper  field  works,  would  a  very  large  force  have  been  necessary. 

The  Russian  jjlan  for  the  battle  of  November  5  was  most  excellent  in  conception  ;  and,  as  far 
as  mere  orders  could  go,  nothing  seemed  wanting  to  insure  success,  and  drive  the  English 
partly  over  the  steep  borders  of  the  plateau  into  the  open  arms  of  Gortschakoff,  partly  into  the 
sea,  and  the  rest  to  Kamiesch.  It  must  be  kept  in  view  that  the  principal  object  of  the  Russians 
in  giving  battle  at  the  Inkermann  was  to  prevent  an  assault  upon  the  town,  then  regarded  as 
too  weak  to  resist  it;  in  this  respect,  although  at  a  heavy  cost,  they  gained  their  point,  for  they 
effectually  rendered  an  assault  impossible  for  many  months  thereafter.  In  considering  the  plan 
of  attack,  the  Russian  general  rejected  the  idea  of  a  movement  on  the  allied  centre,  (by  the 
ravine  of  the  inner  harbor,)  because  it  was  too  effectually  defended  by  the  siege  batteries  of  the 
allies  ;  the  attack  upon  their  rear  was  rejected  because  the  plateau  was  very  difficult  of  access, 
strongly  guarded,  and  the  affair  of  Balaklava  had  induced  the  allies  to  throw  up  works  in  that 
direction.  It  was  therefore  determined  to  attack  the  English  right  and  centre,  making  false 
attacks  on  the  French  left  and  towards  Balaklava. 

The  spirit  of  the  orders  issued  was  as  follows  :  General  Soimonoff,  with  16,200  infantry  and 
38  guns,  to  march  up  the  Careening  Bay  ravine,  ascend  its  western  slope  near  the  Victoria 
redoubt,  and  attack  the  English  centre.  General  Pauloff,  with  13,500  infantry  and  2S  guns,  to 
march  from  the  north  side,  descend  into  and  cross  the  Tchernaya  valley  at  the  head  of  the  bay, 
ascend  by  Cathcart's  ravine,  and  attack  the  English  right ;  the  attack  of  these  two  commands 
to  be  simultaneous.  General  Gortschakoff,  with  about  15,000  infantry,  4,000  cavalry,  and  40 
guns,  to  make  a  false  attack  upon  Balaklava  and  the  roads  leading  thence  to  the  plateau. 
General  Timofajeff,  with  some  2,500  men  and  4  guns,  to  make  a  false  attack  upon  the  French 
left,  carrying  their  batteries,  if  any  confusion  were  observed  among  them.  The  batteries  in  the 
town  to  keep  up  a  warm  fire. 

A  close  examination  of  the  ground  would  indicate  the  propriety  of  this  plan  of  attack  ;  the 
difficulty  arose  in  the  execution.  It  would  appear  that  in  the  orders  the  expression  ^^left  of  the 
Careening  Bay  ravine"  was  used  for  '^western;"  Soimonoff  improperly  interjireted  this  as 
meaning  his  own  left,  and  thus  brought  his  own  and  Pauloff's  column  into  a  state  of  confusion 
which  paralyzed  the  efforts  of  both,  so  that  but  a  portion  of  either  command  was  at  any  one 
time  engaged. 

As  it  was,  the  Russians  were  undoubtedly  driving  the  exhauste  i  English  before  them  when 
Bosquet  came  up.  Had  the  false  attack  towards  Balaklava  been  properly  conducted,  Bosquet 
would  have  been  unable  to  assist  the  English;  but,  soon  perceiving  that  the  operations  of 
Gortschakoff  were  confined  to  a  simple  cannonade  at  long  range,  he  readily  divined  the  true 
state  of  affairs,  and  by  his  prompt  action  saved  the  army. 

Timofajeff  succeeded  in  spiking  fifteen  guns,  and  paralyzed  the  French  left. 

It  would  thus  seem  that  the  result  of  the  action  was  due  partly  to  the  courage  of  the  En^'lish, 
a  © 


10  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

partly  to  fhe  mistake  of  Soimonoff,  (who  expiated  his  error  with  his  life,)  partly  to  the  prompt 
and  correct  judgment  of  Bosquet,  and  mainly  to  the  fact  that  Gortschakoff  did  not  conduct  his 
false  attack  with  sufficient  energy  and  decision. 

The  desperate  courage  of  the  Kussians  in  this  affair  was  fully  acknowledged  by  all  who  par- 
ticipated in  it. 

In  the  battle  of  the  Tchernaya  the  principal  efforts  of  the  Russians  were  directed  against  two 
points  :  The  Fedukhine  heights,  occupied  by  the  French,  and  the  hills  occupied  by  the  Sar- 
dinians, between  the  Fedukhine  and  the  village  of  Karlofka  Pus,  directly  opposite  Tchorgoun. 

A  glance  at  the  map  will  show  the  propriety  of  this  attack ;  for  had  either  of  these  points 
fallen  the  other  must  have  followed  ;  and,  had  the  Russians  followed  up  the  occupation  by  any 
active  measures,  the  result  must  have  been  the  suspension  of  the  siege.  The  question  will 
naturally  arise,  why  did  the  Russians  abandon  these  positions  which  were  in  their  possession 
during  a  part  of  the  preceding  winter?  The  only  reasonable  answer  is,  that  their  force  was 
then  so  small  as  to  be  entirely  required  for  the  defence  of  the  city. 

The  Fedukhine  heights,  the  elevation  of  which  is  not  far  from  100',  extend  about  two  and  a 
half  miles  along  the  Tchernaya  ;  their  horizontal  plan  is  nearly  a  trident,  with  the  points  to- 
ward the  stream,  the  central  branch  sending  forth  some  five  irregular  spurs  ;  towards  the  stream 
the  slopes  are  sufficiently  steep  to  render  access  difficult,  while  full  sweep  is  permitted  to  the 
fire  of  artillery  and  musketry  from  the  summit,  and  upon  any  one  point  from  the  collateral 
spurs. 

The  aqueduct,  which  is  here  a  ditch  so  broad  and  deep  as  to  be  much  in  the  way  of  troops, 
skirts  the  northern  base  of  the  heights  along  thfeir  whole  extent. 

The  Traktir  bridge  is  directly  in  the  prolongation  of  the  ravine  which  separates  the  central 
from  the  eastern  branch  of  the  trident ;  for  more  than  half  a  mile  on  each  side  of  the  bridge  the 
deep  and  vertical  bed  of  the  Tchernaya  skirts  the  aqueduct. 

The  Traktir  bridge  was  of  masonry,  and  covered  by  a  weak  tete-de-pont. 

Either  the  acqueduct  or  the  stream  was  in  itself  a  serious  obstacle  ;  the  two  combined  con- 
stituted a  formidable  obstacle,  requiring  the  use  of  bridges,  situated  as  they  were  under  the 
close  fire  of  the  troops  occupying  the  heights. 

The  same  difficulties,  to  a  greater  extent,  existed  at  the  foot  of  the  Sardinian  heights ;  but  the 
attack  in  this  quarter  does  not  appear  to  have  been  quite  so  pronounced  as  that  upon  the  French. 
Both  of  these  positions  were  strengthened  to  a  certain  extent  by  field  works,  especially  that  of 
the  Sardinians. 

It  is  certain  that  the  allies  had  received  intelligence,  from  a  neutral  capital,  that  the  Russians 
intended  attacking  on  or  about  the  18th  of  August,  although  the  precise  point  was  not  perhaps 
specified. 

The  Russian  reports  give  their  own  version  of  the  failure,  attributing  it  to  a  failure  on  the 
part  of  one  of  their  generals  to  carry  out  his  orders ;  but  the  foregoing  description  of  the  ground 
may  render  it  probable  that  the  repulse  was  due  to  the  strength  of  the  position  and  the  gallantry 
of  its  defenders,  without  seeking  for  other  causes  ;  it  may  safely  be  said  that  the  defeat  of  the 
Russians  was  not  owing  to  any  want  of  courage  and  impetuosity  on  their  part. 

The  events  of  Inkermann  and  Traktir  seem  to  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  the  Russians  moved 
in  too  heavy  and  unwieldy  masses ;  this  system  of  tactics,  which  would  on  many  fields,  no  doubt, 
carry  all  before  it,  if  followed  by  a  rapid  deployment,  in  these  cases  exposed  them  to  terrible 
losses,  and  rendered  impossible  that  effective  development  of  numerical  force  and  individual 
exertion  which  was  necessary  to  carry  the  day. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  11 

The  general  configuration  of  the  harbor  of  Sebastopol,  and  the  peninsula  to  the  south  of  it, 
is  too  well  known  to  require  description.  The  most  striking  and,  in  their  hearing  upon  the 
siege,  the  most  important  features  are :  First.  The  complete  isolation  of  the  high  plateau  of  the 
peninsula  from  the  main  Crimea  by  the  nearly  continuous  valleys  of  Balaklava  and  the  Tchernaya . 
Second.  The  lofty  and  almost  inaccessible  escarpment  which  limits  the  plateau  towards  the  east, 
south,  and  to  a  great  extent  on  the  north.  Third.  The  deep  and  difficult  ravines  which  intersect 
this  very  irregular  surface. 

Some  points  of  the  plateau  exceed  700'  in  elevation  ;  the  average  height  of  the  escarpment 
above  the  valleys  of  Balaklava  and  the  Tchernaya  may  safely  be  taken  at  400'.  It  need  scarcely 
be  stated  that  this  plateau  formed  for  the  allies  a  position  of  great  strength. 

Of  the  many  ravines  by  which  it  is  intersected,  it  is  only  those  from  the  Careening  to  the 
Quarantine  bays,  inclusive,  that  have  an  immediate  bearing  on  the  works  of  attack  and  defence. 
All  of  these  have  their  origin  quite  close  to  the  eastern  border  of  the  plateau. 

The  most  important  is  the  great  central  ravine,  the  main  branch  of  which  commences  quite 
near  the  "Col  de  Balaklava" — the  depression  through  which  the  main  road  from  Balaklava  to 
Kamiesch  ascends  the  plateau — then  runs  a  little  west  of  north,  forming,  where  it  enters  the 
town,  the  inner  harbor,  which  separates  Sebastopol  from  the  Karabelnaia  suburb.  During 
nearly  the  first  half  of  the  siege  the  French  approaches  were  confined  to  the  west  of  this  ravine, 
occupying  all  the  space  thence  to  the  sea  ;  while  the  English  were  on  the  east,  occupying  the 
ground  only  as  far  as  the  Otchakoff  ravine ;  in  other  words,  the  original  French  attack  was 
directed  against  the  city  proper,  while  that  of  the  English  was  against  a  portion  of  the  Karabel- 
naia suburb. 

It  is  now  time  to  state  that  when  the  allies  reached  Balaklava  the  land  defences  of  Sebastopol, 
on  the  south  side,  consisted  of  a  loopholed  wall,  4'  8"  thick,  and  from  18'  to  20'  high,  extending 
from  the  western  point  of  Artillery  bay  to  the  position  afterwards  occupied  by  the  Central 
Bastion  ;  thence  around  the  Karabelnaia  suburb  to  the  main  harbor,  the  only  defence  consisted 
of  the  Malakoff  tower,  a  semicircular  structure,  with  two  stories  of  loopholes  and  5  guns  in 
barbette. 

To  resume  the  description  of  the  ground  west  of  the  central  ravine  :  the  Artillery  Bay  ravine 
commences  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  outside  of  the  city,  and  at  first  runs  nearly  north, 
being  separated  from  a  spur  of  the  central  ravine  by  a  ridge  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile  wide  ; 
on  the  highest  point  of  this  ridge  was  situated  the  Flag-staff  Bastion,  (Bastion  du  Mat ;)  the 
French  approaches  followed  this  ridge,  and  extended  across  the  Artillery  Bay  ravine,  which  is 
here  by  no  means  steep  or  difficult,  but  becomes  much  more  pronounced  upon  entering  the  city, 
when  it  for  some  distance  runs  off  to  the  west  of  north. 

Just  before  this  ravine  enters  the  city  there  commences  to  the  west  of  it,  and  separated  from 
it  by  a  ridge  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile  wide,  another  ravine  which  runs  into  the  Quarantine 
hay,  and  which  we  will  call  the  Central  Bastion  ravine  ;  the  direction  of  this  ravine  is  nearly 
northwest ;  near  its  head,  and  on  the  highest  point  of  the  ridge  which  separates  it  from  the 
Artillery  Bay  ravine,  is  situated  the  Central  Bastion,  at  an  elevation  of  217'  above  the  sea. 

The  loop-holed  wall,  and  the  works  constructed  to  replace  or  strengthen  it,  follow  this  ridge 
for  about  three-quarters  of  the  distance  to  the  Quarantine  batteries,  and  then  turn  off  to  the 
north  ;  from  this  angle  to  the  batteries  a  line  of  woi-ks  called  the  Quarantine  redans  was  erected 
during  the  siege. 

The  French  attacks  against  the  Central  Bastion  followed  the  ridge  on  which  it  was  built,  and 
to  the  westward  occupied  the  irregular  ridge  between  the  Central  Bastion  ravine  and  the  Quar- 


12  MILITAEY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

antine  Bay  ravine,  then  crossed  this  last  ravine  and  terminate!  at  the  shore  of  the  Black  sea, 
where  powerful  batteries  were  erected.  The  Central  Bastion  ravine  has  rather  gentle  slopes, 
and  is  by  no  means  so  difficult  as  those  on  the  eastern  side  of  tlie  great  central  ravine  ;  in  fact, 
approaches  could  he  carried  over  it,  and  did,  indeed,  extend  into  it. 

Passing  to  the  east  of  the  central  ravine,  Cathcart's  hill,  which  will  be  found  on  all  the  maps, 
may  be  taken  as  a  starting  point. 

On  the  west  and  east  sides  of  this  hill  two  difficult  ravines  commence  ;  the  first,  called  by  the 
English  the  Valley  of  Death,  iinites  with  the  central  ravine  about  one  mile  from  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  inner  harbor  ;  the  second,  by  which  the  Woronzoff  road  enters  the  city,  joins 
tlie  central  ravine  at  the  very  end  of  the  inner  harbor.  The  isolated  .spur  thus  formed  was 
occupied  by  the  English  le'.t  attack,  the  only  object  of  which  was  to  establish  batteries  to  assist 
the  French  attack  upon  the  Flag-staff  Bastion,  and  the  English  right  attack  upon  the  Redan,  as 
well  as  to  protect  the  flanks  of  those  attacks;  for  the  ravines  bordering  this  spur  are  so  deep  and 
difficult  as  to  render  it  impossible  to  cross  them  either  by  trenches  or  assaulting  columns. 

Further  to  the  east  is  the  Otchakoff  ravine,  running  nearly  parallel  to  the  Woronzoff  ravine, 
much  less  difficult  and  directed  upon  the  Dock  Yard  bay.  On  the  highest  point  of  the  ridge 
separating  the  two  ravines  last  named,  and  at  its  end  nearest  the.  town,  were  situated  the  Redan 
and  the  Barrack  battery;  the  English  right  attack  followed  the  ridge.  To  the  eastward  of  the 
Otchakoff  ravine,  and  nearly  parallel  to  it,  is  the  Careening  Bay  ravine,  the  most  difficult  of  all. 
On  the  highest  point  at  the  end  of  the  ridge  thus  formed  was  placed  the  Malakoff,  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  333' ;  the  Little  Redan  (Batterie  Noire)  occupied  a  considerably  lower  point  to  the  north- 
east of  the  Malakoff,  while  the  work  known  as  the  Mamelon  Vert,  or  Brancion  redoubt,  crowned 
a  hill  on  the  same  ridge,  about  three-eighths  of  a  mile  to  the  southeast  of  the  Malakoff,  and  40' 
more  elevated ;  the  French  attacks  against  the  three  works  named  occupied  the  summit  and 
higher  slopes  of  the  ridge. 

Between  the  Careening  Bay  ravine  and  the  main  harbor  is  situated  the  high  and  narrow  ridge 
known  as  Mount  Sapovine.  Points  of  this  ridge  were  occupied  by  the  Volhynia  and  Selenghinsk 
redoubts,  (ouvrages  blancs,)  which  acted  upon  the  flank  of  the  French  approaches  against  the 
Mamelon,  and  would  have  taken  in  reverse  the  approaches  thence  against  the  Malakoff.  The 
French  approaches  against  the  redoubts  wound  along  the  summit  of  the  Sanoune  ridge.  In 
rear  of  the  Redan  and  Malakoff,  more  especially  in  the  latter  case,  the  ground  fell  rapidly  to 
the  level  of  the  Karabelnaia  and  the  bay ;  in  rear  of  the  loopholed  wall  the  ground  also  soon 
fell  rapidly  into  the  Artillery  Bay  ravine,  leaving,  however,  a  plateau  of  some  little  width  imme- 
diately behind  the  defences,  which  thus  screened  the  greater  part  of  the  town  and  harbor  from 
the  view  of  those  in  the  trenches. 

From  the  course  known  to  have  been  pursued  by  the  Russians  in  other  cases,  the  nature  of 
the  ground,  the  appearance  of  the  works  at  the  close  of  the  siege,  and  the  remarks  of  officers 
on  both  sides,  it  would  appear  that  when  Todtleben  was  called  upon  to  fortify  Sebastopol,  in 
presence  of  the  enemy,  he  commenced  by  occupying  most  of  the  important  points  that  have  been 
mentioned  by  detached  works,  generally  closed  at  the  gorge.  The  first  efforts  of  the  garrison 
were  directed  towards  giving  these  sufficient  strength  to  resist  assault ;  afterwards  they  were 
connected  by  re-entering  lines  of  a  weaker  profile,  which  served  to  enfilade  the  ravines  and 
flank  the  main  works.     These  lines  were  generally,  but  not  always,  continuous. 

One  of  the  early  measures  was  to  construct  rifle  pits,  which  were  often  advanced  to  a  very 
considerable  distance. 

The  most  important  points  of  the  main  line  of  defence  should  probably  be  classed  in  the  • 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  13 

following  order  of  strength  :     1st.  The  Flag-staff  Bastion ;  2d.  Central  Bastion ;  3d.  Malakoff; 
4th.  Eedan;  5th.  Little  Redan. 

The  Flag-staff  Bastion  was,  on  account  of  the  ground,  a  somewhat  irregular  figure — nearly 
a  lunette.  The  ditch  of  the  right  face  was  flanked  by  two  guns  in  a  blinded  caponiere;  the  left 
face  was  flanked  by  four  guns,  in  a  return  of  the  epaulment  which  extended  from  the  rear  of  the 
work  along  the  crest  of  the  central  ravine,  and  finally  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  valley.  The 
command  of  the  work  could  not  have  varied  much  from  15'.  The  ditch  was  about  30'  wide,  and 
from  12'  to  15'  deep;  its  slopes  steep,  often  vertical.  Against  a  portion  of  the  scarp,  near  the 
salient,  rested  a  row  of  palisades  some  10'  high,  and  uninjured  by  the  fire.  This  was  the  only 
case  of  palisading  observed  in  any  part  of  the  ditches.  The  work  was  provided  with  a  glacis 
and  covered  way,  the  interior  slope  of  the  latter  revetted  with  gabions.  Shelters  were  excavated 
in  the  counterscarp,  under  the  covered  way.  There  was  a  small  battery  in  the  covered  way  of 
the  left  face.  It  was  in  front  of  this  bastion  that  the  principal  mining  operations  were  con- 
ducted: on  the  part  of  the  French  to  advance  their  approaches,  on  the  part  of  the  Russians  to 
frustrate  the  attempt.  The  craters  were  from  12'  to  15'  in  depth,  and  in  a  very  rocky  soil.  The 
French  never  succeeded  in  carrying  the  work,  nor  in  crowning  the  crest  of  the  glacis. 

Some  portions  of  the  exterior  slope  were  revetted  with  gabions.  These  were  sadly  disfigured, 
but  still  presented  a  formidable  obstacle.  It  is  most  probable  that  this  system  was  resorted  to 
only  as  a  rapid  means  of  repairing  damages. 

The  guns  were  mounted  on  a  narrow  rampart,  with  traverses  for  each  gun,  and  parados  on 
the  right  face.  Here,  as  well  as  in  all  the  other  land  defences,  ships'  guns  mounted  on  ships' 
carriages,  and  worked  by  side  tackle  and  breechings,  were  alone  employed.  In  this  battery 
many  of  the  embrasures  were  revetted  with  the  common  boiler  iron  ships'  water  tanks,  cubes  4' 
on  each  edge.  These  were  filled  with  earth,  and  three  were  employed  to  revet  each  cheek.  In 
one  embrasure  thirteen  shot  and  shell  had  struck  a  cheek  tluis  revetted,  yet  the  embrasure  was 
perfectly  serviceable.  In  some  cases  traverses  were  made  of  these  tanks.  Their  sides  were 
sometimes  used  instead  of  the  rope  mantelets.  The  rope  mantelets  were  suspended  from  a  hori- 
zontal spar  laid  across  the  top  of  the  embrasure  and  lashed  to  stout  stakes ;  they  were  4"  thick 
and  made  of  three  thicknesses  of  rope  sewed  together.  A  hole  was  left  in  the  lower  part  for 
the  gun  to  run  through,  and  often  a  circle  of  similar  construction  was  placed  upon  the  gun,  a 
small  aperture  being  left  for  pointing.  This  arrangement  was  rendered  indispensable  by  the 
great  depth  of  embrasure  required  for  ships'  carriages,  and  was  found  to  afford  ample  protection 
against  rifle  balls  and  small  grape. 

The  bomb  proofs  were  generally  ample  in  number  ;  they  were  sometimes  under  the  rampart, 
sometimes  under  the  second  line  of  defence,  (where  such  a  line  existed,)  often  under  special 
traverses,  and  occasionally  entirely  under  ground.  Their  height  was  generally  6'  and  upwards, 
the  width  sufiicient  for  two  rows  of  banquette  beds,  the  length  varied  exceedingly;  the  roof  was 
generally  composed  of  18"  timber,  for  the  most  part  pieces  of  masts;  the  minimum  depth  of 
earth  on  top  seemed  to  be  6'.  As  I  observed  none  which  were  broken  in  by  shells,  it  may  be  a 
fair  inference  that  this  depth  was  sufiicient. 

Many  of  the  bomb  proofs  were  lined  with  boards,  had  fire  places  and  chimneys,  were  well 
ventilated,  and  whitewashed.  Latrines  were  arranged  in  special  bomb  proofs,  moveable  casks 
with  seats  over  them  being  employed. 

The  Flag-staff  Bastion  had  a  second  line  of  defence,  which  was  filled  with  bomb  proofs. 

The  Central  was  similar  in  construction  to,  yet  weaker  in  profile  than,  the  Flag-staff  Bastion  ; 
its  steep  scarp  and  counterscarp  rendered  it,  indeed,  a  formidable  obstacle  to  assault ;  with  such 


14  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

defenders  as  the  Kussians,  it  is  no  discredit  to  the  French  that  their  patient  yet  hrilliant  efforts 
failed  to  achieve  success.  The  loopholed  wall  was  either  covered  by  a  rampart  and  parapet,  or 
entirely  replaced  by  a  simple  parapet ;  wherever  it  remained  exposed  it  was  much  injured  by  the 
long  cannonade  to  which  it  was  subjected. 

The  Quarantine  Kedans  were  little  more  than  a  simple  trench,  with  the  gabionade  thrown 
forward  about  3',  thus  affording  a  banquette ;  the  soil  in  this  part  was  even  more  rocky  than  in 
front  of  the  bastions  just  described. 

The  strength  of  profile  of  the  works  east  of  the  central  ravine  was  very  much  less  than  that  of 
the  Flag-staff  and  Central  Bastions.  The  remembrance  of  the  history  of  the  progress  of  the 
siege  will  explain  the  seeming  anomaly  that  points,  now  generally  considered  of  secondary 
importance,  should  be  more  strongly  fortified  than  those  which  common  opinion  pronounces  the 
key  points  of  the  position.  Until  the  spring  of  1855  all  the  efforts  of  the  French  were  directed 
against  the  Flag-staff  and  Central  Bastions ;  and  for  some  reason  or  other  (probably  the  languor 
with  which  their  approaches  were  pushed)  the  Eussians  seemed  to  attach  very  little  importance 
to  the  operations  of  the  English.  It  was  therefore  natural  and  proper  that  the  Russians  should 
avail  themselves  of  the  time  employed  by  the  allies  in  preparing  to  open  their  fire,  and  of  the 
slackness  of  the  fire  during  the  winter,  to  turn  all  their  efforts  upon  the  points  attacked.  It  is 
probable  that  serious  work  upon  the  Malakoff  scarcely  commenced  before  the  French  opened 
their  trenches  against  it;  it  was  therefore  carried  on  under  much  more  unfavorable  circumstances. 

In  the  leisurely  construction  of  a  system  of  permanent  defences  for  Sebastopol,  the  neglect  of 
the  Malakoff  and  Sapoune  ridges  would  have  been  indeed  inexcusable ;  but  the  actual  works  were 
constructed  for  the  most  part  under  fire,  and  always  in  sight  of  the  enemy.  The  garrison  was 
for  along  time  weak  for  so  extensive  a  position,  and  the  supply  of  tools  was  always  inadequate 
in  amount  and  wretched  in  quality  ;  looking  at  their  miserable  tools,  it  was  a  source  of  astonish- 
ment that  such  gigantic  results  could  have  been  achieved  with  such  paltry  means. 

The  Eedan  was  more  properly  a  salient  bastion,  and  appearances  indicated  that  it  was 
originally  a  detached  lunette,  closed  at  the  gorge  by  a  bastioned  front,  having  a  good  ditch, 
banquette,  &c.  ;  in  fact,  this  gorge  front  still  existed  in  fair  condition  at  the  close  of  the  siege, 
the  left  half  bastion  alone  having  for  some  reason  been  nearly  levelled.  The  Redan  was  after- 
wards connected  with  the  Barrack  battery  on  the  one  hand,  and  on  the  other  extended  by  the 
line  of  works  crowning  the  western  crest  of  the  Otchakoff  ravine.  The  nature  of  the  ground, 
espeeially  near  the  salient,  was  such  that  the  scarp  and  counterscarp  were  more  gentle  than  in 
the  bastions  already  described.  Without  pretending  to  enter  into  details  which  would  neces- 
sarily be  imperfect,  the  best  practical  idea  of  the  real  nature  of  the  work  will  be  derived  from 
the  fact  that,  although  no  breach  was  made,  the  English,  on  the  8th  September,  entered  the 
work  without  using  the  ladders.  The  details  of  the  interior  were  similar  to  those  of  the  Flag- 
staff Bastion,  the  guns  being  covered  by  traverses  and  parados,  which  formed  shelters  very 
favorable  to  an  attacking  column  after  it  had  once  effected  an  entrance.  It  should  be  distinctly 
stated  that  the  Redan  had  no  second  line  of  defence. 

In  front  the  ground  has  a  very  gentle  slope  and  is  unobstructed  ;  the  works  connecting  the 
Redan  with  the  Barrack  battery  border  the  precipitous  side  of  the  great  ravine;  the  ground 
occupied  by  the  work  itself  slopes  gently  from  the  salient  towards  the  gorge ;  in  rear  it  falls 
rapidly  towards  the  inner  harbor,  but  somewhat  less  so  to  the  north,  so  that  access  is  not 
very  difiicult  from  that  direction. 

In  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  Redan  there  was  a  series  of  remarkable  bomb  proofs, 
excavated  in  the  solid  rock  :  first,  a  ditch  12'  wide  and  4'  deep  was  excavated;  then  holes  for  a 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'^CLELLAN.  15 

couple  of  men  each  were  formed  on  each  side  of  the  ditch,  each  hole  being  6'  long,  5'  high,  and 
3'  wide. 

In  the  same  locality  arrangements  were  observed  for  firing  cannister  from  a  13"  mortar. 

The  line  of  works  extending  from  the  Eedan  along  the  crest  of  the  OtchakofF  ravine  varied 
much  at  different  points  ;  in  some  places  the  ditch  was  excavated  to  the  depth  of  6'  and  8'  in  the 
rock,  in  others  the  counterscarp  was  wholly  artificial ;  portions  of  the  abattis  still  remained  in 
front  of  this  line.  This  line  did  not  extend  continuously  to  the  Malakoff,  but  was  broken  where 
it  crossed  the  Otchakofi"  ravine,  detached  retired  batteries  enfilading  the  latter. 

The  Malakofi"  also  was  a  salient  bastion,  its  right  face  being  slightly  broken  to  the  front ; 
the  bastion  enclosed  the  remains  of  the  tower,  the  lower  story  of  which  was  covered  by  the 
parapet. 

An  ample  estimate  for  the  profile  of  the  Malakofi"  at  the  salient  would  probably  be,  command 
14';  thickness  of  parapet,  18';  ditch,  18' wide  and  12'  deep.  At  all  events,  such  was  the  condition 
of  afiairs  that  the  Zouaves,  who  formed  the  storming  party  on  the  8th  September,  entered  the 
work  without  the  aid  of  ladders. 

The  Malakoff  Bastion  (called  by  the  Kussians  Kornilofi",  the  name  Malakofi"  being  applied  by 
them  only  to  the  tower)  occupied  the  eastern  crest  of  a  hill  rising  from  the  general  surface  of 
the  ridge,  and  terminating  it  towards  the  town ;  the  slope  of  the  hill  towards  the  French 
approaches  was  gentle,  while  towards  the  Karabelnaia  suburb  it  was  steep,  difiicult,  and 
obstructed  in  the  extreme ;  to  the  north  and  south  the  ground  fell  away  rapidly.  In  rear  of  the 
bastion  an  irregular  redoubt  occupied  the  remainder  of  the  summit  of  the  hill ;  the  parapet 
did  not  always  follow  the  ditch,  but  was  often  broken  into  saw  teeth  (to  obtain  better  directions 
for  the  guns)  while  the  ditch  ran  in  a  straight  line.  With  regard  to  the  bastion  and  redoubt 
two  errors  were  commited:  in  the  first  place,  two  epaulments  were  left  standing,  extending  from 
near  the  fianks  of  the  bastion  to  the  redoubt,  which  afi"orded  easy  access  'to  the  latter  from  the 
parapet  of  the  former  ;  in  the  second  place,  the  bastion  was  literally  filled  with  traverses 
covering  the  bomb  proof  shelters ;  these  traverses  entirely  nullified  the  efi'ect  of  the  fire  of  the 
redoubt  upon  the  troops  who  gained  the  bastion,  and  afi"orded  them  complete  shelter.  As  these 
bomb  proofs  were  absolutely  necessary  to  enable  the  garrison  to  hold  the  work  during  the  bom- 
bardment, it  is  not  perhaps  exactly  proper  to  designate  their  construction  as  an  error,  althouf'h 
their  existence  proved  fatal  at  the  time  of  the  assault.  The  evil  might  have  been  remedied 
either  by  sinking  the  bomb  proofs  entirely  under  ground,  or  by  giving  to  the  mass  of  earth 
above  a  glacis  slope  towards  the  salient,  although  the  latter  arrangement  would  have  required 
much  space.  The  interior  slopes  of  all  the  works  were  revetted  with  gabions,  crowned  with 
fascines  and  sand  bags.  From  the  Malakofi"  to  the  Little  Eedan  abattis,  military  pits,  spikes 
and  caltrops,  with  four  barbed  points,  stuck  through  planks,  were  freely  employed.  These 
things  were  also  employed  in  front  of  other  parts  of  the  defences.  Explosive  machines,  on  the 
Jacobi  principle,  were  also  employed. 

The  Kussian  engineers  appeared  to  have  relied  upon  the  artillery  fire  of  the  collateral  works 
for  flanking  defences  and  acting  upon  the  ground  in  front  of  any  particular  work,  rather  than 
upon  the  immediate  flanking  arrangements  of  the  special  work  in  question.  The  entire  absence 
of  blinded  batteries  is  somewhat  remarkable.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  such  batteries  at 
the  salients  of  the  principal  works  would  have  exercised  a  very  great  influence. 

The  Mamelon  Vert  was  situated  on  the  summit  of  a  mound  of  no  considerable  elevation  above 
the  general  surface  of  the  ridge  ;  the  eastern  slope  was  gentle,  while  it  was  more  abrupt  on  the 
other  sides,  particularly  towards  the  west.     It  was  difiicult  or  impossible  to  determine  the 


16  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

original  form  of  the  work.  It  appeared  to  have  been  a  redan,  with  a  pan-coupe,  the  right  face 
flanked  by  the  Malakoif,  the  left  by  the  Little  Redan,  the  pan-coupe  by  the  Sapoune  redoubts ; 
yet  it  is  not  improbable  that  it  was  a  lunette.  The  Sapoune  redoubts  appear  to  have  been 
lunettes,  with  a  command  of  7',  the  ditch  5'  deep  and  12'  wide,  a  glacis  2'  in  height.  Even  in 
these  detached  works  excellent  bomb  proofs  were  provided. 

The  Russian  counter-approaches  generally  consisted  of  fleches,  united  by  a  simple  trench. 

The  famous  rifle  jiits  varied  much  in  cliaracter.  Sometimes  they  consisted  merely  of  a  little 
pile  of  stones,  or  two  gabions,  placed  on  their  sides,  forming  an  angle  merely  sufficient  to  shelter 
one  man ;  at  other  times,  of  a  hole  in  the  ground  for  four  or  five  men  ;  again,  of  semicircles  or 
fleches  capable  of  holding  from  ten  to  forty  men. 

In  front  of  the  Volhynian  redoubt  there  were  two  lines  of  these  semicircular  shelters,  uniting 
at  an  acute  angle  about  two  hundred  and  fifty  yards  in  advance  of  the  work,  and  extending 
across  the  ridge.  In  advance  of  the  angle  were  two  rows  of  small  ones  for  one  or  two  men  each. 
These  particular  semicircles  were  eight  paces  wide  at  the  gorge,  had  a  parapet  4'  high,  the 
interior  being  excavated.  In  many  cases  these  pits  were  thrown  much  further  in  advance,  and 
in  very  exposed  situations.  They  contributed  very  materially  towards  impeding  the  progress 
of  the  approaches. 

From  the  preceding  hasty  and  imperfect  account  of  the  defences  of  Sebastopol,  it  will  appear 
how  little  foundation  there  was  for  the  generally  received  accounts  of  the  stupendous  dimensions 
of  the  works,  and  of  new  systems  of  fortifications  brought  into  play.  The  plain  truth  is  that 
these  defences  were  simple  temporary  fortifications  of  rather  greater  dimensions  than  usual,  and 
that  not  a  single  new  principle  of  engineering  was  there  developed.  It  is  true  that  there  were 
several  novel  minor  details,  such  as  the  rope  mantelets,  the  use  of  the  iron  tanks,  &c.;  but  the 
whole  merit  consisted  in  the  admirable  adaptation  of  well  known  principles  to  the  peculiar 
locality  and  circumstances  of  the  case.  Neither  can  it  be  asserted  that  the  plans  of  the  various 
works  were  perfect.  On  the  contrary,  there  is  no  impropriety  in  believing  tliat,  if  Todtleben 
were  called  xipon  to  do  the  same  work  over  again,  he  would  probably  introduce  better  close 
flanking  arrangements. 

These  remarks  are  not  intended  to,  nor  can  they,  detract  from  the  reputation  of  the  Russian 
engineer.  His  labors  and  their  results  will  be  handed  down  in  history  as  the  most  triumphant 
and  enduring  monument  of  the  value  of  fortifications,  and  his  name  must  ever  be  placed  in  the 
first  rank  of  military  engineers.  But  in  our  admiration  of  the  talent  and  energy  of  the  engi- 
neer, it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  inert  masses  which  he  raised  would  have  been  useless 
without  the  skilful  artillery  and  heroic  infantry  who  defended  them.  Much  stronger  places 
than  Sebastopol  have  often  fallen  under  far  less  obstinate  and  well  combined  attacks  than  that 
to  which  it  was  subjected.  There  can  be  no  danger  in  expressing  the  conviction  that  the  siege 
of  Sebastopol  called  forth  the  most  magnificent  defence  of  fortifications  that  has  ever  yet 

occurred. 

This  would  seem  to  be  the  proper  place  to  notice  a  popular  fallacy  which,  for  a  time  at  least, 
gained  extensive  credence.  It  was,  that  the  siege  of  Sebastopol  proved  the  superiority  of  tempo- 
rary (earthen)  fortifications  over  those  of  a  permanent  nature.  It  is  easy  to  show  that  it  proved 
nothing  of  the  kind,  but  that  it  only  proved  that  temporary  works  in  the  hands  of  a  brave  and 
skilful  garrison  are  susceptible  of  a  longer  defence  than  was  generally  supposed.  They  were 
attacked  as  field  works  never  were  before,  and  were  defended  as  field  works  never  had  been 
defended.  The  main  difterence  between  properly  constructed  permanent  fortifications  (intended 
to  resist  a  siege)  and  temporary  works  is,  that  the  latter  seldom  present  an  insuperable  obstacle 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.   MTLELLAN.  17 

against  assault,  "while  tlie  former  always  do.  In  addition,  permanent  works  have  a  hetter 
command  over  the  adjacent  country,  and  are  more  carefully  and  perfectly  planned.  The 
masonry  walls,  which  render  an  assault  impossihle,  cannot  he  seen  from  the  distance,  and  can 
he  destroyed  onlj'  hy  estahlishing  hatteries  on  the  crest  of  the  glacis  or  the  edge  of  the  ditch; 
the  earthen  jmraj^ets  alone  being  visible  beyond  that  point,  they  may,  until  the  besiegers 
arrive  there,  be  regarded  in  the  same  light  as  field  works,  with  the  difference  that  the  garrison 
are  not  harassed  hy  the  necessity  of  being  constantly  prepared  to  repel  an  assault.  Now,  in  the 
siege  of  Sebastopol,  the  trenches  of  the  besiegers  never  reached  the  edge  of  the  ditch  ;  so  that, 
had  the  fortification  been  a  permanent  one,  the  most  difficult,  slow,  and  dangerous  part  of  the 
siege  remained  to  be  undertaken,  viz:  the  crowning  of  the  covered  way,  the  establishment  of  the 
breach  batteries,  the  descent  and  passage  of  the  ditch,  and  the  assault  of  the  breach  ;  in  other 
words,  at  the  moment  when  the  weakness  of  the  temporary  works  became  apparent  and  fatal, 
the  true  strength  of  the  permanent  defences  would  have  commenced  coming  into  play. 

Assuming  the  progress  of  the  attack  to  have  been  as  rapid  as  it  was  rmder  existing  circum- 
stances, the  besiegers,  on  the  8th  of  September,  would  not  yet  have  been  in  a  condition  to  crown 
the  covered  way,  the  siege  would  certainly  have  extended  into  the  winter  ;  and  it  may  even  be 
doubted  whether  the  place  would  eventually  have  fallen,  imtil  the  allies  were  in  sufficient  force 
to  invest  the  north  as  well  as  the  south  side. 

From  the  fleet  and  the  naval  arsenals  were  undoubtedly  derived  the  means  of  arming  and  equip- 
ping the  land  defences  ;  on  many  occasions  the  fire  of  the  vessels  up  the  ravines,  as  well  as  their 
vertical  fire,  was  probably  attended  with  effect,  yet  I  can  see  no  reason  to  coincide  in  the  opinion  that 
the  presence  of  the  fleet  justified  the  allies  in  failing  to  advance  upon  the  town  immediately  after 
their  arrival  in  front  of  it.  No  doubt  the  fire  of  the  vessels  would  have  rendered  it  impossihle 
for  the  allies  to  have  occupied  immediately  the  lower  parts  of  the  town  and  the  shores  of  the 
harbor,  but  the  nature  of  the  ground  was  such  that  they  could  have  opposed  no  serious  resistance 
to  the  allied  occupation  of  the  positions  subsequently  occupied  by  the  Malakofi",  Eedan,  and  Flag- 
staff Bastion.  Once  holding  these  points,  it  would  have  been  easy  for  the  allies  to  establish 
batteries  commanding  at  once  the  fleet  and  the  town  ;  defence  would  have  been  impossible,  and 
the  opening  of  their  fire  must  liave  been  the  signal  alike  for  the  destruction  of  the  fleet  and  the 
evacuation  of  the  south  side. 

We  will  now  pass  to  the  woi'ks  of  attack. 

So  great  was  their  extent,  some  6  miles  from  the  extreme  right  to  the  furthest  left,  with  a 
development  that  has  been  stated,  probably  without  exaggeration,  to  exceed  40  miles,  and  so 
broken  was  the  ground  over  whicli  they  stretched,  that  it  is  impossible  to  give  in  a  report  like 
this  anything  approaching  to  a  definite  idea  of  their  plan.  An  endeavor  will  be  made  merely  to 
point  out  how  far  the  besiegers  departed  from,  or  conformed  to,  their  established  systems  for 
works  of  this  nature. 

As  the  selection  of  the  points  of  attack,  and  the  positions  to  he  occupied  to  cover  the  sieo-e 
must  first  have  engaged  the  attention  of  the  allied  commanders,  they  will  naturally  be  the  first 
objects  for  our  consideration. 

In  the  determination  of  the  position  for  covering  the  siege  there  were  two  things  to  be  con- 
sidered :  1st,  the  power  of  resisting  the  efforts  of  a  relieving  army  ;  2d,  the  facility  of  brincino- 
up  to  the  front  the  various  supplies  required  in  the  operations. 

The  strength  of  the  position  afforded  by  the  plateau  of  the  Chersonese  has  already  been 
referred  to  ;  with  the  small  force  at  first  present  on  the  part  of  the  allies,  it  is  certain  that  their 
3  © 


18  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

position  -would  have  teen  much  stronger  and  more  secure  had  they  confined  themselves  to  the 
occupation  of  the  plateau,  holding  the  valleys  to  the  east  only  hy  detachments  to  observe  the 
enemy.  The  English,  supposing  tliat  their  position  and  point  of  attack  remained  as  it  was, 
would  have  had  a  somewhat  greater  distance  to  pass  over  in  the  transportation  of  their  supplies ; 
hut  hy  abandoning  Balaklava  for  Kazatch  they  would  have  obtained  a  much  more  extensive  and 
convenient  harbor,  and  the  united  efforts  of  the  two  armies  would  have  enabled  them  to  con- 
struct, in  ample  season,  a  good  road  for  the  passage  of  their  trains.  Had  the  siege  been  under- 
taken by  a  French  army  alone,  it  can  scarcely  be  doubted  that  Kamiesch  and  Kazatch  would 
have  been  used  to  the  exclusion  of  Balaklava ;  at  all  events,  Balaklava  would  have  been  employed 
only  as  a  temporary  depot,  when  the  roads  were  good  and  the  enemy  at  a  distance  ;  here  the 
insuperable  evils  of  a  divided  command  probably  intervened.  In  this  case  the  barren  and 
disastrous  day  of  Balaklava  would  never  have  occurred ;  the  force  and  labor  emi^loyed  in  protect- 
ing Balaklava  would  have  placed  the  position  of  Inkermann  in  such  a  state  of  defence  as  either  to 
have  deterred  the  Russians  from  engaging  in  the  battle  or  to  have  secured  the  victory  to  the 
allies  without  the  frightful  cost  and  great  uncertainty  attending  that  eventful  contest. 

In  the  actual  condition  of  affairs,  if  either  on  the  25th  October  or  the  5th  November  the 
Russians  had  succeeded  in  carrying  Balaklava,  the  English  army  would  have  been  reduced  to 
the  most  desperate  extremity  by  the  total  loss  of  all  its  supplies  and  means  of  transportation. 
It  is  possible  that  the  result  would  have  been  the  total  abandonment  of  the  siege,  and  a  retreat 
upon  Kamiesch,  to  embark  there  as  rapidly  as  transportation  could  be  obtained. 

To  anticipate  objections,  it  may  be  stated  that,  during  the  winter  of  1854  and  1855,  no  sup- 
plies were  drawn  from  the  country  beyond  Balaklava,  and  that  the  only  advantages  derived 
from  its  occupation  were  :  inextricable  confusion  in  unloading  vessels  and  despatching  supplies, 
arising  I'rom  the  want  of  size  of  the  harbor  and  the  steepness  of  its  banks  ;  wretched  roads  over 
the  muddy  soil ;  a  steep  ascent  to  be  overcome  in  reaching  the  plateau  ;  finally,  the  constant 
and  lively  anticipation  of  being  entirely  deprived  of  these  uncertain  advantages  upon  the  first 
resolute  attack  by  the  enemy  in  force.  The  most  probable  reasons  for  the  selection  of  Balaklava 
as  the  English  depot  are,  that  it  was  somewhat  nearer  the  position  on  the  plateau ;  that  it  was 
not  taken  by  the  French  ;  and  that  since  it  existed,  it  would  be  a  pity  that  it  should  remain 
idle. 

We  may  now  turn  to  the  point  of  attack. 

The  facts  of  the  case  are  well  known.  For  many  months  the  operations  of  the  French  were 
directed  entirely  against  the  Flag-staff  and  Central  Bastions,  the  English  being  engaged  in 
what  may  be  termed  two  false  attacks  against  the  Eedan. 

It  was  not  until  the  spring  of  1855  that  the  efforts  of  the  French  were  at  last  turned  towards 
securing  possession  of  the  Malakoff. 

To  ap2>reciate  the  merits  of  this  question,  it  is  necessary  again  to  refer  to  the  map  to  bear  in 
mind  that  the  heights  overlooking  the  Karabelnaia  were  considerably  more  elevated  than  those 
bordering  upon  the  main  city,  and  that  the  docks  and  other  naval,  as  well  as  military  establish- 
ments, were  all  located  in  the  Karabelnaia  suburb. 

Were  the  Flag-staff  Bastion  carried,  but  a  single  step  was  gained ;  beyond  it  existed  at  least 
two  lines  of  defence,  both  difficult  to  carry,  before  even  the  main  city  was  reached.  While 
these  new  approaches  were  being  constructed,  it  would  have  been  a  simple  matter  for  the 
Russians  to  border  the  commanding  heights  of  the  Karabelnaia  with  new  batteries  directed 
against  the  town  ;  the  fire  from  these,  together  with  that  from  the  works  on  the  north  side, 
would  have  rendered  the  victors  very  uncomfortable  and  insecure  in  their  barren  conquest ;  and 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  irCLELLAN.  19 

the  fleet  could  have  retired  to  the  vicinity  of  the  Careening  bay,  where  it,  as  well  as  the  docks, 
would  have  been  secure  against  direct  injury. 

By  taking  the  MalakofF,  the  fleet  and  the  establishments  of  the  Eussians  lay  exposed  at  the 
feet  of  the  allies  ;  its  commanding  position  and  jjroximity  to  the  main  harbor  rendered  further 
resistance  useless  when  once  occupied  by  them.  Considerations  relating  to  the  facility  of  bring- 
ing up  supplies  and  covering  their  depot  very  probably  determined  the  direction  of  the  early 
French  attacks,  but  by  no  means  diminish  the  credit  due  to  General  Neil,  who  first  turned  the 
efforts  of  his  countrymen  in  the  right  direction. 

If  a  deficiency  in  men  and  means  is  assigned  as  a  reason  for  the  early  operations  of  the  allies, 
it  is  but  another  proof  that,  in  undertaking  the  affair,  they  neglected  one  of  the  clearest  rules 
of  war,  that  is,  to  undertake  no  important  operation  without  full  and  reliable  information  as  to 
the  obstacles  to  be  overcome,  and  the  means  of  resistance  in  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

Enough  has  already  been  said  to  justify  the  belief  that  a  dilemma,  difficult  of  solution,  might 
be  presented  for  the  consideration  of  the  allies :  on  the  one  hand,  the  comparatively  small  scale 
upon  which  the  original  expedition  was  organized  ;  the  intimation  contained  in  some  of  the 
French  instructions  that  "half  a  siege  train"  would  suffice  to  capture  Sebastopol,  and  the  absence 
of  all  ijreparations  for  passing  the  winter  in  the  Crimea,  would  indicate  that  the  allied  govern- 
ments were  well  aware  of  the  real  weakness  of  Sebastojjol  at  that  time,  and  intended  that  it 
should  be  carried  by  a  "coui)  de  vigeur ;"  on  the  other  hand,  from  the  moment  the  armies 
landed,  every  movement  was  conducted  in  a  manner  indicating  that  the  generals  were  under 
the  impression  that  formidable  defences  were  in  front  of  them,  and  that  nothing  serious  could 
be  attempted  until  further  supplies  and  reinforcements  were  received. 

In  regard  to  the  detailed  execution  of  the  French  attacks,  little  or  nothing  novel  is  to  be 
observed.  Even  when  coolly  examining  the  direction  of  tVieir  trenches,  after  the  close  of  the 
siege,  it  was  very  rare  that  a  faulty  direction  could  be  detected  ;  they  always  afforded  excellent 
cover,  and  were  well  defiladed ;  in  some  cases  the  excavation  of  the  double  direct  sap  was  carried 
to  the  depth  of  G^'  in  the  solid  rock. 

The  execution  of  many  of  the  saps  and  batteries  was  worthy  of  a  school  of  practice.  In  the 
parallels,  bomb  proofs  were  provided  as  temporary  hosjiitals,  offices  for  the  generals  on  duty,  &c. 
They  did  not  use  the  sapper  armor.  The  use  of  the  sap  roller  was  often  attempted,  but  it  could 
be  emj)loyed  only  during  the  latter  part  of  the  attack  upon  the  Malakoff,  when  the  fire  of  the 
Kussian  artillery  was  nearly  extinguished  by  the  mortars  ;  before  that,  as  soon  as  a  sap  roller 
was  placed  in  position  some  30  guns  would  be  bi'ought  to  bear  upon  it,  the  result  being  its 
immediate  destruction. 

It  may  justly  be  said  of  the  French  approaches,  that  they  admirably  carried  into  practice 
their  system  of  sajjping.  The  technical  skill  and  patient  courage  evinced  by  their  officers  and 
men  in  pushing  forward  such  excellent  approaches,  under  a  most  deadly  fire,  is  worthy  of  all 
commendation,  .and  is  such  as_  might  have  been  expected  from  the  antecedents  of  their  corps  of 
engineers.  With  regard  to  the  English  the  case  was  different ;  it  seemed  as  if  they  systemati- 
cally abandoned  the  excellent  system  taught  and  perfected  with  so  much  care  at  Chatham. 

Whenever  the  ground  was  difficult  their  trenches  generally  ceased  to  aftbrd  shelter ;  a  shallow 
excavation  in  the  rock,  and  a  few  stones  thrown  up  in  front,  appeared  to  be  all  that  was  consid- 
ered necessary  in  such  cases.  They  were  often  faulty  in  direction  as  well  as  in  profile,  being 
not  unfrequently  badly  defiladed,  or  not  gaining  ground  enough,  and  entirely  too  cramped;  nor 
were  they  pushed  as  close  to  the  Eedan  as  they  ought  to  have  been  before  giving  the  assault. 

In  too  many  cases  the  expression  "  tatonnement "  of  the  French  would  seem  to  convey  the  be.st 


20  JIILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

idea  of  their  oj^erations.  Their  hatterics,  however,  were  very  well  constructed.  Their  maga- 
zines, platforms,  &c.,  were  usually  similar  to  those  adopted  at  Chatham,  although  unnecessary 
deviations  were  sometimes  complained  of. 

They  employed  neither  armor  nor  the  full  sap;  sometimes  the  half-full,  hut  generally  the 
flying  sap  were  employed.  The  excellent  English  magazines  were  generally  covered  with  7"  or 
8"  timher,  2  layers  of  fascines,  2  layers  of  sand  bags,  and  5'  or  6'  of  earth.  During  the  siege 
three  were  exploded  hy  13"  shells,  hut  it  was  supposed  that  in  two  of  these  cases  the  shells 
hurst  in  the  passage,  as  similar  magazines  resisted  13"  shells  falling  on  the  roof;  in  the  third 
case,  the  magazine  was  first  struck  fairly  on  the  roof  hy  a  13"  shell,  which  laid  it  hare  to  the 
sand  hags ;  the  corporal  of  sappers  in  charge,  being  intoxicated,  neglected  to  repair  the  damage, 
when  another  13"  shell  struck  in  the  same  place  and  exploded  the  magazine. 

A  very  good  gabion  was  made,  hy  the  English,  of  the  iron  hoops  of  bales  of  hay,  casks,  &c. 
They  were  3'  high  and  2'  in  diameter,  having  11  stakes  of  sawed  wood.  The  iron  hoops  were 
wattled  as  the  ordinary  withes,  and  were  hound  by  iron  straps  running  the  whole  length  of  the 
gabion.  These  were  much  employed  in  revetting  the  cheeks  of  embrasures,  thus  avoiding  the 
use  of  raw  hides.  The  first  pair  of  gabions,  at  the  throat,  should  not  be  of  iron,  since  it  was 
found  that  shot  would  often  tear  off  pieces  of  the  straps,  which  caused  bad  wounds. 

Gabions  were  also  made  of  sj^lit  hoops. 

The  fascines  were  bound  with  iron  straps,  twisted  hy  pincers,  in  addition  to  the  ordinary 
withes.     The  dimensions  of  their  materials  varied  much  in  size,  being  made  by  diflerent  parties. 

Sand  bags  were  very  much  employed  in  revetting  batteries,  traverses,  &c. 

Latrines  were  provided  at  the  extremities  of  parallels  and  boyaux,  and  cleansed  with  lime 
every  day. 

Water  tanks  and  reservoirs  were  provided  in  the  parallels,  and  filled  every  morning  and 
evening  by  means  of  pack  animals. 

During  the  siege  the  English  working  jDarties  and  guards  of  the  trenches  generally  paraded 
at  6i  p.  m.,  and  moved  off  after  dark,  often  suffering  severely  before  reaching  the  trenches. 
The  guards  of  the  trenches  went  on  duty  in  their  red  coats  and  forage  caps,  without  knapsacks ; 
working  parties  in  working  dress,  and  armed;  muskets  on  the  reverse  of  the  trench.  Generally 
double  sentinels  were  posted,  on  their  bellies,  about  50  yards  in  advance  of  the  trench. 

Materials,  guns,  ammunition,  &c.,  were  carried  up  at  night,  "over  the  open." 

The  result  of  the  operations  of  this  long  and  eventful  siege  was  that  on  the  8tli  of  September, 
1855,  the  French  had,  at  a  great  cost  of  life  and  labor,  pushed  their  approaches  to  the  distance 
of  32  paces  from  the  counterscarp  of  the  Malakofi",  and  not  quite  so  near  the  other  works.  The 
English,  meanwhile,  had  scarcely  reached  within  225  yards  of  the  ditch  of  the  Kedan. 

On  that  day  the  assault  was  made  at  noon  upon  at  least  six  points. 

A  few  minutes  later  than  the  assault  upon  the  Malakoff  the  English  attacked  the  Eedan. 
"The  Russians  being  now  upon  the  alert,  they  did  not  pass  over  the  open  space  before  them 
without  loss ;  but  the  mass  succeeded  in  crossing  the  ditch  and  gaining  the  salient  of  the  work. 
Finding  themselves  entirely  unsupported  they  at  once  took  shelter  behind  the  traverses,  whence 
the  example  and  efforts  of  their  officers  did  not  avail  to  draw  them,  in  order  to  occupy  the  work 
closing  the  gorge.  Having  in  vain  used  every  effort,  having  despatched  every  officer  of  his  staff 
to  the  rear  urging  that  supports  should  be  at  once  sent  up,  and  seeing  that  the  Russians  were 
now  beginning  to  assemble  in  force,  the  commander  of  the  English  storming  jsarty  reluctantly 
determined  to  proceed  himself  to  obtain  reinforcements.  Scarcely  had  he  reached  the  trenches, 
and  at  last  obtained  authority  to  move  up  the  required  succor,  when  upon  turning  to  lead  them 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   M'CLELLAN.  21 

forward,  lie  saw  the  party  he  had  left  in  the  work  rapidly  and  hopelessly  driven  out  at  the  point 
of  the  bayonet.  No  further  effort  was  made  to  carry  the  work.  It  would,  in  all  j^robahility, 
have  failed,  and  would  only  have  caused  a  useless  sacrifice  of  men. 

The  failure  of  the  English  assault  may  he  attributed  partly  to  the  fact  that  their  advanced 
trenches  were  too  small  to  accommodate  the  requisite  force  without  confusion,  in  part  to  their 
not  being  pushed  sufficiently  near  the  Kedan,  but  chiefly  to  that  total  absence  of  conduct  and 
skill  in  the  arrangements  for  the  assault  which  left  the  storming  party  entirely  without 
support.  Had  it  been  followed  at  once  by  strong  reinforcements,  it  is  almost  certain  that  the 
English  would  have  retained  possession  of  the  work. 

The  two  French  attacks  on  the  west  of  the  central  ravine  were  probably  intended  only  as 
feints ;  at  all  events,  the  parties  engaged  were  soon  driven  back  to  their  trenches  with  considerable 
loss,  and  effected  nothing.  Their  attempts  upon  the  Little  Eedan,  and  the  works  connecting  it 
with  the  Malakoff,  met  with  even  less  success  than  the  English  assault.  The  Eussians  repulsed 
the  French  with  great  loss,  meeting  with  the  bayonet  the  more  adventurous  men  who  reached  the 
parapet.  Thus,  in  five  points  out  of  six  the  defenders  were  fully  victorious,  but,  unfortunately 
for  them,  the  sixth  was  the  decisive  point. 

In  their  admirable  arrangements  for  the  attack  of  the  Malakoff,  the  French  counted  on  two 
things  for  succees :  first,  they  had  ascertained  that  the  Eussians  were  in  the  habit  of  relieving 
the  guard  of  the  Malakoff  at  noon,  and  that  a  great  part  of  the  old  guard  marched  out  before 
the  new  one  arrived,  in  order  to  avoid  the  loss  which  would  arise  from  crowding  the  work  with 
men  ;  in  the  second  place,  it  was  determined  to  keep  up  a  most  violent  vertical  fire  until  the 
very  moment  of  the  assault,  thus  driving  the  Eussians  into  the  bomb  proofs,  and  enabling  the 
storming  party  to  enter  the  work  with  but  little  oj^jjosition.  The  hour  of  noon  was  therefore 
selected  for  the  assault,  and  the  strong  columns  intended  for  the  work  were  at  an  early  hour 
assembled  in  the  advanced  trenches,  all  in  admirable  order,  and  furnished  with  precise 
instructions. 

The  mortars  maintained  an  unremitting  fire  until  the  moment  appointed.  The  very  instant 
the  last  volley  was  discharged  the  storming  })arty  of  Zouaves  rushed  over  the  thirty  paces  before 
them,  and  were  in  the  work  before  the  astonished  Eussians  knew  what  had  happened.  It  was 
stated  that  this  party  lost  but  eleven  men  in  entering  the  work.  Other  troops  advanced  rapidly 
to  the  support  of  the  storming  party,  a  bridge  was  formed  by  rolling  up  five  ladders  with 
planks  lashed  to  them,  a  communication  was  at  once  commenced  between  the  advanced  trench 
and  the  bridge,  brigade  after  brigade  passed  over,  the  redoubt  was  at  once  occupied  by  the 
storming  party,  and  thus  the  Malakofi",  and  with  it  Sebastopol,  was  won.  The  few  Eussians 
remaining  in  the  work  made  a  desperate  resistance.  Many  gallant  attempts  were  made  by 
Eussian  columns  to  ascend  the  steep  slope  in  rear  and  regain  the  lost  work ;  but  the  road  was 
narrow,  difficult,  and  obstructed ;  the  position  strong,  and  the  French  in  force.  All  their 
furious  efforts  were  in  vain,  and  the  Malakofl"  remained  in  the  possession  of  those  who  had  so 
gallantly  and  skilfully  won  it.  Witli  regard  to  the  final  retreat  to  the  north  side,  it  can  only 
be  said  that  a  personal  examination  of  the  locality  merely  confirms  its  necessity,  and  the 
impression  so  generally  entertained  that  it  was  the  finest  operation  of  the  war  ;  so  admirably 
was  it  carried  out  that  not  a  straggler  remained  behind  ;  a  few  men  so  severely  wounded  as  to 
be  unfit  for  rough  and  hurried  transportation  were  the  sole  ghastly  human  trophies  that 
remained  to  the  allies. 

The  retreat,  being  a  more  difficult  operation  than  the  assault,  may  be  worthy  of  higher  admi- 
ration ;  but  the  Eussian  retreat  to  the  north  side  and  the  French  assault  upon  the  Malakoff 


22  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

must  eacli  be  regarded  as  a  masterpiece  of  its  kind,  deserving  the  closest  study.  It  is  difficult 
to  imagine  what  point  in  eitlier  can  be  criticized,  for  both  evinced  consummate  skill,  discipline, 
coolness,  and  courage.  With  regard  to  the  artillery,  I  would  merely  remark  tliat  the  Russian 
guns  were  not  of  unusual  calibre,  consisting  chiefly  of  24,  32,  and  42-pounders;  and  that  the 
termination  of  the  siege  was  mainly  due  to  the  extensive  use  of  mortars  finally  resorted  to  by 
the  allies.  If  they  had  been  emploj^ed  in  the  beginning  as  the  main  reliance,  the  siege  would 
have  been  of  shorter  duration. 

The  causes  of  the  unusual  duration  of  this  siege  naturally  resolve  themselves  into  three 
classes :  the  skilful  disposition  of  the  Russians,  tlie  faults  of  the  allies,  and  natural  causes 
beyond  the  control  of  either  party.  Among  the  latter  may  be  mentioned  the  natural  strength 
of  the  position  and  the  severity  of  the  winter.  In  the  first  class,  there  may  be  alluded  to  :  the 
skill  with  which  the  Russian  engineers  availed  themselves  of  the  nature  of  the  ground  ;  the 
moral  courage  which  induced  them  to  undertake  the  defence  of  an  open  town  with  a  weak 
garrison  ;  the  constant  use  they  made  of  sorties,  among  which  may  properly  be  classed  the 
battles  of  Balaklava,  Inkermann,  and  the  Tchernaya  ;  the  ready  ingenuity  with  which  they 
availed  themselves  of  the  resources  derived  from  the  fleet ;  the  fine  practice  of  their  artillery ; 
their  just  appreciation  of  the  true  use  of  field  works,  and  the  admirable  courage  they  always 
evinced  in  standing  to  their  works  to  repel  assaults  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet ;  the  employment 
of  rifle  pits  on  an  extensive  scale ;  finally,  the  constant  reinforcements  which  they  soon  com- 
menced receiving,  and  which  enabled  them  to  fill  the  gaps  made  in  their  ranks  by  disease  and 
the  projectiles  of  the  allies. 

The  evidences  of  skill  on  the  part  of  the  allies,  as  well  as  the  apparent  faults  on  all  sides, 
having  been  already  alluded  to,  it  is  believed  that  the  means  have  been  furnished  to  enable  any 
one  to  draw  his  own  conclusions  as  to  the  history  of  this  memorable  passage  of  arms. 

At  different  times  during  the  siege  a  vast  amount  of  labor  was  bestowed  upon  field  works  in 
front  of  Kamiesch  and  Balaklava,  near  the  Inkermann,  on  the  northern  and  eastern  borders  of 
the  plateau,  and  along  the  Tchernaya  ;  these  works  varied  much  in  strength  and  character, 
sometimes  consisting  of  continuous  lines,  again  of  detached  redoubts. 

The  redoubts  generally  had  ditches  about  10'  wide  and  6'  deep.  In  many  cases  these  works 
were  only  undertaken  when  a  narrow  escape  from  some  imminent  danger  had  demonstrated  their 
necessity. 

The  line  in  front  of  Kamiesch  consisted  of  8  pentagonal  redoubts,  connected  by  an  infantry 
parapet ;  it  ran  from  Streletzka  bay  nearly  south  to  the  sea,  passing  at  a  little  more  than  a  mile 
from  the  harbor  of  Kamiesch ;  it  was  never  completely  finished. 

The  position  of  the  Russians,  after  the  evacuation  of  the  south  side,  was  one  of  exceeding 
strength ;  their  establishments  were  covered  by  Fort  Sivernaia  (a  permanent  work)  and  long 
lines  of  strong  earthen  batteries,  which  would  have  required  a  siege  to  reduce  them. 

The  steep  declivity  of  Mackenzie's  heights,  accessible  at  but  a  few  j^oints,  all  of  which  were 
strongly  guarded,  rendered  the  approach  from  the  south  a  matter  of  extreme  difficulty;  it  would 
appear  that  the  allies  were  wise  in  refusing  to  attempt  to  force  the  passage,  iinless  the  efi'ort  had 
been  made  immediately  after  the  fall  of  the  Malakoft',  before  the  Russians  recovered  from  the  shock. 

Efforts  were  made  to  turn  the  extreme  Russian  left  by  the  valley  of  Baidar,  but  they  only 
served  to  ascertain  the  hopelessness  of  the  undertaking. 

Tlie  detached  operations  against  Kinburn,  Eupatoria,  Kertch,  the  sea  of  AzofP,  &c. ,  cannot  be 
regarded  as  having  produced  any  effect  upon  the  general  result  of  the  war  ;  they  served  chiefly 


REPOET   OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN.  23 

to  weaken  the  main  body  of  the  allies,  to  annoy  and  exasiDcrate  the  Russians,  to  occupy  the 
attention  of  some  of  tlieii'  irregular  troops,  and  to  destroy  more  private  than  public  property. 

The  most  accurate  topographical  map  of  the  ground  around  Sebastopol,  tliat  I  have  seen,  is 
one  published  at  the  hydrographic  office  of  the  admiralty,  February  2,  1856,  and  entitled 
"Sebastopol:  showing  the  Russian  defence  works  and  the  approaches  of  the  allied  armies;  by 
Lieutenant  George  R.  Wilkinson,  R.  N.,  under  the  direction  oT  Captain  T.  Spratt,  R.  N.  C.  B., 
September  1,  1855." 

The  permanent  defences  of  the  harbor  of  Sebastopol  against  an  attack  by  water,  although 
inferior  in  material  and  the  details  of  construction  to  our  own  most  recent  works,  proved  fully 
equal  to  the  purpose  for  which  they  were  intended.  Indeed,  the  occurrences  on  the  Pacific,  the 
Baltic,  and  the  Black  sea,  all  seem  to  establish,  beyond  controversy,  the  soundness  of  the  view 
so  long  entertained  by  all  intelligent  military  men,  that  well  constructed  fortifications  must 
always  jirove  more  than  a  match  for  the  strongest  fleets. 

It  is  believed  that  a  calm  consideration  of  the  events  so  hastily  and  imperfectly  narrated  in 
the  preceding  pages  must  lead  all  unprejudiced  persons  among  our  countrymen  to  a  firm  con- 
viction on  two  vital  points : 

1st.  That  our  system  of  permanent  coast  defences  is  a  wise  and  proper  one,  which  ought  to  be 
comi^leted  and  armed  with  the  least  possible  delay. 

2d.  That  mere  individual  courage  cannot  suffice  to  overcome  the  forces  that  would  be  brought 
against  us,  were  we  involved  in  an  European  war,  but  that  it  must  be  rendered  manageable  by 
discipline,  and  directed  by  that  consummate  and  mechanical  military  skill  which  can  only  be 
acquired  by  a  course  of  education,  instituted  for  the  special  purpose,  and  by  long  habit. 

In  the  day  of  sailing  vessels  the  successful  siege  of  Sebastopol  would  have  been  impossible. 
It  is  evident  that  the  Russians  did  not  appreciate  the  advantages  afforded  by  steamers,  and  were 
unjirepared  to  sustain  a  siege. 

This  same  power  of  steam  would  enable  European  nations  to  disembark  upon  our  shores  even 
a  larger  force  than  that  which  finally  encamped  around  Sebastopol.  To  resist  such  an  attack, 
should  it  ever  be  made,  our  cities  and  harbors  must  be  fortified,  and  those  fortifications  must  be 
provided  with  guns,  ammunition,  and  instructed  artillerists.  To  repel  the  advance  of  such  an 
army  into  the  interior,  it  is  not  enough  to  trust  to  the  number  of  brave  but  undisciplined  men 
that  we  can  bring  to  bear  against  it. 

An  invading  army  of  15,000  or  20,000  men  could  easily  be  crushed  by  the  unremitting 
attacks  of  superior  numbers  ;  but  when  it  comes  to  the  case  of  more  than  100,000  disciplined 
veterans,  the  very  multitude  brought  to  bear  against  them  works  its  own  destruction;  because, 
if  without  discipline  and  instruction,  they  cannot  be  handled,  and  are  in  their  own  way.  We 
cannot  afibrd  a  Moscow  campaign. 

Our  regular  army  never  can,  and,  perhaps,  never  ought  to  be  large  enough  to  provide  for  all 
the  contingencies  that  may  arise,  but  it  should  be  as  large  as  its  ordinary  avocations  in  the  defence 
of  the  frontier  will  justify;  the  number  of  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  should  be 
unusually  large,  to  provide  for  a  sudden  increase;  and  the  greatest  possible  care  should  be 
bestowed  upon  the  instruction  of  the  special  arms  of  the  artillery  and  engineer  troops. 

The  militia  and  volunteer  system  should  be  placed  upon  some  tangible  and  eflective  basis ; 
instructors  furnished  them  from  the  regular  army,  and  all  possible  means  taken  to  sjjread  sound 
military  information  among  them. 

In  the  vicinity  of  our  seacoast  fortifications  it  would  be  well  to  provide  a  sufficient  number  of 
volunteer  companies  with  the  means  of  instruction  in  heavy  artillery ;  detailing  officers  of  the 


24  ,  MILITAKY  COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

regular  artillery  as  instructors,  who  sliould  at  the  same  time  he  in  charge  of,  and  responsible 
for,  the  guns  and  material. 

In  time  of  war,  or  when  war  is  imminent,  local  comj^anies  of  regular  artillery  might  easily 
he  enlisted  for  short  terms  of  service,  or  for  the  war,  in  the  seacoast  towns.  The  same  thing 
might  advantageously  he  carried  into  effect,  on  a  small  scale,  in  time  of  peace. 

GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  First  Cavalry, 
January  14,  1857. 


REPORTS 


EUROPEAN  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 


THE  KUSSIAN  ENGmEER  TEOOPS. 

As  has  been  stated  in  ;.  previous  report,  they  are  organized  in  battalions  of  four  companies 
each,  a  battalion  being  attached  to  each  army  corjjs.  Each  company  consists  of  1  first  captain, 
1  second  captain,  1  lieutenant,  1  second  lieutenant,  1  ensign,  20  sergeants,  6  musicians,  230 
corporals  and  privates.  There  are  three  classes  of  privates,  with  different  rates  of  pay.  No 
extra  pay  is  allowed  them  for  any  kind  of  work. 

Forty  men  in  each  company  carry  a  rifled  carbine,  the  rest  have  the  ordinary  infantry  musket ; 
all  carry  tools  of  some  kind.  The  general  equipment,  drill,  &c.,  is  as  for  the  infantry.  The 
drivers  are  not  detailed  from  the  companies,  but  are  a  distinct  set  of  men. 

The  officers  of  the  sappers  are  distinct  from  those  of  the  corps  of  engineers,  and  need  not 
have  passed  through  the  engineer  school,  but  may  enter  at  once  from  any  of  the  military  schools. 

The  engineer  troops  have  charge  of  the  bridge  train.  Their  general  duties  are  as  in  most 
other  services,  including  the  repairs  of  roads,  &c. 

The  use  of  armor  in  the  trenches  has  been  abandoned.  The  tools,  pontons,  wagons,  &c.,  are 
made  at  the  engineer  arsenals  of  construction.  In  a  siege  all  the  works,  including  the  batteries, 
are  made  by  the  sappers. 

COMPANY  AND  BATTALION  SCHOOLS. 

These  are  under  the  supervision  of  the  junior  field  officer  of  the  battalion  ;  the  method  of 
mutual  instruction  is  pursued,  and  text  books  are  provided. 

In  each  company  school  the  following  branches  are  taught:  1,  reading;  2,  writing;  3, 
religion,  i.  e.,  the  10  commandments,  the  creed,  and  the  principal  prayers  ;  4,  arithmetic,  i.  e., 
the  four  rules  for  single  and  denominate  numbers  ;  5,  reading  extracts  from  the  School  of  the 
Recruit,  with  questions  and  answers. 

In  the  lower  class  of  each  battalion  school  the  following  subjects  are  taught :  1,  in  religion, 
the  catechism,  short  extracts  from  the  scriptures  ;  2.  the  chief  rules  of  grammar  and  parsing  ;  3, 
in  arithmetic,  the  repetition  of  the  four  ground  rules,  fractions,  proportion,  raising  to  the  second 
power,  and  extracting  the  square  root ;  4,  in  geometry,  the  drawing,  nomenclature,  and  proper- 
ties of  figures  ;  5,  writing. 

In  the  higher  class  of  the  battalion  school  the  course  is  as  follows  :  1,  in  the  Russian  language, 
the  rest  of  the  grammar,  and  writing  from  dictation  ;  2,  in  arithmetic,  simple,  inverse,  and 
double  rule  of  three,  with  its  application  to  examples,  the  extraction  of  the  cube  root ;  3,  algebra, 
as  far  as  simple  equations;  4,  geometry,  with  the  calculation  of  plane  surfaces  ;  5,  writing  ;  6, 
the  drawing  of  the  diff"erent  objects  relating  to  the  duties  of  sappers,  miners,  and  pontoniers  ;  7, 
4   si 


20 


JULITAKY    COMMISSION    TO    KIJEOPE. 


ill  summer  the  pi'cactical  solution  of  simple  geometrical  problems  by  means  of  cords  aiul  stakes, 
execution  of  field  works,  sajjs,  mines,  &c.,  with  the  names  of  their  different  parts. 

MILITAEY  BRIDGES. 

The  Birago  equiiJage  has  been  partially  introduced,  especially  the  trestles,  but  the  Eussian 
engineers  seemed  to  prefer  their  own  system  of  canvas  pontons. 

I  was  informed  that  in  the  Hungarian  campaign  the  advantage  was  altogether  on  the  side  of 
the  canvas  pontons,  and  that,  as  a  general  thing,  their  bridge  was  thrown  and  the  troops 
crossing  before  the  Austrian  Birago  wagons  could  fairly  come  into  position  ;  it  was  also  stated 
that  when  the  roads  were  bad  the  Austrian  train  required  ten  horses  for  each  wagon. 

The  canvas  pontons  consist  of  two  wooden  side  frames,  connected  by  movable  transoms,  with 
a  painted  canvas  cover  stretched  over  the  bottom,  ends,  and  sides. 

The  annexed  figure  gives  the  shape  and  dimensions  of  one  of  the  side  frames,  which  are  made 
of  about  4"  scantling.  The  bottom  transoms  have  tenons  at  each  end,  which  fit  into  mortices  in 
the  bottom  sills  of  the  side  frames  ;  the  two  top  transoms  are  laid  on  the  top  pieces  of  the  side 
frames  about  2'  from  the  ends,  and  are  lashed  to  them.     The  boat  is  5' 4"  wide  from  out  to  out. 


The  canvass  cover  is  painted  black  on  both  sides;  it  is  10'  8"  wide,  30'  long  in  the  middle,  23' 
3"  long  along  the  edges.  This  cover  is  brought  over  the  ends  of  the  frame  and  lashed  to  the 
top  transoms  ;  it  is  secured  along  the  sides  to  the  top  string  pieces  of  the  side  frames  by  small 
nails  passing  through  eyelet  holes  along  the  edges  of  the  cloth. 

A  plank  is  laid  along  the  bottom  for  the  pontoniers  to  stand  on.  The  cables  are  attached  to 
the  top  transoms.  There  are  four  balks  for  each  boat,  each  balk  being  23'  4"  long,  5"  deep,  4" 
Avide;  the  side  rails  are  21'  long  and  of  3"  scantling  ;  4  chesses  are  12'  2"  long,  1.5"  thick,  and 
18.6"  wide,  the  rest  being  of  the  same  length  and  thickness,  but  only  9.3"  wide.  The  balks  of 
adjacent  bays  are  connected  by  iron  bolts  and  keys.  There  are  special  supports  for  the  hand 
ropes.  The  Birago  trestle  and  abutments  are  used  with  this  train.  The  wagon  is  very  simple  ; 
it  has  four  wheels,  a  flat  open  bottom,  with  a  stanchion  about  3'  high  at  each  angle.  In  loading 
the  four  broad  chesses  are  laid  on  edge  against  the  stanchions,  two  on  each  side,  thus  forming 
the  sides  of  the  wagon  ;  the  narrow  chesses  are  laid  on  the  bottom,  then  the  balks,  side  rails, 
ponton  frames,  oars,  &c.,  the  anchor  and  cable  on  top  of  all.  The  canvas  cover  is  rolled  on  a 
boat  hook  and  hung  to  the  stanchions  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the  wagon. 

To  pass  a  siege  train  over  this  bridge  the  boats  are  placed  8'  apart,  from  centre  to  centre,  and 
6  balks  are  used  instead  of  4.  In  other  cases  the  distance  between  the  centres  of  the  supports 
varies  from  11'  8"  to  16'  Yi',  according  to  the  method  of  construction  and  the  load  to  be  crossed 
over. 

I  saw  a  bridge  of  15  bays  thrown  over  a  lake,  by  cadets,  in  45  minutes.  In  this  time  the 
wagons  were  unloaded,  the  boats  put  together,  &c.  ;  two  of  the  bays  were  on  Birago  trestles, 
and  two  on  Birago  pontons. 

The  canvas  ponton,  with  its  cover,  complete,  weighs  720  pounds. 

Floatation  of  each  ponton,  13,428  jjounds. 

Weight  of  flooring,  &c.,  of  one  bay,  1,476  pounds. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    P..    M'CLELLAN.  27 

Otlier  materials  packed  on  each  wagon  vary  from  Hi  to  378  ponnds. 
Total  load  of  each  wagon  from  2,340  to  2,574  pounds. 
Weight  of  empty  wagon,  1,206  pounds. 

The  weights  and  dimensions  given  ahove  are  derived  from  the  Russian  Aide  Memoire  of  the 
Engineers,  pp.  143  to  145. 


»'■ 


LEATHER  PONTONS  OF  THE  MOUNTED  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

These  are  made  of  varnished  leather,  stretched  over  a  wooden  frame.  The  boats,  or  pontons, 
are  20'  long ;  greatest  width,  5'  7"  ;  depth,  3' ;  weight,  972  pounds  ;  floatation,  when  sunk  to 
the  depth  of  2'  8",  5,760  pounds. 

For  each  boat  there  are  8  balks,  each  18'  long  and  4"  square,  and  weighing  72  pounds. 

For  each  bay  there  are  12  chesses,  each  12'  long,  18^"  wide,  2"  thick,  and  weighing  101  pounds. 

Each  ponton  is  carried  on  a  wagon,  together  with  8  balks  and  some  other  materials. 

On  other  wagons  are  carried  the  chesses  for  two  bays  and  the  remainder  of  the  material. 

The  weights  of  these  wagons  and  their  loads  are  as  follows : 

Boat  wason,  empty  2,178  pounds. 

The  boat 972       " 

8  balks 576      " 

Other  materials  540       " 

Total 4,266       " 

Chess  wagon,  empty 2,196  pounds. 

24  chesses 2,424       " 

Other  materials 270       " 

Total 4,890       " 

♦  : 

Each  wagon  is  drawn  by  6  horses. 

Each  leather  boat  will  transport  25  men,  with  their  arms  and  accoutrements. 

A  raft  formed  of  two  boats  will  transjiort  one  gun,  or  6  horses. 

The  foregoing  account  of  this  bridge  is  also  derived  from  the  Russian  Aide  Memoire,  (edition 
of  1848,)  pp.  153  and  154. 

I  had  no  opportunity  of  examining  a  train  of  this  kind. 

Raft  bridges  are  much  employed  and  admirably  handled  by  the  Russians.  There  is  a  very 
fine  one,  with  a  draw,  over  the  Vistula,  at  Modlin. 

FIELD  WORKS. 

The  normal  dimensions  of  the  different  parts  are  as  follows  : 

Ditch,  not  less  than  10^'  wide  at  top;  from  6'  to  9'  deep;  base  of  scarp  and  counterscarp  from 
^  to  f  of  the  depth. 

Parapet,  from  7'  to  8'  high  ;  thickness  against  infantry,  4' ;  against  artillery  from  9'  to  14' ; 
interior  slope,  \ ;  exterior  slope,  §  or  f ,  according  to  the  soil. 

Banquette,  3'  to  4^'  wide,  4'  4"  below  the  interior  crest. 

Berm,  1^'  to  3'  wide. 

Embrasures,  1'  9"  wide  at  the  throat ;  exterior  opening  depends  upon  ^he  thickness  of  the 
parapet  and  the  desired  field  of  fire  ;  sole,  3'  to  3'  3"  above  the  platform. 


28  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

Merlons,  T'  to  8'  high,  17^'  to  21'  from  axis  to  axis  of  the  embrasures. 

Barbettes,  3'  to  3'  3"  below  the  interior  crest,  17^'  to  24'  deep,  14'  wide. 

Gun  and  howitzer  platforms,  9'  wide,  17^'  to  21'  long. 

Mortar  •platform,  7'  wide,  7'  to  9'  long. 

A  gun  or  howitzer  platform  consists  of:  1st,  a  hurter,  not  less  than  9'  long  X  6"  square,  it  is 
bisected  at  right  angles  by  the  directrix ;  2nd,  3  or  5  sleepers,  (according  to  the  soil,)  not  less  than 
6"  square,  and  as  long  as  the  platform  ;  the  outside  sleepers  are  5J'  apart  from  centre  to  centre, 
and  are  parallel  to  each  other  ;  3rd,  flooring  planks  not  less  than  2"  thick. 

K  mortar  platform  consists  oi:  1st,  3  sleepers  8"  square  and  as  long  as  the  platform;  2nd, 
flooring  timbers  7'  long  and  8"  thick. 

ARRANGEMENT   OF   THE   WORKING   PARTY   ON   A   FIELD   WORK. 

From  four  to  five  men  are  assigned  every  six  running  feet  of  the  ditch,  according  to  the  strength 
of  the  profile.  In  easy  soil  each  of  these  parties  has  one  pick  or  mattock,  four  shovels,  and  one 
earth  rammer ;  in  difficult  soil  there  should  be  two-thirds  shovels  and  one-third  picks ;  in  very 
difficult  soil,  one-half  shovels  and  one-half  picks. 

The  workmen  are  placed  in  four  ranks,  which  are  6'  apart;  the  first  rank  in  the  ditch,  near 
the  counterscarp;  the  second  at  the  middle  of  the  ditch,  opposite  the  intervals  of  the  first  rank; 
the  third  on  the  berm ;  the  fourth  on  the  parapet. 

The  first  rank  carry  their  excavation  to  the  depth  of  3',  from  the  counterscarj)  to  the  middle  of 
the  ditch,  and  throw  the  earth  on  the  berm;  the  second  rank  work  from  the  middle  of  the  ditch 
towards  the  scarp,  throwing  the  earth  on  the  berm  and  parapet ;  the  third  rank  throw  the  loose 
earth  from  the  berm  towards  the  interior  slope ;  the  fourth  rank  level  the  earth  on  the  parapet, 
ram  it,  form  the  slopes,  &c.  If  the  ditch  is  more  than  10|'  wide,  the  first  rank  throw  their 
earth  towards  the  scarp,  whence  the  second  rank  throw  it  on  the  berm.  The  scarp  and  counter- 
scarp are  at  first  cut  down  in  steps,  being  afterwards  trimmed  off  to  the  proper  slopes. 

Any  superfluous  earth  is  fotmed  into  a  glacis. 

In  a  ditch  not  more  than  4'  deep,  in  good  soil,  two  men  can  in  ten  hours  excavate  and  shovel 
off  343  cubic  feet ;  in  a  ditch  from  4'  to  5^'  deep,  one  additional  man  is  required  to  do  the  same 
work;  in  a  ditch  more  than  5|'  deep,  four  men,  two  of  whom  have  barrows  or  baskets,  are 
required  to  do  the  same  work.  The  interior  slope  is  always  revetted  with  fascines  or  hurdles,  in 
default  of  these  with  sods.  The  exterior  slope  is  revetted  with  fascines  or  hurdles  only  when  the 
parapet  is  of  sand. 

When  the  work  is  to  stand  for  some  time,  the  exterior  slope  and  the  counterscarp  may  be 
revetted  with  sods. 

Parties  of  seven  sappers  each  are  detailed  to  revet  the  interior  slope ;  the  three  oldest  soldiers 
arrange  the  slope,  the  other  four  bring  up  the  materials.  Each  party  should  revet  24  running 
feet,  and  is  provided  with  one  iron  hammer,  one  bill-hook,  and  1  handsaw. 

SECONDARY   MEANS   OF   DEFENCE. 

Inundations  should  not  be  less  than  5'  deep. 

Chevaux-defrise. — Body  of  square  timber,  9'  long ;  the  lances  project  5',  are  1^"  in  diameter, 
aud  9^"  apart. 
Palisades. — Of  round  timber,  9|'  to  10^'  long,  8"  in  diameter;  point,  1'  long;  butts  charred. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  29 

They  are  placed  at  the  foot  of  the  scarp  or  counterscarp,  or  in  the  middle  of  the  ditch.  The 
trench  to  receive  them  is  1|'  wide  and  2^'  deep.     The  palisades  are  from  2"  to  3"  apart. 

Stockades  are  double  palisades,  emjjloyed  against  light  artillery. 

The  military  pits  are  from  5'  to  C  deep,  upper  diameter  G',  lower  diameter  1^';  tlie  stake  from 
4"  to  5"  in  diameter,  and  projects  4^'  above  the  bottom  of  the  pit. 

Fraises,  entanglements,  abattis,  caltrops,  &c.,  are  also  employed. 

SIEGE  MATEKIALS,  &c. 

The  usual  mathematical  and  surveying  instruments  arc  provided.  Tlie  tools  are  generally 
inferior  in  quality. 

Common  fascine. — 6'  or  12'  long,  2'  in  circumference;  withes  from  1'  to  2'  apart. 

Battery  fascine. — -18'  to  21'  long,  1'  in  diameter;  withes  10"  to  12"  apart. 

Sap  fagot. — 21'  long,  10"  in  diameter;  central  stake  projects  6". 

The  trestles  of  the  fascine  cradles  are  from  2^'  to  3'  apart ;  the  stakes  of  which  they  are  made 
are  5'  to  6'  long,  diameter  3"  to  4"  at  the  butt ;  points  enter  the  ground  3'  apart,  and  cross  3' 
above  the  ground. 

The  brusb  for  fascines  is  not  more  than  1"  in  diameter.  A  fascine  party  consists  of  six  men: 
two  for  preparing  the  brush,  one  to  prepare  the  withes,  two  to  lay  and  choke  the  brush,  one  to 
remove  the  fascine  when  completed.  Each  party  is  jjrovided  with  two  bill-hooks,  one  hatchet, 
one  measuring  rod,  one  cord  to  measure  the  circumference,  and  one  choker. 

Gabion, — The  sap  gabion  is  30"  high,  24"  in  diameter,  and  has  9  stakes ;  each  stake  3^'  long, 
and  from  1|"  to  2"  diameter. 

Battenj  gabion. — 4'  high,  3'  in  diameter,  13  stakes.  In  all  gabions  the  stakes  should  be  8' 
apart. 

A  gabion  party  consists  of  three  men,  and  is  provided  with  one  measuring  rod,  two  bill-hooks, 
and  one  hatchet. 

Sa}}  roller. — T^'  long,  4'  in  diameter,  stuifed  with  wool  or  fascines,  and  closed  at  both  ends  by 
wattling.     It  has  IT  stakes. 

The  brush  being  cut  for  them,  and  it  being  only  required  to  trim  off  the  leaves  and  twigs  and 
to  wattle,  a  party  of  three  men  can  in  four  hours  finish  three  sap  gabions,  two  battery  gabions, 
or  one-third  of  a  sap  roller. 

Hurdles  are  from  4'  to  9'  long ;  stakes,  from  4'  to  7'  long,  2"  in  diameter,  and  1'  apart.  A 
party  of  three  men  can  make  53  square  feet  of  hurdles  in  four  hours,  the  brush  being  already 
cut. 

Sand  bags.— 2'  long,  8"  to  9"  wide. 

Sods.— 18"  long,  12"  broad,  from  5"  to  6"  thick. 

Average  iveight  of  different  sap  materials. 

Pounds. 

Common  fascine,  6^'  long,  8|"  diameter 31^ 

Battery  fascine,  20'  long,  1'  diameter 288 

Sap  fagot 17 

Sap  gabion 43  to  54 

Sap  roller,  empty 324 

Sap  roller,  stuffed  with  fascines 1,080  to  1,296 

Sand  bag,  filled 36  to  40 


30 


MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


SIEGE  OPEEATIONS. 

Simple  trench. — In  easy  soil,  that  can  be  worked  by  the  shovel  alone,  the  men  are  placed  4' 
apart;  when  the  pick  is  required,  3'  apart;  in  very  difficult  soil,  2'  apart.  The  communications 
leading  to  the  first  jiarallel  have  the  following  jirofile :  trench  3'  deep  at  the  berm,  8'  to  9'  wide 
at  bottom;  parapet  4' high  and  9' thick  at  base.  This  should  be  completed  the  first  night. 
Next  day  the  first  parallel  receives  the  following  dimensions :  parapet,  4'  high,  16'  thick  at  base ; 
trench,  9'  wide  at  bottora  in  the  clear,  3'  deeiJ  in  front ;  two  steps,  revetted  with  fascines,  against 
the  berm  slope,  and  one  broad  step  on  the  reverse  slope. 

As  regards  their  appearance,  when  completed,  saps  are  singh,  douhle,  or  covered;  with  respect 
to  the  mode  of  execution,  they  avejlying  or  sloiu. 

The  single  sap  affords  cover  from  one  direction  only ;  the  double  sap,  on  both  sides ;  the 
covered  sap,  on  both  sides  and  above;  the  latter  is  employed  to  give  protection  against  a  ricochet 
fire,  or  when  descending  a  slope,  or  when  following  along  the  foot  of  a  hill. 

In  the  flying  sap  the  gabions  are  all  placed  and  filled  simultaneously ;  in  the  slow  sap  the 
gabions  are  placed  and  filled  one  at  a  time. 

For  each  head  of  the  slow  sap  24  sappers  are  detailed  and  divided  into  4  reliefs ;  there  is  1 
non-commissioned  officer  with  each  relief,  and  1  officer  for  every  2  reliefs. 

For  each  head  of  sap  the  following  tools  are  necessary:  2  sap  hooks,  9'  long,  as  in  annexed 
sketch  ; 


.+.jr. 


1  square;  1  arm  1'  long,  the  other  18",  as  a  measure  for  the  1st  sapper;  3  measures  for  the 
2d,  3d,  and  4th  sappers,  respectively,  2',  2^',  and  3'  long;  4  hand  axes,  to  cut  turf  and  roots;  4 
picks,  or  mattocks,  according  to  the  soil;  6  shovels;  2  axes;  1  tracing  cord;  2  sap  forks,  each 
5'  long,  as  shown  by  the  annexed  sketch : 


1  seven-foot  measure;  2  handspikes,  7'  long,  6"  square;  1  roller,  4'  long,  18"  in  circumference; 
1  block,  2'  long,  6"  square,  as  a  fulcrum  for  the  handspikes ;  1  curved  wooden  mallet,  of  the 
shape  and  dimensions  shown  in  the  annexed  figure,  for  driving  down  the  crowning  fascines,  &c. : 


4'  6' 


For  each  head  of  sap  the  following  materials  are  required :     1  sap  roller ;  sap  gabions ;  sap 
fagots ;  fascines ;  stakes,  2^'  long,  for  fastening  the  fascines ;  sand  bags. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  31 

Each  relief  is  relieved  after  filling  18  gabions,  wliicli  should  be  accomplished  in  3  hours. 

The  1st  sapper  fills  3  gabions,  and  then  becomes  No.  G  ;  No.  2  becomes  No.  1,  &c.  The  end 
of  the  sap  roller  is  on  the  alignment  of  the  exterior  surface  of  the  gabionade.  The  joint  between 
the  sap  roller  and  the  gabion  in  the  course  of  being  filled  is  not  covered  ;  the  next  12  joints  are 
each  covered  by  2  sand  bags  on  end  ;  after  that  with  sap  fagots. 

Temporary  crowning  fascines  are  not  habitually  used. 

Execution  of  the  single  sap. — The  1st  sajiper  leaves  a  berm  of  1' ;  his  form  is  18"  deep,  1'  wide  at 
bottom ;  base  of  berm  slope  1' ;  he  works  on  his  knees.  The  2d  sapper  follows  No.  1  at  the  distance 
of  3  gabions ;  his  form  is  2'  deep,  2'  wide  at  bottom,  berm  slope  f ;  he  throws  his  earth  over  the 
gabionade,  and  works  on  his  knees.  The  3d  and  4th  sappers  crown  the  gabions  opposite  their 
forms  with  one  layer  of  2  fascines,  and  then  complete  their  respective  forms,  preserving  the  berm 
slope  off  ;  the  form  of  No.  3  is  2^'  deep  by  2|'  wide  at  bottom  ;  that  of  No.  4  is  3'  deep  and  3' 
wide  at  bottom.  Each  sapper  follows  at  3  gabions  behind  the  one  in  front  of  him.  In  the 
meantime,  Nos.  5  and  6  pass  up  the  materials,  place  and  secure  with  pickets  the  2d  layer  of 
fascines,  remove  the  sand  bags  from  the  joints,  and  replace  them  by  saj)  fagots. 

Nos.  2  and  3  manoeuvre  the  sap  roller. 

Boyaux  made  by  the  single  sap  are  6'  wide  at  bottom. 

Douhle  saj). — This  is  12'  wide  between  the  two  rows  of  gabions.  Its  trench,  when  completed, 
is  10'  wide  at  top,  6'  at  the  bottom.  The  head  is  covered  by  two  ordinary  sap  rollers,  not 
united  in  any  way,  the  joint  being  closed  by  sand  bags,  or  a  wool  bag.  If  it  is  necessary  to 
throw  the  sap  rollers  further  out  than  usual,  the  opening  left  between  them  may  be  covered  by  a 
short  sap  roller. 

The  covered  sap. — In  this,  blindage  frames  are  used,  each  consisting  of  two  stanchions  10^'  long 
X  7"  square,  and  of  two  cross  pieces,  the  upper  of  which  is  10"  X  T",  the  lower  7"  X  5". 
The  frame  is  4'  wide  from  out  to  out,  and  7^'  high  from  out  to  out  of  the  cross  pieces.  The 
stanchions  project  equally  beyond  both  cross  pieces,  and  have  points  9"  long.  The  frames  rest 
against  the  berm  slope,  having  its  inclination.  Two  cross  beams,  each  16'  long  and  10"  X  7", 
rest  on  each  top  cross  piece.  Five  longitudinal  beams  of  a  similar  section  are  laid  on  the  cross 
beams  ;  on  top  of  these  two  layers  of  fascines,  and  on  top  of  them  3'  of  earth.  The  trench  thus 
formed  is  7'  high  in  the  clear  and  6'  wide  at  bottom.  In  pushing  the  sap  from  the  crowning 
of  the  breach,  the  first  sapper  makes  his  from  3'  deep  and  2'  wide  at  bottom  ;  each  of  the  other 
sappers  widens  and  deepens  it  1'. 

MINES. 

Frames  of  grand  galleries  are  6'  high  and  3'  wide  in  the  clear. 

Frames  of  common  galleries  are  4^'  high  and  3'  wide  in  the  clear. 

Frames  of  branches  are  2^'  high  and  2'  wide  in  the  clear. 

All  parts  of  the  frames  are  5"  wide ;  the  caps  are  from  5"  to  9"  deep,  the  sills  from  3"  to  5"  deep. 

For  branches,  the  width  and  dej)th  are  diminished  1". 

The  frames  of  Dutch  galleries  are  of  2"  plank,  and  from  C"  to  9"  wide. 

Each  party  of  miners  consists  of  three  non-commissioned  officers  and  eighteen  men,  divided 
into  three  reliefs,  each  relief  working  six  hours.  In  ordinary  soil,  where  no  unusual  obstacle 
is  encountered,  each  relief  should  drive  from  3'  to  4'  in  six  hours. 

In  defending  any  position  by  field  works,  the  system  pursued  was  to  occupy  the  flanks  and 
other  important  points  of  any  given  line  by  redoubts,  lunettes  closed  or  palisaded  at  the  gorge,  &c., 
afterwards  connecting  them  by  continuous  lines  if  time  was  afforded,  and  the  locality  ren- 
dered it  advisable.     When  circumstances  were  favorable,  the  command  of  the  works  was  usually 


32  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUKOPK. 

from  9'  to  12',  or  even  more  ;  the  parapets  16'  to  20'  thick.  In  the  ditches  of  the  works,  which 
were  leisurely  constructed,  palisades,  fraizes,  caponieres,  hlock  houses,  blinded  batteries,  &c., 
were  freely  and  judiciously  employed.  In  some  cases  all  the  slopes  were  revetted  with  sods. 
The  embrasures  varied  much  in  size,  according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  particular  case ; 
the  soles  generally  sodded,  the  cheeks  revetted  with  sods,  gabions,  or  fascines.  Generally, 
every  two  guns  had  splinter  proof  gabion  traverses  from  two  to  three  tiers  in  height,  two  to 
three  gabions  wide  at  bottom,  and  one  at  toj) ;  no  fascines  between  the  tiers ;  the  gabions  vertical, 
with  offsets.  There  were  usually  banquettes  between  the  embrasures,  which  latter  were 
provided  with  rojie  mantelets  ;  the  magazines  generally  of  a  pentagonal  section,  and  covered 
with  12"  timber,  a  layer  of  fascines,  and  C  of  earth;  the  cartridges  placed  on  shelves. 

The  works  intended  to  act  against  shipping  were  provided  with  hot  shot  furnaces,  and  heavy 
guns  were  employed.  Whenever  the  field  works  were  at  all  leisurely  constructed,  nothing 
could  have  been  mo^e  perfect  and  creditable  than  their  details. 

On  many  of  the  barbette  water  batteries,  the  following  arrangement  was  used  for  aiming: 
The  rear  traverse  circle  was  graduated  to  small  fractions  of  degrees ;  on  the  parapet  was  a  small 
arc  graduated  proportionally ;  a  wooden  slat  about  3'  long,  and  provided  with  an  index  traversed 
on  this  arc ;  on  top  of  the  slat  were  two  fine  needle  sights.  It  was  only  necessary  to  sight  the 
ship  to  be  fired  at  with  these  needle  sights,  take  the  reading  shown  by  the  index,  and  then  run 
the  gun  to  the  same  reading  on  the  rear  traverse  circle. 

THE  PRUSSIAN  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

They  are  called  pioneers,  and  perform  the  duties  of  sappers,  miners,  and  pontoniers. 
They  are  officered  by  details  from  the  corps  of  engineers,  and  are  organized  in  divisions 
of  two  companies  each.  In  time  of  war,  a  reserve  or  depot  company  is  added  to  each 
division.  There  is  a  division  for  each  of  the  nine  army  corps,  and  two  independent  companies 
for  the  Confederation  fortresses  of  Mayence  and  Luxembourg.  On  the  war  footing,  the  strength 
of  each  company  is  as  follows  : 

4  officers. 

1  orderly  sergeant. 

1  ensign  (a  non-commissioned  officer  in  the  line  of  promotion.) 

3  sergeants. 

9  master  pioneers  (an  intermediate  grade  of  non-commissioned  officer.) 

9  corporals. 
189  privates,  including  one  hospital  attendant. 

3  musicians. 


226  men,  exclusive  of  officers,  surgeons,  and  drivers. 


In  peace,  the  strength  is  reduced  to  about  one-half.  The  drivers  of  the  tool  and  ponton 
wagons  are  soldiers  of  the  train,  and  are  not  taken  from  the  companies. 

When  the  whole  army  is  placed  on  the  war  footing,  the  strength  of  the  pioneers  is  7,743  men, 
exclusive  of  officers,  surgeons,  and  drivers.  All  the  pioneer  material  is  made  at  the  engineer 
arsenals.  In  the  trenches  armor  is  not  used.  Exjieriments  have  been  made  with  helmets  and 
cuirasses  made  of  three  thicknesses  of  bull's  hide  ;  the  results  are  said  to  be  satisfactory.  The 
men  carry  tools  in  slings,  never  attached  to  the  knapsack.  They  are  armed  with  a  light  musket; 
having  an  ordinary  bayonet.  Pioneers  are  employed  as  overseers,  clerks,  master  workmen,  &c.} 
in  the  construction  of  permanent  works. 


REPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M°CLELLAN.  33 

MILITAEY  BEIDGES. 

The  Birago  trestle  has  been  definitively  adopted,  but  somewhat  diminished  in  dimensions  ; 
his  sectional  ponton  only  partially,  if  at  all.     I  saw  none  in  use  or  in  store. 

The  boats  are  of  wood,  and  are  20'  X  5'  X  2|'  The  balks  are  18'  X  5^"  X  4"  ;  chesses, 
12'  X  10"  X  1".     The  anchors  are  of  two  sizes,  the  smaller  weighing  80  lbs. 

The  wagons  are  drawn  by  six  horses,  and  weigh,  loaded,  from  4,800  to  5,400  lbs.  The  balks 
and  chesses  are  secured  on  the  wagons  by  bolts ;  the  boat  is  placed  on  top,  bottom  upwards ;  the 
cables,  oars,  anchors,  &c.,  are  placed  under  it.  There  are  two  oars  and  one  boat  hook  for  each 
boat;  buoys,  sounding  poles,  &c.,  are  provided.  A  bridge  train  consists  of  32  boats,  and 
requires  for  its  transportation  34  boat  wagons,  5  store  wagons,  1  travelling  forge,  238  horses, 
and  a  company  of  the  train,  (drivers,)  consisting  of  1  officer,  6  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
119  drivers.  The  company  of  the  train  is  organized  only  when  the  troops  are  placed  on  the 
war  footing,  since  horses  are  provided  only  in  that  event. 

Each  division  of  pioneers  has  1  bridge  train,  constituted  as  above.  In  addition  each  division 
has  also  a  light  advanced  guard  trestle  bridge  train,  which  consists  of  10  wagons,  can  follow  all 
the  movements  of  artillery,  and  most  of  those  of  the  cavalry. 

Some  of  the  officers  spoke  very  highly  of  the  Birago  trestle,  but  stated  that  it  did  not  answer 
well  on  a  very  boggy  bottom.  Nothing  peculiar  was  observed  in  their  manner  of  throwing  and 
dismantling  the  bridge ;  it  was  well  and  rapidly  done ;  the  formation  of  the  various  detachments 
is  similar  to  our  own  system. 

SAPS. 

Gabions — 30"  high,  exterior  diameter  20",  7  stakes,  bound  by  4  withes  at  one  end  and  by  3 
at  the  other. 

Sap  fagots  are  used,  but  are  generally  replaced  by  sand  bags.  Sand  bags  10"  X  15"  empty, 
6"  X  9"  when  filled.     Temporary  crowning  fascines  are  not  used. 

The  sap  rollers  are  of  2  concentric  gabions,  in  the  English  style  ;  the  outer  cylinder  is  9' long, 
3'  4"  diameter  at  tha  centres  of  the  stakes,  and  has  23  stakes ;  the  inner  cylinder  is  7'  long,  and 
1'  9"  in  diameter.  The  space  between  the  two  cylinders  is  stuffed  with  fascines,  and  the  ends 
closed  by  wooden  circles  of  2"  stuff.  The  picks  and  shovels  are  quite  light ;  the  latter  have 
straight  handles.     The  usual  handspikes,  chocks,  &c.,  are  employed. 


The  annexed  sketch  represents  the  sap  hook. 


The  opposit3  figure  shows  the  butt  of  the  reverse  sap  hook. 


Tlie  annexed  figure  represents  the  butt  of  the  berm  sap  hook,  a  chain  being 
fastcnc  d  to  the  ring  and  a  hook  to  the  end  of  the  chain  ;  the  hook  is  hooked 
to  Ihe  wattling  of  the  gabionade,  and  thus  hold  secure. 


34 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUEOPE. 


The  annexed  sketch  represents  the  sap  fork ;  its  vertical 
branch  is  unusually  long  ;  the  bar,  attached  by  a  pin  to  the 
handle,  serves  as  a  fulcrum  in  placing  the  gabion. 


^ 


A  brigade  for  the  full. sap  is  composed  of  1  non-commissioned  officer  and  8  men;  the  leading 
sapper  fills  2  gabions  before  changing;  the  manner  of  working,  changing,  &c.,  present  nothing 
peculiar. 

The  centre  of  the  sap  roller  is  placed  on  the  alignment  of  the  interior  slope  of  the  gabionade. 
In  the  double  sap  the  rollers  are  never  fastened  together ;  the  interval  between  them  is  covered 
by  a  short  roller,  or  by  a  pile  of  sand  bags. 

In  the  full  sap  the  berm  is  from  1'  to  2',  according  to  circumstances.  No.  1  always  keeps  one 
filled  gabion  in  advance  of  the  head  of  his  form. 

The  forms  of  the  sappers  are  as  follows :  No.  1,  18"  X  18"  ;  No.  2,  24"  X  24"  ;  No.  3,  30"  X 
30"  ;  No.  4,  36"  X  36".  Each  sapper  has  a  wooden  measure  of  his  form.  In  crowning  the 
covered  way  the  sap  is  4'  deep. 

At  the  head  of  the  double  sap  there  is  a  rod  as  long  as  the  clear  interval  between  the 
gabionades ;  this  passes  through  rings  at  the  ends  of  two  sticks,  one  of  which  is  at  the  side  of 
each  1st  sapper,  and  is  used  to  verify  the  jjositions  of  the  gabions  last  placed. 

The  hurdle,  sod,  and  fascine  revetments,  military  pits,  palisades,  huts,  &c.,  are  well  executed, 
but  present  nothing  novel. 

3Iines. — The  galleries  and  shafts  are  well  and  neatly  executed.  I  observed  but  two  peculiari- 
ties in  regard  to  the  galleries:  first,  instead  of  connecting  the  stanchions  of  adjacent  frames  by 
battens  nailed  to  them,  pieces  of  3"  scantling,  as  long  as  the  clear  interval  between  the  frames, 
are  driven  in  between  them  sideways  and  horizontally;  second,  before  driving  the  wedges 
between  the  ends  of  adjacent  lengths  of  sheeting  a  strijj  of  board  is  driven  in,  edgewise,  between 
the  ends  of  the  sheeting  planks,  at  right  angles  to  them.  In  the  shafts  the  frames  are  supported 
from  below. 

THE  AUSTRIAN  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

Their  duty  is  confined  to  that  of  sappers  and  miners,  and  the  construction  of  permanent  works. 
In  a  siege  the  batteries  are  built  by  the  artillery.  The  construction  of  all  kinds  of  bridges,  and 
of  field  fortifications,  the  repairs  of  roads,  &c.,  are  entrusted  to  the  pioneers,  a  special  corps 
belonging  to  the  general  staff. 

The  engineer  troops  receive,  however,  a  certain  amount  of  instruction  in  these  duties,  that 
they  may  be  able  to  perform  them  in  case  of  necessity. 

There  are  12  battalions  of  engineer  troops,  of  4  companies  each.     A  company  consists  of — 
1  captain. 
4  lieutenants. 


REPORT    OP   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   n'OLELLAK,  35 

4  sergeants. 

8  conductors,  (an  intermediate  grade  of  non-commisioned  officer.) 
16  corporals. 
32  lance  corporals. 
148  privates. 

2  musicians. 


215— total. 


The  officers  are  detailed  from  the  corps  of  engineers.  Each  company  is  divided  into  four 
platoons,  one  of  which  is  especially  instructed  as  miners,  the  remaining  three  as  sappers. 

They  are  armed  with  a  rifled  weapon,  having  a  26"  barrel,  and  a  bayonet  19"  long. 

Plate  I,  figures  1  and  2,  sliows  the  uniform,  accoutrements,  manner  of  carrying  picks  and 
shovels,  mode  of  packing  the  overcoat,  &c. 

Plate  II,  fig.  1,  shows  the  formation  of  a  company  of  engineer  troops,  as  well  as  the  distri- 
bution of  the  various  tools.  In  addition  to  the  various  tools  mentioned  in  that  plate,  each  man 
carries  a  little  bag  containing  small  tools,  nails,  &c. 

The  composition  of  a  brigade  for  the  full  sap  is  the  same  as  in  the  French  system.  The  most 
striking  peculiarity  in  the  Austrian  system  is  their  method  of  executing  the  full  sap. 

Upon  commencing  his  work.  No.  1  finds  his  form  2\'  wide  and  1|'  deep  for  the  width  of  one 
gabion  from  the  head,  in  rear  of  that  it  is  3'  deep  ;  at  the  point  where  the  form  of  No.  3  begins 
the  trench  is  3'  wide.  A  mantlet  is  often  used  on  the  berm  to  cover  the  5  leading  gabions,  in 
rear  of  the  sap  fagots.  No.  1  places  a  gabion,  and  fills  it  with  the  earth  obtained  by  cutting 
away  the  step  at  the  head  of  his  form,  assisted  by  No.  2,  who  throws  into  the  gabion  some  of 
the  loose  earth  he  finds  in  his  form.  The  gabion  being  filled,  No.  1  continues  his  work  until 
he  has  not  only  cut  away  the  step  at  the  head  of  his  form,  but  has  excavated  another  just  like 
it,  extending  to  2'  from  the  sap  roller;  after  he  has  filled  the  gabion,  he  passes  back  the 
loosened  earth  to  No.  2,  who  throws  it  over  the  gabionade,  always  taking  care  to  leave  some 
loose  earth  to  assist  in  filling  the  next  gabion  placed.  No.  3  carries  the  sajj  to  the  full  width  ; 
No.  4  places  the  sap  fagots,  &c.  ;  No.  1  is  relieved  after  having  filled  one  gabion  and  completed 
the  excavation  just  described ;  his  task  usually  occupies  20  minutes.  Temporary  crowning 
facines  are  sometimes  used.     The  sap  roller  consists  of  a  single  cylinder,  stuffed  with  fascines. 

THE  AUSTKIAN  PIONEERS. 

As  has  already  been  stated,  this  corps  is  attached  to  the  general  staff,  and  constructs  all 
military  bridges,  field  works,  roads,  &c.  ;  detachments  from  it  assist  in  making  surveys.  The 
officers  are  distinct  from  those  of  tlie  general  staff,  and  are  promoted  in  the  arm. 

There  are  6  battalions,  of  4  companies  each.     A  comjsany  consists  of: 

1  captain. 

4  lieutenants. 

2  sergeants. 
20  corporals. 

40  carpenters,  (20  of  the  1st  and  20  of  the  2d  class.) 
160  pioneers,  (40  of  the  1st  and  120  of  the  2d  class.) 
2  musicians. 


229— total. 


36  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

The  company  is  divided  into  4  platoons.  Their  arms,  accoutrements,  and  mode  of  carrying 
tools  being  precisely  like  tliose  of  the  engineer  troops.  Plate  I  will  give  all  the  requisite  infor- 
mation. 

Plate  II,  fig.  2,  shows  the  formation  of  a  company  and  the  distribution  of  the  tools.  In  addi- 
tion to  the  tools,  &c.,  mentioned  in  the  plate,  3,000  nails  and  various  small  tools  are  divided 
among  the  men  ;  the  maximum  load  of  any  one  man  is  45^  pounds,  everything  included. 

The  Birago  equipage  is  exclusively  used,  and  has  undergone  no  modification,  except  that  the 
sections  of  the  boats  are  connected  by  bolts  and  keys  in  addition  to  the  hooks  on  the  sides. 

Expeiiments  are  now  being  made  to  substitute  boiler  iron  boats  for  those  of  wood ;  it  was 
stated  that  they  were  of  about  the  same  weight  as  the  wooden  ones,  and  that  they  would 
probably  be  adopted.  I  observed  a  number  of  them  at  Klosterneuberg.  All  the  bridge  mate- 
rials, and  most  of  the  pioneer  tools,  are  made  by  the  men  of  the  corp,  the  principal  arsenal  of 
construction  being  at  Klosterneuberg,  near  Vienna. 

Each  company  has  two  bridge  equipages  ;  an  equipage  consisting  of  the  pontons,  trestles, 
&c.,  necessary  to  form  a  bridge  174'  long  ;  15  wagons  transport  this  amount  of  material,  and 
they  are  so  packed  that  the  equipage  may  be  divided  into  ^,  \,  and  ^. 

The  composition,  details,  and  properties  of  the  Birago  bridge  are  so  well  known  to  all 
interested  in  the  subject,  through  Haillot's  excellent  description  of  it,  and  Birago's  "Examina- 
tion of  the  European  Systems  of  Military  Bridges,"  that  it  is  altogether  unnecessary  to  describe 
it  here. 

For  the  pioneers,  as  well  as  for  the  engineer  troops,  there  are  special  tactics  for  the  infantry 
drill  of  the  recruit,  company,  and  battalion  drills. 

All  the  details  of  the  Austrian  system  of  the  field  duties  of  the  pioneers,  such  as  field  fortifi- 
cations, labors  in  camp,  repairing  roads,  making  bridges,  &c.,  will  be  found  in  an  excellent 
work  entitled  "Technical  Pioneer  Service  in  the  Field,  by  Captain  Wasserthal ;"  or,  in  the 
original,  "  Technischer  Pionier-Dienst  im  Felde,  von  Konstantin  Wasserthal,  K.  K.  Pionier, 
Hauptmann,  etc.  ;  Wien,  Verlag  von  Carl  Gerold  und  Sohn — 1852." 

THE  FRENCH  AND  ENGLISH  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

Our  own  system  of  instruction  being  based  ujaon  the  French  and  English,  their  organization 
and  system  are  so  perfectly  well  known  in  our  service  that  any  description  of  them  may  be 
dispensed  with.     It  is  believed  that  no  essential  changes  have  been  introduced  of  late. 

In  the  course  of  the  observations  that  will  hereafter  be  made  upon  the  operations  near  Sebas- 
topol  there  will  arise  the  necessity  of  alluding  to  the  manner  in  which  these  systems  were  carried 
into  practice,  as  well  as  the  temporary  modifications  rendered  necessary  by  circumstances. 

In  concluding  this  brief  account  of  the  engineer  troops  of  different  European  services  there 
are  a  few  points  to  which  I  would  ask  to  call  the  attention  of  our  own  officers  of  engineers. 

In  regard  to  the  saps  :  there  are  several  things  which  ought  at  least  to  be  tried  ;  among  them 
may  be  mentioned  the  Russian  system  of  reducing  the  number  of  men  in  a  brigade  to  6  ;  the 
Austrian  method  of  executing  the  sap  ;  the  Russian  curved  mallet  for  fastening  the  crowning 
fascines  ;  the  Prussian  sap  hooks  and  sap  fork ;  the  system  of  leaviSg  the  two  sap  rollers  at  the 
head  of  the  double  sap  unconnected,  and  covering  the  interval  by  a  third  roller  or  by  sand  bags ; 
the  use  of  sand  bags,  instead  of  sap  fagots,  for  covering  the  joints  at  the  head  of  the  sap,  and  the 
Austrian  manner  of  carrying  tools. 

In  reference  to  bridges  :  I  would  recommend  that  the  Birago  trestle,  in  principle,  at  least,  be 
definitively   adopted   as   a   part  of  our  system.     Its   universal  adoption  on  the  continent  of 


EEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M«CLELLAN.  37 

Europe,  after  careful  trial,  would  appear  to  be  sufficient  evidence  that  its  theoretical  advantages 
are  fully  obtained  in  practice.  On  the  march  from  Matamoras  to  Victoria  and  Tampico,  in 
1846  and  1847,  'we  had  infinite  difficulty  in  bridging  boggy  streams  (there  being  no  suitable 
timber)  and  in  crossing  ravines  with  vertical  banks  ;  a  few  bays  of  the  Birago  trestles  would 
have  saved  us  many  days  and  a  vast  amount  of  labor.  In  the  operations  in  the  valley  of 
Mexico,  our  movements,  checked  as  they  so  often  were  by  impassable  wet  ditches  and  sometimes 
by  dry  ravines,  would  have  been  rendered  so  much  more  free  and  rapid  by  the  use  of  the  Birago 
trestles  that  our  successes  could  have  been  gained  at  far  less  cost,  and  probably  with  even  more 
rapidity  than  they  were. 

With  respect  to  the  boats  :  fully  appreciating  the  great  advantages  arising  from  the  lightness 
of  our  India  rubber  pontons,  I  have  never  felt  satisfied  tliat  they  could  afford,  in  practice,  the 
advantages  expected  of  them.  The  material  deteriorates  and  becomes  worthless  very  rapidly, 
probably  the  inevitable  result  of  the  process  of  manufacture.  It  is  at  least  doubtful  whether, 
even  in  new  pontons,  the  manner  of  attaching  the  cable  affords  sufficient  strength,  should  a 
heavy  load  cross  the  bridge,  when  thrown  over  a  wide  and  rapid  stream.  The  pontons  are  not 
fit  to  be  used  as  boats  in  ferrying  troops  over  rapid  streams,  especially  under  fire. 

In  attaching  the  frame  to  the  ponton  the  loops  soon  give  way,  and  cannot  be  repaired  in  the 
field. 

The  bridge  has  never  been  fairly  tested ;  that  is,  it  has  never  been  thrown  across  any  stream, 
much  less  a  rapid  one,  and  a  heavy  load  passed  over  it. 

I  would  therefore  suggest  that  the  equipage  ought  not  to  be  exclusively  relied  upon  in  the 
field  until  it  has  been  tested  by  taking  it  to  some  place  where  it  can  be  thrown  over  a  rapid 
stream,  at  least  100  yards  wide,  and  the  heaviest  loads  passed  over,  and  where,  too,  its  capacity, 
in  the  form  of  single  boats  and  rafts,  can  be  fully  tried.  I  would  at  the  same  time  suggest  the 
propriety  of  experimenting  with  sectional  boats,  after  the  manner  of  the  Birago  boats,  but  made 
of  the  corrugated  iron. 

Our  force  of  artillery  is  large  in  proportion  to  the  other  arms  of  service,  while  the  number  of 
our  engineer  troops  is  ridiculously  and  shamefully  small ;  it  is,  therefore,  more  than  probable 
that  in  any  future  siege  it  will  be  easy  for  the  artillery  to  construct  their  own  batteries,  while 
the  engineers  will  be  sufficiently  burdened  by  the  construction  of  the  other  works  of  attack  ;  we 
have  now,  at  last,  the  germ  of  an  artillery  school  of  practice ;  I  would  then  suggest,  for  the 
consideration  of  the  Secretary,  the  propriety  of  causing  the  artillery  to  construct  their  own 
batteries.  The  position  and  armament  of  siege  batteries  should  be  determined  by  consultation 
between  the  engineers  and  artillery,  the  former  having  the  preponderating  voice,  in  order  to 
secure  the  necessary  harmony  and  connexion  between  all  parts  of  the  works  of  attack. 

I  would  recommend  that  the  result  of  the  ten  years'  experience  of  the  engineer  company  be 
reduced  to  form,  and  that  a  full  and  detailed  system  for  the  construction  of  material,  saps,  mines, 
field  works,  bridges,  construction  of  field  ovens,  repairs  of  roads,  &c.,  be  adopted  and  published 
for  the  benefit  of  the  service. 

If  the  artillery  be  charged  with  the  construction  of  batteries,  there  should  also  be  adopted  and 

published  for  their  use  an  artillery  manual,  comprising  everything  in  relation  to  the  preparation 

of  the  fascines,   gabions,  platforms,   and  magazines,  the  dimensions  of  batteries,  manner  of 

arranging  working  parties,  &c. 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  1st  Cavalry. 
January  14,  1857. 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


O 
P4 


EEPOKT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  M'CLELLAN. 


39 


J, 
1 


m 

1 — 

-L 

4 

"«r 

=5 

s 

'5" 

Sb 

"^ 

nJ 

<i 

T 

"a 

V 

<; 

•o 

Sv 

_S 

o 

5^ 

S 

t- 

-S 

t 

Si 

~^ 

4 

^ 

"r^ 

« 

Sb 

'Ki 

4 

►o 

'si 

fi 

NS 

^ 

^ 

r«' 

-i; 

-o 

f« 

-J? 

r-C 

f« 

^. 



— 

"e 

«i 

^ 

s 

O 

^ 

€ 

« 

tt 

e 

^ 

V 

<i 

i. 

V 

e 

"^ 

"^ 

t 

IT 

^ 

<; 

^ 

2;^ 

i3 

-* 

■fi 

ij 

•^i 

•ri 

i: 

r« 

■^i 

« 

^Ci 

^ 

^ 

r<i 

<■; 

^ti 

l« 

rJ^ 

>t 

rCj 

dS. 

1 

— 

-^ 


f^J 


"^■■(ff-^  ■«■-''«  fl 


~ 

^ 

•C) 

:^ 

^ 

'^ 

^ 

■:!; 

■<i 

5 

-a 

^ 

<) 

*i 

^ 

Cn. 

^ 

a^ 

vj 

^ 

^ 

^ 

-0 

r^ 

"^ 

< 

^ 

-0 

lv 

-o 

^ 

-0 

^ 

..^^ 

m 

^ 

< 


<;         S 

E     0 


i  n  i 


::i:zE 


S9yj  S  f09V^  £ 


i 


s 
o 


0     Bl     0      0 


E    D    O     0     0     0 


<■-■-■ 


-a 


JH 


REPORT 


FRENCH,  AUSTRIAN.  PRUSSIAN,  AND  SARDINIAN 

INFANTRY, 


THE  FKENCH  INFANTRY. 

The  infantry  of  the  French  army  is  divided  into  several  classes :  1st.  The  infantry  of  the 
inaperial  guard;  2d.  The  infantry  of  the  line;  3d.  The  battalions  of  foot  rifles,  (chasseurs 
a  pied— formerly  d'Orleans,  or  de  Vincennes ;)  4th.  The  zouaves;  5th.  The  light  infantry  of 
Africa;  6th.  The  foreign  legions ;  7th.  The  native  (African)  light  infantry. 

The  infantry  of  the  guard  is  organized  in  two  divisions,  each  of  two  brigades. 

1st  division,  1st  brigade:  1  regiment  of  gendarmes,  2  battalions;  the  1st  regiment  of  grena- 
diers, 4  battalions  ;  the  regiment  of  zouaves,  2  battalions. 

2d  brigade:  the  2d  regiment  of  grenadiers,  4  battalions;  the  3d  regiment  of  grenadiers,  4 
battalions.     Total  of  1st  division,  16  battalions. 

2d  division,  1st  brigade:  the  1st  regiment  of  voltigeurs,  4  battalions;  the  2d  regiment  of  vol- 
tigeurs,  4  battalions  ;  the  battalion  of  foot  rifles. 

2d  brigade :  the  3d  regiment  of  voltigeurs,  4  battalions ;  the  4th  regiment  of  voltigeurs,  4 
battalions.  Total  of  2d  division,  17  battalions.  Total  infantry  of  the  imperial  guard,  33  bat- 
talions. 

The  battalions  of  gendarmes,  grenadiers,  and  voltigeurs  have  6  companies ;  the  battalions 
of  zouaves  7  companies,  of  which  1  is  a  depot  company ;  the  battalion  of  foot  rifles  has  10  com- 
panies. 

The  infantry  of  the  line  consists  of  102  regiments,  each  of  3  battalions ;  the  battalion  has  8 
companies. 

There  are  20  battalions  of  foot  rifles;  10  companies  in  a  battalion. 

There  are  3  regiments  of  zouaves,  each  of  three  battalions ;  the  battalion  of  9  companies,  1  of 
which  is  a  depot  company. 

The  light  infantry  of  Africa  consists  of  3  battalions,  each  of  7  companies,  one  of  which  is  a 
depot  company. 

There  are  2  foreign  legions,  each  legion  of  2  regiments,  the  regiments  having  3  battalions  of 
8  companies;  to  the  2d  legion  is  attached,  in  addition,  a  rifle  battalion  of  10  companies. 

The  native  light  infantry  consists  of  1  regiment  of  2  battalions,  having  8  comj^anies  each,  and 
of  6  independent  battalions,  varying  from  3  to  8  comi^anies  each. 

The  staff  of  a  regiment  of  3  battalions  consists  of:  1  colonel ;  1  lieutenant  colonel ;  3  chiefs 
of  battalion ;  1  major ;  4  adjutants,  with  the  rank  of  captain,  (capitaine  adjutant  major ;)  1 
treasurer,  with  the  rank  of  captain,  (capitaine  tresorier ;)  1  captain  of  clothing,  (capitaine 
d'habillement)  1  assistant  treasurer,  a  sub-lieutenant;  1  standard  bearer,  a  sub-lieutenant;  3 
surgeons. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  IWCLELLAN. 


41 


To  the  staff  of  a  regiment  of  4  battalions  1  chief  of  battalion  is  added.  On  the  staff  of  a 
regiment  of  2  battalions  there  are  but  2  chiefs  of  battalion  and  2  adjutants. 

To  the  staff  of  many  of  the  regiments  a  lieutenant  of  the  general  staff  (etat-major)  is  attached, 
for  his  instruction  in  the  service  of  the  arm. 

The  staff  of  an  independent  battalion,  such  as  those  of  the  foot  rifles,  &c.,  consists  of:  1  chief 
of  battalion;  1  captain  major,  a  captain  doing  the  duty  of  major;  1  captain  adjutant;  1  captain, 
as  instructor  of  firing ;  1  lieutenant,  acting  as  treasurer ;  1  lieutenant,  acting  as  clothing  officer ; 
2  surgeons. 

The  non-commissioned  staff  of  a  regiment  of  3  battalions  consists  of:  3  non-commissioned 
adjutants,  (sergeant  majors ;)  1  drum  major,  or  chief  bugler ;  3  "  corporal  drummers, ' '  or  buglers ; 
1  corporal  of  pioneers;  12  pioneers;  1  band  master;  1  corporal  of  musicians;  25  musicians. 

For  an  independent  battalion  the  non-commissioned  staff  consists  of:  1  non-commissioned 
adjutant,  1  chief  bugler,  1  corporal  of  buglers. 

In  each  reo-iment  there  is  a  "company  out  of  ranks,"  composed  of  mechanics,  &c.;  attached 
to  each  independent  battalion,  a  "section  out  of  ranks." 


Reg't.     Batt'n. 


SERC.E.VNTS. 


First  sergeant 

Wagon  master,  with  tlie  rank  of  Ist  sergeant. 

Clerks  of  the  treasurer 

In  charge  of  clothing  magazine 

Fencing  master ■ 

Masters  armorer,  tailor,  and  shoemaker 


COBFOEAXS. 


Clerk  of  treasurer 

Quartermaster  of  the  staff 

Clerks  of  officers  of  clothing  and  armament.. 

Hospital  steward 

Conductor  of  the  train 


Armorer,  (1,)  tailors  and  shoemakers 

Clerk  of  commanding  officer 

Clerk  of  lieutenant  colonel 

Clerks  of  treasurer  and  assistant  treasurer 

Clerks  of  clothing  officer 

Armorers 

Tailors,  varying  with  the  strength  of  the  corps. 
Shoemakers,  varying  with  the  strength  of  the 

corps 

Muleteers  . - 

Enfant  de  troupe 


Total  of  company  or  section  out  of  ranks.. 


Reg't. 


5 
1 
1 
2 
1 
2 
27 

23 


77 


1 

2 

18 

15 
2 


48 


With  the  exception  of  the  foot  rifles,  a  company  consists  of:  1  captain,  1  lieutenant,  1  sub- 
lieutenant, 1  orderly  sergeant,  4  sergeants,  1  quartermaster  sergeant,  8  corporals,  96  privates, 
(the  number  of  privates  varies  somewhat  according  to  circumstances,)  2  musicians,  2  pupils  in 
music,  1  enfant  de  troupe.  In  the  foot  rifles  there  is  an  additional  sergeant  as  instructor  of 
firing,  4  buglers,  no  pupils  in  music,  and  from  100  to  130  privates. 

The  light  infantry  are  formed  in  two  ranks,  the  heavy  infantry  in  three  ranks. 

The  depot  system  appears  to  vary.  In  time  of  peace,  one  of  the  battalions  may  be  used  as  a 
depot ;  in  war,  either  additional  companies  are  added  to  each  battalion  or  an  additional  battalion 
created  for  the  purpose. 

The  duties  of  the  colonel  are  about  as  in  our  service. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  is  in  charge  of  all  the  order  books. 

The  chiefs  of  battalion  are  directly  responsible  to  the  colonel  for  the  instruction,  discipline, 
service,  dress,  condition  of  the  arms,  messing,  quarters,  &c.,  of  their  respective  battalions. 

It  is  the  special  duty  of  the  major  to  examine  and  countersign  all  requisitions  for  arms, 
clothing,  subsistence,  fuel,  &c. 

6  a 


42  MILITAEY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

The  duties  of  the  captain  adjutants  in  their  respective  battalions  correspond  very  nearly  with 
those  of  our  regimental  adjutants. 

The  tactics  of  the  French  infantry  have  not  been  changed  since  they  were  adopted  in  our 
service.  But  little  atteution  is  paid  to  the  individual  "setting  up"  of  the  men  ;  consequently, 
they  present  rather  a  slouching  appearance.  An  exception  to  this  rule  is  found  in  the  elite 
corps,  for  which  men  with  a  good  natural  bearing  are  selected.  Much  irregularity  is  tolerated 
in  marching,  it  being  only  required  that  the  guides  preserve  their  distances  with  great  exact- 
ness. In  the  movements  of  large  columns,  it  is  very  rare  to  see  any  mistakes  in  this  matter. 
The  men  are  allowed  the  utmost  ease  and  latitude  in  ranks.  Some  essential  parts  of  the  French 
instruction  have  been  omitted  in  our  own,  such  as  the  system  of  gymnastics,  natation,  &c. 

The  smooth  bore  musket  is  still  in  general  use  for  the  infantry  of  the  line ;  the  light  infantry 
and  elite  corps  have  rifled  arms.  All  buglers  carry  a  rifle ;  the  drummers  have  none.  The 
infantry  sabre  is  regarded  by  the  men  as  an  useless  incumbrance  ;  they  are  probably  the  best 
judges. 

The  grenadiers  and  voltiguers  of  the  guard  have  the  old  fashion  cross  belts,  without  waist 
belt;  all  other  troops  have  only  a  waist  belt,  the  bayonet  scabbard,  cartridge  box,  &c.,  being 
attached  to  it. 

The  kna^jsaek  is  of  the  pattern  in  possession  of  the  department.  It  is  small  and  of  cow  skin, 
with  the  hair  left  on.  The  shoulder  straps  pass  straight  over  the  shoulders,  and  hook  to  brass 
loops  on  the  waist  belt.  Another  strap  is  fastened  to  the  under  surface  of  the  knapsack  near 
each  outer  corner,  and  buttons  to  the  shoulder  strap  a  little  above  the  armpit. 

When  the  overcoat  is  not  worn,  it  is  rolled  in  a  long  roll,  and  strapped  on  top  and  on  the 
two  sides  of  the  knapsack.  The  shelter  tent  is  carried  in  the  same  manner,  under  the  overcoat, 
if  both  are  attached  to  the  knapsack. 

The  shelter  tent  and  manner  of  using  it  have  been  described  in  a  report  upon  the  French 
cavalry.  The  supporting  sticks  are  in  two  parts,  the  pointed  end  having  a  sheet  iron  socket 
into  which  the  upper  part  fits.  Each  man  carries  one  piece  of  the  tent,  one  stick,  and  two  or 
three  small  tent  pins. 

The  infantry  rations  are  as  for  the  cavalry  ;  so  also  their  cooking  utensils.  In  the  infantry, 
each  mess  generally  consists  of  14  men,  and  has  2  gamelles,  1  lidon,  1  marmite,  sometimes  a 
stewpan  in  addition.  The  men  of  the  mess  take  turns  in  carrying  these,  attaching  them  to  the 
knapsack,  or  in  any  other  manner  they  find  most  convenient.  The  knapsacks  are  never  carried 
in  the  wagons. 


The  annexed  sketch  shows  the  form  and  dimensions  of  the  canteen.     It  is  of  tin, 
covered  with  cloth,  suspended  by  a  cord. 


The  rations  are  generally  carried  in  the  knapsack. 

The  uniform  of  the  infantry  of  the  line  is  too  well  known  to  require  description.  In  the 
Crimea,  they  wore  the  overcoat,  with  epaulets,  and  the  forage  cap;  a  jacket  in  camp.  The  frock 
coats  and  shakos  were  left  in  France. 

The  grenadiers  and  voltigeurs  of  the  guard  have  the  uniform  of  the  imperial  guard  of  the  first 
empire,  except  that  pants  are  substituted  for  the  old  knee  breeches. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  43 

The  foot  rifles  of  the  guard  wear  a  jacket  with  long  skirts,  and  very  loose  pants,  which  are 
tucked  under  leather  gaiters  extending  to  the  top  of  the  calf  of  the  leg. 

The  infantry  of  the  line,  rifles,  &c.,  wore  a  light  blue  merino  scarf,  in  lieu  of  a  stock,  in  the 
Crimea. 

The  dress  of  the  zouave  is  of  the  Arab  pattern  ;  the  cap  is  a  loose  fig,  or  skull  cap,  of  scarlet 
felt,  with  a  tassel ;  a  turban  is  worn  over  this  in  full  dress ;  a  cloth  vest  and  loose  jacket,  which 
leave  the  neck  unencumbered  by  collar,  stock,  or  cravat,  cover  the  upper  portion  of  his  body, 
and  allow  free  movement  of  the  arms;  the  scarlet  pants  are  of  the  loose  oriental  pattern,  and  are 
tucked  under  gaiters  like  those  of  the  foot  rifles  of  the  guard ;  the  overcoat  is  a  loose  cloak, 
with  a  hood ;  the  chasseurs  wear  a  similar  one.  The  men  say  that  this  dress  is  the  most  con- 
venient possible,  and  prefer  it  to  any  other. 

The  zouaves  are  all  French ;  they  are  selected  from  among  the  old  campaigners  for  their  fine 
physique  and  tried  courage,  and  have  certainly  proved  that  they  are  what  their  appearance 
would  indicate,  the  most  reckless,  self-reliant,  and  complete  infantry  that  Europe  can  produce. 

With  his  graceful  dress,  soldierly  bearing,  and  vigilant  attitude,  the  zouave  at  an  outpost  is 
the  beau  ideal  of  a  soldier. 

They  neglect  no  opportunity  of  adding  to  their  personal  comforts ;  if  there  is  a  stream  in  the 
vicinity  the  party  marching  on  picket  is  sure  to  be  amply  supplied  with  fishing  rods,  &c.  ;  if 
anything   is  to  be  had  the  zouaves  are  quite  certain  to  obtain  it. 

Their  movements  are  the  most  light  and  graceful  I  have  ever  seen ;  the  stride  is  long,  but 
the  foot  seems  scarcely  to  touch  the  ground,  and  the  march  is  apparently  made  without  efi'ort  or 
fatigue. 

The  step  of  the  foot  rifles  is  shorter  and  quicker,  and  not  so  easy  and  graceful. 

The  impression  produced  by  the  appearance  of  these  two  corps  is  very  difi'erent ;  the  rifles 
look  like  active,  energetic  little  fellows,  who  would  find  their  best  field  as  skirmishers ;  but  the 
zouaves  have,  combined  with  all  the  activity  and  energy  of  the  others,  that  solid  ensemble  and 
reckless  dare-devil  individuality  which  would  render  them  alike  formidable  when  attacking  in 
mass,  or  in  defending  a  position  in  the  most  desperate  hand  to  hand  encounter.  Of  all  the 
troops  that  I  have  ever  seen,  I  should  esteem  it  the  greatest  honor  to  assist  in  defeating  the 
zouaves.     The  grenadiers  of  the  guard  are  all  large  men,  and  a  fine  looking,  soldierly  set. 

The  voltigeurs  are  small,  active  men,  but  larger  than  the  rifles;  they  are  light  infantry. 

The  appearance  of  the  infantry  of  the  line  is  by  no  means  impressive  ;  it  requires  close  watching 
to  appreciate  their  excellent  qualities. 

The  regulations  for  the  government  of  troops  in  the  field  are  strictly  carried  into  practice,  and 
appear  to  work  well ;  the  only  complaint  appeared  to  be  that  the  number  of  returns  and  accounts 
required  was  so  great  that  it  was  impossible  to  make  them  out  in  time  ;  the  consequence  was 
stated  to  be  that  most  officers  were  very  much  behind  hand  with  their  accounts. 

The  regiments  with  the  shelter  tents  generally  bivouaced  in  line. 

In  the  field  portable  ovens  of  sheet  iron  are  frequently  used.  These,  with  all  the  necessary 
utensils,  are  packed  in  boxes  which  may  be  transported  either  on  mules  or  in  wagons  ;  each 
division  is  provided  with  a  set  of  these,  which  require  from  2  to  3  wagons  for  their  transportation. 
With  the  stone  and  earth  usually  to  be  found  at  the  camp,  these  ovens  can  be  set  up  and  put  in 
working  order  in  24  hours. 

In  the  Crimea  bread  was  baked  in  permanent  ovens  established  at  Kamiesch.  Coffee  was 
usually  sent  to  the  Crimea  green,  and  roasted  there  by  the  men,  each  mess  having  a  cofiee  mill. 
The  cakes  of  biscuit  are  |"  thick,  about  3  to  a  ration ;  they  are  put  up  in  boxes  containing  100 


44  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

rations,  which  pack  well  in  the  subsistence  wagon,  or  can  be  carried  on  mules.  The  exterior 
dimensions  of  these  boxes  are  Sl^-"  X  IS-J"  X  13^".  The  biscuit  is  dried  15  days  before  being 
packed,  is  packed  tight,  and  will  keep  for  many  years. 

The  system  of  fencing  with  the  bayonet,  which  is  in  general  use  in  the  French  army,  does 
not  differ  materially  from  our  own;  a  gutta  percha  bayonet,  with  a  button,  is  used.  The  System 
of  Gymnastics  (edition  of  1847)  gives  the  full  details  of  all  the  materials  necessary,  and  excel- 
lent plates  illustrating  the  various  exercises. 

The  system  of  instruction  in  natation,  by  the  chief  of  battalion  d'Argy,  is  simple  and 
excellent. 

There  is  a  gymnastic  school,  near  Vincennes,  to  which  one  sergeant  or  corporal  is  sent  from 
every  regiment  and  independent  battalion.  They  remain  six  months  at  the  school,  the  best 
pupils  being  retained  six  months  longer  as  assistant  instructors. 

The  course  consists  of  gymnastics,  scaling  walls,  swimming,  fencing  with  the  bayonet, 
singing,  dancing,  reading,  writing,  &c. 

The  agility  and  skill  exhibited  by  the  pupils  was  really  wonderful. 

The  efficiency  of  the  French  infantry  is  in  no  small  degree  attributable  to  the  great  attention 
paid  to  these  points  throughout  the  army. 

Shortly  before  our  visit  to  the  gymnastic  school,  a  series  of  experiments  had  been  carried  on 
there,  by  authority  of  the  minister  of  war,  in  a  system  of  field  telegraphing,  the  invention  of 
Mr.  Swaim,  an  American.  The  object  is  to  communicate  orders  and  intelligence,  as  far  as  the 
eye  can  reach,  by  means  of  combinations  of  simple  objects,  such  as  a  cap  or  coat  on  the  point  of 
a  bayonet,  &c.  It  was  stated  by  tlie  officers  that  the  system  worked  admirably  and  was  of 
value.     It  would  be  worth  the  while  of  our  government  to  inquire  into  the  matter. 

At  Vincennes  there  is  a  school  of  firing  for  officers  of  infantry.  A  lieutenant  or  sub-lieu- 
tenant is  sent  here  every  year  from  every  regiment  or  independent  battalion  of  infantry. 

The  course  is  of  four  months,  and  comprises  the  theory  and  jDractice  of  target  firing, 
full  instruction  as  to  the  construction,  use,  and  preservation  of  fire-arms,  preparation  of 
cartridges,  &c. 

In  a  lesson  in  aiming,  given  by  the  chief  of  battalion  Minie,  the  gist  of  his  instructions  was 
this :  Always  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder ;  in  aiming  at  a  near  object,  (without  the 
hausse,)  raise  the  shoulder,  in  order  to  bring  the  low  sight  up  to  the  level  of  the  eye ;  in  aiming 
at  a  distant  object,  (with  the  high  hausse,)  lower  the  shoulder,  so  as  to  bring  the  top  of  the 
hausse  on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

The  barracks  generally  allow  sufficient  space,  but  are  not  well  arranged  for  the  quietness  of 
the  men. 

Tlie  bunks  usually  consist  of  boards  supported  by  iron  trestles  ;  sometimes  of  iron  bedsteads. 

The  police  of  the  quarters  is  not  generally  good,  but  the  habits  of  the  nation  are  not  remark- 
able for  neatness. 

In  the  field,  as  well  as  in  quarters,  the  officers  bestow  the  utmost  care  upon  the  comfort  and 
well-being  of  the  men,  rightly  regarding  that  as  probably  the  most  essential  element  to  insure 
efficiency,  contentedness,  and  willing  obedience.  This  example  cannot  be  too  strongly  urged 
for  imitation. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.   MTLELLAN.  45 

THE  AUSTRIAN  INFANTRY. 

This  consists  of  62  regiments  of  tte  line,  14  regiments  of  frontier  infantry,  and  32  battalions 
of  rifles. 

During  peace,  the  line  regiments  consist  of  4  field  battalions  of  6  companies  each,  and  1  depot 
battalion  of  4  companies.  In  war,  the  4  grenadier  companies  are  detached  from  their  respective 
battalions  and  form  a  separate  battalion,  being  replaced  in  the  field  battalions  by  new  companies. 

The  frontier  regiments  have  2  field  and  1  depot  battalion. 

Of  the  rifle  battalions,  26  consist  of  4  companies,  the  remainder  of  6  companies  each;  each 
of  the  latter  has  a  depot  company,  while  there  is  1  depot  comjmny  for  every  two  of  the  4  com- 
pany battalions. 

A  grenadier  company  consists  of:  1  captain,  1  lieutenant,  2  sub-lieutenants,  2  sergeants,  12 
corjjorals,  150  privates,  2  drummers,  and  2  pioneers. 

The  other  infantry  companies  consist  of:  1  captain,  1  lieutenant,  2  sub-lieutenants,  2  sergeants, 
12  corporals,  12  lance  coriDorals,  180  to  200  privates,  2  buglers,  2  drummers,  and  2  pioneers. 

A  rifle  company  consists  of:  4  officers,  2  sergeants,  12  corporals,  20  lance  corporals,  160 
privates,  2  buglers,  and  2  pioneers. 

The  company  is  divided  into  4  platoons,  and  the  formation  is  always  in  3  rants. 

The  step  is  30"  long,  and  at  the  rate  of  from  105  to  108  per  minute. 

The  school  of  the  recruit  comprises  the  individual,  squad,  and  platoon  drills,  in  close  order, 
and  as  skirmishers  ;  it  contains  full  instructions  as  to  running,  jumping,  &c.,  detailed  instruc- 
tions in  regard  to  target  practice  and  the  theory  of  firing,  and  a  full  system  for  fencing  with 
the  bayonet. 

In  the  skirmish  drill  the  chain  is  composed  of  groups  of  three  men  ;  the  rear  rank,  or  a  part 
of  it,  being  habitually  employed  as  skirmishers. 

In  the  formation  of  a  company  in  line,  the  captain  is  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  ;  if  the 
company  is  alone,  he  is  at  half-company  distance  in  front  of  the  centre  ;  the  1st  lieutenant  is  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank  ;  the  2d  lieutenant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  ;  the  3d  lieutenant 
by  the  side  of  the  captain,  when  the  latter  is  in  rear  of  the  company  ;  the  sergeants  are  in  the 
front  rank,  between  the  second  and  third  platoons ;  four  corporals  are  posted  as  file-closers  behind 
the  centres  of  the  wings  of  the  company,  the  others  on  the  flanks  of  platoons  ;  the  drummers 
and  pioneers  are  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre ;  the  buglers  of  an  infantry  company  are  on  the 
right"and  left  of  the  centre  rank. 

In  a  rifle  company  the  pioneers  take  the  place  just  prescribed  for  the  buglers  of  an  infantry 
company,  and  the  four  buglers  are  posted  six  paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  company. 

The  field  ofiicers  of  a  regiment  consist  of  one  colonel  commanding,  and  one  field  officer  (a  lieu- 
tenant colonel  or  a  major)  to  command  each  battalion.  There  is  a  regimental  adjutant  (a 
lieutenant)  and  a  battalion  adjutant  (a  sub-lieutenant)  for  each  battalion. 

Each  battalion  has  its  own  colors. 

The  interval  between  battalions  is  twelve  paces. 

The  column  by  companies  is  the  habitual  column  of  manoeuvre ;  it  is  formed  with  full  distance, 
in  close  column,  (three  paces  clear  distance  between  the  subdivisions,)  and  closed  in  mass, 
(without  distance  between  the  subdivisions.)  In  the  manoeuvres  of  large  bodies  of  troops  the 
two  latter  are  most  freqiiently  employed. 

The  Austrian  system  of  forming  square,  and  the  constant  illustrations  given  in  their  tactics 


46  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

of  the  adaptation  of  principles  to  the  ground,  arc  worthy  of  study,  and,  to  some  extent,  of 
imitation. 

It  may  be  remarked  of  the  Austrian,  as  well  as  of  most  of  the  European  infantry,  that  men 
are  allowed  to  swing  the  arm  freely,  and  that  the  piece  is  much  more  frequently  carried  at  a 
slope  than  at  a  carry. 

The  rifles  habitually  carry  their  pieces  slung  on  the  right  shoulder,  (not  across  the  back,) 
the  rifle  behind  the  shoulder,  and  vertical,  the  sling  passing  in  front,  and  grasped  by  the  right 
hand.     This  appears  to  be  the  most  convenient  and  least  fatiguing  manner  of  carrying  it. 

Under  the  new  system  all  small  arms  are  rifled,  and  have  an  uniform  calibre  and  lock  ;  the 
calibre  is  about  the  same  as  our  own  new  model  rifled  musket. 

The  barrel  of  the  infantry  musket  is  37^  inches  long,  has  four  shallow  grooves,  and  a  charge 
of  55  grains. 

The  men  of  the  rear  rank  have  a  hausse  for  longer  distances  than  those  of  the  front  and  centre 
ranks  ;  in  other  respects  the  weapons  are  the  same  ;  the  bayonet  has  four  grooves  ;  the  barrel  of 
the  rifle  is  28  inches  long  ;  the  rear  rank  of  the  rifles  carry  a  "tige  rifle;"  the  rifle  has  a  sword 
bayonet ;  the  rammer  is  separate  from  the  rifle,  has  a  wooden  handle,  and  is  attached  to  the 
shoulder  belt.  Thin  white  cross  belts  are  used,  without  a  waist  belt ;  in  the  rifles  the  belts  are 
black.  The  cartridge  box  contains  four  packages  of  six  rounds  each,  and  the  cleaning  utensils  ; 
six  additional  packages  are  carried  in  the  knapsack.  The  Tyrolese  rifles  use  the  powder  horn. 
Non-commissioned  ofiicers  of  infantry,  and  all  the  grenadiers,  wear  an  infantry  sabre. 

In  each  company  16  hatchets  are  carried  in  a  leather  case  attached  to  the  bayonet  scabbard 
belt. 

Drums  of  brass,  12  inches  high  and  16  inches  in  diameter. 

The  bugle  is,  more  properly  speaking,  a  clarion. 

No  fifes  are  used. 

Musicians  have  a  sabre,  but  no  fire-arms. 

The  pioneers  carry  a  saw,  axe,  and  hatchet,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  engineer  troops. 

The  officers  have  a  light  sabre. 

The  knapsack  is  of  cowskin,  with  the  hair  left  on  ;  it  is  12  inches  square,  and  4^  inches  thick. 
No  breast  strap  is  used  for  the  knapsack  ;  the  two  shoulder  straps  are  attached  to  the  middle  of 
the  top  of  the  knapsack,  pass  over  the  shoulder  and  under  the  arm  to  the  outer  ends  of  the 
bottom  of  the  knapsack ;  fastened  on  the  left  side  by  a  buckle,  on  the  right  by  a  ring  and  hook. 

The  infantry  shako,  cut  of  the  uniform,  belts,  &c.,  are  shown  in  the  figures  accompanying 
the  report  on  the  Austrian  engineer  troops.  The  shako  is  of  black  felt,  with  leather  top  and 
vizor ;  large  brass  eagle  in  front ;  wooden  pompon,  trimmed  with  brass  ;  a  black  water-proof 
cover  goes  over  the  shako  and  vizor  ;  when  this  is  put  on,  the  pompon  and  eagle  are  removed, 
and  put  inside  the  shako  in  the  top  lining. 

The  forage  cap  is  of  light  blue  cloth,  of  the  gig-top  shape  ;  it  has  no  vizor,  but  two  flaps  of 
cloth,  (which  can  be  turned  up,)  serving  as  ear  covers  in  cold  weather,  and  which  may  serve  as 
substitutes  for  a  vizor.     The  men  are  all  provided  with  mittens  of  blue  cloth. 

The  frock  coat  is  of  excellent  thick  white  cloth  ;  the  buttons  white  and  plain  ;  coat  lined  with 
thick  linen  ;  facings  and  cufi's  different  for  difierent  regiments. 

This  white  coat  always  looks  well,  and  the  officers  prefer  it  to  any  other  color,  stating  that  it 
is  very  easy  to  keep  it  clean  in  the  field,  by  washing  and  pipe  clay. 

The  men  usually  wear  a  vest,  made  of  an  old  coat. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  47 

The  pants  are  of  light-blue  cloth,  with  a  white  cord;  always  have  pockets.  The  pants  of  the 
Hungarian  and  Croat  infantry  fit  perfectly  tight  to  the  leg. 

Gaiters  of  black  cloth. 

The  shoes  come  well  up  on  the  ankle  ;  the  men  put  nails  and  iron  heels  upon  them. 

The  stock  black,  with  a  white  edge  on  top  ;  it  has  a  bottom  flap. 

The  overcoat  is  of  gray  cloth,  with  a  large  rolling  collar  ;  it  is  made  quite  loose.  All  guards 
in  garrison  are  provided  with  special  overcoats  for  the  sentinels. 

The  coat  and  pants  of  the  rifles  are  of  a  bluish  gray,  cut  like  those  of  the  infantry  ;  but, 
instead  of  the  shoulder  strap,  there  is  placed  at  the  point  of  the  shoulder  a  raised  crescent- 
shaped  pad  of  cloth. 

Their  hat  is  of  felt,  turned  up  on  both  sides,  and  has  a  large  black  plume  of  cocks'  feathers. 

The  overcoat  is  folded  in  a  long  roll,  and  strapped  to  the  top  and  both  sides  of  the  knapsack. 
Extra  shoes  are  tied  to  the  sides  of  the  knapsack. 

The  uniform  coat  is  always  carried  in  the  field  ;  no  extra  pants  carried. 

The  forage  cap  is  carried  in  a  small  pocket  on  the  front  of  the  knapsack. 

The  contents  of  the  knapsack  are :  1  pair  of  drawers,  1  shirt,  1  handkerchief,  1  pair  of  feet 
wrappers,  (socks  not  being  used,)  and  the  usual  brushes,  cleaning  utensils,  &c. 

The  clothing  is  issued  to  the  captains  either  made  up,  but  not  trimmed,  or  else  in  the  form  of 
cloth,  as  they  may  elect.  The  system  has  been  explained  in  the  report  upon  the  Austrian 
cavalry. 

The  distinctive  marks  of  rank  are  as  in  the  cavalry.  It  may  be  repeated  that  no  epaulettes 
are  worn  by  the  infantry,  the  shoulders  of  the  officers  being  entirely  bare. 

Tlie  rations  and  cooking  utensils  are  as  for  the  cavalry  ;  the  kettle  is,  however,  for  a  mess  of 
14  men,  and  they  are  carried  either  in  wagons  or  on  pack  horses. 

Each  man  has  a  "little  gamelle,"  like  those  of  the  French,  which  is  attached  to  the  knapsack. 
Bread  is  carried  either  under  the  flap  of  the  knapsack  or  in  a  linen  haversack.  12  tin  canteens 
are  carried  in  each  platoon. 

Tents  are  not  used  in  the  field,  the  men  being  expected  to  construct  such  temporary  shelters 
as  the  material  at  hand  renders  possible  ;  in  camps  of  instruction  tents  are  provided.  The  men 
carry  no  blanket  in  the  field,  merely  the  overcoat. 

In  quarters  the  bedsteads  are  single,  and  of  iron ;  each  man  has  a  b?dsack,  pillow,  two 
blankets,  and  a  pair  of  coarse  sheets  ;  all  these  belong  to  the  barracks,  and  are  in  charge  of  the 
captain  inspector.  The  bedsacks  are  filled  every  three  months.  During  the  day  the  bedsacks 
are  kept  down,  but  the  blankets,  &c.,  are  folded  at  the  head  of  the  bed.  Each  man  has  a  rack 
and  shelf  at  the  head  of  his  bed.  The  rooms  are  generally  dirty  and  filled  with  tobacco  smoke; 
those  of  the  Polish  companies  were  the  cleanest.  The  men  eat  in  their  rooms.  The  arms  and 
accoutrements  are  kept  in  the  corridors.     A  part  of  the  officers  live  in  the  barracks. 

PROPRIETORS  OF   REGIMENTS,   PROMOTION,   MARRIAGE,   INVALIDS,   ETC. 

The  "proprietor"  of  a  regiment  confers  his  name  upon  it,  receives  about  $150  per  month, 
and  nominates  the  officers  up  to  the  grade  of  captain,  inclusive.  He  is  obliged  to  follow  the 
ordinary  rules  of  appointment  and  promotion,  but  decides  as  to  the  application  of  those  rules. 
Promotion  always  goes  by  seniority,  provided  the  senior  is  fit  for  his  new  duties  ;  it  is  in  the 
regiment  up  to  the  grade  of  colonel,  after  that  in  the  whole  army.  The  senior  captains  and 
field  officers   are  sometimes  transferred  to  other  regiments  in  order  to  equalize  promotion. 


48  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

Colonels  rank  in  the  whole  army  by  seniority,  iirespective  of  corps,  and  are  promoted  according 
to  seniority,  if  competent ;  if  not,  they  are  retired. 

An  officer  who  is  retired  after  five  years  receives  a  certain  pension  ;  after  ten  years'  service,  a 
greater  one  ;  and  so  on  for  every  additional  five  years. 

Any  one  under  the  grade  of  general,  who  retires  after  thirty  years'  service,  receives  the  full 
pay  of  his  grade  ;  a  general  who  retires  after  fifty  years'  service  receives  full  pay. 

The  various  medals,  decorations,  &c.,  carry  with  them  a  certain  salary,  which  is  continued 
during  the  life  of  the  recipient,  even  should  he  leave  the  service,  and  is  given  to  his  widow 
during  her  life  ;  there  is  no  other  pension  than  this  for  soldiers. 

There  are  several  invalid  asylums  in  the  empire,  each  for  a  fixed  number  of  officers  and  men  ; 
the  officers  are  furnished  with  quarters,  fuel,  and  attendance.  When  a  vacancy  occurs,  the 
oldest  soldier  entitled  to  be  retired  receives  the  place  ;  if  a  soldier  is  disabled  by  wounds,  &c., 
he  must  return  to  his  friends  and  await  his  turn  for  the  asylum. 

Ketired  and  disabled  soldiers  receive  the  preference  in  all  government  employments,  such  as 
on  railways,  as  orderlies  in  public  offices,  in  the  service  of  the  posts,  &c. 

Eight  years  is  the  term  of  service  for  all  arms.  The  men  are  drawn  by  conscription,  only 
sons  being  exempted.  In  1855  and  1856  the  authorized  price  for  a  substitute  was  about  $300. 
A  man  who  re-enlists,  after  eight  years'  service,  may  demand  his  discharge  at  any  time. 

Men  sent  home  upon  a  reduction  of  the  army  are  liable  to  be  recalled  at  any  time  until  their 
eight  years  are  out ;  the  time  thus  sjjent  at  home  counts  in  the  eight  years,  but  they  receive  no 
pay  while  absent  from  their  regiments. 

As  a  general  rule  the  men  are  not  permitted  to  marry,  but  a  certain  number  of  laundresses 
are  allowed  each  company.  Under  no  pretext  can  more  than  one-sixth  of  the  officers  of  any 
regiment  or  special  corps  be  married.  When  any  officer  desires  to  marry,  he  makes  an  applica- 
tion, and  receives  permission  in  his  turn  when  the  first  vacancy  occurs,  irrespective  of  rank. 
Before  he  is  permitted  to  marry,  an  officer  must  deposit  in  the  hands  of  the  government  a 
certain  sum,  different  for  the  various  grades  and  corps.  He  receives  the  legal  interest  of  this 
money  every  month. 

Privates  are  placed  on  courts  martial  for  the  trial  of  their  peers.  Not  more  than  100  blows 
can  be  given  ;  the  usual  manner  of  inflicting  them  is  on  the  seat,  the  pants  being  kept  on. 
Flogging  is  rarely  resorted  to,  and  only  with  hardened  characters  and  for  heinous  offences. 
For  desertion,  the  penalty  is  flogging  for  the  1st  and  2d  offences,  death  for  the  3d.  An  officer 
on  detachment  has  great  powers  in  regard  to  the  infliction  of  punishment. 

As  far  as  possible,  especially  in  time  of  war,  offences  are  tried  and  punished  within  24  hours 
of  the  arrest  of  the  ofi"ender.  Duty  on  courts  martial  is  a  matter  of  regular  detail,  according  to 
the  roster. 

The  money  for  the  pay,  &c.,  of  the  men  is  drawn  by  the  captain  ;  he  issues  the  ration  money 
every  day  to  the  1st  sergeant,  the  balance  every  five  days.  The  1st  sergeant  turns  over  the 
ration  money  for  each  squad  to  its  corporal,  who  makes  the  purchases  ;  in  doing  this,  he  is 
always  accompanied  by  one  or  two  men  selected  by  the  squad. 

The  captain  makes  out  the  requisition  for  the  money  ;  this  is  examined  and  approved  by  the 
"war  commissary,"  whose  signature  constitutes  the  order  upon  the  military  chest  for  the  pay- 
ment to  the  captain.  The  captain  draws  the  pay  of  the  officers  on  the  same  requisition.  The 
commissary,  who  gives  the  order,  never  has  charge  of  the  money,  his  only  duty  being  to 
examine  and  verify  the  accounts. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN,  49 

When  a  man  is  in  the  hospital  his  pay  ceases,  and  he  is  struck  off  the  company  pay-roll, 
being  supplied  with  food  by  the  hospital. 

Since  the  affairs  of  1848  and  1849,  the  organization  and  instruction  of  the  Austrian  infantry, 
as  well  as  that  of  the  other  arms  of  service,  have  been  much  improved.  In  the  next  war  in 
which  they  are  engaged  the  beneficial  effect  will  no  doubt  be  perceived.  The  rifles  are  a  fine 
set  of  men,  and  will  probably  hold  their  own  against  any  similar  troops  with  whom  they  may 
be  brought  in  contact. 

THE  PKUSSIAN  INFANTRY. 

The  general  organization  of  the  regular  army  and  the  landwehr,  the  term  of  service,  &c., 
have  been  explained  in  a  preceding  report  upon  the  Prussian  cavalry.     The  infantry  consists  of: 

(a)  The  standing  army — 

Battalions. 

4  regiments  of  guards 12 

1  reserve  regiment  of  the  guards 2 

2  battalions  of  rifles  of  the  guards 2 

32  regiments  of  infantry  of  the  line 96 

8  regiments  of  reserve  infantry 16 

8  combined  reserve  battalions 8 

8  battalions  of  rifles = 8 

144 

(b)  The  landwehr  of  the  1st  levy — 

4  landwehr  regiments  of  the  guard 12 

32  provincial  landwehr  regiments 96 

8  landwehr  battalions  of  the  reserve  regiments 8 

116  116 

(c)  Same  for  landwfihr  of  2d  levy 116 

376 
In  time  of  war  the  following  is  the  general  division  of  the  infantry  : 

A.    INFANTRY  DISPOSABLE  FOR  ACTIVE  OPERATIONS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

(1)  The  guards — 

4  regiments  of  infantry  of  the  guard  12 

1  reserve  regiment  of  the  guards 2 

2  battalions  of  rifles  of  the  guards 2 

(2)  Infantry  of  the  line — 

32  regiments  of  infantry  of  the  line 96 

8  regiments  of  reserve  infantry,  combined  with  their  8  battalions  of  the  landwehr, 

forming  8  regiments  of  3  battalions  each 24 

8  battalions  of  rifles 8 

144 

(3)  Landwehr  of  the  1st  levy — 

4  guard  and  32  provincial  regiments 108 

Total  disposable  for  field  operations 252 

7  © 


50  MILITAEY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


B.   DEPOT  TROOPS. 


(1)  For  each  infantry  brigade  of  6  battalions,  (formed  by  the  union  of  a  regiment  of 

the  standing  army  with  the  corresponding  regiment  of  landwehr,)  there  is  a 
depot  battalion  of  6  comjjanies,  (1  company  for  each  battalion  ;)  the  combined 
reserve  battalions  form  the  nucleus  of  these  depot  battalions 36 

(2)  10  depot  companies  for  the  10  rifle  battalions 2^ 


Total  depot  battalions 3 


(c)  Landwehr  of  the  2d  levy 116 

Total  battalions  in  time  of  war 406i 


On  the  war  footing  each  battalion  numbers  1,002  men,  exclusive  of  officers  and  the  train. 

In  time  of  peace  the  strength  of  each  company  is  as  follows :  1  captain,  1  first  lieutenant,  3 
second  lieutenants,  1  orderly  sergeant,  1  ensign,  3  sergeants,  12  corporals,  10  lance  corporals,  4 
musicians,  and  125  privates.  In  war  the  number  of  privates  is  increased  to  219 ;  making  the 
strength  of  the  company  250,  exclusive  of  officers,  and  that  of  the  battalion  1,002,  including  the 
drum  major  and  battalion  clerk. 

For  each  battalion  there  is  one  field  officer  in  command,  who  is  a  lieutenant  colonel  or  major, 
a  battalion  adjutant,  with  the  rank  of  second  lieutenant,  and  two  supernumerary  captains. 

On  the  regimental  staff  there  is  1  colonel,  1  regimental  adjutant,  1  regimental  surgeon,  some- 
times a  sujjernumerary  field  officer,  and  1  regimental  clerk. 

In  addition  each  battalion  has  1  treasurer,  2  or  3  surgeons,  and  1  armorer. 

The  regimental  bands  of  the  guards  consist  of  48  men ;  those  of  the  regiments  of  the  line  of 
only  10  men. 

In  time  of  peace  the  organization  of  army  corps  is  according  to  provinces. 

In  war  the  active  army  forms  9  army  corps,  viz:   1  of  the  guards  and  8  of  the  line. 

The  corresponding  regiments  of  the  line  and  the  first  levy  of  the  landwehr  are  brigaded 
together,  i.  e.,  the  8th  regiment  of  the  line  and  the  8th  regiment  of  landwehr  form  1  brigade  of 
6  battalions. 

An  army  corps,  on  the  war  establishment,  consists  of:  2  infantry  divisions,  1  cavalry  division, 
the  reserve  artillery,  and  a  division  of  pioneers. 

(a)  Each  infantry  division  consists  of  2  infantry  brigades,  1  regiment  of  cavalry,  and  2  foot 
batteries.     A  battalion  of  rifles  is  attached  to  one  of  the  divisions. 

(b)  The  cavalry  division  consists  of  6  regiments  of  cavalry  and  2  batteries  of  horse  artillery. 
Four  regiments  of  cavalry  of  the  line  and  four  regiments  of  landwehr  cavalry  compose  the  cavalry 
of  an  army  corps.     Special  cavalry  corps  are  formed  only  in  case  of  necessity. 

(c)  The  reserve  artillery  consists  of  4  foot  batteries  and  1  horse  battery ;  this  is  commanded  by 
a  field  officer. 

(d)  A  division  of  pioneers,  generally  with  at  least  one  ponton  train,  is  attached  to  each  army 
corps. 

The  order  of  battle  of  an  active  army  corps  is  as  follows  : 

Advanced  guard. — One  infantry  brigade,  (6  battalions,)  1  cavalry  regiment,  and  8  guns. 
Mainhody. — One  infantry  division,  (12  battalions,)  1  cavalry  regiment,  and  21  guns. 
Reserve. — One  infantry  brigade,  (6  battalions,)   1  rifle  battalion,  and  8  guns ;  the  cavalry 
division,  (24  squadrons,)  the  reserve  artillery,  6  batteries,  (48  guns,)  the  pioneer  division. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    irCLELLAN.  51 

Total  of  an  army  corps  :  Men. 

25  battalions 25,000 

32  squadrons 4,800 

88  guns 2,000 

1  division  of  pioneers 500 

32,300 


The  nine  army  corps  consist  of  226  battalions,  228  squadrons,  792  guns,  and  about  4,500  of  "tbe 
technical  troops. 

The  military  staff  of  an  active  army  corps  consists  of: 

(a)  The  general  commanding.  General  staff:  1  general  as  chief,  1  field  officer,  1  captain. 
Aides  de  camp :  1  captain  of  infantry,  1  captain  of  cavalry,  2  lieutenants.  Engineers:  1  field 
officer  and  1  captain. 

(6)  Two  generals  commanding  the  infantry  divisions,  one  general  commanding  the  cavalry 
division.  General  staff:  in  each  division,  1  field  officer,  or  1  captain.  Aides  de  camp:  in 
each  infantry  division,  1  captain  of  infantry  and  1  lieutenant ;  in  each  cavalry  division,  1 
captain  of  cavalry  and  1  lieutenant. 

(c)  Four  brigadier  generals  of  infantry,  two  brigadier  generals  of  cavalry. 

Each  general  of  brigade  has  1  lieutenant  as  aide  de  camp. 

A  permanent  guard  for  headquarters  is  detailed  from  the  reserve  squadrons  and  battalions  of 
the  landwehr,  and  consists  of  1  officer,  5  non-commissioned  officers,  and  37  privates  of  cavalry, 
10  non-commissioned  officers  and  42  privates  of  infantry. 

The  administration  of  an  active  army  corps  consists  of: 

(a)  The  intendancy,  comprising  the  intendancy  of  the  corps,  and,  under  it,  one  section  of  the 
intendancy  for  each  division,  and  one  for  the  artillery  reserve. 

(6)  The  military  chest  of  the  corps,  with  four  6-horse  wagons. 

(c)  The  commissariat  officers,  consisting  of  1  chief  commissary  and  1  commissary  for  each 
of  the  3  divisions  and  the  reserve  artillery,  as  well  as  1  in  charge  of  the  bakeries. 

(d)  The  provision  trains,  organized  as  a  battalion,  and  comprising  :  1.  The  staff  of  the  train 
battalion,  with  one  2-horse  wagon.  2.  Five  provision  columns,  consisting  of  five  6-horse 
wagons  and  one  hundred  and  fifty-five  4-horse  wagons.  3.  A  field  bakery  column,  with  five 
4-horse  wagons.  4.  A  horse  depot  with  seventy-five  spare  horses,  and  a  2-horse  wagon  for 
papers. 

(e)  The  field  hospital,  consisting  of:  1.  A  main  field  hospital  for  1,200  invalids.  2.  Three 
flying  hospitals,  each  for  200  invalids. 

(/)  The  military  post  office,  consisting  of :  1.  One  postmaster.  2.  A  post  office  for  each  of 
the  three  divisions  and  the  artillery  reserve. 

Total  number  of  wagons  of  the  administration  from  a  to/ — 

9  6-horse  wagons. 

204  4-horse  wagons. 

41  2-horse  wagons. 


Total 254  wagons. 


(g)  The  chief  surgeon  of  the  corps. 

(h)  The  judge  advocate's  department,  consisting  of:  1.  A  judge  advocate  for  the  corps.     2. 


52  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

Six  judges  advocate  of  division,  i.  e.,  one  for  eacli  infantry  brigade,  one  for  the  cavalry  division, 
and  one  for  the  artillery  reserve. 

(€)  Seven  chaplains,  i.  e.,  one  for  each  infantry  brigade,  one  for  the  cavalry  division,  one  for 
the  artillery  reserve,  and  one  for  the  hospitals. 

The  allowance  for  the  transportation  of  baggage,  &c.,  is  as  follows  : 

A.  A  battalion  of  infantry  is  provided  with — 

1.   0?ie  A-horse  luagonfor  officers'  baggage. 

Pounds. 

(a)  Adjutant's  desk 40 

(6)  Mess  chest  of  field  officers 40 

(c)  22  officers'  portmanteaus,  at  61  pounds,  and  1  at  102  pounds 1,444 

(d)  Armorer's  tools 225 

(e)  Surgeon's  baggage  and  instruments 60 

Total  weight 1,809 

2.  One  i-horse  equipment  wagon. 

(a)  Money  chest 306 

(6)  Treasurer's  books,  &c.... 40 

(c)   Spare  articles  of  equipment,  shoemakers'  and  tailors'  tools,  &c 1,305 

{d)  Surgeon's  baggage  and  instruments 60 

Total  weight 1,711 


•'o^ 


3.  One  2-Jicn'se  medicine  cart. 

(a)  Surgeon's  baggage,  i.  e.,  60  pounds  for  portmanteau  of  the  battalion  surgeon  and 

40  pounds  for  medical  books 100 

(6)  Chests  of  medicines,  bandages,  &c 257 

Total  weight.... 357 

4.  Four  company  pack  animals,  each  carrying — 

(a)  Mess  chest  of  company  officers 60 

(6)  Blankets  for  sick  men 45 

(c)  Overcoats  of  the  four  lieutenants 18| 

(d)  Baggage  of  the  orderly  sergeant 20 

(e)  Money,  &c.,  when  on  detachment 50 

Total  load  of  each  animal 193^ 

The  captains  carry  their  overcoats  on  their  own  horses. 

The  normal  load  of  a  4-horse  wagon  is 1,836 

The  normal  load  of  a  2-horse  wagon  is 816 

The  normal  load  of  a  pack  animal  is 204 


Exclusive  of  cleaning  utensils,  forage,  &c. 


REPORT   OP   CAPT.   GEORGE    B.    irCLELLAN.  53 

B.  A  battalion  of  rifles  is  provided  with — 

One  2-horse  equipment  tuagon. 

Pounds. 

Money  chest 306 

Measurer's  books,  &c 40 

Adjutant's  desk 40 

Officers'  portmanteaus 225 

Armorer's  tools 180 

Total  weight 791 


One  2-horse  medicine  cart,  as  for  the  infantry  battalions. 
Uach  company  has  4  pack  animals,  on  which  it  packs — 

Officers'  mess  chest 60 

Officers'  portmanteaus 310 

Spare  equipments,  &c 250 

Blankets  for  sick  men 45 

Overcoats  of  officers 18| 

Baggage  of  orderly  sergeant 20 

Baggage  of  surgeons,  hospital  attendant*,  &c 60 


Total  load  of  the  4  pack  animals  of  a  comj^any 


Tactics,  instruction,  d:c. — The  rifles  are  formed  in  2  ranks,  all  other  infantry  in  3  ranks.  The 
largest  men  are  in  the  front  rank,  the  most  active  men  and  best  shots  in  the  third  rank  ;  these 
men  being  habitually  employed  as  skirmishers.  The  distance  between  the  ranks  is  2',  measured 
from  the  back  of  the  front  rank  to  the  breast  of  the  next  rank.  The  company  is  divided  into  2 
platoons;  platoons  of  20  files  and  upwards  into  half  platoons ;  the  latter  into  sections.  Platoons 
of  less  than  20  files  are  divided  only  into  sections.  The  section  consists  of  not  more  than  6,  nor 
less  than  4  files.  In  a  detached  company  the  officers,  &c.,  are  posted  as  follows:  the  captain  at 
one-third  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  centre ;  the  1st  lieutenant  commands  the  2d  platoon, 
and  is  posted  on  its  right  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  senior  2d  lieutenant  commands  the  1st  platoon, 
and  is  posted  on  its  right  in  the  front  rank ;  the  next  2d  lieutenant  is  on  the  left  of  the  2d  platoon, 
in  the  front  rank ;  the  junior  2d  lieutenant  is  4  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  1st  platoon ;  the 
orderly  sergeant  is  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  (2  paces  behind  the  rear  rank,)  in  rear  of  the  2d  file 
from  the  right  of  the  company ;  the  right  guides  of  the  platoons  are  in  the  rear  rank ;  the  left 
guides  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  behind  the  2d  files  from  the  left  of  their  platoons ;  the  remainder  of 
the  non-commissioned  officers  are  at  equal  intervals  in  the  rank  of  file-closers  ;  the  field  music, 
12  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  company,  except  on  parade,  when  they  are  2  paces  from  the 
right  of  the  company,  on  the  alignment  of  the  centre  rank. 

In  a  battalion  the  platoons  are  numbered  from  1  to  8,  in  a  regular  series  from  right  to  left. 

The  color  guard,  consisting  of  the  color  bearer,  who  is  a  non-commissioned  officer,  and  5  color 
corporals,  is  posted  between  the  4th  and  5th  platoons. 

The  commander  of  the  battalion,  with  a  musician,  is  posted  at  company  distance  in  front  of 
the  centre;  the  adjutant,  12  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre. 


54  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUEOPE. 

Eacli  captain  commands  the  1st  platoon  of  his  own  comjiany,  and  is  posted  in  the  front  rank 
on  its  right ;  the  1st  lieutenants  are  posted  as  explained  for  a  detached  company ;  the  2d  lieu- 
tenant of  the  4th  company  is  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion  ;  all  the  other  2d 
lieutenants  are  in  the  rank  of  commissioned  iile-closers,  (4  paces  behind  the  rear  rank,)  in  rear 
of  their  respective  platoons  ;  the  non-commissioned  officers  are  posted  as  i^rescribed  for  a  detached 
company. 

All  the  field  music  of  the  battalion  is  united,  and  posted  4  paces  on  the  left  of  the  adjutant ; 
the  hand  is  4  paces  on  his  right.  On  parade,  all  the  music  is  on  the  right  of  the  battalion.  The 
length  of  step  is  29";  the  rate  of  march  108  steps  per  minute,  except  in  the  bayonet  charge,  when 
it  is  120.  The  march  is  steady,  but  strikes  one  as  being  stiff  and  awkward  ;  for  the  foot  is 
raised  very  high,  the  toe  much  pointed,  the  knee  much  stiffened,  and  the  foot  brought  down 
with  a  shock;  the  noise  thus  made  by  a  column  is  something  quite  extraordinary. 

The  manual  of  arms  presents  nothing  peculiar  beyond  the  fact  of  bayonets  never  being 
unfixed,  and  the  method  of  loading  the  needle  gun.  The  piece  is  very  generally  carried  at  a 
slope  arms,  or  a  sergeant's  carry. 

The  minimum  of  target  practice  is,  that  each  man  must  fire  one  shot  every  week ;  but  this 
minimum  is  far  exceeded. 

The  individual  carriage  and  instruction  of  the  Prussian  infantry  is  excellent. 

The  formation  into  "company  columns" — i.  e.,  forming  a  third  platoon  of  the  men  of  the 
third  rank,  for  skirmishing  and  light  infantry  service — is  employed,  and  does  not  difi"er  in  any 
essential  particular  from  the  system  explained  in  the  report  upon  the  Russian  infantry. 

The  chain  of  skirmishers  consists  of  pairs  of  men.  The  system  is  full  and  good,  but  presents 
nothing  peculiar. 

The  movements  of  a  battalion,  its  formation  in  column,  &c.,  are  habitually  by  platoon. 

The  battalion  advancing  in  line,  at  the  command  "prepare  to  charge,"  the  battalion  at  once 
takes  the  gait  of  120  steps  per  minute,  the  colors  fall  back  into  the  front  rank,  the  commander 
rides  to  the  rear;  at  12  paces  from  the  enemy  he  gives  the  command  "charge  bayonets — 
charge,"  on  which  the  front  and  centre  ranks  bring  down  their  pieces,  and  all  charge  with  the 
"hurrah." 

In  the  close  column  the  distance  between  subdivisions  is  4',  measured  from  the  front  rank  of  one 
subdivision  to  the  rear  rank  of  the  one  next  in  front  of  it. 

The  double  column  on  the  centre  platoons  is  the  column  of  attack,  and  the  habitual  column 
of  mancEuvre.  In  this  the  distances  are  as  in  close  column,  except  that  two  paces  clear  distance 
is  left  between  the  second  and  third  subdivisions ;  the  music  is  in  this  distance. 

Square  is  formed  from  the  double  column  on  the  centre.  At  the  command  "form  square," 
the  3d  and  6th  platoons  close  uj)  to  2'  from  the  4th  and  5th,  the  1st  and  8th  do  the  same  with 
regard  to  the  2d  and  Tth ;  the  4  rear  platoons  face  about ;  the  color  bearer  retires  to  the  centre 
of  the  square;  the  three  outer  flank  files  of  the  2d,  3d,  6th,  and  Yth  jjlatoons  face  outwards, 
these  short  sides  of  the  squares  being  completed  by  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  men 
of  the  rear  rank  of  the  central  platoons,  formed  3  deep ;  in  the  same  manner  the  intervals 
between  the  4th  and  5th,  the  1st  and  8th  platoons  are  filled.  If  either  of  the  short  sides  is 
attacked,  then  the  3  flank  files  of  the  head  and  rear  of  the  square,  on  that  side,  face  in  that 
direction. 

The  square  being  formed,  the  command  "square — ready!"  is  given;  upon  this  the  front 
rank  men  of  all  the  faces  charge  bayonets,  the  2d  and  3d  ranks  come  to  a  ready. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'^CLELLAN. 


55 


or 


The  firing  is  usually  by  vollies,  of  one  rank  at  a  time ;  no  rank  fires  without  the  special  order 
of  the  commander. 

The  interval  between  consecutive  battalions  is  20  paces. 

A  brigade  is  formed  in  two  or  more  lines,  the  usual  distance  being  150  paces. 

It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  Prussian  Infantry  Tactics,  from  the  school  of  the  recruit  to 
that  of  the  brigade,  inclusive,  form  only  one  small  volume  of  228  pages. 

AKMS   AND   ACCOUTREMENTS. 

All  the  regiments  of  the  guards,  and  at  least  one  battalion  of  every  regiment  of  the  line,  are 
armed  with  the  "needle  gun,"  (ziindnadelgurche  ;)  the  rest  of  the  infantry  of  the  line  have 
the  percussion  musket ;  the  rifles  of  the  guard  have  a  "needle  rifle,"  (ziindnadelbuchsen ;)  the 
rifles  of  the  line  have  the  Tige  rifle. 

The  needle  gun  is  rifled,  and  loads  at  the  breech.  An  aperture  exists  in  the  upper  surface  of 
the  barrel,  near  the  b/3eech ;  this  is  opened  and  the  cartridge  slipped  in  horizontally.  In  the 
cartridge,  near  the  base  of  the  ball,  there  is  a  pellet  of  fulminating  powder ;  behind  the  cartridge 
there  is  a  long  sharp  needle  in  the  axis  of  the  barrel;  this  is  connected  with  a  spiral  spring. 
Upon  pulling  the  trigger  the  spring  is  liberated,-  and  drives  the  needle  through  the  cartridge 
into  the  fulminating  compound. 

Prussian  Knapsack. 


The  hooks  O  hook  to  the  inside  belt.    G  is  an  iron  pin,  by  means  of  which  the  shoulder  straps  may  be  lengthened  or  shortened,    A  E  is  the 

camp  kettle. 


56 


MILITARY  COMMISSION   TO   KUROri'! 


13" 


^ 


-XT 

L 


&K 


ir\\.. 


^ 


The  target  practice  witli  the  needle  gun  is  carried  up  to  1,000  paces,  and  seven  shots  per 
minute  can  he  fired. 

There  is  no  other  helt  than  a  waist  helt ;  to  this  the  sahre  and  cartridge  boxes  are  attached. 
There  is  no  bayonet  scabbard,  the  bayonet  never  being  unfixed,  except  in  the  case  of  the  rifles, 
who  have  a  sword  bayonet. 

The  cartridge  boxes  hold  20  rounds  each,  and  are  6"  X  3"  X  2"  ;  in  the  field  each  man  carries 
two,  in  front  of  the  body,  and  on  each  side  of  the  belt  plate  ;  in  garrison  but  one  is  carried,  and 
that  in  front  of  the  middle  of  the  body.  The  cap  pouch  is  on  the  front  of  the  box,  under  the 
flap.     Two  tin  boxes,  (2f"  X  1"  X  f",)  each  containing  forty  caps,  are  carried  in  the  knapsack. 

In  each  company  one  man  carries  on  his  waist  belt  two  boxes  (6^"  X  4"  X  3")  containing 
medicines  in  vials  ;  this  man  carries  no  musket,  and  is  under  the  direction  of  the  surgeon. 
Patterns  of  these  boxes  were  obtained  by  the  commission,  and  are  in  possession  of  the  War 
Department.     Each  soldier  carries  a  small  supply  of  lint  in  his  knapsack. 

The  knapsack  is  of  cowskin,  and  as  shown  in  the  preceding  figures. 

The  overcoat  is  either  strapped  to  the  top  and  sides  of  the  knapsack,  as  exj^lained  for  the 
Austrian  infantry,  or  is  rolled  in  its  full  length,  the  ends  fastened  together  by  a  strap,  and  the 
whole  thrown  over  one  shoulder,  crossing  the  back,  and  passing  under  the  other  arm. 

Of  the  four  musicians,  two  are  drummers  and  two  fifers  ;  each  fifer  has  also  a  bugle. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  57 

The  drums  are  18"  in  diameter  and  4"  deep — including  the  rims,  6"  deep.  Each  drummer 
has  a  leather  apron  on  his  left  thigh. 

UNIFORM. 

The  uniform  of  the  officers  differs  hut  little  from  that  of  the  Russians,  except  in  color. 

The  helmet  is  worn  by  all  the  infantry,  except  the  rifles,  whose  head  dress  is  like  that  of  the 
Austrian  rifles.  The  frock  coat  is  universally  worn ;  for  the  infantry  it  is  dark  blue,  for  the 
rifles  green;  the  distinctions  of  army  corps,  regiments,  grade,  &c.,  are  found  on  the  collars  and 
cuffs  ;  the  sword-knot  is  also  a  distinction  of  grade,  and  of  companies  in  the  same  battalion. 
The  overcoat  is  of  dark  gray,  without  cape,  and  with  a  standing  collar.  The  shoulder  straps 
on  the  frock-coats  and  overcoats  of  the  men  are  of  the  Russian  pattern. 

The  material  of  the  clothing  is  very  good,  and  it  is  well  made  up.  Each  man  has  a  pair  of 
cloth  mittens  and  a  pair  of  ear  covers. 

The  contents  of  the  knapsack  are  :  1  pair  of  cloth  pants,  1  overcoat,  1  forage  cap,  1  pair  of 
shoes,  1  pair  of  extra  soles,  1  shirt,  1  pair  of  drawers,  brushes,  shaving  materials,  and  20  rounds 
of  cartridges ;  weight  of  the  whole  about  20  pounds.  The  whole  load  of  the  men,  including 
arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition,  &c.,  &c.,  is  somewhat  less  than  60  pounds.  All  other 
essential  points  in  relation  to  the  clothing  have  been  given  in  the  report  upon  the  Prussian 
cavalry. 

RATIONS. 

The  rations,  cooking  utensils,  &c.,  are  the  same  as  in  the  cavalry.  It  ought  to  have  been 
stated  in  the  report  upon  the  cavalry,  that  the  bread  is  the  brown  or  "black"  rye  bread  of 
Germany. 

The  haversacks  are  of  linen,  and  are  12"  square  ;  no  canteen  is  carried  ;  instead  of  it,  a  small 
flask  of  brandy  in  the  havresack. 

QUARTERS. 

In  quarters  the  men  are  divided  into  squads  of  from  18  to  20  men,  each  under  a  corporal. 
As  a  general  rule,  each  squad  has  two  rooms,  in  one  of  which  all  the  beds  are  stowed  during 
the  day,  the  other  being  used  for  eating,  reading,  lounging,   smoking,   &c.      This  room  is 
provided  with  tables  and  benches  ;  at  night  some  of  the  beds  are  placed  in  this  second  room. 

The  bedsteads  are  single  and  of  iron,  put  together  with  nuts  and  screws  ;  the  tops  of  the 
corner  posts  are  hollowed  out,  so  that  the  feet  of  another  bedstead  may  be  set  in  them  in  the 
day  time,  thus  placing  one  above  another  to  save  space. 

The  bottom  or  floor  of  the  bed  consists  of  boards,  placed  longitudinally  on  the  cross-pieces  ; 
an  inclined  board  at  the  head  of  the  bed  renders  a  thin  pillow  sufficient. 

The  bedding  consists  of  a  pillow,  bed  sack  stuffed  with  straw,  and  a  pair  of  blankets  in  a 
check  case  ;  the  bedding  is  not  folded  up  during  the  day.  The  bedding  belongs  to  the  barrack. 
Each  man  has  a  cupboard,  with  a  lock  and  key,  in  which  he  keeps  his  rations  and  effects. 

In  the  room  is  a  list  of  the  men  quartered  there,  with  the  name  of  the  orderly ;  also  an  inven- 
tory of  all  public  property  in  the  quarters. 

On  the  outside  of  the  door,  which  is  numbered,  is  a  board  or  paper,  inscribed,  e.  g.,  as  follows: 
2d  battalion. 
10th  infantry  regiment. 
8th  company. 
.^th  squad. 
8  © 


68  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  inspector  of  each  barrack  is  a  retired  non-commissioned  officer  ;  he  is  responsible  for  the 
furniture,  bedding,  &c.,  of  the  officers  and  men  living  in  that  barrack,  and  reports  to  the 
inspector  of  the  post,  who  is  a  retired  officer  ;  the  latter  is  under  the  orders  of  the  intendant. 
Tables,  sofas,  chairs,  bureaus,  bedsteads,  and  bedding,  are  furnished  to  every  officer  ;  they  paper 
their  own  quarters,  and  paint  them  if  the  ordinary  government  allowance  is  not  sufficient. 

FIELD  SERVICE. 

The  organization  of  an  army  cprps  in  the  field,  and  its  allowance  of  transportation,  have 
already  been  given. 

Each  captain  of  infantry  is  allowed  a  horse  ;  he  is  only  permitted  to  ride  on  the  march  ;  no 
lieutenant  is,  under  any  circumstances,  permitted  to  ride. 

The  ordinary  march  is  14  miles  in  five  hours,  sometimes  23^  miles  in  eight  hours.  Usually 
a  short  halt  is  made  about  fifteen  minutes  after  starting,  and  in  the  middle  of  the  march  a  halt 
of  about  an  hour  ;  if  the  march  is  a  very  long  one,  (more  than  20  miles,  for  instance,)  two  halts 
of  an  hour  each  are  made.  On  the  march  the  piece  is  carried  at  will,  on  either  shoulder.  No 
tents  or  shelter  tents  are  used  ;  the  men  hut  themselves  as  best  they  can. 

The  normal  camp  of  a  regiment  is  in  six  rows  of  huts,  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  camp; 
two  companies  being  in  each  row,  and  there  being  one  street  for  each  battalion. 

Each  platoon  has  its  stacks  of  arms  at  the  head  of  its  row  of  huts  ;  the  huts  of  the  officers  are 
in  the  middle  of  those  of  the  men  of  their  companies,  in  the  same  row. 

The  latrines  are  in  rear  of  the  whole  camp. 

The  bivouac  is  essentially  the  same  as  the  Eussian. 

In  regard  to  the  landwehr,  it  is  worthy  of  mention,  that  in  the  landwehr  arsenals  complete 
sets  of  clothing,  arms,  and  accoutrements  are  kept  on  hand,  so  that  a  few  minutes  will  suffice 
to  supply  the  men,  who  are  already  drilled.  A  close  study  of  the  landwehr  system  is  well 
worthy  of  the  attention  of  our  own  officers  ;  the  adoption  of  some  similar  system  would  go  far 
towards  rendering  our  own  country  unassailable. 

I  would  again  call  the  attention  of  our  officers  to  the  rich  and  interesting  field  of  study 
offered  by  the  Prussian  military  works  ;  any  one  who  will  provide  our  service,  and  the  country, 
with  such  valuable  aids  as  "Witzleben,  Mims,  Kalkstein,  Schamhorst,  &c.,"  will  at  least  have 
the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  he  has  conferred  incalculable  benefit  upon  the  service. 

THE  SARDINIAN  INFANTRY. 

This  consists  of  20  regiments  of  infantry  and  10  battalions  of  bersaglieri,  (rifles.) 

Each  regiment  of  infantry  has  4  battalions,  of  4  companies  each ;  the  staff  of  a  regiment 
consists  of  1  colonel,  4  majors,  2  adjutants,  1  paymaster,  1  clothing  officer,  1  chaplain,  3  sur- 
geons, 2  staff  quartermasters,  1  drum  major,  1  quartermaster,  and  3  sergeants  of  the  train  ; 
3  corporals,  4  battalion  clerks,  3  battalion  drummers,  1  chief  trumpeter,  1  master  carpenter, 
1  band  master,  2  armorers,  1  master  tailor,  1  master  shoemaker,  26  musicians,  8  carpenters, 
and  2  sutlers. 

Each  company  of  infantry  consists  of  1  captain,  2  lieutenants,  1  orderly  sergeant,  4  sergeants, 
9  corporals,  2  drummers,  8  lance  corporals ;  in  time  of  peace  52,  and  on  the  war  establishment 
126  privates. 

The  corps  of  rifles  consists  of  10  battalions  and  1  depot  company,  each  battalion  having  4 
companies. 

The  staff  of  the  corps  consists  of  1  colonel,  1  lieutenant  colonel,  10  majors,  1  intendant 


EEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  59 

1  clothing  officer,  (a  captain,)  1  paymaster,  1  sub-intendant,  1  quartermaster,  2  lieutenants, 
1  regimental  adjutant,  10  battalion  adjutants,  10  surgeons,  and  3  lieutenants  for  the  depot 
company.  Each  company  consists  of  1  captain,  2  lieutenants,  1  orderly  sergeant,  4  sergeants, 
1  trumpeter,  11  corporals  ;  76  privates  in  time  of  peace,  and  133  in  time  of  war.  The  depot 
company  has  but  1  orderly  sergeant,  2  sergeants,  5  corporals,  and  30  privates. 

The  non-commissioned  staff  of  the  rifle  corps  consists  of  10  battalion  quartermasters,  1  quar- 
termaster and  14  sergeants  of  the  train,  11  chief  trumpeters,  11  battalion  clerks,  4  corporals  of 
the  train,  1  master  armorer,  1  master  tailor,  1  master  shoemaker,  10  armorers,  and  10  sutlers. 

The  army  is  filled  by  conscription. 

The  term  of  service  for  the  infantry  and  rifles  is  16  years,  during  8  of  which  the  men  belong 
to  -the  active  army,  and  for  8  years  to  the  reserve.  They  serve  but  14  months  with  their  regi- 
ments in  time  of  peace,  and  are  then  sent  on  furlough,  being  liable  to  be  called  out  again  if 
needed.  The  term  of  service  for  the  cavalry,  artillery,  and  engineers,  is  8  years  uninterrupted 
service  ;  these'corps  are  filled  with  volunteers,  substitutes,  and  men  drawn  by  lot  from  the  mass 
of  the  conscripts. 

The  Sardinian  contingent  in  the  Crimea  was  composed  of  provisional  regiments  of  2  bat- 
talions each  ;  these  were  formed  by  detailing  a  company  from  every  battalion  of  the  infantry, 
and  composed  2  divisions  of  4  regiments,  and  a  reserve  brigade.  Two  companies  of  every 
battalion  of  bersaglieri  were  present,  forming  5  provisional  battalions. 

The  tactics  and  instruction  of  the  Sardinian  infantry  differ  but  little  from  that  of  the  French, 
from  which  they  are  derived. 

UNIFOEM. 

This  is  a  modification  of  the  French,  and  is  strikingly  similar  to  our  own. 

The  infantry  shako  is  almost  identically  ours. 

The  frock-coat  is  dark  blue. 

The  pants  and  overcoats  are  very  nearly  the  color  of  our  own,  but  of  a  somewhat  more 
greyish  hue. 

The  overcoat  alone  was  worn  in  the  Crimea,  the  frock-coat  being  left  at  home  ;  the  overcoat 
has  a  large  rolling  collar,  but  no  cape.     Shoes  and  gaiters  are  used. 

The  knapsack  is  of  black  leather,  and  is  15"  X  12"  X  3^"  ;  it  is  not  attached  to  the  waist 
belt,  but  has  straps  after  the  Austrian  fashion. 

The  knapsack  contained  1  linen  coat,  1  pair  of  linen  pants,  1  woolen  shirt,  1  linen  shirt, 
1  pair  of  drawers,  1  pair  of  shoes,  1  pair  of  leather  gaiters,  1  stock  or  scarf,  and  the  brushes  ; 
a  plaid  blanket  is  strapped  to  the  top  and  sides  of  the  knapsack ;  the  shelter  tent  is  attached  to 
the  front  of  the  knajisack. 

The  forage  cap  is  of  wool,  and  something  between  the  Greek  cap  and  the  Turkish  fez ;  it  is 
what  is  known  as  the  Italian  fisherman's  caji,  and  has  no  vizor. 

The  hat  of  the  bersaglieri  is  of  felt,  with  a  fiat  rim  3"  broad  ;  the  rim  is  stiff,  and  covered 
with  oiled  linen  ;  the  crown  is  round  ;  there  is  a  plume  of  black  cock's  feathers. 

Their  pants  are  dark  blue,  as  well  as  their  overcoats. 

AEMS  AND  ACCOUTREMENTS. 

Twenty  men  in  each  company  of  infantry  have  the  bersaglieri  rifle,  the  rest  have  the  ordinary 
percussion  musket,  using  the  Nessler  ball. 

The  bersaglieri  rifle  has  a  30"  barrel,  and  is  quite  heavy ;  it  has  8  grooves,  an  elevating 


60 


MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUKOPK. 


hausse,  and  sword  bayonet.  The  beak  of  the  butt  plate  has  a  spiked  projection  some  5"  or  6" 
long,  to  assist  the  men  in  climbing  hills,  &c. 

The  range  of  this  rifle  is  about  600  metres. 

The  screw  driver  is  of  the  shape  of  a  T  ;  at  the  end  of  one  branch  is  a  gimblet,  so  that  the 
screw  driver  may  be  screwed  into  a  tree  to  afford  a  rest. 

Tlie  infixntry  cartridge  box  contains  30  rounds,  and  is  attached  to  the  waist  belt  by  a  loop  of 
sheet  iron  ;  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  also  attached  to  the  waist  belt ;  the  infantry  wear  no  sabre. 

The  box  of  the  bersaglieri  contains  only  balls  and  cleaning  utensils,  neither  cartridges  nor 
patches  being  used  ;  the  powder  is  carried  in  a  rough  wooden  powder  horn,  suspended  by  a  green 
cord,  and  thrust  into  a  pocket  of  the  coat. 

There  is  a  separate  waist  belt  for  tlie  sword  bayonet  of  the  bersaglieri. 

COOKING  UTENSILS. 

For  every  mess  of  16  men  there  is  a  sheet  iron  camp  kettle  with  a  flat  cover,  and  strong  iron 
liandle  ;  it  is  12"  deej),  11"  in  diameter  at  top,  and  10"  in  diameter  at  bottom.  Frying  pans  are 
also  used. 

Each  man  has  a  mess  can,  (little  gamelle,)  of  the  annexed  shape  and 
J  dimensions  ;  by  the  infantry  it  is  carried  strapped  on  top  of  the  knap- 
sack. 


The  haversack  is  of  linen,  lined  with  muslin  ;  it  is  slung  over  the 
shoulder  by  a  leather  straj),  and  contains  3  days'  rations. 

The  canteen  is  of  wood,  made  of  staves  and  hoops  ;  it  is  6^"  high,  4^" 

"A  X  3i"  at  bottom,  and  4''  X  3"  at  top  ;  the  side  which  rests  against  the 

jbody  is  somewhat  flattened,  so  that  the  bottom  and  top  of  the  canteen 

are  ellipses  flattened  on  one  side  ;  the  opening  is  in  the  middle  of  the  toj), 

and  is  closed  by  a  screw  plug  of  hard  wood. 

CAMP  EQUIPAGE,  &c. 

The  tents  are  conical ;  they  are  7'  6"  high,  and  16'  8"  in  diameter  at  the  bottom. 

The  men  are  all  provided  with  shelter  tents,  which  are  the  same  as  those  described  in  the 
report  upon  the  French  cavalry. 

In  the  Crimea  the  men  were  all  hutted. 

Each  hut  was  for  6  men  ;  a  cellar  3'  deej),  7'  4"  wide,  and  14'  8"  long  was  first  excavated,  with 
steps  leading  down  to  it  in  front ;  the  frame  of  the  roof  was  formed  by  rafters,  making  an  angle 
of  90°  with  each  other  ;  over  these  and  at  the  ends  hurdles  were  placed,  which  were  then  covered 
with  a  thick  plaster  of  clay  and  straw  ;  a  window  was  left  in  one  end  and  a  door  in  the  other. 
In  each  hut  there  was  a  small  fire  place  on  one  side,  excavated  in  the  side  of  the  cellar,  the 
chimney  passing  under  the  eaves. 

The  bunks -were  made  of  hurdles  ;  shelves,  racks,  &c.,  were  placed  according  to  the  fancy  of 
the  inmates. 

The  roof  projected  well  beyond  the  gable  ends. 

The  organization,  discipline,  instruction,  and  personal  appearance  of  the  Sardinian  infantry 
are  excellent ;  they  may  be  regarded  as  among  the  best  troops  of  Europe. 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Philadelphia,  Jamiary  15,  1857.  Captain  1st  cavalry. 


REPORT 


UPON   THE 


RUSSIAN    ARMY. 


CHAPTER  I. 

ORGANIZATION,  UNIFORM,  RECRUITING,  RATIONS,  ETC.,  ETC.,  OF  THE  RUSSIAN  ARMY. 

INTRODUCTION. 

It  will  be  seen  from  tlie  following  report  that  the  main  regular  army  of  Russia,  the  grand 
active  army  of  operations,  presents  at  least  one  most  important  and  striking  feature,  viz :  that 
it  is  organized  solely  with  a  view  to  great  military  considerations,  entirely  untrammelled  by  the 
necessities  of  interior  police  service  in  time  of  peace.  Its  organization  in  army  corps,  divisions, 
&c. ,  is  uniformly  kept  up  during  peace ;  it  is  located  solely  with  reference  to  operations  in 
foreign  countries  or  on  the  frontiers,  and  is  maintained  in  constant  readiness  for  the  field.  It 
may,  therefore,  fairly  be  regarded  as  embodying  the  Russian  conception  of  the  perfect  organiza- 
tion of  large  masses  for  active  operations. 

The  vast  experience  of  the  Russians  in  wars,  conducted  alike  upon  the  grandest  and  most 
limited  scale,  at  one  time  carried  on  by  great  masses  on  the  level  and  unobstructed  plains  of 
Europe,  at  another  by  small  detachments  in  the  rugged  mountains  of  Caucasus  and  Asia  Minor, 
or  on  the  frontiers  of  Tartary  and  China  ;  the  great  perfection  to  which  military  science  has 
been  carried  in  the  schools  and  special  corps  ;  the  intelligence,  skill,  and  courage  they  have  so 
often  evinced,  both  in  attack  and  defence, — all  these  considerations  render  a  detailed  study  of 
the  Russian  system  of  war  both  profitable  and  interesting. 

In  addition,  there  is,  perhaps,  no  European  service  of  which  so  little  is  known  by  the  officers 
of  our  army  as  the  Russian.  In  this  report  I  have  given  the  organization  somewhat  in  detail, 
probably  too  much  so  to  interest  a  mere  cursory  reader,  and  not  sufficiently  to  satisfy  the  student 
of  his  profession;  but  the  time  and  means  of  information  at  my  disposal  permit  no  more.  In 
reference  to  the  army  of  the  Caucasus,  the  composition  of  which  is  briefly  given,  it  should  be 
borne  in  mind  that  the  Caucasus  is  a  very  rugged  mountain  region,  with  valleys  interspersed  ; 
that  hostilities  there  are  now  almost  entirely  confined  to  the  most  difficult  portions  ;  that 
mountain  chains  form  a  great  part  of  its  boundaries  on  the  sides  of  Turkey  and  Persia  ;  and 
that,  in  the  event  of  an  oifensive  war,  after  having  crossed  these  mountains,  the  opponents  of 
the  Russians  would  consist  mostly  of  irregular  cavalry  and  indifferent  infantry.  These  con- 
siderations will  explain  the  almost  entire  absence  of  regular  cavalry  in  that  army.  It  is 
probable,  however,  that,  in  the  event  of  a  Persian  war,  some  regular  cavalry  would  be  added  to 
this  army.  During  the  Persian  campaigns  of  1826  and  1827  a  division  (four  regiments)  of 
lancers  were  with  the  army. 


62  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

The  system  of  warfare  adopted  in  the  Caucasus  is  to  cut  off  the  low  and  settled  regions  from 
the  inroads  of  the  mountaineers  by  Cossack  settlements  and  posts  of  regulars ;  to  construct  roads 
and  bridges  through  the  mountains,  occupying  the  passes  and  other  important  points  by 
mountain  forts  with  small  garrisons,  and,  using  these  forts  as  depots,  to  send  out  small 
moveable  columns  of  infantry  and  irregular  cavalry  into  the  heart  of  the  hostile  region. 

The  information  contained  in  this  report  is  derived  from  personal  observation,  information 
obtained  from  Eussian  officers,  the  official  regulations  and  tactics,  Haxthausen  on  the  Institu- 
tions of  Eussia,  Hirtcnfeld's  Organization  of  European  Armies,  the  narrative  of  the  campaigns 
of  Paskivitch  in  Asia  Minor  in  1828  and  1829,  and  from  other  sources.  Errors  have  probably 
been  committed,  but  it  is  believed  that  the  true  spirit  of  the  organization  is  given. 

COMPOSITION  OF  THE  EUSSIAN  AEMY. 
At  the  commencement  of  the  recent  war  the  army  of  Eussia  was  composed  and  organized 
about  as  follows : 

The  emperor  is  the  commander-in-chief  of  all  the  forces,  by  sea  and  land. 

GKAND  STAFF  OF  THE  EMPEROR. 

Its  members,  in  time  of  peace,  participate  in  the  duties  of  the  war  department,  as  presidents 
of  committees,  &c.  It  consists  of:  the  minister  of  war  ;  the  inspector  general  of  the  various 
corps  of  engineers  ;  the  inspector  general  of  artillery  ;  the  inspector  general  of  cavalry  ;  the 
inspector  general  of  infantry ;  the  inspector  of  the  military  engineers  ;  the  inspector  of  artillery  ; 
the  chief  of  the  general  staff ;  the  inspector  general  of  the  army  ;  the  commandant  of  the 
imperial  headquarters  ;  the  sub-commandant  of  the  same  ;  the  baggage  master  general ;  the 
inspector  general  of  the  medical  department ;  the  chaplain  general. 

THE  GENERAL  AIDES  DE   CAMP. 

This  is  merely  an  honorary  title  bestowed  upon  distinguished  general  officers,  but  involving 
no  especial  duty.     There  arc  some  eighty  general  officers  in  this  category. 

THE  AIDS  DE  CAMP  OF  THE  EMPEROR 

consist  of  about  four  major  generals,  "in  the  suite;"  some  thirty  field  officers,  and  fifteen 
captains  ;  the  number  is  not  limited.     These  are  the  real  aides  de  camp  of  the  emperor. 

THE  WAR  MINISTRY. 

This  is  divided  into  the  office  of  the  minister  of  loar  and  the  departments, 
(a.)  The  first  consists  of — 

1.  The  military  council  of  legislation  and  administration. 

2.  The  office  proper,  in  six  sections. 

3.  The  committee  of  general  judge  advocates. 

4.  The  committee  of  military  censorship. 

5.  The  scientific  military  committee. 

6.  The  medical  committee. 

(b.)  The  departments.  Of  these,  there  are  nine,  subdivided  into  several  sections,  each  depart- 
ment having  one  director,  one  vice  director,  and  a  council  of  administration. 

1.  The  department  of  the  grand  general  staff,  under  the  chief  of  the  general  staff;  in  addition 
to  the  usual  functions  of  the  general  staff,  all  matters  pertaining  to  organization  and  tactics  are 
referred  to  this  department. 


EEPOKT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    JPCLELLAN.  63 

2.  The  department  oi  the  personnel,  under  the  inspector  general  of  tlie  army  ;  this  has  charge 
of  the  recruiting  service,  the  central  military  printing  establishment,  and  the  corps  of  mounted 
orderlies  and  couriers. 

3.  The  artillery  department. 

4.  The  engineer  department. 

5.  The  commissariat  department,  for  the  supply  of  money  for  all  purposes,  the  equipment  of 
the  troops,  supplies  of  ammunition,  and  the  administration  of  the  military  hospitals,  under  the 
commissary  general. 

6.  The  subsistence  department. 

7.  The  dejjartment  of  the  military  colonies. 

8.  The  medical  department. 

9.  The  judge  advocates'  department. 

Under  the  direction  of  the  war  ministry  the  military  authorities  of  the  different  provinces 
administer  their  military  affairs;  the  commands  of  the  infantry,  cavalry,  and  independent  corps, 
are  under  the  war  ministry. 

THE   ARMY. 

This  is  divided  into  the  main  army  of  operations,  reserves,  garrison  troops,  irregular  troops, 
gendarmery,  model  regiments,  and  military  schools. 

THE   MAIN   ARMY   OF   OPERATIONS. 

This  is  composed  of  troops  who  have  not  completed  their  first  term  of  service. 

THE   GENERAL   STAFF 

is  divided  into  the  general  staff  proper  and  the  topographical  corps.  The  chief  of  the  general 
staff  is  at  the  head  of  this  administration,  and  under  him  achief  of  the  topographical  corps. 

The  strength  of  the  general  staff  proper  is  17  general  officers,  32  colonels,  48  lieutenant 
colonels,  62  captains,  and  78  lieutenants. 

It  is  subdivided  into  the  grand  general  staff  and  that  of  the  troops. 

The  first  consists  of  9  general  officers,  36  field  and  company  officers,  and  is  divided  into  three 
sections : 

1.  The  affairs  of  the  personnel  of  the  general  staff. 

2.  The  distribution  of  troops,  including  military  operations  and  foreign  armies. 

3.  Scientific  section,  including  historical  matters. 

The  office  of  the  chief  of  general  staff  is  for  the  administration. 

The  general  staff  of  the  troops  is  as  follows :  in  each  army  corps,  1  general  as  chief  of  staff, 
2  field  and  several  company  officers;  in  each  division,  2  officers. 

The  military  colonies,  reserve  troops,  and  garrison  troops,  have  special  general  staffs  of  their 
own. 

TOPOGRAPHICAL  CORPS. 

This  consists  of  1  general  as  chief,  2  generals,  15  field  officers,  91  captains  and  lieutenants, 
and  8  companies  of  different  strength,  but  amounting  to  456  sergeants  and  privates  in  all.  The 
officers  take  rank  with  those  of  the  general  staff. 

The  corps  is  subdivided  into  the  topographical  depot,  the  topographical  companies  and  the 
officers  serving  on  the  staff  with  armies,  &c. 


64  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

The  depot  is  subordinate  to  the  grand  general  staff,  and  attends  to  the  engraving  and  jorinting 
of  maps,  manufiicture  and  repair  of  instruments,  &c.  It  consists  of  G  sections:  1,  the  office;  2, 
topographical  section;  3,  astronomical  section;  4,  section  of  engraving  and  printing;  5, 
mechanical  section ;  G,  archives. 

There  are  attached  to  the  depot  1  company  (of  1  officer  and  120  men)  composed  of  mechanics, 
and  a  topograj)hical  school. 

Of  the  8  companies,  1  is  at  the  depot,  as  above,  some  employed  in  making  surveys,  the  rest  in 
fractions  at  the  headquarters  of  armies  and  corps.  These  companies  are  usually  recruited  from 
among  intelligent  cantonists,  (soldiers'  sons,)  taken  at  the  age  of  15. 

AIDES   DE   CAJIP. 

These  do  not  form  a  separate  corps ;  they  are  of  two  kinds :  those  of  the  emperor,  as  above,  and 
those  of  the  generals. 

The  latter  are  of  two  classes,  senior  aides  and  personal  aides. 

The  senior  aides  are  appointed  by  the  emperor,  and  belong  to  the  command ;  they  superintend 
the  service.  The  personal  aides  are  selected  by  the  generals,  and  accompany  them  when  they 
change  commands. 

All  aides  are  taken  from  among  officers  serving  with  troops,  never  from  the  general  staff. 

On  the  staif  of  an  army  there  are,  under  the  inspector  general,  who  is  subordinate  to  the 
chief  of  staff,  5  senior,  and  from  6  to  11  personal  aides. 

On  the  staff  of  a  corps,  also  under  the  inspector  general  of  the  corps,  who  is  subordinate  to 
the  chief  of  staff,  there  are  2  senior,  and  from  3  to  4  personal  aides. 

On  the  staff  of  a  division  there  are  1  senior  and  2  personal  aides. 

On  the  stall"  of  a  brigade  1  personal  aide. 

THE   INFANTRY. 

This  is  divided  into  infontry  of  the  line,  light  infantry,  and  rifles.  The  number  of  regiments 
is  as  follows  :  12  of  the  guard,  10  grenadier,  4  carbineer,  42  of  the  line,  and  42  light.  There 
are  also  the  following  independent  battalions :  1  Finland  rifles  of  the  guard,  1  of  grenadier 
rifles,  and  7  rifles  of  the  line. 

The  different  kinds  of  regiments  just  mentioned  are  numbered  in  separate  series  ;  in  addition 
to  its  number,  each  has  a  name,  generally  that  of  some  province  or  city.  Many  regiments  bear 
also  the  names  of  their  proj^rietors,  who  are  the  grand  dukes,  native  or  foreign  princes,  distin- 
guished generals,  &c.  Each  regiment  of  the  guard,  grenadiers,  and  carbineers,  consists  of  three 
active  battalions  ;  each  regiment  of  the  line  and  of  light  infantry  has  four  active  battalions. 
Every  battalion  is  composed  of  four  companies. 

On  the  war  establishment,  every  company  consists  of  4  officers,  20  sergeants,  8  musicians, 
and,  for  the  guards,  grenadiers,  and  carbineers,  236  corporals  and  privates  ;  for  other  troops, 
230  corporals  and  privates. 

The  battalion  staff  consists  of:  1  commandant  of  the  battalion,  1  junior  field  officer,  1 
adjutant,  1  ensign,  and  1  sub-ensign,  (both  sergeants  in  the  line  of  promotion,)  1  battalion  chief 
drummer,  1  battalion  chief  bugler  ;  in  the  rifle  battalion  there  is  no  junior  field  officer  or  bat- 
talion chief  drummer,  but  there  are  1  quartermaster  and  1  paymaster. 

The  staff  of  a  regiment  of  the  line,  or  light  infantry,  consists  of:  1  colonel,  1  adjutant,  1 
quartermaster,  1  paymaster,  1  band  master,  40  musicians,  1  regimental  chief  drummer,  1  regi- 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  JPCLELLA^.  65 

mental  chief  bugler  ;  the  regiments  of  guards,  grenadiers,  and  carbineers  have,  in  addition  to 
the  commander  of  the  regiment,  (who  is  a  major  general,)  1  colonel,  and  50  musicians  instead 
of  40. 

The  strength  of  a  battalion  of  the  line  or  light  infantry  is,  then,  1,055  combatants. 

The  strength  of  a  battalion  of  guards,  grenadiers,  or  carbineers,  is  1,079  combatants. 

The  strength  of  a  regiment  of  4  battalions,  (line  or  light  infantry,)  is  4,267  combatants. 

The  strength  of  a  regiment  of  3  battalions,  (guard,  grenadiers,  &c.,)  is  3,294  combatants. 

To  each  regiment  there  belongs  a  company  of  the  train,  which  comprises  the  teamsters, 
mechanics,  (except  tailors  and  shoemakers,)  hospital  attendants,  and  officers'  servants.  In  a 
regiment  of  the  line  the  company  of  the  train  consists  of:  1  officer,  7  sergeants,  280  corporals 
and  privates,  280  horses,  and  71  wagons  and  carts  ;  these  men  are  not  included  in  the  force  of 
combatants  as  given  above. 

These  companies  of  the  train  form  the  train  battalion  of  the  division ;  every  independent 
battalion  has  a  company  or  section,  of  the  train.  Attached  to  each  regiment  is  a  surgeon  and 
several  assistants. 

The  regiments  of  infantry  are  permanently  organized  into  brigades,  divisions,  and  army 
corps  ;  2  regiments  form  a  brigade,  2  brigades  a  division,  3  divisions  (with  the  proper  proportion 
of  the  other  arms  of  service)  a  corps. 

THE  CAVALKY. 

This  consists  of  cuirassiers,  dragoons.,  lancers,  hussars,  and  Cossacks.  The  number  of  regi- 
ments is  as  follows :  cavalry  of  the  guard — cuirassiers  4,  dragoons  2,  lancers  2,  hussars  2, 
Cossacks  2,  and  5^  independent  squadrons  ;  cavalry  of  the  army — cuirassiers  8,  dragoons  9, 
lancers  20,  and  hussars  16. 

The  regiments  are  named  and  numbered,  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  infantry. 

All  the  cuirassier  regiments,  and  all  the  cavalry  of  the  guard,  have  six  active  squadrons  jjer 
regiment ;  the  dragoons  of  the  line  have  ten  active  squadrons  per  regiment ;  all  the  rest  of  the 
regiments,  except  two  of  lancers  and  two  of  hussars,  (forming  the  reserve  light  cavalry  division,) 
have  eight  active  squadrons. 

On  the  war  establishment,  the  full  strength  of  each  squadron  is,  6  officers,  16  sergeants,  3 
trumpeters,  146  corporals  and  privates  ;  there  are  also,  usually,  an  assistant  veterinary  surgeon 
and  a  horse  sheer. 

The  staff  of  a  regiment  of  six  squadrons  consists  of:  1  colonel,  3  field  officers,  (one  to  command 
each  division  of  two  squadrons,)  1  adjutant,  1  quartermaster,  1  paymaster,  1  chief  veterinary 
surgeon,  and  1  regimental  trumpeter ;  in  a  regiment  of  eight  squadrons  there  is  one  additional 
field  officer,  to  command  the  4th  division. 

The  dragoons  of  the  line  have  each  five  divisions,  of  which  the  first  four  (having  two  trum- 
peters and  two  drummers  to  each  squadron)  are  stronger  by  two  musicians,  each,  than  the 
divisions  of  other  cavalry  ;  the  5th  division  is  as  other  cavalry.  The  staff  of  a  dragoon  regiment 
has  one  field  officer  more  than  a  regiment  of  eight  squadrons,  and  also  a  regimental  drummer. 

The  strength  of  a  regiment  of  6  squadrons  is  thus,  1,034  combatants. 
"  "  8  "  1,377  " 

"  "  10  "  1,729  " 

Two  regiments  of  cavalry,  usually  of  the  same  kind,  form  a  brigade ;  two  brigades,  of  different 
kinds,  form  a  division  ;  two  or  more  divisions  form  a  cavalry  corps. 
9  © 


66  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

ARTILLEKY. 

Tliere  are  batteries  of  position,  or  heavy  foot  batteries,  light  foot  batteries,  heavy  and  light 
horse  batteries,  and  mountain  batteries. 

A  battery  consists  of  8  or  12  pieces,  and  is  usually  commanded  by  a  field  officer.  Each  battery 
has  its  own  section  of  the  train. 

A  heavy  foot  battery  consists  of  six  12-pounder  guns,  six  28-pounder  licornes,  7  officers,  312 
men,  and  241  horses;  or,  of  four  12-pounder  guns,  four  28-pounder  licornes,  7  officers,  222  men, 
and  1Y7  horses. 

A  light  foot  battery :  six  6-pounder  guns,  six  14-pounder  licornes,  7  officers,  246  men,  and 
167  horses  ;  or,  of  four  6-pounder  guns,  four  14-pounder  licornes,  7  officers,  172  men,  and 
128  horses. 

A  heavy  horse  battery :  eight  28-pounder  licornes,  8  officers,  282  men,  and  374  horses. 

A  light  horse  battery:  four  6-pounder  guns,  four  14-pounder  licornes,  7  officers,  219  men,  and 
284  horses. 

A  Cossack  battery :  four  6-pounder  guns,  four  14-pouuder  licornes,  5  officers,  202  men,  and 
273  horses. 

A  mountain  battery :  eight  3-pounder  guns,  four  4"  mortars,  (weight  46  pounds,)  7  officers, 
222  men,  and  229  horses. 

The  heavy  horse  batteries  have  eight  horses  to  each  piece  ;  the  light  horse  batteries,  and 
heavy  foot,  six  horses  per  piece  ;  the  light  foot  batteries  four  horses  to  each  piece. 

The  caissons  are  two-wheeled  carts,  drawn  by  three  horses  abreast ;  each  12-pounder  gun  and 
28-pounder  licorne  has  three  of  these  carts  ;  each  6-pounder  gun  and  14-pounder  licorne  has 
two  carts. 

Tlie  foot  and  horse  artillery  have  separate  organizations. 

From  two  to  four  batteries  form  a  brigade ;  from  two  to  four  brigades  a  division.  It  is  proper 
to  state  that  the  organization,  as  given  above,  bids  fair  to  be  superseded,  partially,  at  all  events, 
by  the  introduction  of  the  Napoleon  gun-howitzer  ;  these  guns  were  being  cast,  in  large  num- 
bers, in  St.  Petersburg,  in  1855. 

ENaiNEER  TEOOPS. 

These  consist  of  battalions  of  sappers  and  squadrons  of  mounted  pioneers. 

The  mimber  of  battalions  is  as  follows  :  1  of  the  guard,  1  of  the  grenadiers,  6  of  the  line,  and 
1  of  the  Caucasus. 

There  are  two  squadrons  of  mounted  pioneers  of  the  guard,  and  two  squadrons  belonging  to 
the  corps  of  dragoons  ;  this  is  the  peace  establishment,  to  be  increased  to  sixteen  squadrons  in 
time  of  war. 

Each  battalion  of  sappers  consists  of  four  companies. 

Each  company  is  composed  of  5  officers,  20  sergeants,  6  musicians,  and  230  corporals  and 
privates  ;  on  the  battalion  staff  are  6  officers  and  2  sergeants. 

The  strength  of  each  division  (two  squadrons)  of  the  mounted  pioneers  is  13  officers,  29  ser- 
geants, 8  musicians,  328  corporals  and  privates,  and  275  horses. 

In  time  of  peace,  each  battalion  has  one  ponton  train  of  42  pontons,  and  as  many  wagons ;  each 
squadron  of  the  mounted  pioneers  has  eight  leather  pontons. 


REPOET  OP  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  G7 

THE  AEMT  COKPS. 

The  active  troops  heretofore  enumerated  form  the  following  army  corps  ;  the  corps  of  infantry 
of  the  guard,  and  the  corps  of  grenadiers,  both  elite  corps,  and  destined  to  form  the  reserves  of 
the  active  army  of  operations ;  sis  infantry  corps ;  the  corps  of  the  Caucasus ;  the  reserve  cavalry 
corps  of  the  guards ;  the  first  and  second  reserve  cavalry  corps ;  the  reserve  light  cavalry 
division. 

The  corps  of  the  Caucasus  forms  the  basis  of  the  army  of  the  Caucasus  ;  its  composition,  and 
that  of  the  other  corps,  will  be  given  hereafter.  It  is  now  necessary  to  explain  the  law  of  dis- 
tribution of  regiments,  &c.,  in  the  brigades,  divisions,  and  corps. 

The  corps  of  infantry  of  the  guard  consists  of  9  regiments  of  grenadiers  of  the  guard,  and  3 
regiments  of  light  infantry  of  the  guard. 

These  are  organized  in  6  brigades,  numbered  from  1  to  6,  and  3  divisions  ;  the  1st  brigade  is 
composed  of  2  regiments  of  grenadiers  ;  the  2d  brigade  consists  of  1  regiment  of  grenadiers  and 
1  of  light  infantry  ;  these  2  brigades  form  the  1st  division.  The  brigades  of  the  other  divisions 
are  constituted  in  a  similar  manner. 

Of  the  10  regiments  of  grenadiers  and  4  of  carbineers,  the  first  9  of  the  former  and  the  first  3 
of  the  latter  form  the  infantry  divisions  of  the  corps  of  grenadiers.  The  10th  grenadiers  and  the 
4tli  carbineers  form  the  elite  brigade  of  the  army  of  the  Caucasus. 

Tlie  infantry  of  the  corps  of  grenadiers  is  formed  in  3  divisions,  organized  exactly  as  the  corps 
of  infantry  of  the  guard  ;  the  carbineers  taking  the  place  of  the  light  infantry  regiments  of  the 
guard.  The  infantry  brigades  and  divisions  of  the  guard  and  the  grenadiers  are  each  numbered 
in  a  separate  series. 

In  the  troops  of  the  line,  as  distinguished  from  the  two  elite  corps,  two  regiments  of  heavy 
infantry,  or  2  of  light  infantry,  form  a  brigade  ;  a  division  is  composed  of  one  brigade  of  heavy 
and  one  brigade  of  light  infantry  ;  3  such  divisions  constitute  the  main  body  of  the  infantry  of 
an  infantry  corps.  There  are  42  regiments  of  heavy  and  42  of  light  infantry,  forming  21  divi- 
sions, numbered  in  a  regular  series.  The  first  18  divisions  belong  to  the  six  infantry  corps,  the 
last  3  to  the  army  of  the  Caucasus.  In  these  21  divisions  there  are  21  brigades  of  heavy  and  21 
of  light  infantry  ;  42  in  all.  The  1st  and  2d  regiments  of  heavy  infantry  (infantry  of  the  line) 
form  the  1st  brigade  of  infantry  of  the  line  ;  the  1st  and  2d  regiments  of  light  infantry  form  the 
1st  brigade  of  light  infantry  ;  these  two  brigades  form  the  1st  division  of  infantry.  The  2d  divi- 
sion is  composed  of  the  3d  and  4th  regiments  of  heavy  and  light  infantry.  The  1st,  2d  and  3d 
divisions  belong  to  the  1st  corps.  In  the  same  manner  they  run  in  regular  series  through  the 
six  corps. 

The  cavalry  of  the  guard  forms  the  corps  of  reserve  cavalry  of  the  guard  ;  its  regiments  are 
numbered  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  cavalry.  The  8  regiments  of  army  cuirassiers  compose 
2  divisions  of  the  1st  reserve  cavalry  corps.  The  first  8  regiments  of  army  dragoons  constitute 
the  2d  reserve  cavalry  corps  ;  the  9th  regiment  belongs  to  the  army  of  the  Caucasus.  The  16 
regiments  of  army  hussars  form  8  brigades,  in  which  they  are  distributed  in  a  similar  manner  to 
the  infantry  regiments  ;  the  first  6  brigades  belong  to  the  infantry  corps  of  the  same  numbers  ; 
the  7th  brigade  to  the  corps  of  grenadiers  ;  the  8th  to  the  reserve  light  cavalry  division. 

The  20  regiments  of  army  lancers  form  10  brigades,  the  first  seven  of  which  serve  with  the 
corresponding  hussar  brigades,  thus  forming  the  light  cavalry  divisions  attached  to  the  infantry 
and  grenadier  corps  ;  the  8th  and  9th  brigades  form  the  lancer  division  of  the  1st  cavalry  reserve 
corp  ;  the  10th  belongs  to  the  reserve  light  cavalry  division. 


68 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 


The  artillery  of  the  guards  and  grenadiers  is  numbered  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  artil- 
lery, except  the  brigade  of  the  horse  artillery  of  the  grenadiers.  There  are  6  divisions  of  army 
field  artillery  for  the  6  infantry  corps,  the  division  bearing  the  number  of  its  corps. 

Each  division  consists  of  one  brigade  of  horse  artillery,  each  brigade  bearing  the  number  of  its 
corps,  and  the  batteries  numbered  in  regular  series,  and  of  3  brigades  of  foot  artillery  ;  the  bri- 
gades of  the  latter,  as  well  as  the  batteries,  are  numbered  in  regular  series  throughout. 

The  batteries  of  heavy  and  light  foot  artillery  are  numbered  separately.  The  brigade  of  horse 
artillery  serving  with  the  corps  of  grenadiers  is  numbered  the  7th,  to  correspond  with  the  light 
cavalry  division  of  that  corps.  The  brigades  of  horse  artillery  act  with,  and  are  regarded  as  be- 
longing to,  the  cavalry  divisions  of  their  respective  corps. 

The  artillery  of  the  army  of  the  Caucasus  has  a  separate  organization.  The  rifle  battalions 
bear  the  numbers  or  names  of  the  corps  to  which  they  belong. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  the  sappers  and  the  brigades  of  the  train. 

The  rule  explained  above  will  be  more  clearly  understood  by  giving  an  example ;  the  fifth 
infantry  corps  will  be  taken  for  that  purpose  ;  its  composition  is  as  follows : 


FIPXH  INFANTKT  C0EP9.. 


Fifth  division  light  cavahy -{ 


f  5th  lancer  brigade I    "'^  regiment  < 

I  10th  regiment  < 


Fourteenth  division  of  infiintry 


Fifth  division  field  artillery- 


I  5th  hussar  brigade \     ^"^  ''egiment , 

I,  I  10th  regiment  i 


;  of  lancers. 
,  of  lancers. 
;  of  hussars. 
;  of  hussars. 

Thirteenth  division  of  infantry J  ^5*^  and  26th  regiments  infantry  of  the  line. 

I  25th  and  26th  regiments  light  infantry. 

27th  and  28th  regiments  infantry  of  the  line. 

27tli  and  28th  regiments  light  infantry. 

„...        ,,,...         c  ■   e     I  (  29th  and  30th  regiments  infantry  of  the  line. 

Fifteenth  division  of  infantry J  "  •' 

I  29th  and  30th  regiments  light  infantry. 

'  5th  brigade  horse  artillery,  light  horse  batteries,  Nos.  9  and  10. 

'  Battery  of  position,  No.  17. 

,„  ,   ,   .      ,     ,     ,      ,.„  ,  Battery  of  position,  No.  18. 

13th  brigade  foot  artillery...-^  ^.        "       ^ 

'         I  Light  foot  battery.  No.  33. 

l_  Light  foot  battery.  No.  34. 

f  Battery  of  position,  No.  19. 

j  Light  foot  batter)',  No.  35. 

Light  foot  battery,  No.  36. 


14th  brigJide  foot  artillery 


15th  brigade  foot  artillery . 


Light  foot  battery,  No.  37. 
Battery  of  position.  No.  20. 
Light  foot  battery,  No.  38. 
Light  foot  battery,  No.  39. 
Light  foot  battery.  No.  40. 


Rifle  battalion,  No.  5. 

Sapper  battalion.  No.  5,  5th  brigade  of  the  train. 


REPORT   OP   CAPT.    GEORGE    B     M°CLELLAN.  69 

There  will  now.  be  given  the  general  composition  and  strength  of  the  several  army  corps  : 


Battalions. 


CORPS  OF  IXFAXTKT  OF  TILE  GCAKD. 


3  divisions  of  infantry — 

1  battalion  of  Finland  rifles 

1  battalion  of  sappers  of  the  guard 

3  brigades  foot  artillery,  each  of  2  heavy  and  2  light  batteries. 
1  brigade  of  the  train.. - — 


Total  combatants  . 


THE  C0KP3  OF  GKENADIEKS. 


3  divisions  of  infantry - 

1  battalion  grenadier  rifles 

1  battalion  grenadier  sappers 

1  division  light  cavalry,  of  2  regiments  lancers  and  2  regts.  hussars. 

3  brigades  foot  artillery,  each  of  2  heavy  and  2  light  batteries 

1  brigade  horse  artillery,  of  2  light  batteries 

1  brigade  of  the  train 


Total  combatants  . 


EACH  or  THE  six  INFASTBT  CORPS. 


3  divisions  of  infantry 

1  battalion  of  rifles 

1  battalion  of  sappers 

1  division  light  cavalry,  as  for  corps  of  grenadiers 

3  brigades  foot  artillery,  1  of  2  heavy  and  2  light  batteries,  the  re- 
maining 2  of  1  heavy  and  3  light  batteries 

1  brigade  horse  artillery,  of  2  light  batteries 

1  brigade  of  the  train 


36 
1 
1 


38 


3G 
1 
1 


Squadrons. 


32 


Men. 


Horses. 


39,528 
1,072 
1,052 

2,448 


44, 100 


39,528 
1,072 
1,052 
5,508 
2,448 
452 


38 


48 
1 
1 


32 


50,060 


1,830 


1,830 


5,508 

1,830 

568 


7,906 


Total  combatants  of  each  infantry  corps  . 


Total  combatants  of  all  the  sis  infantry  corps... 

CORPS  OF  RESEBVE  CAVALKY  OP  THE  QCARD. 


1  division  cuirassiers,  4  regiments -. 

1  division  light  cavalry,  composed  of:  1  regiment  lancers,  1  hussars, 
1  horse  grenadiers,  (dragoons,)  1  Cossacks,   and  3  independent 

squadrons  Cossacks 

1  division  light  cavalry,  composed  of :  1  regiment  lancers,  1  hussars, 
1  dragoons,  1  Cossacks,  and  2^-  independent  squadrons  of  Cossacks. 

1  division  horse  artillery,  of  1  heavy,  4 J  light  batteries 

1  division  mounted  engineer  troops 

1  brigade  of  the  train 


50 


300 


Total  combatants  . 


32 


32 


192 


24 

27 

26J 

2 


51,204 
1,072 
1,052 
5,508 

2,348 
452 


61,636 


369,816 


4,136 


4,649 

4,564 

1,307 

378 


5,508 

1,732 
568 


7,808 


46,848 


4,136 


4,649 

4,564 

1,652 

275 


79J 


15,034 


15,276 


Guns. 


96 


96 


96 
16 


112 


96 
16 


112 


672 


44 


44 


70 


MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 
General  composition  and  strength  of  the  several  army  corps — Continued. 


Battalions. 

Squadrons. 

Men. 

Horses. 

Guns. 

rmST  RESERVE  CAVALRY  CORPS. 

2  divisions  cuirassiers,  each  of  4  regiments 

48 
32 

8,272 
5,508 
1,484 

8,272 
5,508 
1,884 

1  division  lancers,  of  4  regiments _ , 

48 

Total  combatants  1st  reserve  cavalry  corps 

SO 

15,264 

15,664 

48 

SECOND  RESERVE  CAVALRY  CORPS. 

2  divisions  of  drae;oons,  each  of  4  regiments - - 

80 

13,832 

1,484 
378 

13,832 

1,884 

275 

48 

1  division  mounted  engineer  troops .. ._.-... 

2. 

1  brigade  of  the  train ..... _...-...-.--.............. 

Total  combatants  2d  reserve  cavalry  corps _. 

82 

15, 604 

15,991 

48 

RESERVE  LIGHT  CAVALRY  DIVISION. 

12 
12 

2,068 

2,068 

678 

2,068 

2,068 

852 

3  lio'ht  batteries  horse  artillery  . .. ..__ 

24 



Total  combatants - 

24 

4,814 

4,988 

24 

Recapitulation  of  the  divisions,  8f 

c. ,  of  active  tooops  of 

ih£ 

Grand  Army  of  Operations. 

INFANTRY. 

CAVALRY. 

ARTILLERY. 

ENGINEER 
TROOPS. 

ARMY    CORPS. 

§ 

1 
3 

■i 

e 

V 

B 

t£ 

c 
o 

« 

n 

to 

a 
_o 

'> 
Q 

■a 

2 

c 

E 

o 

cr 
m 

1 

1 
CQ 

1 

1 

Pieces. 

2 

23.2 

o. 

o. 

a 

m 

CO 

u 

s 
o 

Observations. 

o 

E 

o 

K 

1 

i 

s 

■a 

3 

i 

o 

3 

3 

18 

6 

6 
36 

12 
12 
72 

37 
37 
294 

3 
4 

24 
2 
3 

2 

12 
14 
84 

5J 

6 

6 

3 

16 
96 

44 
48 
48 
24 

96 
96 

576 

48 
48 
192 
8 
16 
16 

48 
64 
480 
36 
32 
39 
24 

96 
112 
672 

44 
48 
48 
24 

1 
1 
6 

2 

Grenadiers 

1 

6 
3 
3 

2 

1 

2 
12 
6 

6 
4 
2 

4 
24 
12 
12 

8 
4 

32 

192 
77J 
80 
80 
24 

1 

6 
1 

1 
1 

1 

brigs,  of  the  train   who 
are  non-combatants. 
In  lime  of  war  there  would 
be  12  additional  squad- 

rons of  mounted  engi- 

To  the   infantry  corps  in 
Poland,  and  to  others, 

9d  leserve  cavalry,  (dragoons). 

9 

are    attached  Co.ssacks 

variable  numbers. 

Total 

24 

48 

96 

368 

16 

32 

64 

485i 

11 

37 

130} 

276 

768 

328 

716 

1,044 

8 

4 

Total  combatants  of  the  active  army :  394,836  infantry,  83,653  cavalry,  27,101  artillery,  9,172  engineer  troops,  1,044 
gnns;  or,  514,762  men,  and  108,425  horses.  This  is  the  number  of  troops  disposable  upon  the  breaking  out  of  an  Euro- 
pean war,  excluding  reserves,  and  without  calling  upon  any  of  the  local  troops  doing  garrison  duty  in  the  interior.  If  the 
war  is  of  such  a  nature  that  the  defence  of  the  Caucasus  can  be  intrusted  to  the  native  troops,  there  may  be  added  to  the 
grand  army  the  19th,  20th,  and  21st  divisions  of  infantry,  the  elite  brigade,  (10th  grenadiers  and  4th  carbineers,)  and  the 
9th  dragoons—!,  e.  58,864  infantry  and  1,729  cavalry.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that,  on  the  breaking  out  of  war,  these 
troops  ought  to  contain,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  neither  recruits  nor  invalids. 

The  losses  by  disease  on  the  Danube,  the  immense  length  of  tlie  lines  of  communication,  and  the  necessity  of  keeping 
formidable  armies  near  the  Baltic  and  in  Poland,  will  sufficiently  account  for  the  small  portion  of  this  mass  concentrated  in 
the  Crimea  in  the  early  part  of  the  late  war. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    IPCLELLAN.  71 

RESERVE   TROOPS   OF   THE   GRAND   ARJIT. 

There  are  two  classes  of  reserve  troops,  the  reserve  and  the  depot  troops.  Authorities  differ 
somewhat  as  to  the  constitution  of  these  reserves,  but  it  is  believed  that  the  description  here 
given  will  give  a  correct  idea  of  the  principles  of  their  formation,  although  it  may  be  incorrect 
in  some  details. 

The  term  of  service  in  the  Russian  army  is  :  twenty  years  in  the  military  colonies,  twenty- 
tbree  years  in  the  guards,  twenty-five  years  in  other  corps. 

By  the  late  Emperor  Nicholas  was  introduced  the  system  of  granting  unlimited  furloughs  to 
soldiers  who  had  served  faithfully  for  a  certain  time.  For  the  purposes  of  conscription,  Russia 
in  Europe  is  divided  into  the  eastern  and  western  provinces,  the  line  of  separation  being  pretty 
nearly  the  meridian  of  Moscow. 

The  soldiers  from  the  eastern  provinces  and  the  military  colonies  receive  their  furlough  after 
fifteen  years'  service;  those  from  the  western  provinces,  after  ten  years'  service;  both  categories 
then  pass  into  the  reserves.  Any  soldier  who  entered  the  service  in  consequence  of  civil  misde- 
meanors, or  who  has  been  condemned  to  punishment  for  a  serious  oifence  while  in  the  service, 
loses  his  right  to  the  furlough,  and,  in  the  latter  case,  may  even  be  required  to  serve  longer 
than  twenty-five  years. 

The  soldiers  from  the  western  provinces  and  the  colonies  compose  the  mass  of  the  first  reserve, 
(reserve  proper.)  They  are  called  together  for  exercise  during  about  four  weeks  in  every  year, 
and  in  time  of  war  are  the  first  called  upon  for  service.  In  this  case,  they  are  either  draughted 
into  the  active  battalions,  squadrons,  &c.,  or  may  serve  as  battalions,  &c.,  by  themselves.  In  time 
of  peace,  when  not  called  out  for  drill,  they  exercise  their  civil  avocations  as  any  other  j^ersons. 

The  second  reserve  (depot  troops)  are  only  called  out  in  time  of  war. 

The  small  permanent  skeletons  of  these  reserve  battalions,  squadrons,  and  batteries,  serve  as 
schools  of  instruction  for  recruits,  who  are  usually  kejat  there  about  a  year  before  joining  their 
regiments. 

The  principal  depot  for  the  instruction  of  infantry  recruits  is  at  Moscow. 

The  reserve  troops  are  oflicered  by  officers  on  leave  of  absence,  on  the  retired  list,  &c. 

Through  the  whole  army,  including  the  guards,  there  is  for  every  regiment  of  infantry  a 
reserve  battalion,  for  every  regiment  of  cavalry  a  reserve  squadron,  for  every  brigade  of  artillery 
a  reserve  battery,  and  two  reserve  battalions  of  sappers. 

Omitting  the  guards,  there  is  for  every  regiment  of  infantry  a  dejjot  battalion,  for  every 
regiment  of  cavalry  a  depot  squadron,  for  every  brigade  of  foot  artillery  a  depot  battery,  and 
two  depot  battalions  of  sappers. 

TROOPS   HAVING   A   LOCAL   DESTINATION. THE   ARMY   OF   THE   CAUCASUS. 

The  regiments  of  the  divisions  of  infantry,  (19th,  20th,  and  21st,)  forming  the  basis  of  the 
army  of  the  Caucasus,  have  lately,  perhaps  only  temporarily,  been  increased  to  5  battalions 
each,  and  the  regiments  of  the  elite  brigade  to  4  battalions  each ;  the  regular  portion  of  this 
army  is  then  as  follows : 

3  divisions  of  infantry,  each  of  4  regiments  of  5  battalions 62,880  men. 

1  elite  brigade  (10th  grenadiers  and  4th  carbineers  of  4  battalions  each) 8,576     " 

1  battalion  of  rifles 1,048     " 

47  regular  battalions  of  native  troops 49,585     " 

1  battalion  of  sappers 1,052     " 


72  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO   EUEOPE. 

1  regiment  of  dragoons  (the  9tli)  of  10  squadrons 1,729  men. 

1  division  of  artillery,  of  4  brigades,  having  in  all :  4  heavy  foot  batteries  of  12 

pieces  each,  6  light  foot  batteries  of  8  pieces  each,  6  mountain  batteries  of  12 

pieces  each;  total  168  pieces,  and  1  rocket  battery 3,953     " 

Total  regular  troops  :  123,141  infantry,  1,729  cavalry,  3,953  artillery,  1,052  sappers,  and  1G8 
j)ieces  and  1  rocket  battery. 

Of  the  reserve  and  depot  battalions  and  squadrons  of  the  19th,  20th,  and  21st  divisions,  the 
elite  brigade,  and  the  dragoon  regiment,  one-half  are  kept  constantly  under  arms  and  ready  to 
march. 

Of  the  troops  mentioned  hereafter  under  the  head  of  irregulars,  the  Cossacks  of  the  line  of 
the  Caucasus,  the  Mussulmen,  and  a  portion  of  the  Cossacks  of  the  Don  and  the  Black  sea,  are 
constantly  under  arms  and  ready  for  service.  All  of  the  Cossacks  of  the  Don,  and  those  of  the 
Black  sea,  can  be  made  available  if  necessary. 

In  other  European  nations,  the  regular  troops  destined  to  form  the  army  of  operations  in  war, 
perform  during  peace  the  service  of  the  interior,  which  is  confided  to  the  national  guards  and 
militia  in  war ;  but  in  Eussia  this  service  is  performed  by  a  special  regular  army,  the  necessary 
cavalry  and  field  artillery  for  which  is  chiefly  furnished  by  the  Cossacks.  These  troops  are 
charged  with  the  service  in  the  fortresses  and  cities,  with  the  defence  of  certain  turbulent 
portions  of  the  frontiers,  the  administration  of  the  arsenals,  workshops,  &c. 

Infantry. — 12  battalions  of  Finland,  form  the  22d  division  of  infantry,  and  perform  the 
interior  service  of  Finland. 

10  Orenburg  battalions,  form  the  23d  division  of  infantry,  and  are  charged  with  the  interior 
service  of  that  province. 

15  battalions  of  Siberia  compose  the  24th  division  of  infantry,  and  perform  the  interior 
service  of  that  region.  This  division  is  organized  in  3  brigades,  and  has  2  guns  with  each 
brigade. 

50  battalions  of  guards  of  the  interior;  each  battalion  having  21  officers  and  1,000  men,  and 
divided  into  4  companies.  For  every  5  battalions  there  are  5  howitzers,  (licornes.)  These 
troops  are  employed  in  European  Eussia,  partly  as  the  garrisons  of  fortresses,  partly  in  the  open 
cities.  They  are  charged,  also,  with  the  transportation  of  the  reserves,  recruits,  &c. ,  their 
commanders  having  the  superintendence  of  the  reserves  of  all  classes.  Each  battalion  has 
attached  to  it  a.  penal  section,  for  minor  offenders  from  the  army.  In  these  battalions  are  many 
veterans. 

Cavalry. — There  are  11^  squadrons  of  gendarmes,  with  a  total  strength  of  2,364.  In  time  of 
peace,  they  act  as  a  military  police;  in  war,  they  serve  at  the  headquarters  of  corps  and  armies 
in  the  field,  having  charge  of  the  police,  prisoners,  &c. 

Artillery. — 98  companies  of  garrison  artillery,  each  company  consisting  of  4  officers  and  165 
men.     These  companies  serve  the  artillery  of  the  fortresses,  and  some  serve  at  the  arsenals,  &c. 

12  arsenal  companies,  of  the  same  strength  as  the  last.  These  serve  at  the  arsenals,  foundries, 
artillery  workshops,  small  arm  factories,  powder  mills,  &c. 

6  laboratory  companies,  each  consisting  of  4  officers  and  182  men.  They  are  stationed  at  the 
six  principal  laboratories  of  the  empire. 

Engineers. — This  corps  consists  of  10  general  officers,  and  342  other  officers,  in  addition  to 
25  companies  of  workmen,  (selected  mechanics,)  of  3  officers  and  208  men  each.  They  are 
charged  with  the  construction  of  fortifications  and  the  care  of  material ;  54  penal  companies 
(soldiers  condemned  to  labor  on  the  fortifications)  are  under  their  direction.     This .  garrison 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  73 

engineer  corps  has  also  charge  of  2  engineer  parks  for  the  supply  of  sapper  and  pontonier 
materials. 

552  companies  of  infantry  veterans,  who  are  on  service  in  the  smaller  towns  and  villages, 
have  places  in  the  post  ofHce  service,  act  as  orderlies  in  government  offices,  take  charge  of 
public  buildings,  &c.  271  invalid  establishments,  many  of  whose  members  perform  similar 
services  to  those  last  mentioned. 

THE   MODEL   REGIMENTS. 

The  object  of  the  model  regiment  of  cavalry  is  to  secure  a  uniform  system  of  equitation  and 
instruction  throughout  that  arm  of  service.  It  consists  of  6^  squadrons,  viz:  ^  squadron  of 
Cossacks,  1  squadron  of  cuirassiers,  1  squadron  of  hussars,  2  squadrons  of  dragoons,  2  squad- 
rons of  lancers.  It  is  composed  of  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  privates  from  all  the 
regiments  of  cavalry ;  after  going  through  a  thorough  course  of  instruction  they  return  to  their 
respective  regiments.  With  similar  objects,  there  are  also  established  a  model  regiment  of 
infantry ;  a  model  battery  of  horse  artillery  ;  a  model  battery  of  foot  artillery ;  and  a  model 
battalion  for  the  army  of  the  Caucasus.  Officers  and  men  generally  serve  one  year  with  the 
model  regiments. 

MIUTARY   SCHOOLS. 

As  these  will  be  fully  treated  of  by  another  member  of  the  commission,  it  is  only  necessary 
to  state  here  that  they  are  numerous  and  admirable.  It  is  difficult  to  perceive  in  what  respect 
they  are  inferior  to  any  in  Europe. 

The  majority  of  the  officers  come  from  the  military  schools,  and  the  absolute  necessity  of  such 
institutions  is  fully  recognized. 

IRREGULAR   TROOPS. 

These  include  the  Cossacks,  Caucasians,  Calmucks,  Tartars,  Boschkirs,  &c.  These  people 
are  not  subjected  to  the  ordinary  conscription,  but,  being  exempt  from  certain  taxes,  are 
required  to  furnish,  at  their  own  expense,  a  certain  quota  per  district.  The  organization  of  all 
these  troops  is  based  upon  that  of  the  Cossacks,  who  form  the  most  important  and  effective 
portion. 

The  great  mass  is  of  cavalry,  with  some  batteries,  and  a  few  battalions  of  infantry,  for  service 
in  special  districts. 

The  sotnia  is  the  unit,  both  of  cavalry  and  infantry;  its  strength  varies  from  100  to  200  men. 

All  the  officers  are  appointed  by  the  emperor ;  the  subaltern  grades  alone  being  filled,  as 
general  rule,  by  Cossacks. 

Although  the  Cossacks  are  all  classed  under  the  general  name  of  irregulars,  there  are  many 
regiments  which  are,  in  reality,  regular  light  cavalry ;  it  is  probable  that  the  Cossacks  of  the 
guard,  and  many  of  those  of  the  Don,  are  the  best  regular  light  cavalry  in  the  world.  I  have 
witnessed  manoeuvres  of  the  Cossacks  of  the  guard  conducted  with  a  precision  that  it  would  be 
impossible  to  exceed. 

The  service  of  the  irregular  troops  is  mostly  performed  on  the  frontiers,  and  in  the  more  wild 
and  disturbed  portions  of  the  empire,  e.  g.,  in  Siberia,  on  the  frontiers  of  China  and  Tartary,  in 
the  Caucasus,  on  the  Danube,  &c.  Yet  large  bodies  of  them  are  with  the  regular  troops  in 
Poland,  &c.,  and  they  are  much  employed  at  the  custom-houses  as  police,  &c.  The  Cossacks 
of  the  Don  and  the  Oural,  being  no  longer  in  direct  and  constant  contact  with  an  enemy,  may, 
10  O 


74 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


ere  long,  cease  to  exist  as  such ;  at  present,  many  of  them  are  employed  in  the  Caucasus. 
The  Cossacks  of  the  sea  of  Azoff  man  the  gun-boats  used  on  that  sea  and  on  the  coast  of  the 
Caucasus. 

The  Cossacks  of  the  Black  sea  are  now  chiefly  in  the  Kuban,  and  it  was  by  an  union  of  a 
portion  of  these  with  the  mountain  Cossacks  that  the  formidable  Cossacks  of  the  line  of  the 
Caucasus  were  formed. 

It  is  impossible  to  obtain  accurate  and  full  information  as  to  the  numbers  of  the  irregular 
troops;  the  enumeration  of  Cossacks  given  below  is  probably  below  the  true  number. 

EFFECTIVE  STRENGTH  OF  THE  COSSACKS. 


> 

g 

o 

a 

Sotnias  of  cavalry. 

a 
p 

1 

m 

1 

Pieces. 

Names  of  Cossack  armies. 

Horse 
artillery. 

Foot 
artillery. 

Total. 

Approximate  strength, 
exclusive  of  artilleiy. 

58 
2 

12 

18 

12 

10 

3 

9 

348      

14 

112 

112 

42,000  cavalry. 

2.  Army  of  the  Danube 

3.  Army  of  the  Black  sea 

4.  Army  of  line  of  Caucasus. . . 

12 

1,700  cavalry. 

74 

108 
60 
60 
18 
54 
8 

9 

4 
3 

24 
24 

8 

32 
24 

9,000  cavalry.   - 
9,000  infantry. 

16,000  cavalry. 

7,500  cavalry. 

6.  Army  of  Orenburg 

7     A  rniv  of  Astrakan      

3 
1 
3 

24 

8 

24 

24 

8 
24 

7,500  cavalry. 
2,000  cavalry. 

R     Armv  of  Silieria          .      __-- 

6,  500  cavalry. 

1,000  cavalry. 

24 

24,  000  infantry. 

Total  .   

124 

742 

33 

28 

216 

8 

224 

(  93,  000  cavalry. 
1  33,  000  infantry. 

On  the  Chinese  frontier  there  are  also  five  regiments  of  Toungouse  cavalry.  In  the  Caucasus 
there  are  regiments  of  native  irregulars,  Mussulmen,  &c.  During  the  campaigns  of  1828  and 
1829  there  were  with  the  army  of  Marshal  Paskivitch  four  regiments  of  Mussulmen  cavalry  ; 
the  number  has  been  increased  since  then. 


KECRUITING,  ETC. 

The  officers  of  the  army  are  chiefly  supplied  by  young  nobles,  who  enter  the  service  after 
having  passed,  as  cadets,  through  some  of  the  numerous  military  schools,  or  else  have  prepared 
themselves  by  serving  six  months  as  privates,  two  years  as  sergeants,  and  then  as  ensigns  in 
the  regiments  ;  and  partly  by  sergeants,  who,  after  twelve  years'  irreproachable  service,  have  the 
right  to  demand  an  examination  for  the  grade  of  ensign.  The  ensign  is  a  non-commissioned 
oSicer  in  the  line  of  promotion,  and  must  pass  an  examination  before  receiving  a  commission. 

The  officers  of  the  general  stafl'  (etat  major)  are  selected  from  officers  of  all  arms,  who,  after 
having  served  two  years,  apply  for  the  corps.  They  must  be  recommended  by  their  com- 
manders, then  pass  an  examination  before  being  admitted  to  the  school  of  the  general  stafl" ; 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGK  B.  M'CLELLAN.  75 

having  spent  two  years  at  this  school,  they  undergo  a  final  examination  ;  if  they  pass  this, 
they  receive  vacancies  as  they  occur,  serving  meanwhile  with  arms  of  service  different  from  that 
to  which  they  originally  belonged. 

The  non-commissioned  ofiicers,  musicians,  soldiers,  veterinaries,  master  workmen,  &c.,  are 
supplied  in  three  ways  :  first,  by  conscription  ;  second,  from  the  cantonists ;  third,  by  voluntary 
enlistment. 

For  the  purposes  of  the  conscription,  the  European  provinces  are  divided  into  two  parts,  the 
eastern  and  the  western  ;  the  line  of  demarcation  follows  very  nearly  the  meridian  of  Moscow. 
In  time  of  peace  each  of  these  divisions  takes  turns  in  furnishing  the  annual  supply  of  recruits, 
which  is  five  men  out  of  every  1,000  souls  of  the  division  called  upon.  But  in  time  of  war,  or 
whenever  the  exigencies  of  the  service  demand  it,  this  ratio  is  increased,  or  both  divisions  are 
called  upon  at  once.  There  are  certain  conditions  which  exempt  from  the  conscription  :  for 
instance,  if  there  is  but  one  male  in  a  family  ;  being  the  father  of  three  young  children  ;  being 
an  orphan  or  a  foundling,  &c.,  &c.  In  the  communities  called  upon  lots  are  cast ;  but  it  is 
mentioned  as  a  singular  instance  of  the  workings  of  chance  that  the  lot  is  very  apt  to  fall  upon 
the  most  worthless  characters  in  the  community. 

Under  the  head  of  conscription  it  may  be  mentioned  that  men  guilty  of  civil  offences  are 
frequently  condemned  to  serve  in  the  army  ;  for  instance,  if  a  coachman  carelessly  drives  over 
any  one  in  the  streets,  he  is  sent  forthwith  to  the  army  ;  vagabonds,  thieves,  gipsies,  dissipated 
men,  &c.,  are  not  unfrequently  condemned  to  serve.  Yet,  mingled  with  these  worthless 
characters  are  many  good  men,  in  fact,  the  latter  preponderate,  and  the  influence  of  rigid 
discipline  soon  converts  the  others,  at  least  into  good  soldiers,  if  not  into  good  men.  Any  one 
designated  as  a  conscript  may  purchase  a  substitute,  if  he  can  find  one. 

The  cantonists  are  soldiers'  children,  educated  for  the  army  at  the  expense  of  the  State. 
Every  son  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  born  after  his  father  enters  the  service,  is 
necessarily  a  cantonist. 

At  the  option  of  his  parents,  he  may  be  taken  care  of  in  one  of  two  ways :  he  may  remain 
with  them  until  the  age  of  20,  the  government  allowing  him  clothing  and  rations,  and  then 
enter  the  army  as  a  private  soldier  ;  or  he  may,  at  the  age  of  six,  be  taken  charge  of  by  the 
government,  and  is  then  brought  up  at  one  of  the  establishments  maintained  for  the  purpose. 

"With  regard  to  the  cantonists  of  the  first  class,  the  state  assists  in  their  education,  which  is 
not  so  perfect  as  that  of  the  others  ;  those  who  are  physically  unfit  for  the  service  are  appren- 
ticed to  a  trade,  and  finally  sent  to  the  military  colonies. 

The  cantonists  of  the  second  class  remain  at  the  preparatory  establishments  until  the  age  of 
12  ;  they  then  enter  the  corps  of  cantonists,  which  consists  of  25  battalions,  20  squadrons,  5 
batteries,  1  regimental  school  of  tlie  guards,  14  artillery  division  schools,  3  sapper  brigade 
schools,  1  Cossack  school,  and  1  Siberian  school. 

At  about  the  age  of  lY  they  leave  the  corps  of  cantonists,  and  enter  either  the  battalions  of 
instruction,  where  8  battalions  of  carbineers,  1  squadron  of  dragoons,  (attached  to  the  model 
regiment  of  cavalry,)  3  batteries,  and  1  battalion  of  sappers  are  destined  to  receive  them,  or 
enter  the  special  schools,  among  which  are,  11  schools  of  the  garrison  artillery,  for  educating 
non-commissioned  officers,  3  technical  schools,  for  the  education  of  master  workmen  in  the 
armories,  3  for  master  workmen  in  the  powder  mills,  3  for  master  workmen  in  the  arsenals,  1 
veterinary  school,  1  surgical  school,  1  school  for  accountants,  1  topographical  school,  1  school 
for  riding  masters,  and  1  for  fencing  masters  ;  finally,  they  may  enter  the  army  directly  from 
the  corps  of  cantonists. 


76  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

With  the  means  thus  provided,  the  cantonists  furnish  excellent  non-commissioned  officers 
clerks,  musicians,  master  workmen,  veterinaries,  &c.,  &c. 

This  would  seem  to  be  the  proper  place  for  alluding  to  the  laws  with  regard  to  the  marriage 
of  officers  and  men. 

No  officer  is  allowed  to  marry  without  permission  ;  this  permission  is  granted  only  when 
either  the  officer,  or  the  lady  whom  he  is  about  to  marry,  possesses  a  certain  amount  of  property. 
This  amount  is  different  for  different  grades,  and  is  intended  to  be  sufficient  to  enable  the  officer 
to  support  his  family  in  a  manner  befitting  his  condition  during  his  life,  and  to  give  them  a 
decent  competence  after  his  death.  The  marriage  of  the  soldiers  is  encouraged,  for  the  reason 
that  the  institution  of  the  cantonists  prevents  their  children  from  being  an  incumbrance  to  the 
regiment  and  a  burden  upon  the  State. 

Wherever  it  is  possible,  suites  of  rooms  are  appropriated  to  the  married  soldiers  ;  more  than 
one  family  usually  living  in  the  same  room. 

Voluntary  enlistments  are  comparatively  few.  To  every  volunteer  who  presents  himself  the 
government  advances  a  certain  bounty,  which  it  receives  back  again  from  the  first  conscript  who 
desires  a  substitute.  The  greater  part  of  the  bounty  is  invested  for  the  volunteer,  who  receives 
but  a  small  portion  of  it  before  the  expiration  of  his  enlistment. 

THE  MILITAKY  COLONIES. 

Those  for  the  cavalry  and  horse  artillery  are  in  the  south  of  Eussia. 

(a)  The  Ukraine  colony,  in  the  government  of  Charkoff:  here  are  the  2d  reserve  cavalry  corps, 
the  6th  division  of  light  cavalry,  and  6th  brigade  of  horse  artillery. 

(5)  Colony  of  south  Eussia,  in  the  government  of  Cherson  :  1st  reserve  cavalry  corps. 

(c)  Colony  of  the  Boug,  in  the  government  of  Podolia :  4th  division  of  light  cavalry,  and  the 
4th  brigade  of  horse  artillery. 

(d)  Colony  of  the  lower  Boug,  in  the  government  of  Cherson :  5th  division  of  light  cavalry, 
and  5th  brigade  of  horse  artillery. 

The  reserve  light  cavalry  division,  and  the  reserve  batteries  of  the  horse  artillery  belonging 
to  the  infantry  corps,  are  also  in  these  colonies. 

The  arrangement  of  the  colonies  is  as  follows :  one-half  the  ground  is  reserved  for  the  support 
of  the  troops,  and  is  cultivated  by  the  colonists  ;  the  other  half  is  divided  among  the  colonists, 
each  family  having  240  acres,  one  plough,  and  a  house.  From  40  to  50  houses  form  a  platoon, 
180  to  190  a  squadron,  or  village,  and  from  6  to  10  squadrons  a  regiment. 

The  officers  preserve  military  and  civil  order  among  the  colonists. 

Each  house  is  required  to  feed  and  lodge  a  soldier,  without  his  horse,  the  soldier  assisting  his 
host  in  his  work.  The  colonist  is  exempt  from  all  taxes,  military  liabilities,  &c.  The  posses- 
sion passes  down  to  the  eldest  son,  and  renders  him  exempt  from  military  duties,  while  the  other 
sons  become  cantonists,  like  soldiers'  children,  and  are  eventually  taken  into  the  regiment. 

In  the  colonies  every  married  soldier  has  a  separate  house.  In  every  village  there  are  stables, 
riding  houses,  hospitals,  arsenals,  &c. 

The  infantry  colonies,  near  Novgorod,  are  no  longer  true  colonies ;  the  system  has  been 
abandoned  there,  and  at  present  certain  troops  are  cantoned  there,  under  no  peculiar  regulations. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  77 

UNIFOKM. 

The  predominant  color  of  the  Russian  uniform  is  dark  green.  A  frock-coat  is  worn  by  all 
grades,  and  all  arms  of  service  ;  it  is  green,  except  for  certain  portions  of  the  cavalry. 

Boots  are  worn  by  all  arms  ;  they  are  habitually  inside  the  pants,  except  for  the  cuirassiers, 
who,  in  full  dress,  wear  the  jack  boot ;  the  infantry,  however,  on  the  march,  tuck  the  pants 
inside  of  the  boot  legs. 

The  stock  is  of  green  cloth,  and  fastens  by  a  button  ;  it  has  in  front  a  flap,  some  four  or  five 
inches  long. 

The  distinctions  of  regiments,  divisions,  and  corps,  are  found  in  the  buttons,  shoulder  straps, 
and  facings  of  the  cuffs  and  collar  ;  sometimes  in  the  head  covering  and  the  color  of  the  dress. 

On  certain  occasions  the  officers  wear  sashes  ;  these  are  of  silver  cloth  for  the  guard,  and  of 
mohair,  colored  white,  black,  and  orange,  for  the  rest  of  the  army  ;  the  tassel  is  worn  behind 
the  left  hip.  The  sword  knot  is  of  similar  material  and  color.  Officers  on  duty  wear  the  gorget ; 
a  crescent-shaped  metallic  plate,  hung  around  the  neck,  and  resting  on  the  breast  just  below  the 
collar.  Generals,  stafi"  officers,  and  adjutants  of  infantry,  wear  a  straight  sword.  The  different 
grades  of  officers  are  distinguished  chiefly  by  the  epaulettes,  or  shoulder  straps. 

Company  officers  wear  epaulettes  without  bullion,  i.  e. ,  merely  the  strap  and  crescent,  the  latter 
of  wire  instead  of  solid  metal ;  a  sub-lieutenant  has  one  star  on  the  strap  of  each  epaulette,  a  lieu- 
tenant two  stars,  a  captain  three.  Field  officers  have  a  very  short  and  light  bullion  ;  a  major 
has  one  star,  a  lieutenant  colonel  two,  a  colonel  three. 

General  officers  wear  a  heavier  bullion,  of  the  pattern  known  as  the  box-epaulette  ;  a  major- 
general  has  one  star,  a  lieutenant  general  two,  a  general  three.  A  field  marshal  wears  a  still 
heavier  epaulette,  with  three  stars,  and  a  distinctive  gold  embroidery  on  the  collar. 

All  officers  have,  in  full  dress,  lace  or  embroidery  on  the  collar  and  cufi's,  distinctive  of  rank. 

The  aiguillette  is  worn  by  staff  officers. 

Mounted  officers  are  required  to  wear  their  spurs  on  all  occasions.  The  helmet  is  worn  by 
all  stafi'  officers  ;  officers  serving  with  regiments  wear  a  head  dress  similar  to  that  of  their  men. 

The  forage  cap  of  the  officers  is  flat,  with  a  large  round  top,  and  a  peaked  vizor.  General 
officers  wear  scarlet  pants,  with  a  gold  stripe. 

Other  officers  wear  dark  green  pants  with  a  red  cord,  except  in  those  regiments  where  the 
men  wear  pants  of  some  other  color  than  green. 

Infantry  officers  wear  an  overcoat  of  the  same  cut  and  color  as  those  of  the  men. 

Cavalry  and  staff  officers  wear  a  mantle,  or  loose  overcoat,  with  a  long  cape,  and  of  a  dark 
gray  color. 

Recently  a  field  uniform  has  been  adopted  for  the  officers,  in  which  the  epaulettes  are  replaced 
by  shoulder  straps  of  a  shape  similar  to  those  worn  by  the  men. 

The  distinctive  mark  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  is  a  narrow  strip  of  gold  or  silver  lace 
(depending  upon  the  color  of  the  button)  on  the  upper  and  front  edges  of  the  collar  and  on 
the  cufi's. 

Chevrons  are  worn  on  one  arm,  and  merely  designate  length  of  service. 

The  soldiers'  clothing  is  of  a  very  coarse  but  serviceable  material,  and  is  made  up  in  the 
regiments. 

The  same  overcoat  is  worn  by  all  arms  of  service  ;  it  is  of  a  brownish  gray  color ;  very  long, 
reaching  to  within  3  or  4  inches  of  the  bottom  of  the  pants  ;  double  breasted,  standing  collar, 
without  cape ;  it  is  made  very  loose  by  means  of  large  pleats  in  the  back,  which  can  be  gathered 


78  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

up  by  a  strap  and  button  ;  the  buttons,  sboulder  straps,  cuff  and  collar  facings,  are  the  same  as 
those  of  the  uniform  coat.  As  the  men  have  no  blanket  in  the  field,  the  overcoat  is  their  only 
protection.  It  is  the  habitual  and  favorite  dress  of  the  Russian  soldier  ;  on  the  march  the  infantry 
hook  up  the  skirts. 

The  forage  cap,  for  all  arms,  is  low,  with  a  flat,  round  top,  and  has  no  vizor  ;  it  is  of  the  color 
of  the  overcoat,  usually  has  a  red  cloth  band,  with  the  number  of  the  company  in  yellow  cloth, 
and  a  red  cord  around  the  edge  of  the  top. 

Instead  of  socks,  the  men  have  bandages  of  linen,  which  they  wrap  around  the  feet.  Shirts 
and  drawers  are  issued. 

INFANTRY. 

Black  leather  helmet,  with  a  brass  spear  head  ;  thin  strap,  plated  with  brass  scales  ;  large 
imperial  eagle  of  brass  on  the  front. 

Coat,  dark  green  ;  distinction  of  regiments  and  divisions  as  follows  :  number  of  the  regiment 
on  the  button,  which  is  yellow  ;  number  of  the  division  on  the  shoulder  straps,  which  are  shaped 
like  those  upon  the  old  United  States  private's  undress  jacket.  Infantry  of  the  line  have  red 
facings  on  their  collars  ;  light  infantry,  dark  green  ;  both  have  red  cuff  facings.  The  1st  regi- 
ment of  each  brigade  of  infantry  of  the  line  have  red,  the  2d  white  shoulder  straps  ;  the  1st  regi- 
ment of  each  brigade  of  light  infantry  have  light  blue,  the  2d  dark  green  shoulder  straps.  The 
rifle  battalions  have  white  buttons  and  shoulder  straj^s  ;  black  facings.  Pants  of  all  the  infantry, 
dark  green,  with  a  red  cord  ;  in  summer,  white  linen. 

CAVALRY. 

Pants,  except  for  the  Cossacks  and  dragoons  of  the  Caucasus,  light  blue,  with  a  red  cord,  and 
re-enforced  with  black  leather. 

Cuirassiers. — Metallic  helmet,  white  coat,  with  facings  of  various  colors  for  the  different  regi- 
ments ;  white  gauntlets. 

Dragoons. — Helmet  like  that  of  the  infantry,  but  with  black  horse  hair  plumes  ;  coat,  dark 
green,  yellow  buttons,  brass  shoulder  scales. 

Lancers. — Czapha,  or  Polish  lancer  cap,  of  same  color  as  the  facings  ;  water-proof  cover.  Coat, 
sky  blue  ;  facings  different  for  different  regiments  ;  buttons  white. 

Hussars. — Cloth  shako,  nearly  cylindrical,  but  a  little  larger  at  the  top  than  at  bottom  ;  vizor 
sloping,  and  peaked  ;  hair  hackle  ;  cap  cord  ;  water-proof  cover.  Coats  of  various  colors,  trimmed 
with  bright  cord  ;  shoulder  knot  of  cord  of  same  color  as  the  trimmings.  In  full  dress,  the  pelisse 
is  worn. 

In  the  cavalry,  the  number  of  the  regiment,  &c.,  is  indicated  in  a  manner  similar  to  that 
pursued  in  the  infantry. 

All  officers  of  cavalry  wear  a  pistol  cartridge  box,  suspended  by  a  shoulder  belt ;  it  is  richly 
decorated  with  metal. 

Cossacks  of  the  guard. — Pants,  dark  blue,  with  a  red  stri2:)e  ;  coat,  dark  blue  ;  no  buttons  ; 
fastens  by  hooks  ;  worsted  epaulettes,  without  bullion.  Cylindrical  fur  shako,  without  vizor  ; 
double  jiompon  on  the  left  side  ;  cloth  bag  hanging  down  on  the  right  side  ;  water-proof  cover. 

All  the  head  dresses  heretofore  mentioned  have  on  the  front  a  brass  imperial  eagle,  6J  inches 
high  and  6^  inches  broad  ;  on  this  is  the  number  of  the  regiment. 

Dragoons  of  the  Caucasus. — Light  gray  pants  ;  dark  gray  coat,  cut  like  that  of  the  Cossacks  of 
the  guard. 


J 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   JM'CLELLAN.  79 

Hat,  turban-shaped,  with  a  crown  of  cloth,  and  a  broad  thick  band  of  lamb's  wuul. 

The  Cossacks  of  the  line  of  the  Caucasus,  most  of  the  other  Cossacks,  and,  on  service,  most  of 
the  regular  troops  serving  in  the  Caucasus,  wear  the  hat  described  for  the  dragoons  of  the 
Caucasus. 

The  dress  of  the  Cossacks  is  loose  and  easy  ;  generally  of  dark  colors. 

The  Mussulmen  troops  wear  the  high,  pointed  Persian  cap  of  lamb's  wool ;  their  dress  is  cut 
in  the  Persian  style,  and  is  generally  of  very  bright  colors  ;  each  man  selecting  those  colors 
which  suit  his  fancy. 

Artillery. — Dragoon  helmet ;  coat  dark  green,  yellow  buttons,  black  facings,  red  shoulder 
straps.  Horse  artillery  have  brass  shoulder  scales,  like  the  dragoons.  Cossack  artillery  wear 
the  Cossack  dress. 

Sappers. — Same  uniform  as  the  foot  artillery,  except  that  the  buttons  are  white  and  the  belts 
black. 

Gendarmes. — Dragoon  helmet";  light  blue  coat  and  pants  ;  white  buttons  ;  white  gauntlets. 

The  train. — Gray  uniform,  with  blue  facings  ;  red  shoulder  straps  ;  white  buttons  and  belts. 
Officers'  servants  wear  the  uniform  of  the  train. 

INSPECTIONS. 

Independently  of  special  inspections  by  staff  officers,  every  regiment  is  inspected  once  a  month 
by  its  colonel,  as  often  by  the  general  of  brigade,  3  or  4  times  a  year  by  the  general  of  division, 
and  once  each  year  by  the  general  commanding  the  army  corps. 

At  the  inspections  by  the  general  officers,  after  the  insj^ection  under  arms,  the  men  are 
assembled  without  the  officers,  and  are  then  asked  whether  they  have  any  complaints  to  make. 

The  aides  of  the  emperor,  of  the  minister  of  war,  &c.,  are  frequently  sent  to  make  unexpected 
inspections  of  distant  establishments. 

QUARTERS. 

They  are  comfortable,  and  kept  in  good  order. 

The  men  have  wooden  or  iron  bunks  ;  single  iron  bunks  are  being  generally  introduced.  Each 
man  is  provided  with  a  straw  mattress  and  pillow,  and  one  or  more  blankets,  according  to  the 
season  ;  the  bedding  belongs  to  the  barracks,  and  not  to  the  men,  so  that  none  of  it  accompanies 
the  men  when  they  change  quarters.     In  the  quarters  of  bands,  &c.,  are  tables  and  chairs. 

The  wooden  bunks  are  provided  with  drawers  ;  there  is  a  shelf  and  rack  over  the  head  of  each 
bed  ;  the  arms  in  racks  along  the  walls.  In  quarters,  there  are  always  sergeants  and  privates 
of  the  day  on  duty,  with  side  arms.  Some  of  the  quarters,  especially  in  new  barracks  for  the 
special  arms,  have  separate  mess  rooms. 

In  the  new  barracks,  and  in  some  of  the  old,  arrangements  for  the  ablutions  of  the  men  are 
provided  in  the  building. 

The  officers'  quarters  are  generally  good,  and  are,  to  a  certain  extent,  provided  with  furniture 
by  the  government. 

The  cavalry  quarters  are  sometimes  over  the  stables. 


80  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 


TENTS. 

/;,  y^^^^  "^^6  annexed  sketch  represents  a  vertical  section  through 

/^    •!         \,^  the  centre  of  a  tent ;  they  are  square,  with  a  pyramidal  roof. 

^,-^^'       't ~    V'~'~"^~<i      They  are  supported  by  a  centre  pole,  and  a  short  pole  at  each 

\      1-^  ^  k\      \      angle  of  the  roof.     When  the  arms  are  taken  inside  the  tent, 

11     l.%'\       J*-    J. '   0'      1  A    I       they  are  tied  around  the  centre  pole. 

i]  !■■  In  permanent  camps  the  men  have  a  plank  banquette  bed, 

and  usually  dig  a  cellar  3'  deep,  banking  up  around  the  tent  with  the  earth  thus  obtained. 

A  tent  is  pitched  by  5  men  in  3  minutes.  The  allowance  of  tents  is  :  1  for  each  field  ofiScer, 
1  for  every  two  company  officers,  1  for  every  15  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates,  whether 
of  infantry  or  cavalry. 

HOSPITALS. 

As  these  will  be  fully  considered  in  the  report  of  another  member  of  the  commission,  it  will 
be  sufficient  to  record  here  my  opinion,  that  the  best  Kussian  military  hospitals  are,  for  comfort, 
convenience,  and  cleanliness,  the  model  hospitals  of  the  world. 

In  all  of  them  the  utmost  order  and  cleanliness  is  preserved,  and  the  greatest  attention  paid 
to  the  sick. 

The  command,  control  of  the  police,  and  responsibility,  is  always  vested  in  an  officer  of  the 
line,  who  has  other  officers  as  assistants ;  the  surgeons  have  merely  to  prescribe,  order  the  diet, 
&c.,  but  have  not  the  slightest  military  authority  or  responsibility.  I  would  call  attention  to 
this  system  as  being  eminently  worthy  of  consideration,  in  the  event  of  the  establishment  of 
large  temporary  hospitals  during  a  war,  or  any  concentration  of  a  large  number  of  troops. 

THE   ARTEL. 

This  is  a  species  of  company  fund,  belonging  in  common  to  all  the  non-commissioned  officers 
and  men  of  the  company.  It  is  formed  by  certain  regular  stoppages  of  pay,  extra  allowances, 
and  the  produce  of  extra  labor  by  the  men,  whether  for  civilians,  as  sap  guards,  &c.,  or 
otherwise.  These  extra  labors  are  encouraged  wherever  circumstances  permit,  and  the  whole 
product  is  turned  into  the  artel.  By  means  of  this  fund  the  men  are  provided  with  vegetables, 
salt,  extra  meat,  oat  meal,  cleaning  utensils,  wagons  and  horses  for  the  transportation  of  the 
company  provisions,  &c. 

It  is  only  when  the  soldier  leaves  the  service  that  he  receives  his  share  of  the  fund  ;  this 
individual  share  is  stated  to  amount  sometimes  to  more  than  $100. 

The  artel  is  divided  into  two  parts,  or  funds:  one  serving  to  provide  for  the  current  wants  of 
the  men,  the  other  to  pay  them  their  share  upon  leaving. 

The  management  and  application  of  the  artel  is  entrusted  to  sergeants  and  privates  elected 
by  the  company. 

One  of  these  men  makes  the  daily  purchases  for  the  mess,  &c.,  being  always  accompanied 
and  watched  by  two  others,  whose  duty  it  is  to  protect  the  interests  of  the  company. 

A  monthly  report  is  made  to  the  captain. 

RATIONS. 

The  daily  ration  consists  of  2|  pounds  of  bread,  half  pound  fresh  meat,  salt,  oatmeal, 
cabbage,  and  brandy.     The  bread,  the  brandy,   and  one-half  the  meat,  is  furnished  by  the 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  81 

government,  that  is  to  say,  always  issued  in  kind  ;  tlie  rest  of  tlie  ration  is  purcliased  by  means 
of  the  artel;  the  daily  sum  allowed  to  the  artel  for  this  purpose  varies  with  circumstances. 

The  Kussian  soldier  has,  habitually,  three  meals  per  day :  1.  Breakfast,  simply  of  bread  and 
salt,  with  a  little  brandy.  2.  Dinner,  at  11  o'clock,  of  bread  and  soup,  made  of  meat, 
cabbage,  &c.  3.  Supper,  at  4  o'clock,  of  bread  and  soup,  or  oatmeal  porridge.  The  bread  is 
brown,  both  it  and  the  soup  are  coarse  and  acid,  but  they  are  nutritious  and  plentiful ;  the 
acidity  is  agreeable  to  the  taste  of  the  Eussian. 

In  permanent  camps,  and  in  barracks,  the  cooking  is  by  company,  in  large  boilers.  The 
baking  is  done  by  men  detailed  permanently. 

In  barracks  the  men  usually  eat  in  their  own  rooms,  but  they  sometimes  have  mess  rooms  ; 
in  permanent  camps  messing  places  are  provided  in  rear  of  the  kitchens,  the  seats  and  table 
being  sodded  banks  of  earth,  with  a  roof  of  boughs  or  thatching. 

Each  man  has  a  wooden  spoon,  and  there  is  a  soup  bowl  for  every  6  men,  out  of  which  they 
eat  in  common. 

No  portable  ovens  are  carried  on  the  march. 

Where  it  is  possible,  bakers  are  sent  on  two  days  in  advance  to  bake  in  the  ordinary  ovens  of 
the  villages ;  if  this  cannot  be  done,  they  either  carry  flour  and  bake  it  in  temporary  ovens,  of 
wattling,  covered  with  clay,  or  else  issue  biscuit. 

In  the  field  a  small  copper  kettle,  without  cover,  is  carried  for  every  three  men. 

PAT. 

The  circumstances  in  which  the  Eussian  troops  are  placed  are  so  totally  different  from  those 
of  our  own  army  as  to  render  entirely  useless  any  attempt  at  a  comparison  of  the  respective 
amounts  of  pay. 

It  will  be  suflScient  to  state  that  the  pay  of  the  Eussian  army  is  very  low,  and  that  the  prin- 
ciple is  recognised  of  increasing  the  pay,  of  both  officers  and  men,  in  proportion  to  the 
importance,  difficidty,  and  danger  of  the  service  performed. 

The  captains  of  squadrons,  companies,  &c.,  are  responsible  for  the  arms,  accoutrements, 
spare  clothing,  &c.,  of  their  commands. 

As  the  militia  was  a  peculiar  body,  and  not  a  part  of  the  regular  organization,  but  a  new 
feature  called  forth  by  the  exigencies  of  the  late  war,  it  is  deemed  best  not  to  include  it  in  the 
foregoing  general  description  of  the  military  establishment. 

It  will  be  described  in  the  chapter  on  the  Eussian  infantry,  which  seems  to  be  its  appropriate 

place. 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  \st  Cavalry. 
October  28,  1856. 

11   © 


CHAPTEU  II. 


THE  INSTRUCTION  AND  TACTICS  OF  CAVALRY. 


The  Kussian  cavalry  tactics  comprise  the  following  schools,  or  divisions  of  instruction :  1. 
The  school  of  the  recruit,  divided  into :  a.  Manege,  or  individual  equitation ;  b.  Drill  in  single 
rank;  c.  Sabre,  lance,  carhine,  and  pistol  exercise.  2.  The  school  of  the  platoon.  3.  School 
of  the  squadron.  4.  School  of  the  regiment.  5.  Evolutions  of  the  line.  As  supplements  to 
these,  are  the  regulations  for  service  in  garrison  and  in  the  field ;  the  latter  being  divided  into 
regulations  for  field  service  during  peace,  and  those  for  time  of  war. 

It  is  proposed  to  give  in  this  chapter  sufficiently  copious  extracts  from  the  tactics  to  explain 
the  system  of  instruction  and  its  peculiarities.  The  sabre  exercise  is  presented  in  full.  The 
subjects  are  presented  in  the  order  in  which  they  occur  in  the  tactics ;  those  portions  being 
omitted  which  are  neither  new  nor  interesting.  Although  generally  condensing  the  text,  I  have 
endeavored  to  preserve  the  spirit  and  language  of  the  original  Kussian. 

I.   SCHOOL  OF  THE  EECRUIT. 

The  instruction  of  the  recruits  is  presumed  to  require  nine  months ;  immediately  after  joining 
the  regiment  or  depot  they  are  placed  under  the  charge  of  monitors,  selected  from  among  the 
most  steady  and  intelligent  old  soldiers. 

1st  month.  The  recruits  are  taught  certain  religious  duties  and  the  obligations  of  their  new 
vocation.  The  monitors  impress  upon  them  the  advantages  of  irreproachable  conduct,  and  the 
consequences  of  negligence,  evil  disposition,  and  crime.  They  are  made  acquainted  with  all 
parts  of  a  soldier's  uniform,  how  to  wear,  and  keep  it  in  order. 

2d  month.  They  are  taught  how  to  clean  a  horse ;  are  made  acquainted  with  the  names,  object, 
and  manner  of  using  the  different  parts  of  the  horse  equipment ;  are  taught  how  to  place  the 
saddle,  (without  the  pack,)  first  on  a  wooden  horse,  afterwards  on  the  animal  itself;  to  clean 
their  arms  and  take  them  to  pieces  ;  and  they  commence  chanting  the  signals. 

3d  month.  They  are  taught  the  first  princijiles  of  dismounted  drill,  beginning  with  the 
facings  and  marching ;  to  load  without  the  motions ;  the  principles  of  the  skirmish  drill,  and 
of  duty  at  the  advanced  posts,  whether  on  foot  or  mounted,  according  to  the  following  system: 

1.  The  instruction  commences  with  the  signals  and  the  movements  of  skirmishers  without 
arms ;  when  they  have  learned  to  load  without  the  motions,  their  fire-arms  are  given  to  them 
when  learning  the  duties  of  advanced  posts. 

2.  The  most  simple  signals,  such  as  "common  time,"  "right  turn,"  &c.,  are  employed  at 
first,  afterwards  passing  to  the  more  difficult. 

3.  In  all  the  lessons  the  proper  progression  is  observed,  never  advancing  to  any  new  lesson 
until  all  that  precedes  is  comprehended. 

4.  After  a  certain  amount  of  preliminary  instruction,  the  recruits  are  divided  into  classes,  or 
squads,  according  to  their  progress. 


EEPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M'CLELLAN.  8S 

5.  In  the  more  advanced  squads,  the  recruits  will  have  their  positions  in  the  ranks  changed, 
that  they  may  learn  the  duties  of  all  positions. 

6.  To  complete  the  instruction  in  the  duties  of  advanced  posts,  squads  will  he  placed  in  front 
of  each  other,  that  the  men  may  understand  the  position  of  the  enemy  and  the  manner  of 
applying  what  they  have  been  taught. 

4th  month.  The  instruction  of  the  preceding  month  is  continued  by  drilling  the  recruits,  on 
foot,  at  the  rank  and  platoon  drill  for  mounted  troops.  At  the  beginning  of  this  month  they 
are  taught  the  first  principles  of  equitation  with  the  snaiHe,  each  man  always  having  the  same 
quiet,  well  broken  horse.  The  men  are  not  required  to  maintain  a  correct  seat  in  the  first 
lessons,  and  the  observation  of  the  principles  is  insisted  upon  only  when  they  can  sit  the  horse 
without  fear  of  falling  off,  and  have  acquired  a  certain  amount  of  self-confidence. 

5th  month.  Equitation  with  the  snaffle  is  continued.  The  men  are  taught  the  facings  and 
marching  on  foot  with  arms;  the  use  of  arms  on  foot,  beginning  with  the  sabre,  then  passing 
to  the  fire-arms,  and  finally  to  the  lance — for  troops  armed  with  that  weapon. 

6th  month.  The  instruction  in  taking  apart  and  putting  together  the  fire-arms  is  completed. 
Equitation  with  the  curb,  without  arms,  is  commenced  by  all  sufficiently  instructed  in  riding 
with'the  snaffle.  They  are  at  the  same  time  taught  the  manner  of  bitting  a  horse,  packing  the 
valise  and  cartridge  box,  and  saddling  up  with  the  complete  jjack. 

7th  month.  Equitation  with  the  curb,  with  arms. 

8th  month.  Full  instruction  in  the  rank,  platoon,  and  skirmish  drills,  with  arms  and 
mounted. 

9th  month.  Use  of  all  arms,  mounted. 

After  this  month  the  recruit  is  occupied  in  perfecting  himself  in  the  instruction  prescribed  for 
the  preceeding  months. 

The  progression  herein  prescribed  is  to  be  carefully  obsei'ved  ;  great  care  is  to  be  taken  not  to 
exact  too  great  precision  at  first,  in  order  not  to  disgust  the  recruits.  Each  drill  should  last 
not  longer  than  from  one  hour  to  one  hour  and  a  half.  Great  care  must  be  exercised  in  the 
choice  of  instructors,  who  should  unite  patience  with  knowledge,  and  possess  the  faculty  of 
giving  clear  explanations. 

During  the  first  six  months  the  recruits  are  to  be  instructed  at  least  twice  a  week  by  the 
chaplain  in  their  religious  duties,  such  as  the  Lord's  Prayer,  the  Ten  Commandments,  the 
Apostle's  Creed,  the  Psalms,  &c.  In  detached  squadrons  the  religious  instruction  is  given  by 
the  sergeants. 

MANEGE  KIDING. 

This  should  be  limited  to  the  actual  necessities  of  the  service,  and  by  the  natural  capacity  of 
the  horse ;  therefore  more  is  required  of  the  non-commissioned  ofiScers  than  of  the  privates, 
because  the  former  have  the  best  riding  horses.     The  non-commissioned  officers  are  taught — 

1.  The  walk. 

2.  The  trot :  (a)  the  common  trot,  and  (b)  the  trot  out. 

3.  The  gallop,  on  either  foot. 

4.  The  charge. 

5.  To  rein  back. 

6.  The  right  and  left  turn,  right  about  and  left  about  turn,  in  place. 
1.  To  passage  to  the  right  and  left. 

8.  The  turns  and  abouts,  at  all  gaits  ;  at  a  gallop,  both  true  and  false. 


84  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

9.  To  ride  in  circle  to  right  and  left,  at  all  gaits. 

10.  To  circle  back  to  rear  on  same  track,  at  all  gaits  ;  at  a  gallop,  both  true  and  false. 

11.  To  change  direction  across  the  riding  hall,  at  all  gaits. 

12.  To  change  foot  when  galloping  on  a  straight  line. 

13.  To  leap  ditches  and  fences. 

The  privates  are  taught  everything  prescribed  above,  with  the  following  exceptions  :  they  are 
not  required  to  change  foot  at  a  gallop,  nor  to  gallop  false  ;  it  is  only  at  a  walk  and  trot  that 
they  ride  in  circle,  circle  back  to  rear  on  the  same  track,  and  change  direction  in  the  riding 
hall.  Nevertheless,  the  privates  having  the  best  horses  should  receive  the  instruction  prescribed 
for  the  non-commissioned  officers,  as  far  as  the  strength  and  fitness  of  the  horses  and  the  aptness 
and  intelligence  of  the  men  will  permit.  Commanders  of  troops  should  never  require  of  the 
men  more  than  is  prescribed  in  these  instructions,  and  should  never  lose  sight  of  the  preserva- 
tion of  their  horses  ;  for  a  horse  in  good  order,  although  less  perfectly  broken  to  the  rules  of 
manege  riding,  is  preferable  to  one  perfectly  instructed  in  all  these  rules,  but  broken  down. 

The  recruits  are  carried  through  the  course  indicated  above,  at  first  with  the  snafiie,  after- 
wards with  the  curb.  The  squads  are  made  as  small  as  the  available  number  of  instructors 
will  permit,  and  the  movements  in  the  riding  hall  are  few  in  number  and  simple  in  kind,  being 
limited  to  those  actually  necessary  for  the  purpose  in  view. 

THE  GAITS. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  gaits  :  the  walk,  trot,  and  gallop. 
The  trot  is  of  two  kinds  :  (a)  the  common  trot,  (h)  the  trot  out. 
The  charge  is  the  acceleration  of  the  gallop  to  the  utmost  power  of  the  horse. 
At  a  walk  the  horse  travels  about  3^  miles  per  hour  ;    at  the  common  trot,  6| ;    at  the  trot 
out,  9J  ;  at  the  gallop,  8. 

EQUITATION. 

The  instructor  must  never  allow  the  recruit  to  pass  from  one  lesson  to  another  until  he  fully 
understands  and  can  execute  all  that  precedes.  When  the  recruit  has  learned  how  to  arrange 
his  equipment,  to  take  care  of  a  horse,  to  saddle  and  bridle  him,  he  takes  his  first  lessons  in 
ridino-,  on  a  quiet,  well  broken  horse.  The  first  lessons  are  given  with  the  snaifie  ;  the  man  is 
to  be  in  undress  uniform,  without  arms  or  accoutrements,  the  horse  without  schabraque,  but 
with  a  surcingle ;  in  the  first  lessons  with  the  curb  the  recruit  is  without  arms  or  accoutre- 
ments then  with  both,  and  finally  with  the  schabraque  and  full  pack.  In  the  beginning  the 
recruit  is  required  to  ride  with  stirrups  somewhat  shorter  than  the  proper  length,  that  he  may 
acquire  confidence  and  firmness  in  his  seat,  without  which  the  fear  of  falling  from  his  horse 
renders  him  inattentive  to  the  explanations  of  the  instructor.  In  the  course  of  time,  as  he 
progresses,  the  stirrups  are  lengthened,  and  finally  he  is  required  to  ride  without  them,  until  he 
acquires  a  perfectly  firm  seat ;  then  he  is  again  obliged  to  ride  with  stirrups  an  inch  too  long, 
and  is  thus,  in  the  course  of  several  lessons,  brought  by  degrees  to  the  prescribed  length. 

It  is  necessary  to  explain  to  the  recruit  that  he  should  not  press  hard  upon  the  stirrups,  or 
thrust  them  forward,  but  allow  them  to  hang  vertically  ;  also,  that  the  bottom  of  the  stirrup 
should  never  be  under  the  hollow  of  the  foot,  but  that  the  first  joint  of  the  great  toe  should  be 
ao-ainst  the  inner  side  of  the  stirrup  ;  in  other  words,  the  ball  of  the  foot  rests  on  tlie  stirrup. 
Spurs  are  given  to  the  recruit  when  he  is  fully  confirmed  in  his  seat,  with  and  without  stirrups. 


KEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   M'CLELLAN.  85 


THE  SEAT. 

The  body  of  tlie  rider  is  divided  into  three  parts,  of  which  two  are  movable  and  one  immov- 
able ;  one  of  the  first  consists  of  all  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  down  to  the  waist,  the  other  of 
the  lower  part  of  the  legs,  from  the  knee  down  ;  the  immovable  portion  is  from  the  waist  to  the 
knees. — (PI.  1,  fig.  4.)  The  cavalry  soldier  should  sit  square  on  the  middle  of  the  saddle,  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  presenting  a  free  and  unconstrained  appearance,  the  chest  not  much 
thrown  forward,  the  ribs  resting  freely  on  the  hips,  the  waist  and  loins  not  stiffened,  and  thus 
not  exposed  to  tension  or  effort  from  the  motions  of  the  horse ;  the  upper  part  of  the  body  should 
lean  slightly  to  the  rear,  rather  than  forward  ;  the  thighs,  inclining  a  little  forward,  lie  flat  and 
firmly  on  the  saddle,  covering  the  surcingle,  of  which  only  a  small  part,  behind  the  knee,  should 
be  seen  ;  the  lower  part  of  the  legs,  hanging  vertically  from  the  knees,  touch  the  horse,  but 
without  the  slightest  pressure  ;  the  toes  are  pointed  up,  without  constraint,  and  on  the  same 
line  with  the  knees,  for,  if  the  toes  are  turned  outward,  it  not  only  causes  the  horse  to  be 
unnecessarily  pricked  by  the  spurs,  (especially  when  marching  in  line,)  but  the  firmness  of  the 
seat  is  lost ;  the  heels  should  be  f  (seven-eighths)  of  an  inch  below  the  toes,  and  the  stirrups  so 
adjusted  that,  when  the  rider  raises  himself  on  them,  there  may  be  the  breadth  of  four  fingers 
between  the  crotch  and  the  saddle  ;  to  make  this  adjustment,  when  the  recruit  has  acquired  a 
firm  and  correct  seat,  he  should,  without  changing  that  seat,  push  the  bottom  of  the  stirrup  to 
the  hollow  of  the  foot,  and  then,  with  the  foot  horizontal,  feel  a  slight  support  from  the  stirrup ; 
when  this  is  accomplished,  he  replaces  the  foot  properly  in  the  stirrup,  and  the  heel  will  then  be 
^  of  an  inch  below  the  toes. 

To  give  the  recruit  a  correct  seat,  the  instructor,  having  caused  him  to  mount,  seizes  the 
lower  part  of  his  leg,  and  stretches  it  straight  towards  the  fore  quarters  of  the  horse,  so  as  to 
bring  the  buttocks  of  the  rider  square  on  the  saddle  ;  then,  resting  one  hand  on  the  man's  knee, 
he  seizes  the  lower  part  of  the  leg  with  the  other,  and  carries  back  the  thigh  and  knee  so  as  to 
bring  the  crotch  square  on  the  saddle,  the  thighs  covering  the  surcingle,  the  lower  part  of  the 
leg,  from  the  knee  down,  also  over  the  surcingle,  and  sees  that  the  recruit  does  not  sit  too  much 
on  his  crotch,  but  has  his  buttocks  well  under  him.  He  then  explains  to  the  recruit  that  the 
firmness  of  the  seat  consists  in  this  :  that  the  rider  grasps  the  horse  with  his  legs  ;  that  both 
thighs  press  equally  upon  the  saddle,  in  conformity  with  the  movements  of  the  body  ;  and  that 
the  general  movements  of  the  body  and  thighs  must  conform  to  those  of  the  horse.  To  spare  the 
horses,  and  explain  more  readily  to  the  recruit  the  principles  of  the  seat,  he  should  at  first  sit 
upon  a  wooden  horse,  on  which  a  saddle  is  secured,  (PI.  1,  fig.  3  ;)  on  this  he  should  learn  to 
carry  the  thighs  back,  without  leaning  the  body  forward  ;  at  the  same  time  he  is  taught  how  to 
hold  the  feet,  without  allowing  him  to  place  them  in  the  stirruj)s,  for  this  is  one  of  the  most 
essential  conditions  for  a  good  seat. 

Position  of  the  hands  and  arms  when  riding  with  the  snaffle. 

Both  arms  free,  and  without  the  slightest  stiffness  in  the  shoulders ;  the  elbows  bent ;  the 
upper  part  of  the  arms  a  little  forward  of  the  vertical ;  the  fore  arms  resting  against  the  sides, 
without  pressure  ;  both  hands  raised  a  little  above  the  elbows,  but  not  higher  than  the  eyes  of 
the  horse  ;  the  hands  five  or  six  fingers'  breadth  apart,  the  outer  hand  higher  than  the  inner  ; 
the  units  on  the  prolongation  of  the  fore  arms  ;  the  thumbs  on  top,  and  not  turned  inwards ;  the 
manner  of  holding  the  reins  is  shown  in  PI.  1,  figs.  1  and  2. 


86  MILITAEY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Position  of  the  hands  and  arms  when  riding  luith  the  curb. — (PL  1,  fig.  4.) 

The  left  arm  free,  and  without  the  slightest  stiffness ;  the  elbow  bent,  and  on  the  vertical  line 
from  the  shoulder  to  the  hip  ;  the  fore  arm  touches  the  side,  without  pressure  ;  the  hand  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  fore  arm,  and  two  or  three  fingers'  breadth  above  the  pommel;  the  curb  reins 
pass  upward  through  the  hand,  and  over  the  fore  finger,  covered  by  all  the  four  fingers,  the  nails 
opposite  the  bottom  of  the  jacket,  and  in  such  a  position  that  the  rider  can  see  the  little  finger 
nail  by  casting  his  eyes  on  the  hand  ;  the  snaffle  reins  pass  over  the  fore  finger,  and  downwards 
through  the  hand,  lying  flat  in  the  hollow  of  the  hand  ;  the  thumb  presses  on  top  of  the  reins  ; 
the  right  hand  rests,  with  the  knuckles,  on  the  seam  of  the  pants,  on  the  right  thigh,  seven 
inches  below  the  hip,  the  fist  closed,  except  the  thumb,  which  lies  on  the  seam,  pointing 
upwards  ;  the  elbow  on  the  line  of  the  shoulders. 

For  the  lessons  with  the  snaffle,  the  horse  is  conducted  to  the  ground  without  passing  the  reins 
over  his  head,  they  are  passed  over  just  before  placing  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup  ;  in  the  lessons 
with  the  curb,  the  horse  is  conducted  to  the  ground  with  the  reins  already  passed  over  the  neck ; 
in  both  cases  the  reins  are  held  in  the  left  hand  while  mounting. 

In  the  first  lessons  with  the  curb,  the  curb  chain  is  hooked  on  the  ground,  under  the  direction 
of  the  instructor  ;  it  is  of  such  a  length  that  two  fingers  may  be  laid  flat  between  it  and  the  chin. 

All  individual  turns  and  abouts,  from  a  halt,  are  made  by  turning  the  horse  on  his  hind  legs 
as  a  pivot ;  in  wheels  by  platoon,  or  by  squadron,  on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  pivot  man  turns  in  this 
manner.     Turns  on  a  march  are  made  on  an  arc  with  a  radius  of  three  yards. 

THE  DRILL  IN  SINGLE  RANK. 

This  is  commenced  when  the  men  are  well  instructed  in  the  individual  riding  drill ;  from  six 
to  fifteen  men  are  formed  in  one  rank,  with  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  old  soldier  on  each 
flank.  The  recruits  first  execute  this  drill  on  foot,  and  are  not  required  to  execute  it  on  horse- 
back until  they  understand  its  principles  fully.  When  mounted,  the  men  are  at  first  placed 
two  yards  apart,  and  as  they  progress  the  files  are  closed  in,  until  they  touch  stirrups,  towards 
•the  guide.  The  instruction  is  commenced  in  open  order,  to  accustom  each  man  to  observe  the 
rules  for  moving  straight  forward,  to  oblige  him  to  conduct  his  horse  independently  of  his 
neighbor,  and  to  force  him  to  pay  more  attention  ;  for,  in  close  order,  the  men,  by  blindly 
following  the  movements  of  their  comrades,  might  execute  many  movements  satisfactorily  with- 
out understanding  them,  and  it  would  be  impossible  for  the  instructor  to  ascertain  the  proficiency 
and  progress  of  each  man.  Every  movement  should  be  executed  first  at  a  walk,  afterwards  at 
the  other  gaits.  The  recruits  should  be  mixed  with  old  soldiers  in  the  ranks,  to  prevent 
mistakes  from  extending  through  the  whole  rank  ;  but  the  instructor  must  watch  carefully  that 
the  old  soldiers  do  not  prompt  the  recruits. 

At  the  commencement  of  every  drill  in  single  rank,  the  recruits  should  be  required  to  execute 
some  of  the  lessons  of  the  individual  drill ;  so  that  correctness  of  riding,  and  facility  of  executing 
the  movements  in  close  order,  may  always  be  preserved. 

The  single  rank  drill  comprises  all  the  movements  of  the  platoon  drill  that  can  be  executed 
in  one  rank. 


EEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEOEGE  B.  ATCLELLAN.  87 


THE  USE  OF  THE  SABRE. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  important  elements  in  the  instruction  of  the  cavalry  soldier,  for  the 
sabre  is  the  arm  common  to  all  cavalry. 

The  recruit  should  go  through  the  whole  exercise  not  less  than  once  a  week. 

The  rules  for  the  use  of  the  sabre  are  divided  into  two  parts  :  (a)  the  manual ;  (6)  the  sabre 
exercise. 

The  use  of  the  sabre  is  taught  by  means  of  commands  and  numbers.  The  commands  of 
execution  are  called  times,  and  these  times  are  subdivided  into  particular  movements  called 
motions.  At  the  commencement  of  the  instruction,  the  instructor  calls  the  numbers,  and 
executes  the  motions  himself;  when  the  recruit  becomes  accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  weapon,  he 
is  obliged  to  execute  the  motions  and  call  tlie  numbers  simultaneously  with  the  instructor ;  after 
that,  the  recruit  calls  the  numbers  and  executes  the  motions  for  himself;  finally,  he  executes  the 
motions  without  calling  the  numbers. 

The  use  of  the  sabre  is  first  taught  to  single  men  on  foot,  then  by  uniting  several  men,  and 
finally  on  horseback. 

THE  SABRE  MANUAL. 

This  is  so  similar  to  that  in  use  in  the  United  States  service  as  to  render  it  unnecessary  to 
describe  it  in  this  report,  with  the  exception  of  two  peculiarities,  viz :  when  the  sabre  is  at  a 
carry,  both  the  little  finger  and  that  next  to  it  are  outside  of  the  gripe ;  there  is  a  position  of 
reversed  sabre,  for  funerals,  as  follows :  the  blade  passed  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body, 
point  to  the  rear,  edge  to  the  left,  the  flat  of  the  blade  resting  on  the  left  fore  arm,  close  to  the 
guard,  the  gripe  held  lightly  by  the  right  hand,  the  blade  horizontal. 

THE  SABRE  EXERCISE. 

This  is  divided  into  parts,  the  first  in  open  order,  the  second  in  close  order.  The  first  part  is 
subdivided  into :  (a)  the  sabre  exercise  for  the  attack  ;  (b)  that  for  the  retreat. 

I.  THE  SABRE  EXERCISE  IN  OPEN  ORDER. 

A.  In  the  attack. 

The  instruction  should  be  at  first  given  to  single  men,  or  small  sq[uads,  on  foot ;  afterwards, 
in  the  same  manner,  mounted ;  first  at  a  halt,  then  in  motion — i.  e.,  first  at  a  walk,  then  at  a 
trot,  gallop,  and  charge. 

The  use  of  the  sabre  on  foot  forms  no  part  of  the  duty  of  a  cavalry  soldier,  and  is  given  only 
as  preparatory  to  its  use  on  horseback,  which  is  its  proper  object. 

In  giving  the  instruction,  it  should  be  explained  that  the  following  movements  constitute  the 
basis  of  the  system:  1,  the  moulinets  ;  2,  one  thrust;  3,  three  cuts;  4,  four  jjarries  ;  all  the 
other  movements  given  are  merely  combinations  or  modifications  of  these. 

In  the  motions  of  the  sabre,  it  is,  as  a  general  rule,  grasped  by  the  right  hand,  the  four  fingers 
encircling  the  gripe,  the  thumb  on  the  opposite  side,  resting  on  the  fore  finger,  (plate  1,  fig.  5;) 
but  if  the  soldier  is  to  thrust,  he  places  the  thumb  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  the  end  of  the  thumb 
against  the  guard. 

All  the  motions  are  made  from  the  position  of  "guard." 

The  recruit  being  at  a  carry,  to  cause  him  to  assume  the  position  of  guard,  the  instructor 
commands : 


88  MILITAEY   COMMISSION   TO   EUKOPE. 


GUARD. — 1  time. 

(Plate  1,  fig.  6.)  Carry  the  right  hand  about  10  inches  in  front  of  the  right  hip,  the  blade 
in  an  oblique  position,  the  point  a  little  raised,  the  edge  upwards,  the  back  of  the  blade  resting 
in  the  hollow  of  the  left  arm,  as  near  the  body  as  possible.  In  this  position  the  right  hand 
should  be  without  the  slightest  effort  or  constraint,  and  should  not  feel  the  weight  of  the  sabre, 
which  is  supported  by  the  left  arm. 

(Plate  1,  fig.  7.)  In  the  instruction  on  foot,  it  is  necessary  to  give  the  recruit  a  position 
corresponding  to  that  on  horseback;  therefore,  at  the  command  guard,  he  carries  his  right  foot 
18  inches  from  the  left,  the  heels  on  the  same  line,  the  weight  of  the  body  supported  equally  on 
both  legs,  which  are  a  little  bent  at  the  knees ;  at  the  same  time  he  moves  his  left  fore  arm  and 
hand  to  the  front,  placing  them  as  if  holding  the  reins  when  mounted,  and  holds  the  right  hand 
and  sabre  as  already  prescribed.  This  position,  once  taken,  is  maintained  during  the  whole 
lesson. 

The  recruit  returns  to  a  carry,  as  in  the  old  style  sabre  exercise,  except  that  when  at  a  carry 
both  the  little  finger  and  that  next  to  it  are  outside  of  the  gripe. 

THE   MOULINETS. 

The  lessons  in  the  sabre  exercise  are  commenced  with  the  moulinets  for  the  following  reasons  : 
1,  they  accustom  the  men  to  the  circular  movements  of  the  edge  of  the  sabre,  necessary  in  all  the 
motions;  2,  they  give  to  the  hand  the  strength  and  address  necessary  for  handling  the  sabre;  3, 
they  accustom  the  horses  to  the  sabre. 

PREPARE  TO   MOCLINET. — 1  time. 

(Plate  1,  fig.  8.)  At  this  command,  the  recruit,  being  at  guard,  extends  the  right  arm  to  its 
full  length,  at  the  same  time  raising  it  so  as  to  bring  the  hand  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  head, 
as  high  as  the  eyes,  point  to  the  front,  edge  upwards,  blade  horizontal,  and  perpendicular  to  the 
breast. 

All  the  moulinets  are  made  from  the  position  just  described,  and  upon  their  completion  the 
position  of  guard  is  resumed. 

The  moulinets  are  made  to  the  left  and  to  the  right — i.  e.,  the  circular  movement  of  the  sabre 
passes  on  the  left  or  on  the  right  side  of  the  horse's  neck. 

There  are  two  moulinets:  the  first  passes  downwards  along  the  body;  the  second  passes 
upwards  along  the  body. 

The  recruit  being  in  the  position  of  "jorepare  to  moulinet,"  to  execute  the  first  moulinet,  the 
instructor  commands : 

FIRST  MOULINET. 

Make  a  moulinet  to  the  left — i.  e.,  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse's  neck — raising  the  blade  with 
the  edge  towards  the  body,  the  circular  motion  passing  downwards  along  the  left  shoulder ;  and 
after  that,  make  a  right  moulinet — i.  e.,  on  the  right  side  of  the  horse's  neck — raising  the  j^oint, 
the  edge  towards  the  body,  and  the  circular  movement  passing  downwards  along  the  right 
shoulder  ;  then  another  moulinet  to  the  left,  then  again  to  the  right,  and  in  the  same  manner, 
alternately  on  each  side,  until  the  command,  guard,  when  the  position  of  guard  is  resumed. 
The  recruit  being  in  the  position  of  "prepare  to  moulinet,"  to  cause  him  to  execute  the  second 
moulinet,  the  instructor  commands: 


EEPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEOEGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  89 

SECOND   MOTJLINET. 

Make  a  moulinet  to  tlie  right,  turning  the  wrist  a  little  outwards,  lowering  the  point,  edge 
from  the  body,  and  passing  the  blade  upwards,  along  the  right  shoulder;  then  make  a  similar 
moulinet  to  the  left;  and  continue  in  the  same  manner,  alternately  on  each  side,  until  the 
command — guard. 

In  the  execution  of  the  moulinets  neither  the  elbow  nor  shoulder  shotild  bend,  but  the  move- 
ment is  to  be  eiFected  by  the  hand  and  wrist  alone  ;  the  sabre  should  pass  as  far  as  possible  from 
the  horse's  head,  to  avoid  striking  him,  and  as  near  as  possible  to  the  man's  shoulder  ;  the  left 
arm  is  not  moved. 

At  the  commencement  the  instructor  requires  the  recruit  to  count  one  at  the  end  of  each  left 
moulinet,  two  at  the  end  of  each  right  moulinet,  or  the  reverse ;  finally  requiring  him  to 
accelerate  the  motion  of  the  sabre  to  the  utmost. 

THE  BLOWS. 

Blows  are  of  two  kinds,  thrusts  and  cuts. 

They  may  be  given  in  four  directions:  1.  To  the  right  front,  i.  e.,  against  an  antagonist 
obliquely  in  front  of  the  right  shoulder;  2.  To  the  left  front;  3.  To  the  right;  4.  To  the  left. 

The  thrusts  and  cuts  should  always  be  given  together,  i.  e.,  first  a  thrust  and  then  a  cut. 
After  each  blow  the  position  of  guard  is  resumed. 

For  the  blow  to  the  right  front,  the  instructor  commands : 

RIGHT  FRONT  THRUST  AND  CUT. 1  time,  4  motlOnS. 

(PL  1,  figs.  9  and  10.)  1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  cut,  turn  the  eyes  to 
the  right  front,  raise  the  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  ear,  and  seven  inches  from  it,  the 
shoulder  and  elbow  thrown  well  back,  the  thumb  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  point  falling  a  little 
below  the  horizontal,  and  directed  to  the  right  front,  edge  upwards. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  rapidly  to  its  full  length,  thrusting  to  the  right  front,  i.  e.,  somewhat  to 
the  right  of  the  horse's  right  ear;  at  the  end  of  the  thrust  the  right  arm  and  the  sabre  are 
horizontal;  the  j^oint,  if  anything,  a  little  below  the  horizontal. 

3.  Without  moving  the  arm,  replace  the  thumb  on  the  side  of  the  gripe,  turn  the  hand  so  as 
to  bring  the  nails  upwards,  at  the  same  time  carrying  the  point  well  to  the  right,  then  by  a  turn 
of  the  wrist,  cut  horizontally  from  right  to  left. 

4.  Turn  the  nails  downwards,  and  by  a  turn  of  the  wrist  cut  horizontally  from  left  to  right. 
At  once  resume  the  position  of  guard. 

LEFT  FRONT  THRUST  AND  CUT. 1  time,  4  motionS. 

(PL  2,  figs.  1  and  2.)  Executed  as  the  preceding  blow,  with  the  following  differences:  in 
the  1st  motion  the  arm  is  raised  as  prescribed  for  the  blow  to  the  right  front,  but  the  point  and 
eyes  are  directed  to  the  left  front;  in  the  2d  motion,  thrust  to  the  left  front,  i.  e.,  somewhat  to 
the  left  of  the  horse's  left  ear;  the  3d  and  4th  motions,  as  in  the  blow  to  the  right  front,  but 
given  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse's  head. 

RIGHT  THRUST  AND  CUT. — 1  time,  four  motious. 

(PL  2,  figs.  3  and  4.)     1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  cut,  half  face  to  the 
12  © 


90  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

right  in  the  saddle,  at  the  same  time  place  the  arm  and  sabre  in  the  position  of  first  motion  of 

right  front  blow,  except  that  the  eyes  and  point  are  directed  to  the  right. 

■    2.  Thrust  to  the  right,  in  a  direction  as  nearly  as  possible  perpendicular  to  the  side  of  the 

horse. 

3  and  4.  As  in  the  blow  to  the  right  front,  except  that  the  cuts  are  made  in  a  direction  to  the 
right  of  the  horse,  and  that,  on  resuming  the  guard,  the  recruit  will  sit  straight  in  the  saddle. 

LEFT  THKUST  AND  CUT. — 1  time,  4  motions. 

Executed  as  the  preceeding  blow,  with  the  difference  that  it  is  made  on  the  left  side  of  the 
horse  ;  therefore,  in  the  first  motion  the  recruit  makes  a  half  face  to  the  left  in  his  saddle,  and 
directs  his  eyes  and  point  to  the  left,  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  his  horse  ;  in  the  third  and 
fourth  motions  he  gives  the  horizontal  cuts,  as  in  the  last  blow,  but  on  the  left,  and  finally 
returns  to  the  guard,  resuming  his  seat  square  in  the  saddle. 

THE  PARRIES. 

The  parries  are  all  made  from  the  position  of  guard.  After  every  parry  the  position  of  guard 
is  at  once  resumed,  unless  it  is  to  be  followed  at  once  by  a  cut  or  thrust. 

There  are  four  parries  :  (a)  that  for  the  right  side,  or  the  right  parry  ;  (b)  that  for  the  left 
side,  or  left  parry  ;  (c)  that  for  the  head,  or  head  parry  ;  (d)  that  for  the  left  shoulder  and  rear, 
or  left  rear  parry. 

BIGHT  PARRY. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

(PI.  2,  fig.  5.)  1.  Grasp  the  sabre  firmly,  extend  the  arm  to  the  right,  the  hand  moving 
horizontally,  the  point  at  the  same  time  describing  a  semicircle  ujjwards,  and,  with  the  edge  to 
the  right,  parry  as  strongly  as  possible  the  blow  aimed  at  the  right  side. 

2.  Kesume  the  position  of  guard. 

LEFT  PARRY. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

(PI.  2,  fig  6.)  1.  Kaise  the  hand  above,  and  about  seven  inches  in  front  of,  the  eyes,  the 
elbow  somewhat  bent,  edge  to  the  left,  point  downwards,  and  about  fourteen  inches  outside  of 
the  horse's  left  shoulder,  and  parry  as  strongly  as  possible  the  blow  aimed  at  the  left  side. 

2.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

HEAD  PARRY. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

(PL  2,  fig.  7.)  1.  Eaise  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length,  the  hand  a  little  to  the  right,  the 
sabre  a  little  above  the  head,  edge  upwards,  blade  horizontal  and  parallel  to  the  shoulders. 

2.  Resume  the  guard. 

In  this  parry  the  sabre  should  be  grasped  with  the  utmost  firmness,  to  prevent  its  being 
beaten  down. 

LEFT  REAR  PARRY. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

(PL   2,  fig.  8.)     1.  Turn  the  head  to  the  left  and  rear,  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  left 
shoulder,  on  which  rest  the  back  of  the  blade,  the  point  to  the  left  rear,  the  edge  upwards. 
2.  Eesume  the  guard. 

PARRIES  AND  BLOWS. 

When  the  recruit  is  well  instructed  in  the  blows  and  parries  separately,  he  should  be  taught 
to  combine  them,  in  the  following  manner  : 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  91 

RiaHT  PAERT  AND  ciiT. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Parry  to  the  riglit,  as  already  explained. 

2.  Cut  once  liorizontally  from  riglit  to  left,  as  prescribed  in  the  third  motion  of  the  blow  to 
the  right  front,  and  resume  the  guard. 

LEFT  PARRY  AND  CUT. — 1  time,  2  motioTis. 

1.  Parry  to  the  left,  as  already  explained. 

2.  Cut  once  horizontally  from  right  to  left,  as  prescribed  in  the  third  motion  of  the  blow  to 
the  left  front,  and  resume  the  guard. 

HEAD   PARRY   AND   THRUST. — 1  time,  3  motlOTlS. 

1.  Parry  for  the  head,  as  already  explained. 

2.  Place  the  arm  and  sabre  in  the  position  of  the  Ist  motion  of  blow  to  right  front. 

3.  Thrust  to  right  front,  and  resume  the  guard. 

THE   BLOWS   AGAINST   INFANTRY. 

The  cavalry  soldier,  when  engaged  against  infantry,  in  open  order,  should  endeavor  to  parry 
the  bayonet  on  his  right  side,  cut  to  the  right  and  left,  and  thrust  to  the  right. 

AGAINST   INFANTRY — RIGHT   PARRY   AND   CUT. — 1  time,  3  motionS 

(PI.  2,  figs.  9  and  10.)  1.  Half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,  carry  the  right  hand  to 
the  right  and  rear,  arm  nearly  extended,  sabre  grasped  firmly,  hand  as  high  as  the  head,  and 
over  the  croup  of  the  horse;  nails  outwards,  edge  to  the  rear,  point  upwards,  blade  vertical. 

2.  Lower  the  point  towards  the  rear,  and  parry  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade  by  a 
rapid  circular  movement  of  the  sabre  and  arm,  so  that,  at  the  end  of  the  movement,  the  right 
hand  may  be  in  front  of  the  left  shoulder  as  high  as  the  head,  and  10  inches  from  it,  the  nails 
towards  the  breast,  point  of  sabre  upwards,  edge  to  the  front. 

3.  Bear  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  stirrup,  bend  the  body  well  down  to  the  right, 
and,  by  a  movement  of  the  whole  arm  from  the  shoulder,  cut  downwards,  from  the  head  of  the 
horse  towards  the  croup ;  at  once  resume  the  guard. 

AGAINST   INFANTRY — LEFT   CUT. — 1  time,  1  motioU. 

(PI.  2,  fig.  11.)  Half  face  to  the  left  in  the  saddle,  extend  the  right  arm  to  its  full 
length,  the  hand  opposite  to  and  above  the  eyes,  edge  somewhat  to  the  left,  the  point  a  little  to 
the  front ;  then,  by  a  movement  of  the  whole  arm  from  the  shoulder,  cut  circularly  downwards, 
on  the  left  side  of  the  horse ;  at  once  resume  the  guard. 

AGAINST   INFANTRY — RIGHT   AND   LEFT   CUT. — 1  time,  2  motionS. 

1.  Half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,  and  take  the  position  described  at  the  end  of  2d 
motion  of  the  "right  parry  and  cut"  against  infantry,  and  at  once  cut  against  infantry,  as 
prescribed  in  the  3d  motion. 

2.  Instead  of  resuming  the  guard,  at  once  half  face  to  the  left,  and  act  as  prescribed  for  the 
left  cut  against  infantry ;  resume  the  guard. 

AGAINST   INFANTRY — RIGHT   CUT   AND   THRUST. — 1  time,  2  motionS. 

(PI.  2,  fig.  12.)  1.  Half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,  and  act  as  directed  in  the  first 
motion  of  the  preceding  blow. 


92  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE, 

2.  Bear  the  weight  on  the  right  stirrujj,  bend  well  down  to  the  right,  extend  the  right  arm 
well  downwards,  and,  with  the  hack  of  the  sabre  upwards,  thrust  forward  as  nearly  horizon- 
tally as  possible ;  at  once  resume  the  guard. 

In  these  cuts  the  recruit  should  sit  firmly  in  the  saddle,  and  make  the  half  faces  to  the  right 
and  left  quickly,  easily,  and  without  constraint. 

B.  The  sabre  exercise  for  the  retreat. 

In  retreat  the  cavalry  soldier  should  cut  his  pursuer  to  the  right  rear. 

EIGHT  REAR  CUT. — 1  time,  1  motion. 

(PI.  2,  fig.  13.)  Half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,  cast  the  eyes  well  to  the  right  rear, 
raise  the  right  arm  so  as  to  bring  the  hand  opposite  to  and  at  the  height  of  the  left  shoulder, 
edge  to  the  front,  point  upwards,  cut  horizontally  to  the  rear  by  a  movement  of  the  sabre  from 
left  to  right;  at  once  resume  the  guard. 

RIGHT   REAR — CUT   TWICE. 

As  the  last  blow,  except  that  the  cut  is  repeated  before  resuming  the  position  of  guard. 

TO  FORM  A  SQUADRON  FOR  THE  SABRE  EXERCISE. 

Preparatory  to  the  sabre  exercise,  the  squadron,  whether  mounted  or  on  foot,  should  first  of 
all  be  ordered  to  call  off.     For  this  purpose  the  instriictor  commands: 

FOR  SABRE  EXERCISE — GALL  OFF. 

At  this  command,  each  man  of  the  right  file  turns  his  head  to  the  left  that  his  comrades  may 
hear  him,  and  in  a  loud,  distinct  tone,  calls  out  20,  (twenty;)  the  men  of  the  2d  file  call  out  15 ; 
those  of  the  3d  file,  10;  the  4th,  5;  the  5th,  ''standfast;"  the  6th,  20;  the  Tth,  15;  the  8th, 
10;  the  9th,  5;  the  10th,  ''stand  fast;"  and  in  the  same  manner  through  the  squadron  to  its 
left  fiank. 

These  numbers  signify  that  at  the  command  "sabre  exercise — march,"  (which  will  be 
explained  hereafter,)  each  man  is  to  march  forward  the  number  of  paces  he  called  out,  i.  e.,  20, 
15,  10,  and  5  paces,  respectively,  for  the  first  four  men  of  every  five,  the  fifth  standing  fast. 
The  non-commissioned  officers  in  the  front  rank  are  to  move  forward  25  paces ;  those  in  the  rear 
rank  are  to  rein  back  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  with  them  fall  back  5  paces  behind  the 
rear  rank.  Each  man  turns  his  head  to  the  front  as  soon  as  he  has  called  ofl'.  If  the  sabre 
exercise  is  to  be  performed  in  presence  of  an  inspector,  the  calling  ofi"  is  done  before  his  arrival. 
When  the  exercise  is  to  be  commenced,  the  front  rank  is  marched  forward  25  paces ;  the  instructor 
then  commands: 

SABRE  EXERCISE — MARCH. 

At  this  command  the  men  take  their  distances  by  moving  forward,  in  each  rank,  the  jiumber 
of  paces  they  respectively  called  off,  as  already  explained. 
When  the  exercise  is  finished,  the  instructor  commands: 

TO  YOUR  POSTS — MARCH. 

At  this  command,  the  men  who  advanced  20  paces  stand  fast,  the  others  move  up,  and  dress 
on  them  in  each  rank. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  front  rank  rein  back  5  paces  into  their  places.  The 
instructor  then  closes  ranks  by  the  usual  commands. 

During  the  exercise  the  officers  place  themselves  15  paces  from  the  front  rank,  facing  it. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN.  93 

THE  SABRE  EXERCISE  IN  CLOSE  ORBER. 

When  attacking  in  close  order,  tlie  sabre  should  always  be  carried  in  the  position  of  charge 

sabre. 

CHARGE  SABRE. — 1  time,  1  motioTi. 

(PI.  2,  fig.  14.)  Kaise  the  right  arm  and  extend  it  to  the  front,  the  hand  opposite  the 
right  eye,  the  blade  perpendicular  to  the  breast,  the  edge  upwards,  the  point  a  little  raised. 

To  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  guard,  the  command  is,  guard.  If  necessary,  the 
command,  carry  sabres,  may  be  given  at  once,  without  first  coming  to  the  guard. 

In  close  order,  all  the  motions  of  the  sabre  are  made  from  the  position  of  charge  sabre,  and 
on  the  completion  of  every  movement  the  men  at  once  return  to  that  position. 

RIGHT  FRONT  THRUST,  PARRY,  AND  CUT. — 1  time,  4  motionS. 

1  and  2.  The  recruit,  being  in  the  position  of  charge  sabre,  at  once  thrusts  to  the  right  front, 
as  prescribed  in  open  order. 

3.  Makes  the  head  parry,  as  in  open  order. 

4.  Cuts  vertically  downward,  on  the  right  of  the  horse's  neck,  and  resumes  the  position  of 
charge  sabre. 

LEFT  FRONT  CUT,  PARRY,  AND  THRUST. 1  time,  4  motioUS. 

1.  Commence  the  cut  by  the  2d  motion  of  the  2d  moulinet — i.  e.,  lower  the  sabre  along  the 
left  side  of  the  horse's  neck,  raise  it  along  the  left  shoulder,  cut  downwards  to  the  left  front, 
and  resume  the  position  of  charge  sabre. 

2.  Make  the  head  parry. 

3  and  4.  Thrust  to  the  right  front,  and  resume  the  position  of  charge  sabre. 

RIGHT  AND  LEFT  FRONT  THRUST. — 1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Thrust  once  to  the  right  front. 

2.  Thrust  once  to  the  left  front,  and  resume  the  position  of  charge  sabre. 

In  close  order,  too  much  care  cannot  be  taken  to  make  the  cuts  by  the  wrist  alone,  without 
moving  the  arm;  they  should  be  made  as  near  the  horse's  neck  as  possible,  to  avoid  striking  the 
next  man,  or  his  horse. 

As  a  conclusion  to  the  sabre  exercise,  all  the  commands  are  here  given,  in  the  order  in  which 
they  should  be  taught. 

Commands  for  the  sabre  exercise  in  open  order. 

Guard.  Left  parry. 

Prepare  to  moulinet.  Head  parry. 

First  moulinet.  Left  rear  parry. 

Guard.  Eight  parry  and  cut. 

Prepare  to  moulinet.  Left  parry  and  cut. 

Second  moulinet.  Head  parry  and  thrust. 

Guard.  Against  infantry — right  parry  and  cut. 

Eight  front  thrust  and  cut.  Against  infantry — left  cut. 

Left  front  thrust  and  cut.  Against  infantry — right  and  left  cut. 

Eight  thrust  and  cut.  Against  infantry — right  cut  and  thrust. 

Left  thrust  and  cut.  Eight  rear  cut. 

Eight  parry.  Eight  rear  cut  twice. 


94  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

Commands  for  sabre  exercise  in  close  order. 

Charge  sabre.  Left  front  cut,  parry,  and  thrust. 

Right  front  tlirust,  parry,  and  cut.  Eight  and  left  front  thrust. 

MISCELLANEOUS,  FROM  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  RECRUIT. 

(PL  2,  fig.  15.)  When  loading  and  firing  the  carbine,  the  snafile  reins  are  knotted  around 
the  curb  reins,  and  allowed  to  hang  loosely  ;  the  curb  reins  are  passed  around  the  middle  finger 
of  the  left  hand,  thus  leaving  the  others  free  to  manage  the  carbine. 

When  the  carbine  is  cast  about,  the  butt  is  thrown  on  the  right  side  of  the  horse,  the  left  hand 
seizing  it  just  above  the  tail  band. 

Skirmishers  armed  with  lances,  when  using  the  carbine,  carry  lances  at  a  rest  and  sabres  in 
the  scabbards  ;  skirmishers  who  have  no  lances  have  the  sabre  drawn  and  suspended  from  the 
right  wrist  by  the  sabre  knot  when  using  their  carbines. 

THE  CHARGE. 

At  the  command,  charge,  the  rider,  without  changing  his  seat,  presses  a  little  harder  on  the 
stirrups,  throws  the  weight  of  his  body  backwards,  and  prepares  the  horse,  as  explained,  for  the 
gallop  ;  then,  giving  him  a  free  rein,  he  urges  him  to  his  greatest  speed  by  the  pressure  of  his 
legs  and  spurs. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  PLATOON. 

In  the  tactics,  the  platoon  is  supposed  to  consist  of  12  or  more  files,  always  in  two  ranks.  The 
rear  rank  is  one  pace  (3  feet)  from  the  front  rank,  and  the  file-closers  at  the  same  distance  behind 
the  rear  rank. 

In  addition  to  the  12  files,  there  are  supposed  to  be  with  the  platoon  1  oflicer  as  instructor,  1 
non-commissioned  officer  on  each  flank  of  the  front  rank,  2  nou-commissioned  officers  as  file- 
closers,  and  1  trumpeter. 

Preparatory  to  mounting,  the  platoon  being  formed  with  closed  ranks,  the  men  call  off  in  each 

rank  by  twos. 

At  the  command,  prepare  to  mount,  Nos.  1  of  the  front  rank  lead  forward  4  paces,  (of  3'  each,) 
Nos.  2  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  file-closers,  fall  back  the  same  distance,  the  non-commissioned 
officers  on  the  fianks  of  the  front  rank  lead  forward  8  paces.  After  mounting,  upon  the  command, 
form  ranks,  the  Nos.  2  of  .each  rank  move  up  alongside  of  Nos.  1,  the  non-commissioned  officers 
resume  their  proper  places,  and  the  rear  rank  is  closed  up  on  the  front  rank. 

The  dismounting  is  efl'ected  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  men,  being  mounted,  call  ofl'  in  each  rank  from  right  to  left,  and  then  in  each  rank  by 
threes. 

Column  may  be  formed :  by  file,  by  twos,  by  threes,  and  by  sixes. 

In  the  column  by  twos,  each  rank  consists  of  the  men  of  the  same  file,  each  rear  rank  man 
riding  alongside  of  his  front  rank  man. 

In  the  column  by  sixes,  each  rank  consists  of  the  men  of  the  same  set  of  threes,  the  three  rear 
rank  men  riding  abreast  of  their  three  front  rank  men. 

(PI.  3,  fig.  1.)  To  break  the  platoon  by  file,  from  a  halt :  at  the  preparatory  command,  the 
right  guide  places  himself  in  front  of  the  1st  file,  the  trumpeter  in  front  of  the  right  guide  ;  at 
the  command,  march,  the  trumpeter,  guide,  and  first  file  move  straight  forward  ;  the  men  of  the 


EEPOET  OP  CAPT.  6E0EGE  B.  MOCLELLAN.  95 

other  files,  in  succession,  advance  one  pace,  halt,  turn  to  the  right,  (on  the  horse's  hind  legs,) 
move  to  the  right  in  the  direction  of  the  front  of  the  platoon,  and  turn  individually  to  the  left 
when  arriving  behind  the  head  of  column. 

(PL  3,  fig.  2.)     Shows  the  manner  of  breaking  by  twos. 

(PL  3,  fig.  3.)  To  break  by  threes,  the  first  set  of  threes  march  straight  forward,  the  rest  of 
the  men  wheel  to  the  right  by  threes  in  each  rank,  move  forward,  and  upon  arriving  behind  the 
head  of  column,  wheel  to  the  left  by  threes,  in  each  rank.  PL  3,  fig.  3,  shows  the  formation  of 
a  platoon  of  11  files,  in  column  by  threes. 

(PL  3,  fig.  4.)  To  break  by  sixes,  at  the  preparatory  command  the  right  guide  passages  3 
yards  to  the  right,  the  rear  rank  men  of  the  first  set  of  threes  oblique  to  the  right  and  place 
themselves  on  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  between  the  right  guide  and  their  front  rank 
men  ;  at  the  command,  march,  the  right  guide  and  the  first  set  of  threes  (formed  in  one  rank,  the 
rear  rank  men  on  the  right)  move  straight  forward,  the  rest  of  the  men  wheel  to  the  right  by 
threes  in  each  rank,  move  forward,  and  wheel  to  the  left  by  sixes  when  the  croups  of  their  horses 
are  on  the  prolongation  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column. 

PL  3,  fig.  4,  shows  the  formation  of  a  platoon  in  column  by  sixes,  the  platoon  consisting  of 
11  files. 

On  the  march,  the  platoon  is  broken  into  column  according  to  the  same  principles  ;  except 
that  to  break  by  file  or  by  twos,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  right  file  moves  straight  forward  at 
the  new  gait,  and  the  rest  of  the  platoons  at  once  oblique  to  the  right,  each  file  entering  the 
column  in  succession. 

All  these  movements  are  executed  by  the  left  flank,  by  inverse  means.  When  the  platoon, 
broken  into  column,  is  to  form  to  the  front,  on  the  right  or  left,  or  to  the  right  or  left  into  line, 
the  leading  subdivision  marches  platoon  distance  before  halting. 

The  platoon  being  in  column  by  file,  right  in  front,  at  a  halt,  to  form  column  by  twos :  at  the 
command,  march,  each  front  rank  man  moves  forward  his  horse's  length  and  halts  ;  each  rear 
rank  man  moves  up  on  the  right  of  his  front  rank  man  and  halts  ;  then  the  column  closes  up  on 
the  leading  subdivision. 

To  form  from  colimin  by  file  into  column  by  threes  :  at  the  command,  march,  Nos.  1  of  both 
ranks  move  forward  a  horse's  length  and  halt ;  Nos.  2  and  3  of  each  rank  oblique  to  the  left, 
and  form  on  the  left  of  Nos.  1 ;  then  the  column  closes  up  on  the  leading  set  of  threes. 

(PL  3,  fig.  5.)  To  form  from  column  by  file,  into  column  by  sixes  :  at  the  command,  march, 
Nos.  1  of  the  front  rank  move  forward  a  horse's  length  and  halt ;  Nos.  2  and  3  of  the  same  rank 
oblique  to  the  left,  and  form  on  the  left  of  Nos.  1,  in  the  order  of  their  numbers  ;  the  rear  rank 
men  oblique  to  the  right,  and  form  on  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  also  in  the  order  of  their 
numbers,  from  right  to  left ;  the  ranks  of  sixes,  thus  formed,  then  close  up  on  the  head  of  the 
column. 

If  the  column  is  in  march,  the  front  is  increased  according  to  the  same  principles  ;  i.  e.,  each 
new  subdivision  is  formed  at  the  original  gait ;  then  those  in  rear  close  uj)  on  the  head  of 
column  by  doubling  the  gait. 

The  front  is  decreased,  whether  the  column  is  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  in  a  manner  similar  to 
that  pursued  in  the  old  style  tactics. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  is  divided  into  two  half  squadrons  and  four  platoons.  The  platoons  are  num- 
bered from  right  to  left,  and  each  platoon  preserves  its  original  number,  whatever  position  it 


96  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

may  occupy  in  line  or  in  column.  Each  platoon  is  counted  off:  (a)  by  twos  ;  (6)  from  right  to 
left ;  (c)  by  threes  ;  this  is  done  under  the  direction  of  the  commandants  of  platoons,  before  the 
squadron  is  formed.     If  there  are  odd  files  in  the  4th  platoon,  they  are  posted  on  its  right. 

COMPOSITION   OF   THE  SQUADRON. 

The  minimum  strength  is  as  follows  :  1  captain,  commanding  ;  4  commandants  of  platoons  ; 
16  sergeants  ;  3  trumpeters  ;  96  corporals  and  privates.  As  a  general  rule,  the  average  strength 
of  the  squadron  is  120  corporals  and  privates,  or  60  files. 

POSTS   OF   THE   OFFICEKS   AND   SERGEANTS. 

(PI.  4,  fig.  2.)  The  squadron  being  deployed,  the  ofiicers  are  posted  as  follows  :  the  captain 
commanding,  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron  ;  the  commandant  of  the 
1st  platoon,  1  pace  in  front  of  the  2d  file  from  the  right  of  his  platoon  ;  the  commandants  of  the 
2d  and  3d  platoons,  1  pace  in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  platoons  ;  the  commandant  of  the  4th 
platoon,  1  pace  in  front  of  the  2d  file  from  the  left  of  his  platoon;  if  there  is  a  5th  subaltern,  he 
is  posted,  as  a  file-closer,  3  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line  of  non-commissioned  file-closers  ; 
if  there  is  a  6th  subaltern,  he  is  posted  1  pace  in  front  of  the  2d  file  from  the  left  of  the  1st 
platoon  ;  if  there  is  a  7th  subaltern,  he  is  posted  1  pace  in  front  of  the  2d  file  from  the  right  of 
the  4th  platoon. 

Subalterns  command  platoons  according  to  their  ability,  and  not  according  to  seniority  ;  the 
1st  and  4th  platoons  being  considered  the  most  important. 

If  there  are  not  enough  ofiicers  present  to  supply  commandants  of  platoons,  the  deficiency  is 
made  good  by  the  most  capable  sergeants. 

If  there  is  no  ofiicer  to  act  as  file-closer,  this  position  is  not  filled  by  a  sergeant. 

PL  4,  fig.  2,  gives  the  positions  of  the  different  sergeants  in  line  ;  No.  15  is  the  standard 
bearer,  in  standard  squadrons,  and  No.  16  is  his  assistant ;  in  squadrons  without  standards, 
No.  15  is  posted  in  rear  of  the  2d  file  from  the  left  of  the  2d  platoon,  and  No.  16  in  rear  of  the 
2d  file  from  the  right  of  the  3d  platoon  ;  the  non-commissioned  file-closers  are  1  pace  behind  the 
rear  rank.  In  standard  squadrons  having  but  14  sergeants,  No.  13  is  the  standard  bearer,  No, 
14  his  assistant. 

No.  6  carries  the  squadron  guidon. 

There  must  always  be  at  least  one  file-closer  for  every  platoon  ;  if  there  are  not  enough 
sero'eants  for  this  purpose,  corjjorals  are  detailed  to  supply  the  deficiency. 

The  sergeants  may  be  posted,  by  the  commander  of  the  squadron,  without  regard  to  their 
relative  rank. 

Trumpeters  are  posted,  either  in  one  rank,  at  five  paces  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank,  or  in 
rear  of  the  4th  files  from  the  right  of  the  1st,  4th,  and  2d  platoons  ;  the  latter  position  in 
preference. 

In  the  plates,  accompanying  this  report,  extracted  from  the  Kussian  tactics,  two  drummers 
and  two  trumpeters  are  usually  represented ;  these  drummers  refer  only  to  the  dragoon  regiments. 

The  men  armed  with  rifled  carbines,  (four  in  each  platoon,)  who  are  to  act  as  skirmishers, 
always  form  the  flank  files  of  the  platoons  ;  these  files  should  always  be  full. 

PL  4,  figs.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  ;  PL  5,  figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  will  sufiiciently  explain  the  formation  of 
a  squadron  in  column  by  twos,  threes,  sixes,  platoons,  and  half-squadrons,  as  well  as  the  posts 
of  the  officers  and  -non-commissioned  ofiicers. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    SPCLELLAN.  97 


TO   MOUNT   AND   DISMOUNT   THE   SQUADRON. 

To  mount,  tlie  squadron  is  formed  with  closed  ranks,  all  the  officers  dismounted  except  the 
commander  of  the  squadron.  PL  4,  fig.  1,  shows  the  positions  of  all  persons,  hoth  in  mounting 
and  dismounting  ;  the  principles  already  explained  in  the  school  of  the  platoon  are  observed  in 
this  case. 

OF   VOCAL   COMMANDS. 

These  are  of  two  kinds  :  those  of  preparation,  and  those  of  execution. 

The  first  are  uttered  slowly,  every  syllable  being  clearly  pronounced  ;  the  latter  are  uttered 
briefly  and  abruptly. 

The  commander  should  modulate  his  voice  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  men  who  are  to 
execute  the  command,  so  that  every  word  may  be  heard.  In  the  text,  the  tonic  accent  (1)  is 
placed  over  the  syllables  that  are  to  be  accented  and  uttered  slowly  ;  the  hyphen  (-)  indicates 
the  passage  from  the  preparatory  to  the  executive  command. 

Commands  indicating  the  gaits  are  always  given  with  the  cautionary  command,  and  before  the 
word — march. 

The  commanding  ofiicer  should  always  designate  the  gait. 

PRINCIPAL   GUIDES. 

Sergeants  Nos.  6,  9,  and  12,  are  the  principal  guides  of  the  squadron ;  all  the  sergeants 
should,  however,  be  instructed  in  the  duties  of  principal  guides,  that  they  may  be  able  to  fulfil 
them  in  case  of  necessity. 

PL  5,  fig.  4,  shows  the  positions  of  the  principal  guides  in  the  alignment  of  a  squadron,  to 
the  right,  by  platoons. 

In  mounted  squadrons  the  men  are  arranged,  according  to  the  height  of  men  and  horses,  from 
right  to  left  in  the  right  half-squadron,  and  from  left  to  right  in  the  left  half-squadron. 

The  front  rank  is  composed  of  the  men  who  are  the  best  looking,  best  riders,  and  most  prompt, 
with,  as  far  as  possible,  the  best  and  most  thoroughly  trained  horses.  Prompt  and  well- 
instructed  men,  with  the  best  horses,  are  placed  on  the  flanks  of  platoons  and  threes. 

SQUADRON   WITH   OPENED   RANKS 

The  ranks  may  be  opened,  either  by  causing  the  front  rank  to  move  forward,  or  the  rear  rank 
to  rein  back. 

PL  5,  fig.  5,  shows  the  formation  of  the  squadron  with  open  ranks  ;  the  commandants  of 
platoons,  facing  the  squadron,  are  six  paces  from  the  front  rank  ;  the  ranks  six  paces  apart ;  the 
file-closers  six  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

Columns  by  files,  twos,  threes,  and  sixes,  are  formed  and  broken  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  platoon. 

The  front  of  the  column  may  be  increased  either  in  all  the  platoons  at  the  same  time  or, 
beginning  with  the  head  of  the  column,  by  the  diiferent  platoons  in  succession.  The  front  of 
the  column  is  decreased  always  by  the  platoons  in  succession. 

When  the  squadron  is  in  line,  to  break  it,  by  the  right,  by  platoons  to  the  front,  the  1st 
platoon  marches  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  others  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  2d 
13  © 


98  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

platoon  then  wheels  to  the  left  and  follows  the  1st;  the  3d  and  4th  move  forward  and  wheel  to 
the  left,  as  each  arrives  where  the  2d  wheeled  to  the  left. 

MARCHING  IN  LINE. 

A.  When  marching  in  line  the  alignment  of  the  squadron  will  dej^end  upon  that  of  the 
officers  in  front  of  the  platoons ;  it  is,  therefore,  required  that  these  officers  should  he  frequently- 
exercised  in  marching  in  line,  at  the  proper  intervals,  to  the  front  and  obliquely,  at  all  gaits ; 
since  absent  officers  are  to  be  replaced  by  sergeants,  the  latter  are  also  exercised  in  the  same 
manner. 

B.  Before  marching  in  line  with  closed  ranks  the  squadron  is  exercised  with  the  ranks  opened 
to  squadron  distance,  the  front  rank  commanded  by  the  senior  subaltern,  the  rear  rank  by  the 
second  subaltern. 

0.  The  squadron  is  exercised  at  marching  with  the  flank  files  of  the  platoons  and  the  inter- 
mediate sergeants,  thrown  forward  about  20  paces. 

D.  In  starting  or  changing  gait  the  guide  moves  gently,  to  avoid  agitation  in  the  ranks. 

E.  The  march  in  line  should  not  be  attempted  at  a  trot  imtil  well  done  at  a  walk  ;  after  being 
properly  done  at  a  trot,  it  is  executed  at  a  gallop,  the  gait  being  changed  on  the  march. 

OF   COLUMNS. 

Eight  columns  are  those  right  in  front ;  left  columns  are  those  left  in  front 

There  are  three  kinds  of  columns;  1,  columns  with  distance;  2,  close  columns;  3,  marching 
columns,  or  columns  in  route. 

In  every  kind  of  column  the  distance  is  measured  from  the  fore  feet  of  the  horses  of  one  subdi- 
vision to  the  fore  feet  of  the  front  rank  horses  of  the  next  subdivision. 

In  a  right  column  the  gtiide  is  left,  in  a  left  column  it  is  right. 

The  object  of  a  column  with  full  distance  is  that  the  troops  composing  it  may  form  line  in 
every  direction,  therefore  the  distance  between  the  subdivisions  must  be  equal  to  their  respective 
fronts. 

The  object  of  a  close  column  is,  by  decreasing  its  depth  to  execute  movements  conveniently 
and  rapidly.  Close  columns  are  formed  by  half  squadrons  and  by  squadrons ;  the  distance  is  15 
paces ;  the  formation  of  these  columns  is  explained  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

The  object  of  a  column  in  route  is  to  effect  a  march  conveniently.  According  to  the  width  of 
the  road  this  column  is  formed  by  jilatoons,  sixes,  threes,  twos,  or  files ;  in  preference,  by 
platoons,  when  the  road  permits. 

The  direction  of  a  column  in  march  is  changed  as  in  the  United  States  tactics ;  but,  in  order  to 
perfect  the  instruction  of  both  ranks,  the  column  by  platoons  is  formed  in  single  I'anks,  at 
platoon  distance,  in  the  first  lessons. 

To  form  from  column  by  j^latoons,  or  half  squadrons,  into  line  to  the  front  or  rear,  or  to 
increase  the  front  of  a  column  by  platoons,  each  platoon  obliques,  instead  of  making  half 
wheels,  e.  g. 

(PL  6,  fig.  1.)  To  form  front  into  line  from  a  column  of  platoons,  right  in  front,  the  1st 
platoon  marches  forward  platoon  distance  and  halts,  the  others  oblique  to  the  left,  by  the  indi- 
vidual oblique  march,  and  move  to  the  front  when  opposite  their  respective  places  in  line. 

To  form  on  the  right  or  left  into'  line,  the  leading  platoon  moves  forward  platoon  distance, 
after  having  finished  its  wheel. 


KEPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    irCLELLAN.  99 


OF   ATTACKING. — THE  ATTACK^  OR  CHARGE,  IN  CLOSE  ORDER. 

The  general  rules  for  executing  a  charge  in  close  order  are  the  same  as  for  an  advance  in 
line. 

The  command  of  execution  for  a  charge  is  march,  march. 

At  tliis  command  the  officers  and  the  front  rank  charge  sahre. 

During  a  charge  all  commands,  after  that  oi  march,  march,  are  repeated  by  the  commandants 
of  platoons. 

A  charge  should  not  extend  over  more  than  eighty  paces  ;  the  nearer  a  regiment  of  cavalry 
can  approach  the  enemy  at  a  trot  the  more  violent  will  he  the  shock  ;  but  the  further  from  the 
enemy  the  command  march,  march,  is  given  the  weaker  will  be  the  shock,  and  the  greater  the 
disorder  among  the  horses.  In  order  to  save  the  horses,  they  should,  if  j)ossible,  before  halting 
them  after  a  charge,  be  brought  down  to  a  trot. 

The  charge  is  first  taught  by  platoon,  and  afterwards  by  squadron.  To  execute  the  charge 
by  platoon,  the  squadron  commander  places  himself  300  paces  in  front  of  the  squadron,  and 
directs  the  commandant  of  the  first  platoon  to  execute  the  charge  ;  this  officer  moves  his  platoon 
fifty  paces  at  a  walk,  then  100  at  a  trot,  fifty  at  a  gallop,  charges  eighty  j^aces,  and  halts  his 
platoon  abreast  of  the  captain.  The  charge  by  squadron  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner,  the 
captain  leading  the  charge. 

At  the  command  trot,  or  loalh,  after  the  charge,  the  officers  and  the  front  rank  carry  sabres. 

The  troops  are  also  taught  to  charge  directly  from  a  halt.  During  the  charge,  at  the  com- 
mand march,  march,  the  standard  bearer  falls  back  into  the  line  of  file-closers,  the  assistant 
behind  him  ;  at  the  command  halt,  they  resume  their  places  in  line.  During  the  charge,  the 
rear  rank  men  are  to  cover  their  file  leaders,  and  neither  crowd  up  on  them  nor  fall  back. 

THE  CHARGE  IN  OPEN  ORDER. 

This  is  effected  by  one  half  squadron.     (PI.  6,  fig.  2.) 

In  open  order  the  half  squadron  is  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  occupies  a  front  equal  to  that  of 
five  platoons  in  close  order.  When  deployed  in  open  order  the  officers  and  sergeants  are  posted 
as  follows  :  the  commander  of  the  squadron  always  follows  the  movements  of  the  half  squadron 
detailed  for  duty  in  open  order,  and  places  himself  where  he  deems  necessary,  having  a 
trumpeter  with  him  ;  if  there  is  an  officer  with  the  squadron  as  file-closer,  he  accompanies  the 
squadron  commander,  to  carry  his  orders  ;  the  commandants  of  platoons  are  in  the  front  rank  ; 
the  sergeants  are  in  their  usual  places,  except  that  the  file-closers  are  ten  paces  behind  the  rear 
rank.  Tlie  other  half  squadron  constitutes  a  reserve,  and  holds  itself  at  150  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line,  deployed  in  open  order  ;  it  never  retires  without  special  orders.  The  standard  remains 
with  the  reserve. 

For  the  charge  in  open  order  the  signal  "attack"  is  sounded,  and  then  "  disperse."  If  the 
charge  is  to  be  made  from  a  halt,  then  at  the  first  signal  the  designated  half  squadron  moves 
forward  at  a  trot,  and  at  the  second  signal  the  commander  orders  disperse;  if  the  squadron  is  on 
the  march  when  the  first  signal  is  sounded,  the  attacking  half  squadron  continues  moving  at  the 
original  gait,  while  the  reserve  halts.  At  the  command  disperse  the  men  charge  sabres  and 
disperse  as  follows  :  if  it  is  the  right  half  squadron  which  is  to  disperse,  the  right  guide  is  the 
guide  of  the  movement,  and  moves  straight  forward  at  a  hand  gallop  ;  the  rest  of  the  men  gain 


100  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

ground  to  the  left  and  front,  at  the  charging  gait,  until  the  left  file  of  the  second  platoon  extends 
to  platoon  distance  to  the  left  of  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve  ;  (this  is  done  to  cover  the  intervals 
when  several  squadrons  are  formed  in  one  line.)  If  it  is  the  left  half  squadron  which  deploys, 
then  the  left  guide  is  the  guide  of  the  movement,  and  the  right  file  extends  to  platoon  distance 
heyond  the  right  file  of  the  reserve.  When  the  outer  flank  has  extended  sufficiently,  the  whole 
line  moves  straight  forward  at  a  charge,  the  men  using  their  pistols  and  sahres,  not  paying 
attention  to  the  alignment,  but  taking  care  to  preserve  sufficient  intervals  for  a  free  use  of  their 
weapons.  At  the  signal  lialt,  they  halt  and  dress  on  the  centre,  the  rear  rank  placing  them- 
selves ten  paces  behind  their  front  rank  men. 

The  skirmishers  may  be  assembled  either  on  the  reserve  or  on  the  guide  of  the  line  ;  in  either 
case  it  is  at  full  speed  ;  and  iu  the  first  case  the  men  fall  in  without  regard  to  place,  merely 
endeavoring  to  get  into  the  proper  rank  and  platoon.  The  men  are  instructed  in  the  charge  in 
open  order,  first  at  a  walk,  afterwards  at  a  trot,  gallop,  and  charge. 

ECHELONS. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  in  advancing  by  echelons  of  half  squadrons,  the  distance  between 
the  echelons  being  at  least  equal  to  the  front  of  a  half  squadron.  The  advance  is  by  alternate 
half  squadrons,  or  occasionally  by  both  advancing,  in  echelon,  simultaneously. 

A  retreat  is  always  conducted  by  half  squadrons,  and  at  a  walk,  or  trot.  If  the  right  half 
squadron  commences  the  movement,  it  wheels  to  the  right  about  by  platoons,  moves  about  half 
squadron  distance  to  the  rear,  and  again  wheels  by  platoons  to  the  right  about ;  on  this,  the 
left  half  squadron  wheels  to  the  left  about  by  platoons,  moves  squadron  distance  to  the  rear, 
and  then  again  wheels  to  the  left  about  by  platoons.  The  standard  remains  with  the  left  half 
squadron. 

SKIRMISHERS. 

The  open  order  of  battle  is  a  chain  of  skirmishers,  with  a  reserve  in  its  rear.  The  purpose 
of  the  chain  of  skirmishers  is  to  watch  the  movements  of  the  enemy,  to  weaken  and  harass  him 
by  its  fire,  and  thus  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  success  of  the  main  body  in  close  order,  or  else 
to  cover  its  movements 

The  reserve  is  to  support  and  reinforce  the  chain,  and  to  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  the 
skirmishers  ;  it  should  therefore  be  in  rear  of  the  skirmishers,  and  follow  their  movements. 

Commanders  of  parties  detailed  as  skirmishers  will  employ  vocal  commands  iu  preference  to 
the  trumpet  signals;  the  latter  will  be  employed  only  when  the  skirmishers  are  already 
deployed. 

To  avoid  the  possibility  of  mistakes,  commanders  ordering  their  trumpeters  to  sound  any 
signal  will  always  indicate  it  by  its  name,  and  not  by  its  number. 

The  Eussian  system  of  instruction  for  mounted  skirmishers  gives  in  great  detail  the  move- 
ments for  their  deployment,  advance,  and  retreat;  change  of  direction  and  position;  firing, 
extending  and  closing  intervals,  assembly,  relief,  &c. 

If  a  platoon  of  12  files  is  detailed  for  skirmishing  duty,  6  files  are  deployed,  and  6  are 
detailed  as  a  reserve.  The  commandant  of  the  platoon,  one  of  the  guides,  a  file-closer,  and  a 
trumpeter,  accompany  the  skirmishers  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line ;  the  other  guide  commands 
the  reserve,  which  he  holds  at  100  yards  from  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

(Fl.   6,  fig,  3.)     When  the  line  is  halted,  'each  rear  rank  man  places  himself  so  that  his 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   M'CLELLAN.  101 

horse's  head  shall  be  1  pace  to  the  rear  and  right  of  the  tail  of  the  horse  of  his  front  rank 
man ;  the  interval  between  the  files  depends  upon  circumstances. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. — No.  1  of  the  front  rank,  in  each  set  of  threes,  advances  20  paces  at  a  walk, 
halts,  turns  his  horse's  left  side  obliquely  towards  the  enemy,  fires,  and  returns  at  a  trot  to  the 
place  vacated  by  his  rear  rank  man,  who  has  in  the  mean  time  taken  the  front  rank  man's 
original  position.  As  soon  as  No.  1  has  fired,  the  front  rank  No.  2,  in  each  set  of  threes, 
advances  20  paces,  but  does  not  fire  until  No.  1  has  retaken  his  place  in  the  line;  when  No.  3 
has  fired,  in  the  same  manner  the  rear  rank  No.  1  fires,  &c. 

To  fire  advancing. — This  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles;  the  line  continuing  to 
move  forward  at  its  original  gait,  while  the  men  who  are  to  fire  advance  by  doubling  the  gait. 

To  fire  retreating. — The  whole  line  halts,  and  faces  the  enemy;  Nos.  1  of  the  front  rank  fire, 
come  to  a  right  about,  and  retire  at  a  walk,  loading  their  pieces;  as  they  pass  their  rear  rank 
men,  the  latter  make  a  right  about,  and  follow  at  1  pace  to  the  right  rear  of  their  front  rank 
men ;  when  they  have  retired  30  paces,  each  makes  a  right  about,  and  halts,  facing  the  enemy, 
the  rear  rank  men  now  nearest  the  enemy. 

As  soon  as  Nos.  1  have  executed  this,  Nos.  2  do  the  same;  then  Nos.  3;  then  the  rear  rank 
Nos.  1  fire,  and  so  the  movement  is  continued. 

PI.  6,  fig.  4,  gives  an  example  of  the  arrangement  of  2  squadrons  detailed  as  skirmishers 
in  front  of  a  regiment  of  6  squadrons  ;  in  each  of  the  2  squadrons  a  half  squadron  is  held  in 
reserve,  the  other  platoons  being  deployed  as  already  explained  ;  each  of  these  platoons  holds 
one-half  of  its  force  in  reserve. 

The  chain  of  skirmishers  should  always  be  continuous,  unless  there  is  artillery  in  rear  of  it ; 
it  should  overlap  the  body  it  covers  about  20  paces  on  each  flank,  and  have  its  own  flanks  some- 
what thrown  back. 

When  it  becomes  necessary  to  dismount  parties  of  cavalry  for  the  purpose  of  liolding  or 
carrying  some  post,  Nos.  2  of  each  rank  remain  mounted,  and  hold  the  horses  of  Nos.  1  and  3. 

Lancers  are  not  dismounted  if  it  can  be  avoided ;  but  if  it  is  necessary,  then  only  one-half 
the  men  dismount,  and  place  their  lances  in  the  left  stirrup  boots  of  the  men  remaining 
mounted,  who  pass  the  sling  over  the  left  arm. 

In  actual  service,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  oflicers  must  watch,  that,  when  the  signal 
to  commence  firing  is  given,  only  those  men  fire  who  see  the  enemy  within  suitable  range.  To 
prevent  accidents,  the  men  should  never  cock  their  pieces  until  their  turn  to  fire  arrives. 
Officers  and  sergeants  with  the  chain  and  reserves  carry  sabres.  Whilst  dispersing,  the 
sergeants  and  men  charge  sabres,  or  lances;  but  at  the  command  halt,  both  ranks  rest  lances, 
or  drop  sabres,  (allowing  them  to  hang  from  the  wrist  by  the  sabre  knot,)  and  advance  carbine 
or  raise  pistol. 

THE  COLUMN  OF   ATTACK. 

Before  passing  to  the  school  of  the  regiment,  it  is  necessary  to  explain  the  column  of  attack. 
It  must  first  be  stated  that  in  the  Kussian  cavalry  2  squadrons  form  a  division,  commanded  by 
a  field  officer;  each  division  in  a  cavalry  regiment  partially  corresponding  to  a  battalion  in  an 
infantry  regiment  in  a  tactical  sense ;  in  line,  the  interval  between  the  2  squadrons  of  a  division 
is  the  front  of  a  platoon.  The  column  of  attack  (so  called)  is,  in  fact,  a  column  of  manoeuvre, 
and  is  nothing  more  than  a  division  formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre  by  half  squadrons 
at  platoon  distance,  thus  :  the  4th  platoon  of  the  1st  squadron  and  the  1st  platoon  of  the  2d 


102  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

squadron  (having  closed  in  on  each  other)  form  the  head  of  the  column ;  the  next  subdivision 
is  composed  of  the  3d  platoon  of  1st  squadron  and  the  2d  of  the  2d  squadron,  &c. 

PL  T,  fig.  1,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  column  of  attack  from  a  halt. 

PI.  V,  fig.  2,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  column  of  attack  advancing. 

PL  7,  fig.  3,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  column  of  attack  retreating,  the  division  having 
wheeled  about,  by  platoons,  before  commencing  its  retreat. 

To  deploy  the  column,  the  platoons  of  the  1st  squadron  oblique  to  the  right,  those  of  the  2d 
squadron  to  the  left ;  in  deploying  from  a  halt,  the  leading  platoons  gain  platoon  distance  to 
the  front  and  half  platoon  distance  to  the  right  and  left,  respectively. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  PvEGIMENT. 

Before  commencing  the  drill  of  the  regiment,  the  colonel  is  required  to  exercise  the  officers 
without  the  men ;  for  this  purpose  the  commandants  of  platoons  are  j^laced  in  one  rank,  at  their 
proper  intervals,  (as  if  in  front  of  their  platoons,)  the  commanders  of  squadrons  and  divisions, 
also,  in  their  proper  places ;  and  in  this  position  they  are  carried  through  the  various  manoeuvres, 
and  taught  to  preserve  their  intervals  and  alignment ;  any  absent  commandants  of  platoons  are 
replaced  by  sergeants. 

Kegiments  of  cavalry  consist  of  6,  8,  or  10  active  squadrons. 

In  each  regiment,  the  squadrons  are  numbered  in  regular  series,  from  right  to  left. 
In  regiments  of  8  squadrons,  the  7th  and  8th  are  called  flanker  squadrons,  and,  when  neces- 
sary, act  as  skirmishers;  in  regiments  of  10  squadrons,  (dragoons,)  the  9th  and  10th  squadrons 
are  armed  with  lances,  are  called  lancer  squadrons,  and  act  as  skirmishers. 
In  each  regiment,  the  1st  and    2d  squadrons  form  the  1st  division, 
the  3d    and    4th       "  "  2d  '' 

the  5th  and    6th       "  "  3d  " 

the  7th  and    8th       "  "  4th         " 

the  9th  and  10th       "  "  5th 

It  may  be  well  here  to  repeat,  and  call  attention  to  the  fact,  that  all  the  regiments  of  light 
cavalry  of  the  line,  and  4  of  the  heavy  cavalry,  are  8  squadron  regiments,  so  that  the  formations, 
&c.    hereafter  given  for  8  squadron  regiments  may  be  regarded  as  the  rule  in  the  Russian  service. 

THE  FORMATIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT  IN  LINE. 

A  cavalry  regiment  may  be  deployed  for  inspection  and  revieio,  or  for  comhat.  In  6  squadron 
regiments,  these  formations  are  the  same ;  in  the  others  they  are  diflerent.  The  formation  for 
inspection  and  review  is  called  the  ordei-  of  review;  that  for  combat,  is  called  the  order  ofhattle. 

THE  ORDER  OF  REVIEW. 

This  is  the  same  for  all  regiments ;  in  it  all  the  squadrons  are  formed  in  one  line,  arranged  in 
the  order  of  their  numbers,  from  right  to  left ;  the  interval  between  the  squadrons  is  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  platoon. 

PL  8  shows  this  formation,  and  the  positions  of  the  difierent  officers. 

The  colonel  is  6  times  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  centre  ;  each  division  commander  at 
double  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division ;  the  squadron  officers  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  squadron. 

If  there  is  not  an  officer,  as  file-closer,  behind  each  squadron  or  division,  there  must,  at  least, 
be  one  for  the  regiment,  who  is  posted  at  platoon  distance  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line  of 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  103 

non-commissioned  file-closers ;  if  there  are  more  than  one  oflScer,  as  file-closers,  but  not  as  many 
as  the  number  of  divisions,  they  are  posted  in  preference  behind  the  flank  divisions. 

The  trumpeters  are  either  united,  at  half  platoon  distance  on  the  right  of  the  1st  squadron, 
or  are  with  their  respective  squadrons. 

THE  ORDER  OF  BATTLE. 

The  formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle  depends  upon  the  number  of  squadrons  of 
which  it  is  composed. 

(PL  8.)   For  a  regiment  of  6  squadrons,  it  is,  as  already  stated,  the  same  as  the  order  of  review. 

(PL  9.)  For  a  regiment  of  8  squadrons,  it  is  as  follows  :  the  first  6  squadrons  are  deployed  as 
in  the  order  of  review,  and  form  the  line  of  battle ;  the  7th  squadron  is  formed  in  column  by 
platoons,  left  in  front,  at  squadron  distance  behind  the  right  flank  of  the  line  of  battle,  its  line 
of  left  guides  being  at  platoon  distance  to  the  right  of  the  right  flank  of  the  1st  squadron  ;  the 
8th  squadron  is  formed  in  column  by  platoons,  right  in  front,  in  a  similar  position  behind  the 
left  flank  of  the  line  of  battle. 

(PL  10,  fig.  1.)  For  regiments  of  10  squadrons,  (dragoons,)  with  all  their  squadrons  present, 
the  order  of  battle  is  as  follows  :  in  two  lines  ;  one  line  of  the  first  four  squadrons,  the  other  line 
of  the  next  four,  either  line  may  be  in  front ;  the  front  line  is  called  the  line  of  battle,  and  is 
deployed  ;  the  rear  line  is  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  these  columns  being  opposite  the  intervals 
in  the  divisions  of  the  line  of  battle. 

The  lancer  squadrons  (9th  and  lOtli)  are  formed  in  columns  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  flanks 
of  the  line  of  battle,  as  described  for  the  7th  and  8th  squadrons  of  8  squadron  regiments. 

The  line  of  battle  and  the  second  line  are  300  yards  apart. 

The  plates  explain  sufiiciently  the  positions  of  the  ofiicers  in  the  order  of  battle. 

Commands  are  given  and  repeated  on  the  same  principles  as  in  the  United  States  tactics  ;  when 
the  colonel  gives  the  command,  march,  he  raises  his  sabre  vertically,  to  the  full  length  of  his 
arm  ;  he  does  the  same  thing  upon  giving  the  command,  halt. 

In  the  order  of  battle,  the  chief  trumpeter  accompanies  the  colonel ;  there  is  one  trumpeter  with 
each  commander  of  division  ;  one  with  each  platoon  of  the  flanker,  or  lancer,  squadrons  ;  the 
rest  are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers  with  their  resj^ective  squadrons. 

In  dragoon  regiments,  the  drummers  are  united  in  rear  of  the  second  line. 

STANDARDS  AND  THEIR  ESCORT. 

Every  division  has  a  standard,  which  is  posted  with  the  1st  squadron  of  the  division,  and 
generally  follows  the  movements  of  the  3d  platoon. 

The  escort  of  the  standards  is  always  composed  of  one  of  the  platoons  of  the  1st  squadron  of 
the  regiment ;  to  bring  the  standards  to  the  regiment,  the  chief  trumpeter  and  3  trumpeters 
accomjjany  the  escort ;  to  carry  them  back  to  the  colonel's  quarters,  all  the  trumpeters  of  the 
regiment  are  detailed. 

PL  10,  fig.  2,  shows  the  order  of  march  of  the  standards  and  their  escort. 

In  bringing  the  standards  to  the  regiment,  when  the  escort  reaches  the  nearest  flank  of  the 
regiment,  it  at  once  moves  to  its  post  in  line,  at  a  trot,  by  the  rear  of  the  regiment. 

For  the  departure  of  the  standards,  the  chiefs  of  the  3d  platoons  of  the  standard  squadrons 
conduct  them  to  the  front  of  the  1st  platoon  of  the  1st  squadron  of  the  regiment,  which  in  this 
case  forms  the  escort ;  having  turned  over  the  standards  to  the  adjutant,  the  chiefs  of  the  3d 
platoons  at  once  return  to  their  platoons. 


104  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

It  is  required  tliat  the  commandants  of  tlie  3d  platoons  of  standard  squadrons  shall  be  officers, 
even  if  all  the  other  platoons  of  the  squadron  are  commanded  by  sergeants. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

There  are  no  general  guides.  One  squadron  is  designated  as  the  squadron  of  direction ;  its 
principal  guides  (see  school  of  the  squadron)  are  posted  by  the  adjutant,  who  then  aligns  the 
principal  guides  of  the  other  squadrons,  in  succession,  on  them. 

When  the  regiment  is  deployed,  it  may  be  aligned  by  ordering  the  commandants  of  platoons 
forward  on  the  line,  instead  of  sending  out  the  principal  guides.  The  principal  guides  or  com- 
mandants of  platoons  move  to  their  posts  on  the  new  line  at  a  full  gallop. 

TO  CHANGE  FROM  THE  ORDER  OF  REVIEW  TO  THE  ORDER  OF  BATTLE. 

In  an  8  squadron  regiment,  the  iirst  6  squadrons  stand  fast,  the  commanders  of  the  7th  and 
8th  wheel  their  squadrons  by  platoons  to  the  right,  and  conduct  them,  by  the  shortest  line,  to 
their  new  i^ositions. 

In  a  10  squadron  regiment  the  first  two  divisions  stand  fast ;  the  8d  and  4th  form  columns  of 
attack,  and  then  move  by  the  shortest  line  to  their  new  positions  ;  the  9th  and  10th  squadrons 
act  as  prescribed  for  the  Ttli  and  8th  of  an  8  squadron  regiment. 

In  columns  with  distance,  the  colonel  and  the  commanders  of  divisions  and  sqiiadrons  are  all  on 
the  directing  flank,  opposite  the  centres  of  their  respective  commands,  and  at  distances  from  the 
line  of  guides  equal  to  their  respective  distances  in  front  of  the  line  when  it  is  deployed  ;  so  that 
if  the  column  wheels  into  line  they  are  all  in  their  proper  places  ;  the  adjutant  habitually  follows 
the  colonel. 

Among  other  formations  in  column,  the  regiment  is  sometimes  formed  into  several  parallel 
columns  of  divisions,  or  squadrons,  by  platoons. 

CLOSE  COLUMNS. 

In  these,  the  distance  between  subdivisions  is  15  paces,  measured  from  the  fore  feet  of  the  front 
rank  horses  of  one  subdivision  to  the  same  of  the  next  subdivision. 

PI.  11  shows  the  manner  of  forming  close  column  by  squadron,  from  a  halt,  and  the  posts 
of  the  officers.  If  there  are  in  front  of  any  of  the  platoons  officers  other  than  their  commandants, 
they  retain  their  usual  places. 

If  the  close  column  is  by  half-squadron,  the  commandants  of  divisions  and  squadrons  are 
posted  on  the  directing  flanks  of  their  leading  subdivisions,  and  the  commandants  of  half 
squadrons  on  the  directing  flanks  of  their  respective  commands. 

In  forming  close  column  from  a  halt,  the  movement  is  by  threes,  in  each  rank.  In  regiments 
of  10  squadrons,  to  form  close  column  from  order  of  battle,  the  divisions  of  the  2d  line  first  deploy. 

PL  12,  fig.  1,  will  show  the  general  manner  in  which  a  regiment  formed  in  columns  of  attack 
changes  front  and  deploys. 

PI.  12,  fig.  2,  will  sufficiently  explain  the  general  methods  of  deploying  close  columns. 

The  changes  of  front  are  executed  either  with  the  squadrons  deployed  or  formed  in  columns  of 
attack. 

The  regiment  is  exercised  in  advancing  and  retreating  by  alternate  half  squadrons,  squadrons, 
or  divisions. 

The  formations  in  echelon  are  by  half  squadrons,  squadrons,  or  divisions. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  1  Oo 


THE  CHARGE. 


The  charge  in  line,  in  close  order,  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  the 
school  of  the  squadron. 

In  certain  cases,  regiments  charge  in  close  column  ;  this  is  executed,  in  preference,  hy  the 
cuirassiers,  and  always  at  the  ty-ot  out ;  only  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  subdivision  charge 
lances,  or  sabres. 

The  charge  in  open  order  is  also  executed  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  school 
of  the  squadron ;  one  half  squadron  of  every  squadron  charges,  while  the  others  remain  in 
reserve.  One  division  commander  is  detailed  to  command  the  half  squadrons  which  charge, 
another  to  direct  the  reserve.  If  the  regiment  is  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  when  the  charge 
in  open  order  is  to  be  made,  the  squadrons  first  form  columns  by  half  squadron,  of  which  the 
leading  half  squadrons  charge,  while  those  in  rear  are  held  in  reserve,  and  at  once  take  the 
proper  intervals  of  5  platoon  fronts. 

The  flanker  squadrons  of  8  squadron  regiments,  and  the  lancer  squadrons  and  second  line  of 
dragoons,  follow  the  movements  of  the  line  of  battle  ;  marching  at  the  same  gait  as  the  latter 
until  it  charges,  when  they  move  on  at  the  trot  out ;  closing  up  on  the  line  of  battle  to  the 
prescribed  distance,  when  it  halts.  If  the  colonel  considers  it  necessary  to  form  the  flanker  or 
lancer  squadrons  in  echelon,  he  orders  them  to  form  squadron,  after  which  they  continue  the 
movement  as  just  explained. 

If  the  signal  reserve  is  sounded,  these  flanker  or  lancer  squadrons,  instead  of  halting,  move 
on  at  a  charge  in  pursuit  of  the  beaten  enemy,  returning  to  their  posts  in  rear  of  the  flanks 
when  the  recall  is  sounded. 

REVIEW!?. 

Cavalry  passes  in  review :  in  columyi  luith  distance,  by  platoons,  half  squadrons,  or  squadrons ; 
in  column  luith  half  distance,  by  half  squadrons,  squadrons,  or  divisions ;  in  close  column,  by  half 
squadrons,  or  squadrons.  The  adjutant  is  at  the  head  of  the  column  ;  one  pace  behind  the 
adjutant  is  the  band  of  trumpeters,  in  two  ranks,  with  the  chief  trumpeter  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank ;  the  colonel,  6  paces  in  rear  of  the  trumpeters ;  the  commander  of  the  1st  division, 
3  paces  in  rear  of  the  colonel ;  the  commander  of  the  leading  squadron,  3  paces  in  rear  of  the 
division  commander ;  then  the  leading  subdivision  of  the  column. 

The  Eussians  call  a  division  of  2  brigades  divista ;  a  division  of  2  squadrons  is  division. 
Confusion  is  thus  avoided. 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

The  volume  on  this  subject  is  dfvided  into  two  parts:  1.  Evolutions  of  the  line  proper;  2. 
Orders  of  battle,  general  columns,  and  the  application  of  the  evolutions  of  the  line  to  these. 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE  PROPER. 

This  subject  comprehends  the  movements  of  several  regiments,  whether  in  line,  or  in  columns. 

The  first  great  requisites  for  a  successful  cavalry  general  and  instructor  are,  perfect  coolness 
and  presence  of  mind. 

The  rules  for  giving  and  repeating  commands,  as  given  in  the  school  of  the  regiment,  apply 
here,  with  a  few  additions. 

The  preparatory  commands  are  given  by  the  general  commanding,  and  are  repeated  by  the 
14  © 


KJfJ  MILITAKY    COMMISS<IOX    TO    EUROPK. 

other  generals  and  the  colonels ;  they  are  at  once  followed  by  the  designation  of  the  gait  and 
the  command,  march.  Down  to  the  brigadier  generals,  inclusive,  the  general  commands  alone 
are  given ;  the  colonels  give  the  special  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

In  all  cases  the  generals  of  brigade  repeat  the  preparatory  commands  of  the  generals  of  their 
divisions. 

If  all  the  regiments  of  a  brigade  are  to  execute  the  same  movement,  the  general  of  brigade 
gives  the  preparatoiy  commands  for  all  of  them. 

If  different  regiments  of  a  brigade  are  to  execute  different  movements,  the  general  of  brigade 
gives  the  preparatory  command  for  the  movement  of  the  1st  regiment  only;  the  colonels  of  the 
other  regiments  giving  the  requisite  commands. 

Whenever  the  preparatory  commands  are  to  be  repeated  by  all  the  generals  and  colonels,  the 
the  general  commanding  raises  his  sabre;  this  signal  is  repeated  simultaneously  by  all  the 
generals  and  colonels ;  the  commanders  of  divisions  (2  squadrons)  and  squadrons  at  once  give 
the  command,  march. 

When  a  movement  is  to  be  executed  by  all  the  troops,  the  general  preparatory  commands  are 
repeated  by  all  the  subordinate  commanders ;  but  when  only  a  portion  of  the  troops  are  to 
execute  the  movement,  the  preparatory  commands  will  be  repeated  only  by  the  commanders  of 
that  portion. 

Colonels  will  always  preface  the  command,  regiment,  by  the  number  of  their  regiments  in  the 
division,  or  brigade,  (if  there  is  only  a  brigade  present.) 

Generals  of  division  will  likewise  preface  the  command,  division,  by  the  number  of  their 
respective  divisions ;  but  generals  of  brigade  simply  give  the  command,  brigade,  not  prefacing 
any  number. 

If  the  troops  are  formed  in  one  general  column,  or  in  a  line  of  regimental  columns,  the  com- 
mands to  draw  and  return  sabres  are  given  by  the  generals  of  division,  and  repeated  by  the 
generals  of  brigade  and  the  colonels  ;  the  troops  execute  the  order  at  the  command  of  the  latter. 
If  the  regiments  are  deployed,  or  each  formed  into  several  columns  in  line,  these  commands  are 
repeated  by  all  commanders,  down  to  those  of  squadrons  inclusive,  and  executed  at  the  command 
of  the  latter.  When  the  number  of  troops  is  so  great  that  the  voice  of  the  general  commanding 
cannot  be  heard  by  all,  he  sends  his  orders  by  aides  de  camp.  In  such  cases  the  distant  parts 
should  conform  to  the  movements  of  those  nearest  the  general  commanding,  that  the  movements 
may  be  as  simidtaneous  as  possible.  The  general  will  assure  himself  that  the  aides  fully  com- 
prehend the  order,  so  as  to  prevent  errors  and  misunderstandings  ;  the  aides  should  carry  the 
order  with  the  utmost  rapidity,  and  deliver  it  clearly  and  slowly,  but  they  have  no  authority  to 
interfere  with  the  execution.  If  they  see  that  the  order  is  not  properly  carried  out,  they  should 
remind  the  officer  to  whom  it  was  delivered  and  return  to  the  general  as  soon  as  it  is  executed ; 
they  report  the  fulfilment  of  the  order,  or  the  reason  for  its  non-fulfilment.  Trumpet  signals 
apply  only  to  the  first  line,  and  are  repeated  only  by  the  trumpeters  of  that  line.  All  commands 
to  the  second  and  other  lines  are  given  by  the  voice.  The  rules  for  the  guidance  of  the  principal 
guides,  as  given  in  the  school  of  the  regiment,  apply  to  the  case  of  evolutions  of  the  line. 

POSTS  OF  GENERALS,  ETC. 

Plate  13  gives  the  positions  of  the  generals  of  division,  brigade,  &c.  When  the  regiments 
are  deployed,  either  in  the  order  of  review  or  of  battle,  the  generals  of  division  are  at  the  distance 
of  ten  platoon  fronts  in  advance  of  the  centres  of  their  respective  divisions  ;  the  generals  of 
brigade  eight  platoon  fronts  in  advance  of  the  centres  of  their  brigades. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  107 

In  general  close  column  (fig.  4)  the  general  of  division  is  on  the  directing  flank  of  the  leading 
subdivision  of  his  command,  at  the  distance  of  three  platoon  fronts  from  the  guide  ;  each  general 
of  brigade  on  the  line  of  his  leading  subdivision,  at  the  distance  of  two  platoon  fronts  from  the 
guide.  When  the  regiments  are  formed  in  line  of  close  columns  of  regiments,  at  deploying 
intervals,  the  f)osts  of  the  generals  are  as  when  the  regiments  are  deployed.  When  the  line  of 
close  column  of  regiments  is  with  closed  intervals  the  generals  of  division  are  at  the  distance  of 
six  platoons  ;  generals  of  brigade,  four  ;  colonels,  two  in  advance  ;  the  latter  are  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  lines  of  guides  of  their  regiments.  The  general  commanding  may  move 
wherever  his  presence  is  most  necessary  ;  but  the  subordinate  commanders  will  in  no  case  leave 
the  places  assigned  to  them,  but  will  correct  any  faults,  either  by  orders  to  the  nearest  sub- 
ordinate commanders,  or  by  means  of  their  aides  de  camp.  Each  general  has  a  trumpeter  with 
him  ;  the  other  trumpeters  take  post  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

OF  DEPLOYED  LINES. 

Kegiments  and  brigades  are  posted,  in  each  division,  from  right  to  left,  according  to  seniority. 
In  the  order  of  review  and  the  order  of  battle  they  are  each  formed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  regiment.  CorjDs,  divisions,  and  brigades  are  habitually  formed  in  order  of  battle,  unless 
special  orders  are  given  to  form  them  in  the  order  of  review. 

PL  13,  fig.  5,  shows  the  formation  of  a  brigade  of  eight  squadron  regiments  in  the  order  of 
battle. 

PI.  13,  fig.  6,  shows  the  formation  of  a  brigade  of  ten  squadron  regiments  in  order  of  battle. 

Both  in  the  order  of  battle  and  that  of  review  tlie  interval  between  regiments  and  brigades  is 
two  ^datoon  fronts  ;  in  the  first  case,  for  eight  and  ten  squadron  regiments,  this  interval  is 
measured  between  the  flanker,  or  lancer,  squadrons.  In  the  order  of  battle  of  commands  com- 
posed of  ten  squadron  regiments  the  front  line  may  be  composed  of  the  corresponding  wings  of 
all  the  regiments,  or  one  half  of  it  may  be  composed  of  the  right  wingsof  one  half  the  regiments, 
and  the  other  half  of  it  of  the  left  wings  of  the  remaining  regiments. 

In  the  order  of  battle  of  eight  and  ten  squadron  regiments  the  flanker,  or  lancer,  squadrons 
are  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  first  line,  and  not  as  constituting  a  separate  line.  When  the 
general  line  is  to  be  aligned  to  the  front,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  new  direction  does  not 
cross  the  old. 

In  all  alignments  the  flanker  or  lancer  squadrons,  formed  in  columns  by  platoons,  align 
themselves  on  the  flank  squadrons  of  the  line  of  battle,  and  always  have  the  guide  on  the  inner 
flank. 

The  march  to  the  front,  the  oblique  march,  wheels  and  abouts  by  subdivisions,  and  halts, 
are  executed  by  the  commands,  and  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  school  of  the 
regiment,  substituting  in  the  preparatory  commands,  when  necessary,  the  words  division,  or 
brigade,  for  regiment.  The  charge  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  school 
of  the  regiment. 

The  same  holds  good  with  regard  to  the  passage  of  obstacles  ;  but  if  partial  obstacles  exist 
along  the  front  of  a  whole  regiment,  each  squadi'on  breaks  into  column  by  the  appropriate  sub- 
division, and  forms  squadron  as  soon  as  the  obstacle  is  passed.  If  all  the  ground  in  front  of  a 
regiment  is  impassable,  it  forms  into  close  column,  by  squadrons,  in  rear  of  one  of  the  regiments 
on  its  flanks,  and  does  not  re-enter  the  line  until  the  next  halt,  unless  orders  to  the  contrary 
are  given.  If  the  obstacle  is  in  front  of  the  regiment  of  direction,  another  regiment  is  designated 
in  its  place. 


108  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUEOPE. 


ECHELONS. 

The  formation  of  and  movements  by  eclielous  are  executed  as  in  the  school  of  the  regiment, 
with  the  following  modifications  : 

(PL  14,  fig.  1.)  In  a  line  of  considerable  extent,  one  part  may  break  by  echelons  while  the 
other  part  remains  in  line;  in  this  case  the  movement  begins  at  one  of  the  flanks,  and  is  arrested 
by  the  command — halt. 

Echelons  may  be  ibrmed  on  an  interior  j^art  of  the  line,  in  which  case  that  part  is  designated 
as  that  of  direction  ;  the  following  movements  may  thus  be  executed:  (1,)  one  flank  of  the  line 
may  break  by  echelons  to  the  front,  and  the  other  to  the  rear  ;  (2,)  both  flanks  may  break  to  the 
front,  or  both  to  the  rear  ;  (3,)  the  subdivision  of  direction  may  commence  the  movement,  by 
breaking  to  the  front  or  rear. 

In  the  first  two  cases  the  subdivision  of  direction  stands  fast,  in  the  last  case  it  commences  the 
movement ;  all  these  movements  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment.  During 
movements  by  echelons,  the  2d  line  of  ten  squadron  regiments  conforms  to  what  will  hereafter 
be  laid  down  for  the  second  line.  Line  is  formed  from  echelons  according  to  the  principles  of 
the  school  of  the  regiment. 

THE    ADVANCE    AND    RETREAT   BY    ALTERNATE    HALF  SQUADRONS,  SQUADRONS,  AND   DIVISIONS. 

This  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment,  with  the  following  modifications  : 
if  the  movement  is  ordered  to  be  commenced  by  the  right,  and  by  divisions,  (of  two  squadrons,) 
then,  in  six  and  eight  squadron  regiments,  the  1st  and  3d  divisions  of  the  1st  regiment,  and  2d 
division  of  the  2d  regiment  of  each  brigade,  commence  the  movement ;  if  it  is  directed  to  be 
commenced  by  the  left,  the  2d  division  of  the  1st  regiment,  and  the  1st  and  3d  divisions  of  the  2d 
regiment,  commence  the  movement.  If  the  order  to  advance  by  alternate  subdivisions  is  given 
while  the  line  is  on  the  march,  the  subdivisions  which  are  to  commence  the  movement  continue 
marching  at  the  original  gait,  but  the  others  halt ;  if,  under  the  same  circumstances,  a  retreat 
is  to  be  executed,  the  subdivisions  which  are  to  commence  the  movement  at  once  wheel  about  at 
the  original  gait,  the  others  halt. 

TO   CHANGE   FRONT. 

In  changes  of  front  the  general  rule  is :  the  regiment  of  direction  changes  front  by  the  rules 
laid  down  in  the  school  of  the  regiment ;  the  others  form  columns  of  attack,  which  move  by  the 
shortest  lines  upon  the  positions  marked  by  their  principal  guides. 

If,  in  a  single  brigade,  the  preparatory  command  is  prefaced  by  the  words — "  hy  squadrons," 
each  regiment  executes  the  movement  according  to  the  school  of  the  regiment,  neither  forming 
columns  of  attack. 

If  the  flank  squadron  of  any  brigade  or  division  is  the  squadron  of  direction,  the  contiguous 
regiment  of  the  next  brigade  or  division  may  change  front  according  to  the  school  of  the 
regiment.  In  a  line  of  great  extent,  all  the  regiments  may  be  first  formed  into  columns  of 
attack,  and  the  change  of  front  then  executed. 

OF   THE   FORMATION   OF   COLUMNS. 

General  rules. — Columns  with  full  distance  are  formed  according  to  the  school  of  the  regiment. 
Columns  with  less  than  full  distance  are  formed  like  close  columns.     The  principles   of  the 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    jrCLELLAN.  109 

formation  of  close  columns  by  squadrons  and  by  half  squadrons  being  the  same,  the  rules  for 
those  by  squadrons  are  alone  given. 

Columns  having  the  senior  regiment  in  front  are  called  right  columns,  those  having  the  junior 
regiment  in  front  are  called  left  columns,  whether  each  regiment  be  right  or  left  in  front ;  in  all 
cases  right  general  columns  have  the  guide  left,  and  the  reverse. 

The  distance  between  divisions,  brigades,  and  regiments,  in  close  cohimn,  is  twice  platoon 
distance,  measured  as  between  the  subdivisions  of  a  regimental  close  column.  General  close 
columns  may  be  formed  either  from  a  deployed  line  or  from  a  line  of  close  regimental  columns. 

FORMATION   OF   GENERAL   CLOSE   COLUMNS   FROM   A   DEPLOYED    LINE. 

(PI.  14,  figs.  2  and  3.)  One  squadron  is  designated  as  that  of  direction  ;  the  regiment  to 
which  that  squadron  belongs  forms  close  column  on  it,  according  to  the  school  of  the  regiment ; 
the  other  regiments  each  form  close  column  on  the  flank  squadron  nearest  the  regiment  of 
direction,  and  then  move  by  the  oblique  march  to  their  respective  positions  in  the  general  column. 

In  all  the  movements  of  the  regimental  columns  to  form  the  general  column,  especially  when 
obliquing,  every  squadron  must  be  exactly  parallel  to  its  original  position  in  line  ;  the  lines  of 
guides  on  both  flanks  must  be  parallel  to  each  other,  and  perpendicular  to  the  squadron  at  the 
head  of  the  column  ;  and,  finally,  the  several  files  must  be  parallel  to  each  other. 

FORMATION  OF  GENERAL  CLOSE  COLUMNS  FROM  A  LINE  OF  REGIMENTAL  COLUMNS. 

Kegimental  columns  in  line — i.  e.,  columns  having  the  heads  of  all  the  regiments  on  the  same 
line — are  formed  with  full  or  closed  intervals  ;  this  formation  is  called  a  line  of  columns  with 
full  or  closed  intervals. 

Full  intervals  are  such  as  to  permit  all  the  regiments  to  deploy  into  order  of  battle  on  the 
same  squadron  of  every  regiment ;  closed  intervals  are :  between  6  squadron  regiments  2  platoon 
fronts  ;  between  8  squadron  regiments  4  platoon  fronts  ;  between  10  squadron  regiments  6  pla- 
toon fronts. 

General  close  column  may  be  formed  from  a  line  of  columns,  either  with  full  or  closed 
intervals. 

The  first  case  has  already  been  explained,  when  giving  the  manner  of  forming  general  column 
from  a  deployed  line. 

PL  14,  fig.  4,  gives  an  example  of  the  latter  case  ;  one  regiment  being  designated  as  that  of 
direction,  those  which  are  to  be  in  front  of  it  in  the  column  march  straight  to  the  front,  until 
arriving  abreast  of  their  places  in  column,  when  they  move  straight  to  their  places  ;  those  that 
are  to  be  in  rear  of  the  directing  regiment  gain  their  positions  by  first  marching  to  the  rear. 

If  the  order  to  form  general  column  is  given  when  the  line  is  in  march,  the  directing  regiment 
halts  ;  the  others  acting  as  just  described. 

PI.  14,  fig.  0,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  the  general  column  on  one  of  the  flanks  when 
the  march  is  to  be  continued  after  the  formation. 

The  1st  regiment  marches  straight  forward ;  the  2d  moves  to  the  right,  by  threes  in  each  rank, 
as  soon  as  the  last  squadi'on  of  the  1st  regiment  is  abreast  of  the  3d  squadron  of  the  2d  reo-iment 
and  moves  to  the  left,  by  threes,  when  its  line  of  left  guides  is  on  the  prolongation  of  that  of 
the  1st  regiment ;  the  3d  and  4th  regiments  move  to  the  right,  in  turn,  as  soon  as  the  regiments 
next  on  their  right  have  gained  an  interval  equal  to  the  depth  pf  a  regimental  close  column — 
i.  e.,  in  a  6  squadron  regiment  5  platoon  fronts  ;  in  an  8  squadron  regiment  7  platoon  fronts  ; 


110  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

in  a  10  squadron  regiment  9  platoon  fronts.  At  tlie  close  of  the  movement,  the  distances  between 
the  regiments  in  the  general  column  will  be  four  platoon  fronts  ;  the  colonels  of  the  2d,  3d, 
and  4th  regiments  will,  therefore,  close  up  on  the  head  of  column,  by  doubling  the  gait. 

If  the  column  is  thus  formed  on  the  march,  the  1st  regiment  continues  to  move  at  the  original 
gait ;  the  others  halt. 

Each  brigade  may  be  formed  into  a  separate  column,  and  these  brigade  columns,  afterwards, 
in  one  general  column. 

PL  14,  fig.  6,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  gener.il  cos  e  column,  from  a  line  of  regimental 
columns,  by  a  change  of  direction  to  the  right  or  left,  executed  by  each  regiment.  If  the 
intervals  between  the  regiments  in  line  are  less  than  those  already  laid  down,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  increase  them  for  eight  or  ten  squadron  regiments  before  executing  the  movement.  At  the 
close  of  this  formation,  the  regiments  in  the  general  column  will  have  less  than  their  proper 
distances  ;  these  must  be  taken  upon  the  first  movement  of  the  column. 

TO   FORM   LINE   OF   COLUMNS   FROM   A   DEPLOYED   LINE. 

To  effect  this,  each  regiment  forms  close  column  by  squadron. 

If  the  same  squadron  in  each  regiment  is  taken  as  that  of  direction,  the  line  of  columns  will 
be  formed  with  full  intervals. 

If  the  line  is  to  be  formed  with  closed  intervals,  the  squadrons  of  direction  are  so  chosen,  in 
the  different  regiments,  that  no  squadron  may  be  obliged  to  pass  twice  over  the  same  ground. 

A  line  of  columns  of  attach  is  formed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

OF  MOVEMENTS  IN  COLUMN. 

Movem,enis  in  general  column. — These  are  made  in  every  direction,  according  to  the  jirinciples 
of  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

In  changing  the  direction  of  a  close  column,  by  the  head  of  column,  the  following  is  to  be 
observed:  each  regiment  will  turn  where  those  in  front  of  it  did;  the  gait  of  the  regiments  in 
rear  must  be  so  regulated  that  no  part  of  the  column  may  be  obliged  to  halt  before  the  wheel  is 
made,  and  that,  on  the  completion  of  the  wheel,  every  regiment  may  have  its  proper  distance. 

Plate  14,  fig.  T,  gives  an  example  of  the  method  of  changing  the  direction  of  a  close  column 
from  a  halt. 

In  close  column,  distances  are  taken  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  the  school  of  the 
regiment ;  e.  </.,  in  a  close  column,  consisting  of  a  brigade  of  2  six  squadron  regiments,  to  take 
distance,  by  head  of  column,  on  the  2d  squadron  of  2d  regiment;  the  2d  regiment  takes  distance 
on  its  2d  squadron,  as  laid  down  in  the  school  of  the  regiment;  the  colonel  of  the  1st  regiment 
marches  it  forward,  and  when  his  6th  squadron  is  6  times  platoon  distance  in  advance  of  the 
point  where  the  1st  squadron  of  2d  regiment  halted,  he  halts  the  6th  squadron  ;  the  others 
halting  in  succession  as  they  gain  their  distances. 

Columns  with  distance  are  closed  according  to  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

Movements  of  a  line  of  columns. — These  are  efi"ected  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
the  same  commands,  as  for  a  deployed  line. 

The  intervals  of  a  line  of  columns  are  diminished  or  extended  by  marching  each  column  along 
the  line  ;  the  principal  guides  of  the  leading  squadron  of  each  column  precede  it,  and  mark  its 
new  position. 

Plate  15,  fig.  1,  presents  an  example  of  the  manner  of  changing  the  front  of  a  line  of  columns 
with  closed  intervals. 


REPORT    OV    CAPT.    GEORGE    15.    JFCLELLAN.  Ill 


TO  FORM  LINE  FROM  COLUMN. 


General  rules. — To  form  line  from  a  right  general  column,  with  full  distance,  each  subdivision 
wheels  to  the  left ;  from  a  left  column,  they  wheel  to  the  right;  in  both  cases  the  line  is  formed 
on  the  side  of  the  guides,  and  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

To  form  line  forward  from  a  similar  column,  it  is  first  closed,  and  the  line  then  formed  as  usual 
from  closed  columns. 

A  general  close  column  may  be  formed  cither  into  line  of  columns,  or  into  a  deployed  line. 

The  formation  into  line  of  columns  may  be  eifected  either  to  the  front,  to  the  right,  or  to  the 
left.  That  to  the  front  is  effected  by  conducting  the  heads  of  the  regiments  on  the  new  line*; 
that  to  the  left,  (PL  15,  fig.  4,)  from  a  right  column,  by  a  change  of  direction  to  the  left  in 
each  regiment ;  that  to  the  right,  from  a  left  column,  by  a  change  of  direction  to  the  right  in 
each  regiment. 

To  form  a  general  close  column  into  a  deployed  line,  to  either  flank,  the  column  first  changes 
direction,  and  then  forms  line  to  the  front.  A  line  of  close  columns  may  also  be  deployed  into 
line  to  the  front,  or  either  flank ;  in  the  last  case,  the  preceding  paragraph  must  be  conformed  to. 

Informing  line  of  columns  from  general  close  column,  the  regiment  of  direction  may  either 
halt  or  move  forward.  In  both  cases  the  formation  is  executed  according  to  the  rules  given,  in 
the  school  of  the  regiment,  for  deploying  a  close  column — i.  e.,  all  the  movements  and  rules  laid 
down  for  the  squadrons  and  squadron  commanders  are  here  executed  by  the  regimental  columns 
and  the  colonels. 

The  line  on  which  the  heads  of  columns  form  is  marked  by  the  principal  guides  of  the  leading 
squadron  of  each  regiment. 

The  line  of  columns,  formed  from  general  column,  should  be  with  closed  intervals. 

PI.  15,  fig.  2,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  line  of  columns  to  the  front,  on  the  3d  regi- 
ment, which  stands  fast. 

PI.  15,  fig.  3,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  line  of  columns  to  the  front,  on  the  3d  regi- 
ment, which  advances. 

PL  15,  fig.  4,  shows  the  manner  of  forming  line  of  columns  to  the  left,  from  general  column. 

To  form  a  deployed  line  from  general  close  column,  one  squadron  is  designated  as  that  of 
direction.  In  forming  line  on  the  leading  squadron,  it  may  either  stand  fast  or  advance;  if  any 
other  squadron  is  that  of  direction,  it  will  always  be  thrown  forward.  The  column  may  be 
deployed  either  from  a  halt  or  on  the  march ;  in  the  latter  case,  the  squadron  of  direction  halts 
at  the  command  of  execution. 

PL  15,  fig.  5,  gives  an  example  of  the  manner  of  deploying  a  general  column  of  2  regiments 
on  the  6th  squadron  of  the  1st  regiment. 

PL  15,  fig.  6,  gives  an  example  of  the  deployment  of  the  same  column  on  the  2d  squadron  of 
the  2d  regiment. 

TO  DEPLOY  INTO  LINE  FROM  A  LINE  OF  COLUMNS. 

PL  15,  fig.  7,  gives  an  example  of  the  deployment  of  a  line  of  2  regimental  columns  ;  this 
will  explain  the  general  principle  of  all  such  deployments,  in  which  the  squadrons  of  direction 
always  advance  upon  the  new  line. 

A  line  of  columns  of  attack  is  deployed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 


112  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


OF  THE  FORMATION  IN  TWO  LINES. 

The  first  line  is  usually  deployed  ;  the  second  in  columns  of  attack  ;  the  first  line,  however,  is 
sometimes  also  in  columns  of  attack. 

The  distance  between  the  lines  is,  usually,  about  300  yards. 

The  second  line  is  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  because  these  columns  are  deployed  more 
rapidly  than  any  other ;  because  in  this  order  the  second  line  can  advance  through  the  first  with- 
out obstacle,  and  the  first  can  in  like  manner  retreat  through  the  second. 

The  columns  of  attack  of  the  second  line  are  placed  behind  the  corresponding  divisions  (of 
2' squadrons)  of  the  first  line;  the  centres  of  the  columns  opposite  the  middles  of  the  intervals  in 
the  divisions  of  the  first  line. 

A  general  column  is  deployed  into  (too  lines,  as  follows :  the  portions  designated  for  the  1st 
line  remain  in  the  column  until  ordered  to  deploy,  either  from  a  halt  or  in  march,  by  the  general 
commanding,  whose  order  is  repeated  by  the  commander  of  the  Ist  line  ;  thei)ortions  designated 
for  the  2d  line  are  conducted  to  the  proper  distance  to  the  rear  by  the  commander  of  that  line, 
and,  having  gained  this  distance,  at  once  deploy,  and  form  columns  of  attack  ;  if  the  deployment 
is  made  on  the  march,  the  2d  line  reduces  the  gait,  halting  if  the  original  gait  was  a  walk,  and 
then  acts  as  described  above  ;  in  any  case,  when  the  2d  line  has  formed  its  columns  of  attack,  it 
preserves  its  proper  distance  from  the  1st  line  by  doubling  or  reducing  the  gait  as  may  be 
necessary. 

ASSIGNMENT  AND  POSITION  OF  COMMANDERS. 

Each  line  .should  have  a  sjjecial  commander.  In  a  division  formed  in  two  lines  by  brigade* 
the  commanders  of  the  lines  are  the  generals  of  the  brigades  of  which  they  are  respectively 
formed  ;  if  a  brigade  is  formed  in  two  lines,  the  colonels  of  the  regiments  are  the  commanders  of 
the  lines  ;  if  each  line  is  composed  of  two  regiments  belonging  to  difi"erent  brigades,  then  the 
general  of  division  assigns  a  general  of  brigade  to  command  each  line.  In  every  case  the  position 
of  the  commander  of  each  line  is  in  conformity  with  what  has  heretofore  been  prescribed  ;  e.  g.,  if 
a  line  consists  of  two  regiments,  whether  of  the  same  brigade  or  not,  the  commander  of  that  line 
posts  himself  as  prescribed  for  a  general  of  brigade. 

The  general  of  division  is  always  with  the  1st  line. 

MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  LINES. 

All  movements  of  the  1st  line  are  made  by  signals,  or  by  the  order  of  the  general  commanding, 
repeated  by  the  commander  of  the  1st  line ;  the  movements  of  the  2d  line  are  made  by  orders  of  the 
general  commanding,  transmitted  by  an  aide  de  camp,  and  upon  the  immediate  order  of  the  com- 
mander of  the  2d  line.  Trumpet  signals  refer  only  to  the  1st  line,  and  are  not  repeated  by  the 
trumpeters  of  the  2d  line.  The  2d  line  conforms  to  all  the  general  movements  of  the  1st,  and 
preserves,  with  reference  to  it,  the  distance  at  which  it  was  originally  formed.  If  the  1st  line 
charges,  the  2d  moves  at  the  trot  out,  and  resumes  its  proper  distance  when  the  1st  halts,  or  passes 
to  a  slower  gait  from  the  charge. 

If  the  1st  line  moves  to  either  flank,  advances,  or  retreats,  the  2d  line,  formed  in  columns  o/ 
attack,  executes  the  corresponding  movements  by  platoons.  If  the  1st  line  advances  or  retreats 
by  alternate  subdivisions,  the  2d  line,  in  conforming  to  the  movement,  moves  in  one  mass  ;  e.  g., 
if  the  1st  line  advances  by  alternate  squadrons,  the  odd  squadrons  commencing  the  movement, 
the  whole  of  the  2d  line  advances  when  the  even  squadrons  of  the  1st  line  start,  and  halts  when 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M°CLELLAN.  113 

these  squadrons  arrive  abreast  of  the  halted  odd  squadrons,  and  again  advances  when  the  odd 
squadrons  start  the  second  time — for  the  distance  between  the  lines  is  measured  between  the 
nearest  parts  of  the  two  ;  if  the  1st  line  retreats  by  alternate  squadrons,  commencing  with  the 
odd  squadrons,  the  2d  line  stands  fast  until  the  even  squadrons  start,  and  moves  with  them. 

If  the  1st  line  advances  or  retreats  by  echelons  of  divisions,  the  columns  of  attack  of  the  2d 
line  move  at  the  same  time  as  their  corresponding  divisions  of  the  1st  line  ;  if  but  a  jiart  of  the 
1st  line  breaks  by  echelons,  the  other  part  remaining  m  line,  the  2d  line  conforms  to  the  movement. 

If  the  1st  line  breaks  by  echelons  on  botli  flanks,  or  by  the  centre,  the  2d  line  moves  in  line, 
with  the  rear  echelons.  If  the  1st  line  breaks  by  echelons  of  squadrons,  the  divisions  of  the  2d 
line  conform  to  tlie  movements  of  that  squadron  of  their  corresponding  divisions  of  the  1st  line 
whicli  is  nearest  them,  and  furthest  from  the  enemy. 

CHANGES  OF  FRONT. 

The  1st  line  changes  front  as  heretofore  explained. 

When  the  front  is  changed  45°,  the  division  of  direction  in  the  2d  line  is  the  one  corresponding 
to  that  of  the  1st  line.  The  directing  division  of  the  2d  line,  and  all  the  others  in  rear  of  that 
flank  of  the  1st  line  which  forms  forward,  also  form  forward ;  the  division  next  to  that  of  direction, 
on  the  side  in  rear  of  that  flank  of  the  1st  line  which  forms  to  the  rear,  will  have  its  new  position 
on  the  line  of  original  formation  of  the  2d  line,  and  at  the  point  originally  occupied  by  the  nest 
division  on  the  other  side  of  that  of  direction  ;  all  the  remaining  divisions  form  to  the  rear. 

PI.  16,  fig.  1,  shows  the  manner  of  changing  front  forward  45°,  on  the  first  division  of  the 
second  regiment  of  the  1st  line,  and  explains  what  has  just  been  said,  i.  e.,  the  first  division  of 
the  second  regiment  of  the  2d  line  is  that  of  direction,  it  and  all  the  divisions  of  the  1st  regiment 
form  forward,  the  second  division  of  the  second  regiment  occupies  the  original  position  of  the 
third  division  of  the  first  regiment,  and  the  third  division  of  the  second  regiment  forms  to  the  rear. 

PI.  16,  fig.  2,  shows  the  manner  of  changing  front  90°.  This  example  will  explain  the  general 
rule  for  changing  front  90°,  which  is  as  follows  :  in  the  second  line,  the  division  of  direction  is 
the  one  corresponding  to  that  of  the  1st  line  ;  it,  and  all  the  others  behind  that  flank  of  the  1st 
line  which  forms  forward,  form  forward  ;  the  two  next  divisions  in  rear  of  the  other  flank  of  the 
1st  line  also  form  forward  ;  the  remaining  divisions  of  the  2d  line  form  to  the  rear. 

PASSAGE  OF  THE  LINE. 

This  may  be  executed  in  three  ways  ;  (a)  by  the  2d  line  advancing  through  the  1st ;  (6)  by 
the  1st  line  retreating  through  the  2d  ;  (c)  by  the  simultaneous  movement  of  both  lines  in  oppo- 
site directions,  i.  e.,  the  1st  line  retreating,  the  2d  advancing. 

When  the  general  commanding  intends  the  2d  line  to  advance  through  the  1st,  he  sends 
orders  to  the  commander  of  the  2d  line  to  advance  ;  if  he  intends  the  1st  line  to  retreat  through 
the  2d,  he  informs  the  commander  of  the  latter  of  his  intention,  and  orders  the  1st  line  to 
retreat. 

In  the  passage  of  the  line,  both  may  be  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  or.  one  in  this  order  and 
the  other  deployed. 

It  is  a  general  rule  that  any  party  of  troops  meeting,  or  passing,  another  party,  leaves  the 
latter  on  its  left ;  therefore,  if  the  2d  line,  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  is  ordered  to  pass 
through  the  1st  line,  formed  in  like  manner,  the  columns  of  the  2d  line  pass  to  the  right  of  the 
corresponding  columns  of  the  1st  line,  as  shown  in  plate  15,  figure  9. 

If,  under  similar  circumstances,  the  1st  line  retreats  through  the  2d,  the  same  principle  is 

conformed  to. 

15  O 


114  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

(PI.  15,  fig.  8.)  If  the  2d  line,  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  is  ordered  to  pass  through, 
the  1st,  -which  is  deployed,  then  the  columns  pass  through  the  intervals  in  the  corresponding 
divisions  of  the  1st  line. 

If  both  lines,  formed  in  columns  of  attack,  meet  on  the  march,  those  advancing  move 
straight  forward,  while  those  in  retreat  oblique  to  the  right,  out  of  their  way. 

(PL  15,  fig.  8.)  When  the  2d  line,  in  columns  of  attack,  passes  through  the  1st,  which  is 
deployed,  it  is  necessary  to  increase  the  intervals  in  the  centres  of  the  divisions  of  the  1st  line; 
this  is  done  by  the  commands  of  the  division  and  squadron  commanders,  without  waiting  for 
the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  line ;  to  efi'ect  this,  the  inner  flank  platoons  of  each 
squadron  wheel  about  by  threes,  then  wheel  to  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  by  platoon,  then 
wheel  about  by  threes,  and  stand  fast  until  the  2d  line  has  passed,  on  which  the  commandants 
of  platoons  at  once  wheel  into  line. 

If  the  1st  line  is  in  retreat,  deployed,  or  in  columns  of  attack,  and  the  2d  line  is  ordered  to 
deploy  before  the  1st  has  passed  it,  then,  in  the  first  case,  (the  line  retreating  deployed,)  the 
odd  squadrons  of  the  1st  line  break  into  columns  by  platoons  right  in  front,  the  even  squadrons 
left  in  front,  and  pass  through  the  intervals  on  the  right  of  their  corresponding  squadrons  of 
the  2d  line ;  having  passed  the  line,  these  columns,  by  platoons,  oblique  towards  each  other, 
and  thus  form  columns  of  attack;  in  the  second  case,  i.  e.,  the  1st  line  retreating  in  columns  of 
attack,  these  columns  pass  through  the  intei'vals  in  the  divisions  of  the  second  line,  which  are 
increased  for  their  passage,  as  already  explained. 

When  the  columns  of  the  2d  line  have  passed  the  1st,  they  may  either  be  deployed  at  once 
or  remain  in  columns. 

If  the  advancing  2d  line  is  halted  at  less  than  300  yards  in  front  of  the  1st,  the  latter  does 
not  take  its  proper  distance  until  the  next  movement,  unless  it  receives  special  orders  to  the 
contrary. 

If  the  advancing  2d  line  is  not  halted  at  300  paces  from  the  1st,  but  continues  to  advance, 
the  latter  follows  the  movements  of  the  former  at  the  jn-escribed  distance. 

When  the  2d  line  passes  the  Ist,  which  is  deployed,  the  latter  at  once  forms  into  columns  of 
attack,  without  awaiting  the  orders  of  the  general  commanding  in  chief. 

The  tactics  give,  in  detail,  the  order  of  march,  in  review,  for  a  corps  of  cavalry,  with  its 
artillery. 

ORDEES  OF  BATTLE,  AND  GENERAL  COLUMNS. 

ORDERS  OF  BATTLE — GENERAL  RULES. 

To  explain  the  orders  of  battle,  the  case  taken  is  that  of  a  division  of  cavalry,  with  its 
artillery. 

By  the  order  of  battle  of  a  division  of  cavalry,  is  meant  such  a  distribution  of  its  parts  that 
the  division  can  act'  promptly  against  the  enemy. 

In  the  order  of  battle  the  regiments  are  placed  in  two,  three,  or  more  lines.  The 
distribution  of  the  troops  in  lines,  and  the  formation  of  each  line,  depends  upon  the  purpose  of 
each  order  of  battle. 

The  1st  line  is  usually  deployed,  and  is  called  the  line  of  battle ;  the  troops  of  the  2d  and  3d 
lines  are  formed  in  columns,  and,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  columns,  constitute  either 
supports  or  reserves ;  e.  (/.,  if  a  line  is  of  columns  of  attack,  the  troops  thus  formed  are  supports, 
but  if  the  formation  is  in  close  columns  of  regiments  by  squadrons  they  constitute  reserves. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    jrCLELLAN.  115 

The  distance  between  the  lines  is  usually  about  300  yards. 

The  second  line  is  intended  as  a  support  for  the  first,  in  case  of  necessity  ;  it  should,  therefore, 
be  formed  in  the  order  most  suitable  for  this  purpose.  In  conformity  with  this,  it  is  formed  in 
columns  of  attack  ;  for  these  can  be  deployed  more  rapidly  than  any  other  column,  and  allow 
an  easy  passage  of  the  line. 

The  purpose  of  the  third  line  is  to  support  the  other  two,  and  also  to  operate  wherever  its 
presence  may  be  necessary.  To  fulfil  this  object  it  is  posted  behind  the  centre  of  the  other 
lines,  and  is  formed  in  close  columns  by  squadrons.  It  is  placed  behind  the  centre  because  that 
position  is  about  equally  distant  from  the  points  where  it  will  most  probably  be  required,  i.  e., 
the  flanks  and  centre  ;  it  is  formed  in  close  columns  by  squadrons,  because  in  that  order  the 
troojis  are  more  concentrated  than  in  any  other,  and  can,  therefore,  be  conveniently  moved 
wherever  required,  and  can  also,  without  any  inconvenience,  be  divided  and  detached,  as 
circumstances  may  render  necessary. 

EXPLANATION  OF  THE  ORDERS  OF  BATTLE. 

Divisions  may  form  in  iJu'ee  orders  of  battle  and  one  order  of  reserve. 

The  first  order  of  battle. — This  is  employed  when  the  division  is  isolated,  and  does  not  intend 
engaging  in  a  serious  aifair  with  the  enemy  ;  therefore,  in  this  case  a  considerable  j^ortion  of  its 
force  is  in  reserve.  The  general  formation  in  this  order  of  battle  is  :  one  line  of  battle,  one  line 
of  supports,  and  one  line  of  reserves. 

PL  17,  fig.  2,  shows  the  peculiarity  of  the  formation  of  a  division  of  ten  squadron  regiments. 

PI.  16,  figs.  3,  4,  and  5  ;  PI.  17,  figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  will  indicate  with  sufiicient  clearness  the 
formation  of  the  diflerent  kinds  of  divisions  of  Kussian  cavalry. 

It  is  only  necessary  to  remark  that  eight  pieces  constitute  a  battery  ;  that  when  a  half  battery 
is  in  reserve  it  is  formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre,  by  sections  ;  a  battery  in  reserve  is 
formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre,  by  half  battery  ;  when  two  batteries  are  in  reserve,  each 
is  formed  as  just  described  for  a  single  battery. 

The  skirmishers  represented  in  the  plates  are  furnished  by  the  flanker,  or  lancer,  squadrons 
of  the  regiment  in  the  first  line,  except  those  of  the  division  of  light  cavalry  of  the  guard,  which 
are  furnished  by  a  regiment  (two  squadrons)  of  Cossacks. 

The  second  order  of  battle. — This  is  employed  when  the  division  is  supported  by  other  troops, 
and  sliould  present  an  extended  front  to  the  enemy. 

Divisions  composed  of  six  and  eight  squadron  regiments  are  formed  in  two  lines  :  the  first 
consists  of  two  regiments  deployed  ;  the  second  of  the  remaining  regiments  in  columns  of  attack  ; 
there  is  no  line  of  reserves. 

PI.  18,  fig.  1,  shows  the  peculiar  formation  of  dragoon  divisions  in  this  order  of  battle. 

PI.  17,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  7  ;  PI.  18,  fig.  2,  give  all  necessary  information  as  to  the  formation  of 
the  other  kinds  of  divisions. 

The  third  order  of  battle. — This  is  established  for  the  case  when  a  division  is  to  make  a  very 
energetic  attack.  In  this  case  the  division  is  formed  in  four  lines  ;  in  the  first  line,  one  regi- 
ment deployed,  with  artillery  on  both  flanks  ;  in  each  of  the  other  lines  one  regiment  in  columns 
of  attack. 

PL  18,  figs.  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8  give  the  necessary  details. 

PL  18,  fig.  4,  shows  one  exception  to  the  rule  in  the  case  of  a  division  of  but  three  full  regi- 
ments and  one  Cossack  regiment  o  squadrons. 


llfi  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

PI.  18,  fig.  7,  sliow.s  an  exception  in  the  case  of  a  division  often  squadron  regiments,  in  which 
each  line  is  composed  of  parts  of  two  different  regiments. 

The  orcZer  q/" reserve  serves  to  concentrate  the  troops.  It  presents  the  following  advantages  : 
from  it  the  troops  can  pass  in  the  shortest  time  to  any  of  the  orders  of  battle  ;  tliey  can  be  most 
rapidly  formed  into  one  or  several  columns  ;  any  portion  of  the  division  can  be  detached  without 
disturbing  the  general  arrangement.  In  this  order  the  division  is  arranged  in  two  lines  of  close 
columns  by  squadrons,  the  senior  regiment  of  each  brigade  on  the  right.  PI.  19,  figs.  1,  2,  3, 
.4,  5,  6,  gives  the  details.  The  batteries  are  formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre  by  half 
batteries.  If  the  general  commanding  deems  proper,  he  may  place  the  artillery  of  each  brigade 
in  the  intervals  between  the  regiments,  increasing,  for  this  purpose,  the  usual  interval  of  fifty 
paces  to  such  an  extent  that  there  may  be  an  interval  of  twenty  paces  between  each  flank  of  the 
artillery  and  the  adjacent  regiment ;  in  this  case,  when  the  division  is  at  a  halt  the  chief?  of 
pieces  of  the  leading  half  batteries  align  themselves  on  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  squadrons  ; 
on  the  march  they  align  themselves  on  the  file-closers  of  the  leading  squadrons. 

GENEKAL  COLUMNS. 

These  are  columns  in  which  all  parts  of  the  division  are  so  arranged  that  it  can  easily  pass  to 
one  of  the  orders  of  battle. 

A  division  of  cavalry  may  be  formed  in  one  or  two  general  columns.  This  formation  is 
employed  for  taking  up  a  position  preparatory  to  action,  or  when  in  route;  therefore  such 
columns  are  called,  respectively,  offensive  columns  and  marching  cohimns. 

For  movements  to  a  flank,  and  turning  movements,  the  formation  in  two  columns  is  used ; 
these  are  called,  respectively,  flanh  and  turning  columns.  General  columns  having  the  senior 
regiment  in  front  are  right  columns,  those  having  the  junior  regiment  in  front  are  left  columns, 
whether  each  regiment  be  right  or  left  in  front. 

In  the  formation  of  a  division  into  columns,  the  general  rule  is  that  the  odd  numbered  regi- 
ments are  left  in  front ;  the  even,  right  in  front.  The  commander  may  place  the  regiments  and 
brigades  in  the  columns  as  he  judges  best,  without  regard  to  the  general  rule. 

PI.  19,  figs.  7,  8,  9,  shows  the  arrangement  of  the  regiments  of  a  division,  in  one  or  two 
columns. 

In  marching  columns,  the  regiments  move  by  platoons,  breaking  by  sixes,  or  threes,  when  a 
decrease  in  the  width  of  the  road  renders  it  necessary. 

For  movements  in  retreat,  the  j)arts  of  the  division  are  arranged  in  tlie  columns  as  for  an 
advance,  but  in  inverse  order. 

If  a  flank  movement  is  to  be  made  in  sight  of  the  enemy,  or  at  but  a  short  distance  from  him, 
each  line  forms  a  separate  column,  marching  by  platoons  or  threes,  so  as  to  avoid  all  shifting  of 
parts,  and  to  be  able  to  form  rapidly  into  order  of  battle;  during  the  flank  march,  the  artillery 
should  march  100  paces  within  the  1st  line  of  the  cavalry ;  therefore,  if  the  batteries  were  in 
position  at  the  beginning  of  the  movement,  they  limber  to  the  rear,  and  follow  the  movement 
as  here  prescribed. 

Although,  in  plate  19,  the  artillery  is  represented  as  being  in  the  centre  of  the  brigades,  it 
may  be  concentrated  at  the  centre  of  the  division. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  117 


RULES  FOR  FORMING  IN  ORDER  OF  BATfTLE. 


General  rules. — The  employment  of  the  different  orders  of  battle,  and  their  adaptation  to  the 
ground  and  circumstances,  depends  entirely  upon  the  generals  of  division,  unless  it  is  specified 
in  the  instructions  for  the  corps  exactly  how  each  division  is  to  form. 

In  all  cases  the  generals  of  division  arc  allowed  to  make  the  partial  changes  rendered  neces- 
sary by  the  ground;  besides  which,  a  principal  object  is  the  choice  of  the  most  advantageous 
position  for  the  artillery,  as  its  success  depends  upon  this  choice.  It  is  a  general  rule  for  the 
orders  of  battle,  that  the  junior  brigades  and  regiments  of  cavalry,  and  divisions  and  batteries 
of  artillery,  should  be  in  front ;  an  exception  to  this  rule  is  made  in  the  case  of  batteries  of 
position,  as  they  are  always  placed  in  the  first  line,  the  light  batteries  being  in  reserve.  When 
the  artillery  is  posted  on  the  flanks  of  the  line,  the  heavy  batteries  are  on  the  right  flank,  the 
light  on  the  left.  As  circumstances  may  render  it  necessary  to  employ  one  part  of  a  division 
instead  of  another,  changes  may  be  made  in  the  foregoing  rules  ;  but  it  is  required  that  the 
regiments  composing  a  brigade  be  kept  together,  unless  it  is  absolutely  impossible  to  avoid 
separating  them.  Thus,  in  the  1st  order  of  battle,  if  the  2d  regiment  is  in  the  1st  line,  the  1st 
regiment  should  be  in  the  2d  line,  and  the  3d  and  4th  in  reserve. 

In  the  2d  order  of  battle,  it  may  be  permitted  to  compose  the  right  wings  of  both  lines  of  one 
brigade,  and  the  left  wings  of  the  other  brigade. 

A  division  forms  into  order  of  battle  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  who  designates  as  the 
directing  subdivision  either  one  of  the  squadrons  of  the  1st  line,  or  the  artillery,  according  to 
the  ground  and  circumstances.  The  subdivision  of  direction  is  taken,  in  preference,  nearest  the 
new  position  of  the  troops. 

In  forming  into  order  of  battle  from  column,  or  in  passing  from  one  order  of  battle  to  another, 
the  shortest  road  should  always  be  taken ;  never  using,  however,  the  individual  oblique  march, 
which  should  never  be  employed  for  more  than  one  or  two  squadrons ;  the  artillery  may  oblique. 
The  preparatory  formations,  and  the  movements  themselves,  are  made  by  brigade,  or  by  regi- 
ment, according  to  circumstances. 

In  all  the  general  formations  there  should  be  an  interval  of  20  paces  between  the  extreme 
pieces  of  artillery  and  the  flanks  of  the  nearest  squadrons;  the  interval  between  the  pieces 
themselves  is  :  in  light  batteries,  20  paces;  in  heavy  batteries,  25  paces.  If  there  is  no  artillery 
on  the  flanks  of  the  1st  line,  the  flanker,  or  lancer,  squadrons  of  this  line  are  not  aligned  upon 
the  rest  of  the  line,  but  are  in  rear  of  its  flanks,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  regiment. 

Batteries,  in  front  of  the  1st  line  of  cavalry,  are  always  aligned  upon  the  pa-incipal  reserves 
of  the  skirmishers ;  if  there  are  no  skirmishers  thrown  forward,  or  if  they  are  recalled,  and  the 
cavalry  does  not  close  up  on  the  batteries,  the  latter  fall  back  somewhat,  and  take  post  at  from 
100  to  120  paces  in  front  of  the  1st  line. 

The  distance  between  unlimbered  batteries  and  the  1st  line  is  always  measured  from  the  line 
of  pieces  to  the  front  rank  of  the  1st  line. 

Artillery  in  reserve  is  always  placed  in  rear  of  the  cavalry  reserve. 

The  tactics  then  proceed  to  describe  the  different  methods  of  passing  to  the  orders  of  battle 
from  column ;  of  passing  from  one  order  of  battle  to  another  ;  of  forming  general  column  from 
the  orders  of  battle.  It  then  gives  the  application  of  the  principles  of  the  evolutions  of  the 
line  to  the  orders  of  battle,  under  the  following  heads :  advance  in  order  of  battle ;  retreat  in 
order  of  battle ;  changes  of  front :  passage  of  the  line ;  the  duties  of  skirmishers ;  of  giving  the 


23^3  ■  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

commands.  In  all  these  cases  the  movements  of  the  batteries  are  fully  described.  There  is,  in 
addition,  a  supplement,  giving  the  position  of  the  artillery  in  the  different  formations  of  a  corps 
of  cavalry. 

END  OF  THE  TACTICS. 

The  cavalry  signals  are  numerous,  and  published  in  a  separate  volume. 


CHAPTER  III. 


EQUIPMENT,  ARMS,  STABLES,  HOKSES,  ETC.,  OF  Kl'SSIAN  CAVAIRT. 

HOKSE  EQUIPIVIENTS. 

All  the  regular  cavalry  use  the  Hungarian  saddle  ;  this  will  be  fully  described  when  treating 
of  the  Austrian  cavalry,  and  it  is  necessary  to  mention  here  only  that  the  tree  is  of  wood,  not 
covered,  the  seat  formed  by  a  leather  strap  about  4  inches  wide,  nailed  to  the  forks,  and  secured 
to  the  side  boards  by  leather  thongs. 

Light  steel  stirrups  are  used,  the  leathers  passing  through  mortices  in  the  side  boards. 

The  cuirassiers  use  a  swivel  stirrup,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  sketch  ;  it  is 
spoken  of  as  a  good  one.  Crupper  and  breast  straps  of  black  leather.  Girth  of 
leather,  and  fastened  by  three  small  buckles  ;  it  passes  over  the  tree  and  is 
secured  to  the  side  boards  by  leather  thongs.  Two  leather  pouches  are  attached 
to  the  tree.  Saddle  blanket  of  stout  felt  cloth  ;  four  thicknesses  are  generally 
used,  with  a  layer  of  thin  black  leather  on  top,  the  whole  secured  in  form  by 
leather  thongs  passed  through  and  through  ;  if  the  horse  falls  oif  in  condition, 
additional  thicknesses  of  felt  are  used,  and  vice  versa.  The  shoe  pouches  are 
pockets  sewed  on  to  the  leather  cover  of  the  saddle  blanket. 

This  felt  saddle  blanket  is  regarded  by  the  Eussian  officers  as  the  best  possible  arrangement. 

A  small  blanket  is  placed,  folded,  on  the  tree,  under  the  schabraque.     The  schabraque  is  of 

thick  woolen  cloth,  lined  with  coarse  linen.     Surcingle  of  leather,  and  fastens  by  means  of  ring 

and  thong,  in  the  fashion  of  a  Mexican  girth.     Valise  of  cloth,  not  materially  different  from  our 

own.     Forage  bag  of  coarse  white  linen,  open  in  the  middle. 

Bridle  and  hits. — By  all  the  regular  cavalry  a  curb  and  snaffle  are 
used,  both  of  steel.  There  are  three  marked  peculiarities  in  the 
curb  bit :  it  hooks  to  a  ring  at  the  end  of  the  cheek  strap,  as  showr. 
in  the  annexed  sketch ;  the  rings  are  attached  to  the  branches  by 
means  of  swivels  ;  the  branches  are  reversed,  that  is,  their  convexity 
is  turned  towards  the  front. 

With  regard  to  the  manner  of  fastening  the  bit  to  the  head  stall, 
it  will  be  perceived  from  the  sketch  that  the  little  ring  which  is 
passed  through  the  end  of  the  hook  of  the  branch,  and  rests  against 
the  flat  side  of  the  latter,  effectually  prevents  the  bit  becoming 
unhooked,  unless  the  ring  is  raised  by  the  finger. 

The  snaffle  bit,  a  plain  one  without  horns,  is  fastened  to  the  head 
stall  by  a  chain  and  toggle,  like  the  centering  bits  in  the  United 
States  service.  This  arrangement  of  the  curb  and  snaffle  permits 
the  men  to  feed  their  horses  during  short  halts  without  incon- 
venience; the  Eussian  cavalry  officers  represent  it  as  being  everything  that  can  be  desired.  The 
curb  chain  is  of  steel,  and  very  heavy.  There  are  three  patterns  of  the  curb  used,  of  different 
degrees  of  severity. 


120  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPK. 

The  head  stall  and  reins  are  of  black  leather  ;  no  martingale.  Crown  piece  single,  and  has 
a  spare  curh  chain  on  top  of  it.  Cheek  pieces  huckle  to  the  crown  piece,  on  each  side,  by  one 
buckle.  Each  cheek  piece  is  a  single  strap,  split  at  bottom  to  receive  the  rings  by  means  of 
which  the  bits  are  attached. 

The  nose  band  passes  through  loops  on  the  cheek  pieces. 

Two  plaited  cords  of  black  leather  run  diagonally  across  the  horse's  face,  from  the  brow  band 
to  the  nose  band;  there  is  a  leather  rosette  at  their  intersection. 

There  is  nothing  peculiar  about  the  halter ;  by  attaching  the  snaffle  bit  and  reins  it  becomes 
a  watering  bridle ;  halter  rope  9  feet  long  and  half  an  inch  in  diameter. 

Forage  cord,  for  use  when  sent  foraging,  half  an  inch  in  diameter.  Currycomb  and  brushes 
large  and  coarse  ;  brushes  have  the  back  and  edges  covered  with  black  leather.  Mane  combs  of 
metal  and  of  horn. 

Spurs  of  steel,  and  permanently  screwed  to  the  heel  of  the  boot. 

Lancers  have  a  lance  boot  attached  to  each  stirrup. 

The  Cossack  saddle  has  a  thick  padding  under  the  side  boards  and  on  seat ;  it  places  the  man 
very  high  on  his  horse,  so  that  his  feet  are  always  above  the  bottom  of  the  belly. 

Their  bridle  has  but  the  simple  snafHe  bit,  no  curb  nor  martingale. 

The  Cossacks  of  the  guard  have  spurs  ;  the  others  have  whips,  slung  to  the  wrist,  instead  of 
spurs. 

The  Mussulmen  cavalry  make  use  of  the  well  known  oriental  horse  equipment. 

SADDLING   AND   PACKING. 

The  tree  being  girthed  tight,  the  pouches  are  filled ;  in  these  are  j^laced  the  hatchet,  curry- 
comb, brush,  mane  comb,  and  other  cleaning  utensils,  with  various  small  articles.  The  over- 
coat is  then  rolled  into  a  long,  thin  roll,  and  strajiped  to  the  tree  over  the  pouches  ;  the  roll  falls 
down  on  each  side,  and  is  of  such  a  length  as  to  be  just  covered  by  the  schabraque.  If  the 
uniform  coat  is  to  be  carried  on  the  saddle,  it  is  placed  as  described  for  the  overcoat. 

The  small  blanket  is  then  folded  and  placed  on  the  tree. 

The  schabraque  is  put  on  and  secured. 

The  valise,  containing  shaving  utensils,  soap,  and  under  clothes,  is  now  strapped  tightly  to 
the  cantle,  over  the  schabraque. 

The  forage  bag,  containing  habitually  three  days'  rations,  is  strapped  to  the  cantle,  over  the 
valise,  and  lays  on  the  schabraque,  falling  down  on  each  side  between  the  valise  and  saddle. 
The  stable  frock  is  carried  either  with  the  forage  bag  or  overcoat. 

The  hay,  made  up  in  elliptical  rings  by  hay  ropes,  is  strapped  to  the  cantle,  and  lays  on  the 
schabraque  behind  the  man's  leg. 

The  forage  cord  and  halter  are  attached  to  the  rear  of  the  side  boards,  under  the  schabraque. 

Spare  boots  are  carried  on  top  of  the  valise,  under  the  flap,  heels  outward.  The  camp  kettle 
fits  on  the  end  of  the  valise,  and  is  secured  there  by  straps.  One  man  of  every  three  carries  a 
copper  camp  kettle  as  above  ;  every  man  a  small  hatchet ;  one  man  in  every  platoon  carries  a 
spade,  slung  to  the  pommel,  the  blade  in  a  leather  case. 

AKMS  AND  ACCOUTREMENTS. 

Cuirassiers. — Steel  helmet,  breast,  and  back  pieces ;  these  are  in  some  regiments  of  bright 
steel,  in  others  gilt,  in  others  painted  black. 


REPORT    OF    CAPr.    GKORGE    B.    jrCLELLAN.  121 

Sabre,  (pallascli,)  a  straight,  flat,  double-edged  blade,  39  inches  long ;  it  is  the  sabre  described 
in  Thiroux,  pp.  146 — 148,  as  the  model  of  "L'au  XI  et  XII;"  steel  scabbard  ;  guard  of  brass, 
and  of  the  basket  form. 

Sabre  knot,  a  flat  strap  of  brown  leather. 

Sabre  belt,  of  white  leather  waist  belt,  with  slings  ;  plate  hooks,  like  those  of  United  States 
officers,  and  is  worn  under  the  cuirass. 

Each  man  has  one  pistol,  with  percussion  lock  ;  a  cord  is  attached  to  a  ring  in  the  butt,  and 
passes  around  the  neck  ;  the  jpistol  is  carried  in  a  holster  on  tJie  ivaist  belt ;  this  rule  is  general 
for  all  the  cavalry. 

In  each  platoon  are  four  men  wlio  act,  when  necessary,  as  skirmishers  ;  thej  are  armed  with 
rifled  carbines,  the  barrels  of  which  are  about  fifteen  inches  long  ;  the  carbine  sling  is  like  that 
in  use  in  the  United  States  service,  and  is  worn  very  short ;  the  rammer  is  attached  to  the  sling. 

A  cartridge  box,  holding  twenty  rounds,  is  slung  over  the  left  shoulder  ;  the  box  is  attached 
to  the  belt  by  swivels  ;  cap  pouch  on  cartridge-box  belt  on  the  breast.  The  front  rank  men  are 
armed  with  lances  lOi  feet  long  ;  pennons  on  the  lances. 

Lancers. — Lance  10|  feet  long ;  pennons  of  same  color  as  facings  of  the  uniform  ;  sling  of 
leather  ;  point  of  lance  seven  inches  long  ;  a  lance  boot  attached  to  each  stirrup. 

The  sabre  is  three  feet  long  in  the  blade  ;  a  little  less  curved,  and  rather  broader  and  thinner 
than  the  United  States  light  artillery  sabre  ;  scabbard  of  steel ;  guard  with  but  one  branch,  and 
of  steel. 

Sabre  knot  as  for  cuirassiers.  Sabre  belt  of  brown  leather,  and  worn  under'  the  coat.  Each 
man  has  one  pistol,  as  for  cuirassiers.  Four  men  in  each  platoon  carry  rifled  carbines,  with  a 
longer  barrel  than  that  of  the  cuirassiers  ;  these  men  have  no  lances. 

Cartridge-box  as  for  cuirassiers.  , 

Hussars. — Sabre,  sabre  belt,  pistol,  and  cartridge-box,  as  for  lancers.  Four  men  in  each 
platoon  carry  a  rifled  carbine,  the  rest  a  smooth  bore  carbine  ;  the  carbine  is  always  carried  on 
the  sling,  there  being  no  carbine  boot.     Hussars  have  a  sabretasch. 

Dragoons. — Each  man  of  the  first  eight  sq[uadrons  armed  with  sabre  and  musket ;  the  9th 
and  10th  squadrons  armed  as  lancers. 

In  the  first  eight  squadrons  the  arms,  &c. ,  are  as  follows : 

Sabre  blade  and  hilt  as  for  hus.sars. 

The  annexed  sketch  shows  the  peculiar  arrangement  of  the  scabbard  and  belt ;  the  scabbard 
being  of  leather,  tipped  with  brass,  the  rings  on  the  convex  edge  ;  bayonet  scabbard  attached  to 
flat  side  of  the  sabre  scabbard,  by  brass  bands  ;  the  belt,  a  Circassian  shoulder  belt,  without 
waist  belt,  and  of  such  a  length  that  when  the  sabre  is  drawn  the  top  of  the  scabbard  is  just 
under  the  left  elbow  ;  when  the  sabre  is  in  the  scabbard  the  hilt  is  between  the  elbow  and  the 
body. 


Smooth  bore  musket,  with  the  ordinary  bayonet ;  the  piece  about  four  inches  shorter  than  the 
United  States  musket,  and  somewhat  lighter ;  it  has  a  common  musket  sling.     It  is  usually 
16  © 


122  MILITARY    COMMI.SSION    TO    EUROPE. 

carried  in  a  water-proof  gnu  case,  with  a  separate  sling,  over  the  right  shonhler,  mnzzle  up, 
barrel  against  the  back ;  this  case  opens  by  a  slit  under  the  stock,  which  is  closed  by  straps  and 
buckles;  the  butt  end  is  sewed  up.    Cartridge-box  carried  as  for  hussars, but  contains  40  rounds. 

The  sergeants  alone  carry  pistols. 

Cossacks  of  the  guard. — Sabre  and  scabbard  like  those  of  the  dragoons,  except  that  there  is  no 
giiard,  and  no  bayonet  scabbard.  Sabre  belt  like  that  of  hussars.  Musket  like  that  of  dragoons, 
but  no  bayonet.  Cartridge-box  like  that  of  dragoons.  Lance  lOA  feet  long,  witliout  pennon  ; 
instead  of  having  a  lance  bucket  attached  to  the  stirrup,  a  leather  strap  is  fastened  to  the  butt 
of  tlie  lance,  and  the  foot  run  through  the  loop  before  placing  it  in  the  stirruii.  Each  man  also 
carries  a  pistol  on  his  waist  belt. 

Cossacks  of  the  line  of  the  Caucasus. — Sabre  and  scabbard  as  for  the  Cossacks  of  the  guard  ; 
sabre  belt  like  that  of  the  dragoons.  A  long  musket  slung  over  the  shoulder  ;  cartridge  box  as 
for  Cossacks  of  the  guard ;  pipes  for  ten  or  twelve  cartridges  sewed  on  the  breast  of  the  coat. 
Two  or  more  i^istols,  on  waist  belt,  and  in  holsters.     A  long,  broad  poniard.     No  lances. 

Tscherkesses. — Armed  as  Cossacks  of  the  line  of  the  Caucasus.  The  ofBcers  carry  bows  and 
arrows,  to  enable  them  to  cut  off  sentinels  without  creating  an  alarm. 

Other  Cossacks. — Usually  armed  with  lance,  sabre,  and  pistol.  About  ten  men  in  every 
squadron  carry  muskets  ;  in  some  cases  all  the  men  have  muskets. 

Mussulmen  of  the  guard. — Armed  in  the  oriental  style. 

All  the  irregular  cavalry  carry  their  arms  very  close  to  the  body,  and  so  arranged  as  to  make 
the  least  possible  noise. 

Mounted  gendarmes.- — Sabre  and  belt  like  those  of  hussars.  Dragoon  musket ;  bayonet  scab- 
bard on  the  waist  belt ;  cartridge  box  on  a  shoulder  belt.  Pistol  carried  either  on  the  saddle  or 
waist  Jjelt. 

Officers  wear  a  sabre  similar  to  that  of  their  men. 

HORSES,  AND  THE  MANNER  OF  PURCHASING  THEM. 

In  each  regiment  of  cavalry,  and  battery  of  artillery,  the  horses  are  all  of  the  same  color. 

The  Russian  cavalry  is,  probably,  the  best  mounted  in  Europe,  certainly  the  best  on  the  con- 
tinent. The  English  heavy  cavalry  horses  may  be  somewhat  better,  but  they  have  nothing  for 
light  cavalry  to  compare  with  the  mass  of  the  Russian  animals  for  that  purpose.  The  heavy 
cavalry  horses  are  mostly  purchased  in  the  provinces  of  Tamboff  and  Woronege,  at  an  average 
price  of  $90  each. 

The  light  cavalry  horses  are  obtained  from  the  Ukraine  and  the  Steppes,  at  an  average  price 
of  $45. 

The  artillery  horses  are  bought  in  all  parts  of  the  empire,  at  about  the  same  rate  as  those  for 
the  light  cavalry. 

There  are  no  slaras  (breeding  studs)  for  the  general  service  of  the  army.  There  is  a  commis- 
sion charged  witli  the  general  direction  of  the  purchase,  inspection,  and  distribution  of  remount 
horses. 

They,  if  necessary,  establish  sub-commissions,  in  convenient  localities.  The  horses  are  piir- 
chased  by  cavalry  officers  detailed  for  the  purpose,  and  are  then,  if  practicable,  inspected  by  the 
commission,  or  one  of  the  sub-commissions.  Having  passed  the  inspection,  they  are  distributed 
among  the  regiments,  at  the  rate,  in  time  of  peace,  of  about  150  per  regiment  each  year.  The 
colonel  of  the  regitaent  then  distributes  them  among  the  squadrons,  where  they  are  broken  in 


KEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  123 

and  drilled  by  tlie  old  soldiers,  under  the  direction  of  the  ca^jtain  commanding.  The  Eussians 
have  nothing  corresponding  to  the  "captain  instructor"  of  the  French  service. 

Horses  are  purchased  at  the  age  of  from  three  to  five  years  ;  those  purchased  at  three  years 
old  are  not  used  for  a  year  or  more. 

About  eight  years'  service  is  expected  of  a  horse. 

Eemount  horses  enter  the  squadron  at  from  four  months  to  one  year  from  the  commencement 
of  their  drilling  ;  depending  upon  the  age  of  the  animal,  his  disposition,  &c. 

Mares  are  preferred  as  a  general  rule,  but  geldings  and  stallions  are  also  used;  and  it  is  stated 
that  no  particular  inconvenience  is  found  to  result  from  the  employment  of  stallions. 

The  horses  being  once  assigned,  always  remain  with  the  same  men.  Officers  purchase  their 
own  horses,  and  are  allowed  forage,  or  a  commutation  therefor. 

EIDING  HOUSES. 

These  are  numerous,  large,  and  well  constructed. 

The  windows  are  usually  arranged  as  in  the  French ;  Eussian  stoves  are  freely  used  for 
warming  them. 

The  floor  is  of  earth  and  sand.  There  is  a  wooden  wainscot  lining,  about  six  feet  high,  and 
havinsc  an  inclination  of  about  ?  ;  the  corners  not  rounded  oif. 

The  riding  house  of  the  chevalier  guard,  in  St.  Petersburg,  is  300'  long,  95'  wide,  and  25' 
ceiling.  One  near  the  Paul  palace  is  595' long,  126' wide,  and  25' ceiling.  The  great  riding 
house  at  Moscow  is  much  larger.  The  two  latter  are  used  for  drills  and  inspections  during  the 
winter.     There  are  no  pillars  in  any  of  these. 

STABLES,  &c. 

There  is  nothing  remarkable  in  the  Eussian  stables.  The  floors  are  generally  of  plank,  a  little 
straw  being  kept  under- the  horses  fore  feet  during  the  day  ;  in  some  stables  the  floor  is  of  clay. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  simple  swinging  bar  is  used  to  separate  the  stalls  ;  sometimes  there  is 
no  division  whatever  ;  for  wicked  stallions  the  stalls  are  boarded  up. 

In  many  cases  they  use  no  hay  rack ;  merely  a  long  wooden  trough,  one  end  of  which  is 
divided  off  for  the  oats. 

In  some  cases  they  use  wooden  or  iron  racks  and  mangers. 

In  some  stables  a  bin  is  arranged  for  the  litter,  under  the  manger  ;  in  others  it  is  kept  in  the 
stable  yard,  under  cover. 

The  saddles,  bridles,  and  other  equipments,  are  usually  kept  in  the  stables  ;  the  bridles  being 
hung  on  pins  attached  to  the  stall  posts;  the  saddles,  blanket,  &c.,  on  a  shelf  extending 
between  the  heel  posts. 

Some  of  their  stalls  are  six  feet  wide  ;  as  a  general  rule  they  are  quite  large.  The  stables  are 
well  ventilated,  and  kept  in  good  order. 

In  some  stables  the  quarters  for  the  men  are  in  the  2d  story,  over  the  stables. 

The   horse   hospitals   are   usually   in   separate  buildings,  with   separate  box  stalls,  (about 
9'  X  T',)  boilers  for  making  mashes,  &c. 
.  The  horses  are  cleaned  twice  a  day,  watered  twice  or  thrice,  and  fed  three  times. 

The  daily  ration  for  a  light  cavalry  horse  is  9  pounds  of  hay,  11  quarts  (13f  pounds)  of  oats, 
3  pounds  of  straw.  The  heavy  cavalry  horses  receive  2  quarts  of  oats  more  than  the  light 
cavalry. 


1-4  MILITARY    COMJUSSION    TO    EUKOPE. 

The  hay  is  generally  chopped  before  being  fed  to  the  horses. 

The  ration  is  increased  with  the  difficulty  of  the  service ;  the  above  being  a  minimum  for 
easy  garrison  service. 

The  liorses  are  shod  in  each  squadron  by  its  shoeing  smith. 

Tliere  in  nothing  peculiar  in  the  shoes,  wliich  are  light,  but  strong,  and  with  small  heels. 

FIELD    SERVICE. 

In  the  field  each  horse  carries,  habitually,  3  days  rations  of  oats  and  hay.  The  animals  are 
sometimes  tied  by  the  halter  to  a  j^icket  rope,  or  a  picket  stake,  and  sometimes  fastened  by  the 
right  fore  foot  to  a  picket  rope  on  the  ground. 

When  picket  pins  are  used  they  are  cut  by  the  men  on  the  spot,  or  carried  along  if  it  is 
expected  to  encamp  in  a  place  destitute  of  timber.     The  Cossacks  hobble  their  horses. 

The  Russian  cavalry  do  not  spare  their  horses  at  drill,  or  on  the  march,  but  bestow  all 
possible  pains  upon  them  in  the  stable,  or  in  camp.  In  bivouac,  or  in  camp,  they  are  clothed 
with  the  saddle  blanket  if  the  weather  is  bad  and  cold. 

The  habitual  gait  on  the  march  is  the  walk,  of  about  3^  miles  per  hour;  sometimes  the  trot  is 
used ;  every  hour  or  so  a  halt  of  a  few  minutes  is  made,  -after  which  the  men  lead  the  horses  for 
about  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  An  ordinary  march  is  from  16  to  26  miles  a  day,  depending 
on  the  nature  of  the  country. 

The  Cossacks  regard  a  march  of  45  miles  as  nothing  extraordinary. 

After  drill  the  horses  are  walked  until"  they  are  cool. 

They  are  never  unsaddled  until  quite  cool. 

At  squad  drills,  in  warm  weather,  some  men  are  present  with  buckets  of  water  and  sponges 
to  wash  out  the  horses  mouths  occasionally. 

In  the  translation  of  the  regulations  for  field  service  iu  time  of  peace  and  in  time  of  war  will 
be  found  much  information  in  regard  to  these  subjects.  In  the  field,  the  cavalry  carry  1  day's 
rations  in  a  haversack. 

REMARKS   UPON   COSSACKS,    DRAGOONS,    LANCERS,    ETC. 

There  are  two  peculiarities  which  cannot  fail  to  arrest  the  attention  and  command  the  reflec- 
tion of  the  observer  of  the  Eussian  cavalry ;  these  are  :  the  general  division  of  the  cavalry  into 
regulars  and  irregulars ;  and  the  corps  of  dragoons. 

The  irregulars  may  be  comprehended  in  the  general  name  of  Cossacks.  Yet  their  pecu- 
liarities of  armament,  costume,  and  action  are  as  varied  as  their  origin ;  while  the  sources  of 
the  latter  arc  as  multifarious  as  the  tribes  which  compose  the  mass  of  Russian  nationality,  and 
the  circumstances  which,  through  centuries  of  warfare,  have  finally  united,  into  one  compact 
whole,  a  multitude  of  conflicting  and  heterogeneous  elements.  But,  with  all  this  diversity, 
there  are  important  and  peculiar  characteristics  which  pervade  the  mass,  and  are  common  to 
every  individual,  with  as  much  uniformity  and  certainty  as  that  with  which  the  firm  govern- 
ment of  the  czar  is  now  extended  over  them.  These  peculiarities  are:  intelligence,  quickness 
of  vision,  hearing,  and  all  the  senses ;  individuality;  trustworthiness  on  duty;  the  power  of 
enduring  fatigue,  privation,  and  the  extremes  of  climate;  great  address  in  the  use  of  weajions  ; 
strong  feeling  for  their  common  country;  caution,  united  with  courage,  cajDable  of  being  excited 
to  the  highest  pitch;  in  short,  the  combination  of  qualities  necessary  for  partisan  troops.  The 
events  of  more  than  one  campaign  have  proved,  however,  that  these  irregulars  can  be  used 
successfully  in  line  against  the  best  regular  cavalry  of  Europe. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  125 

Circumstances  of  geography  and  climate  have  given  to  these  men  a  race  of  horses  in  every 
way  adapted  to  their  riders ;  the  Cossack  horse  is  excelled  by  none  in  activity  and  hardiness. 

The  Cossack  neglects  no  opportunity  of  feeding  his  horse  ;  during  short  halts,  even  under  fire, 
he  gives  him  whatever  is  to  be  had  ;  the  horse  refuses  nothing  that  is  ofi"ered  him,  and  eats  when- 
ever he  has  the  opportunity,  for  he  has  not  acquired  the  pernicious  habit  of  eating  only  at  regular 
hours.  Some  idea  may  be  formed  of  the  power  of  endurance  of  the  Cossacks  and  their  horses 
from  the  fact,  that,  in  a  certain  expedition  against  Khiva,  there  were  3,500  regular  Eussian  troops 
and  1,200  Cossacks  ;  of  the  regulars  but  1,000  returned,  of  the  Cossacks  but  60  perished. 

The  tendency  of  events,  during  the  present  century,  has  been  to  assimilate  the  organization 
of  the  Cossacks  to  that  of  the  regulars,  to  a  certain  extent ;  whether  the  effect  of  this  has  been 
to  modify  or  destroy  their  valuable  individual  characteristics  may  yet  remain  to  be  proved  in  a 
general  war  ;  the  events  of  the  campaign  of  Hungary  are  said  to  indicate  that  more  regularity 
of  action  has  by  no  means  impaired  their  efficiency. 

This  brief  description  of  the  qualities  of  the  irregular  cavalry  indicates  at  once  the  use  made 
of  them  in  war  ;  they  watch,  while  the  regulars  repose.  All  the  duty  of  advanced  posts,  patrols, 
reconnaissances,  escorting  trains,  carrying  despatches,  acting  as  orderlies,  &c.,  is  performed  in 
preference  by  the  Cossacks  ;  the  consequence  is,  that,  on  the  day  of  battle,  the  regular  cavalry 
are  brought  upon  the  field  in  full  force  and  undiminished  vigor.  Under  cover  of  these  active 
irregulars,  a  Eussian  army  enjoys  a  degree  of  repose  unknown  to  any  other  ;  while,  on  the  other 
hand,  it  is 'difficult  for  their  antagonists  to  secure  their  outposts  and  foil  their  stealthy  movements. 

The  rapidity  and  length  of  their  marches  are  almost  incredible  ;  a  march  of  40  miles  is  a  com- 
mon thing  ;  they  will  make  forced  marches  of  TO  miles  ;  in  a  thickly  settled  country  they  have, 
in  two  days,  made  six  marches  of  ordinary  cavalry  without  being  discovered. 

In  concluding  this  subject,  it  is  impossible  to  repress  the  conviction  that  in  many  of  tlie  tribes 
of  our  frontier  Indians,  such  as  the  Delawares,  Kickapoos,  &c.,  we  possess  the  material  for  the 
formation  of  partisan  troops  fully  equal  to  the  Cossacks  ;  in  the  event  of  a  serious  war  on  this 
continent,  their  employment,  under  the  regulations  and  restrictions  necessary  to  restrain  their 
tendency  to  unnecessary  cruelty,  would  be  productive  of  most  important  advantages. 

In  our  contests  with  the  hostile  Indians,  bodies  of  these  men,  commanded  by  active  and  ener- 
getic regular  officers,  and  supported  by  regular  troops,  would  undoubtedly  be  of  great  service. 

The  term  dragoon  was  originally  applied  to  troops  who  were,  at  the  same  time,  cavalry  and 
infantry.  For  example,  the  French  dragoons  of  the  time  of  Louis  XIV  would,  on  one  day,  as 
cavalry,  meet  and  defeat  the  imperial  cuirassiers,  and  on  the  next  day  form  the  assaulting  column 
in  the  attack  of  a  breach. 

It  is  necessary  not  to  confound  the  true  dragoon  with  such  troops  as  our  mounted  rifles,  for 
instance,  whose  proper  purpose  is  to  use  the  horse  merely  as  a  means  of  rapid  locomotion,  always 
dismounting  and  fighting  on  foot  upon  reaching  the  scene  of  action. 

The  Eussian  dragoons  are  the  only  real  dragoons  in  the  world  ;  their  arms,  equipment,  &c., 
have  been  heretofore  described. 

They  are  principally  employed  in  covering  retreats,  occupying  isolated  posts,  making  sudden 
attacks  upon  villages,  &c. 

When  they  dismount  to  fight  on  foot,  one  man  of  every  three  remains  mounted,  and  holds  the 
horses  of  the  others  ;  one  officer  remains  mounted  with  each  squadron. 

When  dismounted,  they  conform  to  the  infantry  tactics. 

Since  the  9th  and  10th  squadrons,  armed  as  lancers,  do  not  dismount,  each  regiment  furnishes 
a  battalion  of  about  800  infantry. 


126  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  idea  lias  been  thoroughly  carried  out,  for  they  are  in  reality  good  cavalry  and  good 
infantry. 

It  is  a  question,  at  least  worthy  of  consideration,  whether  it  would  not  be  advantageous  in  the 
United  States  service  to  make  real  dragoons  of  tlie  regiments  now  nominally  so,  employing  them 
always  in  those  portions  of  our  territory  where  the  Indians  frequent  the  plains,  but  retire  to  the 
mountains  when  hard  pressed  ;  at  the  same  time  making  the  so-called  cavalry  regiments  mere 
regiments  of  light  cavalry,  to  act  only  on  the  plains,  and  not  to  be  expected  to  fight  on  foot. 

The  lances  of  the  front  rank  of  the  cuirassiers  are  intended  to  be  used  only  in  close  order  ; 
while  the  lancer  regiments  proper  are  taught  to  use  the  lance  both  in  close  and  open  order. 

From  the  great  use  of  the  lance  in  the  Kussian  service,  it  will  be  seen  that  it  is  a  favorite 
weapon  with  them. 

I  have  been  told  by  an  old  general  of  Cossacks,  who  served  from  Austerlitz  to  Paris,  and 
against  the  Persians  and  Turks,  that  "  the  Cossack  never  uses  his  sabre,  but  dejjends  altogether 
on  his  lance,  and  uses  his  carbine  only  to  give  signals."  He  was  also  strongly  in  favor  of  snaiSe 
bits,  sharp  spurs,  and  Balaklava  charges.  Nevertheless  the  chasseurs  d' Afrique  told  marvellous 
stories  of  the  expertness  of  the  Cossack  in  the  use  of  the  musket  on  horseback  ;  and  the  Cossacks 
of  the  line  of  the  Caucasus,  engaged  almost  daily  in  hand  to  hand  conflicts,  have  abandoned  the 
lance,  and  they  are  more  dreaded  by  the  mountaineers  of  the  Caucasus  than  any  other  Eussian 
troops. 

Against  the  Indians  of  our  plains,  who  have  no  sabres,  the  far-reaching  lance  would  no  doubt 
be  an  effective  weapon  ;  yet  a  light  sabre  would  be  about  as  much  so,  and  far  less  in  the  way. 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  Ist  Cavalry. 

October  28,  1856. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M-'CLELLAN. 


127 


EXPLANATION   OF  THE   SIGNS 


—  Officer. 


Sergeant. 


Original  pontion. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   PLATOON. 


.  Trumpeter. 


PLATOON   DEPLOYED. 

Second  position. 


mmmm 


SCHOOL    OP    THE   SQUADRON. 
Commander  of  division  (U  squadrons.)  ■  . . . .  Sergeants. 

fl 

Lj Privates  of  front  rank. 

—  Commander  of  squadron. 

—  Officers. 


Original  position. 


Privates  of  rear  rank. 

PLATOON   DEPLOYED. 

Second  position. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    REGIMENT. 


-  Colonel. 


L_.. 


-Commander  of  division  (2  squadrons.) 
-  Commander  of  squadron. 


a Squadron  officer. 

i Regimental  adjutant. 

I..-. — -  Standard. 


_.  Private  of  front  rank. 


-Private  of  rear  rank. 


Final  position. 


mmmm 


■  Standard. 


Trumpeter. 


Drummers. 


Final  position. 


'''■'"^'■iaitiiil 


L 


L 


Original  position. 
fiSHECi ,    Squadron  deployed. 


Secoiul  position. 


Final  position. 


Era 


Column  by  platoons. 


Column  of  attack. 


Squadron  deployed. 


Column  by  platoons. 


Column  of  attack. 


f1V'V'^^^M 


-  Sergeant. 
-Principal  guide, 
a. Private  of  front  rank. 

1 Private  of  rear  rank. 

H Trumpeter. 

" ■  Drummer. 


—  Platoon  deployed. 


Squadron  deployed. 


dSEia. Close  column  by  squadrons.    isKj^n  .. Close  column  by  squadrons. 


'^ Column  byplat'ns. 

cac« - . —  Column  of  attack. 


Close  col.  by  squad. 


128 


MILITARY    COMMISSION  TO    EUROPE. 

EXPLANATION    OF   THE   SIGNS— Continued. 

EVOLUTIONS'OF   THE   LINE. 


J _     General  of  Division. 

T. General  of  Brigade. 

T Colonel. 


Original  position. 


—  Squadron  deployed. 

Column  by  platoons. 

.  Column  of  attack. 


IZZZ Close  column  by  squadrons. 

*i^W/^^4- -  Skirmishers. 


iK"M"H"l' ,  Light  battery  deployed. 

t'Ji^'l-'i'^i Heavy  battery  deployed. 

*'*'y -  Battery  In  column  by  half  battery  on  the  centre. 


' Commander  of  division  (two  squadrons. 

" Commander  of  squadron. 

T. »  Adjutant. 

Second  position. 

—  Squadron  deployed. 

—  Column  by  platoons. 
Column  of  attack. 

Close  column  by  squadrons 

Direction  of  movement. 


I    D 

i  □.._ 

ID 


a „._  Principal  guides. 

• Trumpeters. 

* Drummers. 


Final  position. 
Squadron  deployed. 

Column  by  platoons. 
.  Column  of  attack. 

Close  column  by  squadrons. 
.  General  column. 
Skirmishers. 


<♦♦♦♦♦♦+ Light  battery  deployed. 

H'W'f^+* Heavy  battery  deployed. 

♦  ♦♦*!  Battery  in  double  column  on  the  centre,  by  half  battery 

♦♦♦♦J 


KEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  1— SCHOOL  OF  THE  RECRUIT. 


129 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  7. 


17   © 


130 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 
Plate  2— SCHOOL  OF  THE  KECRUIT— Continued. 


Fig.  1.  Left  front  thrust.  Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


Eight  thrust.  Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. — Right  parry. 


Against  infanlrj'.— Sighl  parry. 
Fig.  9.  Fig.  10, 


Fig.  13.— Right  rear  cut. 


Fig.  14.— Charge  sabre. 


Fig.  15. — Manner  of  holding  the 
reins  when  using  the  carbine. 


Fig.  1. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN. 

Plate  3— SCHOOL  OF  THE  PLATOON. 

Fig.  2. 


131 


ii„t,i.i„i.,i.,ij\i 


Fig.  3. 


'^0 


Fig.  4. 


■^mmmi 


-m 


M 


-t^i 


MM 


Pig.  5. 


hW- 


m 


w. 


to        s o 


tsj^gf 


su     {=1  iS  ^^fej-^-^-^isa  fe  ^ ^^^^^  fe-^ -^  .^ferc-a  &^&  &'^ ^-^ 


•pm 


■*--^^^ 


S-fciT. 


^ 


1 


i 

s 

'l^- 

"^^^^^^^-c^^"^ 


V    : 


^d 


132 


Kg.  1. 


MILITARY    COMMIS.SION    TO    KUEOPE. 

Plate    4.— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON. 

Fig.  2. 


2'ilt  I'l'U  itl^Lt 


3l-''it  e'H'U  I'^it 


Ilii 


Lti  LJ  y  L4, 


■-"mmaii^^^  '--'•'''mmiig^^  """"'^im^l^  ^-""mm^ 


sfvit 


CI¥l¥ilii1ITII^wl'll¥IWi^lW0   I  ^^<i^ii  --^^nig  "^^mg  ^^latu 

I    !ii    i    I     0    11    11 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  4. 


.  gipj' 


a  fsaiK 


S« 


Lpg^  4l£^ 


M 


M 


-«^^ 


1 

1 

1 

1 

KiBSH— ««(- 

siiFtSIt- 

Fig.  5. — Column  by  sixes— Riglit  in  front. 


1 

^'liiil 

■rtHgl 


^^ 


1^ 


!r5a 


^tUPf    ,^-1^ 


LJ 


adm 


Fig.  6. — Column  by  sixes — Left  in  front. 


■iiir 


1 

IK 

REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN. 
Plate  5— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON— Continued. 


Fig.  1. 


"^^^^H 


rig.  2. 


j^-'t^i^l^l 


I  '-^■"''Ittllllij 


j-**i*!*|ll| 


'--  I 


133 


Column  by  platoons — right  in  Iront. 


Column  by  platoons— left  in  front. 


Fig.  3. 


|"-^«aiyH|H||-^M^M^|| 


"~™™««I1||||H    ~~««lllilli|| 


Column  by  half  squadrons. 


134 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


3 

d       -ff 

■  ■-I  M 

a 
o 
O 

I 

o 

Q 

<1 

C? 

OQ 

tn 

E-i 

o 

1-q 
o 
o 
tn 
o 


ftS 

I-H 

Ph 


■i^ai 


IE 


-tffiiq 


{■E^3 


^wn 


■fig 


•  /      t  I  /      i 


I  n;        I  r — M 


-llf 


I.— ^H— -I 


•-L-:-:!-^  :   ■   .  !i  /   It-- 


r  w 


■       ,1  jl      ,':t S 

I  /I)  /r=^' 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN. 
Plate   6. -SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON-Continued. 


{ ■■'■-r 


Fig.  1. 


;^:ri  --'  y 


r-;ft 


Ii5gg8t- 


r^i'i^-y 

-....h 

M  ^i 

3«^- ;.•-■';? ; 

5i^;;;i-:/  |;f    i^! 

;■;:-."■'    ■  / 1 ; 

u:;>i/   ^i/ 

1 •!  L 

135 


HiiiU 


Fig.  2. 


Charge  in  open  order. 


136 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

Plate   6.— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON— Continued. 

Fig.  3. 


1^^ 


->■-  ». di». 

- Eatt 

—  •>- °=*^  ^ 


SsirjTusaars. 


■■■^-^ 


«         S         A         «         t         t 


ti       II      I       a       i 


<       «     °«     'a     'i     "s     *»     *9     \     \     \      \     \     \      »9     K      i 


4. 


^ 


'^^g^i  ^^.^^-^^  ^^^^^ 


^     t  "»i*  ■"ia_?^j  --^) 


..A,-^-....  J 


t^:\^^  i;;;i;n^:;:S:^;ia 


REPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    MTLELLAN. 

Plate  7.- SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADEON— Continued. 


137 


'Esxi I    /is   ^-5..::=! 


'  4— 


'    !  11    i-i":;'.s 

/     i  ill    •     '\ 

/i|j--%33 

/Mj/i-fsaX. 


'A    ■■. 


•CB 


/  i  lU-    y             7(    , 

■■          /  4 »i      ,' 

l\        i^}^'    / 

~'\ 

!  \  1/  / 

/  i  y  /' 

/     ,.X         ..  'C    J; 

7'h-:^4 

/!  nc3i 

/ 1  i  /  i 

a/   if    ir:3 

""'i!  " 

18  ® 


138 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 
Plate  7— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON— Continued. 


■'■]^^5g»|liiya!il iji"-- 


i 


-f 


Tn^ji  — ^■nhjiimii 


-I    se     6 

egMjy^i-aiilillllllllJ^ 


I  ii''0  1% 


-H^^SZTlTT. 


fl---'  "gag  0  -^ 
*      I'-i-  — fill 


/  /''  .lg:--'"T3|!  '''■^-:>s,  '\_  \ 


Fig.  3 

J 


A  la  i  m 

"I         Pi       l!fl 


"?;;"r"r°'"k..'!!:?'~"3»'.V.!  J  I" 


13  9  lit 


ii.  ja        "  il 


■1-*  a    ii         iij-i»ii         jb    12  ri 


REPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


139 


1 

r 

L"" 

«=f 

f° 

u 

«  1 

1 

"=^ 

f" 

'1 

r 

•osLj 

L™ 

(tlPH 


EH 

w 

O 

1-:! 
O 
O 

W 
o 


00 

o 

•—I 
Pi 


■a 


140 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUEOrE. 


s 

.s 

1=1 
o 
o 


E-t 

S 

W 

o 

o 

o 

W 
o 


*-. 


13^ 


0) 
03 
(l4 


•J-* 


EEPOKT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   M'^CLELLAN. 
Plate   10— SCHOOL  OF  THE  REGIMENT— Continued. 

Fig.  1. 
* 


141 


tf 


9    -91 


,a     i     i     , 


^^m 


Hffl 

10  5  5     SO    20    .to     « 

Mil'     I — r- 


Escort  of  the  standards. 


Order  of  battle  of  a  regiment  of  10  squadrons. 


Scale  of  paces. 


142 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


fllE^il^H/iiln/F 


■1 "  I  tt  !    !; 
<*i  *'■'-<  4.- 


3 

.9 
a 

o 

o 


EH 


w 

o 

o 

o 

a 

o 


siSl^TIiSffTf'r^ff*;?-:. 


'•"■■f>. 


m 


M;j!:r 


Scale  of  paces. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  12.— SCHOOL  OF  THE  KEGIMENT     Continued. 

Fig.  1. 


143 


---r~i"tnia 


Fig  9. 


j^o     jS    So     gJ*     o 


Deployment  of  close  colunilis. 


144 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Plate  13.— EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 


*4.I. 


*5.1.  1-; 


8- 

!-  i 
I 
s 

£•  If 

'J. 


n 
I 


*s^. 


5-  6 


?1 


■=-«-  r? 


■^J-I- 


Fig.  4. 

Division  in  ceneral, 
close  column 


m 


,*•  J  r^^-^f-a 


Fig.  3, — Line  of  column,  with  closed  intervals. 


I 


T 


^ 


f'^'^'^'J^        p-4?<r*fv 


•Ht. 


•BS.7U 


■ia-,.3. 


11% 


_Q00E1 


I"" 


r.  -H. 


f- ; 


*t-i- 


Ijj- 


I10BEI 
f 


-H-, 


;«] 


■*»-|ii^ 


X0 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M^CLELLAN. 

Plate   14— EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Continued. 


145 


Fig.  1. 


I 
'  ■  I 

Echelons  t  y  divisions,  one  regiment  standing  fast. 
Fig.  2. 

f  ?t^J-J  -Uj'.  TJTgjJJ  3* ,  p-j.j.-r^  f?T''t~r3~  t-"''^rt  g-'  ^- 


Fig.  6. 
6  squadron  regiments. 


jiilKiffif 


8  squadron  regiments. 

mmsirrm 


p?fHP:T!3 E??^yT iw^ycj— -- 


10  squadron  regiments. 


General  right  column  on  3d  squadron,  1st  regiment. 


Fig.  3. 


-VTJ^ccCT'iaE.'a^faj-'aj.TLTJJ   L^maj^     czGLaXT'ccKjaaa-'tas.a^E] 


^Esseaa'^^^ 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  7. 


Formaion  of  a  right  general  column,  on  3d  reg't, 
from  a  line  of  columns  with  closed  intervals. 


4 


'1        ! 

h  "i-^r^j 

4, 

3 

2       iujibl 

r,w?j«» 

f?iaVFJ» 

1-.--,.^ 

RKEjq 

K-KKISW 

KK153!W 

eaaiag 

BJiKKl* 

13333+ 

;   1  : 


r&J 


"->-■ 


jw       MS       aoe       affa 


19  © 


146 


MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO  EUROPE. 


Plate  16— EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Continued. 


Fig.  1. 


-■:::;;  '>-->    ';:T-:i  i  |J  |TJ 
r:---     -- -  Mi:!, 

^4^.., Mi 

■ ^ D'" 


f 


■<m 


Fig.  2. 


+  <--KJTf::/AJ 


Fig.  X. 


i    r^ 


Fig.  8. 


fi  sqdn.  regts. 


Hi 


t**     11^  ^iAij- 


Fis.  4. 


8  sqdD.  refit 


■Ht 


m 


;:--•;  tfi 


Passage  of  tiie  line. 


10si|il.l.  rr^'H. 


Eli 

X.:'-'  ;  \  f- 

'  i 


mm 


Fig.  9. 


(iiii 


ciia 

U£3 


For  «calp  see  page  145. 


m 


Uj3 


EEPORT   OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN. 
Plate  16.— EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Continued. 

Fig.  1. 


147 


Change  of  front  45",  on  the  1st  division  2d  regiment.      •'■^":^j^^'?^_£][-\'r-!!^^  ^^ 


-.sstn     GtTTJi'j  EEilr^  mmra  nrjriL,.  Kx:p;iiJ  KiT^jKi 


Fig.  2. 


Cbauge  of  froui  90",  on  the  %\  division 
1st  regiment. 


148 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 
Plate  16 —EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Coatinued. 


FIRST    ORDER    OF    BATTLE. 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  5. 


Division  of  cuirassiers  of  the  guard,  with  one  battery.        Division  of  light  cavalry  of  the  guard.  Division  of  army  cairassierSj  with  two  batteries. 


=20  r—  — T"^      !  Ma 


t HL -SL 

B  g  S 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    irCLELLAN. 


149 


Plate   17— EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Continued. 

Fig.  2. 


V.'.'.'/i'.'.','.<, 


i»  imi* 


c 


lOO: 
ia  j 

\zfio 


j      j 

i       i 

\30a  \ 

i 

\zoo  \ 

l-.-i"" 

0  _.; 


Fig.  3. 

\      \fOO 


/a^Sff  0       f^ff    P0&     30O    4^ff     ^00     S0^    7ffff     affi? 


Fig.  1.  1st  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  light  Cavalrj',  or  reserve  Lancers,  with  two  batteries. 

Fig.  2.  Isjt  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Dragoons,  with  three  batteries. 

Fig.  3.  1st  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  reserve  light  Cavalry,  with  tiiree  batteries. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


i:  .< 


OTjyfl 


"H-li-l-tt 

2b0 


I £. 


Fig.  4.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Cuirassiers  of  the  guard,  with  one  battery. 
Fig.  5.  2d  order  ot  battle  for  a  division  of  army  Cuirassiers,  with  two  batteries. 


zo.       ns    \^ 


Fig.  6. 


a  s  2 


J"^"" 


.(.,K,I..lMt,.|..I..> 


/ao     Seo      3oo      ^oo     S'oo      ^oo       7oo      Soo 


Fig.  6.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  light  C;tvalry  of  the  guard,  wiih  ons  battery. 

Kig.  7.  2d  order  of  battle  (or  a  division  of  li-rhr  Cavalry,  or  reserve  Lancers,  with  2  batteries. 


150  MILITAEY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

Plate  1 8  —EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE— Continued. 


Fig.  1. 


l|>.|,.|M|..h|l.|l.{. 


F,g.  2. 


fl"M"M I 


,|„|..H„n„|„j 


T..^'...1       '?■ 


itf       sea      309       ^p»      sa»        too       *>qo       wao 


■§»        too       *tgo       wao 


Fig.  l.Ji9d  order  of  baltlu  for  a  division  of  dragoons,  with  3 
batteries. 


Fig.  2.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  reserve  light  cavalry, 
wltli  3  batteries. 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  4. 


so: 


2|_^ T^, 2; 


Fig.  5. 

.|uV,lnlMli,l„l„l, 
'0 


'I ^ -3i 


.(..t..lM|nl..I..|..l^^ 
^?L ilS. i 


^ J2_ ^ 


IL 4- 1 


^. Z^ S^ 


lOOSff    0         Too       200      300        'iOO      SOO     GOO     700       SOO 

Fig.  :*.  3d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Cuirassiers  of  the  Guard,  witli  one  battery. 
Fig.  4.  3d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Light  Cavalry,  with  one  battery. 
Fig.  5.  3d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Army  Cuirassiers,  mth  two  batteries. 


Fig.  6. 


Fig.  7. 


_2fi.....i«r 


a £_ 


£0. 

9 


a}_  i._ 


lai>    En    o        Jtti)       2oo  Kno      '/ftj         ^oo         Son 


Fig. 

V 


b]_         gj_  »l^ 


Fig.  6.  3<1  order  of  battle  for  a  division  of  Liglit  Cavalry,  or  Reserve  Lancers,  with  two  batteries. 

I'ig.  7.  3d  order  or  battle  lor  a  division  of  Dragoons,  with  two  batteries. 

Fig.  8.  3d  order  of  battle  lor  a  division  of  Reserve  Light  Cavalry,  with  three  batteries. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  19.— ORDERS  OF  RESERVE. 


151 


Fig.l. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  1.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  cuiras);iers  oftiie  guard. 
Fig.  3.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  light  cavalry  of  tlie  guard. 
Fig,  3.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  cuirassiers  of  tlie  army. 


!• 


I       I 

S        i 


h 


I  Fig.  9. 


(b3c?i^i    l.lll^l^1  c^sis^  ^  c 


Fig.  7.  In  one  column. 

Fig.  8.  In  isvo  columns. 

Fig.  9.  In  two  columns,  right  or  left  in  front. 


tt4  !■ 


.l..|..H'^1j.|-.|..|. 


Fig.  .|. 
*  5 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  6. 


it.H.;w..wi 


ffw      201}        am 


+  ■!■ 


i.frV>j.|..  )• 
■1-  n-t 

■I-  ■!■  t  .|. 


Fig.  4.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  light  cavalry. 

Fig.  5.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  dragoons. 

Fig.  6.  Order  of  reserve  of  a  division  of  reserve  light  cavalry. 


General  columns,  for  one  diuision,  with  one  haliery. 
l''ig.  7.  Fig.  8. 


tut 


CHAPTER  IV. 

ON  THE  RUSSIAN    INFANTRY. 

EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 

The  habitual  formation  of  the  infantry  is  in  three  ranks  ;  from  eight  to  three  men  are  formed 
in  two  ranks  ;  three  or  two  men  in  one  rank. 

A  regiment  may  he  composed  of  two,  three,  four,  or  five  battalions,  which  are  numbered  as 
the  1st,  2nd,  3rd,  &c. 

When  the  regiment  is  deployed  in  one  line,  the  battalions  are  posted  from  right  to  left  in  the 
order  of  their  numbers. 

Every  battalion  consists  of  four  companies. 

In  the  grenadier  regiments,  of  one  grenadier  and  three  fusileer  companies  ;  in  the  infantry 
regiments,  of  one  grenadier  and  three  musketeer  companies  ;  in  the  carbineer  regiments  and 
rifle  battalions,  of  one  carbineer  and  three  rifle  companies.  Sapper  battalions  are  composed  of 
four  companies,  called  1st,  2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  sapper  companies.  In  the  interior  garrison 
regiments,  &c.,  the  companies  are  known  only  by  their  numbers. 

In  all  the  regiments  the  grenadier  or  carbineer  companies  bear  the  numbers  of  their  respective 
battalions  ;  the  other  companies  are  numbered  in  a  regular  series  through  the  whole  regiment ; 
e.  g.,  in  the  first  battalion  the  fusileer,  musketeer,  or  rifle  companies  are  numbered  as  1st,  2nd, 
and  3rd  ;  in  the  second  battalion  they  are  the  4th,  5th,  and  6th,  and  in  a  similar  manner  for 
the  remaining  battalions. 

Battalions  may,  exceptionally,  consist  of  three  companies. 

G-renadier  and  carbineer  companies  consist  of  men  distinguished  by  their  courage  in  battle, 
good  conduct,  zeal  for  their  duties,  and  clear  understanding  of  the  drill. 

The  men  are  arranged  in  each  company  according  to  height,  the  tallest  third  part  being  in 
the  front  rank,  the  next  tallest  in  the  rear  rank,  the  remainder  in  the  centre  rank. 

In  sizing  the  battalion  the  companies  are  so  arranged  that  the  men  in  the  right  wing  are  sized 
from  right  to  left,  and  those  in  the  left  wing  from  left  to  right,  excejjt  the  eighth  platoon,  which 
is  also  sized  from  right  to  left. 

Incomplete  files  are  placed  on  the  left  flanks  of  the  platoons  ;  if  only  one  man  is  wantijig  in 
a  file,  tlie  centre  rank  is  left  vacant. 

_    The  files  are  numbered  from  right  to  left  in  each  platoon  ;    the  men  in  each  rank  have  the 
number  of  their  file. 

Each  platoon  is  divided  into  two  half  platoons  ;  that  on  the  right  is  the  first,  the  other  is  the 
second. 

Each  platoon  is  also  divided  into  sections  of  not  less  than  four,  nor  more  than  six  files  each. 

The  sections  are  numbered  from  right  to  left. 

To  equalize  the  platoons  of  a  battalion,  men  may  be  transferred  from  one  company  to  another; 
but  the  elite  companies  are  kept  distinct  from  the  others. 

Platoons  should  not  contain  less  than  fourteen  files  ;  thence,  when  a  battalion  consists  of  from 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M"^CLELLAN.  153 

fifty-six  to  eighty-four  files  it  is  divided  into  four  jDlatoons  ;  if  from  84  to  112  files,  into  six 
platoons  ;  if  of  more  than  112  files,  into  eight  platoons. 

Battalions  of  three  companies  are  divided  into  six  platoons,  unless  they  contain  less  than 
eighty-four  files,  when  they  are  divided  into  four  platoons.  The  best  drilled  men  are  placed,  in 
preference,  on  the  flanks  of  platoons,  half  platoons,  and  sections,  then  in  the  front  rank  ;  but 
the  rule  with  regard  to  size  must  be  violated  as  little  and  as  imperceptibly  as  possible. 

The  ranks  are  twenty-eight  inches  apart,  measured  from  heel  to  heel. 

The  interval  between  battalions  of  the  same  regiment  is  twenty  paces. 

The  pace,  when  used  as  a  measure  in  the  infantry  service,  is  two  and  a  half  feet,  (30".) 

POSTS  OF  THE  OFFICERS. 

(Plate  2.)  The  colonel,  mounted,  is  from  fifty  to  sixty  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the 
regiment. 

The  commanders  of  the  battalions  are  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  respective 
battalions. 

The  battalion  adjutant  is  on  the  right  flank  of  the  battalion,  on  the  right  of  the  field  music  ; 
the  junior  field  officer  on  the  right  of  the  battalion  adjutant ;  the  officer  detailed  as  marker  is  on 
the  right  of  the  junior  field  officer  of  the  first  battalion  ;  the  regimental  adjutant  on  the  right  of 
the  marker  ;  all  these  officers  are  mounted. 

In  every  battalion  the  officers  are  assigned  to  platoons  as  follows : 

The  1st  platoon  is  commanded  by  the  captain  of  the  grenadier  company. 

The  2d  "  "  1st  lieut.     "  1st  " 

The  3d  "  "  captain      "  "  " 

The  4th  "  "  1st  lieut.     "  2d  " 

The  5th  "  "  captain      "  "  " 

The  6th  "  "  1st  lieut.     "  3d  " 

The  7th  "  "  captain      "  "  " 

The  8th  "  "  1st  lieut.     "      grenadier        " 

The  commanders  of  the  first  T  platoons  are  posted  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  their 
platoons  ;  the  commander  of  the  5th  platoon  separates  his  platoon  from  the  color  guard  ;  the 
commander  of  the  8th  platoon  is  on  the  left  of  its  front  rank,  the  next  officer  (the  2d  lieutenant 
of  the  grenadier  company)  on  the  right  of  its  front  rank. 

The  commander  of  the  1st  platoon  of  each  division  commands  the  division  ;  the  rest  of  the 
officers  are  posted,  as  file-closers,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank  of  non-commissioned  file-closers. 

POSTS   OF   THE   SERGEANTS. 

The  sergeants  remain  with  their  companies,  but  the  number  may  be  equalized  among  the 
platoons. 

In  battalions  of  8  platoons,  when  there  are  25  or  more  files  in  each  platoon,  there  must  be  at 
least  67  sergeants ;  if  the  platoons  have  less  than  25  files  there  must  not  be  less  than  59  sergeants. 

Any  deficiency  in  the  number  of  sergeants  is  made  up  by  detailing  the  senior  corporals  as 
acting  sergeants. 

The  sergeants  are  posted  as  follows  : 

1  as  color  bearer. 

5  color  sergeants. 

yo  ® 


154  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPK. 

1  sergeant  separates  the  color  files  from  the  4tli  platoon . 

3  markers,  whose  posts  and  duties  will  be  given  hereafter. 

l(j  right  and  left  guides  of  platoons  ;  of  these,  9  stand  in  the  rear  rank  and  cover  the  officers 
posted  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  remaining  7  left  guides  are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  behind  the 
left  files  of  their  respective  platoons. 

16  sergeants,  called  aligners,  whose  duty  it  is  to  mark  the  positions  of  the  flanks  of  the  platoons 
in  new  formations,  are  posted  behind  the  second  files  from  the  flanks  of  each  platoon  ;  as  far  as 
regards  the  posting  of  these  sergeants,  the  color  guard  is  not  regarded  as  belonging  either  to 
the  4th  or  5th  platoon  ;  the  rest  of  the  sergeants  are  posted  in  the  rank  of  file-closers  at  equal 
intervals  apart.  Among  this  number  are :  1,  the  orderly  sergeants,  who  are  the  2nd  file-closers 
from  the  right  of  the  platoons,  commanded  by  their  captains  ;  2,  the  reserve  and  vice  markers, 
(for  whom,  see  under  the  head  of  markers,)  who  are  also  posted  as  file-closers. 
The  non-commissioned  file-closers  are  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

THE   COLOR   GUARD. 

This  consists  of  6  color  sergeants  and  4  color  files,  (12  men.)  The  color  sergeants  are  selected 
from  among  those  of  the  battalion  who  are  most  rigid  in  the  performance  of  their  duty,  and  who 
have  the  greatest  regularity  in  marching  ;  they  are  selected  of  the  same  height  as  much  as 
possible. 

The  honor  of  bearing  the  color  is  reserved  for  the  sergeant  who  has  performed  the  most 
meritorious  services,  choosing,  if  possible,  one  who  is  decorated.  The  color  sergeants  are  formed 
in  2  ranks — the  color  bearer  and  2  sergeants  (one  on  each  side  of  him)  in  the  front  rank,  the 
remaining  3  in  the  rear  rank ;  as  will  be  seen  under  the  head  of  markers,  the  centre  rank  is  filled 
by  3  sergeants,  who  are  markers. 

The  color  sergeants  are  posted  iii  the  centre  of  the  battalion  between  the  color  files,  and  belong 
to  the  5th  platoon,  with  which  they  execute  all  the  movements. 

The  sergeant  covering  the  color  bearer  in  the  rear  rank  is  called  the  assistant.  Ensigns  may 
be  detailed  as  assistants  if  sufficiently  well  drilled. 

Two  color  files  are  placed  on  each  side  of  the  color  sergeants  ;  they  are  separated  from  the  4th 
platoon  by  a  sergeant,  but  are  alongside  of  the  commander  of  the  5th  platoon. 

In  battalions  of  6  platoons  the  color  sergeants  and  files  are  as  just  explained  ;  in  battalions  of 
4  platoons  the  color  files  are  as  before,  but  there  are  only  4  color  sergeants,  of  whom  1  is  color 
bearer,  another  on  his  left,  the  remaining  2  in  the  rear  rank. 

Every  battalion  has  a  color. 

MARKERS. 

As  markers  there  are  selected  adroit,  active,  and  intelligent  sergeants  and  privates,  in  prefer- 
ence those  who  can  read  and  write.  The  rules  observed  in  the  choice  of  color  sergeants  also 
apply  to  the  markers.  There  should  be  8  markers  in  each  battalion,  i.  e.,  2  for  each  comjjany, 
of  whom  1  is  a  sergeant,  the  other  a  private ;  the  privates  are  called  vice  markers.  Of  the  4 
sergeants  3  have  guidons,  but  the  4th,  called  the  reserve  marker,  has  none.  Those  with  guidon's 
cover  the  color  sergeants  in  the  centre  rank  ;  they  wear  no  knapsacks,  and  carry  the  guidons 
staff  in  the  muzzle  of  their  muskets.  The  three  markers  with  guidons  are  numbered  as  1,  2,  and 
3,  from  right  to  left ;  No.  1  marks  the  new  position  of  the  right  flank  of  the  battalion,  No.  2 
the  centre.  No.  3  the  left  flank  ;  if  the  battalion  is  in  column  they  are  similiarly  employed  in 
marking  the  new  position  of  the  head  of  the  column. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  155 

The  reserve  and  vice  markers  are  in  the  general  line  of  file-closers,  armed  and  equipped  as  the 
rest  of  the  battalion. 

In  battalions  of  6  platoons  the  markers  are  posted  as  just  explained,  but  in  those  of  4  platoons 
those  with  guidons  are  in  one  rank,  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  3d  platoon,  2  paces  behiud  the 
rank  of  non-commissioned  file-closers. 

In  regiments  of  more  than  two  battalions  an  ofiicer  is  detailed  as  marker  ;  his  post  has  already 
been  given. 

When  the  regiments  have  but  two  battalions  each,  an  ofiicer  is  detailed  in  each  brigade  as 
marker. 

A  senior  officer  is  always  detailed  in  each  division  to  direct  the  markers. 

JITJSICTANS. 

The  band  is  posted  4  paces  on  the  right  of  the  first  battalion,  on  the  alignment  of  the  centre 
rank. 

The  field  music  of  the  first  battalion  is  on  the  right  of  the  band,  in  the  other  battalions  it  is  4 
paces  from  the  right  flank  of  its  battalion. 

THE   GENERAL   INSTRUCTION   OF   THE   REGIMENT. 

The  colonel,  or,  in  his  absence,  the  officer  next  in  rank  in  the  regiment,  is  responsible  for  the 
general  instruction  of  the  officers,  sergeants,  and  "men  of  the  regiment. 

INSTRUCTION   OF   THE   OFFICERS. 

Every  officer  must  know  everything  in  the  infantry  tactics ;  the  mere  knowledge  is  insufficient, 
they  must  be  able  to  explain  the  rules,  and  teach  the  soldiers  all  that  is  required  of  them,  begin- 
ning with  the  position,  facings,  marching,  manual,  &c. 

The  colonel  must  maintain  a  constant  eye  to  this,  and  assemble  the  officers  himself,  or  cause 
the  commanders  of  battalions  to  do  so,  for  separate  instruction. 

INSTRUCTION    OF   THE   SERGEANTS. 

They  are  required  to  know  everything  in  the  schools  of  the  recruit  and  the  company,  the 
skirmish  drill,  and  outpost  duty  ;  they  must  also  be  able  to  instruct  the  men  in  these  subjects, 
and  must  know  their  duties  in  the  battalion  drill.  The  captains  are  immediately  responsible  for 
this  instruction,  under  the  supervision  of  the  commanders  of  battalions. 

INSTRUCTION   OF   RECRUITS. 

The  first  year  of  a  recruit's  service  is  the  most  difficult,  and  the  most  important,  as  forming 
his  future  character  as  a  soldier  ;  his  instruction  in  the  drill  ought  not  to  be  pressed  until  he 
fully  comprehends  the  first  principles. 

1st  month. — Instruction  similar  to  that  of  the  cavalry  recruit. 

2d  month. — The  recruits  begin  to  learn  to  chant  the  signals  for  skirmishers,  commencing 
with  the  simplest ;  they  learn  to  march  in  common  time,  quick  time,  and  the  run  ;  are  taught 
the  skirmish  drill  without  arms,  first  by  commands^  then  by  signals,  always  placing  platoon 
opposite  platoon  that  they  may  the  more  readily  understand  the  relation  of  their  movements  to 
the  enemy.  They  are  also  taught  some  of  the  field  duties,  such  as  the  nature  of  guard  duty, 
of  advanced  posts,  patrols,  and  the  duty  of  sentinel  in  the  event  of  the  appearance  of  the  enemy, 


156  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Especial  care  is  taken  to  exact  a  proj^er  soldierly  bearing  only  by  degrees,  for  too  much, 
attention  to  it  in  the  beginning  produces  stiffness  in  the  position,  facings,  and  marching, 
exhausts  the  men  and  does  more  harm  than  good.  Every  day,  except  on  days  of  rest  and  feasts, 
the  recruits  are  assembled  by  companies,  half  an  hour  before  dinner  or  supper,  and  the  signals 
are  blown  for  their  instruction. 

3d  month. — The  recruits  are  carefully  and  correctly  taught  the  facings,  marching,  loading  as 
skirmishers  without  the  motions. 

After  this  the  instruction  proceeds  regularly,  as  laid  down  in  the  school  of  the  recruit. 

There  should  be  two  drills  each  day  ;  each  drill  lasting  not  longer  than  from  one  hour  to  one 
hour  and  a  half. 

The  position  of  the  soldier  is  essentially  the  same  as  in  the  United  States  tactics. 

The  facings  are  made  by  turning  on  the  left  heel,  steadying  the  cartridge  box  with  the  right 
hand. 

The  about-face  is  made  to  the  left,  instead  of  to  the  right  ;  instead  of  placing  the  right  foot 
behind  the  left,  it  is  carried  forward  until  the  heel  is  against  the  joint  of  the  left  great  toe  ;  the 
turn  is  made  on  both  heels,  and  the  right  heel  brought  up  on  the  same  line  with  the  left,  on  the 
completion  of  the  movement. 

MARCHING. 

The  recruit  is  instructed  in  marching  by  the  numbers,  first  in  3  motions,  then  in  2,  finally  in  1. 

TO  MARCH  IN  THREE  MOTIONS. 

1st  motion. — (PI.  1,  fig.  1.)  Without  moving  the  body  or  hip,  advance  the  left  foot  just  clear 
of  the  right,  the  toe  touching  the  ground,  heel  a  little  raised,  knee  straight. 

2d  motion. — (PI.  1,  fig.  2.)  Kaise  the  left  foot,  and  move  it  nearly  28  inches  in  front  of  the 
right  heel,  knee  straight,  foot  parallel  to,  and  10^  inches  above,  the  ground. 

3c?  motion. — PL  1.  fig.  3.)  Incline  the  body  gently  forward,  plant  the  left  foot  flat  on  the 
ground,  28  inches  from  the  right,  (from  heel  to  heel,)  rest  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  left 
leg,  and  bring  the  right  foot  to  the  position  shown  in  the  plate. 

The  right  foot  is  then  advanced,  by  the  motions,  as  described  for  the  left  foot. 

The  recruit  being  well  instructed  in  marching  in  3  motions,  is  required  to  execute  the  same 
thing  in  2  motions  : 

1st  motion. — Execute  the  first  two  motions  of  the  preceding. 

2d  motion. — Execute  the  third  motion  of  the  preceding,  with  the  difference  that  the  right  foot 
does  not  remain  in  rear,  as  shown  in  PL  1,  fig.  3,  but  is  at  once  moved  forward. 

The  march  in  one  motion  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  just  laid  down. 

Common  time  is  at  the  rate  of  from  70  to  72  steps  per  minute,  each  step  28  inches,  from  heel 
to  heel. 

Quick  time  is  at  the  rate  of  110  stejjs  per  minute,  and  28  inches  long. 

The  free  step  differs  from  the  last  only  in  a  free  swinging  of  the  arms  being  permitted ;  the 
musket  is  carried  at  a  slope,  the  right  arm  swinging  freely,  across  the  body,  from  the  elbow 
down,  in  cadence  with  the  step  ;  this  step  is  much  used,  even  when  passing  in  review. 

The  run  is  at  the  rate  of  150  steps  per  minute,  each  step  28  inches  ;  the  piece  is  carried  at  a 
trail,  the  left  hand  steadying  the  cartridge  box. 

The  individual  oblique  step  does  not  differ  essentially  from  that  in  Scott's  tactics. 

The  roiUe  step  is  at  the  rate  of  100  steps  a  minute,  and  is  of  the  usual  length  of  28  inches,  so 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    irCLELLAN.  157 

that  the  men  may  march  about  2f  miles  per  hour.  The  men  are  permitted  to  carry  their  arms 
at  will,  and  to  move  easily,  it  being  only  required  that  they  keep  their  places  and  do  not  lag 
behind  ;  if  bayonets  are  fixed,  the  muzzles  must  be  up. 

THE  MANUAL  OF  ARMS. 

This  is  generally  so  similar  to  that  in  the  United  States  service,  that  merely  some  exceptions 
need  be  noted. 

Present  arms.— The  piece  is  held  in  front  of  the  left  breast. 

Charge  bayonet. — Lock  plate  half  turned  up,  the  right  hand  (grasping  the  handle)  is  on  the 
seam  of  the  pants,  the  right  arm  being  extended  to  very  nearly  its  full  length  ;  hollow  of  the 
right  foot  against  the  left  heel,  (PI.  1,  fig.  8.) 

Eight  shoulder  shift  arms,  as  in  the  United  States  rifle  tactics,  except  that  the  right  hand 
grasps  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Slope  arms. — The  left  hand  is  raised  and  thrown  forward,  so  that  the  stock  rests  on  the  shoulder 
just  above  the  guard,  the  barrel  at  an  angle  of  about  45°,  (PL  1,  fig.  9.) 

Parade  rest. — The  feet  are  not  moved,  the  barrel  is  thrown  across  the  body,  and  rests  in  the 
hollow  of  the  left  fore  arm  ;  the  hands  on  the  gun  sling,  left  hand  above  the  right. 

PL  1,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  and  7,  show  one  method  of  saluting  by  a  sentinel  at  an  order. 

When  the  soldier  hands  his  musket  to  the  inspector,  he  holds  it  in  his  left  hand,  at  arm's  length, 
the  piece  vertical,  the  lock  towards  the  inspector,  the  left  hand  grasping  it  just  above  the  lock, 
PL  1,  fig.  10. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

Each  company  of  not  less  than  28  files  is  divided  into  2  platoons  ;  if  the  company  consists  of 
less  than  28  files,  it  composes  only  a  single  platoon.  In  the  tactics  a  company  of  2  platoons 
takes  the  name  of  division. 

(PL  1,  fig.  11.)     In  an  isolated  company,  the  ofiicers,  sergeants,  &c.,  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  captain  15  paces  in  advance  of  the  centre  ;  the  senior  lieutenant  in  the  front  rank  on  the 
right  of  the  1st  platoon,  which  he  commands  ;  the  2d  lieutenant  on  the  left  of  the  2d  platoon, 
which  is  his  command  ;  the  3d  lieutenant  is  in  the  front  rank,  between  the  platoons ;  if  there  are 
other  lieutenants,  they  are  posted  as  file-closers,  the  senior  behind  the  centre  of  the  1st  platoon, 
the  junior  in  rear  of  the  2d  platoon. 

If  there  is  a  deficiency  in  the  number  of  officers,  other  than  file-closers,  the  number  is  made 
up  by  sergeants,  beginning  with  the  orderly  sergeant.     The  sergeants  are  posted  as  follows : 

Four  right  and  left  guides  of  platoons  ;  when  the  company  is  in  line,  the  right  guide  of  the 
1st  and  both  guides  of  the  2d  platoon  are  in  the  rear  rank  covering  the  officers  ;  but  the  left 
guide  of  the  1st  platoon  is  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  behind  the  left  file  of  his  platoon. 

The  4  sergeants  detailed  as  aligners  (to  mark  the  new  front  in  the  difierent  formations)  are 
behind  the  2d  files  from  the  flanks  of  the  platoons. 

The  orderly  sergeant  is  the  2d  file-closer  from  the  right  of  the  1st  platoon.  The  remaining 
sergeants  are  posted  as  file-closers  at  equal  intervals  from  those  already  mentioned. 

The  drummers,  fifers,  and  horn  players,  are  formed  in  one  rank,  on  the  alignment  of  the  centre 
rankj  4  paces  from  the  right  of  the  company. 

For  instruction  in  the  manual,  &c.,  the  company  is  sometimes  formed  on  three  sides  of  a 
square,  each  rank  forming  one  side. 

In  the  difierent  firings,  tlie  rear  rank  men  pass  their  pieces  to  those  in  front  of  them. 


158  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUEOPE. 

The  individual  oblique  step  is  never  Tised  for  a  distance  greater  than  ten  paces  ;  for  oblique 
movements  longer  than  that  each  man  half  faces  to  the  right  or  left. 

To  wheel  a  division  (comiiany  of  two  platoons)  to  the  right,  on  a  fixed  p)ivot,  the  first  platoon 
wheels  to  the  right,  and  the  second  acts  as  prescribed  in  the  United  States  tactics  for  the  second 
company  of  a  battalion  changing  front  forward  on  the  first  company.  The  division  also  changes 
front  on  the  centre. 

In  route,  troops  march  in  column  by  platoons,  half  platoons,  or  sections.  The  distance 
between  the  ranks,  in  this  case,  is  from  three  and  a  half  to  five  feet. 

OF  SKIEMISHERS. 

Circumstances  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  sometimes  make  it  necessary  for  infantry  to  act  in 
scattered  parties,  instead  of  in  close,  compact  order  ;  e.  g.,  to  occupy  forests,  copses,  villages,  or 
to  protect  different  movements  of  troops  acting  in  close  order,  such  as  deployments,  flank 
marches,  movements  in  advance  or  retreat,  &c. ;  such  service  is  called  skirmishing. 

As  entire  regiments  are  seldom  deployed  as  skirmishers,  there  are  in  each  company  forty- 
eight  men  who  are  perfectly  instructed  in  that  duty,  and  are  called  skirmishers.  Of  this  number, 
twenty-four  are  held  in  constant  readiness  to  act  upon  the  first  call  for  skirmshers,  and  are 
called  active  skirmishers;  the  remaining  twenty-four  are  held  in  readiness  to  support  or  replace 
the  others,  in  case  of  need,  and  are  called  reserve  skirmishers. 

All  the  men  of  the  regiment  should,  however,  be  instructed  in  skirmish  drill.  Each  captain 
selects  from  his  company  the  four  sergeants  and  forty-eight  privates  who  are  most  active  and 
best  fitted  for  the  service  of  skirmishers,  and  submits  their  names,  through  his  chief  of  battalion, 
for  the  ajiprobation  of  the  colonel ;  the  latter,  having  satisfied  himself  that  they  possess  the 
qualities  and  knowledge  necessary  for  skirmishers,  appoints  them  as  such  in  regimental  orders  ; 
any  vacancies  are  filled  in  the  same  manner. 

OF   THE   INSTRUCTION   AND   FORMATION   OF   SKIRMISHERS. 

It  is  necessary  that  a  skirmisher  should  be  active,  quick,  fully  informed  as  to  the  object  of  his 
service,  and  a  good  marksman. 

Although  the  skirmish  drill  itself  augments  the  activity  of  the  soldier,  yet  it  is  very  useful 
to  oblige  the  men  to  climb  fences  and  hedges  promptly  and  actively;  to  leap  streams,  ditches, 
&c.,  in  addition  to  instructing  them  in  running,  as  a  jn-eparation  for  the  drill. 

The  soldier  being  accustomed  to  move  and  act  in  close  order,  it  is  necessary  to  impress  upon 
him  that,  so  soon  as  he  finds  himself  in  open  order,  he  need  no  longer  trouble  himself  about 
the  step  or  alignment ;  but  should  execute  every  movement  easily  and  lightly,  turning  his 
whole  attention  towards  the  enemy,  thinking  how  to  injure  them  most  with  the  least  incon- 
venience to  himself,  and  availing  himself  of  every  feature  of  the  ground  for  cover. 

For  this  purpose,  in  the  instruction  of  skirmishers,  the  ofiicers  should  turn  their  attention  to 
the  advantages  to  be  taken  of  the  ground,  and  explain  to  the  men  the  manner  of  availing 
themselves  of  it;  for  example,  if  they  have  hillocks  in  front  of  them,  they  may  lie  down  or 
kneel  behind  them;  when  attacking  in  a  forest,  they  should  advance  from  tree  to  tree,  and, 
having  thus  arrived  near  the  enemy,  endeavor  to  inflict  such  injury  upon  him  as  to  drive  him 
from  the  place ;  in  a  retreat  through  a  forest,  they  should  cover  themselves  behind  trees  and 
bushes,  thus  defending  the  position  and  their  comrades ;  they  should  also  be  instructed  how  to 
lie  down  in  ditches,  behind  fences,  hedges,  &c.,  and  how  to  use  their  weapons  to  advantage  in 
all  positions. 


EEPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    RPCLELLAN.  159 

If  the  signal  to  lie  down  is  given  in  broken  and  covered  ground,  the  officers  must  see  that 
the  men  take  the  greatest  advantage  of  the  locality. 

The  skirmishers  must  mutually  support  each  other,  concentrating  their  fire  upon  the  points 
where  they  can  do  most  damage  to  the  enemy,  as,  e.  gr. ,  upon  the  officers,  on  masses  of  men, 
on  the  men  and  horses  with  the  artillery,  upon  the  points  we  intend  to  attack,  and  in  the 
defence,  upon  points  when  the  enemy  presents  himself  in  close  order,  such  as  causeways, 
bridges,  hollow  ways,  &c. 

The  skirmishers  must  be  impressed  with  the  conviction  that  the  artillery  of  the  enemy  can  do 
them  no  harm;  that  in  forests,  ravines,  behind  ditches,  &c.,  cavalry  cannot  injure  them;  in 
exposed  positions  they  always  have  their  own  cavalry  or  infantry  in  close  order  to  protect  them. 

The  men  deployed  as  skirmishers  must  always  be  prepared  to  use  the  bayonet,  especially 
against  single  horsemen. 

Although  it  has  been  said  above  that  skirmishers  should  move  and  act  freely,  they  should 
never  lose  their  soldierly  bearing. 

In  skirmishing  order  the  men  are  not  permitted  to  converse ;  all  noise,  clamor,  and  even 
cheers,  are  strictly  forbidden,  unless  special  permission  is  given. 

The  movements  of  skirmishers  arc  made  either  at  the  free  step  or  the  run. 

The  order  of  battle,  as  skirmishers,  consists  of  a  chain  of  skirmishers,  with  a  reserve  in  rear. 
The  chain  consists  of  pairs  of  men  at  a  certain  interval  apart;  this  interval  will  vary  with 
circumstances,  but  should  never  be  greater  than  15  paces.  The  intervals  need  not  be  equal,  for 
each  pair  must  seek  shelter;  the  different  pairs  may  be  as  much  as  10  paces  in  front  or  rear  of 
the  general  line.  In  each  pair,  the  rear  rank  man  is  2  paces  to  the  right,  and  3  in  rear  of  his 
front  rank  man,  whether  moving  or  at  a  halt. 

The  duty  of  the  chain  is  to  weaken  and  harass  the  enemy  by  a  well-aimed  fire,  and  thus 
prepare  the  way  for  a  successful  attack  by  the  troops  in  close  order,  or  to  cover  their  movements. 

The  reserve  i'oUows  the  movements  of  the  chain  at  the  distance  of  from  80  to  150  paces, 
availing  itself  of  whatever  cover  the  ground  affords ;  it  may  be  employed  for  protecting  the 
flanks  of  the  chain,  or  for  turning  those  of  the  enemy. 

Commands  to  skirmishers  are  given  by  the  voice  as  much  as  possible.  In  close  order,  the 
active  sJcirmishers  are  posted  in  the  rear  rank,  12  in  each  platoon,  and  on  either  flank;  these  24 
men,  when  ordered  out  as  skirmishers,  first  form  a  platoon  in  2  ranks,  of  whom  one-half  are 
deployed,  the  rest  forming  the  reserve. 

The  reserve  skirmishers  are  also  in  the  rear  rank,  12  in  each  platoon. 

Skirmishers  rally  in  circles  to  resist  cavalry. 

A  company  may  be  formed  either  in  square  or  circle  for  the  same  jjurpose.     When  the  line  in 
close  order  advances,  the  skirmishers  frequently  lie  down,  continue  firing  to  the  last  moment 
allow  the  line  to  pass  over  them,  and  then  rise  and  take  their  places  in  the  rear  rank;  the  line 
thus  meeting  the  enemy  in  3  ranks. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

The  formation  of  tlie  battalion,  the  posts  of  the  officers,  sergeants,  &c.,  have  already  been 
given. 

In  PI.  3,  figs.  1  and  2,  are  given  the  posts  of  the  officers,  sergeants,  &c.,  in  columns  by 
platoons  and  by  sections. 

In  PI.  3,  figs.  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7,  are  given  the   formation  of  the  difierent  close  columns 


160  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

employed ;  in  close  column  the  distance  between  subdivisions  is  4  paces,  measured  from  front 
rank  to  front  rank. 

Columns  are  formed  and  deployed  on  the  march  as  well  as  from  a  halt. 

In  PI.  4,  figs.  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  are  given  different  squares. 

In  PL  4,  fig.  1,  is  given  the  formation  of  a  column  by  divisions,  at  half  distance,  for  passing 
in  review. 

In  PL  4,  figs.  6,  7,  and  8,  PL  5,  figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  are  given  examples  of  a  deployed  line, 
columns,  and  squares,  witli  the  skirmishers  formed  ready  for  action,  if  needed.  The  skir- 
mishers sometimes  move  out  directly  through  the  captains'  intervals. 

(PL  5,  fig.  4.)  The  battalion  is  sometimes  formed  in  a  line  of  columns  of  companies 
by  platoons  in  two  ranks,  tlie  grenadier  company  being  held  in  reserve  ;  this  formation  is 
employed  when  the  battalion  is  to  operate  in  obstructed  localities,  such  as  forests,  &c.,  when 
many  skirmishers  are  to  bo  employed.  Each  company  column  consists  of  3  platoons,  each  in  2 
ranks  ;  the  1st  platoon  is  composed  of  tlie  front  and  centre  ranks  of  the  1st  platoon  of  the  com- 
pany ;  the  2d  platoon,  of  the  same  ranks  of  the  2d  platoon  ;  the  3d  platoon,  of  the  whole  rear 
rank  of  the  company. 

PL  5,  fig.  5,  gives  the  order  of  battle  of  a  battalion  thus  formed. 

The  square  is  moved  in  any  direction  without  reducing  it.  Wlien  it  is  in  retreat,  the  rear 
rank  of  the  rear  face  occasionally  halts,  faces  about,  fires,  and  runs  back  to  its  place  in  the 
square. 

EVOLUTONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

Battalions  may  be  formed  in  a  dejiloyed  line,  in  line  of  columns,  or  in  general  column. 

The  interval  between  battalions  in  a  deployed  line  is  20  j^aces. 

A  line  of  columns  have  either  full  or  closed  intervals. 

Full  intervals  are  those  whiclr  permit  the  battalions  to  deploy,  and  have  the  prescribed  inter- 
val of  20  paces  when  the  deployment  is  made. 

The  closed  intervals  are  45  paces  for  battalions  formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre 
platoon,  and  20  paces  for  all  other  columns. 

A  general  column  is  one  in  which  the  battalions  follow  each  other,  every  battalion  being 
formed  in  columns  ;  these  may  be  open  or  close ;  in  the  first  case,  the  distance  from  one  bat- 
talion to  another  is  platoon  distance,  plus  20  paces  ;  in  the  latter  case  it  is  8  paces. 

In  general  column  the  distance  between  battalions  is  counted  from  the  line  of  non-commis- 
sioned file-closers  of  the  last  subdivision  of  one  battalion  to  the  front  rank  of  the  next  battalion. 

Troops  may  be  formed  in  one  or  several  lines,  and  in  one  or  two  general  columns.  The 
distance  between  the  lines,  or  columns,  depends  upon  the  ground  and  the  judgment  of  the 
commander. 

For  instruction  in  evolutions  of  the  line  the  troops  are  usually  formed  in  2  lines  ;  the  first^ 
either  deployed  or  in  columns  ;  the  second,  200  paces  in  rear  of  the  first,  and  usually  in 
columns.  The  rules  laid  down  in  the  cavalry  tactics  for  the  assignment  of  commanders  to  the 
lines  apply  here. 

The  generals  of  divisions  are  80  paces  in  front  of  the  division  deployed ;  generals  of  brigade, 
50  paces  ;  colonels,  30  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  commands. 

PL  6  gives  the  positions  of  the  commanders  in  various  formations. 

The  column  of  attack  is  usually  employed  in  the  various  movements  of  changing  front,  pass- 
ing defiles,  &c.,  &c. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    H.    jrCLELLAN.  IGl 


ORDERS  OF  BATTLE  AXD  OF  RESERVE,  AND  GENERAL  COLUMNS. 

When  troops  are  formed  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  general  column,  the  muskets  and  guns 
should  be  loaded. 

An  order  of  battle  is  an  arrangement  of  troops  which  enables  them  to  attack  or  defend  them- 
selves successfully. 

Infantry,  with  its  artillery,  may  be  formed  in  4  orders  of  battle  and  1  of  reserve,  (plates  7, 
8,  and  9. 

The  orders  of  battle  are  named  as  follows : 

The  first,  or  ordinary  order  of  battle. 

The  second,  or  close  order  of  battle. 

The  third,  or  extended  order  of  battle. 

The  fourth,  or  reinforced  order  of  battle. 

Each  order  of  battle  usually  consists  of  2  lines  of  battle  and  a  reserve. 

The  1st  and  2d  orders  of  battle  are  peculiarly  fundamental;  the  large  number  of  troops  held 
in  reserve  renders  it  possible,  without  changing  the  order  of  the  lines  of  battle,  to  pass  to  any 
other  formation  which  circumstances  may  render  necessary. 

The  3d  order  of  battle  is  nothing  but  a  modification,  according  to  circumstances,  of  the  1st 
or  2d,  in  which  a  part,  or  even  the  whole  of  the  reserve,  is  employed  to  reinforce  or  extend  the 
lines  of  battle. 

The  4th  order  of  battle  is  also  a  modification,  according  to  circumstances,  but  with  a  different 
object,  of  the  1st  or  2d.  Here  the  lines  of  battle  are  drawn  closer  together,  and  one  half  the 
reserve  is  employed  to  strengthen  the  2d  line  of  battle. 

The  employment  of  the  difierent  orders  of  battle  will  be  more  fully  explained  under  the  head 
of  their  adaptation  to  the  ground. 

General  rules  for  the  formation  of  the  orders  of  battle  from  general  column. — The  orders  of 
battle  may  be  formed  either  with  or  without  the  employment  of  markers.  The  order  of  reserve 
is  always  formed  with  markers. 

If  the  order  of  battle  is  formed  under  fire  of  the  enemy,  then  the  positions  of  the  battalions 
and  batteries  of  the  1st  line  cannot  be  occupied  by  the  markers  beforehand.  In  this  case  the 
general  commanding  first  establishes  on  the  new  line  1  or  2  battalions,  and  a  part  of  the  artil- 
lery, in  the  desired  direction,  and  then  under  cover  of  skirmishers  places  the  rest  of  the  troops 
in  position .  The  batteries  first  thrown  into  position  to  cover  the  formation  of  the  infantry  must 
remain  at  their  posts  until  the  completion  of  the  formation,  although  they  are  not  opposite  their 
intervals  ;  they  will  move  to  their  intervals  by  obliquing  at  a  trot,  when  the  line  of  battle  first 
advances  or  retreats. 

The  orders  of  battle  will  always  be  formed  by  means  of  markers :  a,  when  the  troops  are 
taking  up  a  position  for  bivouac;  b,  when  forming  out  of  range  of  the  enemy's  fire;  and, 
finally,  c,  when  taking  up  a  new  position  in  rear  of  that  first  occupied,  during  movements  in 
retreat. 

In  time  of  peace  troops  will  occasionally  be  exercised  in  the  formations  without  employing 
markers. 

In  general  columns  each  battalion  should  be  formed  in  double  column  on  the  centre  platoon, 
closed  in  mass;  the  batteries  in  columns  by  sections. 

21  © 


1G2  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

The  distance  between  the  parts  of  the  column  shoukl  he  20  paces.  In  general  column  the 
troops  move  with  the  free  step. 

The  remarks  upon  general  columns  in  the  cavalry  tactics  mostly  apply  to  general  columns  of 
infantry. 

In  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  orders  of  battle,  the  distance  between  the  two  lines  of  battle  is  200 
paces;  in  the  4th  order  of  battle,  it  is  100  paces.  The  reserve  is  usually  jjlaced  behind  tlie 
centre  of  the  lines  of  battle^  and  in  one  or  two  lines  60  paces  apart;  in  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d 
orders,  the  reserve  is  400  paces  from  the  2d  line  of  battle  ;  in  the  4th  order,  300  paces.  The 
distances  between  lines  are  estimated  from  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  platoon  of  one  line  to 
the  same  point  of  the  other  line. 

The  general  rule  is  that  the  junior  regiments  and  brigades  form  the  1st  line;  circumstances 
may  justify  a  departure  from  this  rule. 

If  there  are  any  heavy  batteries  jireseut,  at  least  one  should  always  be  in  the  1st  line,  so  as 
to  commence  firing  i;pon  the  enemy  at  the  greatest  possible  distance. 

The  formation  of  orders  of  battle  near,  or  under  the  fire  of,  the  enemy,  should  always  be 
effected  under  cover  of  a  line  of  skirmishers. 

Plates  8  and  9  give  the  orders  of  battle  and  reserve  for  brigades  and  divisions  composed  of 
regiments  of  foiir  battalions.  In  this  case  each  regiment  forms  in  two  lines  ;  the  regiment  on 
the  right  flank  has  its  junior  battalions  in  front ;  that  on  the  left  flank  its  senior  battalions  in 
front.  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  found  in  the  fourth  order,  where  the  regiment  composing 
the  centre  of  the  second  line  is  formed  in  one  line,  and  in  the  reserves  of  the  third  and  fourth 
orders,  where  the  regiment  in  reserve  is  also  formed  in  one  line. 

PL  9,  figs.  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  show  the  formation  of  four-battalion  regiments  in  general  column. 

PI.  7,  figs.  5,  6  and  7,  give  the  order  of  reserve  and  the  first  and  second  orders  of  battle  for 
a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  three  battalions. 

PL  7,  figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  give  the  same  things  for  a  brigade  of  three-battalion  regiments. 

APPLICATION  OF  THE  ORDEKS  OF  BATTLE  TO  THE  GROUND. 

The  orders  of  battle  and  of  reserve,  heretofore  explained,  should  suffice  as  a  basis  for  all 
formations  of  infantry  and  its  artillery.  In  every  isolated  regiment,  brigade,  or  division,  its 
commander  determines  upon  the  formation  most  suitable  to  the  ground  and  the  purpose  in 
view. 

The  order  of  reserve  is  employed  for  troops  in  bivouac,  out  of  action,  or  in  reserve.  In  this 
order  the  troops  are  arranged  with  the  smallest  possible  distances  and  intervals,  in  order  to 
cover  them,  until  coming  into  action,  behind  accidents  of  the  ground,  from  the  view  and  fire  of 
the  enemy  ;  but  all  the  parts  are  so  arranged  that  any  order  of  battle  or  general  column  can 
readily  be  formed,  and  any  jiortion  be  detached  without  disturbing  the  general  arrangement. 

The  first  order  of  battle  may  be  used  with  er[ual  advantage  in  attack  and  defence  ;  it  is 
employed,  in  preference,  on  opien  ground,  or  wliere  the  enemy  can  be  most  injured  by  the  fire  of 
deployed  battalions. 

1h.e  second  order  of  battle  is  of  the  same  nature  as  tlie  first,  but  it  can  be  employed  on  all 
kinds  of  ground,  on  account  of  the  facility  with  which  the  intervals  between  the  battalions  of 
the  first  line  can  be  increased  or  diminished.  It  is  most  frequently  used  in  actual  combat, 
particularly  where  the  ground  does  not  present  open  plains,  and  where  the  troops  should  occupy 
a  greater  space  than  in  the  first  order. 

The  third  order  af  battle  is  proper  only  for  defence,  on  account  of  the  great  extent  of  the  lines 


REPORT   OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN.  1G3 

of  battle,  and  the  insignificance,  or  sometimes  total  absence,  of  a  reserve.  As  a  general  rule, 
the  use  of  the  third  order  is  admissible  only  in  cases  where  it  is  possible  to  support  it  by  strong 
reserves  drawn  from  other  troops,  or  where  an  extensive  position  is  to  be  occupied,  for  the 
defence  of  which  a  weak  line  is  sufficient. 

The  fourth  order  of  battle  may  be  employed  for  an  obstinate  defence,  or,  particularly,  for  a 
vigorous  and  decisive  attack  upon  the  enemy  with  both  lines  of  battle,  which  may  in  this  case 
be  regarded  as  one  line,  on  account  of  their  short  distance  apart. 

In  all  the  orders  of  battle  the  1st  line  of  battle  may  be :  (a)  deployed,  for  defensive  purposes, 
if  the  ground  in  front  is  favorable  for  the  action  of  fire-arms  in  close  order  ;  (6)  in  columns 
doubled  on  tlie  centre,  either  for  attack  or  defence,  if  the  ground  in  front  permits  the  use  of  fire- 
arms only  in  open  order. 

Tlie  2d  line  of  battle  should  always  be  formed  in  columns  doubled  on  the  centre,  since  its 
destination  is  rather  to  serve  as  a  support,  reinforcement,  or  relief  to  the  1st  line,  than  to  engage 
in  the  combat. 

The  reserve  is  always  formed  in  columns  doubled  on  the  centre  platoon,  until  brought  into 
action. 

The  lines  of  battle,  and  the  reserve,  may  be  formed  in  S(|uares,  to  resist  cavalry. — (PI.  10,  and 
PI.  11,  figs.  1  and  2.) 

Since  the  exact  formation  of  the  orders  of  battle,  according  to  the  tactics,  is  possible  only  in 
open  and  unobstructed  countries,  the  generals  are  permitted  to  make  such  partial  changes  as 
circumstances  may  require. 

The  skirmishers  in  front  of  the  1st  line  may  be  thrown  far  out,  or  drawn  close  in  ;  but  should 
be  so  placed  as  to  be  covered  by  the  accidents  of  the  ground  from  the  fire  of  the  enemy,  and  yet 
be  able  to  injure  him  by  their"  own  fire. 

Those  parts  of  the  chain  that  are  imder  cover  should  be  thick,  the  exposed  portions  should 
be  thin. 

The  batteries  serving  in  front  of  the  1st  line  should  be  posted  at  points  which  command  the 
ground,  and  from  which  the  whole  space  in  front  may  be  swept ;  if  such  points  are  too  far  from 
the  general  position  of  the  battery,  they  are  occupied  by  detachments. 

It  follows  from  this  that  all  the  batteries  need  not  be  on  the  same  line.  The  number  of  guns 
serving  with  the  1st  line  may  be  increased  or  diminished  according  to  circumstances. 

In  the  1st  line  several  battalions  may  be  thrown  forward,  or  moved  to  one  side,  to  secure  a 
more  advantageous  position  ;  if  one  of  the  batteries  of  the  1st  line  moves  to  the  right  or  left,  on 
account  of  the  ground  or  other  circumstances,  the  battalion  which  hajoj^ens  to  be  in  rear  of  it 
doubles  the  part  screened  by  the  battery,  or  forms  into  column ;  if  necessary,  the  general  of 
brigade  moves  it  to  one  side,  provided  the  ground  and  the  formation  of  the  other  troops  permit. 
If  the  battery  moves  the  distance  of  a  whole  battalion  front,  the  battalion  may  give  up  its  place, 
and  occupy  a  new  position  in  rear  of  that  first  held  by  the  battery. 

For  these  reasons,  the  intervals  between  the  battalions  are  not  always  equal,  nor  is  the  line 
of  battle  necessarily  straight.  In  ojien  country,  especially  against  an  enemy  sujierior  in  cavalry, 
the  extreme  battalions  of  the  2d  line  may  be  placed  behind  the  outer  flank  battalions  of  the  1st 
line ;  the  formation  of  the  battalions  of  the  1st  line  may  also  be  changed  in  conformity  with 
circumstances  and  the  ground,  but  without  changing  the  general  order  of  battle ;  for  this  purpose 
some  of  the  battalions  of  the  1st  line  may  be  formed  in  line  of  company  columns,  for  more  con- 
venient action  as  skirmishers.     The  distance  between  the  two  lines  of  battle,  as  well  as  that 


164  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUEOPE. 

between  the  2d  line  and  the  reserve,  may  be  increased  or  diminished,  so  as  to  be  able  to  cover 
the  troops  from  the  view  and  fire  of  the  enemy,  by  means  of  the  accidents  of  the  ground. 

The  reserve  may  be  placed  in  rear  of  those  points  which,  on  account  of  their  weakness,  or 
being  the  key  of  the  position,  ought  to  be  reinforced  at  once  if  vigorously  attacked  by  the 
enemy  ;  during  an  attack  the  reserves  follow  in  rear  of  the  troops  wlio  are  to  attempt  the  key  of 
the  enemy's  position ;  such  dispositions  of  the  reserve  should  be  carefully  concealed  from  the 
enemy. 

If  it  is  impossible,  in  such  eases,  to  conceal  the  reserve  behind  accidents  of  the  ground,  it  is 
best  to  post  it  behind  the  centre  of  the  lines  of  battle. 

EXAMPLES  OF  THE  APPLICATION  OF  THE  ORDERS  OF  BATTLE  TO  THE  GROUND. 

(PL  11,  fig.  3.)  Application  of  the  1st  order  of  battle,  by  a  division  composed  of  regiments 
having  four  battalions. 

It  is  supposed  that  the  enemy  occupies  the  position  A  B. 

One  division  is  to  form  in  the  1st  order  of  battle,  on  the  position  C  D. 

The  nature  of  the  ground  requires  the  following  changes  in  the  order  of  battle: 

Three  companies  of  the  battalion  on  the  right  flank  of  the  1st  line  occupy  the  village  D,  the 
fourth  company  remaining  in  reserve  behind  the  village. 

Two  pieces  of  the  1st  light  battery  are  also  in  this  village,  and  enfilade  the  ravine  B  E.  The 
battalion  on  the  left  flank  of  the  1st  line  approaches  the  woods  C  ;  one  company  is  detached  to 
hold  the  woods.  The  battalion  on  the  right  flank  of  the  second  line  approaches  the  village  D, 
to  support  the  battalion  which  holds  it,  should  the  enemy  attack  it. 

The  reserve  is  posted  on  both  sides  of  the  main  road,  500  pace^  from  the  2d  line.  The  re- 
maining six  pieces  of  the  1st  light  battery  are  with  the  reserve,  on  the  road,  in  column  by 
sections. 

(PI.  12,  fig.  1.)  Application  of  the  1st  order  of  battle,  by  a  division  composed  of  regiments 
having  three  battalions. 

It  is  supposed  that  the  enemy  is  advancing  in  two  columns,  by  the  roads  A  B  and  C  B. 

One  division,  in  the  first  order  of  battle,  is  to  occupy  the  position  D  E.  In  conformity  with 
the  ground,  the  following  modifications  are  made  in  the  order  of  battle : 

The  2d  heavy  battery  and  the  light  battery  form  one  general  battery,  and  are  posted  on  the 
height  in  front  of  the  village  F. 

The  light  battery  enfilades  the  road  B  C  ;  two  guns  of  the  heavy  battery  sweep  the  bridge  ; 
the  remaining  pieces  of  the  heavy  battery  enfilade  the  road  A  B. 

The  woods  on  the  right  flank  of  the  position  are  occupied  by  one  battalion  of  the  4th  regi- 
ment, formed  in  company  columns. 

To  strengthen  the  left  flank  of  the  position,  and  defend  the  ford,  there  are  placed  in  front  of 
the  windmill  D  four  guns  of  the  1st  heavy  battery,  and  on  the  slope  of  the  hill  two  battalions 
of  the  2d  regiment,  in  columns  of  attack  ;  the  remaining  battalion  of  this  regiment,  and  all  the 
battalions  of  the  1st  regiment,  compose  the  reserve,  which  is  posted,  in  a  hollow,  200  paces 
behind  the  village  F  ;  the  remaining  half  battery  of  the  1st  heavy  battery  is  posted  in  rear  of 
the  1st  regiment,  in  column  by  sections. 

(PI.  12,  fig.  2.)  Application  of  the  2d  order  of  battle,  by  a  division  composed  of  regiments 
having  three  battalions. 

The  enemy  occupies  the  position  A  B. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  165 

One  division,  in  the  2d  order  of  battle,  is  to  occupy  the  position  C  D.  The  nature  of  the 
locality  requires  the  following  modifications  in  the  normal  order  of  battle : 

The  2d  heavy  battery  is  posted  on  the  hill  to  the  right  of  the  main  road.  All  three  bat- 
talions of  the  4th  regiment  are  on  the  left  of  the  road,  the  3d  battalion  being  thrown  back  a 
little  to  withdraw  it  from  the  fire  of  the  enemy's  artillery ;  one  company  of  this  battalion, 
formed  in  company  column,  holds  the  wood  C.  The  1st  battalion  of  the  3d  regiment  is  on  the 
right  of  the  road,  behind  the  right  flank  of  the  2d  heavy  battery. 

The  reserve  is  posted  in  a  hollow,  in  rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the  lines  of  battle,  in  order  to  be 
able  to  reinforce  this  flank  should  it  be  attacked. 

(PL  12,  fig.  3.)  Example  of  the  application  of  the  3d  order  of  battle,  by  a  division  compo.sed 
of  regiments  having  four  battalions. 

It  is  supposed  that  the  enemy  occupies  the  position  A  B.  One  division,  in  the  3d  order  of 
battle,  is  to  hold  the  position  C  F  D. 

The  nature  of  the  ground  renders  it  necessary  to  make  the  following  changes  in  the  order  of 
battle : 

The  lines  of  battle  consist  of  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  regiments,  the  latter  on  the  right.  The  3d 
battalion  of  the  3d  regiment,  formed  in  company  columns,  occupies  the  wood  D  ;  the  4th  bat- 
talion of  the  same  regiment,  formed  in  the  same  manner,  holds  the  village  E  ;  the  3d  battalion 
of  the  1st  regiment,  in  column  of  attack,  is  behind  the  building  F. 

The  2d  battalion  of  the  2d  regiment  is  behind  the  gardens  of  the  village  C ;  one  company 
of  this  battalion  occupies  the  gardens.  The  2d  light  battery  is  posted  down  the  hill  slope, 
between  the  1st  and  2d  regiments. 

The  3d  and  4th  battalions  of  the  2d  regiment  are  behind  its  1st  battalion.  The  -1th  regi- 
ment composes  the  reserve,  and  is  posted  in  a  hollow  in  rear  of  the  2d  battalion  of  the  1st 
regiment. 

Extracts  frcm,  the  regulations  for  the  field  service  of  infantry  in  time  of  peace. 

In  time  of  peace,  troops  usually  march  by  regiments,  and  in  rare  cases,  for  short  distances,  by 
brigades  or  divisions. 

The  regiments  seldom  march  entire,  but  generally  by  battalion,  or  by  company,  for  greater 
convenience. 

Billeters  are  parties  sent  forward  at  the  beginning  of  the  day's  march  to  secure  quarters  for 
the  command  ;  they  consist  of  1  sergeant  and  4  men  per  company,  and  1  officer  per  regiment ; 
also,  for  the  regimental  staff,  a  sergeant,  1  mitsician,  1  soldier  of  the  train,  1  mechanic,  and  1 
hospital  attendant. 

The  billeters  of  an  isolated  battalion  are  under  an  officer,  and  have  a  party  for  the  battalion 
stafl'. 

The  billeters  of  a  brigade  are  under  its  senior  quartermaster. 

The  sergeants  have  the  company  guidons. 

When  circumstances  make  it  necessary  to  bake  bread  in  advance  of  the  troops,  two  parties  of 
bakers  are  sent  forward  for  the  purpose  ;  each  party  consists  of  1  sergeant  and  8  men  per  company, 
with  one  officer  for  each  regiment,  or  separate  battalion. 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  THE  MARCH. 

About  an  hour  before  starting,  the  general  is  beaten,  as  a  signal  to  prepare  to  march.  At  this 
signal  the  men  dress,  and,  if  so  directed,  tuck  inwards  the  skirts  of  the  overcoats  as  high  as  the 


166  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

knees,  and  if  it  is  rainy  weather,  or  muddy,  tuck  their  pants  in  the  boot  tops  ;  they  then  put  on 
their  accoutrements,  the  wagons  are  jjacked,  and  everything  is  made  ready  for  starting. 

When  the  assembly  is  beaten,  the  men  put  on  their  knapsacks,  fall  in  at  the  various  rendezvous, 
and  the  troops  are  then  formed  on  the  markers  in  the  prescribed  order. 

The  wagons  are  formed  on  the  left  flank  of  the  troops,  or  in  their  rear,  according  to  the  ground. 
With  each  money  wagon,  1  sergeant  and  2  men  are  detailed  as  a  guard  ;  the  sergeant  in  front, 
and  the  men  behind  the  wagon. 

Prayers  are  recited  before  leaving  the  general  rendezvous. 

On  the  march,  the  following  arrangements  arc  made  for  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  : 

(a)  For  a  company,  they  are  at  100  paces  from  it,  and  consist,  each,  of  1  sergeant,  1  corporal, 
and  6  men. 

Parties  less  than  a  company,  but  having  more  than  6  files,  send  out  advanced  and  rear  guards 
of  1  corporal  and  2  men,  to  the  distance  of  50  paces. 

(6)  For  a  battalion,  they  are  at  150  paces,  and  consist  respectively  of  a  half  platoon,  commanded 
by.  an  officer,  and  have  a  drummer. 

(c)  For  a  regiment,  at  200  paces,  and  consist  of  a  platoon  each.  The  grenadier,  rifle,  and  5th 
platoons  are  not  detailed  on  this  duty. 

(d)  For  a  brigade,  at  300  paces,  and  consist  of  a  company  each.  The  grenadier  and  color 
companies  are  not  liable  to  this  detail. 

(e)  For  a  division,  at  400  paces,  and  consist  of  a  battalion  each. 

These  guards  are  sent  out  from  the  main  body  as  soon  as  it  has  left  the  town  or  camp  where 
it  jiassed  the  night.  As  soon  as  they  have  reached  their  positions,  the  commanders  of  the  ad- 
vanced and  rear  guards  command — 

PATROLS  TO  THE  FRONT. 

Upon  this — 

(a)  In  the  case  of  a  company,  the  corjioral,  with  2  men  behind  him,  places  himself  25  paces  in 
front  of  the  advanced  guard  ;  the  remaining  4  men  form  in  2  ranks,  with  the  sergeant  in  front. 
In  the  rear  guard,  the  corporal  and  2  men  fall  back  25  paces. 

(h)  In  the  case  of  a  battalion,  in  the  advanced  guard  1  sergeant  and  the  2  flank  files  are 
detached  as  patrollers  ;  the  sergeant  conducts  the  2  front  rank  men  50  paces  to  tlie  front ;  the 
centre  rank  men  place  themselves  on  the  sides  of  the  road,  6  paces  in  front  of  tlie  half  platoon  ; 
the  rear  rank  men,  6  paces  in  rear  of  it,  also  on  the  sides  of  the  road.  In  the  rear  guard,  the 
sergeant  falls  back  50  paces,  with  the  rear  rank  men  of  the  flank  files  ;  the  centre  rank  men  fall 
back  6  jDaces,  and  place  themselves  on  the  sides  of  the  road  ;  the  front  rank  men  advance  6  paces. 

If  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  are  formed  by  sections,  then  the  patrollers  place  themselves 
opposite  the  flanks  of  the  leading  and  rear  sections. 

(c)  (PL  14.)  From  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  of  a  regiment,  brigade,  or  division,  patrol- 
lers are  detached,  as  in  the  case  of  a  battalion. 

As  soon  as  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  have  quitted  the  main  body  to  take  their  posts,  the 
parties  of  the  day  are  posted  ;  in  these,  the  officers  do  not  draw  sabres  ;  their  jiosts  are  as  follows : 

(a)  In  a  company  marching  by  itself,  at  4  paces  in  rear  of  it  comes  the  sergeant  of  the  day, 
and  2  paces  behind  him  are  the  4  jjrivates  of  the  day,  in  one  rank,  having  a  drummer  of  the  day 
on  their  right.     There  is  another  drummer  of  the  day  at  the  head  of  the  company. 

(6)  In  a  battalion  marching  by  itself,  the  battalion  ofiicer  of  the  day  is  4  paces  in  rear  of  the 
battalion  ;  2  paces  behind  him  are  the  4  sergeants  of  the  day,  (1  for  each  company,)  in  one  rank, 


UKPORT   OF   CAPT.    JEOKCIE    B.   M=CL.ELLAN.  167 

with  a  drummer  of  the  day  on  their  right ;  2  paces  in  rear  of  the  sergeants  are  the  16  privates  of 
the  day,  (4  for  each  company,)  in  four  ranks,  in  the  order  of  their  companies.  There  is  a  drum- 
mer of  the  day  at  the  head  of  the  hattalion,  and  another  on  the  right  of  the  color  guard. 

(c)  In  the  march  of  a  regiment,  (PL  14,)  the  parties  of  the  day  are  posted  in  each  battalion  as 
just  explained ;  the  regimental  officer  of  the  day  marches  4  paces  in  rear  of  the  ambulances  follow- 
ing the  regiment. 

(d)  In  the  march  of  a  brigade  or  division,  the  brigade  or  division  officer  of  the  day  follows 
the  officer  of  the  day  of  the  last  regiment. 

In  a  division  there  is  no  brigade  officer  of  the  day. 

The  brigade  or  division  officers  of  the  day  are  field  officers. 

When  the  guards  and  the  parties  of  the  day  have  moved  to  their  posts,  the  commander  of 
the  main  body  commands — 

1.    Unjix  bayonets.     2.  Put  on  lock  covers. 

At  these  commands,  the  officers  return  sabres  ;  all  the  sergeants  and  men  unfix  bayonet  and 
put  on  their  lock  covers  ;  the  colors  are  covered. 

If  the  overcoats  are  not  already  tucked  up,  it  is  now  done,  and  in  warm  weather  the  corners 
of  the  skirts  are  thrown  back  ;  if  it  is  wet,  the  pants  are  tucked  in  the  boot  tops. 

In  the  advanced  and  rear  guards,  and  the  escorts  of  the  money  wagons,  the  officers  do  not 
return  sabres,  nor  do  the  men  unfix  bayonets  or  put  on  lock  covers  ;  but  they  tuck  up  the  over- 
coats, and  arrange  the  pants  at  the  same  time  with  the  main  body. 

When  the  preparations  are  completed,  the  difierent  parts  of  the  main  column  close  up  and 
fill  the  places  left  vacant  by  the  guards  and  the  parties  of  the  day. 

When  the  troops  are  ready  to  move,  the  commander  directs  the  drummers  of  the  day  to  beat 
the  field  march,  on  which  the  troops  start  at  the  route  step,  and  in  the  order  prescribed ;  in  the 
main  body,  arms  are  carried  at  will,  but  in  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  at  a  slope,  or  on  the 
right  shoulder. 

In  time  of  peace,  the  troops  usually  march  by  sections,  right  in  front ;  in  the  winter,  through 
deep  snow,  they  may  march  by  the  flank. 

If  there  are  with  the  regiment  recruits,  supernumeraries,  or  weak  men,  they  march,  under  an 
officer,  behind  the  last  battalion,  having  the  party  of  the  day  in  rear  of  them. 

The  wagon  train  is  arranged  as  in  the  cavalry  regulations. 

In  the  march  of  a  battalion  of  sappers,  the  engineer  wagons  are  at  the  head  of  the  other  wagons. 

RULES  TO  BE  OBSERVED  ON  THE  MARCH. 

The  officers  and  sergeants  on  the  directing  flank  must  preserve  the  distances  between  the 
subdivisions  of  the  column  ;  tlie  men  of  the  front  rank  must  not  be  in  advance  of  the  guides. 

The  ranks  will  march  at  from  1^  to  2  paces  apart. 

The  men  may  march  freely  in  ranks,  but  must  not  quit  their  places,  nor  straggle. 

On  the  march,  the  distances  will  be :  between  battalions,  50  paces  ;  between  regiments,  75  ; 
between  brigades,  100  paces. 

On  good  roads  the  march  should  not  be  slower  than  2|  miles  per  hour. 

One-half  of  the  road  must  be  left  clear  for  persons  passing  by. 

When  passing  over  wooden  or  ponton  bridges,  the  cadenced  step  will  never  be  used. 

Before  crossing  rivers,  the  drums  beat  "  the  crossing." 

In  warm  weather  the  men  unhook  their  collars,  take  off  their  stocks,  and  raise  the  chin  straps 
over  the  vizors. 


1G8  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE 

The  officers  must  always  march  at  their  posts,  and  never  collect  at  the  liead  or  on  the  flanks 
of  the  cohiinn  ;  in  bad  weatlier  they  may  throw  their  cloaks  over  their  shoulders,  but  they  must 
never  replace  the  helmet  by  the  forage  cap. 

On  the  march,  the  commanders  of  subdivisions  must  see  that  the  men  quit  their  places  under 
no  pretext,  and  that  they  do  not  feign  fatigue.  Some  privates  are  sent  with  sick  or  tired  men, 
and  turn  them  over  to  the  battalion  officer  of  the  day,  and  return  to  their  posts.  The  battalion 
officer  of  the  day  then  sends  them,  imder  charge  of  some  of  the  privates  of  the  day,  to  the  surgeon 
of  the  day  with  the  ambulances  ;  these  privates  of  the  day  remain  in  rear  until  the  first  halt, 
or  the  end  of  the  march,  if  there  is  no  halt. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  advanced  guard  to  inform  the  commander  of  all  obstacles  encountered 
and  to  take  the  proper  measures  for  their  removal. 

The  rear  guard  take  up  all  stragglers,  and  at  the  first  halt,  or  at  the  end  of  the  march,  turn 
them  over  to  the  regimental  officer  of  the  day. 

That  the  men  may  rest,  and  set  themselves  to  rights,  a  halt  of  1  or  2  hours'  duration  is  made 
about  midway  in  the  march. 

If  the  march  is  long  and  difficult,  two  or  more  halts  may  be  made. 

The  places  for  halts  must  be  dry,  near  water,  and,  in  warm  weather,  in  the  shade  of  trees. 
Halts  should  not  be  made  in  villages,  but  near  them. 

Having  halted,  arms  are  stacked,  without  fixing  bayonets  ;  the  men  take  off  their  knapsacks 
and  belts,  remove  their  helmets,  and  put  on  their  forage  caps  ;  the  drums  are  piled,  and  the 
colors  leaned  against  them,  (PL  13,  figs.  2  and  3.) 

The  parties  of  the  day  take  off  their  knapsacks  only ;  in  each  company,  one  of  their  number 
is  posted  over  the  stacks. 

During  the  halt,  the  patrols  and  sentinels  are  relieved  every  15  minutes. 

When  several  regiments  are  marching  together,  the  colonels,  at  the  end  of  a  halt,  give  the 
order  to  take  knapsacks,  &c.,  in  succession,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  men  prematurely,  but  give 
them  more  time  to  rest. 

In  addition  to  the  main  halt,  short  halts,  of  about  15  minutes'  duration,  are  made  soon  after 
the  begining  of  the  march,  and  at  3  or  4  miles  after  the  main  halt,  to  allow  the  men  to  put 
themselves  to  rights,  and  satisfy  the  calls  of  nature.  During  these  halts  the  men  remain  in 
the  road,  in  the  order  of  march,  stack  arms,  and  take  off  their  knapsacks. 

It  is  a  general  rule  to  omit  no  opportunity  of  endeavoring  to  jDreserve  the  strength  of  the 
men,  by  always  taking  advantage  of  any  slight  chance  of  relieving  them  of  their  load ;  therefore, 
in  crossing  a  river,  for  instance,  while  the  leading  sections  are  crossing,  those  in  rear  should 
stack  arms  and  take  off  their  knapsacks. 

The  troops  at  the  tail  of  the  column  being  more  fatigued  than  those  at  the  head,  the 
regiments  and  battalions  should  alternate  in  their  positions  in  the  column  during  long  marches. 
This  rule  should  be  particularly  observed  when  the  roads  are  bad. 

Further  details  as  to  the  conduct  of  marches,  the  duties  of  billeters,  &c.,  are  to  be  found  in 
the  cavalry  regulations. 

When  the  troops  approach  their  quarters  for  the  night,  the  officer  commanding  the  billeters 
goes  out  to  meet  them  near  the  quarters,  taking  all  his  men  with  him,  except  one  from  each 
company,  who  remain  at  the  company  quarters  with  the  guidons. 

When  foot  artillery  is  marching  separately  from  the  infantry,  it  sends  out  its  own  advanced 
and  rear  guards. 


EEPOET    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  169 

In  a  brigade  of  foot  artillery  these  guards  consist,  each,  of  1  officer,  1  drummer,  3  sergeants, 
and  20  men,  at  200  paces  from  the  batteries. 

They  form  in  3  ranks,  and  detach  patrollers  as  a  battalion  of  infantry. 

A  single  battery  sends  out  an  advanced  and  rear  guard,  each,  of  1  sergeant,  1  corporal,  and 
6  men,  at  100  paces  from  the  battery ;  they  detach  patrollers  as  prescribed  for  the  advanced 
and  rear  guards  of  a  company  of  infantry. 

In  most  respects  the  rules  laid  down  for  the  march  of  horse  artillery  apply  to  the  case  of  foot 
artillery. 

The  detachments  march  at  their  posts ;  but  in  deep  snow,  they  are  allowed  to  follow  the  pieces. 

OF   ENCAMPMENTS. 

The  encampments  of  infmtry  may  be  arranged  in  two  ways :  in  deep  order,  i.  e. ,  in  columns 
of  attack  ;  or  with  a  deployed  front. 

Plates  15,  16,  and  17  show  the  order  of  encampment  for  regiments  of  3  and  4  battalions, 
in  both  ways. 

The  encampments  with  a  deployed  front  are  used  in  warm  climates,  and  especially  in  cases 
where  the  troops  are  to  remain  a  long  time  in  the  same  place. 

The  allowance  of  tents  is  as  follows :  1  for  every  field  officer,  1  for  every  2  company  officers, 
1  for  every  15  sergeants  and  privates,  2  tents  for  field  guard,  2  for  the  camp  guard,  1  for  the 
quarter  guard. 

The  details  of  encampments  are  as  follows : 

1.  The  tents  of  the  companies  of  each  battalion  are  placed  in  the  tactical  order  of  battle. 

2.  In  the  deep  order,  the  tents  of  each  company  are  in  4  ranks ;  in  the  deployed  order,  they  are 
in  3  ranks. 

3.  A  square  of  7  paces  on  each  side  is  allowed  for  every  tent. 

4.  The  intervals  between  the  soldiers'  tents  are  4  paces. 

5.  The  camp  lines  are  3  lines  of  sods,  occupying  a  width  of  4  paces,  placed  at  the  distance 
of  5  paces  from  the  tents  ;  in  the  deployed  order,  they  are  only  in  front  of  the  camp  ;  in  the 
deep  order,  in  front  and  on  the  flanks  of  each  battalion. 

6.  The  pyramids  of  arms,  (PI.  13,  fig.  4,)  16  for  each  battalion,  are  between  the  lines  and 
the  tents.  In  deep  order  6  pyramids  are  in  front  of  each  battalion,  and  5  on  each  flank  ;  in 
deployed  order,  there  are  2  pyramids  in  front  of  each  platoon.  If  the  pyramids  are  not  set  up, 
the  arms  are  stacked,  in  good  weather. 

7.  In  the  centre  of  each  battalion,  on  the  line  of  pyramids,  the  drums  are  piled  on  a  stand,  and 
the  colors  placed  in  a  rack  in  front  of  them,  (PL  13,  fig.  5.)  The  drummers  of  the  day  place 
their  drums  on  a  separate  stand,  on  the  left  of  the  colors. 

8.  In  the  deployed  camp  of  a  single  battalion,  or  in  the  2d  battalion  of  regiments  of  3 
battalions,  an  interval  of  20  paces  is  left  between  the  platoons  of  the  color  company,  for  the 
tents  of  the  camp  guard. 

9.  The  tents  of  the  company  officers  are  7  paces  in  rear  of  the  soldiers'  tents. 

10.  Five  paces  further  in  rear  are  the  tents  of  the  battalion  commanders  and  the  junior  field 
officers  ;  the  battalion  commanders  in  rear  of  tlie  centre  of  the  right  wing,  the  others  in  rear 
of  the  left  wing  of  their  respective  battalions. 

11.  The  tent  of  the  battalion  adjutant  is  on  the  left  of  that  of  the  battalion  commander.     If 

there  is  no  junior  field  officer,  the  tent  of  the  adjutant  may  occupy  the  place  designated  for 

that  of  the  former. 

22   © 


170  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

12.  The  tents  of  tlie  officers'  servants  are  4  paces  in  rear  of  tliose  last  mentioned. 

13.  The  tent  of  the  colonel  is  behind  the  centre  of  the  regiment,  25  paces  in  rear  of  those  of 
the  officers'  servants.     The  regimental  adjutant  on  his  left. 

14.  The  musicians'  tents  are  32  paces  behind  those  of  the  colonel. 

15.  Seven  paces  in  rear  of  the  musicians  are  placed  the  tents  of  the  commisioned  staif,  i.  c, 
the  paymaster,  quartermaster,  surgeons,  judge  advocate,  and  chaplain ;  in  rear  of  these  are  their 
servants,  the  clerks  of  the  regimental  office,  &c. 

16.  In  rear  of  theseare  the  men  of  the  company  of  the  train ;  their  commander  is  in  front  of  them. 
The  wagons  are  j^laced  as  follows : 

1.  The  money  wagon  on  the  right  of  the  colonel's  tent. 

2.  The  cartridge  wagons  with  the  field  guard;  in  deployed  order  they  are  with  the  field 
guards  of  their  respective  battalions. 

3.  The  ambulances,  wagons  with  hospital  stores,  medicine  and  tools,  the  church  wagons, 
travelling  forges,  and  other  government  wagons,  also  the  artel  and  baggage  wagons  of  the 
regimental  staff  are  placed,  in  regiments  of  3  battalions,  on  the  right  of  the  regimental  staff; 
in  regiments  of  4  batalions — on  both  sides  of  it.  These  wagons  are  formed  in  2  ranks  :  in  the 
front  rank  those  belonging  to  the  officers  and  men  of  the  staff ;  in  the  2d  rank  the  government 
wagons. 

4.  The  wagons  belonging  to  the  battalion,  such  as :  provision  wagons,  tent,  artel  and 
officers'  wagons,  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  battalions,  in  2  ranks;  in  the  front  rank,  the  provision 
and  tent  wagons  ;  in  the  rear  rank,  the  artel  and  officers'  wagons. 

5.  In  deployed  order  the  wagons  are  placed  as  in  deep  order,  except  that  they  are  in  one 
rank. 

6.  Behind  the  wagons,  not  nearer  than  30  paces,  are  the  kitchens,  and  near  them  the  sod 
tables  and  seats  for  the  men's  messing. 

Y.  Forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  kitchens  are  the  sinks. 

The  quarter  guard  is  30  paces  behind  the  line  of  sinks. 

According  to  the  principles  laid  down  above,  in  deep  order,  the  camp  of  a  battalion  occupies 
a  front  of  95  paces  ;  for  a  regiment  of  3  battalions,  335  paces  ;  for  a  regiment  of  4  battalions, 
455  paces  ;  and  the  depth  of  such  a  camp  is  340  paces,  from  the  front  lines  to  the  sinks. 

In  a  deployed  camp,  a  battalion  occupies  a  front  of  184  paces;  a  regiment  of  3  battalions,  622 
paces  ;  a  regiment  of  four  battalions,  811  paces  ;  the  depth  of  such  a  camp  is  268  paces. 

PL  18,  fig.  1.  In  the  camp  of  a  sapper  battalion,  the  engineer  wagons  are  in  front  of  the 
others. 

PI.  18,  fig.  3,  shows  the  arrangement  of  a  park  of  pontons,  with  the  camp  of  the  company  of 
sappers  serving  with  it. 

PL  18,  fig.  2,  gives  the  details  of  the  camp  of  a  heavy  battery  ;  that  of  a  light  battery  diflers 
from  it  only  in  having  2  tents  less.  When  two  batteries  are  encamped  side  by  side,  an  interval 
of  25  paces  is  left  for  the  camp  guard. 

If  the  troops  are  in  huts,  instead  of  tents,  they  are  arranged  according  to  the  rules  for  encamp- 
ments, as  shown  in  PL  20,  fig.  1.  The  battalions  are  arranged  in  columns  of  attack,  each  platoon 
having  a  separate  hut. 

Many  of  the  details  of  encampments,  such  as  with  regard  to  hospitals,  &c.,  as  given  in  the 
cavalry  regulations,  apply  to  the  infantry. 

PL  18,  fig.  4,  shows  the  arrangement  of  a  division  of  infantry,  with  its  artillery,  in  a  camp 
in  deep  order. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   IWCIiELLAN.  171 

PI.  19  shows  the  arrangement  of  a  similar  camji  for  2  divisions  ;  the  regiments  are  supposed 
to  he  of  4  hattalions,  the  artillery  hrigades  of  4  batteries  each. 

The  rules  and  dimensions  which  have  been  given  are  to  be  regarded  as  standards,  from  which 
it  is  permitted  to  depart  only  in  cases  of  absolute  necessity ;  circumstances  may  require  the 
intervals  to  be  increased  or  diminished ;  the  disposition  of  the  artillery  to  be  changed ;  the 
front  of  the  camp  to  be  on  a  broken  line,  &c. ,  &c. 

To  superintend  the  daily  duty  in  camp,  the  following  details  are  made  in  a  regiment : 

1.  A  regimental  officer  of  the  day,  who  is  one  of  the  commanders  of  companies. 

2.  A  battalion  officer  of  the  day  for  each  battalion,  from  among  the  lieutenants. 

3.  In  each  company,  1  sergeant  and  2  privates  of  the  day. 

4.  A  drummer  of  the  day  in  each  battalion. 

5.  Sergeants  of  the  day  in  charge  of  the  kitchens. 

In  an  isolated  battalion  a  similar  detail  is  made,  except  that  the  battalion  officer  of  the  day 
is  one  of  the  captains. 

In  an  isolated  brigade  there  is  a  brigade  officer  of  the  day  ;  in  every  division  there  is  a  division 
officer  of  the  day,  but  none  of  brigade. 

These  officers  are  from  the  number  of  battalion  commanders  and  junior  field  officers. 

When  there  are  several  divisions  in  camp,  there  is  a  camp  officer  of  the  day,  who  is  one  of  the 
commanders  of  the  infantry  brigades  and  regiments,  or  of  the  artillery  brigades. 

If  the  commander  approaches  the  camp,  the  privates  of  the  day  call  out  "Parlies  of  the  day  on 
(lie  lines !  "  at  which  they  take  post  as  follows :  the  regimental  officer  of  the  day  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  regiment,  15  paces  from  the  lines  ;  the  battalion  officers  of  the  day  in  front  of  the 
colors,  8  paces  from  the  lines  ;  the  sergeants  and  privates  of  the  day  at  the  guidons  of  their 
companies  ;  the  drummer  of  the  day  by  his  drum. — (See  PI.  15,  16,  and  17.) 

OF  FIELD,  CAMP,  AND  QUARTER  GUARDS. 

(PL  15,  16,  and  17.)  When  encamped,  infantry  post  field,  camp,  and  quarter  guards. 
The  field  guards  protect  the  front  of  the  camp  by  a  chain  of  double  sentinels ;  the  quarter  guards 
supply  a  chain  of  single  sentinels  in  rear  of  the  camp  ;  the  camp  guards  furnish  the  sentinels 
for  the  interior  of  the  camp. 

In  camps  in  deep  order  each  regiment  posts  a  field  guard  ;  in  deployed  camps,  each  battalion; 
each  regiment  always  posts  a  camp  and  quarter  guard. 

Isolated  battalions  post  field,  camp,  and  quarter  guards. 

The  field  guards  are  placed  about  200  paces  in  front  of  the  camp;  the  quarter  guards  not  less 
than  30  paces  behind  the  sinks. 

The  chains  of  sentinels  of  the  field  and  quarter  guards  are  posted  at  from  75  to  100  paces  from 
the  guards  ;  they  should  be  drawn  in  on  both  flanks  of  the  encampment. 

The  sentinels'  posts  are  about  100  paces  apart. 

In  the  field  guard  the  sentinels  of  the  same  pair  are  about  100  paces  apart. 

The  sentinels  of  the  field  and  quarter  guards  carry  their  pieces  at  a  shoulder. 

In  the  field  chain  the  grenadiers,  carbineers,  and  riflemen,  do  not  stand  in  the  same  pair  with 
men  of  the  other  comiDanies. 

The  camj)  guard  is  posted,  in  a  separate  battalion,  in  the  interval  between  the  two  wings  ;  in 
regiments  having  two  or  four  battalions,  in  the  central  interval  of  the  regiment ;  in  regiments 
of  three  battalions,  in  the  interval  between  the  wings  of  the  centre  battalion. 

By  the  camp  guard  sentinels  are  posted  over  the  colors,  arms,  and  at  the  tents  of  the  colonels 


172  "  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

and  battalion  commanders.  The  sentinels  over  the  colors,  and  at  the  tents  of  the  battalion 
commanders,  stand  at  an  order  ;  those  over  the  arms  and  at  the  colonel's  tent/at  a  shoulder. 

Men  from  the  elite  companies  are  posted  over  the  colors. 

In  camp  the  arms  of  all  the  guards  are  stacked. 

All  the  sentinels  stand  in  front  of  the  block  on  which  their  knapsacks  are  placed.  If  there 
is  no  block  the  knapsack  is  laid  on  the  ground,  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  sentinel.  In  all  cases 
the  knapsack  flap  is  upwards,  the  top  towards  the  sentinel,  and  the  straps  rolled  on  top.  In 
each  regiment,  and  also  in  each  separate  battalion,  the  field  guard  is  senior  to  the  others,  which 
are  subordinate  to  it  in  all  things.  In  regiments  encamped  with  deployed  front  the  different 
field  guards  are  senior  by  turns. 

If  there  is  more  than  one  regiment  in  camp,  then  one  of  the  field  guards  is  designated  in  turn 
as  senior,  and  is  called  the  "senior  redant." 

The  field  guards  of  separate  battalions  are  never  detailed  as  senior  redant. 

In  encampments  the  following  rules  are  observed  with  regard  to  the  detail  of  men  for  guard 
duty : 

1.  In  a  regiment  the  men  are  detailed  from  all  the  battalions  ;  and  in  the  battalions  from  all 
the  companies. 

2.  Each  guard  consists  of  men  of  the  same  battalion,  except  in  the  camp  guards  of  4-battalion 
regiments,  which  are  from  two  of  the  battalions. 

3.  In  deployed  camps  each  battalion  supplies  its  own  field  guard. 

4.  Field  and  camp  guards  are  commanded  by  officers  ;  quarter  guards  by  sergeants.  The 
senior  officers  on  guard  are  with  the  field  guards  ;  with  the  senior  redant  there  are  two  officers. 

5.  There  is  a  drummer  with  every  field  and  camp  guard  ;  if  there  are  any  riflemen  on  guard, 
then  a  horn  player  is  detailed  ;  when  any  of  the  grenadiers  or  carbineers  are  on  guard,  a  fifer 
is  also  detailed.  At  the  senior  redant  there  are  one  drummer,  one  fifer,  and  one  horn  player  ; 
if  any  riflemen  are  present  there  are  two  horn  players. 

At  the  guards  the  drums  are  laid  on  the  ground  ;  the  horns  on  the  left  side  of  the  knapsack 
block  of  the  sentinel  at  the  guard  tent.  If  both  drummers  and  horn  players  are  present,  the 
horns  are  laid  on  the  drums. 

The  regulations  give  minutely  the  strength  of  the  various  guards  in  all  cases  ;  in  this  extract 
a  few  examples  will  be  given. 

GUARDS  IN  A  DEEP  CAMP  OF  A  SINGLE  BATTALION. 

(a.)  The  field  guard :  1  officer,  2  sergeants,  1  musician,  30  privates. 
The  following  sentinels  are  jiosted  : 

At  the  guard  tent 1 

In  the  chain,  4  pairs  of  sentinels 8 

9  men  in  each  relief. 

For  3  reliefs 27 

Corporals  for  posting  reliefs 2 

Private  as  orderly 1 

Total 30 

One  of  the  sergeants  makes  the  necessary  reports. 

(6.)  The  camp  guard :  1  officer,  2  sergeants,  1  musician,  24  privates. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  173 


This  guard  posts  tlie  following  sentinels : 

At  the  guard  tents 1 

Over  the  color 1 

Over  the  arms 4 

Over  the  tent  of  battalion  commander 1 


7  men  in  each  relief. 

For  3  reliefs 21 

Corporals  to  relieve  sentinels 2 

Private,  as  orderly 1 

Total 24 

For  a  sapper  battalion,  3  extra  men  may  be  detailed  to  furnish  a  sentinel  over  the  engineer 
wagons. 

(c.)  The  quarter  guard :  1  sergeant,  20  privates. 
The  following  sentinels  are  posted  : 

At  the  guard  tent 1 

In  the  chain,  4  posts 4 


5  men  in  each  relief. 


For  3  reliefs 15 

Corporal  to  post  sentinels 1 

Corporal  to  make  reports 1 

Sentinels  over  prisoners... 3 

Total 20 


GUARDS  IN  A  DEPLOYED  CAMP  OF  A  REGIMENT  HAVING  FOUR  BATTALIONS. 

(a.)  The  field  guard  in  each  battalion  :   1  officer,  3  sergeants,  1  musician,  22  privates , 
Each  field  guard  posts  the  following  sentinels  : 

At  the  guard  tents 1 

In  the  chain,  3  pairs  of  sentinels 6 

7  men  in  each  relief. 

For  3  reliefs  21 

Private,  as  orderly 1 

Total 22 

(6.)  The  camp  guard :  1  officer,  2  sergeants,  1  musician,  59  privates. 
This  guard  posts  the  following  sentinels  : 

At  the  guard  tents 1 

Over  the  colors 4 

Over  the  arms 8 

Over  the  tents  of  commanders 5 

18  men  in  each  relief. 


174  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE 

For  3  reliefs 54 

Corporals  for  posting  reliefs 4 

Private,  as  orderly 1 

Total 59 

(c.)  Quarter  guard :  2  sergeants,  39  privates. 

It  posts  the  following  sentinels  : 

At  the  guard  tents 1 

In  the  chain,  10  posts 10 


11  men  in  each  relief. 

For  3  reliefs 33 

Corporals  to  post  reliefs 2 

Corporal  to  make  reports 1 

Over  the  prisoners 8 

Total 39 

The  corporals  are  not  regarded  as  non-commissioned  officers ;  and  in  addition  to  those  men- 
tioned above,  others  are  posted  as  sentinels  at  the  tents  of  commanders,  &c. 

In  camp,  prisoners  are  coniined :  officers  at  the  camp  guard ;  sergeants  and  privates  at  the 
quarter  guard.  There  is  always  a  sentinel,  at  an  order,  posted  over  the  tent  in  which  an  officer 
or  soldier  is  confined.  The  commander-in-chief  may  replace  the  camp  and  quarter  guards  by 
sergeants'  pickets. 

The  picket  which  replaces  the  camp  guard  will  be  of  the  following  strength : 

In  a  separate  battalion,  1  sergeant  and  10  men. 

In  a  regiment  of  four  battalions,  1  sergeant  and  19  men. 

If  there  are  prisoners  under  the  charge  of  the  picket,  3  men  are  added  to  the  numbers  given 
above. 

The  strength  of  the  picket  which  replaces  the  quarter  guard  must  depend  upon  circumstances 
and  the  number  of  prisoners  under  its  charge. 

In  addition  to  the  guards  already  mentioned,  special  guards  are  detailed  for  those  villages 
near  the  camp  which  are  occupied  as  depots,  quarters  for  staff  officers,  &c. 

The  guards  detailed  by  foot  artillery  do  not  differ  essentially  from  those  prescribed  for  horse 
artillery  in  the  cavalry  regulations. 

The  guard  detailed  by  a  company  of  sappers  serving  with  a  ponton  train  is  of  1  sergeant  and 
20  men,  as  follows  : 

At  the  guard  tent 1 

Over  the  arms 2 

Over  the  ponton  park 2 

At  the  commander's  tent 1 

6  men  in  each  relief. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   MTLELLAN.  175 


For  tliree  reliefs 18 

Corporal  to  post  sentinels 1 

Corjjoral  to  make  reports 1 

Total 20 


Under  ordinary  circumstances,  the  sentinels  are  relieved  every  two  hours. 

The  general  rules  for  the  performance  of  duty  in  camp,  patrols,  rounds,  care  of  arms,  reports, 
alarms,  precautions  against  fires,  &c.,  &c.,  as  given  in  the  cavalry  regulations,  apply  to  the 
case  of  infantry. 

BIVOUACS. 

Troops  are  said  to  bivouac  when  they  pass  the  night  in  the  open  air,  or  under  shelters  hastily 
constructed  of  branches,  brush,  straw,  &c. 

When  infantry  are  to  bivouac,  (PI.  20,  fig.  1,)  they  are  formed  on  the  ground  they  are  to 
occupy  in  columns  of  attack,  but  the  distances  between  the  platoons  must  not  be  less  than  20 
paces,  and  the  men  open  out  well  in  ranks  ;  they  then  stack  arms  where  they  stand,  hang  their 
belts  and  helmets  on  the  stacks,  (PL  13,  fig.  6,)  and  lay  the  knapsacks  on  the  ground  behind 
the  stacks. 

In  this  manner  the  bivouac  of  a  battalion  occupies  a  front  of  60  paces  and  a  depth  of  80. 

In  bivouac  the  colors  remain  at  their  posts — i.  e. ,  between  the  stacks  of  the  4th  and  5th  pla- 
toons— leaning  against  the  front  of  the  pile  of  drums. 

The  officers,  band,  and  field  music,  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  battalions. 

PL  20,  fig.  3,  shows  the  arrangement  of  a  bivouac  which  is  to  be  occupied  for  some  time,  and 
when  the  men  are  permitted  to  erect  shelters. 

In  this  case,  as  soon  as  the  stacks  are  formed,  and  the  accoutrements  hung  upon  them,  the 
half  battalions  face  outwards,  march  out  clear  of  the  stacks,  and  then  face  again  to  the  front. 

This  manner  of  arranging  the  bivouac  ofi"ers  the  advantage  of  giving  the  men  more  room,  but 
presents  the  inconvenience  of  requiring  more  ground,  for  each  battalion  occupies  a  front  of  120 
paces ;  this  method  can  therefore  be  employed  only  when  the  ground  permits  a  great  develop- 
ment. In  bivouac,  the  shelters  should  be  arranged  with  a  certain  regularity,  leaving  free 
passages  between  them. 

Although,  in  PL  20,  figs.  2  and  3,  particular  dimensions  are  given  for  the  front  and  depth  of 
the  bivouacs  of  battalions,  and  the  intervals  between  them,  yet,  whenever  circumstances  permit, 
these  dimensions  may  be  increased,  so  as  to  give  the  men  more  room  ;  but  these  dimensions 
should  never  be  decreased. 

Eegiments  of  3  battalions  bivouac  in  one  line  ;  those  of  4  battalions,  in  two  lines,  140  paces 
apart,  counting  between  the  heads  of  the  battalions. 

Batteries  are  placed  in  bivouac  either  deployed  or  in  column,  as  shown  in  PI  21,  figs.  1  and  2. 

In  the  front  line,  artillery  bivouacs  120  paces  in  front  of  the  infantry,  and  is  deployed  ;  in  the 
rear  line  and  reserves,  it  may  be  placed  behind  the  infantry,  in  columns  by  half  batteries. 

The  front  of  the  bivouac  of  a  deployed  battery  is  120  paces  ;  when  in  column,  by  half  batteries 
it  is  60  paces. 

An  interval  of  40  paces  is  left  between  the  bivouacs  of  batteries  and  the  nearest  battalions. 

When  in  rear  of  the  infantry,  artillery  is  not  placed  less  than  100  paces  from  it,  counting  from 
the  rear  of  the  infantry  to  the  line  of  guns. 


176  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Batteries  in  bivouac  in  front  of  infantry,  even  if  in  reserve,  sliould  always  be  unllmbered ; 
those  in  rear  of  the  infantry  should  always  be  limbered  up. 

PI.  21,  figs.  3,  4,  5,  PI.  22,  give  examples  of  the  arrangement  of  the  bivouacs  of  brigades  and 
divisions,  both  in  the  line  of  battle  and  in  reserve. 

The  examples  of  bivouacs  given  should  be  regarded  only  as  guides  ;  for  the  ground,  and  other 
circumstances,  may  often  make  it  necessary  to  depart  from  them,  both  in  the  distribution  of  the 
troops  and  with  regard  to  the  intervals  between  them. 

The  troops  of  the  advanced  guard,  when  in  sight  of  the  enemy,  always  bivouac  in  the  order  of 
battle  ;  therefore,  the  arrangements  of  their  bivouac  must  dejjend  upon  the  nature  of  the  ground, 
and  cannot  be  determined  by  any  arbitrary  rules. 

If  the  troops  are  to  pass  the  night  in  readiness  for  action,  they  are  placed  in  bivouac  a  little  in 
rear  of  the  position  for  battle  ;  the  different  parts  may  also  be  closed  a  little  nearer  together,  so 
as  to  hold  them  better  in  hand. 

In  bivouac,  the  cartridge  wagons  of  the  advanced  guard  and  lines  of  battle  are  placed  witli  the 
quarter  guards,  instead  of  with  the  fieldguards ;  in  this  case,  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the 
kitchen  and  other  fires  at  a  safe  distance. 

The  rest  of  the  wagons  are  arranged  as  prescribed  in  the  cavalry  regulations. 

In  bivouac,  guards  are  posted  as  in  encamjnncnts,  observing  what  follows  : 

1.  In  divisions  arranged  in  two  lines,  (PL  21,  fig.  5,  PL  22,  fig.  1,)  the  regiments  of  the  1st 
line  post  field  guards,  those  of  the  2d  line  post  quarter  guards  ;  in  addition,  there  may  be,  if 
necessary,  sergeants'  guards  on  the  flanks,  to  connect  the  chains  of  the  field  and  quarter  guards. 

2.  In  divisions  posted  in  reserve,  (PL  22,  figs.  2  and  3,)  the  4th  regiment  posts  field  guards, 
the  1st  regiment  posts  quarter  guards,  the  2d  and  3d  post  field  guards  on  the  flanks. 

3.  Camp  guards  are  10  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  troops  posting  them. 

4.  In  regiments  of  4  battalions,  arranged  in  2  lines,  tlie  camp  guard  is  posted  ojiposite  the 
interval  between  the  battalions  of  the  1st  line  ;  if  there  is  a  battery  in  this  interval,  the  guard 
is  posted  on  its  right. 

5.  The  sentinels  posted  over  the  arms,  at  the  angles  of  the  battalions,  (PL  20,  figs.  2  and  3,) 
are  arranged  as  in  encampments,  with  the  difference,  that,  for  a  regiment  of  4  battalions,  in  two 
lines,  (PL  20,  fig.  2,)  two  posts  are  necessary  for  the  exterior  angles  of  the  2d  and  3d 
battalions. 

6.  In  bivouac,  there  is  a  sentinel  at  the  hut  of  tlie  battalion  commander. 
A  guard  may  be  posted  at  the  quarters  of  detached  commanders. 

In  all  other  respects  the  rules  for  cavalry  biouvacs  ai:)ply  to  those  of  infantry. 

ARMS,  ACCOUTREMENTS,  ETC. ,  OF  THE  INFANTRY. 

The  mass  of  the  infantry  are  armed  simply  with  the  musket  and  bayonet;  all  sergeants,  some 
of  the  regiments  of  the  guard,  and  the  elite  companies  of  all  regiments,  have  a  short  sabre. 

The  rifle  battalion  have  a  rifle,  with  sword  bayonet. 

In  the  old  pattern  of  belts,  still  in  general  use,  there  were  two  thin,  broad  shoulder  belts — 
one  for  the  cartridge  box,  the  other  for  the  bayonet  and  sword  scabbards  ;  the  cap  i^ouch  on  the 
front  of  the  cartridge-box  belt ;  no  waist  belt. 

In  the  new  pattern,  there  is  a  single  shoulder  belt  for  the  cartridge-box,  and  a  waist  belt,  to 
which  the  bayonet  and  sword  scabbards  are  attached  ;  the  cap  pouch  is  on  the  end  of  the 
cartridge-box. 

The  cartridge-box  contains  60  rounds. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  177 

The  knapsack  is  of  hide,  with  the  hair  outside  ;  it  has  two  belts,  crossing  on  the  breast,  and 
attached  to  the  knapsack  by  swivels. 

v-  The  canteen  is  a  tin  bottle,  of  the  shape  and  dimensions  given  in  the  annexed 

pi         sketch ;  it  has  a  tin  cover  which  serves  as  a  cup  ;  it  is  carried  strapped  to  the  back 
of  the  knapsack,  as  shown  in  PL  13,  fig.  1. 

The  uniform  coat,  or  overcoat,  is  carried,  in  a  water  proof  cylinder,  on  top  of 
the  knapsack  ;  the  forage  cap  in  a  linen  pocket  on  the  front  of  the  knapsack . 

In  the  knapsack  are  carried :   2  shirts,  1  pair  drawers,  2  extra  pieces  of  linen  for 
wrapping  the  feet,  leather  for  1  pair  of  boots,  3  brushes,  1  pair  of  summer  or 
winter  pants,  and  4  days'  bread  or  biscuit.     There  is  a  little  pocket  in  the  knap- 
sack for  a  small  rectangular  tin  box,  containing  spare  percussion  caps. 
The  wiper,  screw  driver,  and  ball  screw  are  carried  in  the  cartridge-box. 
In  the  cartridge  wagons,  4  to  each  battalion,  there  are  carried  40  rounds  extra  for  each  man. 
The  officers  have  a  light  sabre,  with  a  leather  scabbard. 

The  field  music  have  drums  and  horns  ;  the  elite  companies  have  fifes.  The  drums  are  of 
brass,  18"  in  diameter,  12"  deep. 

The  transportation  usually  allowed  is  as  follows  :  1  small  wagon  for  the  officers  of  each  com- 
pany ;  2  for  the  soldiers'  tents  ;  2  for  6  days'  bread.     Cattle  are  driven  on  the  hoof. 

The  old  troops  are  seldom  drilled,  and  are  annoyed  as  little  as  possible ;  target  firing  is  much 
practiced. 

The  ordinary  length  of  march  is  from  13  to  17  miles  a  day  ;  it  is  usual  to  halt  one  day  out 
of  every  three  or  four. 

THE  MILITIA. 

The  organization  of  the  militia  dates  from  the  commencement  of  the  recent  war.  They  were, 
in  fact,  battalions  of  regular  troops,  rasied  for  the  period  of  the  war,  and  with  certain  peculi- 
arities of  organization  and  equipment  to  distinguish  them  from  the  standing  army.  They  were 
organized  in  battalions,  of  a  composition  similar  to  those  of  the  old  army,  but  were  not  neces- 
sarily formed  into  regiments. 

The  men  were  mostly  serfs  and  crown  peasants  ;  the  sergeants  generally  from  the  old  army  ; 
the  officers  had  for  the  most  part  served  in  the  old  army,  and  were  principally  selected  from 
among  the  number  of  those  who  had  resigned  their  commisions,  or  had  been  granted  unlimited 
furloughs. 

The  old  troops  were  much  employed  as  drill  masters  for  the  militia. 

»  UNIFORM. 

The  dress  of  the  militia  was  eminently  national,  having  little  or  nothing  in  common  with  the 
usual  uniforms  of  Europe. 

The  coat,  a  Russian  caftan,  or  long,  loose,  double  breasted  frock  coat,  with  no  buttons  visible. 

The  pants  always  tucked  in  the  boot  tops. 

The  cap,  not  unlike  the  forage  cap  in  use  in  the  United  States  army  during  the  Mexican  war, 
except  that  the  top  was  somewhat  higher  and  stiffer,  and  the  vizor  larger  ;  the  only  ornament 
upon  the  cap  a  brazen  Greek  cross. 

The  coat,  pants,  and  cap  always  of  the  same  color ;  which  was  generally  a  dark  shade  of 
brownish  grey,  sometimes  almost  black. 

The  facings  usually  of  some  very  dark  color. 
23   © 


178  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

Instead  of  overcoats,  they  bad  blankets. 

Tbe  men  were  not  required  to  crop  the  hair,  nor  to  shave  the  beard  ;  both  being  worn  long 
and  full  in  the  Russian  style. 

The  uniform  of  the  officers  was  similar  to  that  of  the  men. 

ARMS  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

On  account  of  the  deficiency  in  the  number  of  percussion  muskets,  many  of  the  battalions 
were  armed  with  the  flint  lock  muskets. 

The  only  belt  was  a  black  leather  waist  belt,  fastening  by  a  buckle  in  front.  To  this  were 
attached :  a  cartridge-box  of  black  leather,  without  a  frame  ;  the  bayonet  scabbard ;  and  a 
leather  case,  containing  a  small  hand  axe. 

Knapsack  of  black  leather,  and  without  frame ;  it  was  secured  by  means  of  belts  and  swivels, 
as  described  for  the  knapsack  of  the  old  army. 

Considering  the  very  short  time  these  troops  had  been  in  service,  their  appearance  and  drill 
was  very  creditable,  and  they  would,  no  doubt,  have  proved  to  be  very  efficient  troops. 

There  were  large  numbers  of  them  at  St.  Petersburg  and  on  the  shores  of  the  Baltic. 

GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  1st  Cavalry. 
October  7,  1856. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B  M'CLELLAN. 


179 


EXPLANATION  OF  SIGNS. 


General  oC division. 

General  of  brigade. 

I 

" --- Colonel. 

I»- -  Commander  of  battalion. 

i 

I" - Junior  field  officer. 

i 

H Senior  adjutant. 

a 

■ - -Adjutant. 

i 

■ - Officer  with  the  markers. 

li - Division  quartermaster. 

B Captain. 

^ - First  lieutenant. 

^ Second  lieutenant. 

°  Ensign. 

® Orderly  sergeant. 

^ Sergeant. 

«" Color  bearer. 

*- -  - Right  guide. 

* Left  guide. 

^  Right  flank  aligner. 

^ Left  flank  aligner. 

»- IVIarker. 

g^ - —  Color  aes. 


4. 
1. 

I 

i.. 

M.. 
i. 

i.. 
».. 


Skirmisher. 
Riflemen. 
Drum  major. 
Band. 

Regimental  ehitl  hoiii  (ila>L-r. 
Battalion  chief  horn-player. 
Horn  player. 

Regimental  chief  drummer. 
Battalion  chief  drummer. 

Drummer. 
Fifer. 

Column  by  platoons,  right  iii  front. 
Column  by  platoons,  left  in  front. 
Double  column  on  the  centre  platoon. 
Column  of  attack. 
■ First  regiment. 


180 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  8. 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

Plate  1. 


Fig.  II. 

Si 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


Ill 


-a     I 


-a 


Marcliing. 
Fig.  5. 


Fig.  6. 


^ 


Fig.  7. 


Salute  at  an  order. 


Fig.  9. 


Fig.  10. 


Cliarge  Bayonet. 


Slope  Arms. 


Inspection  of  Arms. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


181 


4 


Eh 

05 


O 
o 

I— ( 

< 

pj 
o 


o 

03 

I— I 


^ 


0 


182 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE 
Plate  3.— SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


i!)         lb        lit        £> 


Pig.  5. 


Jt    rf£ 


a  A        & 


b        ^        rti        SX 


S-n 


M  ^m 


6      6     di 


Double  column  on  centre  platoon. 


Fig.  6. 


H^AiiAetiii^ii^Ak 


Double  column  on  centre  division. 


Fig.  3. 


tt       d       M 


Close  column  by  platoons. 


O        ii        st        &        ^ 


6      c3      0       0      a 


Fig.  4. 


^diiii!i^iUiAdi&ddi 


Close  column  by  divisions. 


Pig.  7. 


■d  ■         ib         n  a  nb  n  oi         n  art 


USX         Ja         A  tM         ah  cb  di  id  ra         q3 


AAAAkihAAAAi 


HAiiiai^ihiaiiiiAk 


Column  of  attack. 


•I 


REPORT  OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M°CLELLAN. 

Plate  4. 


Fig.  1. 


» 


183 


»•   B3t 


Column  l>y  division  at  half  distance — to  pass  in  review. 


Fig.  2. 


•ef, 


Fig.  3. 


Square  formed  from  deployed  front. 
Fig.  5. 

«„«„",    ' .,',',',...■» till . T— ^ 


Fii.  4. 


C3         O        C3 


'^nB* 


Square  Ibrmedfrom  column  of  attack. 


Fig.  6. 


Square  formed  from  close  colums  by  platoons- 
right  in  front. 


i 

j    tjjiiiittim* 

-" 

J: 

£K 

::: 

i 

I 

SS 

Fig.  7. 


UCCCCtCCLD] 


Square  formed  from  double  onlumn  on  centre 
platoon. 


Formation  of  skirmishers  in  equare  formed 
from  deployed  front. 


Formation  of  skirmishers  in  a  square  formed 

from  column  of  attack. 


^jfittitJiiii* 


-tttttitttiUs* 


Formation  of  <:kirmisher^  wlien  haltalinn  iy  deployed. 


184 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


Plate  5. 


Fig.  3. 


Formation  of  skirniisliers  in 
a  close  column  by  platoons. 


Fig.  2. 


%]|!iiltJJlU* 


Sfepiiliitf 


'iimm^ 


*ii«um!|p 


r"^"Trrj"'"^  ■ 


Formaliuii  uIskLiuii^iliera  in  coluiiia  ol' attack. 


Formation  of  skirmishers 
in  a  column  doultled  on 
the  centre  platoon. 

Fig.  4 


'l' 


3d  battalion  company. 


Jii  battalion  company. 


1st  battalion  company. 


Battalion  in  line  of  company  columns. 
Fig.  5. 
3d  battalion  company.  9d  battalion  company 


1st  battalinn  cnni|i;iny 


A  A  i  4  ai  A  * 


^ 


Carbineer  or  Grenadier  ctunpany. 


Or(f<;r  of  baltlc  in  liin'  of  company  coIumn^;.  wirli  skirmishers  in  advance. 


REPORT   OP   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M^CLELLAN. 

Plate  6 .—EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 


185 


fiiBt'^ 


Pig.  1. 


Posiiions  of  coinniauders  in  a  regiment  of  4  l»attuJions,  deployed  in  two  lines 


■%att« 


is, 


Fig.  2. 


t,  i 


mia 


Fig.  3. 

? 


^?H!3  F 


\& 


M 


PosiUons  of  commanders  in  a  regiment  in  line  of 
columns,  with  close  intervals. 


■°  I  i 


PosJiions  of  commanders  in  a  brigade  formed  in  two  linua  ot 

columns,  with  close  intervals. 


Fig.  4. 

% 


Pig.  5. 


i 


Position  of  commanders,  &c.,  in  a  brigade  formed  in 
one  general  close  column. 


is> 


trfn-ij 


iJ^  la 


u 

r 


Regiment  in  general  close  column,  with  loaded  anna. 


24  © 


186 


111 

la 


MILITARY  COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Plate  7.— ORDERS  OF  BATTLE. 


i3 


Fig-  a. 


Fig.  3. 
.I.I..I.J  4.i.l-> 


Pi^.  4. 

n\ 

M 

2   ; 

Paces. 

Fig.  1.  Order  of  reserve  for  a  brigade  composed  of  re^ments  having  3  ballalions- 
Fig.  2.  1st  order  ofbaltle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  3  batlalions. 
Fig.  3.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  3  batlalions. 
Fig.  4.  4th  order  of  battle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  3  battalions. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  6. 
Light  battery.  Junior  heavy  battery. 


ES 


"IB 


Fig.  7. 
Light  battery.  Junior  heavy  battery* 


I  t  1  I  1  n  I 


fS 


m~ 


IX 


m 


4+++ 
t4.+4. 

Senior  lleavy  battery. 


-IS£L 


tao  901 


Paces. 


Senior  heavy  battery. 


Fig.  5.  Order  of  reserve  for  a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  3  battalions. 
Fig.  6.  1st  order  of  battle  for  a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  3  battalions. 
Fig.  7.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  3  battalions. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.   M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  8. 


187 


2  J 

+  +  ++ 

t+4-  + 


Fi2.  3. 


4i4i  tl1><v•l"l•>t■ 


Fig.  2. 
H-4  1-H -l-H- 


Fig.  3. 


m 


^ 


E 


W 


^ 


m 


1 


Fig.  1.  Order  of  reserve  for  a  regiraenl  having  4  battalions. 
Fig.  2.  2d  order  of  battle  for  a  regiment  liaving  4  battalions. 
Fig.  3.  1st  order  of  battle  for  a  regiment  having  4  battalioiia. 
Fig.  4.  4th  order  of  battle  for  a  regiment  having  4  battalions. 


Fig.  6. 


^ 


2 


Fig.  8. 
♦♦♦+♦♦♦♦ 


|..|..;..|..1..H"|. 


3 


Fig.  4. 
******** 


•4,  a  I 


\M 


03 


Fig.  7. 


m 


tH"H"ll"|. 


Fig.  9. 


t  ■!■  +  * 

an 

Fig.  5.    Order  of  reserve  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  4  battilions. 
Fig.  6.    1st  order  of  battle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regunents  having  4  battalions. 
Fig.  7.   2d  order  of  battle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  4  baitalions. 
Fig.  8.    4th  order  of  battle  for  a  brigade  composed  of  regiments  having  4  battalions. 
Fig.    y.    Order  of  reserve  for  a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  4  battalions. 


1 1  ■l'4.J.H.i|.H..|4 
4,j.,|4.M..|'I.M.14 


2d  ligllt  battery. 
+  t  +  +  .H-l  + 


m^ 


Fig.  10. 


Heavy  battery*. 


2d  light  battery. 


Fig.  11. 
Heavy  battery. 


1st  light  battery. 
j..|..|.+,|.,|„|„|. 


ttn- 


Fig.  10.    1st  order  of  battle  for  a  division  composed  ot  regiments  having  4  battalions. 
Fig.  II.    3d  order  of  battle  for  a  divisioo  composed  of  regiments  having  4  baitalions> 


188 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE 
Plate   9.— ORDERS  OF  BATTLE— Continued. 

Fig.  1. 

+  tiitii.t*t  I  limit  (tttttH 


m 


*     ^" 


■'W'lf""f 


<•■  3 


Fig.  2. 


"m " 


^■•{■■\--\-')-t'\  ♦ 


"0 


«        3        2        1 


"m 


mrr^ir* 


_j"  Paces. 


Fig.  3. 


tt 
tt 
tt 

tt 


Fig.  4. 


t» 
tt 


Fig.  5. 


n. 

IS 

B- 

m 

♦'> 

tt 

*4 

itt 

+♦ 

tt 

•I'l 

tt 

Fig.  6. 


tt 
+t 
tt 
tt 


Fig.  7. 


tt 
tt 


t* 

tt 
tt 
tt 


1< 

El' 

tt 
tt 
tt 
tt 

!• 


++ 
*♦ 
tt 
♦t 


t* 
itt 


tt 
tt 


•USSL 


Fig.  1.  Third  order  of  battle,  for  a  diTision  composed  of  regiments  having  four  battaJions. 
Fig.  2.  Fourtli  order  of  battle,  for  a  division  composed  of  regiments  having  foiu"  battalions. 
Fig.  3.  A  regiment  of  four  battalions,  in  one  general  column. 
Fig.  4. 1 

Fig.  5.  I 

Fie  6  f ''°™P'>^°<' °'^''S''°*nt8  having  tour  batlalioOB. 

Fig.?., 


Fig.  1 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M°CLELLAN. 
Plate  10.— ORDERS  OF  BATTLE— Continued. 

Fig.  2. 


189 


Fig.  3. 


ins 


4,.},:.^i 


^,  .1.  .1.  .|.  .|.  .1.  .|.  ,1, 


n^ 


ttr  7f  ea  as  a  aafi  ^po  ssa  tim 

'■  ■i"'i I  I  I  I  I 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  3. 


<^ 


•M-H- 


.I..|,.|..|. 


Fig.  6. 


.!■  .!■  .|.  .].  .|,  ,|.  ,|  .|. 


.l.,(.,|..|,  ,|,  ./..f .(, 


For  scale  see  fig.  3,  above. 


Fig.  7. 


^^ 


Fig.  1.  A  regiment  of  4  battalions,  in  order  of  reserve,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  2.  A  regiment  of  4  battalions,  in  first  order  of  baitle,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  3.  A  regiment  of  4  battalions,  in  fourth  order  of  battle,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  4.  A  brigade  of  4  battalion  regiments,  in  order  of  reserve,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  5.  A  brigade  of  4  battalion  regiments,  in  first  order  of  battle,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  6.  A  brigade  of  4  battalion  regiments,  in  second  order  of  battle,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  7.  A  brigade  of  4  battalion  regiments,  in  fourth  order  of  battle,  foimed  mlo  squares. 


190 


•!■  •!■  i  t  i  i  I  •!• 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 
Plate  11— ORDERS  OF  BATTLE— Continued. 

Fig.  1. 


■I-  ,!■  -l-  I-  ■!■  •!■  I-  l- 


.|.  ,1.  .|.  4.  I-  -I    I-  * 


^       H        P        ^ 

S  i  -i  JL 


.|.  .1.  .|.  .|.  .1.  -V  ■[■ 


,|.  .1.  .|.  .1.  X  .|.  .|.  .1. 


I.  .1.  .1.  .I.  .1.  .I. .{.  .1. 


IE 


Fig.  1.   A  division,  of  4-battalion  regiments,  in  1st  order  of  batlle,  formed  into  squares. 
Fig.  2.   A  division,  of  4-batlalion  regiments,  in  4th  order  of  batlle,  formed  into  squares. 


Fig.  3. 


Application  of  tlie  Ist  order  of  battle  to  the  ground,  iu  tbe  cose  of  a  divielon  of  regiments  having  4  battalion*. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    irCLELLAN. 


191 


Plate   12— ORDERS  OF  BATTLE— Continued. 

Fia.  1. 


Application  of  tlie  1st  order  of  battle  to  the  ground,  in  the  cnse  of  a  division  of  regiments  having3  battalions. 


Application  of  the  2d  order  of  battle  to  the  ground,  in  the  case  of  a  division  of  regiments  havinif  3  battalions. 


192 


MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


Plate  12 —ORDERS  OF  BATTLE— Continued. 

Fig.  3. 


Application  of  tbc  3d  order  of  battle  to  the  ground,  in  the  cafie  of  a  division  of  regiments  liaving  4  battalioua. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.   GEORGE   B.    IPCLELLAN. 

Plate  13.— EEGULATIONS  FOR  FIELD  SERVICE. 


193 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  1. 


Fg.  9. 


Sergeant  of  billctcrs. 


Stack  with  unfixed  bayooets. 


Drums  and  color  in  bivouac. 


Pig.  5. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  6. 


Musket  pyramid. 


Drum«  and  cnUii  in  cann*. 


Stack  with  tixed  bayonets. 


25   © 


194 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

Plate  14. 

Order  of  march  of  a  Regiment  of  Infantry. 


I   =- ;  Advanced  guards. 


Vj",  Drummer  of  the  day. 


'  ■''  Drummer  of  the  day. 


Battalion  officer  of  the  day 

Sergeants  and  privates  of  the  day  ' 


— i"!!''   Drummer  of  the  day. 
"^4 '.V4   Drummer  of  the  day. 


i«;  Drummer  of  the  day. 


Battahon  officer  of  the  day ^ 

Sergeants  and  privates  of  the  day  ' 


Drummer  of  the  day. 
Drummer  ol  the  day. 


Sw!-  Drummer  of  the  day. 


Battalion  officer  of  the  day 

Sergeants  and  privates  of  the  day 


ij^:"]-  Drummer  of  the  day. 

*^l  m  I   Drummer  of  the  day. 

'  m 

I    ■    • 

'  H  ' 

I  Hv|   Drummer  of  the  day. 


Battalion  officer  of  the  day i::3t?tiii    Drummer  of  the  day. 

Sergeants  and  privates  of  the  day  -. ■M-i-:  : 

Paymaster  and  Judge  Advocate -f;;*^   Money  wagon. 


Surgeon  of  the  day  . 
Regimental  quartermaster. 
Sergeant  of  the  train 


.  ;■-,;.  Ambulances. 
!    m    < 

LT-J   Regimental  officer  of  the  day. 

50\    t.  ■.  Officer  of  the  train. 


Cartridge  wagons. 


Provision  wagons. 


Jllm  "I     !•  Wagons  with  hospital  stores. 
_j:*i-|'  Medicine  wagon. 


Surgeons 

Hospital  attendants ^... "r -rJ  Record  wagon 

TpoMva-ons — ~~"\"i^-\  TraveUing  forge. 

».-_v.  — ._.  _  ---!-._,  cimjch  wagon. 


Mechanics. 


Sergeant  of  the  train  . 


Artel  wagons. 


Sergeant  of  the  train 


Officers'  wagons. 


;  t\  :  Pack  animals. 
I   ft  I 
_!.— i..'  Regimental  wagon  master. 


M^^ 


Rear  guard. 

Dimensions  in  pace5. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  MOCLELLAN, 


195 


Plate  15. 

Camp  in  deep  order  of  a  Regiment  of  three  Battalions. 


Fig.  1. 
—■^k- 


\zz 


d 


a  Field  guard. 
h  Cartridge  wagons, 
c  Camp  guard. 
d  Soldiers'  tents. 
e  Tents  of  company  officers. 
f  Tents  ol*  battalion  conimande 
g  Tents  of  junior  field  officers. 
h  Tents  of  battalion  adjutants. 
i  Tents  of  officers'  servants. 
k  Tents  of  colonel. 
I  Money  wagon. 
m  Tent  of  regimental  adjutant. 


n  Tents  of  band  and  field  music. 

0  Tents  of  regimental  staff. 

p  Tents  of  regimental  clerks,  &c. 

q  Tent  of  commander  of  the  company  of  the  train. 

r  Tents  of  mechanics,  &.c. 

s  Sutler's  tent. 

(  Regimental  wagons. 

V  Battalion  wagons. 

X  Kitchen. 

y  Sinks. 

z  Quarter  guard. 


196 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 


Plate   15  —  Continued. 

tamp  in  deep  order  of  a  Regiment  of  four  Battalions, 
Fig.  2. 

4k - .*i 


lya 


caa  cax  ; 


®  ® 


JS-^l 


®  ®y 


4 

Ke^mental  officer  of  the  day. 

Battalion  officer  of  the  day. 

Sergeaiitsaridprivat.es  of  the  day. 

~ —  Double  sentinels. 

4 

"~  Single  sentinels. 

■— ■   Camp  lines. 

" •  Color  anddnuns. 

' Pyramids  of  arms. 

"^     ■     ■' Tents. 

'""""■■'"" — '        — -■-■  Wagons. 

^ - Harness. 

Biilflffl_ Horse.s. 

*■■  Forage. 


a  Field  guard. 

6  Cartridge  wagons. 

c  Camp  guard. 

d  Soldiers*  tents. 

e  Tents  of  company  officers. 

/  Tents  of  battalion  commanders. 

g  Tentsof  junior  field  officers. 

A  Tents  of  battalion  adjutants. 

t  Tenls  of  officers' servants. 

k  Tents  of  colonel. 

I  Money  wagon. 

m  Tent  of  regimental  adjutant. 


n  Tenls  of  band  and  field  music. 

0  Tents  of  regimental  staff. 

p  Tents  of  regimemai  clerks,  &.c. 

q  Tent  of  commander  of  the  company 

of  the  train. 
r  Tenls  of  mechanics,  &c. 
s  Sutler's  tent. 
t  Uegiinental  wagons. 
V  Battalion  wagons. 
X  Kitchen. 
y  Sinks. 
2  Quarter  guard. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


197 


SS 


I  , 

1=1     ! 


CO        I 

iH        .1 


P4 


m- 


Is 


■i 


m 


I    4\ 


i    J 


ill 
hi 


I  I 

lii 


'■.■ 

i!! 

ihi 


III 

111 

u 

■ 
■ 

8 
S 


II 


Bi 


1 


■i 


■■I 

■  ■f 


I 


IS^S. 


■  ■■1 


•^  :k;  ;^:  ^irt    ^*    t:    ! 


i  TitT  inX  ifcT:  ;^'i 


\mJiMSSl 


\i~itr 


» 


■■■f 


i 


198 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    SPCLELLAN 


199 


Fig.l. 
Camp  of  a  battalion  of  sappers. 


9      0  ^      *! 

m —     n IB ^H 

I  i 

j  i 

\ZZM.^..t *.._...] 


IB a .ri* 


Plate  18. 

Fig.  2. 
Camp  of  a  heavy  foot  batten/. 


J»'^:_  "  r:;,    r  ,',1 -"'7-1   cuiza^a;. 

^j e         e  «         9    i^ 


TM.. 


.M. 


Fig.  3. 
Camp  of  a  ponton  train  and  company  of  sappers. 


[Uiiiili 

m 

, 

~~ 

.•:Lutll 

TmTrtl 

.« 

0 

0 

r. 

e 

cl 

I  " 

iz: 

1-®.. 

t 

» 

a Line  of  guns. 

h Line  of  limbers. 

c Line  of  caissons. 

<* Tents  of  camp  guard. 

^ Soldier's  tents.    In  fig.  3  tlie  dark  lines  indicate  tbe  front  of  the  tenia. 

f' Harness ) 

n-  ,    .  V  ot  the  battery  and  ponton  train. 

g Picket  ropes,  j  j  f  »• 

h Forage  stacks. 

i Tents  of  company  otrieers. 

^ Tents  of  commanders,  the  money  wagons  being  along  side. 

^ Tents  of  non-commissioned  staff. 

"I Forty-two  ponton  wagons,  in  two  lines. 

" Engineer  wagons  of  the  sapper  battalion. 

0 Government  wagons. 

P Artel  and  officers'  wagons. 

9- Harness  . . . .  )     „  ,. 

n-  ,    .  >  of  the  wagons. 

T Picket  ropes  (  ° 

8 Kitchens. 

t Sinks. 

^ Officers  of  the  day. 

•• Sergeant  and  privates  of  the  day. 

•- - Sentinels. 


200 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE, 


-r  / 


i;     ^  o      ^ 


4 

c 

~ 

:» 

..N 

[      . 

a 


s        .a 


a 
o 
O 


00 

T-l 


^ 


"& 
§. 


I 


si^ 


5       <C3     C73 

ID  U 
I'D  G 


I 


i=G       CZH 


fc.  d 


O     o     £    C   , 


2  '2  i  I 

S  o  3  * 

d  o  E»  (a 

<  O  32  02 


a.  o 
56: 


i<i  in 


HI     H.«    < 


KEPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M°CLELLAN. 


201 


Gi 


c.  o 
c  "> 
5  ^ 
ffl    ?>  _     -- 

O   S  fcd   ^   fc 


-■2  5 

■;^  cl.  CT 


o  Q  a  t-  ts:  td 


c    c    —    c 

CJ       CJ       CS       (3 


<  <: 


03    M 


26    © 


202 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


p.^ 


Plate  20. 

Camp  of  hits. 

rig.  1. 


/;"^- 

' 1 

r 

\ 

^\              ! 

□ 


CGCD; 
/   /   /.  y  I 


■■^/, 

J    L 

1 

^^ — 

1 

_J   L 

^(i[| 

i'tLLU        LLii^'i 


icz]  cji:^^ 


n\_ 


J  c 


_  L 


m 

if" 

^.  -^  ,.. -, 

115 

1 

■   '  r 

' 

1 

1 

■    1 

"i 

1 

^     •'■W 

^i 


W  "    '^ 


/-^ 


-^n 


a  Hut  of  camp  guard. 

6  Soldiers'  liuls. 

c  Company  officers'  liuts. 

d  Ilut  of  junior  field  officers. 

e  Hut  of  commanders  of  battalions. 


f  Huts  of  battalion  adjutants. 

g  Huts  of  clerks. 

A  Huts  of  band. 

i  Hut  of  colonel. 

k  Hut  of  regimental  adjutant. 


Scale  for  Fig.  1. 

/    Kitchens. 

m  Messing  huts. 

«  Wagons,  workshops,  storehouses,  &c. 

0   Stables. 

p  Sinks. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


203 


Plate    20 — Contiaued. 

Bivouac  of  a  regiment  of  4  bailalions. 
Fig.  2. 

8         6  £         6         S 


..:j. 


r 1 


," 

1                 1. 

a 

rri::." 

rj 

w 

,-:«i 

i 

.i 

a 

c 

lULl 

"■1 

■  1'" 

/I 

1        zn.i 

e     S 

'     1            1 

:» 

'■''     1 

L_J' J 

.,  s 

jj:  r'^-^g 


'HM^ 


Bivouac  of  a  regiment  of  3  battalions. 
Fig.  3. 

8         Si       e 


3-    CZ3^"  ,  i 


b.  a 


^E^^r 


a  C-iinp  guard. 

Ii  Stack  of  arms. 

c  Soldiers'  bivouacs. 

d  Bivouacs  of  band  and  field  music. 

e  Biv  uacs  of  officers. 

/  Bivouacs  of  battalion  commander  and  slafi. 


^  Bivouacs  of  colonel  and  regimental  adjutant. 

ft  Bivouacs  of  mechanics,  &.c.  ^ 

i  Government  wagons. 

k  Harness. 

I  Pickut  ropes.  ^_ 


Regimental  orticcr  of  the  day . 
,  Officer  of  the  day. 
-  Serg'ts  &  piivates  of  Uie  day. 


■  Sentinels. 


Bivouac  fires. 


204 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

Plate  21. 


Bivouac  of  a  battery  deployed. 
Fig.l. 


.|.M 


-k—± — i  ■* 
I 


-i-— i- i k- 

-4--*— *— *- 
..^_-.4t_...4j_  ^.....j^.....jt....  4i  J 

-tt fe--^- *-■■#— #-4 

"i-  i— i i i--i — I* 


Bivouac  of  a  battery 

tn 

column 

IT 

Fig. 

11'-- 

2. 

.-4,™ 

4- 

-ik-- 

-ik- 

-A 

c*- 

-*— 

-ik- 

-*c 

*- 

-*•- 

■■*— ^ 

Z   i.  - 

*■ 

i  i 

1 
t- 

-*- 

-*- 

k  ° 

-• 

cf 

-#- 

-*■- 

-*c 

i>- 

-#■- 

-#- 

-i 

d  k- 

-i- 

-i- 

--±  it 

JE. ;^ A""' 


-H-'  B4C£S 


%0 

Scale  of  pac 

a. 

Line  of  pieces. 

b. 

Line  of  limbers. 

c. 

Line  of  caissons. 

d. 

Line  of  artillery  wagons. 

e. 

Bivouac  of  soldiers. 

r- 

Bivouac  of  battery  officers. 

^. 

Bivouac  of  2d  in  command. 

k. 

Bivouac  of  commander  of  ih* 

boU'-ry 

i. 

Drummers  and  mechanics. 

k. 
I. 

Camp  guard. 
Baggage  wagons. 

m 

.  Harness. 

n 

Picket  ropes. 

0 

Forage  stacks. 

^ Officer  of  the  day. 

•  • Serg't  and  privates  of  the  day, 

^. Sentinels. 

lT Bivouac  fires. 


REPOET    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   MXLELLAN. 


205 


Plate  21-  —  Continued. 


Fig.  3. 
Bivouac  of  a  brigade  of  3-battalion  Tegimenis. 


.44. u *»- 


-*t,- ** ** **•-, 


Fig.  4. 
Bivouac  of  a  brigade  of  i-battalion  regiments. 
J, a-  ^t ♦*- it »*•■—*»- --**... 

\ 


♦ 1-   1- 


/ 


\So.f 


1  \l 


11 


I   !  \ 

!        '■  '*« 

i — \ i^  i  b^ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


v 


Fig.  5. 
Bivouac  of  a  division  of  regiments  of  4  battalions. 

.-ti- ->*.-    .4« U a i*   -it  -.*4    -  4i     ;*»  -.--*t:;.^-44 44     -    44-_. 

^^^--'  '  —  __  _-'-"'  — ■( 


1 1^.1 1 


•f f 


Q 


■ — » •—  t- 


*-^- 


--,.....-.-, ^.;...j, .j^_ 


» — t — r  ••-, ,»^ — ^ ^.. 


V 


A.  Bivouac  of  a  battalion. 

B.  Bivouac  of  the  aiUUery. 

C.  Wagons. 

a.   Field  guards. 

h.   Quarter  guards. 

(Same  scale  for  all  these  figures.— See  Plate  22.) 


206 


REPORT  OP  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  22. 

Bivouac  of  a  division  of  reiiirnenta  of  'i  batlalions. 
Fig.  1. 
^ U it -H :::^» U-,-: ik -4* 


"■^t 


-t    .f 1.    +- 


\     i 


>--^ 


ttza  ic-ui 


..^.^ ^ ^ .-^ ^■■ 


-r r— ' 


..^ 


Bivouac  of  a  division  of  3  battalion  rei/iments. 
Fig.  2. 
„ 4» -«t it 


/ 


a- 


P*.    L^^^ 


Bivouac  of  a  division  of  i  battalion  reginwnls. 
Fig.  3. 

„ a it 4* 44 — ,^ 


1      i 
j        i 

i.    i 


i  \ 


.-. 

\ 

<t.0- 


■f^^—^    j— f    |— 


-,,    , — J    |, — (    I — i 


■I — !■ 


—I 


\ 


J    ....--•■ 


0        zm        aitf 


REPORT 


PRUSSIAN  CAVALRY. 


OKGANIZATION. 

The  war  establishment  of  the  Prussian  cayalry  consists  of  the  standing  army,  the  landwehr 
of  the  first  levy,  that  of  the  second  levy,  the  depot  squadrons,  and  the  landsturm. 

All  able-bodied  men,  whatever  their  rank  in  life,  are  required  to  serve  5  years  in  the  standing 
army,  from  their  20th  to  their  25th  year.  Of  these  5  years,  the  first  3  are  passed  with  their 
regiments  ;  during  the  last  2  they  are  permitted  to  return  to  their  homes  and  compose  the 
reserve  of  the  standing  army,  being  liable  to  be  called  to  join  their  regiments  at  any  moment, 
in  the  event  of  a  war  or  other  exigency. 

They  then  pass  into  the  landwehr  of  the  1st  levy  for  7  years  ;  then,  for  1  more,  into  the 
landwehr  of  the  2d  levy  ;  after  which,  they  belong  to  the  landsturm. 

The  standing  army  performs  garrison  duty  in  time  of  peace.  As  a  general  rule,  the  regi- 
ments are  stationed  in  the  districts  where  they  are  recruited,  unless  there  are  special  political 
reasons  to  the  contrary. 

The  landwehr  of  the  1st  levy  is  at  once  called  out,  upon  the  commencement  of  a  war,  to  rein- 
force the  standing  army  and  co-ojierate  with  it ;  its  organization  and  composition  are  identical 
with  those  of  the  latter,  there  being  a  regiment  of  landwehr  cavalry  to  correspond  to  every  one 
of  the  cavalry  of  the  line,  and  2  landwehr  regiments  of  the  guard.  In  war,  they  are  usually 
brigaded  together  ;  thus  the  2d  hussars  of  the  line  and  the  2d  hussars  of  the  landwehr  belong 
to  the  same  brigade. 

In  peace,  this  levy  is  called  out  for  drills  and  manoeuvres  2  weeks  in  each  year ;  at  otli  r 
times  merely  a  skeleton,  consisting  of  1  captain  of  the  line,  2  non-commissioned  officers,  and  2 
men,  is  kept  at  the  depot  magazine  of  each  landwehr  regiment,  the  complete  clothing,  arma- 
ment, and  equipment  of  the  regiment  being  kejit  in  these  magazines. 

The  landwehr  of  the  2d  levy  is  not  quite  so  numerous  as  that  of  the  1st.  It  is  called  out 
only  in  time  of  war,  and  is  then  employed  in  service  in  the  interior,  or,  if  necessary,  to  reinforce 
the  active  army. 

The  landsturm  has  no  regular  organization ;  it  is  called  out  only  to  repel  invasion,  and  consists 
of  all  men  less  than  50  years  old  not  in  the  army  or  landwehr. 

The  depot  squadrons  are  organized  only  in  time  of  war.  They  consist  of  supernumeraries 
from  the  reserve,  men  draughted  from  the  landwehr,  and  recruits  who  are  to  be  drilled  6  months 
before  joining  their  regiments. 

Every  regiment  of  the  cavalry  of  the  standing  army  has  one  depot  squadron  in  war ;  those  of 
the  guard  are  of  the  same  strength  as  the  active  squadrons  ;  those  of  the  line  are  200  strong. 


208  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

since  they  serve  as  depots  for  the  corresponding  regiments  of  landwehr  of  the  1st  levy  as  well 
as  for  those  of  the  line.  One  hundred  and  twenty-five  men  and  horses  helong  to  the  line  regi- 
ment ;  the  remaining  75  are  for  the  landwehr. 

The  war  strength  of  these  different  kinds  of  cavalry  amounts  to  440  squadrons — 2,400  officers 
and  ahout  65,000  men  and  horses  ;  this  is  exclusive  of  the  landsturm. 

The  cavalry  of  the  standing  army  consists  of  38  regiments,  of  which  6  belong  to  the  guards, 
32  to  the  line. 

The  guard  regiments  are  :  2  regiments  of  cuirassiers,  1  of  dragoons,  2  of  lancers,  and  1  of 
hussars. 

The  line  regiments  are  :  8  of  cuirassiers,  4  of  dragoons^  8  of  lancers,  and  12  of  hussars. 

Each  regiment  consists  of  4  active  squadrons. 

Each  squadron  of  the  line  regiments  is  composed  of: 

1  captain. 

1  first  lieutenant. 

3  second  lieutenants. 

1  orderly  sergeant. 

1  ensign,  a  non-commissioned  officer  in  the  line  of  promotion. 

1  quartermaster,  a  sergeant. 

12  sergeants. 

3  trumpeters. 

127  privates,  among  whom  are  20  corj)orals  and  re-enlisted  soldiers — 145  men  and  horses, 
exclusive  of  officers: 

The  regimental  staif  consists  of  1  colonel,  1  junior  field  officer,  1  adjutant,  (a  2d  lieutenant,) 
2  supernumerary  captains,  1  paymaster,  1  surgeon,  from  2  to  3  assistant  surgeons,  1  chief 
trumpeter,  1  regimental  clerk,  4  veterinaries  with  the  rank  of  orderly  sergeant.  The  super- 
numerary captains  are  for  the  purpose  of  commanding  the  skeleton  of  the  corresponding  landwehr 
regiment  and  the  depot  squadron,  as  well  as  for  other  detached  service. 

The  junior  field  officer  commands  the  corresponding  landwehr  regiment,  the  captains  and 
adjutant  of  which  are  also  taken  from  the  line.  The  squadrons  of  the  guard  regiments  are 
stronger  by  5  privates  than  those  of  the  line. 

TACTICS  AND  INSTRUCTION. 

The  riding  drill  is  a  separate  work  from  the  tactics  proper ;  it  is  so  very  similar  to  the  Austrian 
that  it  need  not  he  explained  in  this  report. 

The  instruction  on  foot  is  embraced  in  the  first  36  pages  of  the  tactics,  and  includes  the  drill 
of  the  recruit,  the  movements  of  the  squadron  and  regiment,  and  the  formations  for  parade, 

review,  &c. 

The  squadron  is  the  unit  of  tactics,  as  well  as  of  interior  service.  When  mounted,  it  is  formed 
in  two  ranks,  1  pace  apart,  the  rear  rank  covering  their  front  rank  men,  and  is  divided  into  4 
platoons,  numbered  from  right  to  left. 

In  each  jilatoon  the  men  call  off  by  twos  for  mounting  and  dismounting ;  by  threes  for 
manoeuvring. 

The  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  &c.,  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  captain,  30  paces  in  front  of  the  centre ;  the  1st  lieutenant  commands  the  3d  platoon, 
and  is  2  paces  in  front  of  its  centre ;  the  2d  lieutenant  commands  the  4th  platoon  ;  the  3d  lieu- 
tenant is  a  file-closer,  in  rear  of  the  centre ;  the  4th  lieutenant  commands  the  1st  platoon  ;  the 
5th  lieutenant  commands  the  2d  platoon. 


KEPORT   OF   CAPT.   GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN. 


209 


Explanalion  of  signs. 
t —  Captain. 


L 
f 


1 


.  Commander  of  platoon. 
File- closer-officer. 
Right  guide  of  platoon. 
Left  guide  of  platoon. 
Filec-closer  non-commissioned-officer. 

-  Orderly  sergeant. 

-  Trumpeter. 


? 


? 


f 


\     I 


I 


?   \ 


f 


? 


The  above  sketch  represents  a  squadron  deployed. 

If  there  is  no  5th  lieutenant,  the  2d  platoon  is  commanded  by  the  ensign,  or  a  suitable  sergeant. 

If  there  are  but  2  lieutenants  present,  they  command  the  flank  platoons. 

The  captain  may  change  the  arrangement  of  the  officers,  as  given  above,  if  he  thinks  proper. 

The  sketch  gives  the  positions  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  trumpeters. 

There  must  be  one  file-closer  for  each  platoon ;  if  there  is  a  deficiency  in  the  number  of 
sergeants,  corporals  are  detailed  to  supply  their  places. 

To  dismount,  the  chiefs  and  left  guides  of  platoons,  and  Nos.  1  of  the  front  rank,  ride  forward 
twice  a  horse's  length,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  then  face  towards  their  men  by  making  a  right  about ; 
the  right  guides,  Nos.  2  of  the  front  rank,  and  Nos.  1  of  the  rear  rank,  move  forward  a  horse's 
length;  Nos.  2  of  the  rear  rank  and  the  file-closers  stand  fast;  the  trumpeters  act  as  prescribed 
for  the  rear  rank. 

Having  dismounted,  Nos.  2  of  each  rank  and  the  right  guides  close  up  alongside  of  the  Nos.  1 
of  their  own  rank  ;  the  file-closers  close  up  on  the  rear  rank  ;  the  ranks  are  thus  4  paces  apart. 

To  mount,  the  ranks  are  formed  4  paces  apart,  and  the  Nos.  1  of  each  rank,  with  the  left  guides, 
move  forward  a  horse's  length. 

Having  mounted,  the  ranks  are  closed  on  the  Nos.  1  of  the  front  rank. 

The  movements  of  the  squadron  are  by  threes,  never  by  fours. 


•^^- 


».#  Ff 


Direction  of  march. 


Front  ranlt. 


Rear. 


The  annexed  sketch  shows  the  formation  of  a  squadron  gaining  ground  to  the  right  after 
having  wheeled  to  the  right  by  threes  in  each  rank. 

The  squadron  may  be  reformed  into  line  either  by  wheeling  to  the  left  by  threes,  or  by  form- 
ing to  the  front  into  line  ;  in  the  latter  case  the  front  rank  men  of  the  leading  set  of  threes  movo 
forward  two  horses'  lengths  and  halt,  their  rear  rank  men  take  their  places  behind  them,  and  the 
other  sets  of  threes  gain  their  places  by  obliquing  to  the  left. 

Platoons  may  be  formed  in  the  same  manner. 

The  above  sketch  will  serve  to  explain  the  peculiarity  in  the  column  by  threes,  and  the  column 
27   © 


210  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

by  files  ;  in  the  column  by  threes  the  rear  rank  men,  instead  of  covering  their  front  rank  men, 
ride  behind  the  intervals,  as  shown  in  the  sketch  ;  in  the  column  by  files,  in  which  each  rear 
rank  man  is  alongside  of  his  front  rank  man,  the  same  thing  is  observed  by  the  successive  files. 

In  column  \>y  platoons,  the  non-commissioned  file-closers  place  themselves  on  the  flanks  of 
the  rear  rank  ;  the  officer  acting  as  file-closer  is  on  the  flank  of  the  column  opposite  the  guides, 
and  opposite  the  middle  of  the  column. 

The  half  column  is  formed  from- line  by  causing  all  the  platoons  to  make,  simultaneously,  a 
quarter  wheel  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  and  then  all  move  straight  forward. 

In  a  charge  in  line,  500  paces  are  passed  over  at  the  walk  and  trot,  200  at  the  gallop,  and 
100  at  the  charge. 

Sometimes  the  4th  platoon  charges  in  one  rank,  in  open  order,  and  is  supported  by  the 
remaining  platoons  in  close  order. 

Again,  the  1st,  2d,  and  4th  platoons  charge  helter  skelter,  as  foragers,  and  are  supported  by 
the  3d  platoon,  which  remains  in  close  order. 

SKIRMISHERS. 

The  4th  platoon  is  usually  employed  for  skirmishing  duty. 

At  the  command  of  the  captain  the  chief  of  this  platoon  conducts  it  to  a  point  from  150  to 
200  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron,  and  there  halts  it.  The  four  left  files  (or  as 
many  more  as  may  be  directed)  return  sabres,  or  rest  lances,  and  at  once  dash  out  about  100 
paces  to  the  front  at  a  galloj),  and  there  form  in  one  rank  with  sufficient  intervals  to  enable 
them  to  cover  the  whole  front  of  the  squadron  ;  the  rear  rank  men  are  on  the  left  of,  and  near 
to  their  front  rank  men. 

One  man  of  each  file  must  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

They  halt  while  firing,  but  keep  moving  while  loading,  describing  a  figure  cc  as  they  ride. 

Since  the  skirmishers  are  intended  to  cover  the  squadron,  they,  as  well  as  the  rest  of  the 
platoon,  must  conform  to  all  its  movements. 

When  any  party  of  cavalry  is  obliged  to  dismount  to  fight  on  foot,  the  Nos.  3  of  each  rank 
remain  mounted,  and  hold  the  horses  of  Nos.  1  and  2. 

The  formation  of  a  regiment  deployed  is  with  its  4  squadrons  in  line,  with  intervals  of  6 
paces  ;  the  standard  on  the  right  of  the  3d  squadron  ;  the  colonel,  accompanied  by  the  adjutant 
and  2  trumpeters,  60  paces  in  front  of  the  centre ;  the  junior  field  officer  20  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  regiment. 

A  regiment  may  be  formed  in  column  by  squadrons  closed  in  mass,  the  distance  being  platoon 
front  plus  6  paces ;  by  squadrons  with  full  distance ;  by  platoons  doubled  on  the  central  pla- 
toons ;  and  in  line  of  columns  of  squadrons  by  platoons. 

A  regiment  being  in  line,  the  front  is  changed  by  squadrons,  e.  g.,  to  change  front  forward 
90°  on  the  1st  squadron  the  1st  squadron  wheels  to  the  right  and  halts,  the  other  squadrons 
each  make  a  half  wheel  to  the  right,  then  march  straight  forward  until  they  arrive  opposite  their 
respective  places  in  the  new  line,  when  they  again  half  wheel  to  the  right  into  their  places. 

To  deploy  a  close  column  the  leading  squadron  halts,  the  others  wheel  by  platoons  to  the 
left,  (or  right,)  march  straight  forward  until  they  arrive  opposite  their  jDlaces  in  line,  when 
they  wheel  by  platoon  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  and  advance  in  line  to  their  posts.  This  deploy- 
ment is  executed  at  a  trot. 

During  a  charge  in  line  the  standard  bearer  falls  back  into  the  rear  rank. 


REPORT   OF    CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M'CLELLAN.  211 

If  the  ground  over  •vvhicli  a  charge  is  to  be  made  is  not  known,  an  officer  is  sent  forward  to 
examine  it  and  report  to  the  colonel. 

The  entire  force  of  a  regiment  should  not  charge,  but  some  of  the  flank  jilatoons  should  be 
held  in  reserve. 

Sometimes  the  4th  platoons  of  all  the  squadrons,  or  one  entire  squadron,  charge  as  foragers, 
supported  by  the  rest  of  the  regiment  in  close  order. 

Sometimes  the  1st,  2d,  and  4th  platoons  of  all  the  squadrons  charge,  while  the  3d  platoons, 
under  the  command  of  the  junior  field  officer,  are  held  in  reserve. 

The  charge  by  echelons  is  also  employed. 

A  regiment  being  formed  in  column  by  squadrons,  there  are  two  methods  of  employing  it  in 
a  charge : 

1st.  The  column  being  right  in  front,  the  4th  squadron  leaves  the  column  and  forms,  the  1st 
and  2d  platoons  on  the  right,  the  3d  and  4th  on  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the  commandants 
of  these  platoons  being  on  the  alignment  of  the  file-closers  of  the  3d  squadron  ;  the  column  then 
moves  ofi"  at  a  trot,  next  at  a  gallop  ;  as  soon  as  it  takes  the  gallop  the  1st  squadron  charges  ; 
when  the  colonel  gives  the  command,  halt,  the  4th  squadron  charges  as  foragers. 

2d.  The  column  being  right  in  front,  moves  forward  at  a  trot;  the  1st  squadron  then  charges, 
and  afterwards  retires  by  the  flanks  of  the  column  to  the  rear,  where  it  re-forms ;  the  other 
squadrons  then  charge  in  succession  in  the  same  manner. 

If  skirmishers  are  to  be  deployed  to  cover  the  regiment,  either  the  4th  platoons  of  all  the 
squadrons,  or  one  entire  squadron,  are  detailed  for  the  purpose. 

If  the  regiment  is  to  dismount  to  fight  on  foot,  it  is  effected  upon  the  principles  explained  for 
a  single  squadron. 

In   a  brigade  deployed,  the  interval  between  the  regiments   is  12  paces.     The  general   of 

brigade  is  100  paces  in  front  of  the  centre,  and  is  accompanied  by  the  brigade  adjutant  and  two 

trumpeters. 

HORSE  EQUIPMENTS. 

The  cuirassiers  use  a  heavy  saddle,  with  a  low  pommel  and  cantle  ;  it  is  covered  with  leather, 
and  presents  nothing  worthy  of  imitation. 

The  rest  of  the  cavalry  have  the  Hungarian  saddle  ;  it  difiers  from  the  Austrian  model 
principally  in  the  manner  of  attaching  the  equipment ;  the  forks  are  permanently  bolted  to  the 
bars  ;  there  is  more  iron  work  upon  it,  and  small  skirts  are  attached  to  it. 

Eight  sizes  of  trees  are  made  ;  the  average  weight  of  the  bare  tree  is  seven  pounds. 

The  English  saddle  is  the  uniform  for  officers  ;  they  use  a  girth  of  hemp  cords. 

For  the  men,  the  valise  is  replaced  by  a  flat  bag,  opening  in  the  middle  of  the  lower  side, 
which  contains  the  clothes,  and  is  laid  on  the  tree,  under  the  schabraque,  the  man  sitting  on  it. 

The  pouches  are  large  and  heavy ;  they  are  attached  to  the  saddle  by  spring  hooks,  and 
contain  many  of  the  necessaries. 

The  pistol  holster  is  in  one  of  the  pouches  ;  also  a  pocket  for  extra  cartridges  ;  to  one  j)ouch 
the  hatchet  is  attached. 

The  cloak  and  forage  bag  are  strapped  to  the  cantle  ;  the  kettle,  in  a  leather  case,  is  attached 
to  the  left  side  of  the  hind  fork.  The  schabraque  is  of  blue  cloth,  with  a  lining  of  coarse  linen  ; 
it  has  pockets  in  the  lining. 

Cruppers  and  breast  straps  are  used ;  the  surcingle  is  of  leather,  and  fastens  in  the  Mexican 
style  ;  the  girth  is  also  of  leather,  about  3^  inches  wide,  and  with  a  large  buckle  ;  it  is  in  two 
parts,  and  is  attached  to  the  bars  by  thongs  of  raw  hide. 


212  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

The  saddle  blanket  is  8'  ty  6'  3"  ;  it  is  folded  in  12  thicknesses. 

The  forage  bag  is  of  white  linen. 

The  forage  cord  has  an  iron  ring  at  one  end. 

The  nose  bag  is  of  coarse  linen,  the  bottom  bound  and  crossed  with  broad  linen  tape. 

The  curry-comb  is  6"  by  4",  with  four  rows  of  teeth ;  one  pattern,  for  field  service,  has  a 
strap  attached  to  the  back,  instead  of  a  handle,  the  hand  being  run  under  the  strap. 

Tlie  mane  comb  is  of  horn  ;  metallic  combs  have  been  tried  and  abandoned. 

The  shoe  pouches,  one  on  each  side  of  the  hind  fork,  contain,  each,  1  fore  and  1  hind  shoe, 
as  well  as  16  common  and  4  ice  nails,  in  a  straw  cushion. 

The  stirrups  are  of  steel,  and  roughly  made. 

A  hemp  surcingle  is  used  in  the  stable. 

Two  bits  are  used,  both  of  steel ;  the  curb  has  straight  branches,  and  a  heavy  steel  chain. 

The  head  stall  is  single  ;  the  curb  is  buckled  to  the  cheek  pieces  ;  near  its  lower  end  a  strap 
about  2"  long  is  sewed  to  one  side  of  each  cheek  piece  ;  the  snaffle  is  attached  to  a  ring  at  the 
end  of  this  strap  by  a  chain  and  toggle. 

The  curb  reins  are  4'  long.     No  martingale  is  used. 

The  halter  presents  nothing  peculiar  ;  the  rope  is  6'  long,  and  is  either  of  hemp  or  hair  ;  in 
garrison  a  chain  is  sometimes  used.  By  attaching  a  snaffle  bit  and  rein,  the  halter  serves  as  a 
watering  bridle. 

The  Eussian  bit  is  being  tried ;  in  this  experiment  the  snaffle  fastens  to  the  halter  head 
stall  by  a  chain  and  toggle,  while  the  curb  head  stall,  which  is  very  light,  passes  through  loops 
on  the  halter. 

All  articles  of  each  set  of  equipments  are  branded  with  the  number  of  the  set. 

AKMS  AND  ACCOUTEEMENTS. 

Cuirassiers,  sabre  of  the  old  French  cuirassier  pattern  ;  20  men  in  each  squadron  have  a 
smooth  bore  carbine,  with  a  barrel  15"  long  ;  the  rest  of  the  men  a  pistol,  with  a  9"  barrel. 

Dragoons,  light  cavalry  sabre,  blade  32"  long,  and  1\"  wide  at  the  shoulder,  considei'ably 
curved,  guard  and  scabbard  of  steel ;  sergeants  and  trumpeters,  1  pistol  each  ;  50  men  in  each 
squadron  have  a  rifled  carbine,  the  rest  a  smooth  bore  carbine. 

Lancers,  sabre  as  for  dragoons  ;  lance  10^'  long  ;  fire  arms  as  for  cuirassiers. 

Hussars,  armed  as  described  for  dragoons. 

The  cuirassiers  have  metallic  helmet,  breast,  and  back  pieces. 

The  sabre  belt  is  an  ordinary  waist  belt  with  slings ;  it  fastens  by  means  of  an  cy^  hook. 

The  cartridge-box  is  attached  to  a  shoulder  belt ;  it  contains  18  rounds  ;  it  is  filled  by  a 
wooden  block,  in  which  a  hole  is  bored  for  every  cartridge. 

The  carbine,  or  pistol,  rammer  is  attached  to  the  cartridge-box  belt  by  a  thin  strap,  the  ram- 
mer being  slipped  through  two  loops  on  the  cartridge-box. 

The  carbine  sling  is  not  peculiar. 

On  the  march  the  carbine  is  carried  in  a  boot,  the  small  of  the  stock  being  strapped  to  the 
pommel. 

UNIFOEM. 

The  dragoons  wear  a  helmet  of  black  leather,  surmounted  by  a  brass  spear  head. 
The  lancers  have  the  ordinary  lancers'  cap,  the  czapka. 
The  hussars,  a  cylindrical  shako  of  fur,  without  vizor. 


EEPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  JPCLELLAN.  213 

The  forage  cap  has  no  vizor. 

The  clothing  is  of  excellent  material,  and  is  well  made  ;  it  is  made  up  in  the  regiments. 

A  short  frock-coat  is  worn  by  all  the  cavalry. 

Coat  and  pants  are  lined  throughout. 

The  pants  are  re-enforced  with  black  leather,  and  are  split  about  6"  from  the  bottom,  along 
the  outer  seam,  the  slit  fastening  with  hooks  and  eyes ;  straps  of  leather  are  sewed  to  the  pants. 

Boots  are  worn  under  the  pants  ;  steel  spurs  are  permanently  attached  to  the  boots. 

The  overcoat  has  a  large  I'oUing  collar,  and  no  cape ;  it  is  of  a  dark  grey  color,  nearly  black. 

The  stock  is  of  bombazine,  lined  with  linen  ;  it  has  a  flaj)  in  front,  and  fastens  by  means  of 
a  buckle. 

The  buttons  are  plain. 

Shirts,  socks,  and  cloth  mittens  are  issued. 

HORSES. 

There  is  a  central  commission  at  Berlin  charged  with  the  regulation  of  the  purchase  of  horses. 

For  this  purpose,  the  monarchy  is  divided  into  three  districts :  1st,  the  country  east  of  the 
Vistula  ;  2d,  that  from  the  Vistula  to  the  Elbe  ;  3d,  the  Rhenish  provinces. 

There  is  a  sub-commission  for  each  of  these  districts,  and  several  remount  depots. 

The  horses  are  purchased  between  the  ages  of  3  and  7,  the  preference  being  given  to  young 
horses,  which  remain  at  the  remount  depots  until  they  are  4J  years  old. 

The  horse  is  supposed  to  give  9  years'  service,  on  the  average  ;  therefore,  each  regiment  is 
annually  supplied  with  remount  horses  to  the  number  of  one-ninth  of  its  total  strength. 

As  an  instance  of  the  price  of  horses,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  in  1854,  in  the  province  of 
Pomerania,  733  horses  were  offered  to  the  sub-commission,  311  of  which  were  purchased;  the 
average  price  paid  was  $85,  the  highest  price  $137. 

Prussia  is  not  now  obliged  to  import  horses  for  the  army. 

The  horses  are  branded  with  the  initials  of  the  name  and  the  number  of  the  regiment  to  which 
they  belong,  also  with  the  sign  of  the  province  where  purchased. 

The  horses  are  generally  good,  but  by  no  means  extraordinary. 

The  minimum  height  of  horses  for  the  garde  du  corps,  is 16  hands. 

cuirassiers,  is 15  hands  2  inches. 

light  guard  and  lancers,  is. 15  hands  ^  inch. 

dragoons  and  hussars,  is 14  hands  3/g  inches. 

The  minimum  height  of  artillery  draught  horses,  is 16  hands. 

saddle  horses,  is 14  hands  3j'v  inches. 

From  2  to  4  spare  horses  are  allowed  each  squadron. 

Every  lieutenant  of  cavalry  receives  a  public  horse  once  in  5  years  ;  if  he  rides  the  same  horse 
for  that  time,  it  becomes  his  private  property  at  the  expiration  of  the  period,  unless  he  is  pro- 
moted to  a  captaincy  in  the  interim. 

If  he  does  not  avail  himself  of  this  privilege  for  5  years,  he  receives  a  compensation  of  from 
$100  to  $110  at  the  expiration  of  that  time. 

If  he  loses  his  public  horse  in  time  of  war,  he  receives  a  new  one,  and  is  credited  for  the  time 
he  rode  the  first. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  colonels  to  see  that  the  officers  are  properly  mounted. 

In  time  of  war,  or  in  case  of  pressing  necessity,  the  laws  allow  the  government  to  seize  the 


214 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


horses  of  citizens  for  the  use  of  the  army ;  the  owners  are  paid  a  price  determined  by  a  board  of 
officers. 

RATIONS  OF  THE  MEN. 

In  i:;arrison,  bread  only  is  issued  in  kind,  14  pound  to  the  ration  ;  it  must  have  been  baked 
at  least  24  hours  before  issue,  and  is  issued  every  4  days.  The  rest  of  the  food  is  purchased,  by 
means  of  a  small  daily  allowance  in  money,  by  a  commission  consisting  of  the  colonel,  1  captain, 
1  lieutenant,  and  4  sergeants. 

The  principal  food  is  soup,  with  a  small  slice  of  meat. 
No  coffee  is  issued  ;  brandy  or  wine  in  lieu  of  it. 
The  largest  field  ration  consists  of: 

^  pound  of  meat,  or  |-  pound  of  salt  pork;  2  pounds  of  bread,  or  1  pound  of  biscuit;  |  pound  of 
rice,  or  ^  pound  of  peeled  barly,  or  ^  pound  beans  or  peas,  or  ^  pound  of  meal,  or  IJ  pounds  of 
potatoes  ;  ^  pint  of  brandy,  and  salt. 

The  bread  is  generally  carried  in  the  forage  sack  ;  the  brandy  in  a  flask. 

The  annexed  sketch  gives  the  form  and  dimensions  of 
the  kettle  carried  by  each  man  in  the  field  ;  it  is  in  a  strong 
leather  case,  strapped  to  the  left  side  of  the  hind  fork  ; 
the  kettle  is  of  stout  tin. 

A,  is  the  cover. 

B,  the  kettle. 

C,  plan  of  the  bottom. 

D,  pan,  fitting  in  B. 
E  and  F,  section  and  plan  of  cover,  with  rings  to  serve 

as  handles,  and  small  tin  springs  to  keep  it  in  place  ;  it  is 
carried  in  the  top,  (A.) 

G,  handle  of  top  (A)  when  used  as  a  stew  pan,  slipping 
into  the  receptacle  H  ;  it  is  4"  long,  and  is  carried  in  D, 
slipping  into  I. 

In  garrison,  mess  rooms  are  sometimes  provided  ;  each 
man  has  a  bowl  and  wooden  spoon  ;  the  bread  is  kept  in  the 
quarters,  each  man  having  a  cupboard  with  a  lock  and  key. 

QUARTEES. 

As  the  quarters  will  be  described  in  treating  of  the  infantry,  it  is  only  necessary  to  say  here 
that  they  are  usually  in  separate  buildings  from  the  stables. 
The  horse  equipments  are  kept  in  the  quarters. 

FORAGE. 

The  ration  is  of  two  kinds,  the  heavy  and  the  light ;  each  of  these  varies  according  to  circum- 
stances, as  follows : 

Heavy  ration,  in  garrison 9    quarts  of  oats,  5  poimds  of  hay,  8  pounds  of  straw. 

on  march,  in  peace....  lOJ  "  3  "  4 

in  the  field,  in  war 11^  "  3  "  4 

Light  ration,  in  garrison T^  "  5  "  8 

on  march,  in  peace....     9  "  3  "  4 

in  the  field,  in  war 10  "  3  "  4 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


215 


With  the  consent  of  the  minister  of  war,  the  ration  as  given  ahove  may  be  changed,  as  follows  : 
the  oats  may  be  replaced  by  rye,  barley,  biscuit,  hay,  or  straw,  at  the  following  rates :  for  each, 
quart  of  oats  0.5G  quart  rye,  or  0.8  quart  barley,  or  f  pound  biscuit,  or  2f  pounds  hay,  or  5^ 
pounds  straw  ;  hay  may  be  replaced  by  straw  at  the  rate  of  2  pounds  of  straw  for  1  pound  of  hay 

The  straw,  as  given  above  in  the  garrison  ration,  is  one-half  fed,  the  rest  used  for  litter. 

The  heavy  ration  is  issued  to  the  cavalry  of  the  guard,  the  horses  of  the  riding  school,  the 
horse  artillery  of  the  guard,  the  draught  horses  of  all  the  artillery,  and  the  cuirassier  regiments. 

The  light  ration  is  issued  to  all  other  horses,  except  that  the  lancers  receive  |  quart  of  oats 
more  than  the  quantity  specified  above  for  the  light  ration. 

From  the  day  of  their  purchase  until  joining  their  regiments,  the  remount  horses  receive  from 
7^  to  9  quarts  of  oats,  7  pounds  of  hay,  and  4  pounds  of  straw  per  diem. 

STABLES. 

The  new  and  best  stables  are  of  brick,  of  one  story,  with  a  loft  above.  They  have  a  central 
passage  way,  with  a  row  of  stalls  on  each  side  ;  and  usually  accommodate  the  horses  of  an  entire 
regiment. 

In  some  cases,  the  stables  are  built  on  three  sides  of  a  rectangle  ;  each  of  the  short  sides  for  1 
squadron ;  the  long  side  for  2  squadrons,  and  having  a  riding  house  in  the  middle ;  the  barracks, 
detached,  form  the  fourth  side.  In  other  cases,  the  long  side  is  for  1  squadron  and  the  riding 
house,  while  there  is  a  perpendicular  wing  for  each  of  the  other  squadrons. 

The  stalls  are  5'  2"  wide,  9'  6"  long  to  the  heel  post,  1'  thence  to  the  drain  ;  the  central  passage 
way  is  12'  4"  wide  ;  the  ceiling  15'  high.  The  interior  of  the  stables  is  plastered,  and  the  com- 
munication with  the  loft  is  by  means  of  trap-doors  in  convenient  places  for  throwing  down  the- hay. 

The  passage  way  is  paved  with  cubical  blocks  of  stone  ;  the  stalls  with  bricks  set  on  the  long 
edge. 

The  stalls  are  separated  by  swinging  bars  suspended  by  a  hook  at  the  head  of  the  stall  and 
by  a  stem  and  socket  in  rear,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  sketch,  in  which  A  is  the  heel  post. 


•^^v^ 


feTT^ 


1  B  the  swinging  bar. 

For  every  third  stall  there  is  a  window  3'  square,  the  sill  be- 
ing 8'  6"  above  the  floor ;  above  the  other  stalls  are  ventilators, 
10"  square,  that  can  be  opened  and  closed  by  means  of  iron  rods. 
The  mangers  are  of  cast  iron,  2'  long,  11"  wide,  8"  deep  ;  the 
top  4'  above  the  floor.     They  are  supported  by  two  iron  stan- 
chions imder  the  middle  ;  to  the  one  nearest  the  horse  he  is 
attached  by  a  sliding  ring. 
Each  horse  has  a  separate  iron  rack,  the  bottom  of  which  is  2'  above  the  manger  ;  it  is  2'  6' 
long  and  18"  deep.     The  hay  is  put  in  from  below,  after  being  sorted  and  cleaned  from  dust. 
There  are  pumps  and  vats  in  the  stables. 

From  1  to  4  days'  forage  is  kept  in  the  loft,  there  being  forage  magazines  close  at  hand. 
A  board  is  nailed  across  from  one  heel  post  to  another  about  7'  above  the  floor  ;  on  this  is 
painted  in  large  figures  the  number  of  the  stall,  and  on  a  black  board  as  follows : 

Private  John  Smith. — Equipment  j\'o.  162. 


Name  of  horse. 


Ziethen  . 


Year  of  remount. 


1853 


Sex. 


Male 


Height. 


i'  11" 


Age. 


216  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  age  is  that  of  his  joining  the  regiment,  or  at  the  year  of  remount. 

A  black  board  is  hung  up  in  the  stable  of  each  squadron,  on  which  are  inscribed  in  chalk, 
daily,  the  names  of  the  stable  guard,  the  number  of  government  horses  for  duty,  the  number  of 
officers'  horses  for  duty,  the  number  and  names  of  the  sick  horses. 

At  convenient  places  there  are  banquette  beds  for  the  stable  guard. 

Lanterns  are  swung  from  the  ceiling  along  the  middle  of  the  passage  way. 

The  liorse  hospital  and  the  shoeing  shop  are  in  separate  buildings,  the  former  being  enclosed 
by  a  wall. 

In  the  stable  yard  racks  are  provided  for  airing  the  litter. 

STABLE  DUTY. 

The  stable  guard  consists  of  1  corporal  and  8  men  per  squadron ;  they  are  on  duty  for  24 
hours,  sleep  in  the  stable,  feed  the  grain,  and  are  responsible  for  the  police  and  order  of  the 
stables  between  stable  calls.     Two  of  the  number  must  be  on  duty  and  awake  day  and  night. 

The  stable  guard  and  the  stable  duty  generally  are  under  the  direction  of  the  squadron  officer 
of  the  day,  the  orderly  sergeant  and  the  squadron  sergeant  of  the  day. 

The  ration  of  oats  is  divided  into  five  equal  portions.  One  of  these  is  given  the  first  thing 
in  the  morning  ;  then  the  horse  is  cleaned  and  watered  ;  after  this,  another  portion  is  given ; 
about  noon  the  horse  receives  another  portion,  and  is  again  watered ;  soon  after  this  he  is  again 
rubbed  down,  and  after  that  receives  another  portion  ;  a  little  before  dark  he  is  again  watered, 
and  receives  the  last  portion. 

The  straw  is  generally  chopped  and  fed  with  the  oats,  the  greater  part  being  given  with  the 
last  portion. 

The  hay  is  fed  one-half  in  the  morning,  the  rest  after  the  last  evening  feed. 

The  grain  is  fed  by  the  stable  guard  as  follows  :  a  box  mounted  on  wheels  contains  the  feed, 
and  is  wheeled  along  by  one  man  ;  two  others,  having  dish-shaped  baskets,  each  receive  from 
the  corporal  the  portion  for  1  horse,  and  pour  it  in  the  mangers  on  each  side  of  the  passage  way 
as  they  proceed.     The  orderly  sergeant  and  the  sergeant  of  the  day  superintend. 

The  men  clean  out  the  mangers  of  their  own  horses  before  the  feeding. 

Each  man  provides  his  own  horse  with  hay,  which  is  shaken  and  freed  from  dust,  sticks, 
weeds.  &c.,  before  being  placed  in  the  racks. 

At  stable  call,  each  man  polices  the  stall  of  his  own  horse.  Birch  brooms,  wooden  shovels 
bound  with  iron,  and  light  forks  are  used  in  policing  the  stables. 

For  every  10  horses  there  are  allowed  1  bucket,  1  sieve,  1  shovel,  1  fork,  and  from  1  to  2 
brooms. 

The  horses  are  sometimes  blanketed  in  the  stables. 

FIELD  SERVICE. 

In  the  field,  the  following  is  the  allowance  of  transportation  for  a  regiment  of  cavalry : 

1  four-horse  wagon,  containing  regimental  chest 300  pounds  weight. 

Paymaster's  and  other  regimental  books 40         "  " 

Adjutant's  desk 40         "  " 

Officers' mess  chest 100         "  " 

"        portmanteaus,  (captains  55,  lieutenants  45  lbs.,  each,).    1,340         "  " 

Total  weight i 1,820         " 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  217 

1  two-horse  wagon,  containing  armorer's  tools 220  pounds  weight. 

Saddler's  tools 110  "  " 

Baggage  of  the  surgeons 100  "  " 

Medicines,  &c 252  "  " 

Total  weight 682  " 

Each  squadron  has  a  two-horse  cart,  loaded  as  follows : 

Officers'  mess  chest 30  pounds  weight. 

Farriers' tools "...  60  "  " 

Spare  equipment 173  "  " 

Blankets  for  sick  men 27  "  " 

Baggage,  &c.,  of  orderly  sergeant 20  "  " 

Baggage,  &c.,  of  the  medical  personnel 60  "  " 

Money,  wlien  on  detachment 50  "  " 

Total  weight 420  " 


So  long  a  time  has  elapsed  since  the  Prussian  cavalry  have  seen  any  serious  field  service  on  a 
large  scale,  that  they  have  hut  little  more  than  theory  and  remote  traditions  in  this  regard ; 
it  is  proLahle  that  we  have  hut  little  to  learn  from  them  on  this  point. 

Tents  are  not  used  in  the  Prussian  army  ;  the  troops  being  placed  in  cantonments,  huts,  or 
bivouacs. 

The  huts  are  of  wood  or  straw  and  either  square  or  round ;  the  square  huts  are  15'  square  in 
the  interior  and  are  for  14  men  with  their  equipment ;  the  round  huts  are  20'  in  diame^'  r  and 
contain  18  men  with  their  equipment. 

The  round  huts  are  36,  the  square  28  paces  apart,  from  centre  to  centre. 

The  huts  of  each  squadron  are  in  two  rows,  ftxcing  each  other  and  perpendicular  to  the  front 
of  the  camp ;  the  width  of  the  street  varying  with  the  strength  of  the  squadron . 

The  picket  ropes  are  stretched  3  paces  in  front  of  the  lines  of  huts,  and  parallel  to  them; 
they  are  attached  to  picket  pins,  driven  firmly  into  the  ground,  2  paces  apart;  4|  paces  in  rear 
of  the  picket  rope  another  rope  is  stretched,  parallel  to  it  to  enclose  the  horses.  The  baggage 
is  in  rear  of  the  colonel's  but;  the  kitchens  25  paces  in  rear  of  the  baggage. 

The  kitchens  are  ditches  15  paces  long,  and  2'  deep,  one  for  each  squadron. 
The  latrines  are  125  paces  in  rear  of  the  kitchens  ;  those  for  the  men  are  ditches  30'  long  and  3' 
deep,  which  are  renewed  every  2  or  3  days  in  summer. 

A  regiment  of  cavalry  may  bivouac  either  in  line  or  with  the  rows  of  horses  perpendicular 
to  the  front,  or  in  column  by  squadrons  with  half  distance. 

1st.  bivouac  in  une. 

Each  squadron  is  allowed  a  space  75  paces  long,  by  30  paces  deep,  with  intervals  of  4  paces 
between  the  squadrons. 

The  kitchens  are  10  paces  behind  the  bivouac  of  the  men ;  the  squadron  officers  5  paces  in  rear  of 
the  kitchens  ;  the  staff  10  paces  in  rear  of  the  squadron  officers. 

The  parade  ground  is  in  front  of  the  bivouac,  and  must  be  at  least  30  paces  deep. 

A  bivouac  of  this  kind  occupies  a  front  of  312  paces,  and  a  depth  of  80  paces,  counting  from 
the  bivouac  of  the  front  rank  to  the  baggage  wagons,  inclusive. 
28   © 


218  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


2d.  bivouac  with  picket  ropes  perpendicular  to  the  front. 

Each  squadron  is  allowed  a  front  of  50  paces,  and  a  depth  of  75,  with  intervals  of  10  paces 
between  the  scj^uadrons.  The  arrangement  of  the  kitchens,  &c.,  is  similar  to  that  in  the  preced- 
ing case. 

The  parade  ground  is  in  front  of  the  camp,  and  is  50  paces  deep. 

A  bivouac  of  this  kind  occupies  a  front  of  230  paces  and  a  depth  of  125,  between  the  same 
points  as  in  the  last  case. 

3d.  bivouac  in  column  by  squadrons. 

Each  squadron  is  allowed  a  front  of  75  paces,  and  a  depth  of  20,  with  distances  of  10  paces 
between  the  squadrons. 

The  kitchens  are  10  paces  from  one  flank  of  the  column,  the  squadron  oflicers  5  paces  beyond 
the  kitchens  ;  the  colonel  and  staif  20  paces  behind  the  last  squadron.  The  parade  ground  is 
on  the  ojjposite  flank  from  the  kitchens  ;  a  free  space  50  paces  deep  is  left  in  front  of  the  bivouac 
and  jjarade  ground. 

This  bivouac  occupies  a  front  of  165  paces,  including  the  parade  ground,  and  a  depth  of  145 
paces  between  the  same  points  as  in  the  last  case. 

In  bivouac  the  sabres  are  stuck  in  the  ground  3  jjaces  in  front  of  the  picket  ropes  ;  the  shako 
and  cartridge  box  hung  on  it. 

The  horse  equipments  are  placed  3  paces  in  rear  of  the  horses. 

In  time  of  peace,  cavalry  usually  march  14  miles  each  day,  resting  every  fourth  day.  In 
good  weather,  and  over  good  roads,  they  may  march  28  miles  or  more,  but  such  long  marches 
are  to  be  avoided,  as  injurious  to  the  horses  and  equiiiment. 

On  good  roads,  and  in  good  weather,  the  march  is  usually  at  the  rate  of  3  miles  per  hour ;  in 
a  rough,  broken  country,  about  one-third  more  time  must  be  allowed.  ' 

To  place  a  squadron  on  a  railway  train  requires  about  2  houi's  ;  about  1  hour  is  needed  to 
take  them  oS. 

2  locomotives  and  about  32  wagons  are  needed  to  transport  a  squadron. 

SCHOOL  OF  EQUITATION,  AT  SCHWEDT. 

Lieutenants  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  cavalry  and  artillery  are  sent  to  this  school  for 
instruction  in  equitation. 

The  course  lasts  two  years  ;  there  is  but  one  class  of  officers,  that  is,  they  all  enter  and  leave 
the  school  at  the  same  time,  an  entirely  new  set  entering  every  second  year ;  one-half  of  the 
non-commissioned  officers  leave  every  year. 

One  officer  is  sent  from  every  brigade  of  cavalry,  and  from  every  two  regiments  of  artillery. 
Two  non-commissioned  officers  are  sent  from  every  regiment  of  cavalry  and  artillery. 

Each  officer  brings  2  private  horses  with  him,  the  school  furnishing  him  with  a  third ;  the 
non-commissioned  officers  come  without  horses,  and  take  back  to  their  regiments  the  horse  each 
one  rode  during  the  last  year. 

The  school  consists  of  1  field  officer  as  director,  3  captains  or  lieutenants,  as  instructors,  2 
riding  masters,  24  lieutenants  and  94  non-commissioned  officers  as  pupils,  1  paymaster,  1 
orderly  sergeant,  2  veterinaries,  1  quartermaster,  1  horse  breaker,  57  privates  as  grooms,  27 
privates  as  officers'  servants. 


REPORT  OP  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  219 

The  stables  and  riding  halls  are  ample,  and  well  arranged. 

The  riding  in  the  open  air  is  performed  on  a  drill  ground  some  distance  from  the  town  ;  here 
they  leap  ditches,  hurdles,  &c.,  fire  with  the  carbine  and  pistol,  run  at  the  heads,  &c. 

The  annexed  sketch  explains  the  manner  of  attacliing  the  head  to  the  post ;  it 
avoids  the  necessity  of  keeping  a  man  at  the  post  to  replace  the  head.  The  head  is 
shaped  as  in  the  figure,  and  is  partly  covered  with  leather  ;  at  A  it  is  secured  by  a 
leather  thong,  so  that  when  struck  it  moves  around  that  point  as  a  hinge,  and  is 
stopped  by  the  triangular  piece  of  wood,  B ;  it  thus  resumes  its  first  position.  They 
cut  at  balls  on  the  ground  on  the  right,  never  on  the  left. 
The  pupils  are  taught  to  vault  on  and  ofi"  the  horse  at  a  gallop.  Their  time  is  fully  occupied 
by  constant  exercises  during  the  day. 

The  usual  continental  system  of  employing  kickers  is  followed  here  ;  for  this  purpose  two  or 
three  horses  are  taught  to  kick  and  plunge  in  every  possible  way,  when  tied  up  close  to  two  posts  ; 
the  recruits  are  mounted  on  these,  without  stirrups,  and  hold  on,  if  they  can,  by  means  of  a 
couple  of  strajjs  attached  to  the  pommel. 

The  system  pursued  in  breaking  young  horses  is  one  of  extreme  care  and  gentleness  ;  violent 
measures  are  never  resorted  to  ;  considerable  attention  is  paid  to  rendering  the  muscles  of  the 
head  and  neck  pliable,  in  order  to  gain  full  control  over  the  horse  ;  this  must  not  be  understood 
as  indicating  approbation  of  the  Baucher  system,  which  here,  as  well  as  elsewhere,  has  been 
tried,  and  found  to  be  unfit  for  cavalry  purposes. 

THE  VETERINARY  SCHOOL  AT  BERLIN. 

At  this  institution  about  80  pupils  are  instructed  as  farriers  and  veterinaries  for  the  army,  in 
addition  to  a  number  of  civilian  pupils. 

It  is  very  similar  to  the  veterinary  school  at  Vienna,  already  described  under  the  head  of  the 
Austrian  cavalry  ;  but  not  quite  so  extensive,  and  perhaps  not  so  perfect. 

It  has  lecture  and  dissecting  rooms,  operating  halls,  museums  of  comparative  anatomy,  &c. 

The  stables  accommodate  about  80  horses,  and  are  arranged  for  from  4  to  6  horses  in  each 
division. 

The  interior  arrangement  of  the  stables  presents  nothing  peculiar,  except  that  there  is  but  one 
row  of  stalls  in  each.  There  are  boxes,  in  separate  stables,  for  glandered  horses.  The  Russian 
steam  bath  is  used  in  the  establishment,  but  it  is  stated  that  the  result  is  not  generally  beneficial ; 
it  has  been  applied  in  cases  of  rheumatism,  colic,  &c. 

The  horse-shoeing  department  is  under  a  special  instructor.  The  shoes  and  tools  present 
nothing  new  or  worthy  of  imitation,  both  being  heavy  and  awkward. 

The  shoes  have  no  groove,  but  the  nail  holes  are  countersunk  ;  there  are  four  nails  on  each 
side  ;  four  sizes  of  shoes  are  used  in  the  cavalry. 

The  method  of  shoeing  is  similar  to  that  pursued  in  Austria  :  one  man  holding  the  horse, 
another  his  leg,  a  third  putting  on  the  shoe. 

A  vice  is  made  use  of  in  teaching  the  pupils  to  set  and  nail  on  a  shoe  ;  the  hoof  and  pastern 
of  a  horse  recently  deceased  are  placed  in  this  vice,  which  is  attached  to  a  bench,  and  so 
ai'ranged  as  to  admit  of  being  thrown  into  various  positions. 

Cows,  pigs,  dogs,  and  cats,  are  treated  in  this  institution.  The  horses  of  civilians  are  cured 
and  shod  upon  moderate  terms,  in  order  to  secure  the  necessary  amount  of  practice  for  the 
pupils. 

The  Prussian  military  literature  is  very  rich,  and  is  well  worthy  of  study. 


220  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Among  the  works  relating  to  cavalry,  which  may  he  consulted  with  advantage,  are — 

Kalkstein  on  the  Prussian  army  ;  Die  Preussische  Armee,  nach  ihren  reglementarischen 
Formen  und  Einrichtungen,  &c.,  von  R  v.  Kalkstein;  Mirus'  Aide  memoire ;  Hiilfsluch 
heim  theoretischen  Untenicht  des  Kavalleristen,  von  Mirus — this  gives  the  interior  service 
in  great  detail. 

Witzleben  on  Army  Affairs  ;  Heerwesen  und  Infanteriedicnst  der  Koniglich  Prussischen 
Armee,  von  A.  von  Witzleben  ;  Buschbeck's  Field  Pocket-hook ;  Preussisches  Feld-Taschen- 
huch,  fur  Offiziere  allu  Waflfen,  von  F.  Buscliheck  ;  the  Hand-hook  of  Field  Service  for  Cavalry 
Otficers,  Handhuch  des  Felddienstes  fiir  Cavallerie  OiSziere,  von  eiuem  Cavallerie   Offiziere. 

Schimmel's  Partisan  Warfare ;  Compendium  des  kleines  Kniges,  fiir  Infanterie  und 
Cavallerie  Offiziere,  von  Friederich  Schimmel. 

Seidler  on  Breaking  Horses ;  Seidler,  Bearheitung  des  Campagne  Pferdes,  and  Seidler, 
Dressur  difficiler  Pferde. 

Prof.  Hertwig's  Works  on  the  Veterinary  Science  ;  Praktisches  Handhuch  der  Chirurgie  fiir 
Thierarzte ;  Taschenhuch  der  gesammten  Pferdekunde ;  Praktische  Arzneimittellehre  fiir 
Thieriirzte  von  Dr.  C.  H.  Hertwig. 

All  these  works  are  to  be  found  in  the  library  of  the  War  Department. 

GEORGE  B.   McCLELLAN, 
Captain  Ibt  Cavalry,  member  of  commission  to  Europe. 

Philadelphia,  December  lY,  1856. 


REPORT 


AUSTRIAN  CAVALRY. 


OKGANIZATION. 


In  the  Austrian  .army  there  are  1 6  regiments  of  heavy  cavalrj' — i.  e.,  8  of  cuirassiers  and  8 
dragoons  ;  and  24  of  light  cavalry — i.  e.,  12  of  hussars  and  12  of  lancers. 

Each  regiment  of  the  former  consists  of  6  active  squadrons,  the  men  and  horses  heing  chiefly 
from  the  German  provinces. 

Each  regiment  of  light  cavalry  has  8  active  squadrons  ;  the  men  and  horses  of  the  hussars 
heing  Hungarian  and  Transylvanian  ;  those  of  the  lancers  are,  for  the  most  part,  from  Poland. 

Each  regiment  has  a  colonel,  one  field  officer  for  every  two  squadrons,  an  adjutant,  paymaster, 
quartermaster,  and  judge  advocate. 

The  squadron  is  the  unit  for  the  administration  and  interior  service ;  the  division  of  2  squadrons 
commanded  by  a  field  officer  is  the  tactical  unit.     Each  division  has  a  standard. 

A  squadron  of  heavy  cavalry  consists  of: 
1  captain  commanding,  called  1st  captain. 

1  2d  captain. 

2  lieutenants. 

2  sub-lieutenants. 

2  sergeants. 
12  corporals. 

1  trumpeter. 

1  saddler. 

1  veterinary. 
162  men  and  150  government  horses. 
A  squadron  of  light  cavalry  consists  of: 

1  captain  commanding. 

1  2d  captain. 

2  lieutenants. 

2  sub-lieutenants. 
2  sergeants. 
12  corporals. 
2  trumpeters. 
1  saddler. 
1  veterinary. 
200  men  and  201  government  horses. 


222  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

In  addition  to  the  numbers  given  above,  2  officers'  servants  are  allowed  to  each  squadron. 

The  general  rule  is,  that  about  10  per  cent,  of  the  men  are  dismounted  ;  it  is  stated  by  some  of 
their  cavahy  officers  that  20  per  cent,  would,  in  time  of  war,  be  a  better  proportion. 

The  dismounted  men  remain  at  tlic  depot,  or  ride  in  the  wagons  ;  they  never  use  the  horses 
of  the  other  men,  and  do  all  the  dismounted  duty,  take  care  of  the  led  horses,  those  of  the 
sergeants,  &c. 

Each  regiment  has  a  depot  which,  during  peace,  consists  of  30  men  ;  in  time  of  war,  it  has  the 
same  strengtli  as  the  other  squadrons,  and  supplies  men  to  fill  the  vacancies  which  occur. 
The  junior  1st  captain  of  the  regiment  usually  commands  the  depot,  but  after  2  years'  service 
with  it,  he  may  demand  to  be  replaced  by  a  senior  1st  captain. 

In  time  of  peace,  the  depot  is  usually  with  the  headquarters  of  the  regiment ;  during  war,  it  is 
placed  at  some  spot  convenient  to  the  line  of  operations  of  the  regiment.  In  war,  the  remount 
horses  are  kept  with  the  depot  until  they  can  join  the  service  squadrons.  During  the  Hungarian 
war,  there  was  one  instance  when  there  were  1,000  horses  with  the  depot  of  a  regiment  of  lancers 
which  formed  part  of  the  garrison  of  the  besieged  place  of  Temesvar. 

TACTICS  AND  INSTRUCTION. 

In  order  to  give  an  idea  of  the  general  tone  of  the  tactics,  a  few  extracts  will  be  given,  relating 
chiefly  to  the  seat  and  the  early  instruction  of  the  recruits. 

For  the  cavalry,  equitation  is  of  the  greatest  importance. 

It  consists  not  only  in  the  ability  to  sit  the  horse,  but  also  in  knowing  how  to  conduct  and  use 
him  under  all  circumstances. 

The  object  of  the  cavalry  instruction  is  to  accomplish  this  purjjose  in  the  shortest  time,  and  in 
the  simplest  manner,  suited  to  the  mental  and  physical  qualities  of  the  soldiers. 

Therefore,  no  intricate  system  of  equitation  will  answer  the  purpose,  although  the  instruction 
of  the  non-commissioned  officers  may  be  carried  further  than  that  of  the  privates. 

The  instruction  in  the  riding  school  is  intended  to  give  the  rider  sufficient  skill  to  enable  him, 
by  means  of  the  various  aids,  to  control  the  horse,  and  cause  him  to  execute  all  possible  move- 
ments, and  at  the  same  time  to  give  such  a  position  to  the  upper  part  of  the  body  and  the  arms 
as  will  cause  the  rider  the  least  fatigue,  and  enable  him  to  use  his  weapons  with  the  greatest 
effect. 

It  is  an  absolute  rule  that  the  recruit  must  never  be  passed  from  one  lesson  to  another  until 
he  fully  comprehends,  and  can  execute  well,  all  that  precedes. 

Good  judgment,  tranquillity,  patience,  and  mild  treatment,  are  the  most  important  qualities  in 
an  instructor. 

The  strength  of  neither  horse  nor  man  should  be  over  taxed. 

An  experienced  and  skilful  instructor  will  always  go  to  work  with  circumspection,  and  never 
allow  himself  to  be  induced  by  passion  to  demand  more  of  man  or  horse  than  they  are  in  condi- 
tion to  perform,  or  the  end  in  view  requires. 

The  instruction  must  progress  only  according  to  proficiency  ;  therefore,  any  practice  in  the 
various  turns,  or  in  passaging,  while  the  requisite  preliminary  instruction  is  wanting,  is  not 
only  useless,  but  injurious. 

Besides  teaching  the  recruit  the  ordinary  care  of  his  horse,  he  must  also  be  made  familiar 
with  the  different  parts  of  his  equipment,  and  be  taught  how  to  saddle,  pack,  and  bridle  his 

horse. 

In  addition,  before  being  taught  to  ride,  he  must  receive  some  instruction  in  tlie  position  of 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  223 

the  soldier,  the  facings  and  marching  on  foot  without  weapons,  since  he  acquires  thereby  a 
moi-e  unconstrained  and  regular  position,  which  facilitates  the  instruction  in  riding. 

Finally,  there  are  some  exercises  on  foot  which  have  special  reference  to  the  position  of  the 
rider.  Among  these  are  :  To  throw  back  and  lower  the  shoulder  blades  by  crossing  the  arms 
behind  the  back  ;  turning  the  wrists  with  the  fingers  closed ;  to  stand  on  an  even  floor,  with 
the  feet  parallel  and  the  thighs  apart,  then  to  lower  and  raise  the  upper  part  of  the  body  by 
bending  the  knees  ;  by  this  means  the  necessary  flexibility  of  the  knees  and  the  vertical  position 
of  the  haunches  are  obtained. 

The  recruit  being  on  foot,  the  reins  are  placed  in  his  hands,  and  he  is  taught  how  to  hold 
them  ;  the  use  of  the  legs  is  explained  to  him  at  the  same  time. 

The  recruits  will  also  be  greatly  benefitted  by  being  frequently  shown  a  well  broken  horse, 
fully  packed,  and  mounted  by  a  well  drilled  soldier.  The  time  bestowed  upon  these  prelimina- 
ries will  not  be  thrown  away,  but  will  be  found  to  be  amply  repaid  by  the  increased  facility  with 
which  the  recruit  will  learn  his  duty,  and  the  smaller  amount  of  explanation  required  from  the 
instructor. 

Quiet  and  well  broken  horses  must  always  be  given  to  recruits. 

Their  instruction  must  never  commence  without  stirrups,  but  they  will  ride  without  stirrups 
only  after  they  have  acquired  a  firm,  sure  seat  ;  it  is  entirely  inadmissible  for  the  recruits  to 
ride  without  stirrups  in  the  lessons  with  the  longe. 

All  movements  will  be  first  taught  at  a  walk ;  afterwards  at  the  trot  and  gallop. 

The  walk  must  be  lively,  free,  and  decided. 

The  trot  must  be  decided,  easy,  united,  uniform,  long,  and  sure. 

The  gallop  should  be  calm,  united,  long,  and  low. 

A  good  instructor  can  drill  3  or  4  recruits  ;  but  the  same  instructor  should  always  drill  the 
same  men. 

The  intelligence  of  the  instructor,  the  progress  of  the  recruits,  and  the  pressure  of  circum- 
stances, must  determine  how  long  each  lesson  is  to  be  dwelt  upon,  and  when  to  pass  from  one 
lesson  to  another. 

OF  THE  SEAT. 

On  horseback,  the  body  has  three  points  of  support — the  extremities  of  the  haunch  bones  and 
the  end  of  the  spine  ;  therefore,  the  haunches  form  the  foundation  of  the  seat,  and  on  their 
direction  depends  the  position  of  the  rider. 

When  the  recruit  mounts  for  the  first  time,  his  haunches,  thighs,  the  lower  part  of  the  legs, 
and  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  must  be  placed  in  position  for  him. 

The  haunches  must  be  square  on  the  saddle,  and  perpendicular  to  it,  so  that  both  haunch 
boneg  may  rise  alike,  and  the  end  of  the  spine  be  exactly  over  the  middle  of  the  saddle.  If  the 
haunches  are  leaned  too  far  back,  the  waist  is  carried  with  them,  the  upper  part  of  the  body 
bent,  and  the  thighs  raised;  if  the  haunches  are  leaned  forward,  the  upper  part  of  the  body 
loses  its  steady  position,  requires  an  efibrt  to  preserve  its  equilibrium,  and  the  thighs  are  thrown 
too  far  back. 

The  thighs  must  be  so  much  turned  out,  and  thrown  forward  with  the  knees,  that  they  may 
lie  fiat  on  the  saddle.  The  extent  to  which  this  may  be  carried  is  determined  by  the  prescribed 
perpendicular  position  of  the  haunches  ;  if  the  thighs  are  thrown  too  far  forward,  the  haunches 
will  lean  back ;  and  if  the  thighs  are  too  far  back,  the  body  is  raised  from  the  saddle.  The 
lower  part  of  the  legs,  from  the  knee  down,  must  hang  along  the  sides  of  the  horse  quite  natu- 


224  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

rally,  and  without  constraint ;  they  should  not  be  opened  out,  nor  strongly  raised  or  pressed 
togetljer.  The  whole  surface  of  the  foot  must  rest  on  the  bottom  of  the  stirrup.  The  heel  must 
be  dropped  so  as  to  stretch  tlie  muscles  of  the  thigh,  but  not  so  much  as  to  stretch  the  calf  of 
the  leg  or  the  ankle  joint ;  for  upon  the  mobility  of  the  ankle  depends,  not  only  keeping  the 
stirrup,  but  also  the  falling  back  of  the  thigh  into  its  proper  place  after  each  step  of  the  horse. 
Although  the  whole  inner  surface  of  the  thigh  must  be  flat  on  the  saddle,  it  must  not  be  stiff 
and  constrained. 

When  the  lower  part  of  the  leg  hangs  naturally,  the  toe  is  a  little  turned  out. 

The  foot  is  thrust  into  the  stirrup  as  far  as  the  ball  of  the  great  toe,  and  must  rest  lightly  on 
the  bottom  of  the  stirrup.  The  vertical  plane  through  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  body  must 
pass  through  the  heels,  by  which  means  the  rider  has  more  power,  and  the  knees  produce  more 
effect. 

In  riding  without  stirrups,  the  thighs  must  be  well  extended  and  the  knees  lowered,  so  that 
the  rider  may  not  cling  to  the  horse  with  the  calves,  and  may  have  the  buttocks  firmly  on  the 
saddle.  The  spine  should  be  vertical  above  the  hips.  The  back  of  the  rider  must  be  elastic, 
but  firm  ;  because  this  is  necessary  in  using  his  weapons,  and  also  to  break  the  violence  of  the 
blow  caused  by  the  motion  of  the  horse,  particularly  at  a  trot,  and  the  rider  is  thus  prevented 
from  being  tossed  up  from  the  saddle,  shaken,  or  strained.  A  firm  back  is  also  necessary  to 
resist  the  forward  motion  of  the  horse  ;  and  it  is  to  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  peculiar  construc- 
tion of  the  joints  of  the  sjjine  admit  of  a  forward  motion  to  a  much  greater  extent  than  in  the 
opposite  direction.  Since  the  rider's  hands  are  in  absolute  connexion  with  the  mouth  of  the 
horse,  he  is  iiuUcd  forward  by  a  horse  heavy  on  the  hand,  or  bearing  on  the  bit,  and  finds  him- 
self unable  to  control  such  an  animal  unless  his  back  is  firm. 

In  long  marches,  the  fully  armed  soldier  is,  in  consequence  of  fatigue,  mucli  inclined  to  throw 
the  body  forward. 

These  are  good  reasons  for  giving  great  attention  to  a  good,  upright,  firm,  and  elastic  car- 
riage of  the  si^ine. 

The  shoulders  must  be  sunk,  and  both  blades  thrown  back,  not  to  such  an  extent  as  to  stretch 
the  muscles  of  the  breast,  but  merely  to  expand  it  freely;  if  the  shoulders  are  raised,  the  breast 
is  contracted,  which  is  injurious  to  the  health. 

If  one  shoulder  is  lower  than  the  other,  the  corresjjonding  hip  is  drawn  inward,  and  vice 
versa.  The  head  must  be  carried  easily  on  the  shoulders,  and  the  chin  slightly  raised  ;  if  the 
head  is  thrown  too  far  back,  the  position  of  the  spine  is  injured  ;  if  it  is  bent  too  far  forward, 
the  shoulders  are  rounded,  and  the  rider's  field  of  view  contracted. 

In  the  beginning  the  reins  are  placed  in  both  hands,  each  rein  passing  through  the  whole 
hand. 

The  upper  part  of  the  arm,  without  pressing  against  the  body,  hangs  near  it,  naturally, 
straight,  and  freely  ;  if  the  elbow  is  pressed  against  the  body,  the  shoulder  is  raised,  and  the 
position  of  the  hand  becomes  constrained  and  unnatural ;  while,  if  the  elbow  is  thrown  out  too 
far  from  the  body,  the  hand  becomes  unsteady. 

The  fore  arm  is  lightly  closed  on  the  body,  the  hands  so  rounded  at  the  wrists  as  to  bring 
the  thumbs  opposite  each  other,  and  the  little  fingers  somewhat  towards  the  body ;  the  hands 
are  held,  with  the  fists  closed,  4  inches  apart,  and  just  above  the  pommel.  The  outer  hand  is 
a  hand's  breadth  higher  than  the  inner. 

To  acquire  a  light,  firm  hand,  the  slight  pressure  of  the  fore  arm  against  the  body  is  neces- 


EEPOET    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B     IPCLELLAN.  225 

sary ;  for  if  the  recruit  endeavors  to  gain  it  by  a  strong  pressure  of  the  fore  arm  against  the 
body,  he  will  acquire  a  stiff,  heavy  hand. 

In  sitting  the  horse  the  body  is  divided  into  two  movable,  and  one  immovable  parts  ; 
the  movable  parts  are  from  the  hips  upwards,  and  from  the  knees  downwards  ;  the  immov- 
able part  is  the  thigh,  which,  to  a  certain  extent,  is  indivisible  from  the  saddle,  and  should  be 
as  though  glued  to  it. 

The  legs  should  hang  with  the  full  weight,  so  that  the  rider  will  neither  stand  on  the  stirrups, 
nor  close  the  knees  unnaturally,  because  this  closing  of  the  crotch  throws  up  the  knees,  which 
fault  increases  with  every  motion  of  the  horse,  especially  at  a  trot  or  gallop. 

The  chief  departures  from  a  regular  seat  are  :  the  split,  the  forked,  and  the  stool  seats. 

In  the  first,  the  legs  and  knees  are  thrown  too  far  back  ;  in  the  second,  they  are  too  nearly 
vertical ;  in  the  third,  the  hips  are  too  far  back,  and  the  knees  too  far  forward. 

In  the  first  lessons  the  recruit  must  be  allowed  to  take  the  position  which  his  build  renders 
most  convenient,  and  the  instructor  must  not  be  rigid  in  his  corrections,  but  allow  the  men  to 
acquire  confidence. 

The  shape  of  the  saddle,  the  form  and  gait  of  the  horse  have  a  decided  influence  upon  the 
seat ;  the  Hungarian  saddle  is  better  than  any  other  for  giving  an  upright  and  handsome  seat, 
but  great  care  must  be  taken  that  the  man  does  not  acquire  a  split,  or  forked  seat. 

A  proper  adaptation  of  man  and  horse,  the  discovery,  judicious  criticism  upon,  and  removal  of 
the  causes  which  prevent  the  recruit  from  assuming  a  good  seat,  do  more  to  hasten  the  instruc- 
tion than  loud  hallooing  and  chasing  about  for  hours. 

The  ivalk  is  the  easiest  gait  for  the  rider,  and  the  natural  gait  of  the  horse  ;  it  should  be  at 
the  rate  of  about  120  steps  per  minute. 

The  trot  is  the  most  lasting  pace  of  the  horse,  but  the  hardest  for  the  rider  ;  as  it  does  much 
towards  giving  a  good  seat,  the  men  should  be  much  exercised  at  it ;  the  common  trot  is  at  the 
rate  of  about  250,  the  trot  out  300  steps  per  minute. 

The  full  gallop  is  at  the  rate  of  500  steps  per  minute  ;  the  hand  gallop  somewhat  slower. 

The  charge  is  at  the  rate  of  about  600  steps  per  minute. 

SWIMMING. 

Since  it  is  often  necessary  for  light  troops  to  swim  their  horses,  they  should  be  taught  before- 
hand to  throw  the  carbine  over  the  shoulder,  to  allow  the  curb  reins  to  hang  loosely,  and  to 
guide  the  horse  by  the  snaffle,  not  straight  across  the  stream,  but  a  little  against  the  current. 

The  rider  must  grasp  the  mane,  and  never  look  at  the  water,  but  at  the  bank,  lest  he  become 
giddy. 

In  the  event  of  being  swept  from  the  saddle,  he  can  still  keep  above  water  by  keeping  hold  of 
the  mane  ;  if  he  loses  this  advantage,  he  must  endeavor  to  seize  the  horse's  tail,  and  allow  the 
animal  to  take  him  ashore. 

29  © 


226 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUKOPE. 


THE  DIVISION. 


S.-i 


cs 


■[33       t^    xi^i       ^     =^     B3 


The  figure  above  shows  the  formation  of  a  division,  of  2  squadrons,  in  line,  with  the  posts  of 
all  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  ofiicers. 

It  will  be  observed  that  there  is  no  interval  between  the  squadrons,  and  that  the  officers,  with 
the  exception  of  the  file-closers,  are  in  the  front  rank.  In  the  different  formations  in  column 
they  retain  their  places  in  the  ranks.  The  field  ofiicer  commanding  the  division,  accompanied 
by  a  trumpeter,  is  usually  at  a  suitable  distance  in  front  of  the  centre,  but  may  move  wherever 
he  deems  best. 

The  interval  between  divisions  is  18  paces. 

The  files  are  told  oft' by  fours,  the  column  by  fours  being  much  employed;  they  also  form 
column  by  twos,  half  platoons,  platoons,  half  squadrons,  half  divisions,  and  divisions. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  227 

The  front  of  a  column  of  twos,  &c.,  is  increased  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  pursued  in  the 
Russian  tactics. 

The  column  by  half  squadrons,  and  the  column  doubled  on  the  centre  half  squadron,  are  the 
usual  columns  of  manoeuvre. 

Columns  are  deployed  by  obliquing  at  the  gallop  ;  in  the  oblique  each  man  brings  his  horse's 
head  behind  his  neighbor's  knee. 

The  order  of  battle  of  a  regiment  of  heavy  cavalry  is  a  deployed  line  ;  the  same  formation  is 
used  when  they  are  exposed  to  a  heavy  fire  of  artillery. 

If  a  regiment  of  light  cavalry  forms  part  of  a  large  body  of  troops,  all  four  of  its  divisions  are 
deployed  in  the  order  of  battle,  or  when  exposed  to  a  heavy  artillery  fire  ;  if  the  regiment  is  by 
itself,  only  three  of  its  divisions  compose  the  line  of  battle,  the  4th  being  held  in  reserve,  in 
column,  500  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre. 

A  regiment  of  any  kind,  if  not  about  to  charge  at  once,  or  not  under  the  fire  of  artillery,  is 
formed  in  line  of  columns. 

It  being  supposed  that  heavy  cavalry  is  never  out  of  reach  of  the  support  of  other  troops,  the 
order  of  battle  of  a  brigade  of  such  cavalry  is,  with  all  its  divisions  deployed  in  one  line. 

The  order  of  battle  of  a  brigade  of  light  cavalry  is,  one  regiment  with  all  its  divisions  deployed 
in  line,  the  other  formed  in  line  of  columns,  with  closed  intervals,  500  paces  behind  the  centre 
of  the  front  line. 

Independently  of  the  reserves  above  mentioned,  every  body  of  cavalry  which  charges  detaches, 
at  the  moment  of  taking  the  trot,  a  portion  of  its  own  force  to  secure  its  flanks  and  rear. 

When  a  single  division  charges  the  flank  platoons  fall  out,  and  form,  in  column  by  platoons, 
about  300  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  ;  the  cajDtains  on  the  flanks  close  in  on  the  charging  platoons ; 
their  whole  duty  is  to  watch  and  protect  the  flanks  of  the  charging  body. 

When  a  regiment  charges,  the  flank  squadrons  act  in  the  same  manner,  but  each  squadron 
remains  behind  the  flank  to  which  it  belongs. 

In  the  charge  of  a  brigade  of  heavy  cavalry,  the  flank  divisions  fall  out,  and  form  in  column 
by  half  squadrons  behind  the  flanks  of  the  line. 

In  the  manoeuvres  of  large  bodies  of  cavalry  the  Austrians  form  them  in  one  line,  throwing  in 
advance  the  artillery,  and  a  few  squadrons,  intended  to  make  false  attacks,  and  to  clear  the  way 
for  the  main  body  ;  their  reason  for  this  is,  that  if  the  1st  line  is  broken  it  is  very  apt  to  carry 
the  2d  with  it. 

DOUBLE   COLUMNS. 

A  regiment  of  4  divisions  forms  double  column  at  full  distance  on  the  left  half  squadron  of 
the  2d  division,  and  the  right  half  squadron  of  the  3d  division,  without  closing  the  interval 
between  these  divisions  ;  thus  the  1st  and  2d  divisions  are  each  in  column  left  in  front,  the  3d 
and  4th  right  in  front. 

A  brigade  forms  double  column,  at  half  squadron  distance,  on  the  left  half  squadron  of  the  1st 
regiment,  and  the  right  half  squadron  of  the  2d  ;  the  1st  regiment  being  thus  formed  in  column 
left  in  front,  the  2d  right  in  front ;  the  interval  between  the  regiments  is  not  closed. 

ARMS   AND   ACCOUTREMENTS. 

Hussars. — Sabre,  pistol,  and  carbine. 

Lancers. — Lance,  sabre,  and  two  pistols  ;  16  men  in  each  squadron  have  a  carbine  in  the  place 
of  one  of  the  pistols. 


228  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPe'. 

Cuirassiers. — Sabre  and  two  instols  ;  16  men  in  each  sfjuadron  carry  a  carbine  instead  of  one 
of  the  pistols  ;  a  metallic  helmet  and  breast  plate,  no  back  piece. 

Dragoons. — Sabre,  pistol,  and  carbine  ;  metallic  helmet. 

The  light  cavalry  sabre  has  a  blade  about  32  inches  long,  and  not  much  curved  ;  the  scabbard 
and  guard  of  steel. 

It  is  rather  heavy,  and  not  particularly  well  balanced. 

Tlie  heavy  cavalry  sabre  is  somewhat  longer  and  straighter. 

The  lance  has  a  point  8  inches  long  above  the  knob  ;  two  iron  straps  extend  some  3  feet  down 
the  shaft,  which  is  about  9  feet  long  ;  the  butt  tipped  with  iron  ;  pennon  black  and  yellow  ;  the 
ordinary  lance  sling. 

Tlie  ordinary  carbine  and  pistol  present  nothing  remarkable  ;  the  pistol  has  no  strap  to  the  butt. 

The  pistol-carbine  has  been  introduced,  and  will  probably  supplant  the  old  fire  arms.  It  is  a 
long  single  barrel  pistol,  with  a  carbine  stock,  which  is  attached  by  two  spring  catches,  so  that 
it  may  be  used  either  as  a  pistol  or  carbine  ;  the  stock,  when  detached,  is  carried  in  one  of  the 
holsters. 

The  barrel  of  this  weapon  is  rifled,  with  4  shallow  grooves,  having  f  of  a  turn,  and  is  10| 
inches  long  ;  it  has  the  same  calibre  and  lock  as  the  new  j^attern  infantry  musket,  which  does 
not  differ  materially  from  our  own  last  model. 

Ths  sabre  belt  is  a  plain  leather  waist  belt,  with  two  slings,  the  shorter  of  which  may  be 
lengthened  or  shortened  by  means  of  a  buckle  ;  when  the  man  is  mounted  the  length  of  this 
sling  is  such  that  the  pommel  of  the  sabre  hangs  about  1  inch  below  the  waist  belt ;  on  foot  it  is 
shortened,  so  that  the  sabre  may  not  drag  upon  the  ground.  The  belt  fastens  with  an  S  hook 
for  the  officers,  with  a  buckle  for  the  men. 

The  carbine  sling  is  like  our  own  ;  the  pistol,  or  carbine  rammer  is  attached  to  a  strap  sewed 
to  this  sling. 

The  carbine  is  always  carried  on  the  sling,  never  being  put  in  a  boot  nor  attached  to  the 
saddle. 

The  cartridge-box  is  of  plain  black  leather,  and  slung  to  an  ordinaiy  shoulder  belt ;  it  con- 
tains 24  rounds,  and  has  at  one  end  a  small  compartment  for  cleaning  utensils. 

The  sabre  knot  is  flat,  and  of  leather. 

In  the  field  the  sabres  are  first  ground,  and  afterwards  whetted  every  two  or  three  weeks.  I 
was  informed  that  although  the  steel  scabbard  dulls  the  sabre  it  is  regarded  as  being,  on  the 
whole,  belter  than  wood,  as  not  being  so  liable  to  injury  by  fire,  kicks,  &c. 

In  time  of  war  the  lance  points  are  kept  sharp  by  filing.  The  fire  arms  are  only  used  on 
guard,  vidette,  &c.,  to  give  the  alarm,  it  being  taken  as  a  maxim  to  trust  only  to  the  steel. 
There  were  several  instances  during  the  Hungarian  war,  when  the  Hungarian  hussars  stopped 
to  fire ;  the  result  invariably  was  that  they  were  ridden  over  by  the  lancers. 

Many  of  the  officers  think  that  the  sabre  should  be  more  curved,  as  they  prefer  cutting  to  pointing. 

It  is  a  well  recognized  principle  that  a  dull  sabre  is  entirely  useless. 

When  lancers  use  the  sabre  they  rest  the  lance  on  the  left  arm. 

No  pains  are  spared  to  perfect  the  men  in  the  use  of  their  weapons,  for  they  regard  this  and 
individual  horsemanship  as  the  most  important  qualifications  of  the  cavalry  soldier. 

The  hussars  wear  a  sabretasche  attached  to  the  waist  belt. 


EEPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEOKGE  B.  M°CLELLAN. 


229 


HOESE  EQUIPMENTS. 

The  Hungari<an  saddle  is  used  in  most  regiments. 

The  annexed  figure  represents  a  side  view  of  that  saddle. 


It  is  of  hard  wood,  entirely  uncovered,  and  consists  of  the  bars  (c),  the  front  fork  (a),  the  rear 
fork  (b),  and  the  saddle  seat  or  straining  strap  (d).  The  ends  of  the  forks  (e,  e)  are  let  into 
mortices  in  the  bars,  and  secured  by  raw  hide  thongs  passing  through  mortises  (p,  p). 

The  saddle  seat,  or  straining  leather,  is  a  stout  strap  of  leather,  from  IH  to  13^  inches  long, 
A\  inches  broad  at  the  hind  fork,  3|  to  4  in  the  middle,  2\  to  3  at  the  front  fork. 

It  is  secured  to  the  front  fork  by  4  flat-headed  nails,  a  strip  of  leather  being  first  laid  over 
the  end  of  the  strap,  as  seen  aty. 

As  the  greatest  strain  comes  upon  its  junction  with  the  hind  fork,  it  is  secured  to  it  difi"erently. 
At  each  angle  of  the  strap  a  stout  thong  is  left  when  cutting  it  out ;  this  thong  is  passed  around 
the  neck  of  the  fork,  and  secured  by  a  nail  in  rear  ;  5  flat-headed  nails  are  then  driven  through 
the  strap  into  the  fork ;  under  the  head  of  each  nail  a  round  piece  of  leather  is  placed  to  prevent 
the  strap  from  being  cut  or  worn  ;  /'  shows  this  arrangement. 

The  strap  is  attached  to  the  bars  by  raw  hide  thongs  drawn  tight,  as  shown  in  the  figure. 
The  Forks  are  strengthened  by  light  iron  plates  nailed  to  the  front  of  the  front  fork  and  the 
rear  of  the  hind  fork. 

The  girth  is  attached  to.  the  bars  by  thongs  passing  through  the  holes  {g).  The  stirrup 
leathers  pass  through  the  mortises  (7i.)  and  in  the  notch  (m),  a  groove  being  cut  in  the  under 
surface  of  the  bar  to  receive  the  leather.  The  holes  (i)  are  for  the  purpose  of  attaching  the 
straps  which  secure  the  holsters  ;  those  at  h  for  attaching  the  crupper.  Near  the  upper  end  of 
each  fork  is  a  mortise  ;  that  in  the  front  fork  to  receive  the  cloak  strap,  that  in  the  rear  fork  to 
receive  the  valise  strap. 

On  the  front  end  of  the  right  bar  is  the  name  of  the  horse  ;  on  the  left  bar  is  the  number  of  the 
horse,  (e.  g.,  14,)  and  the  government  brand. 

The  girth  is  of  leather,  3^  inches  broad,  and  fastens  by  a  large  buckle  on  the  left  side. 

Crupper  and  breast  strap  present  nothing  unusual. 

The  blanket  generally  used  is  a  common  white  one,  folded  thrice  lengthwise,  and  4  times  in 
the  other  direction. 

A  thick  felt  saddle  cloth,  of  one  thickness,  is  used  in  the  riding  schools,  and  is  spoken  of  in 
the  highest  terms. 


230  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

Tlie  men  sometimes  place  a  straw  mat  under  the  blanket. 

Four  sizes  of  saddles  are  issued  to  the  light  cavalry;  6  to  the  heavy. 

The  surcingle  is  of  black  leather,  and  is  fastened  in  the  Mexican  style  by  a  thong  and  rings. 

The  stirrups  are  of  steel,  with  a  large,  round,  fiat  bottom,  and  a  flat,  thin,  and  deep  arch  ; 
in  winter  a  little  mat  of  straw  is  tied  to  the  bottom  of  the  stirrup  to  protect  the  feet  against 
the  cold. 

One  shoe  pouch,  of  black  leather,  is  carried  attached  to  the  right  side  of  the  rear  fork  ;  it 
contains  2  shoes  and  32  nails  ;  the  nails  are  carried  stuck  in  a  species  of  circular  pin  cushion 
made  of  plaited  straw. 

Lance  boot,  small,  and  of  leather  ;  one  on  each  stirrup  of  lancers. 

The  two  holsters  are  strapped  to  the  saddle  ;  two  slits  in  the  schabraque,  which  may  be  closed 
by  buckles,  allow  the  i)istols  to  be  drawn. 

Over  the  holsters  are  carried  two  bags  of  hair  cloth,  (called  pack-tor nisters, )  about  1  foot  square. 
In  the  left  hand  bag  are  carried :  razor,  soap,  shaving  brush,  looking-glass  in  wooden  frame, 
(4|"  X  3",)  hair  comb,  beard  comb,  wax  for  the  moustache,  thread  of  various  colors,  case  of 
needles,  thimble,  white  wax,  patches  of  cloth,  buttons,  pantaloon  strajjs,  spare  rowels,  button 
loops,  scissors,  a  curved  and  a  straight  awl,  shoemakers'  thread  and  wax,  colophony,  sight  cover, 
clothes  brush,  linen  cap  cover,  iron  halter  ring  with  screw,  whetstone,  tooth  brush,  towel,  a 
pennon,  J  lb.  bread,  some  oats,  and  on  the  outside  a  forage  cap  and  tent  pin. 

In  the  right  hand  bag  are  carried :  curry-comb,  horse  brush,  a  coujole  of  cloths,  a  fleam, 
paring  knife,  mane  comb,  five  brushes  for  removing  the  mud,  waxing,  polishing,  coloring,  and 
greasing  the  boots  and  horse  equipment,  (each  brush  5"  X  2|-",)  wax  of  3  kinds,  cork  stopper, 
box  of  grease,  brick  dust,  iron  filings,  box  of  chalk,  button  stick,  brush  for  cleaning  brass, 
rotten  stone,  pumice  stone,  screwdriver,  emery  stick,  patches  of  cloth,  white  chalk,  bran,  knife, 
fork,  spoon,  salt,  herbs,  handles  of  the  kettle,  and  slippers. 

These,  with  a  few  other  articles  that  it  is  scarcely  worth  while  to  name,  form  a  collection  that 
would  do  credit  to  a  well  supplied  store,  but  seem  to  be  rather  too  numerous  for  the  good  of  the 
horse. 

The  valise  is  of  cloth,  and  is  strapped  to  the  cantle  ;  in  it  are  carried  :  1  pair  of  pants,  the 
uniform  coat,  or  spencer,  the  overalls  when  not  in  use,  2  shirts,  2  pairs  of  draws,  1  pair  linen 
cloths  for  wrapping  the  feet,  1  pocket  handkerchief,  1  pair  of  gloves. 

The  schabraque  of  cloth,  witli  black  lamb's  wool  seat. 

Four  men  in  each  platoon  carry  a  hatchet,  strapped  to  the  left  holster. 

The  bridle  consists  of  a  crown  piece,  brow  band,  throat  latch,  nose  band,  2  cheek  pieces,  and 
2  pairs  of  reins ;  the  front  is  ornamented  by  diagonal  plaited  cords,  as  in  the  Russian  service  ;  the 
cheek  pieces  are  single  where  they  buckle  to  the  crown  piece,  and  are  sjflit  below,  the  longer 
end  buckling  to  the  curb  bit,  the  shorter  connecting  with  the  snafile  by  a  chain  and  toggle. 

Both  bits  are  of  steel ;  there  are  3  patterns  of  curbs,  of  diS'erent  degrees  of  severity  ;  the  curb 
chain  is  also  of  steel. 

The  reins  buckle  to  ordinary  bit  rings. 

The  halter  has  a  plain  head  stall,  and  a  rope  6'  long,  of  the  thickness  of  the  little  finger  ;  by 
attaching  the  snaiSe  bit,  it  becomes  a  watering  bridle. 

On  the  march,  the  lialter  is  hung  on  the  left  side  of  the  pommel. 

Two  forage  ropes  are  carried,  hung  to  the  cantle. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   M''CLELLAN.  231 

The  forage  sack  is  a  long  linen  bag,  with  a  longitudinal  opening  in  the  middle ;  when 
empty  it  is  carried  on  the  pommel. 

On  the  march,  it  contains  the  oats  and  bread,  ec[ually  divided  between  the  two  ends  ;  in  this 
case  it  is  attached  to  the  rear  fork. 

The  hay  is  also  attached  to  the  rear  fork. 

The  overcoat  and  stable  frock  are  on  the  pommel. 

The  stable  blanket  girth  is  in  the  forage  sack. 

The  camp  kettle  is  carried  on  the  end  of  the  valise. 

The  picket  pins  for  light  cavalry  are  of  wood,  16"  long  and  2"  in  diameter  ;  there  is  a  small 
iron  ring  near  the  head  for  attaching  the  halter  rope ;  each  man  carries  one  strapped  to  his 
right  holster. 

The  picket  pins  of  the  heavy  cavalry  are  from  3^'  to  4'  long  ;  it  is  carried  in  a  boot,  attached 
by  a  long  strap  to  the  right  holster,  the  butt  end  being  secured  by  means  of  a  small  strap  from 
the  surcingle. 

The  handle  of  the  curry  comb  unscrews. 

Bridles  are  issued  to  the  regiments  cut  out,  but  not  sewed  together. 

In  bivouac,  the  schabraque  is  used  to  cover  the  equipment. 

The  saddle  blanket  is  iised  as  a  horse  cover  in  bivouac  during  bad  weather,  and  in  garrison 
in  the  day  time  only. 

The  equipments  and  arms  are  kept  in  the  corridors  of  the  quarters. 

Officers  use  the  English  saddle  in  the  riding  schools,  but  on  parade  they  must  appear  with 
the  Hungarian  tree,  which,  for  them,  is  covered  with  leather. 

The  spurs  are  of  steel,  with  short  shanks,  and  are  screwed  permanently  to  the  heel  of  the  boot. 

Martingales  are  exceptionally  used — for  horses  that  will  persist  in  throwing  up  the  head 
continually. 

The  men  usually  make  a  spare  schabraque  out  of  old  blankets  ;  this  alone  is  used  at  drill ; 
on  the  march  it  is  placed  on  top  of  the  other. 

The  saddle  and  equipment,  packed,  weighs  50  pounds. 

The  men  always  ride  on  the  curb,  passing  the  snaffle  reins  through  a  loop  on  the  curb  reins, 
and  allowing  them  to  hang  loose. 

CLOTHING. 

The  clothing  is  well  made,  and  of  most  excellent  material. 

In  the  issue  of  clothing,  each  article  is  supposed  to  be  divided  into  a  certain  number  of  por- 
tions, and  every  man  is  allowed  a  certain  number  of  portions  j)er  annum,  which  he  may  draw 
in  whatever  articles  he  pleases.  The  clothing  is  issued  to  the  squadron  captains  either  made 
up,  without  being  trimmed,  or  merely  in  the  shape  of  the  raw  material — just  as  they  elect. 

The  system  of  portions  is  also  pursued  with  regard  to  the  horse  equipment,  each  captain 
drawing  the  number  allowed  his  squadron  in  whatever  articles  happen  to  be  required. 

The  overcoat  for  all  the  cavalry  is  of  thick  white  cloth,  with  sleeves  and  a  long  cape  ;  it  is 
made  very  long  and  loose. 

It  may  here  be  stated  that  this  white  cloth,  of  which  the  uniform  coats  of  the  infantry  are 
also  made,  is  stated  by  the  Austrian  officers  to  be  excellent  for  the  field ;  it  is  cleaned  by 
washing  and  pipe  clay,  and  they  seem  to  prefer  it  to  any  other  color. 

The  uniform  coat  is  a  short,  double-breasted  frock,  with  a  standing  collar,  cut  away  in  front ; 


232  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

the  lancers  alone  wear  epaulettes.  This  coat  is  white  for  the  heavy  cavalry  ;  dark  green  for 
the  lancers  ;  light  or  dark  blue  for  the  hussars. 

A  spencer,  of  the  same  color  as  the  coat,  is  worn  by  all  the  cavalry  on  certain  occasions  ;  it 
has  a  rolling  collar,  and  is  made  so  loose  that  it  may  be  worn  over  the  uniform  coat. 

The  men  may  wear  a  vest  if  they  jjlease. 

The  pants  are  rather  scant ;  those  of  the  hussars  fit  perfectly  tight  to  the  leg,  and  are  worn 
under  the  boots  ;  those  of  the  other  cavalry  are  re-enforced  with  leather  as  far  up  as  the  knee. 

For  the  heavy  cavalry  the  pants  are  light  blue,  with  a  red  cord  ;  for  the  rest  of  the  cavalry 
they  are  of  the  color  of  the  coat. 

The  hussars  wear  boots  reaching  nearly  to  the  knee  ;  the  rest  of  the  cavalry  wear  half  boots. 
No  spare  boots  are  carried  on  the  march. 

The  stable  frock,  neatly  made  of  coarse  white  linen,  serves  as  a  uniform  coat  in  the  summer. 
No  linen  pants  are  issued  or  worn.  For  service  in  cold  weather,  grey  cloth  overalls  are  issued  ; 
they  button  all  the  way  up,  both  on  the  inside  and  outside  of  the  legs.  On  the  march,  in  winter, 
the  men  wear  the  vest,  uniform  coat,  spencer,  cloak,  pants,  and  overalls. 

Socks  are  not  worn,  but  are  replaced  by  linen  bandages. 

Shirts  and  drawers  are  issued. 

The  forage  cap  is  the  same  for  all  the  cavalry  ;  it  is  of  a  very  dark  color,  and  is  somewhat  of 
the  shape  of  the  French  kepis,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  sketch,  the  vizor  being  more  peaked, 
and  the  top  larger. 

The  heavy  cavalry  wear  a  metallic  helmet,  with  a  high  crest.  The  lancers  wear  the  well 
known  Polish  lancer  hat.     The  hussars  wear  a  cylindrical  shako,  with  a  peaked  vizor. 

The  shoulders  being  bare,  excejit  for  the  lancers,  the  distinction  of  grade  is  on  the  collar  and 
cuffs  ;  for  officers,  it  is  as  follows  :  a  2d  lieutenant  has  one  star  embroidered,  in  gold  or  silver, 
on  each  side  of  the  collar  ;  a  1st  lieutenant  has  two  stars  ;  a  captain,  three  ;  a-major  has  a 
narrow  strip  of  lace  on  the  cuffs  and  on  the  front  and  upper  edges  of  the  collar  ;  also,  one  star 
on  each  side  of  the  collar  ;  a  lieutenant  colonel  has  the  same  lace,  and  two  stars  ;  a  colonel,  the 
same  lace,  and  three  stars  ;  a  general  of  brigade  has  the  cuff  and  collar  wholly  covered 
with  plain  lace,  and  one  star  ;  a  general  of  division,  the  same  lace,  and  two  stars ;  a  full 
general,  the  same  lace,  and  three  stars  ;  a  field  marshal  has  the  cuff  and  collar  partly  covered 
with  waving  lace,  and  has  three  stars. 

A  sergeant  has  three  stars  on  each  side  of  his  collar  ;  a  corporal  has  two  ;  a  private  of  the 
1st  class,  one. 

On  certain  occasions  the  officers  wear  silk  sashes,  colored  black  and  yellow. 

The  stock,  for  both  officers  and  men,  has  a  flap,  like  the  Kussian ;  the  upper  edge  of  the 
stock  is  white. 

Gloves,  or  mittens,  of  cloth,  are  issued  to  the  men. 

RATIONS. 

The  food  of  the  Austrian  soldier  consists  chiefly  of  bread  and  soup.  From  1^  to  2  pounds  of 
bread  is  the  daily  ration. 

An  allowance  of  from  5  to  10  cents  per  diem,  according  to  the  price  of  food,  is  made  to  each 
man,  to  enable  him  to  purchase  meat  (generally  ^  pound)  and  vegetables  for  soup. 

In  garrison,  they  have  soup  but  once  a  day — about  noon  ;  in  camp,  they  also  have  soup  soon 
after  reveille. 

In  the  field,  hard  bread  is  generally  used. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'^CLELLAN. 


233 


The  men  generally  make  their  breakfast  and  supper  on  a  piece  of  bread  and  a  little  glass  of 
brandy  purchased  at  the  sutler's. 

COOKING    UTENSILS. 


^^ 


Kettles  of  the   annexed   shape  and  dimensions   are  used  by  the 
'  cavalry  in  garrison  and  in  the  field.     The  handle  of  the  kettle  can  be 
unhooked,   and   is  carried  in  one   of  the   tornisters ;    there   is   also 
a  straight  handle  for  the  top,  so  that  it  may  be  used  as  a  frying  pan  ; 
this  handle,  also,  is  carried  in  the  tornister. 
There  is  one  of  these  kettles  for  every  six  men. 
It  is  carried  by  that  man  of  the  mess  who  has  the  strongest  horse. 
A  linen  bag  is  put  over  the  valise,  to  keep  it  clean  ;  then  the  kettle 
is  put  on  one  end,  the  cover  on  the  other ;  a  second  bag,   over  the  whole,  secures  the  kettle. 
Each  man  has  a  spoon,  and  they  eat  in  common  out  of  the  kettle,  in  the  field. 
In   the   field  ovens  are  made  of  wattling,  mud,  and  straw,  as  described  in  Laisnes'  Aide 
Memoire  du  Genie 

HOESES. 

The  minimum  height  of  the  heavy  cavalry  horses  is  15  hands  1  inch. 
Do.  do.  light  do.  14      "      1     " 

Some  of  the  light  cavalry  horses  are  even  below  this  mark. 

Stallions  are  not  used  in  ranks. 

The  horses  are  branded  on  the  left  hip  with  the  initials  of  the  emperor,  and  of  the  province 
where  purchased  ;  on  the  left  side  of  the  neck,  under  the  mane,  is  branded  the  number  of  the 
horse.  They  are  purchased  by  a  commission  of  cavalry  officers,  and  issued  to  the  regiments  as 
required.     If  the  captain  objects  to  receiving  a  horse,  he  appeals  to  the  colonel,  who  decides. 

Horses  are  received  at  the  age  of  5  years,  as  a  general  rule ;  they  are  broken  in  by  old  soldiers 
under  the  direction  of  the  2d  captain  of  the  squadron. 

If  a  soldier  rides  the  same  horse  for  8  years,  he  receives  a  gratuity  of  about  |7,  and  |2  50  for 
every  additional  year.  If  he  rides  him  for  20  years,  he  becomes  the  owner  of  the  horse  and 
equipment,  and  may  take  him  away  when  he  leaves  the  service. 

The  horses  of  the  same  squadron  are  not  necessarily  of  the  same  color. 

Lieutenants  and  2d  captains  are  allowed  one  government  horse  each,  and  forage  for  two  private 
horses  ;  above  the  grade  of  2d  captain  officers  must  own  their  own  horses.  If  an  officer  allowed 
a  government  horse  uses  him  for  8  years,  he  becomes  the  property  of  the  officer. 

A  colonel is  allowed  forage  for  6  horses  in  peace,  for  7  in  camj^aign. 


A  lieutenant  colonel  or  major. 

A  first  captain 

A  second  captain 

A  lieutenant 


5 
4 
3 
3 


6 
5 
4 
3 


For  a  certain  proportion  of  these  horses  commutation  for  forage  may  be  drawn,  although  the 
officer  does  not  actually  possess  the  horses. 

In  addition  to  the  allowance  of  forage  a  certain  monthly  allowance  in  money  is  o-iven  to  assist 
the  officer  in  keeping  on  hand  the  proper  number  of  horses  ;  this  allowance  is  as  follows : 

For  a  colonel,  about  |10. 

For  a  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  about  $8. 
30  O 


234  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

For  a  1st  captain,  about  $6  50. 

For  a  2(1  captain,  about  $4. 

For  a  lieutenant,  about  $2  50. 

Very  few  of  the  horses  used  in  the  army  come  from  the  government  breeding  establishments, 
these  consisting  mainly  of  good  stallions,  and  having  for  their  object  the  improvement  of  the 
breed  in  the  country. 

The  heavy  cavalry  horses  are  principally  from  the  German  provinces ;  they  are  of  fine  appear- 
ance, but  generally  wanting  in  endurance,  being  often  long  legged  and  narrow  chested. 

The  light  cavalry  horses  are  excellent ;  they  are  of  fine  appearance,  active,  hardy,  intelligent, 
and  seldom  vicious.  They  are  mostly  from  Hungary,  Transylvania,  and  Poland.  Large  num- 
bers are  imported  from  Kussia. 

The  average  price  of  the  cuirassier  horses  is  $80. 


Do. 

do. 

dragoon           "            65. 

Do. 

do. 

light  cavalry  "            56. 
FOEAGE 

The  ration  of  a  heavy  cavalry  horse  is  6  pounds  of  oats,  10  pounds  of  hay,  2  pounds  of  straw; 
for  a  light  cavalry  horse  it  is  C  pounds  of  oats,  8  pounds  of  hay,  2  pounds  of  straw. 

Five  days'  rations  are  carried  on  the  march. 

The  hay  is  twisted  into  a  rope,  and  then  coiled  into  a  circle  ;  2  men  are  needed  to  twist  it  in 
different  directions,  first  wetting  it  a  little. 

In  barracks  there  are  3  equal  feeds  each  day;  one  at  reveille,  another  at  11|,  the  last  at  dark. 

The  horses  are  watered  3  times  a  day. 

As  a  general  thing,  the  horses  are  not  fed  during  a  march. 

In  the  field  sickles  are  carried. 

The  ration  of  straw  mentioned  above  is  for  the  litter. 

STABLES,  AND  STABLE  MANAGEMENT. 

The  variations  in  the  plan  and  arrangements  of  the  stables  are  very  great.  In  some  there  is 
a  single  passage  way,  with  a  row  of  stalls  on  one  side  only ;  in  others,  a  long  hall,  with  a  row 
of  stalls  on  each  side  ;  in  another,  two  halls,  with  two  rows  of  stalls  on  each  side  of  each  hall. 

Some  are  for  8  horses,  others  for  sixteen  ;  others  again  for  200. 

In  some,  the  mangers  are  of  wood  ;  in  others,  of  wood,  lined  with  iron  ;  in  others,  of  stone  ; 
some  of  these  mangers  being  continuous,  others  for  a  single  horse. 

The  hay-racks  are  generally  of  iron  ;  sometimes  a  rack  for  each  horse,  in  other  cases,  one 
long  rack  for  many  stalls. 

Single  stone  mangers,  and  iron  racks,  seem  to  be  the  best. 

In  Vienna  the  stalls  are  floored  with  plank,  the  head  of  the  stall  being  of  clay,  that  the  fore- 
feet may  rest  upon  it ;  a  drain,  covered  with  moveable  boards,  runs  along  behind  each  row 
of  stalls. 

In  Verona  there  are  stalls  paved  with  small  round  paving  stones.  The  passages  are  some- 
times paved  with  stones,  sometimes  with  wooden  blocks. 

The  roof  is  supported  by  pillars.  The  stalls  are  separated  by  swinging  bars  ;  in  the  stables 
for  officers'  horses,  cushions  are  suspended  from  these  bars. 

There  is  a  shelf  over  the  rear  of  each  stall  ;  a  hook,  or  pin,  on  each  post. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  235 

The  name  of  the  man  to  whom  the  horse  belongs  is  over  each  stall. 

As  the  quarters  are  usually  over  the  stables,  the  racks  are  filled  from  below.  The  stalls  are 
very  large  ;  in  those  of  the  stables  of  12th  lancers,  at  Vienna,  they  are  11'  long,  and  5'  4"  wide, 
with  a  passage  way  of  9'. 

During  the  day  the  litter  is  generally  laid  on  racks,  under  sheds,  in  the  yard  ;  in  the  stables 
of  the  riding  schools,  the  litter  is  kept  down  during  the  day. 

The  stables  are  kept  in  good  order  ;  those  of  the  riding  schools  are  patterns  of  neatness. 

No  equipments  are  kept  in  the  stables. 

The  stable  guard  consists  of  1  non-commissioned  officer  per  squadron,  and  2  men  per  platoon  ; 
one  of  the  latter  must  always  be  awake. 

Whenever  any  officer  in  uniform  enters  a  stable,  the  man  on  duty  at  once  reports  to  him  the 
condition  of  affairs. 

In  some  of  the  stables  the  racks  for  drying  the  forage  are  of  iron,  with  sheet  iron  roofs  over 
them  ;  these  roofs  can  be  turned  up  when  the  sun  is  out. 

Attached  to  one  stable  was  a  horse  bath,  o'  deep,  18'  wide,  30'  long  at  bottom,  61'  long  at 
top,  approached  by  a  ramp  at  each  end — these  ramps  15'  6"  long. 

Each  man  feeds  his  own  horse  ;  he  stands  at  the  foot  of  the  stall,  and  receives  from  the  non- 
commissioned officer,  as  he  passes  down,  the  portion  for  his  horse.  When  all  the  men  have 
received  their  portions,  the  non-commissioned  officer  reports  to  the  officer  of  the  day,  at  whose 
command  the  men  place  the  food  in  the  manger  and  rack,  and  stand  by  their  horses  while 
feeding. 

DAILY  DUTY  IN  GARRISON. 

In  summer  and  winter  reveille  at  from  5  o'clock  to  6  o'clock. 

At  reveille  the  men  put  on  their  pants  and  stable  frocks,  fold  up  their  beds,  and  go  to  the 
stable,  one  man  remaining  in  every  room  to  police  it.  They  then  rub  down  the  horses  with 
straw,  remove  the  litter,  water  and  feed,  clean  the  horse  with  the  brush  while  he  is  feeding. 

In  cleaning,  the  curry  comb  is  used  only  to  clean  the  brush,  it  is  never  applied  to  the  horse. 

They  then  return  to  the  quarters,  wash,  dress,  and  take  their  breakfast,  which  is  a  piece  of 
bread  and  a  glass  of  brandy. 

At  about  8  o'clock  there  is  a  drill,  or  else  the  horses  are  taken  out  for  exercise  ;  in  any  event, 
the  horses  are  saddled,  that  the  men  may  have  some  occupation,  and  keep  the  equipment  in 
order.  When  the  drill  is  over  they  unbridle,  put  on  the  halter,  and  loosen  the  girths  ;  carry 
the  bridle  and  arms  to  the  quarters,  put  on  the  stable  frock,  return  to  the  stable,  and  unsaddle. 

They  then  rub  the  horses  down  with  straw  ;  carry  the  saddles  to  the  quarters  ;  clean  them, 
as  well  as  the  bridle,  arms,  &c. 

At  11^  is  the  second  feed. 

After  feeding  the  horses,  the  men  have  their  dinner. 

The  guard  and  picket  saddle  up,  and  get  ready  for  guard  mounting,  wnich  is  at  12^. 

The  rest  of  the  men  sleep,  or  do  what  they  please  until  2  o'clock  ;  at  which  hour  the  horses 
are  cleaned  with  the  brush. 

Until  nearly  dark  the  men  are  then  at  school,  where  they  are  taught  the  duties  of  patrols, 
sentinels,  &c.,  the  names  of  the  officers,  &c.,  &c. 

About  dark  they  go  to  the  stables,  make  down  the  litters,  water  the  horses,  take  off  the 
blankets,  give  the  last  feed,  and  leave  the  horses  quiet  with  the  stable  guard. 


236  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

They  tlien  return  to  the  quarters,  whence  they  may  he  absent  until  8  o'clock,  unless  they 
have  a  pass  for  a  longer  time. 

Must  he  in  bed  at  9  o'clock.  Before  going  to  bed  they  grease  their  boots,  and  stick  them  in 
the  pants,  so  as  to  be  ready  in  case  of  a  sudden  alarm. 

At  tattoo  and  reveille  the  roll  calls  are  by  platoon. 

A  picket  of  an  officer  and  10  men  is  always  ready  for  patrol  duty;  their  horses  are  in  a  sepa- 
rate stable,  saddled,  but  not  bridled. 

The  sergeants  and  corporals  do  not  clean  their  own  horses  ;  this  is  done  by  the  dismounted 
men. 

While  we  were  in  Vienna,  on  the  morning  of  the  9th  January,  at  6  a.  m.,  the  12th  lancers 
were  suddenly  alarmed  ;  in  40  minutes  the  regiment  was  formed  in  marching  order,  baggage 
packed,  platoons  told  off,  officers  at  their  posts,  &c.    This  was  considered  sharp  work  for  quarters. 

The  whole  garrison  was  alarmed  at  the  same  moment ;  this  is  done,  not  unfrequently,  by  the 
emperor, 

QUARTERS. 

The  quarters  are  generally  over  the  stables. 

The  rooms  open  upon  a  corridor  ;  about  20  men  in  each  room. 

The  sergeants  have  a  separate  room  ;  the  corporals  are  with  the  men  of  their  platoons. 

Each  man  has  an  iron  bedstead,  a  bed  sack  tilled  with  straw,  (which  is  renewed  every  3 
months,)  a  straw  pillow,  and  2  blankets  ;  these  articles  of  bedding  all  belong  to  the  barrack, 
and  not  to  the  man  ;  they  are  under  the  charge  of  a  barrack  master. 

The  valise,  tornisters,  and  cleaning  utensils  are  kept  in  the  quarters. 

The  clothes  are  either  hung  upon  pins  at  the  head  of  the  bed,  or  are  on  a  shelf. 

The  name  of  each  man  is  over  his  bed. 

In  every  room  are  tables  and  benches  for  messing. 

The  arms  and  equipments  are'  kept  in  the  corridors,  on  racks  and  stands ;  the  carbines 
are  hung  on  a  pin  by  the  guard,  muzzles  down. 

Some  of  the  officers  are  required  to  lodge  in  the  barrack ;  the  others  have  quarters  elsewhere, 
and  receive  a  commutation. 

DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS,  ETC. 

The  1st  captain  is  responsible  for  the  arms,  horses,  &c.;  he  makes  returns  to  the  colonel  twice 
each  year.  He  is  the  only  squadron  officer  who  can  inflict  punishment,  except  on  detachment, 
when  the  detached  officer  has  equal  powers.  He  may  confine  men  for  48  hours  in  irons  ;  he 
can  inflict  20  lashes ;  but  if  he  abuses  his  power  the  colonel  may  prohibit  him  from  exercising  it. 

The  2d  captain  is  in  general  charge  of  the  2d  half  squadron,  but  is  more  especially  charged 
with  the  instruction  of  recruits  and  young  horses. 

Each  lieutenant  is  in  charge  of  a  jjlatoon,  and  is  responsible  for  its  order,  cleanliness,  &c. ; 
he  can  inflict  no  punishment ;  he  forms  part  of  his  platoon,  and  always  accompanies  it  on 
detachment,  drill,  &c. 

The  1st  sergeant  has  duties  similar  to  those  of  the  same  grade  in  the  United  States  service  ; 
he  is  in  charge  of  the  papers,  military  duties,  details,  &c. 

The  2d  sergeant  is  more  particularly  under  the  control  of  the  2d  captain,  in  charge  of  the 
recruits  and  young  horses. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M'CLELLAN.  237 

The  corporals  are  divided  equally  among  the  platoons^  and  are  in  charge  of  the  rooms^ 
guards^  &c.,  &c. 

Muster  rolls  are  sent  in  hy  the  captain  every  month  ;  they  are  checked  and  countersigned  by 
the  paymaster,  adjutant,  and  intendant. 

The  men  are  paid  every  five  days. 

Eegular  musters  are  held  only  once  in  each  year,  and  not  always  so  often.  They  are  made 
by  the  general  of  brigade  and  a  military  commissary ;  at  these  the  roll  is  called,  the  horses 
counted,  &c. 

MAECHES,  &c. 

Marches  are  conducted  at  the  rate  of  from  3  to  4  miles  per  hour,  for  the  most  part  at  a  walk, 
and  usually  last  about  5  hours. 

Over  very  rough  or  steep  groun-d  the  horses  are  generally  led. 

The  hussars  march  long  distances  at  the  trot,  and  know  no  obstacles  ;  rivers,  marshes,  moun- 
tains, and  obstructed  ground,  check  their  course  but  little. 

About  half  an  hour  after  starting,  a  short  halt  is  made  to  allow  the  horses  to  urinate  ;  only 
those  men  dismount  whose  girths  need  tightening.  At  the  middle  of  the  march  a  halt  of  half 
an  hour  is  made. 

The  men  are  severely  punished  for  not  girthing  tight. 

As  already  remarked,  the  men  ride  on  the  curb  on  the  march,  the  snaffle  reins  hanging  free. 
The  stirrup  leathers  are  of  such  a  length  that,  the  leg  hanging  naturally,  the  bottom  of  the 
stirrup  shall  be  1"  above  the  spur  ;  with  hard  gaited  horses  the  stirrups  are  somewhat  shorter. 
No  tents  are  carried  in  the  field ;  the  men  hut  themselves. 

The  ofiicers  seldom  carry  any  mess  apparatus,  but  partake  of  the  food  of  the  men. 
The  following  wagons,  &c.,  are  allowed  in  campaign: 

For  each  field  officer,  1  wagon 5  wagons. 

For  medicines 1         " 

Regimental  chest 1         " 

In  each  division,  for  spare  shoes,  saddles,  &c.,  1  wagon 4         " 

Forge 1 


(( 


Total  wagons  for  a  regiment  of  8  squadrons 12 


ti 


Each  squadron  officer  is  allowed  forage  for  1  jiack  horse ;  on  this  he  places  a  small  portman- 
teau, or  pair  of  hair  bags.  But  these  pack  animals  are  often  ordered  to  be  left  in  depot,  and 
in  this  case  the  baggage  is  put  on  one  of  the  spare  horses. 

Each  officer's  servant  usually  rides  one  of  his  master's  spare  horses. 

The  weight  carried  by  a  light  cavalry  horse  in  the  field  is : 

Weight  of  saddle  and  equipment 50  pounds. 

5  days'  hay,  (8  i^ounds  for  light  cavalry) 40         " 

6  days'  oats,  (at  6  pounds) 30 

5  days'  bread,  (at  2  pounds) 10 


(( 


Load  of  light  cavalry  horse 130 


ei 


This  is  exclusive  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  and  rider. 

Before  going  into  action,  the  men  generally  manage  to  throw  away  the  hay,  and  "bleed"  the 


forage  bags. 


238  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 


SCHOOL  OF  EQUITATION. 

The  central  cavalry  school  of  equitation  is  at  Vienna.  A  lieutenant  from  every  regiment  of 
cavalry  is  sent  thither — 40  in  all. 

Each  officer  brings  a  soldier  with  him  to  take  care  of  his  horses,  but  this  soldier  receives  no 
instruction.  The  practice  of  instructing  non-commissioned  officers  has  been  abandoned.  The 
officer  brings  with  him  his  own  "imperial  service  horse"  and  that  of  the  soldier. 

There  are  also  about  100  horses  belonging  to  the  school,  with  grooms  especially  for  them. 

The  course  of  instruction  lasts  for  2  years  ;  one-half  of  the  officers  are  changed  every  year. 

The  instruction  consists  of  equitation,  stable  duty,  fencing,  and  the  veterinary  art ;  for  the 
latter  they  attend  the  veterinary  school. 

They  ride  several  hours  each  day,  almost  always  using  the  English  saddle,  and  frequently 
leaping,  &c.,  without  stirrups  or  girths. 

They  become  excellent  riders,  and  manage  their  horses  well. 

A  good  anatomical  museum  is  attached  to  the  school ;  it  contains  natural  preparations,  the 
Augoux  models,  plates,  &c. 

There  is  also  a  good  fencing  room. 

There  are  two  fine  riding  halls  ;  one  is  238'  by  72',  the  other  175'  by  56'. 

The  floor  is  a  mixture  of  clay  and  sand. 

The  stables  are  excellent ;  one,  in  particular,  is  probably  the  finest  in  the  world. 

In  this  connexion,  it  may  be  well  to  give  the  dimensions  of  the  riding  halls  and  stables  of  the 
school  for  artillery  and  engineers,  now  in  course  of  construction  at  Wiener  Neustadt,  near  Vienna, 
as  they  are  regarded  as  models. 

The  riding  hall  is  to  be  288'  long,  62'  wide,  and  27'  high. 

The  stables  are  to  be  for  144  horses  ;  the  roof  arched,  with  2  stalls  under  each  arch.  The 
ventilation  and  light  over  the  stalls  in  the  roof;  the  forage  and  equipment  to  be  kept  in  rooms 
over  the  corridor. 

The  corridor  is  8'  wide ;  stalls,  12'  X  5',  and  15'  high ;  mangers  of  marble,  3'  X  1',  and  3'  8"  above 
the  floor  ;  the  racks,  5'  2"  above  the  floor,  and  1'  6"  high  ;  bottom  of  manger,  2'  from  the  floor. 

Open  riding  grounds  are  attached  to  every  cavalry  barrack. 

THE  VETERINARY  SCHOOL. 

This  is  at  Vienna.     Its  chief  purpose  is  to  instruct  veterinary  surgeons  for  the  army. 

The  full  course  is  of  3  years  ;  for  certain  purposes,  2  years  ;  for  ordinary  farriers,  merely  to 
learn  to  shoe  the  horse,  6  months. 

It  is  much  on  the  principle  of  that  at  Berlin,  but  is  more  extensive,  and  better  organized. 

The  collections  of  natural  history  and  comparative  anatomy  are  most  excellent ;  they  embrace 
not  only  stuffed  specimens  of  many  animals,  birds,  and  fishes,  skeletons,  bones,  jaws,  teeth,  &c., 
but  also  admirable  preparations  of  the  muscles  of  the  different  parts  of  the  horse,  the  veins, 
arteries,  &c. — diseased,  as  well  as  sound. 

There  is  a  fine  collection  of  instruments  for  operations  on  the  eye,  ear,  unrinary  organs,  &c., 
as  well  as  for  amputations,  docking,  bleeding,  &c. 

For  bleeding  in  the  neck,  the  spring  lancet  is  used. 

A  laboratory,  lecture  rooms,  dissecting  rooms,  rooms  for  the  injection  of  preparations,  &c.,  are 
attached  to  the  institution. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    IFCLELLAN.  239 

The  apothecary  establishment  is  very  complete  and  well  arranged  ;  the  number  of  remedies 
in  the  pharmacopcfiia  is  reduced  to  160. 

The  stables  are  rooms  opening  upon  a  corridor  ;  some  of  these  rooms  are  for  single  borses, 
others  for  2,  4,  6,  and  10. 

They  are  clean,  but  hot,  and  badly  ventilated. 

The  animals  affected  with  internal  diseases  are  in  different  stables  from  those  troubled  with 
external  diseases  ;  glandered  horses  are  ke^jt  in  separate  stables 

Glanders  is  regarded  as  incurable  ;  they  keep  the  horse  long  enough  to  be  certain  that  he  is 
really  afflicted  with  that  disease,  and  then  kill  him. 

In  1854,  two  of  the  students  died  of  glanders  ;  they  died  in  about  8  months  after  being  inocu- 
lated, the  first  symptom  being  an  incurable  ulcer  on  the  hand. 

They  never  cauterize  for  the  lampas,  but  administer  purgatives  and  green  food,  and  bleed  by 
drawing  the  lancet  between  the  bars. 

The  forges,  tools,  and  shoes,  are  very  rougli  and  clumsy. 

Formerly  very  complicated  machinery  was  used  in  shoeing  the  horse,  but  they  have  now  learned 
that  the  very  moderate  number  of  3  men  will  suffice,  without  artificial  aids  ;  one  man,  by  the 
assistance  of  a  cavesson  and  mesmerism,  holds  and  controls  tbe  borse,  another  holds  his  foot, 
a  third  puts  on  the  shoe  ;  it  is  possible  that  they  may  learn  to  dispense  with  one  or  two  of  these 
assistants,  as  well  as  with  mesmerism. 

The  shoe  is  always  fitted  and  put  on  cold. 

There  are  usually  6  nails  in  each  shoe. 

In  the  summer  the  shoe  is  plain,  with  neither  toes  nor  heels  ;  in  winter  it  has  both.  For  the 
horses  of  the  officers,  in  winter,  one  heel  is  firmly  attached  to  the  shoe,  the  other  can  be  unscrewed  ; 
on  leaving  the  stable,  the  blunt  movable  heel  is  replaced  by  a  pointed  one. 

The  men  pay  for  the  shoeing  of  their  horses ;  a  very  small  daily  allowance  is  given  them  to  cover 
this  expenditure. 

The  greatest  possible  attention  is  paid  in  the  regiments  to  the  condition  of  the  shoes  ;  it  is 
justly  regarded  as  one  of  the  most  important  points. 

At  the  veterinary  school,  dogs,  cows,  sheep,  &c.,  are  treated.  Sheep  are  kept  here  to  be 
inoculated  for  a  disease  quite  similar  in  its  phenomena  to  the  small-pox ;  the  animal  is 
inoculated  upon  the  bare  lower  surface  of  the  tail,  the  matter  collected  from  the  pustules,  and 
distributed  among  the  great  sheep  proprietors  of  the  country. 

This  disease  formerly  killed  off  some  40,000  per  annum  in  the  empire ;  now,  scarcely  one 
dies  of  it. 

This  veterinary  school  may  be  regarded  as  one  of  the  very  best  in  Europe,  and  is  well 
worthy  of  imitation. 

A  programme  of  the  course,  not  in  my  possession,  will  give  all  the  information  requisite. 

VETERINARY    SURGEONS,    ETC. 

As  has  been  already  stated,  each  regiment  has  a  senior  veterinary  surgeon  ;  each  squadron 
a  veterinary  surgeon. 

The  first  has  the  rank  of  a  first  sergeant,  the  second  that  of  a  corporal. 

They  are  all  educated  at  the  veterinary  school,  and  are  either  the  children  of  veterinaries,  or 
else  well  conducted  soldiers,  whose  original  pursuit  was  that  of  a  horse-shoer. 
•     They  generally  shoe  the  horses  themselves,  as  well  as  treating  their  diseases ;  they  always 
instruct  three  or  four  good  men  in  the  squadron,  who  act  as  their  assistants. 


240  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  pay  of  a  senior  veterinary  surgeon  is  about  $12  per  month  ;  the  squadron  veterinaries 
receive  about  |9  per  month. 

Both  are  permitted  to  practise  upon  the  horses  of  civilians,  on  their  own  account,  and  also 
receive  a  small  additional  stipend  for  their  services  in  treating  the  squadron  horses  ;  this  last 
amounts  to  from  |9  to  $10  per  month. 

The  horses  are  shod  about  once  in  five  weeks. 

The  evening  before  a  horse  is  to  be  shod,  he  is  caused  to  stand  in  wet  clay ;  if  no  clay  is  to 
be  had,  a  mixture  of  dung  and  mud  is  substituted,  or  else  the  foot  is  wrapped  in  rags,  filled 
with  dung. 

The  efiect  of  this  is  to  soften  the  hoof,  and  facilitate  the  operation  of  paring  and  shoeing  ;  it 
is  represented  as  being  attended  with  the  most  beneficial  effect. 

Very  little  of  the  hoof  and  frog  is  cut  away. 

The  number  of  medicines  used  in  the  regiments  is  very  small.  Nadosy's  "Equitation 
Studien,"  and  Professor  Eolls'  works,  contain  the  Austrian  views  of  tlie  veterinary  art. 

GENERAL  REMARKS. 

The  imperfect  sketch  of  the  Austrian  cavalry,  given  in  the  preceding  pages,  will  show  that, 
as  might  have  been  expected,  it  presents  many  things  well  worthy  of  imitation,  and  much  to 
be  avoided. 

The  foundation  of  the  efiiciency,  and  well  deserved  reputation  of  the  Austrian  cavalry,  would 
seem  to  be  the  great  perfection  of  the  individual  instruction  of  the  men  ;  without  this,  no 
organization,  however  perfect  it  may  be,  can  lead  to  good  results  ;  with  it,  the  defects  of  a 
very  bad  organization  may  be  overcome,  or  lost  sight  of. 

The  system  pursued  in  the  purchase  of  horses  is  good. 

The  manner  of  posting  the  officers  in  a  division  is  worthy  of  the  most  attentive  considera- 
tion ;  there  may  well  occur  exceptional  cases  in  which  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  the  officers 
should  be  in  front  of  the  men  to  lead  and  encourage  them  in  desperate  situations  ;  but  it  would 
seem  that  the  A-ustrians  have  good  reasons  for  placing  the  officers  in  the  ranks.  They  say  that 
since  the  officers  have,  as  a  general  rule,  perfect  control  over  their  horses,  they  will  keep  them 
in  the  proper  direction,  and  thus  prevent  the  men  from  opening  out,  the  charge  being  thus 
rendered  compact  and  effective — they  state  that  this  formation  results  from  the  experience  of 
actual  charges  upon  an  enemy.  The  general  features  of  their  veterinary  system  might  be 
followed  in  our  service  to  great  advantage. 

Their  system  of  depot  squadrons  is  good,  and  produces  good  results.  The  cooking  utensils 
seem  to  be  well  adajated  to  the  end  in  view.  The  tactical  unit  would  aj^i^ear  to  be  entirely  too 
large  to  permit  that  great  mobility  and  celerity  which  are  the  essential  conditions  of  the  success 
of  cavalry  ;  this  defect  i's  probably  overcome  only  by  the  perfection  of  individual  instruction. 

The  number  of  things  carried  by  the  men,  and  the  excessive  weight  of  the  equipment,  seems 
pernicious  and  absurd  in  the  extreme.  I  was  informed  by  cavalry  officers  that  the  men  usually 
manage  to  throw  away  the  greater  part  of  their  load  before  many  days  passed  in  the  field. 

The  number  of  non-commissioned  officers  is  too  small,  in  comparison  with  the  number  of 
privates. 

The  exercises  preliminary  to  the  instruction  in  equitation  are  worthy  of  imitation  ;  while  it 
would,  by  no  means,  be  advisable  to  follow  blindly  all  their  conditions  for  a  good  seat. 

The  articles  of  clothing  would  appear  to  be  altogether  too  great ;  no  doubt  the  comfort  of  the 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAN.  241 

man  is  a  very  important  consideration,  but  if  tliat  object  is  gained  at  the  expense  of  the 
efficiency  of  the  horse,  the  result  cannot  be  doubtful. 

In  conclusion,  I  would  state  that  much  valuable  information  maybe  derived  from  the  Cavalry 
Tactics,  Nadosy's  "Equitations  Studien,"  Halfzensir's  "  Innern  Dienst  der  Cavallerie,"  and 
other  works  ;  those  mentioned  are  in  the  possession  of  the  War  Department,  and  should,  by  all 
means,  be  consulted  by  any  officers  engaged  in  the  preparation  of  a  revised  system  for  our  own 
cavalry. 

GEOEGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 
Captain  1st  CavalrTj,  member  of  the  commission  to  Europe. 

November  17,  1856. 


31  © 


REPORT 


FRENCH  CAVALRY. 


The  French  cavalry  establishment  consists  of- 
1  squadron  of  "Cent-Gardes." 


fi  regiments  of  the  guard. 


12  regiments  of  reserve  cavalry. 


20  regiments  of  the  line. 


2 

of  cuirassiers. 

of  dragoons. 

of  lancers. 

of  chasseurs. 

of  guides,  (hussars.) 

squadron  of  gensdarmes 

2 

of  carabiniers. 

10 

of  cuira.ssiers. 

12 

of  dragoons. 

8 

of  lancers. 

25  regiments  of  light  cavalry 


12  of  chasseurs. 
9  of  hussars. 
4  of  African  chasseurs. 


3  regiments  of  spahis. 
9  remount  companies. 
1  cavalry  school,  at  Saumur. 
The  mounted  gensdarmes. 
Each  regiment  consists  of  6  squadrons,  with  the  exception  of  the  African  chasseurs,  which, 
during  the  late  war,  were  increased  to  8  squadrons,  of  which  4  remained  in  Africa,  and  4  served 
in  the  Crimea. 

In  time  of  war,  each  regiment  has  a  depot  squadron. 

The  duration  of  service  is  7  years. 

The  regulation  height  of  cavalry  soldiers  is  as  follows : 

Carabiniers minimum,  5'  10". 4. 

Cuirassiers "  5'    9".2. 

Dragoons  and  lancers "  5'    8"      maximum,  5' 10". 4. 

Chasseurs  and  hussars "  5'    6".8  "  5'    8".8. 

African  chasseurs "  5'    6".8  "  5'    9". 6. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.   GEORGE   B.   M'CLELLAN. 
The  following  is  the  composition  of  a  regiment  of  three  squadrons : 


243 


The  staff: 

Colonel 

Lieutenant  colonel 

Chiefs  of  equadrons,  (field  officers) 

Major -. 

Captain,  (instructor) - 

Adj  utants,   (captains) 

Treasurer,  (captain) 

Clothing  officer,  (captain) 

Assistant  treasurer,  (sub-lieutenant) 

Standard  bearer,  (sub-lieutenant) 

Senior  surgeon 

Assistant  surgeon 

Sub-assistant  surgeon . 

Veterinary  of  the  first  class 

Total  commissioned  staff 

The  non-commissioned  staff : 

Adjutants,  (sergeants) 

Adjutant,  wagonmaster,  (sergeant) 

Assistant  veterinaries . 

Chief  trumpeter,  (sergeant) 

Trumpeter,  (corporal) 

Trumpeters,  (for  the  depot  squadron) 

Farriers,  (for  the  depot  squadron) 

Total  non-commissioned  staff 

Platoon  out  of  ranks  : 

First  clerk  of  treasurer,  (sergeant) 

Sergeant  in  charge  of  clothing  magazine 

Sergeant  in  charge  of  stables 

Sergeant,  (fencing  master) 

Master  armorer,  master  tailor,  master  boot-maker,  (sergeants) 

Master  saddler,  (sergeant) 

Quartermaster  of  tlie  staff,  (sergeant) 

Second  clerk  of  treasurer,  (corporal) 

Provosts,  (corporals) 

Saddler,  (corporal) 

Tailor  and  boot-maker,  (corporals) 

Major's  clerk,  (private) 

Third  clerk  of  treasurer,  (private) 

Second  clerk  of  clothing  officer,  (private) 

Attached  to  horse  hospital,  (private) 

Armorers,  (privates) 

Sadillers,  (privates) 


DJ   WAR. 

IN   PEACE. 

a> 

a 

g 

a 

aj 

o 

« 

O 

a 

W 

a 

w 

5 

3 

4 

3 

12 

6 

2 

2 

2 

2 

9 

6 

2 

2 

2 

2 

3 

2 

1 
1 

18 

49 

17 

29 

3 

3 

3 

3 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

3 

13 

10 

8 

8 

2 

2 

6 

6 

244 


MILITAEY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 
TABLE— Continued. 


Platoon  out  of  ranks— Continued. 

Tailors,  (privates) 

Boot-makers,  (privates) 

Enfant  de  troupe 


Tlie  number  of  tailors  and  boot-makers  varies  with  the  effective  strength  of  the 
regiment. 

Squadron  of  cavalry  of  reserve  : 

Captain  commanding. . ... 

Second  captain 

First  lieutenant 

Second  lieutenant . 

Sub-lieutenants 


Total  commissioned  officers  of  a  squadron. 


Orderly  sergeant 

Sergeants 

Quartermaster  sergeant. 
Quartermaster  corporal.. 

Corporals 

First  class  privates 

mounted . 

lismouuted. 

Farriers,  (shoeing  smiths) 

Trumpeters 

Under  instruction  as  trumpeters. 
Enfants  de  troupe 


Second  class  private 


)  dis 


Total  non-commissioned  and  privates. 


14 

12 

1 


54 


1 

8 

1 

1 

16 

32 

88 

16 

3 

4 

2 

2 


174 


18 


1 

1 

16 

32 


154 


<U 

a 

0) 

s 

w 

14 

12 

1 

54 

1 

6 
1 
1 

12 
32 
69 
20 
3 
i 


151 


1 

1 

12 

32 

69 


128 


On  the  war  establishment,  each  squadron  of  cavalry  of  the  line  has  98  privates  of  the  2d  class, 
and  each  squadron  of  light  cavalry  has  108. 


IN   WAR. 

IN   PEACE. 

3 

CO 

1 

1          i 
1         a 

Horses. 

strength  of  a  regiment  of  cavalry  of  reserve  : 

Commissioned  staff 

18 
13 
54 
48 
1,044 

49 
10 

108 
924 

17 

8 

54 

42 

906 

29 

Non-commissioned  staff . 

8 

Platoon  out  of  ranks 

Squadron  ofiScers 

54 

Non-commissioned  ofiBcers,  privates,  &c 

768 

Total 

1,177 

1,090 

1,027 

859 

REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  245 


INSTRUCTION  AND  TACTICS. 

No  change  of  any  importance  lias  been  made  in  the  system  since  it  was  adopted  as  the  basis 
of  our  own  ;  it  is  therefore  unnecessary  to  remark  upon  it. 

ARMS  AND  ACCOUTREMENTS. 

Carahiniers  and  cuirassiers. — Metallic  helmet,  back  and  breast  pieces,  pistol,  and  sabre.  The 
sabre  has  a  Montmorency  blade,  very  slightly  curved. 

Dragoons. — Sabre,  pistol,  and  musket.  The  sabre  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  cuirassiers. 
The  musket  has  no  bayonet ;  barrel  36"  long,  and  weighs  7.9  pounds.  On  ordinary  marches, 
on  parade,  &c. ,  the  musket  is  carried  with  the  hutt  in  a  boot,  attached  to  the  right  side  of  the 
,  pommel ;  this  boot  is  5"  deep,  6"  long,  and  2|"  wide.  The  muzzle  of  the  musket  rises  about 
3"  above  and  behind  the  right  shoulder,  and  is  attached  to  the  pommel  by  a  strap.  When  in 
expectation  of  meeting  an  enemy,  the  musket  is  slung  over  the  shoulder,  muzzle  up. 

Lancers. — Light  cavalry  sabre,  pistol,  lance,  musketoon.  It  has  been  proposed  to  abandon 
the  musketoon  ;  I  do  not  know  whether  that  has  been  done  or  not. 

Chasseurs. — Dragoon  musket,  light  cavalry  sabre,  and  pistol. 

Hussars. — Musketoon,  light  cavalry  sabre,  and  pistol.  The  musketoon  has  both  boot  and 
sling. 

African  chasseurs. — Armed  as  the  other  chasseurs,  but  always  carry  the  musket  slung  over  the 
left  shoulder  ;  never  in  a  boot. 

Spaliis. — Musket  and  pistol  as  for  the  African  chasseurs,  but  carry  the  sabre  attached  to  the 
saddle,  in  the  Mexican  fashion. 

Cent-Gardes  are  cuirassiers,  armed  with  a  pistol,  and  a  breech-loading  carbine,  with  sabre 
bayonet;  this  bayonet  is  a  very  long,  light,  and  nearly  straight  sabre,  without  guard;  alone,  it 
is  an  excellent  sabre  ;  when  fixed  on  the  carbine,  it  may  be  used  as  a  lance  when  mounted,  as  an 
ordinary  musket  and  bayonet  on  foot. 

In  all  the  cavalry,  the  pistol  is  attached  to  the  saddle  by  means  of  a  strap  fastened  to  a  ring 
in  the  butt. 

The  cartridge-box  has  a  shoulder  belt,  and  contains  20  rounds ;  the  men  carry  spare  packages 
of  cartridges  in  their  pouches,  or  wherever  may  be  most  convenient. 

The  belts,  &c.,  are  quite  like  our  own ;  the  sabre  belt  fastens  with  an  <X)  hook. 

A  camp  hatchet  is  carried  by  the  corporals  and  1st  class  privates. 

HORSE  EQUIPMENTS. 

Our  own  being  at  present  but  little  else  than  modifications  of  those  generally  in  use  in  the 
French  service,  it  is  only  necessary  to  describe  those  of  the  African  chasseurs,  and  a  model 
very  recently  adopted. 

The  saddle  of  the  African  chasseurs  is  a  plain  wooden  tree,  with  a  pad  on  top,  and  no  skirts ; 
the  model  not  unlike  our  own,  (the  Grimsley,)  but  rather  lower  in  the  pommel  and  cantle. 

The  girth  and  surcingle  are  of  leather ;  stirrups  steel ;  no  schabraque.  Two  shoe  pouches  of 
the  usual  kind,  for  2  shoes  and  32  nails  each,  attached  to  the  hind  fork.  Nose  bag  of  hair 
cloth. 

The  valise  is  replaced  by  canvas  saddle  bags,  re-enforced  with  leather.  The  forage  bag  and 
tente  d'abri  are  fastened  to  the  cantle. 


24G 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


The  pistol  is  in  the  left  pouch  ;  the  cloak  strapped  overthe  pouches ;  each  man  has  a  hatchet 
in  his  right  pouch. 

A  common  blanket  is  placed  under  the  saddle. 

The  bridle  has  a  single  head  stall  and  a  Spanish  bit,  (with  a  ring  around  the  lower  jaw,)  the 
curb  reins  attached  by  swivels,  the  snaffle  reins  to  rings  on  the  same  bit ;  the  bit  buckles  to 
the  liead  stall. 

Instead  of  a  halter,  a  leather  collar  is  used. 

The  new  saddle  is  the  invention  of  Captain  Cogent,  director  of  the  saddle  factory  at  Saumur. 
The  tree  is  cut  out  of  a  single  piece  of  white  wood,  the  cantle  only  being  glued  on  ;  a  piece 
of  walnut,  the  grain  running  across  the  tree,  is  let  into  the  pommel,  and  a  thin  strip  veneered 
upon  the  front  ends  of  the  bars;  the  pommel  and  cantle  are  lower  than  in  the  old  model;  the 
whole  is  covered  with  wet  raw  hide,  glued  on,  and  sewed  at  the  edges ;  no  iron  bolts  or  fastening* 
are  used. 

The  staples  for  the  stirrup  leathers  are  fastened  as  usual. 

The  most  important  feature  in  this  saddle  is  the  manner  of  arranging  it  so  that  a  single 
size  may  be  used  for  all  horses,  or  for  the  same  horses  when  their  condition  changes. 

The  annexed  sketches  will  explain  the  manner  in  which  this  is  effected.    Two  strips  of  cork,  about 

4"  broad,  i,"  thick,  and  as  long  as  the  bars  of  the 
saddle,  are  bent  to  the  shape  of  the  under  surface  of 
the  bars;  to  give  them  this  shape,  they  are  glued  to 
the  bars  before  the  tree  is  covered  with  hide  ;  they  are 
removed  when  they  have  taken  a  permanent  set, 
trimmed,  and  covered. 

They  are  covered  with  thick  felt  on  the  side 
towards  the  horse's  back,  and  with  leather  on  the 
side  towards  the  saddle;  a  longitudinal  slit  being 
left  m  the  leather,  in  order  to  insert  strips  of  felt, 
to  increase  the  thickness  of  the  strips  when  necessary. 
The  strips  are  attached  to  the  saddle  by  means  of 
small  pins  withheads,  shown  in  figs.  A,E,andF;  these 
are  inserted  in  the  holes  in  the  iron  plates  G,  and 
run  forward  into  the  slots ;  the  pins  (0)  at  the  rear 
end  of  the  strips  have  each  a  hole  through  the  neck  ; 
the  small  keys  (M)  are  run  through  the  holes  (N,)  in 
the  rear  ends  of  the  bars,  and  thus  keep  the  strips 
firmly  in  position. 

The  fig.  A  represents  the  under  surface  of  the 
saddle,  with  the  iron  plates  (G)  let  in  ;  the  separate 
fig.  (Gr)  represents  one  of  these  plates,  with  3  holes 
and  slots  to  receive  the  pins  of  the  strips,  rivetted  or 
screwed  to  the  bars.  Figs.  (B)  represent  a  plan  and  elevation  of  a  strip;  fig.  (E)  the  front 
end  of  a  strip,  with  its  pins;  fig.  (F)  the  rear  end,  with  a  pin  having  a  hole  through  its  neck 
to  receive  the  key  pin. 

Fig.  (C)  represents  the  cantle,  N  being  the  holes  to  receive  the  keys,  andM  being  the  keys 
secured  by  a  light  chain. 

Fig.  (D)  gives  a  front  view  of  the  saddle. 


E 


.0  0  0. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    MTLELLAN.  247 

For  a  small  horse,  the  pins  are  placed  in  the  holes  nearest  the  axis  of  the  saddle ;  for  a  large 
horse,  in  the  outside  holes;  if  a  horse  is  narrow  in  the  withers  and  hroad  at  the  loins,  the  pins 
are  placed  in  the  inside  holes  in  front,  and  in  the  outside  holes  behind,  and  vice  versa. 

The  tree  is  covered  with  leather,  and  has  the  ordinary  skirts.  The  girth,  as  adopted,  is  of 
black  leather,  and  in  two  parts. 

The  upper  part  is  4"  broad,  is  screwed  to  bars,  passes  over  the  tree,  under  the  cover,  and 
projects  equally  on  each  side  below  the  bars ;  at  each  end  of  this  piece  is  an  iron  pin  with  a 
^'^'^AAAA^ brass  roller,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  figure. 

The  other  portion  of  the  girth  is  a  simple  strap,  3"  broad,  with  a  large  buckle  at 
one  end,  and  a  tongue  at  the  other.     The  tongue  of  this  strap  is  passed  downwards 
behind  the  roller  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  then  upwards  through  the  roller  on  the 
off  side,  and  buckled  on  the  near  side. 

Captain  Cogent  prefers  extending  the  saddle  skirts,  attaching  the  rollers  to  them,  and  using 
the  girth  just  described. 

The  saddle  blanket  (which  is  also  the  horse  cover)  is  of  thick  felt  cloth  ;  it  is  attached  to  the 
pommel  by  a  small  strap  passing  through  holes  in  the  blanket,  which  is  thus  prevented  from 
slipping  back,  and  at  the  same  time  raised  so  as  to  keep  a  free  channel  for  the  circulation  of 
air  over  the  horses  spine. 

The  valise  is  shaped  on  a  former,  hollowed  out  and  covered  with  stiff  leather  where  it  crosses 
the  spine,  so  that  it  cannot  touch  ;  there  are  pockets  on  the  ends  of  the  valise  for  the  spare  horse 
shoes  and  nails. 

The  jjouches  are  as  usual ;  the  holster  is  of  wood,  covered  with  raw  hide,  and  is  set  inside  of 
the  left  pouch. 

The  saddle  is  not  blackened. 

The  new  equipment  weighs  15  lbs.  less  than  the  old. 

I  am  not  positive  as  to  the  bridle  which  has  been  adopted  ;  that  proposed  by  M.  Cogent,  and 
which  I  think  has  been  accepted,  is  as  follows  : 

There  is  a  snaffle  bit,  with  branches  ;  the  mouth  piece  in  three  parts. 
The  curb  has  a  cross  bar,  and  presents  two  striking  peculiarities  : 

1st.  The  curb  chain  acts  upon  the  nose,  instead  of  the  chin  ;  to  accomplish  this,  a  ring  is 
sewed  to  each  side  of  the  nose  band,  close  in  front  of  the  cheek  pieces  ;  the  chain,  resting  on  the 
nose  band,  passes  through  these  rings,  and  then  forward  to  the  branches  of  the  bit ;  the  requisite 
levearge  is  thus  obtained. 

2d.  The  mouth  piece  is  longer  than  the  interval  between  the  branches,  the  latter  sliding 
through  holes  in  the  mouth  piece  ;  the  projection  of  the  mouth  piece  beyond  the  branches  has 
a  neck  and  head  ;  a  ring  catch  at  the  end  of  the  cheek  piece  goes  over  this  neck,  and  keeps  the 
mouth  piece  in  its  proper  position  ;  by  raising  these  ring  catches,  the  mouth  piece  is  freed  and 
may  be  slipped  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  branches,  so  that  the  horse  can  feed  freely. 

This  arrangement  did  not  strike  me  so  favorably  as  the  Kussian  ;  the  latter  is  simpler,  and 
cannot  get  out  of  order. 

There  is  in  the  possession  of  the  War  Department  a  pamphlet  of  Captain  Cogent's,  giving  the 
drawings  of  his  bridle  and  bit. 

UKIFOEM. 

This  is  so  well  known  in  our  service  that  only  a  few  remarks  will  be  necessary. 
The  frock-coat  has  not  been  adopted  for  the  cavalry. 


248  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  pants  are  very  loose,  and  are  re-enforced  with  black  leather.  * 

Boots  are  worn,  the  sjiur  being  permanently  attached  to  the  heel. 

All  troops  have  both  a  full  dress  and  a  forage  cap ;  the  former  is  often  left  at  home  in  time  of  war. 

The  full  dress  cap  varies  with  the  corps  ;  the  undress  is  usually  the  kepis,  which  has  a  large 
straight  vizor  and  a  loose  conical  top. 

The  African  chasseurs  wear  their  full  dress  cap  in  the  field ;  it  is  miich  like  that  of  our  infantry , 
rather  smaller  at  top,  and  has  no  pompon;  their  undress  cap  is  the  fez,  a  close-fitting  red  felt 
skull  cap,  with  a  tassel. 

It  should  be  remarked  that  the  uniform  and  equipment  of  this  admirable  corps  is  solely  for 
service  ;  there  is  no  attempt  at  ornament,  and  nothing  superfluous  is  allowed. 

HORSES. 

In  France,  there  are  6,  in  Algiers  3  remount  companies,  each  consisting  of  1  captain,  5  lieu- 
tenants, and  a  variable  number  of  men  ;  their  duty  is  the  purchase  and  care  of  remount  horses. 
Excefjt  at  Saumur,  there  are  no  haras,  properly  so  called ;  that  is  to  say,  there  are  no  breeding 
studs  to  raise  colts  for  the  general  service.     At  each  remount  depot  there  are  stallions  of  the  race 
most  suitable  for  crossing  with  the  mares  of  the  vicinity  ;  at  the  proper  seasons  of  the  year  these 
are  distributed  among  the  villages  to  cover  the  mares  of  the  country  gratuitously.    The  proprietors 
of  the  colts  are  under  no  obligation  to  ofier  them  for  sale  to  the  government,  but  usually  find 
it  their  interest  to  do  so. 
Horses  are  purchased  at  from  4  to  7  years  of  age,  and  must  be  of  French  origin. 
The  animal  is   brought  to  the  commandant  of  the  remount  depot,  and  submitted  to  his 
inspection,  without  any  price  being  named.     If  the  commandant  finds  him  unsuitable,  he  is  at 
one  rejected  ;  if  the  contrary  is  the  case,  he  is  brought  before  all  the  ofiicers  of  the  depot  for  a 
thorough  examination. 

Each  ofiicer  then  writes  his  estimate  of  the  value  of  the  animal  on  a  slip  of  paper ;  these 

papers  are  placed  in  a  hat  and  shaken  up,  so  that  the  estimate  of  each  officer  may  not  be  known ; 

the  mean  of  these  estimates  is  then  taken,  and  the  commandant  ofi'ers  that  price  for  the  animal. 

If  the  owner  accepts  the  ©O'er,  the  price  is  paid  at  once  ;  if  he  refuses,  the  horse  is  at  once 

sent  away,  for  no  bargaining  is  allowed. 

It  often  liap23ens  that  the  owner  receives  a  larger  price  than  he  would  have  demanded. 

This  system  is  stated  to  work  admirably. 

The  average  price  is  fixed  every  year  by  the  minister  of  war  ;  it  is  usually  about  as  follows  : 

For  horses  of  the  reserve  cavalry.* $150 

"  "      artillery  and  cavalry  of  the  line ., 120 

"  "      light  cavalry 100 

"  "      train  of  artillery,  engineers,  and  baggage 100 

For  officers'  horses 180 

The  average  height  is  fixed  as  follows  : 

Eeserve  cavalry 15  hands 

Artillery  and  cavalry  of  the  line 15      " 

Light  cavalry 14      " 

Trains 14      " 

Pack  horses 14      " 

Mules 13      " 

Officers'  horses  a  trifle  larger  than  those  of  their  men. 


2" 

to  16 

hands 

0^" 

to  15 

"       2" 

3" 

to  15 

"       0^" 

H" 

to  15 

u       2" 

H" 

to  15 

"       1" 

3" 

to  15 

"     H" 

REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


249 


The  minister  of  war  may  authorize  the  minimum  to  be  reduced  ^",  provided  the  general 
conformation  and  qualities  of  the  animal  are  something  remarkable. 

The  government  provides  each  officer  with  two  horses  ;  if  an  officer  keeps  the  same  animal 
7  years,  it  becomes  his  private  property  ;  he  may  have  an  unfit  horse  exchanged  by  applying  to 
the  inspector  general  at  the  jjeriod  of  the  general  inspection,  provided  the  inspector  decides  that 
the  horse  is  really  unfit  for  service. 

Captains  and  field  officers  are  all  allowed  2  government  horses,  and  forage  for  the  regulation 
number  above  two. 

But  little  can  be  said  in  favor  of  the  appearance  of  the  French  cavalry  horses  ;  those  of  the 
heavy  cavalry  are  either  heavy,  slow,  and  awkward,  or  else  are  long  legged,  and  have  too  much 
daylight  under  them  ;  the  light  cavalry  horses  must  be  better  than  they  look,  for  they  appear 
unable  to  do  their  work,  yet  they  manage  to  get  through  with  it.  The  horses  at  Saumur  are 
generally  excellent ;  and  those  of  the  African  chasseurs  are  exceptions  to  the  rule  ;  they  are 
entire  Arabians,  and  are  generally  very  good. 


RATIONS   OP   THE   MEN. 

The  normal  ration  in  the  Crimea  was : 

One  lb.  10^-  ounces  of  bread,  or  1  lb.  3|-  ounces  of  biscuit ;  1.05  ounce  of  rice  or  beans  ;  2.1 
ounces  of  the  Chollet  prepared  vegetables  ;  8|  ounces  fresh  meat  or  salt  beef,  or  7  ounces  of  salt 
pork  ;  0.44  pint  of  wine,  or  0.11  pint  of  brandy. 

-— ^-1 £ 


IS" 


Coffee  and  sugar  were  issued  extra, 
and  the  other  parts  of  the  ration  were 
changed  according  to  circumstances. 

In  the  cavalry  the  messes  consist  of 
5  men  each ;  each  mess  having  its  own 
cooking  utensils,  which  the  men  carry 
by  turns,  strapped  to  the  saddle.  These 
utensils  consist  of  the  marmite,  re- 
presented in  elevation  and  plan  by 
fig.  A;  thegamelle,  fig.  B;  thebidon, 
shown  in  elevation  and  jilan  of  top  in 
fig.  D  ;  the  frying  pan,  fig.  C ;  the 
small  gamelle,  fig.  E. 

The  marmite  is  for  making  soup ; 
the  bidon  merely  to  bring  water  for 
cooking  purposes  ;  the  gamelle  as  a 
dish  out  of  which  they  eat.  Some- 
times the  small  gamelle  is  substituted 
for  the  large  one ;  in  this  case  each 
man  has  a  small  gamelle;  the  fig.  (E) 
represents  3  small  gamelles  carried  by 
means  of  a  strap  ;  each  small  gamelle 
has  a  tin  cover,  which  is  countersunk, 
and  has  a  ring  as  a  handle  :  the  cover 
is  attached  to  the  gamelle  by  a  light 
chain. 


32   O 


250  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  frying  pan  is  not  always  issued. 

For  each  mess  of  5,  one  marmite,  one  hidon,  and  one  large  gamelle  are  habitually  provided. 

In  garrison  the  cooking  and  messing  is  by  squadron. 

It  may  be  remarked  of  the  French,  as  of  most  other  continental  rations,  that  they  are  insuf- 
ficient, and  ought  not  to  be  taken  as  guides  in  our  own  service. 

The  prepared  Chollet  vegetables  are  extensively  used  in  the  field,  and  would  be  admirably 
adapted  for  issue  in  our  long  prairie  marches. 

QUARTERS. 

These  are  sometimes  in  the  same  building  with  the  stable,  sometimes  separate. 

In  the  new  buildings  the  horse  equipments  are  kept  in  the  quarters,  or  else  in  rooms  in  the 
stable  lofts. 

The  quarters  will  be  specially  described  in  the  report  upon  the  infantry  ;  it  will  be  sufiicient 
to  state  here  that  the  arrangement  and  police  are  by  no  means  such  as  to  render  them  models  to 
be  followed. 

FORAGE. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  rations  :  that  in  time  of  peace,  that  on  an  ordinary  march,  and  that 
in  the  field  in  war. 

The  regulation  ration  in  time  of  war  is  as  follows  : 

Hay.  Straw.  Oats. 

Carabiniers  and  cuirassiers 15.4  pounds  ;  8.8  pounds  ;  8.36  pounds. 

Dragoons  and  lancers 13.2      "  8.8       "  8.36       " 

Chasseurs  and  hussars 11         "  8.8       "  8.36       " 

Pack  horses 15.4      "  8.8       "  8.36       " 

Mules 11         "  8.8       "  8.36       " 

In  October,  1855,  the  ration  in  the  Crimea  was:  For  French  horses,  9  pounds  hay,  11  pounds 
barley  ;  for  African  horses,  6.05  pounds  hay,  10  pounds  barley. 

The  largest  allowance  for  French  horses  during  the  campaign  was,  11  pounds  hay,  13.2 
pounds  barley. 

The  allowance  for  African  horses,  given  above,  was  regarded  as  too  small. 

The  regulation  allowance  may  be  changed  as  follows :  For  hay,  an  equal  weight  of  clover, 
or  double  the  weight  of  straw,  or  half  the  weight  of  oats,  may  be  substituted  ;  for  straw,  half 
the  weight  of  hay,  or  one-fourth  of  oats,  may  be  substituted ;  for  oats,  double  the  weight  of 
hay,  four  times  the  weight  of  straw,  50  per  cent,  additional  weight  of  bran,  or  8  per  cent,  of 
barley,  may  be  substituted. 

If  the  horse  has  no  appetite,  or  the  forage  is  of  indifferent  quality,  the  food  is  sprinkled  with 
salt  water. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  feed  the  horse  upon  grass,  he  should  be  accustomed  to  it  by  degrees, 
giving  but  a  little  at  first,  and  increasing  the  quantity  as  he  becomes  habituated  to  it.  For 
the  first  few  days,  the  full  or  half  ration  of  grain  should  be  issued. 

As  a  last  resort,  the  following  substances  may  be  employed  for  forage:  malt,  which  fattens 
but  does  not  strengthen  the  horse,  and  which  renders  them  liable  to  disease  when  they  change 
it  for  other  food,  after  having  become  accustomed  to  it ;  furze,  which  is  very  nutritious,  but 
must  be  crushed  with  a  hammer,  or  in  a  mortar,  on  account  of  the  roughness  of  its  leaves  ;  the 


REPORT    OP    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    jrCLELLAN.  251 

pods  of  the  locust ;  flax-seed  ;  the  roots  of  grass,  well  washed  ;  the  bark  of  trees  ;  and,  finally, 
even  dry  wood,  cut  into  shavings. 

Eunning  water  is  given  in  j^reference  to  stagnant.  Bad  water  may  be  purified  by  charcoal, 
hydrochloric,  or  acetic  acids.  If  the  water  contains  leeches,  or  other  similar  things,  the  horses 
must  drink  with  the  nose-bag  on. 

The  water  given  to  the  horses  ought  to  be,  as  nearly  as  possible^  of  the  same  temperature  as 
the  air  ;  therefore,  in  summer  it  may  sometimes  be  necessary  to  expose  it  to  the  sun,  while  in 
winter  it  should  be  given  immediately  after  being  drawn. 

STABLES. 

The  following  are  the  regulations  and  arrangements  of  stables  : 

As  far  as  possible,  the  horses  of  the  same  squadron  should  be  placed  in  the  same  buildings 
divided  by  partition  walls  or  staircases  into  stables  of  equal  capacity. 

When  windows  can  be  arranged  in  both  long  walls,  place  the  horses  head  to  head,  separating 
the  two  rows  of  stalls  by  a  longitudinal  partition,  which  should  not  be  more  than  1'  higher  than 
the  to2>  of  the  hay  rack,  between  the  pillars  which  support  the  roof. 

The  interior  width  of  a  stable,  for  1  row  of  stalls,  is  20';  for  2  rows,  it  is  40',  when  they  are 
head  to  head  ;  34'  8",  when  they  are  tail  to  tail ;  height  of  ceiling,  16'  8". 

Doors  should  be  pierced  in  the  gable  ends,  and  in  the  transverse  partition  walls,  to  secure  a 
longitudinal  ventilation  during  the  absence  of  the  horses. 

The  doors  for  ordinary  use  should  be  pierced  in  the  long  walls  ;  width,  6'  8";  height,  at  least 
8'  8". 

There  should  be  a  window,  with  an  area  of  about  16  square  feet,  for  every  3  stalls  ;  the  sill 
10'  above  the  floor  ;  the  sash  revolving  around  a  horizontal  axis  at  the  bottom,  and  opening 
by  the  simplest  mechanism  ;  wooden  shutters  to  be  jirovided,  if  necessary. 

The  recesses  for  the  windows  should  extend  to  the  floor,  and  be  provided  with  hooks  or  racks 
for  suspending  the  horse  equipments ;  in  these  recesses  openings  3'  4"  X  2'  4"  should  be  made 
through  the  wall,  for  throwing  out  the  litter. 

If  necessary,  ventilators  may  be  cut  through  the  roof  in  the  middle  of  the  passage  ways 
behind  the  stalls  ;  ventilators  near  the  floor  should  be  employed  only  in  cases  of  absolute 
necessity. 

The  floor  ought  to  be  of  hard  stones,  laid  on  a  firm  foundation,  and  the  joints  filled  with 
hydraulic  mortar,  cement,  or  asphalt ;  slope  of  floor  of  stall  from  two  to  three-tenths  of  an  inch 
in  ten  inches. 

Mangers  of  wood,  stone,  or  cast  iron,  placed  on  a  mass  of  masonry,  the  front  surface  of  which, 
as  well  as  that  of  the  manger,  has  a  reversed  slope  of  f . 

The  wooden  mangers  are  divided  by  partitions;  those  of  stone  or  iron  are  hollowed  out  to 
the  length  of  2'  for  each  horse,  being  solid  between  the  hollows;  depth  8",  width  at  top  1',  at 
bottom  9". 6;  top  of  manger  3'  8"  above  the  floor. 

The  hay  racks  of  wood  and  continuous,  3'  4"  high,  and  placed  5'  4"  above  the  floor.  The 
bars  round  and  capable  of  turning  in  their  sockets,  each  bar  1".2  in  diameter,  and  placed  4"  apart ; 
racks  of  iron  may  be  authorized. 

The  system  of  securing  the  horse  consists  of:  1st,  a  bar  of  round  iron  bent  at  both  ends, 
placed  up  and  down,  parallel  to  the  face  of  the  manger,  the  upper  end  secured  to  the  manger. 


252 


MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


the  lower  built  into  the  masonry;  2d,  a  ring  sliding  on  this  bar,  and 
having  a  chain  2'  long,  with  a  T  at  the  free  end,  attached  to  it ;  this  T 
toggles  to  the  halter  ring.     The  sketch  shows  this  arrangement. 

Each  horse  is  allowed  a  width  of  4'  10",  never  less  than  4'  8",  so  that 
he  may  have  the  allowance  of  70  cubic  feet,  and  the  space  necessary  for  stable 
guards,  utensils,  &c.,  may  be  preserved. 

Stables  which  are  less  than  29'  wide  and  12'  high  can  be  used  for  two 
rows  of  horses  only  as  a  temporary  arrangement. 
Among  the  French  stables  of  all  dates  and  varieties,  one  recently  completed  at  Saumur,  and 
the  new  ones  at  Lyons  are  justly  regarded  as  models  of  excellence. 

Their  dimensions  and  general  arrangements  are  in  conformity  with  the  regulations  given 
above;  there  are,  however,  some  details  worthy  of  notice;  that  at  Saumur  being  the  most 
perfect  will  be  described  in  preference. 

The  stalls  are  4'  10"  wide  in  the  clear,  and  10'  long  to  the  heel  posts  ;  they  are  separated  by 
swinging  planks,  suspended  as  shown  in  the  annexed  sketch. 


W>7r0'!i^' 


The  floors  are  of  cubical  blocks  of  stone,  laid  in  cement.  A  shallow  gutter  in  rear  of 
each  row  of  stalls  allows  the  stale  to  drain  off.  The  longitudinal  partition  is  of  masonry,  and 
about  10'  high.  The  interior  of  the  stable  is  plastered;  the  wood  work  painted  oak  color.  In 
the  window  recesses  there  are  racks,  on  which  to  hang  the  horse  equipments  when  saddling  and 
unsaddling. 

The  equipments  are  kept  in  rooms  in  the  loft,  where  the  saddles  are  placed  on  horizontal 
wooden  jjius,  the  bridles  hung  on  hooks.  The  racks  are  continuous  and  of  wood  ;  the  string 
pieces,  and  each  bar,  are  bound  with  narrow  strips  of  sheet  iron. 

The  lower  string  piece  rests  upon  iron  hooks,  let  into  the  wall,  the  upper  one  is  held  firm  by 
iron  bars,  also  let  into  the  wall. 

The  manger  is  a  continuous  mass  of  stone,  with  an  excavation  for  each  animal ;  these  excava- 
tions are  22"  long,  12"  deep,  and  12"  wide  at  top. 

The  building  is  divided  into  apartments,  for  about  20  horses  each,  by  transverse  partitions 
and  stairway  halls  ;  there  are  large  doors  in  these  partitions.  In  a  central  hall  there  are  water 
tanks. 


KEPORT  OF  CAPT,  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN  253 

The  openings  mentioned  in  the  regulations  for  removing  the  litter  do  not  exist. 

The  halter  bars  are  arranged  as  described  in  the  regulations  ;  hut  there  is  another  ring  and 
chain,  above  the  manger,  for  use  in  the  day  time. 

Forage  for  3  or  4  days  is  kept  in  the  loft,  where  there  are  also  rooms  for  a  few  non-commis- 
sioned officers. 

In  the  floor  of  the  loft  there  are  trap  doors,  so  that  hay  and  straw  may  be  thrown  down  into 
the  halls  below. 

The  oats  run  down  from  the  bin,  through  a  wooden  pipe,  into  a  large  box  on  wheels. 

On  the  outside  of  the  walls  there  are  rings  for  attaching  the  horses  while  being  groomed. 

At  Lyons,  some  of  the  stables  had  quarters  in  the  second  story;  this  is  stated  by  many  officers 
to  be  an  admirable  arrangement,  and  attended  with  no  inconvenience  whatever ;  there  are  a 
few  who  object  to  it. 

The  hospital  stables  are  always  separate  from  the  others,  and  have  box  stalls. 

STABLE  DUTY. 

In  each  squadron,  the  stable  guard  generally  consists  of  a  corporal  and  1  man  for  every  20 
horses.  It  is  their  duty  to  feed  the  horses,  watch  over  their  safetij  during  the  night,  and  attend 
to  the  general  police  of  the  stables,  being  assisted  by  an  additional  detail  at  the  hours  of  stable 
call. 

About  one-half  the  litter  is  usually  kept  down  during  the  day. 

The  oats  is  given  in  two  feeds :  one-half  at  morning  stable  call,  the  rest  in  the  evening. 

The  hay  is  divided  into  three  equal  portions — at  morning,  noon,  and  night ;  in  the  forage 
magazine  it  is  put  up  in  trusses  of  1  ration  each,  and  thus  received  in  the  stable  loft ;  at  each 
feed  the  stable  guard  receive  these  trusses,  and  divide  each  one  among  three  horses. 

If  straw  is  fed,  it  is  given  either  just  before  or  just  after  the  hay,  always  in  the  same  order. 

The  horse  is  watered  twice  a  day,  either  just  before  or  after  his  grain. 

The  horse  is  cleaned  principally  with  a  houclwn  of  straw  and  with  the  brush ;  the  comb  is 
used  only  to  clean  the  brush. 

FIELD  SERVICE. 

The  allowance  of  transportation  in  the  field  is  probably  less  for  the  African  chasseurs  than 
for  any  other  corps  ;  it  will,  therefore,  be  given  as  it  was  for  the  4  squadron  regiments  in  the 
Crimea : 

For  each  regiment,  1  cart  for  money,  papers,  &c. 

For  the  colonel 1  jDack  animal. 

For  2  chiefs  of  squadrons 2 

For  2  captains  adjutant 2 

For  2  surgeons 1     "  " 

For  2  veterinaries 1     "  " 

For  2  adjutants  (non-commissioned) 1    "  " 

For  1  treasurer 1    "  " 

For  field  officers'  mess 1     "  " 

For  medicines  and  instruments 1     "  " 

For  horse  medicines 1     "  " 

Total  for  stafi'  of  4  squadron  regiment 12  pack  animals. 


254  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

In  each  squadron — 

2  captains 2  pack  animals. 

4  lieutenants 2    "  " 

Officers'  mess 1     "  " 


Sergeants'  mess,  &c 1 


a 


Total  for  each  squadron 6  pack  animals. 

Recapitula  tion. 

Staff 12  pack  animals. 

4  squadrons 24    "  " 

For  ammunition,  cacolets,  and  subsistence 12    "  " 

Total  for  a  regiment  of  4  squadrons 1  cart  and  48  pack  animals. 

The  led  horses  of  the  squadrons  are  used  as  pack  animals,  and  counted  in  the  number 
as  given  above  ;  officers  are  not  usually  permitted  to  pack  their  spare  riding  horses. 

At  the  commencement  of  a  campaign,  each  lieutenant  of  cavalry  receives  $125  for  the  purchase 
of  his  outiit ;  a  captain  receives  $250  ;  if  a  lieiitenant  is  promoted  during  the  campaign,  he 
receives  the  difference  between  the  two  sums. 

During  a  campaign  the  officers  are  permitted  to  draw  rations  from  the  commissary  department 
at  cost  prices,  paying  their  bills  monthly. 

In  the  Crimea,  the  mass  of  the  French  troops  had  no  other  shelter  than  the  tente  d'abri, 
(shelter  tent ;)  as  late  as  October,  1855,  the  African  chasseurs,  the  cuirassiers,  some  of  the  other 
cavalry,  and  most  of  the  infantry  of  the  line,  had  only  the  shelter  tent ;  the  imperial  guard  and 
the  artillery  were  provided  with  the  regulation  tent.  During  the  first  winter,  very  few  of  the 
troops  had  more  than  the  shelter  tent.  This  is  composed  of  pieces  of  linen  5'  square,  having 
button  holes  along  one  edge,  and  buttons  along  the  adjoining  edge  ;  each  man  carries  one  piece. 

The  annexed  sketch  shows  the 
manner  of  forming  the  shelter  ;  the 
two  sticks,  each  about  4'  long,  are 
stuck  in  the  ground  a  little  more 
than  5'  apart ;  they  are  connected 
by  a  small  cord,  drawn  tight,  which 
is  passed  around  each  about  3^' 
above  the  ground ;  the  ends  of  this 
cord  are  attached  to  pins,  as  shown 
in  the  figure.  Two  pieces  of  cloth  are  then  buttoned  together,  and  thrown  over  the  rope  between 
the  sticks  ;  their  lower  edges  are  secured  to  small  pins  ;  the  roof  of  the  shelter  is  thus  complete. 
Generally  3  men  unite  to  form  one  shelter  ;  the  third  man  arranges  his  piece  of  cloth  over  the 
end  of  the  shelter  which  is  most  exposed  to  the  weather.  If  5  men  unite  to  form  a  shelter,  it  is 
made  double  the  length  shown  in  the  sketch. 

Sometimes  jointed  sticks  are  carried  to  support  the  shelter  ;  sometimes  stakes  are  cut  on  the 
ground  ;  occasionally  the  musket  is  used  for  the  purpose. 

When  the  camp  is  somewhat  permanent,  it  is  usual  to  dig  a  little  cellar,  and  bank  up  the 
earth  outside. 


REPORT   OP   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    MTLELLAiJ. 


255 


t=^ 


In  the  Crimea,  the  cavalry  usually  encamped  in  line,  with  two  rows  of  picket  roi^es,  and  a 
line  of  shelter  tents  in  front  of  and  behind  the  picket  ropes  ;  the  arms  and  equipments  between 
the  shelters  and  the  picket  ropes. 

The  picket  rope  is  stretched  on  the 
ground,  and  the  horses  secured  to  it  by  a 
hobble  on  the  right  fore  foot ;  the  hobble 
is  of  leather,  and  about  3'  long ;  it  buckles 
around  the  pastern  joint ;  sometimes  the 
hobble  is  attached  to  a  picket  j^in,  in- 
stead of  a  picket  rope. 

The  annexed  sketch  shows  this  arrange- 
ment ;  it  is  spoken  of  by  the  French 
officers  as  being  the  best  manner  of  secur- 


ing the  horses. 

Officers'  horses  are  on  the  flanks  of  the  squadron  picket  ropes  ;  those  of  the  field  and  staff 
are  near  the  tents  of  their  owners. 

For  the  latter,  rude  stables  are  usually  formed,  by  excavating  to  the  depth  of  a  couple  of  feet, 
banking  up  the  earth  around  three  sides,  and  then  forming  a  roof  and  walls  of  brush. 

When  time  and  circumstances  permitted,  the  same  was  done  for  the  horses  of  the  men,  espe- 
cially in  the  winter.  It  was  stated  that  a  very  slight  protection  of  this  kind  produced  very 
marked  beneficial  results.  In  this  connexion,  I  would  remark,  that  companies  of  cavalry  ought 
always  to  be  provided  with  a  sufficient  number  of  tools  to  enable  them  to  improvise  some  such 
shelter  in  any  camp  at  all  permanent  ;  anything  which  jiartially  protects  the  horses  from  the 
cold  winds  is  of  great  service. 

The  French  horses  were  blanketed  in  camp. 

The  annexed  sketch  is  a 
section  of  the  conical  tent 
used  by  the  French  staff 
officers  ;  it  will  be  observed 
that  it  has  low  walls,  and 
but  one  central  pole. 

In  the  Crimea,  the  horses 

were  fed  3  times  each   day ; 

when  the  ration  was  large, 

4  times.     They  were  watered 

y»Ee>'>-''^'i'''«^^^^^^^^^^  twice  a   day — early   in   the 

morning  and  at  about  3  p.  m.  ;  sometimes  but  once  a  day. 

They  were  cleaned  twice  a  day. 

The  men  of  the  African  chasseurs  never  go  to  bed  without  cleaning  and  rubbing  down  their 
horses,  whatever  may  be  the  weather  and  the  hour  of  night  when  they  reach  camp. 

On  the  march,  each  man  carries  4  days'  barley,  2  days'  hay,  and  4  days'  rations  for  himself. 
When  going  into  action,  the  men,  whenever  it  is  possible,  leave  their  forage  rations,  cooking 
utensils,  &c.,  in  charge  of  a  few  men,  or  the  dismounted  men,  retaining  only  cloak,  arms,  and 
ammunition  ;  for  a  division  to  effect  this  requires  about  half  an  hour. 

There  are  always  a  number  of  dismounted  men  to  take  care  of  baggage  animals,  act  as  officers' 
servants,  &c. 


256  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   ELTROPE. 

The  daily  service,  manner  of  performing  outpost  duty,  &c.,  varies  with  circumstances,  and  is 
regulated  in  orders  by  the  general  of  division.  For  some  six  months,  during  the  first  winter  in 
the  Crimea,  the  horses  were  kept  saddled  all  day  ;  in  the  fall  of  1855  there  was  hut  one  squadron 
on  outpost  duty  on  the  Tchernaya;  the  horses  of  the  other  squadrons  were  at  their  picliet  ropes, 
unsaddled.  Of  the  squadron  on  duty,  one-half  was  in  advance  of  the  Tchernaya,  saddled  and 
bridled  ;  it  threw  out  videttes  and  pickets  ;  the  other  half  remained  in  bivouac  south  of  the 
stream,  saddled,  but  not  bridled.  The  videttes  were  always  double,  and  relieved  every  hour,  or 
two  hours,  according  to  the  weather  ;  if  anything  occurred,  one  vidette  rode  in  to  inform  the 
picket,  the  other  remaining  at  his  post  to  watch. 

In  the  African  chasseurs,  the  men  being  old  soldiers,  less  minute  attention  to  details  was 
required  from  the  officers  ;  for  instance,  if  it  was  intended  to  start  at  4  in  the  morning,  it  was 
only  necessary  to  announce  the  fact  to  the  men  ;  the  hour  for  rising,  feeding  the  horses,  break- 
fasting, &c.,  need  not  be  specified  ;  but  the  men  can  be  trusted  to  be  in  the  saddle  at  the  hour 
appointed. 

In  order  to  arrive  at  the  end  of  a  march  sooner,  and  thus  give  the  horses  more  time  to  repose,  a 
part  of  the  march  is  usually  made  at  the  trot,  not  faster  than  5  miles  an  hour  ;  the  horses  must 
be  brought  to  a  walk  20  minutes  before  every  halt,  and  one  hour  before  reaching  camp. 

In  crossing  long  and  steep  slopes,  the  men  dismount ;  but  they  must  not  dismount  and  mount 
very  often. 

The  march  ought  not  to  be  greater  than  from  25  to  31  miles. 

Very  full  instructions  as  to  the  manner  of  conducting  marches,  and  the  general  duty  in  the 
field,  are  to  be  found  in  the  French  regulations  ;  in  practice,  these  regulations  are  followed  as 
closely  as  circumstances  will  permit. 

The  cacolets,  mentioned  when  giving  the  allowance  of  transportation,  are  mule  litters  ;  each 
mule  carries  two,  slung  on  each  side  of  an  ordinary  pack  saddle ;  their  frame  is  of  jointed  iron, 
and  can  be  arranged  either  in  the  form  of  a  chair  for  those  who  are  but  slightly  wounded,  or  as 
a  couch  for  more  severe  cases.  They  are  well  worthy  of  examination  for  adoption  in  our  own 
service,  in  cases  where  commands  move  without  wagons ;  they  will  be  found  to  be  described  in  the 
report  of  another  member  of  the  commission. 

TKANSPORTATION   OF   MEN   AND   HORSES  BY  SEA. 

The  American  vessels,  the  Great  Kepublic  and  the  Monarch  of  the  Seas,  were  fitted  up  at 
Marseilles  by  the  French  government  as  horse  transports,  and  present  good  examples  of  the 
system  pursued;  the  arrangements  were  the  same  in  both. 

The  Great  Eepublic  is  317'  by  53'  over  all,  30'  hold,  tonnage,  3,424 ;  she  has  carried  497 
horses  and  500 men  at  the  same  time ;  240  horses  on  each  "between  decks,"  the  rest  on  the  spar  deck. 

A  donkey  engine,  of  8-horse  power  and  12"  stroke,  was  employed  to  hoist  the  horses  in  and 
out ;  a  load  of  horses  taken  in,  or  discharged,  at  the  rate  of  one  horse  per  minute. 

In  one  voyage,  of  21  days,  out  of  497  animals,  9  horses  and  4  mules  were  lost ;  most  of  these 
were  sick  when  brought  on  board,  and  suffered  much  from  the  heat  at  Malta. 

Three  additional  ventilating  ports  were  cut  on  each  side  of  each  deck ;  three  weeks  were 
occupied  in  putting  up  the  stalls. 

Th6  Monarch  of  the  Seas  is  of  2,360  tons  burden. 

She  carries  300  horses,  or  950  soldiers  and  28  officers  ;  loads  and  discharges,  by  means  of  a 
donkey  engine  of  8-horse  power,  at  the  same  rate  as  the  Great  Kepublic.     The  cost  of  putting 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    JPOLELLAN. 


257 


up  the  stalls  was  about  $8,000.  On  one  voyage  she  lost  about  20  horses  out  of  300.  Out  of 
3,000  horses,  carried  at  different  times,  lost  about  30  in  all. 

In  all  the  transports  the  government  furnished  the  forage  ;  the  ships  fed  the  men  imder  a 
contract. 

The  loading  was  under  the  direction  of  government  employes  ;  the  captain  of  the  vessel 
regulated  the  extinction  of  lights,  &c. 

It  is  considered  best  to  transport  horses  on  board  of  large  sailing  vessels,  towed  by  steamers, 
thus  avoiding  the  heat  of  the  engine,  &c. 

The  lower  deck  is  regarded  as  best  for  the  horses. 

The  horses  are  cleaned  once  a  day  ;  fed  and  watered  twice  ;  these  details  are  regulated  by  the 
officers  of  the  troops. 

The  horse  equipments,  &c.,  are  placed  at  the  ends  of  the  decks. 

Horse  medicines  were  brought  on  board  by  the  veterinaries  on  duty  with  the  troops. 

When  the  vessel  is  "end  on"  to  the  wharf,  abridge  of  decked  flat  boats  is  made  from  the  shore, 
and  the  horses  walked  alongside  ;  the  slings  are  then  put  on,  and  the  animals  hoisted  in,  with 
the  saddle  and  entire  equipment  on  them. 

The  sling  used  on  board  ship  does  not  differ  materially  from  that  employed  in  the  English 
service  ;  when  used  for  hoisting  in  and  out  a  breeching  and  breast  strap  are  employed. 

On  the  voyage  the  sling  is  used  only  in  bad  weather,  when  the  horses  become  fatigued. 

The  sea  halters  are  of  rope,  with  two  halter  ropes. 

The  sketches  below  give  the  form  and  dimensions  of  the  stalls. 


Beck  Timbers 


'^^ 


■0, 


2r'         *2" 


Deck  Tinihers 


Fig.  1  represents  the  elevation  of  a  stall,  showing  the  stanciiinns  and  side  boards. 

Fig.  2  represents  a  section  through  the  axis  of  a  stall,  and  shows  the  breast  and  tail  boards. 

The  breast  and  tail  boards  are  nailed  to  the  stanchions,  and  are  3"  thick  ;  the  side  boards  slip 
in  grooves.     The  heads  of  the  horses  are  towards  the  middle  of  the  ship. 

The  stalls  are  28"  wide,  and  5'  10"  long  in  the  clear  between  the  pads. 

The  pads  are  of  canvas,  stuffed  with  hair  ;  they  were  too  thin. 

The  feed  troughs  of  wood,  and  hung  to  hooks  on  the  front  of  the  breast  board  ;  they  are  22" 
long,  7"  deep,  10^"  wide  at  top,  *l\'  wide  at  bottom — all  these  dimensions  in  the  clear  ;  the  edges 
33   © 


258  MILITARY  COMMISSION  TO  EUROPE. 

covered  with  sheet  zinc.  For  each  sling  there  are  two  sling  holts  and  rings,  attached  to  planks 
spiked  to  the  joists. 

To  each  halter  ring  two  halter  ropes,  of  adjacent  horses,  are  attached.  The  flooring  of  the 
stalls  is  of  inch  hoards,  resting  flat  on  the  deck  ;  long  elects  in  front  and  rear,  as  shown  in  the 
figures,  and  cross  elects,  parallel  to  the  length  of  the  stall,  under  each  side  board,  are  nailed  to 
the  floor  ;  this  flooring  cannot  be  taken  up  while  the  horses  are  on  board. 

The  stale  passes  oiit  through  the  scuppers  as  best  it  can.     The  hatches  are  always  kept  open. 

It  will  be  seen  tliat  the  arrangement  of  the  stalls  is  such  that  a  single  horse  cannot  he  re- 
moved from  the  middle  of  a  row  without  first  removing  all  the  others  between  him  and  one  end, 
or  else  sawing  off  the  breast  board  ;  this  and  the  arrangement  of  the  flooring  are  objectionable. 

It  will  be  seen  hereafter  that  these  defects  are  obviated  in  the  English  system,  which  will  be 
described  in  its  proper  place,  and  which  may  safely  be  taken  as  a  model. 

When  horses  are  carried  on  the  spar  deck  they  are  placed  in  moveable  box  stalls. 

The  men  sleep  about  the  decks,  as  they  best  can,  in  their  overcoats  ;  blankets  are  sometimes 
given  them,  especially  if  they  are  sick.  Neither  bunks  nor  hammocks  are  provided.  The 
rations  of  the  men  on  board  ship  are  as  follows : 

Breakfast,  6|  ounces  of  bread,  ^\-  pint  of  brandy  or  rum,  f^  ounce  of  cofi"ee,  /^  ounce  of  sugar. 

Dinner,  6^  ounces  of  bread,  j%  pint  of  wine,  either  8J  ounces  of  salt  beef,  or  7iV  oxmces  of 
pork,  2jV  ounces  of  potatoes,  peas,  or  beans,  or  1  ounce  of  rice,  or  4^^  ounces  of  cheese. 

Supper,  6^  ounces  of  bread,  -/.y  pint  of  wine,  ij^s  ounces  of  Chollet  vegetables,  or  2  ounces 
of  rice. 

VETERINARY  SCHOOLS. 

Of  these  there  are  three  :  one  at  Alfort,  near  Paris,  one  at  Lyons,  one  at  Toulouse — all  under 
the  minister  of  agriculture,  commerce,  and  j^ublic  works.  At  Alfort  there  are  40  pupils,  sent 
by  the  war  department,  who  supply  about  40  veterinaries  per  annum  for  the  army  ;  as  this 
number  is  insufficient,  the  graduates  from  civil  life  frequently  receive  appointments. 

These  institutions  are  all  conducted  on  the  same  principles  ;  that  at  Alfort,  however,  is  the 
most  extensive,  and  probably  the  best ;  a  description  of  that  at  Lyons  will  give  a  sufiiciently 
accurate  idea  of  the  general  nature  of  all. 

At  this  there  are  150  pupils,  admitted  between  the  ages  of  17  and  25,  and  paying  $80 
per  annum. 

They  are  required  to  pass  a  preliminary  examination,  at  which  they  must  show  that  they  can 
forge  a  shoe  in  two  heats,  that  they  understand  the  French  grammar,  and  can  write,  know 
arithmetic  and  the  elements  of  geometry,  and  have  a  general  knowledge  of  the  geography  of 
Europe,  as  well  as  a  special  acquaintance  with  that  of  France. 

The  pupils  are  divided  into  4  classes,  the  course  being  of  foiu-  years.  For  the  two  junior 
classes  the  course  is  purely  theoretical,  and  they  are  required  to  study  8  hours  a  day  ;  in  the 
two  senior  clas.ses  it  is  partly  practical,  their  presence  in  the  study  rooms  being  required  but 
4  hours  per  day. 

The  members  of  the  two  senior  classes  have,  each,  one  or  more  sick  horses  assigned  to  their 
care,  to  which  they  administer  the  requisite  medical  treatment,  under  the  supervision  and 
according  to  the  prescriptions  of  the  professors.  There  is  a  clinique,  or  dispensary,  whither 
sick  horses  are  brought  every  day,  the  professors  i^rescribing  and  making  remarks  upon  the 
cases  ;  each  pupil  has  a  book  in  which  he  records  the  prescri^jtions,  remarks,  and  whole  history 
of  the  cases  ;  he  retains  this  book  when  he  leaves  the  school. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B  M'CLELLAN  259 

During  the  whole  course  the  pupils  are  required  to  make  shoes  and  to  shoe  horses. 
The  academic  staif  is  as  follows  : 

1.  The  director,  who  is  also  professor  of  anatomy-  and  external  diseases. 

2.  A  professor  of  external  jjathology,  surgery,  and  shoeing. 

3.  A  professor  of  internal  pathology,  and  botany. 

4.  A  professor  of  hygeine,  ph3'siology,  and  sanitary  police. 

5.  A  professor  of  physics,  chemistry,  and  pharmacy. 
In  addition,  there  are  three  assistant  professors. 

The  pupils  reside  in  the  establishment,  and  are  kept  under  very  strict  discipline.  When 
they  pass  their  final  examination  they  receive  a  regular  diploma  as  veterinary  physicians. 

In  the  practice  at  this  institution,  the  glanders  is  regarded  as  incurable,  and  the  fleam  is 
preferred  to  the  spring  lancet. 

The  boxes  for  very  sick  or  large  horses  are  11'  4"  wide,  14'  9"  long,  with  a  passage  way  of 
5'  in  rear,  and  are  about  15'  high  :  in  front  of  the  stables  there  is  an  iron  shed  10'  6"  wide. 

The  mangers  are  of  stone  ;  racks,  of  wood  ;  floors,  of  hard  brick,  laid  on  the  long  edge  ;  the 
divisions  between  the  stalls  are  solid,  and  swing  on  pivots,  so  as  to  yield  to  the  kick  of  the 
animal. 

There  are  stables  for  cows  ;  kennels  for  dogs,  cats,  &c. 

There  are  also  dissecting  rooms — animals  being  purchased  and  killed  for  the  purpose. 

The  librarj^  has  a  reading-room  attached,  and  contains  general  scientific  works,  as  well  as 
those  relating  esjaecially  to  the  veterinary  art. 

The  collection  of  instruments  for  exjjeriments  in  natural  philosoijhy  is  fair. 

There  is  a  small  anatomical  museum,  in  which  are  found  nearly  all  the  admirable  models 
made  by  Dr.  Augoux ;  these  represent  the  teeth,  bones,  intestines — in  fact,  all  parts  of  the  horse, 
as  well  as  complete  models  showing  the  whole  external  and  internal  structure  of  the  animal. 
They  are  made  of  a  material  not  unlike  jjapier-mache,  and  are  durable  and  accurate. 

These  models  are  in  general  use  throughout  Europe,  and  are  regarded  as  indispensable  in  a 
veterinary  school. 

Specimens  were  purchased  by  the  commission  ;  and  I  would  urgently  recommend  that  com- 
plete sets  be  procured  for  the  military  academy,  the  cavalry  depot,  and  for  general  use  in  the 
service. 

In  the  botanical  garden  are  found  specimens  of  all  proper  and  noxious  aliments  for  the  horse, 
medicinal  plants,  &c. 

The  forges  in  the  shoeing  shop  are  of  iron,  and  well  arranged  ;  the  tools  present  nothing 
peculiar. 

The  method  of  cold  shoeing  is  pursued  here,  as  is  universally  the  case  in  the  French  govern- 
ment establishments.  This  process  will  be  fully  explained  when  describing  the  farrier  school 
at  Saumur. 

CAVALRY  SCHOOL,  AT  SAUMUR. 

This  is  the  most  perfect  and  extensive  institution  of  the  kind  in  Europe,  perhaps  the  only  one 
really  deserving  the  title,  the  others  being  more  properly  mere  schools  of  equitation. 

It  is  situated  on  the  Loire,  in  the  department  of  the  Maine  and  Loire,  a  region  in  which  forao'e 
abounds,  and  where  the  climate  is  such  that  exercises  in  the  open  air  are  seldom  interrupted. 

The  organization  and  purposes  of  the  school  cannot  be  better  described  than  by  giving  extracts 
from  the  "  Decree  of  Reorganization,"  dated  October,  1853 : 


260 


MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 


"  The  purpose  of  the  cavalry  school  is  to  form  instructors,  intended  to  diffuse  through  the 
corps  an  uniform  system  of  instruction  in  everything  relating  to  the  principles  of  equitation^ 
and  other  branches  of  knowledge  appropriate  to  the  cavalry  arm. 

TITLE  I. 

OBJECT  OF  THE  SCHOOL  AND  DIVISION  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

Article  1.  The  instruction  at  the  cavalry  school  is  entirely  military,  and  is  based  upon  the 
laws  and  regulations  in  force  with  regard  to  the  mounted  troops.     It  includes — 

1st.   The  regulations  for  interior  service. 

2d.    The  cavalry  tactics. 

3d.    The  regulations  for  garrison  service. 

4tli.  The  regulations  for  field  service  applied,  as  far  as  possible,  on  the  ground^  especially 
with  regard  to  reconnaissances. 

oth.  A  military  and  didactic  course  of  equitation,  comprising  all  the  theoretical  and  practical 
knowledge  required  for  the  proper  and  useful  employment  of  the  horse,  his  breaking,  applica- 
tion to  the  purposes  of  war,  and  various  civil  exercises. 

6th.  A  course  of  hippology,  having  for  its  object  practical  instruction,  by  means  of  the  model 
breeding  stud  attached  to  the  school,  in  the  principles  which  should  serve  as  rules  in  crossing 
breeds  and  in  raising  colts,  to  explain  the  phases  of  dentition,  to  point  out  the  conformation  of 
the  colt  which  indicates  that  he  will  become  a  good  and  solid  horse,  the  method  to,  be  pursued 
to  bring  the  colt  under  subjection  without  resistance,  and,  finally,  to  familiarize  the  officers  and 
pupils  with  all  the  knowledge  indispensable  to  an  officer  charged  with  the  purchase  and  care  of 
remount  horses.  This  course  will  also  include  notions  concerning  the  horse  equiiiment,  which 
will  be  derived  from  an  examination  of  the  saddle  factory  connected  with  the  school. 

7th.  Vaulting,  fencing,  and  swimming. 

Article  2.  The  number  of  horses  is  fixed  by  the  minister  of  war,  according  to  the  wants  of 
the  service  ;  the  number  of  troop  horses  is  fixed  by  table  A,  appended  to  this  decree. 

The  number  of  young  horses,  for  breaking,  is  fixed  at  100  as  a  minimum.  These  last  horses, 
as  soon  as  their  education  is  complete,  are  sold  or  given,  according  to  the  orders  of  the  minister 
of  war,  to  those  officers  who  need  a  remount ;  in  preference  to  officers  of  the  general  staff  and 
staff  corps,  those  of  the  artillery,  and  mounted  officers  of  infantry. 

These  officers  may  also  select  from  among  the  other  horses  of  the  school,  with  the  ajjproval 
of  the  commandant  of  the  school. 

Article  3.  The  pupils  at  the  school  are : 

1st.  Officers  for  instruction. 

2d.    Sergeants  for  instruction. 

3d.    Corporals  for  instruction. 

Article  4.  The  full  number  of  the  divisions  of  officers,  sergeants,  and  corporals  for  instruc- 
tion is  as  follows : 

Officers   for  instruction,  2  divisions,  (effective,) 100 

Sergeants  "  1         "  "  40 

Corporals  "  4         "  " 240 

Article  5.  The  pupils  are  sent  to  the  school  by  order  of  the  minister  of  war.  They  continue 
to  be  counted  in  their  corps,  from  which  they  are  considered  detached  during  their  stay  at  the 
school.     They  receive  additional  pay. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAif.  261 

TITLE  II. 

OOUKSE  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

Article  6.  The  courses  of  instruction  are  divided  into  2  years. 

Upon  their  admission,  the  pupils  take  up  the  first  year's  course  ;  when  they  have  passed  the 
examination  at  the  close  of  that  year,  they  enter  upon  the  course  of  the  2d  and  final  year. 

Article  7.  In  case  of  interruption  from  sickness,  pupils  may  repeat  one  year's  course.  No 
one  can  remain  more  than  3  years  at  the  school. 

Article  8.  A  council  of  instruction  is  charged  with  the  direction  of  the  studies.  They  pro- 
pose useful  changes,  and  direct  the  progress  of  the  studies.  They  are  charged  with  the  exami- 
nations. 

TITLE  III. 

THE  divisions  FOR  INSTRUCTION. 

Section  1. 
Officers  and  sergeants  for  instruction. 

Article  9.  The  oflicers  for  instruction  are  selected  from  the  regiments  of  cavalry  and  artillery, 
as  well  as  from  the  squadrons  of  the  trains  of  the  parks  and  military  equipages.  Every  year 
the  inspectors  general  designate  the  lieutenants  and  suh-lieutenants  who  can  profitahly  follow 
the  course  at  the  school.  The  lieutenants  selected  must  not  be  more  than  36  years  of  age,  the 
suh-lieutenants  not  more  than  34. 

The  sub-lieutenants,  who  are  graduates  of  the  special  military  school,  must  have  served  at 
least  2  years  with  their  regiments  before  being  sent  to  the  cavalry  school. 

Article  10.  The  sergeants  for  instruction  are  selected  from  the  artillery.  Every  two  years 
the  inspector  general  designates  sergeants  of  the  regiments  of  artillery  and  the  squadrons  of 
the  park  trains  to  be  detached  from  their  corps  as  sergeants  for  instruction. 

Article  11.  The  officers  and  sergeants  sent  to  the  school  for  instruction  take  their  horses 
with  them,  and  use  them  in  the  military  exercises. 

Article  12.  Those  who,  after  6  months'  trial  at  the  school,  are  found  to  be  deficient  in  the 
necessary  qualities  are  sent  back  to  their  regiments. 

Article  13.  Upon  the  recommendation  of  the  inspector  general  of  the  school,  the  officers 
serving  there  as  pupils  compete  for  promotion  by  choice  with  the  officers  of  the  corps  from  which 
they  are  detached. 

Article  14.  The  cavalry  lieutenant  for  instruction  who  graduates  first  in  his  class  is  presented 
for  the  first  vacancy  as  captain  instructor  that  occurs  in  the  cavalry,  provided  he  has  the  seniority 
in  his  grade  demanded  by  the  law. 

The  cavalry  lieutenant  who  graduates  second  obtains,  under  the  same  conditions,  the  2d  vacancy 
of  captain  instructor,  provided  the  division  to  which  he  belonged  consisted  of  more  than  30 
members.  The  sub-lieutenant  for  instruction  who  graduates  first  of  his  grade,  provided  he  is 
not  lower  than  10th  in  the  general  classification  of  the  officers  of  both  grades,  is  presented  for 
promotion  to  the  first  vacant  lieutenancy  that  occurs  in  his  regiment. 

Article  15.  Those  who  remain  3  years  at  the  school  are  not  entitled  to  the  benefits  of  the 
preceding  article. 


262  military  commission  to  europe. 

Section  2. 
Corporals  for  instruction. 

Article  16.  They  are  designated  every  year,  by  the  inspectors  general,  in  the  regiments  of 
cavalry  and  the  squadrons  of  military  equipages,  from  among  those  who  have  the  greatest 
aptness  for  equitation,  and  are  most  deserving  on  account  of  their  conduct,  instruction,  zeal,  and 
intelligence  ;  those  who  are  recommended  for  promotion  in  their  corps  are  selected  in  preference. 

They  must  not  be  more  than  25  years  old. 

They  are  sent  to  the  school,  by  order  of  the  minister  of  war,  on  the  1st  of  April  of  each  year. 

They  remain  connected  with  their  corps,  from  which  they  are  regarded  as  detached,  and  leave 
their  horses  there. 

Article  17.  The  corporals  compose  2  squadrons,  commanded  by  captains  on  the  staff  of  the 
school,  who  have  officers  for  instruction  under  their  orders. 

Article  18.  The  corporals  for  instruction,  although  acting  in  the  ranks,  continue  to  wear  the 
distinctive  marks  of  their  grade,  and  receive  the  pay  of  corporals  of  cuirassiers. 

Article  19.  Those  corporals  who,  after  spending  6  months  at  the  school,  do  not  evince  the 
necessary  qualifications  are  sent  back  to  their  regiments. 

Article  20.  When  they  have  passed  their  final  examination,  the  corporals  for  instruction  are 
promoted  to  be  sergeants,  vacancies  having  been  reserved  for  them  in  their  own  regiments,  to 
which  they  consequently  return. 

Those  who  at  the  examination  at  the  close  of  the  first  year  are  in  the  highest  third  part  of 
their  class,  and  have  distinguished  themselves  by  their  zeal  and  good  conduct,  may  be  at  once 
promoted  to  be  sergeants  in  their  regiments,  and  perform  the  duties  of  that  grade  in  the 
squadrons  of  the  school;  they  receive  the  pay  and  wear  the  distinctive  marks  of  their  new 
grade. 

Those  corporals  whose  final  examination  is  not  satisfactory  will  be  sent  back  to  their  regiments 
as  corporals,  unless  they  are  especially  authorized  to  spend  an  additional  G  months,  or  a  year, 
at  the  school. 

Article  21.  The  corporals  who  graduate  among  the  first  ten  of  their  class  are  placed  on  the 
list  of  sergeants  for  promotion  as  sub-lieutenants  as  soon  as  they  have  completed  the  two  years' 
service  as  sergeants  required  by  law. 

TITLE  IV. 

staff  of  the  school. 

Section  1. 

Composition  of  the  staff. 

Article  22.  The  staff"  of  the  school  is  composed  as  follows: 

1  general  officer,  as  commandant. 

1  colonel,  as  2d  commandant. 

1  lieutenant  colonel. 

1  chief  of  squadrons. 

1  major. 


EEPOET   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    JTCLELLAN.  263 

of  whom  3  command  the  squadrons, 

2  perform  the  duty  of  captain  adjutant, 

2  in  charge  of  the  instruction  of  the  officers, 
10  captains,  instructors,  -^   1  in  charge  of  the  special  course  of  the  sergeants, 

1  as  assistant  to  the  chief  riding  master  in  the  school  for  breaking 
young  horses, 

1  supernumerary  to  supply  vacancies. 
1  captain,  treasurer. 
1  captain  of  clothing. 

1  director  of  the  sadlery,  either  a  captain  or  lieutenant. 
1  assistant  treasurer,  either  a  lieutenant  or  sub-lieutenant. 
1  standard  bearer,  either  a  lieutenant  or  sub-lieutenant. 
1  veterinary  of  the  1st  or  2d  class. 
1  assistant  veterinary  of  the  1st  or  second  class. 

.  ..,,..,(  3  for  duty  with  the  squadrons, 

4  non-commissioned  adjutants,    )  . 

'  1  wagon  master,  also  in  charge  of  library. 

f  3  for  duty  with  the  squadrons, 

5  first  sergeants,    -j  1  master  farrier, 

I  1  master  saddler. 
13  sergeants,  one  of  whom  is  fencing  master. 

4  quartermaster  sergeants,  one  of  whom  is  attached  to  the  saddlery. 

1  corporal,  trumpeter. 

2  corporals,  farriers. 

2  corporals,  saddlers. 

3  corporals,  provosts. 

Article  23.  The  employes  in  the  riding  halls,  academy,  and  model  stud,  are  military  or  civil ; 
their  rank  and  precedence  is  as  follows : 

1  chief  riding  master,  ranks  as  chief  of  squadrons. 

5  riding  masters,  who  rank  as  captains  ;  one  of  these  may  be  the  director  of  the  stud,  and 

professor  of  hippology. 

3  assistant  riding  masters,  who  rank  as  lieutenants  or  sub-lieutenants. 
1  master  of  the  riding  halls,  ranks  as  non-commissioned  adjutant. 

4  assistant  masters  of  the  riding  halls,   1  of  whom  ranks  as  first  sergeant,  the  others  as 

sergeants. 
The  direction  of  the  breeding  stud,  and  the  course  of  hippology,  may  be  intrusted  to  a  civil  or 
military  professor  other  than  a  riding  master,  or  to  a  military  veterinary. 
Article  24.  The  medical  staff  is  as  follows  : 
1  chief  surgeon. 
1  surgeon  of  the  1st  or  2d  class. 
1  assistant  surgeon  of  the  1st  or  2d  class. 
1  chief  apothecary,  or  assistant  apothecary. 
1  hospital  intendant. 
3  principal  hospital  attendants. 
7  hospital  attendants. 
Article  25.  There  are  attached  to  the  school  : 


264  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

1  sergeant,  as  master  armorer. 

1  sergeant,  as  master  saddler. 

1  sergeant,  as  master  tailor. 

1  sergeant,  as  master  boot-maker. 

Article  2C.  The  officers  composing  the  staff  are  authorized  to  have  tlie  number  of  horses 
allowed  their  grade,  with  the  exception  of  the  intendants  and  medical  officers,  who  arc  only 
authorized  to  have  their  government  horses. 

Article  27.  Upon  the  recommendation  of  the  council  of  administration,  the  minister  of  war 
determines  the  number  and  duties  of  the  administrative  employes  attached  to  the  school ;  also 
the  number  of  subordinate  agents." 

For  additional  information,  I  would  refer  to  the  coj)y  of  the  decree  of  reorganization  accom- 
panying this  report. 

The  captains  instructor  of  the  cavalry  regiments,  and  the  instructors  of  equitation,  in  the 
artillery  regiments,  are  mostly  selected  from  the  graduates  of  this  institution. 

In  addition  to  the  subjects  mentioned  in  the  decree,  the  non-commissioned  officers  are  instructed 
in  the  theory  of  administration  and  accountability. 

The  text  books  are  as  follows  :  The  Hippology  of  M.  St.  Ange  ;  the  Equitation  of  M.  d'Aure; 
the  Tactics  and  Eegulations. 

The  recitations  are  by  sections  of  about  30  in  each. 

In  reciting  upon  the  general  principles  of  tactics,  equitation,  hippology,  &c.,  the  manner  is 
as  at  our  Military  Academy  ;  when  reciting  upon  the  movements  in  tactics,  all  the  commands 
and  explanations  of  the  instructor  to  the  troops  are  repeated  "verbatim  et  literatim,"  and  in 
the  tone  and  pitch  of  voice  used  in  the  field. 

Perfect  uniformity  of  tone  and  manner  are  required,  and  thus  obtained  ;  the  object  of  reciting 
in  this  manner  is  to  teach  the  pupils  the  proper  tone  and  pitch  of  voice,  to  accustom  them  to 
hear  their  own  voices,  and  to  enable  them  to  repeat  the  text  literally  at  this  pitch  of  voice, 
without  hesitation  or  mistake. 

The  course  of  hippology  includes  the  structure  of  the  horse,  the  circulation  of  the  blood, 
organs  of  respiration,  &c.,  food,  working  powers,  action,  breeds,  manner  of  taking  care  of  him, 
ordinary  ailments  and  remedies,  shoeing,  lameness,  saddling,  sore  backs,  sanitary  police,  &c., 
but  does  not  comprise  a  complete  veterinary  course. 

The  Augoux  models  are  employed,  in  preference,  for  demonstrations,  and  are  considered 
invaluable. 

The  officers  on  the  staff  of  the  school,  and  those  for  instruction,  lodge  in  the  town  ;  the  non- 
commissioned officers  are  quartered  in  the  barrack. 

The  hospital  is  for  both  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers. 

In  the  kitchens,  the  Choumara  marmites  are  used. 

The  stables  have  already  been  described. 

In  accordance  with  the  system  now  adopted  in  France,  the  prison  consists  of  small  cells,  opening 
upon  a  corridor  which  communicates  with  the  guard  room  ;  the  system  of  solitary  confinement 
is  resorted  to  as  the  only  one  of  any  avail.  Each  prisoner  has  a  bunk,  mattress,  pillow,  and 
blanket,  belonging  to  the  prison ;  at  Saumur  the  prisoners  are  obliged  to  have  some  of  their  text 
books  with  them. 

Forage  magazine. — The  annexed  sketch  represents  a  section  of  the  forage  magazine ;  there 
is  a  staircase  at  each  end.  The  oats  are  kept  loose  on  the  floor,  in  a  mass  about  3'  deep ;  a 
winnowing  machine  is  provided  for  cleaning  it  before  issue. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


265 


k 


The  hay  is  purchased  in  trusses  of  about  15  lbs.  each, 
and  is  put  up,  at  the  magazine,  in  trusses  of  a  ration  each, 
by  hired  men.  The  straw  is  stacked  in  piles  about  40' 
high,  in  the  open  air  ;  a  wall  surrounds  the  whole  estab- 
lishment. Four  months'  supply  usually  kept  on  hand.  The 
purchase  and  issue  are  in  the  hands  of  an  officer  of  the 
intendance. 


ma      Biding  halls. — There  are  three  of  these,  the  largest  being 


280'  long,  105'  wide,  and  25'  high.     The  roof  truss  of  wood,  supported  by  wooden  arches,  which 
extend  nearly  to  the  floor. 

The  galleries  in  the  middle  of  the  long  sides,  the  entrance  doors  at  the  ends.  There  is  no 
wainscot,  nor  are  the  corners  rounded  off.     The  floor  is  of  sand  and  tan. 

The  large  riding  hall  is  stated  to  be  too  large  for  the  mere  riding  drill,  and  is  sufficient  for 
instruction  in  the  first  two  articles  of  the  platoon  drill ;  it  was  also  stated  that  it  would  be 
desirable  to  have  it  large  enough  for  all  the  lessons  of  the  platoon  drill.  The  second  riding 
hall  is  about  216'  X  60',  and  is  of  a  good  size  for  the  riding  drill.  The  best  shape  for  a  riding 
hall  is  said  to  be, — the  width  one-third  of  the  length.  Near  the  large  riding  hall  there  is  a 
target,  placed  against  a  brick  wall.  They  practice  at  this  with  pistol,  carbine,  and  musket ; 
at  first  on  foot,  afterwards  on  horseback. 

The  carbine  is  said  to  be  worthless,  because  it  is  inaccurate,  and  is  apt  to  burn  the  horses' 
ears.     No  very  satisfactory  results  have  been  obtained  with  the  use  of  the  musket  on  horseback. 

Hurdles  about  2^  feet  high  are  placed  near  the  target ;  they  are  made  of  very  flexible  withes, 
in  order  not  to  trip  the  horse  if  he  strikes. 

The  practical  exercises  consist  of:  The  ordinary  riding  hall  drill,  including  vaulting,  the 
"kickers,"  &c. ;  the  carriere,  or  out  door  riding  at  speed,  over  hurdles,  ditches,  &c. ;  cutting  at 
heads  ;  target  practice  ;  fencing  ;  swimming  ;  the  usual  military  drills  ;  skeleton  squadron  and 
regimental  drills  ;  rides  in  the  country  ;  finally,  in  the  summer,  frequent  "  carrousels"  or  tilts 
are  held. 

The  English  saddle  and  bridle  are  much  used  by  the  officers.  The  saddle  for  the  "  kickers" 
has  a  high  pommel  and  cantle,  and  no  stirrups. 

The  Baucher  system  was  fully  tried  at  Saumur,  a:.d  I  was  informed  that  it  proved  to  be 
inapplicable  to  the  general  service  ;  some  few  persons,  exceptions  to  the  general  rule,  did  won- 
ders with  it ;  but  it  generally  did  harm,  and  is  regarded  as  a  very  dangerous  system  in  the 
hands  of  most  officers  and  men ;  it  is  not  at  all  in  use  at  Saumur,  or  anywhere  else  in  the 
French  service.  I  will  here  take  occasion  to  repeat  that  I  took  especial  pains  to  make  inquiries, 
in  relation  to  the  Baucher  system,  of  the  cavalry  officers  of  all  the  countries  we  visited,  and 
that  the  reply  was  uniformly  the  same :  that  is,  that  certain  parts  of  the  system  (those  relating 
to  obtaining  command  of  the  muscles  of  the  head  and  neck)  were  good,  and  could  be  applied 
with  advantage  by  individual  officers  to  their  own  horses,  but  that  the  system  would  never 
answer  for  general  introduction  in  the  service. 

In  addition  to  what  is  stated  in  the  decree  of  reorganization,  it  should  be  said  that  the  non- 
commissioned officers  sent  to  the  school  must  have  served  as  such  at  least  one  year ;  and  that 
those  who  attend  the  school  as  non-commissioned  officers  frequently  return  as  officers  for  in- 
struction, and  again  in  a  higher  grade  on  the  staff  of  the  school.  The  officer  now  second  in 
command  has  been  at  the  school  in  every  grade  down  to  that  of  lieutenant,  inclusive.  Officers 
34   © 


266  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

transferred  from  the  infantry  to  the  cavalry  are  generally  sent  to  this  school  for  a  short  time  at 
least. 

The  veterinary  surgeons  of  the  lowest  grade  are  sent  here  upon  their  first  appointment  to 
receive  instruction  in  equitation,  to  profit  by  the  study  of  the  model  stud,  and  to  learn  the 
routine  of  their  duties  with  the  regiments  ;  they  form  a  se^Darate  class,  under  the  direction  of 
the  stud.  In  the  Model  Stud,  (Haras  des  Etudes,)  the  number  of  animals  varies.  There  are 
usually  two  stallions  and  about  twenty  mares,  in  addition  to  those  selected  from  time  to  time 
from  among  the  riding  animals.  At  the  time  of  my  visit  one  of  the  stallions  was  a  superb 
Arab  ;  among  the  mares  were  Arabs,  English,  Norman,  &c.  Each  animal  has  a  box  about  15' 
square. 

The  object  of  this  establishment  is  explained  in  the  "  decree."  Attached  to  it  is  a  botanical 
garden,  more  especially  for  useful  and  noxious  grasses  and  plants. 

The  horses  of  the  school  are  divided  into  two  sets — one  for  the  riding  hall,  the  other  for 
military  drills  ;  there  are  about  240  of  the  former  and  600  of  the  latter.  The  former  are  groomed 
by  hired  men,  the  others  by  soldiers  of  the  remount  companies,  who  do  not  belong  to  any 
regiment. 

Each  man  has  four  horses  to  take  care  of,  and  has  nothing  else  to  do.  The  horses  at  the 
school  have  a  somewhat  larger  allowance  of  forage  than  in  the  regiments,  and  are  far  better 
animals  than  the  majority  in  the  service. 

SCHOOL  FOE  BEEAKING  YOUNG  HOESES. 

The  object  of  this  establishment  is  explained  in  the  decree.  The  best  horses  purchased  at  the 
remount  depots  are  selected  for  the  ofiicers,  and  sent  to  this  place  to  be  trained. 

A  school  for  trumpeters  existed  at  Saumur  prior  to  the  war  ;  soon  after  the  commencement  of 
the  war  it  was  broken  up,  to  the  regret  of  all  the  ofiicers. 

SCHOOL  OF  FAEEIEES. 

This  is  attached  to  the  cavalry  school,  and  is  under  the  direction  of  Ihe  commandant.  Private 
soldiers  who  have  served  at  least  six  months  with  their  regiments,  and  are  blacksmiths  or  horse 
shoers  by  trade,  compose  this  school.  There  are  usually  two  men  from  each  mounted  regiment; 
during  the  war  the  number  was  reduced  to  one  from  each  regiment.  The  course  lasts  two 
years.  It  comprises  reading,  writing,  arithmetic,  equitation,  the  anatomy  of  the  horse, 
thorough  instruction  as  to  all  diseases,  injuries,  and  deformities  of  the  foot,  something  of  the 
veterinary  art  in  general,  the  selection  of  metals,  making  shoes,  nails,  tools,  &c.,  shoeing  horses. 

The  printed  work  on  farriery  (Cours  de  Marechalerie,  a  Saumur)  gives  the  course  as  taught. 

This  establishment  has  a  large  shoeing  shop  and  yard,  with  some  12  or  15  forges,  a  recitation 
room,  museum,  and  store  rooms.  In  the  recitation  room  there  are  skeletons  of  horses,  men, 
&c. ,  as  well  as  some  admirable  specimens  of  natural  preparations  in  comparative  anatomy,  a 
complete  collection  of  shoeing  tools,  specimens  of  many  kinds  of  shoes,  &c. 

In  a  recitation  of  the  lowest  section  I  heard  a  very  good  explanation  of  the  skeleton,  muscles, 
foot,  process  of  shoeing,  use  of  the  "perpendiculars,"  &c.,  from  different  pupils. 

This  school  has  been  in  existence  since  1826,  and  has  produced  most  satisfactory  results. 
Since  that  year  the  census  returns  have  shown,  it  is  stated,  a  diminution  of  40  per  cent,  in  the 
number  of  lame  horses  in  France — a  result  attributed  to  the  good  instruction  spread  through  the 
country  by  means  of  this  school,  for  the  pupils,  upon  leaving  the  service,  generally  establish 
themselves  as  farriers  in  their  native  villages. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M^CLELLAN. 


267 


All  the  horses  of  the  school  are  shod  here  ;  also  those  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  town  and  its 
vicinity  ;  the  money  thus  earned  pays  the  expenses  of  the  school. 

The  shoes  are  made  altogether  by  hand,  and  are  rather  rough. 

For  small  feet,  6  nails  are  used  ;  for  those  of  medium  size,  7  ;  for  large  feet,  such  as  those  of 
cuirassier  horses,  8. 

As  the  regulations  require  the  method  of  cold  shoeing  to  be  used  in  the  French  army,  that 
alone  is  used  here,  and  is  as  follows  : 

The  old  shoe  is  removed,  and  the  foot  prepared  to  receive  the  new  shoe.  An  exact  impression 
of  the  foot  is  then  taken  on  a  sheet  of  paper,  which  is  laid  against  the  sole  of  the  foot,  and 
pressed  against  the  edge  of  the  foot  by  the  hand. 

The  pedometer  (which  is  either  a  thin  flexible  bar  of  lead,  or  a  chain  of  short,  stiff,  bar  links,) 
is  now  employed  ;  this  is  bent  to  the  exact  shape  of  the  impression  on  the  paper,  and  serves  as 
a  guide  and  measure  in  forging  the  shoe. 

This  impression  is  taken  once  for  all,  for  each  horse. 

In  the  regiments,  each  farrier  has  a  register,  at  the  head  of  each  page  of  which  is  inscribed 
the  name  and  number  of  a  horse ;  below  are  traced  the  impressions  of  his  fore  and  hind  feet, 
which  can  always  be  reproduced  by  means  of  the  podometre,  or  a  paper  form.  Any  necessary 
remarks,  as  to  peculiarities  of  the  horse's  foot,  and  directions  for  shoeing  him,  are  inscribed  by 
the  veterinary.     A  note  is  made  in  the  register  every  time  the  horse  is  shod. 

No  shoe  should  remain  on  more  than  from  30  to  40  days. 

By  means  of  this  register  the  farrier  prepares,  at  his  leisure,  four  shoes  for  each  horse,  which 
number  should  always  be  on  hand  ;  the  veterinary  inspects  them,  sees  the  nail  holes  punched, 
and  has  them  marked  with  the  number  of  the  horse. 

On  the  march,  every  man  must  be  provided  with  4  shoes  thus  fitted,  also  with  two  sets  of  nails. 

The  horses  are  not  taken  to  the  forge  to  be  shod,  but  the  operation  is  jDerformed  wherever 

they  happen  to  be. 

In  garrison,  they  leave  the  stable  only  long 

enough  to  have  the  old  shoe  removed,  the  hoof 

trimmed,  and  the  new  shoe  nailed  on. 

At  Saumur,  the  registers  belong  to  the  school, 
and  not  to  the  farriers ;  the  horses,  too,  are 
generally  taken  to  the  shop  to  be  shod. 

Another  register  is  kept  here,  in  which  is 
recorded  the  work  done  every  day,  giving  the 
names  of  the  horses,  or  of  their  owners,  the 
number  of  shoes  put  on,  and  on  what  foot,  also 
the  names  of  the  men  doing  the  work,  so  that 
they  may  be  held  responsible  for  any  work  badly 
done. 

I  observed  at  this  school  an  arrangement  for 
curing  contracted  heels ;  it  is  said  that,  by  means 
of  it,  very  bad  cases  are  permanently  cured  in  a 
few  months. 

^^ ,^       The  annexed  sketches  show  the  arrangement. 

''.,    /\  ^    /  The  instrument  represented  by  figs.  1  and  2  is 

applied  to  the  bars  of  the  hoof;  turning  the  screw,  the  piece  B  recedes  from  A,  and  thus  opens 


268  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE, 

the  heel ;  a  shoe,  arranged  with  clips,  as  shown  in  the  sketch,  is  then  put  on,  and  the  clips 
retain  the  bars  in  their  new  position. 

The  hoof  is  opened  a  very  littleateach  shoeing ;  it  is  necesary  to  be  very  careful  in  the  application, 
and  not  to  open  the  heels  too  much  at  once — from  5-^^  to  -j-f  ^^  of  an  inch  at  a  time.  It  is  sometimes 
necessary  to  rasp  down  the  hoof,  and  soak  it  in  oil,  to  render  it  more  jjliable. 

I  was  informed  that  j^erfect  success  attends  this  operation  ;  in  fact,  they  showed  me  the 
impressions  of  hoofs,  badly  contracted  originally,  taken  at  different  times  during  the  process, 
and  then  one  of  the  horses  with  heels  apparently  in  good  condition,  and  without  clips  on  the  shoes. 

It  ought,  however,  to  be  stated  that  a  similar  process  is  referred  to  by  Youatt,  (page  308, 
Skinner's  edition,)  and  that  his  conclusions  are  entirely  against  the  efficiency  of  any  such  process  ; 
I  give  the  thing  for  what  it  may  be  worth. 

Since  I  visited  Saiimur,  unaccompanied  by  the  other  members  of  the  commission,  I  feel  that  it 
would  be  improper  to  close  my  notes  iipon  the  school  without  calling  the  attention  of  the  Secretary 
to  the  extreme  courtesy  and  kindness  I  met  with  on  the  part  of  all  the  officers  of  the  school.  By 
General  de  Kochefort,  the  commandant,  and  Colonel  Schmidt,  the  2d  commandant,  I  was  placed 
under  great  obligations  by  their  personal  attentions,  and  the  patient  kindness  with  which  they, 
especially  the  latter,  accompanied  me  through  the  different  parts  of  the  establishment,  and 
laid  open  all  things  for  my  examination. 

List  of  works,  by  French  authors,  or  translated  into  French,  of  especial  value  to  cavalry 
officers : 

Bugeaud  ;  Instructions  Pratiques,  pour  les  Troopes  en  Campagne. 

Bismank  ;  Tactique  de  la  Cavalerie,  (trad,  par  Schauenberg.) 

Brack  ;  Avant  Postes  de  Cavalerie  Legere. 

Course  d' Equitation  Militaire  de  I'Ecole  de  Saumur. 

Cours  de  Marechalerie  de  I'Ecole  de  Saumur. 

Cours  d'Hippologie — par  St.  Ange. 

Decker  ;  Tactique  des  Trois  Armes,  (trad,  par  de  Braek.) 

Decker  ;  Traite  de  la  Petite  Guerre. 

Frederic  II,  (le  Grand  ;)  Instructions  aux  Troupes  Legeres,  &c. 

Jacquinot  de  Presle  ;  Cours  d'Art  et  d'Histoire  Militaire. 

La  Roche  Aymon  ;  Manuel  de  Cavalerie  Legere  en  Campagne. 

Maurice  de  Saxe  ;  Mes  Reveries,  ou  Memoires  sur  I'Art  de  Guerre. 

Memorial  des  Officiers  d'Infanterie  et  de  Cavalerie. 

MuUer  ;  Theorie  sur  I'Escrime  a  Cheval. 

Ordonnance  sur  le  Service  Interieur  des  Troupes  a  Cheval. 
"  "  "        des  Armees  en  Campagne. 

"  "  "         de  Cavalerie  en  Campagne. 

"  "  "        des  Places — pour  la  Cavalerie. 

Schauenberg  ;  De  I'Emploi  de  la  Cavalerie  a  la  Guerre. 

Des  Principes  quiservent  de  Base  a  I'lnstruction  et.c  de  la  Cavalerie — par  M.  F  d'Aldeguier. 

The  following  are  standard  works  on  the  veterinary  art : 

Dictionnaire  de  Medecine,  de  Chirurgie,  et  d'Hygiene  Veterinaire,   par  M.  Huetel  d'Ar- 
boval,  6  volumes. 

Traite  de  Medecine  Veterinaire  Pratique — par  L.  V.  Delwast,  3  volumes. 

Nouveau  Dictionnaire  Pratique  de  Medecine,  de  Chirurgie,  et  d'Hygiene  Veterinaire,  par  M. 
M.  Bouley   et  Reynal. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M°CLELLAN.  269 

Kecueil  de  Memoires  et  d' Observations  siir  I'Hygiene  et  la  Medecine  Veterinaire  Militaire; 
public  i^ar  ordre  du  Ministre  de  la  Giierre,  6  volumes. 

Dictionnaire  d'Hippiatrique  et  d' Equitation;  par  Cardini,  2  volumes. 

Much  valuable  and  interesting  information  as  to  the  history  of  the  horses  and  haras  in  France 
is  to  be  found  in  a  published  report,  entitled  Conseil  Superieur  des  Haras,  Eapport  sur  les 
Travaux  de  la  Session  de  1850,  fait  par  M.  le  General  de  la  Moriciere. 

GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 
Captain  \st  Cavalry,  member  of  commission  to  Europe. 
Philadelphia,  December  17,  1856. 


REPORT 


ENGLISH  AND  SARDINIAN  CAVALRY. 


THE  ENGLISH  CAVALRY. 

The  English  regular  cavalry  consists  of: 

3  regiments  of  household  troops — cuirassiers  ; 

7  regiments  of  heavy  dragoon  guards ; 

3  regiments  of  heavy  dragoons  of  the  line  ; 

4  regiments  of  light  dragoons  of  the  line  ; 

5  regiments  of  hussars  ; 
4  regiments  of  lancers  ; 

1  regiment  of  Cape  mounted  riflemen. 

The  regiment  of  mounted  riflemen  has  12  troops  ;  the  other  regiments  have  6  or  8  troops  each » 
formed,  respectively,  into  3  or  4  squadrons. 

The  troop  is  the  unit  of  interior  service  ;  the  squadron  is  that  of  tactics. 

The  usual  strength  of  a  troop  of  the  guards  is  :  1  captain,  1  lieutenant,  1  cornet,  5  sergeants, 
1  trumpeter,  1  farrier,  and  42  corporals  and  privates  ;  in  other  regiments,  serving  at  home, 
the  number  of  corporals  and  privates  is  increased  to  58  ;  regiments  serving  in  India,  and  similar 
stations,  have  one  additional  lieutenant  and  70  corporals  and  privates. 

The  regimental  staff  consists  of:  1  colonel,  1  lieutenant  colonel,  1  major,  1  paymaster,  1 
adjutant,  1  quartermaster,  1  surgeon,  1  assistant  surgeon,  1  veterinary  surgeon,  1  sergeant  major, 
1  chief  trumpeter,  1  armorer,  1  chief  saddler,  1  schoolmaster  sergeant,  1  hospital  sergeant,  1 
regimental  clerk,  1  paymaster's  clerk. 

Some  regiments  have  2  lieutenant  colonels  and  2  majors. 

TACTICS   AND   INSTRUCTION. 

The  squadron  is  composed  of  two  troops,  and  is  divided  into  4  divisions.  It  is  formed  in  two 
ranks,  half  a  horse's  length  (4')  apart  ;  the  files  have  intervals  of  6",  from  knee  to  knee. 

The  squadron  intervals  are  equal  to  the  front  of  a  division  ;  those  between  regiments  are  the 
same,  allowing,  in  the  order  of  parade,  the  additional  space  necessary  for  the  band  and  staff. 

In  the  squadron,  the  officers,  &c.,  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  commander  of  the  squadron,  (who  is  the  senior  captain  of  troop,  and  is  called  "  squadron 
leader,")  one-half  a  horse's  length  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron  ;  the  commandants  of 
the  troops,  (called  "  troop  leaders,")  at  the  same  distance  in  front  of  the  centres  of  the  troops  ; 


REPOET  OF  CAPT.  GKOKGK  B.  M'CLELLAN.  271 

the  4th  officer  is  posted,  as  a  file-closer,  (he  is  called  "squadron  serrefile,")  one-half  a  horse's 
length  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron;  the  5th  and  6th  officers,  (called  "troop  serrefiles,") 
at  the  same  distance  behind  the  centres  of  the  troops  ;  one  sergeant,  the  standard  bearer,  is  in 
the  front  rank  between  the  troops  ;  8  sergeants  are  on  the  flanks  of  the  divisions,  in  the  front 
rank,  all  covered  by  corporals  or  old  soldiers  ;  the  10th  sergeant,  as  squadron  marker,  is  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers,  one  horse's  length  on  the  right  of  the  squadron  serrefile;  the  trumpeters  are 
in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  behind  the  second  files  from  the  flanks  of  the  squadron ;  super- 
numerary officers  and  sergeants  and  the  farriers  are  distributed  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

The  formations  are  by  single  file,  by  files,  by  sections  of  threes,  and  by  threes,  as  in  the 
Russian  system. 

The  front  of  column  is  increased  or  diminished  as  in  our  own  tactics. 

The  English  tactics  being  easily  obtained,  and  copies  of  it  being  in  the  possession  of  the  War 
Department,  it  is  deemed  unnecessary  to  give  extracts  from  it. 

Much  of  the  preliminary  instruction  is  worthy  of  consideration  ;  it  is  very  concise  ;  the  com- 
mands are  generally  short,  and  it  should  by  no  means  be  passed  over  by  officers  engaged  in  the 
revision  of  our  own  tactics. 

HOESE  EQUIPMENTS,  ETC.  ' 

The  saddle  has  a  lower  cantle  and  pommel  than  our  Grimsley  saddle ;  it  is  covered  with  leather. 

The  snaffle  bit  is  attached  to  the  halter  headstall  by  a  chain  and  T  ;  the  curb  has  a  separate 
headstall,  which,  on  the  march,  is  sometimes  taken  off  and  hung  on  the  carbine  stock  ;  the  halter 
shank  is  a  chain,  and  is  worn  in  the  field. 

No  schabraque  is  worn  ;  the  pouches,  valise,  &c.,  present  nothing  peculiar. 

There  is  a  difference  between  the  saddles  for  the  heavy  and  light  cavalry. 

The  cavalry  are  armed  with  the  sabre,  carbine,  and  pistol,  with  the  exception  of  the  lancers, 
who  have  two  pistols  and  a  lance  in  lieu  of  the  carbine. 

The  sabre  is  long,  and  has  a  steel  guard  ;  it  is  formed  rather  for  cutting  than  for  thrusting. 

Large  numbers  of  the  Drane  &  Adams'  revolvers  were  being  made  at  Liege  for  the  English 
cavalry  ;  none  had  been  issued  in  the  Crimea. 

The  Cape  mounted  riflemen  have  a  sabre,  pistol,  and  a  carbine  with  a  double  barrel. 

The  carbine  is  carried  in  a  boot,  and  has  also  a  sling. 

The  cartridge-box  is  suspended  from  a  shoulder  belt. 

The  heavy  cavalry  wear  helmets ;  the  light  dragoons,  shakos  ;  the  hussars,  fur  cylindrical 
hats,  or  shakos  ;  the  lancers,  the  czapka. 

The  cuirassiers  have  both  breast  and  back  plate. 

The  frock-coat  was  in  the  course  of  adoption,  but  had  been  issued  in  the  Crimea  only  to  a 
few  regiments. 

In  the  Crimea,  the  cavalry  had  their  full  dress. 

The  horses  of  the  English  cavalry  are  large  and  excellent ;  for  the  heavy  cavalry  they  leave 
nothing  to  be  desired  ;  it  may  be  a  question  whether  they  have  light  cavalry,  in  the  true 
sense  of  the  term,  except,  perhaps,  some  of  the  regiments  who  have  been  serving  in  India,  and 
are  mounted  on  Indian  horses  ;  for  the  men  and  horses  of  the  light  cavalry  are  scarcely  to  be 
distinguished  from  those  of  the  heavy,  and  it  may  be  doubted  whether  they  would  stand  the 
severe  work,  exposure,  and  short  rations,  which  usually  fall  to  the  lot  of  light  cavalry  in 
campaign,  as  well  as  the  less  imposing  but  lighter  and  more  active  material  of  the  light  cavalry 
of  other  nations. 


272 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 


The  horses  are  usually  purchased  for  each  regiment. 

The  animals  in  the  Crimea,  in  the  fall  of  1855,  were  mostly,  I  believe,  remount  horses,  sent 
out  during  the  spring  and  summer  ;  they  were  generally  excellent  animals,  of  great  power  and 
weight,  but,  although  in  fair  effective  condition,  they  were  hardly  in  the  state  that  might  have 
been  expected,  considering  the  small  amount  of  work  they  were  required  to  j^erform.  They 
were  encamped  upon  broken  ground,  where  but  little  regularity  could  be  perceived  in  their 
arrangement. 

The  men  were  under  canvas,  the  horses  generally  blanketed  at  the  picket  ropes  ;  in  some 
few  cases,  exceptions  to  the  rule,  rough  stables  had  been  constructed. 

The  picket  ropes  were  about  2'  from  the  ground,  and  fastened  to  stakes  some  20'  apart ;  the 
horses  secured  to  them  by  the  halter  chain  or  rope. 

The  camp  equipage,  cooking  utensils,  &c.,  do  not  differ  materially  from  those  of  the  infantry, 
which  will  be  described  in  their  appropriate  place. 

TRANSPORTATION  BY  SEA. 


The  Himalaya  was  regarded  as  the  most  perfect  horse  transport ;  the  following  description  is 
based  upon  notes  taken  during  a  visit  to  that  vessel  in  the  harbor  of  Balaklava : 

She  is  an  iron  screw  ship  of  3,000  tons  and  700  horse  power,  and  can  carry  380  horses,  as 
follows:  on  the  spar  deck  200,  main  deck  130,  orlop  deck  50;  the  corresponding  number  of 
troops  can  be  carried  at  the  same  time. 

The  Himalaya  was  purchased  by  the  government,  and  commanded  by  Captain  Priest,  K.  N ; 
to  the  courtesy  of  that  very  intelligent  officer  we  are  indebted  for  the  details  contained  herein. 

Fig.  a.  Fig.  2  Fig.  1. 


SO" 


> 


^ 


27~t\,tn"_ 


Slv'p's  side 


—7  -K 


\ 


n 


4' 


S'W 


Fig.  1  is  a  section  through  the  side  boards  of  a  stall. 
Fig.  2,  a  longitudinal  section  along  the  axis. 
Fig.  3  is  the  plan  of  stall. 

A,  are  the  halter  rings. 

B,  the  hook  to  which  the  sea  halter  is  hung  when  not  ia  use. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 


273 


C  and  E,  projected  buttons  for  securing  tlie  sling  ropes  shown  in  fig.  5. 
D,  sling  bolt,  for  sling  as  shown  in  fig.  4. 
F,  hook  to  which  the  land  halter  is  hung. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  4  represents  the  canvas  sling  used  on  the  Himalaya.  Fig.  5  represents  the  sling  a 
recommended  by  Capt.  Priest,  and  which  he  intended  to  adopt. 

The  tail  board,  as  shown  in  the  sketch,  is  permanently  attached  to  the  rear  posts,  and  extends 
to  the  floor  ;  it  is  padded  nearly  to  the  bottom  ;  it  was  intended  to  replace  this  by  a  board  of  the 
same  width  as  the  side  boards,  and  rounded  off  at  top  by  a  ^par,  4^"  in  diameter. 

The  breast  and  side  boards  all  ship  in  grooves. 

The  side  boards  are  padded  on  both  sides ;  the  breast  board  on  top  and  towards  the  horse. 

The  material  used  is  felt,  or  raw  hide  (the  latter  objectionable  on  account  of  the  odor)  stuffed 
with  cow's  hair  wherever  the  animal  can  gnaw  it,  with  straw  in  other  parts  ;  the  pads  were 
from  2"  to  3"  thick. 

The  feed  trough  is  of  wood,  the  edges  bound  with  sheet  iron  or  zinc,  and  attached  to  the  head 
board  by  two  hooks. 

The  feed  troughs,  head  boards,  and  stalls,  are  whitewashed  and  numbered. 

The  floor  of  the  stalls  is  raised  above  the  deck  on  buttons,  and  is  divided  into  separate  plat- 
forms for  every  two  stalls,  so  that  it  can  easily  be  raised  to  clean  the  deck  beneath ;  4  strong 
buttons  are  nailed  across  to  give  the  animals  a  foot  hold. 

In  front  of  each  head  post  there  is  a  halter  ring. 

The  sea  halter  is  made  of  double  canvas,  2"  wide,  and  has  two  ropes,  so  that  by  fastening 
one  to  each  post  the  animal's  head  may  be  kept  still,  and  he  cannot  interfere  with  his  neighbor. 

The  slings  are  of  canvas,  of  the  shape  and  dimensions  given  in  the  figures.  On  the  main 
and  orlop  decks,  the  sling  ropes  are  attached  to  sling  bolts  ;  on  the  spar  deck,  to  a  button. 

It  was  intended  to  adopt  the  arrangement  shown  in  figure  5,  as  diminishing  vibration. 

At  sea,  the  sling  is  used  only  in  cases  of  necessity — that  is,  when  the  animal  shows  signs  of 
weakness  in  bad  weather ;  in  this  case,  about  1"  play  is  given  to  the  sling,  as  it  is  only 
intended  to  prevent  the  animal  from  falling. 

The  same  sling,  with  the  addition  of  a  breast  strap  and  breeching,  is  used  for  hoisting  the 
animals  in  and  out. 

Whenever  it  is  possible,  a  staging  is  erected  alongside,  that  the  horses  may  be  walked  on 
and  off  the  ship. 

On  the  spar  deck,  the  stalls  are  under  sheds,  every  8  stalls  forming  a  separate  set,  so  that 
they  can  readily  be  moved  about  when  the  decks  are  to  be  cleaned.  Water-proof  curtains  are 
provided  for  the  front  and  rear  ;  a  passage  way  of  2',  as  a  minimum,  is  left  between  the  sheds 
and  the  bulwarks. 

The  other  arrangements  are  as  on  the  other  decks. 

To  place  the  animals  in  the  stalls,  all  the  side  boards  are  taken  out,  except  that  at  the  end  of 
the  row  ;  a  horse  is  then  walked  along  the  row  to  the  last  stall,  and  the  other  side  board  put 
up  ;  then,  a  second  horse  is  put  in  the  next  stall,  in  the  same  manner,  &c.  The  horses  should 
always  be  placed  in  the  stalls  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  accustomed  to  stand  in  the  stable, 
or  at  the  picket  rope. 

35    © 


274  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

If  it  is  desired,  during  the  voyage,  to  remove  any  horse  from  his  stall,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
remove  the  breast  board  and  walk  him  out. 

All  wooden  parts  are  washed  with  some  disinfecting  compoimd,  or  simply  white  washed. 
Chloride  of  zinc  is  freely  used. 

The  decks  are  washed  every  day,  and  the  stalls  cleaned  after  every  feed,  especially  at  7  p.  m. 

From  the  spar  and  main  decks,  the  stale  passes  off  through  the  scuppers ;  from  the  orlop 
deck  it  passes  to  the  hold,  and  is  pumped  off  by  the  engine. 

Not  the  slightest  disagreeable  odor  could  be  detected  on  the  Himalaya. 

The  feed  troughs  and  the  nostrils  of  the  horses  are  washed  every  morning  and  evening  with 
vinegar. 

For  every  8  stalls  a  scraper,  brush,  and  shovel,  are  allowed. 

The  horse  guard  always  remain  at  their  posts,  and  send  for  the  farrier  or  non-commissioned 
officers  in  case  of  necessity. 

Great  attention  is  paid  to  ventilation.  Although  the  orlop  deck  is  so  hot  that  the  animals 
perspire  a  great  deal,  the  animals  carried  there  came  off  the  voyage  in  better  condition  than  the 
others. 

The  cavalry  soldiers  attend  to  the  horses.  So  long  as  cleanliness  is  preserved,  the  com- 
mander of  the  ship  does  not  interfere  as  to  the  hours  of  feeding,  &c. 

A  supply  of  forage  is  always  carried  on  board  the  ship.  The  veterinaries  take  their  own 
medicines  with  them. 

As  a  proof  of  the  perfection  of  the  system  pursued  on  the  Himalaya,  it  should  be  mentioned 
that  Captain  Priest  had  transported  3,000  animals  while  in  command  of  her ;  some  of  these 
direct  from  England  to  Balaklava.     Out  of  this  number  but  three  (3)  died. 

The  usual  hours  for  feeding  are  :^6  a.  m.,  11  a.  m.,  5|  p.  m.;  if  any  horse  refuses  his  food,  the 
fact  is  reported  at  once.     The  horses  drink  condensed  steam. 

The  regulation  ration  at  sea  is  :  10  pounds  of  hay,  6  pounds  of  oats,  |  peck  of  bran,  and  6 
gallons  of  water — as  a  maximum. 

It  was  thought  that  this  was  generally  too  great,  and  that  two-thirds  of  this  allowance,  except 
the  water,  would  be  amjjle,  as  it  is  found  that  there  is  great  danger  from  over  feeding  at  sea. 

No  grain  is  given  the  day  they  come  on  board,  only  a  mash  of  bran,  which  latter  is  regarded  as 
the  best  habitual  food  at  sea. 

In  concluding  this  subject  of  the  transportation  of  horses  at  sea,  I  would  call  attention  to  the 
little  work  of  Lieut.  Col.  Shirley  on  the  subject ;  it  contains  many  excellent  hints  ;  but  it  must  be 
remembered  that  the  system  just  explained  is  founded  on  a  larger  experience  than  that  of  Col. 
Shirley. 

In  regard  to  the  transportation  of  men,  bunks  and  hammocks  are  generally  used.  Standing 
bunks  are  found  to  be  very  objec-iionable,  on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  keeping  them  clean  ; 
hammocks  are  regarded  as  preferabel  for  men  in  good  health,  while  many  officers  consider  it  best 
to  provide  neither  hammocks  nor  bunks,  but  to  allow  the  men  to  lie  down  on  the  fore  decks  with 
their  blankets  and  overcoats. 

The  following  works  may  be  consulted  with  advantage,  as  containing  useful  ideas  : 

Cavalry  Outpost  Duty,  by  Lieut.  Col.  Von  Arentschildt. 

The  Cavalry  Sword  Exercise. 

On  the  Training  of  Cavalry  Remount  Horses,  by  Capt.  Nolan. 

Cavalry,  its  History  and  Tactics,  by  Capt.  Nolan. 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

December  24,  1856.  Captain  1st  Cavalry. 


k 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  275 

THE  SAEDINIAN  CAVALKY. 

This  consists  of: 

4  regiments  of  cavalry  of  tlie  line,  (heavy  cavalry.) 

5  regiments  of  light  cavalry. 

Each  regiment  consists  of  4  active  and  1  depot  squadrons,  and  has  a  strength  of  about  35 
otficers  and  600  men. 

The  staff  of  a  regiment  consists  of:  1  colonel  or  lieutenant  colonel,  1  major,  2  adjutants,  1 
paymaster,  1  captain  and  1  lieutenant  of  clothing  and  supplies,  1  chaplain,  2  surgeons,  2  vete- 
rinaries,  18  non-commissioned  officers,  &c. 

Each  active  squadron  is  composed  of : 

1  captain,  2  1st  lieutenants,  2  suh-lieutenants,  1  orderly  sergeant,  4  sergeants,  11  corporals, 
8  lance  corporals,  (or  1st  class  privates,)  2  trumpeters,  2  buglers,  1  farrier,  1  saddler,  110 
privates. 

Each  depot  squadron  consists  of: 

1  cajjtain,  1  first  lieutenant,  1  sub-lieutenant,  1  orderly  sergeant,  2  sergeants,  5  corporals, 
and  10  privates. 

There  are,  in  addition  to  regiments  mentioned  above,  6  squadrons  of  local  cavalry  in  the  island 
of  Sardinia ;  the  composition  of  these  is  nearly  the  same  as  that  given  above. 

The  four  regiments  of  heavy  cavalry  are  armed  with  the  sabre,  lance,  and  pistols  ;  they  wear 
helmets. 

Of  the  five  light  regiments,  two  are  lancers,  armed  with  the  sabre,  lance,  and  "pistolon;"  the 
other  three  are  armed  with  sabre,  pistol,  and  rifle. 

The  sabre  is  3'  long,  broad,  and  nearly  straight ;  it  has  a  steel  scabbard  and  guard,  the  latter 
solid  towards  the  blade  ;  the  gripe  is  unusually  long. 

The  pistol  is  an  ordinary  percussion  horse  pistol,  carried  in  the  left  holster,  and  secured  to  the 
saddle  by  a  leather  strap  attached  to  the  guard. 

The  rifle  has  a  barrel  30"  long,  and  is  carried  slung  over  the  left  shoulder. 

The  "pistolon  "  is  a  rifled  carbine  with  a  12"  barrel ;  it  carries  a  spherical  ball,  and  gives  a 
satisfactory  range. 

It  may  be  used  either  as  a  pistol  or  carbine,  although  the  stock  does  not  detach  ;  it  is  habitu- 
ally carried  in  the  right  holster,  but  there  is  also  a  common  carbine  sling  for  it  ;  there  is  also  a 
hook  on  one  side  of  the  stock,  so  that  the  men  can  hook  it  to  the  waist  belt  when  they  dismount. 

The  lance  is  about  9^'  long,  with  a  bayonet  point,  and  a  button  at  the  end  of  the  shaft ;  a  strap 
of  steel,  5'  long,  is  screwed  to  the  shaft ;  pennon  dark  blue. 

The  sabre  belt  is  much  like  our  own. 

The  cartridge-box  contains  30  rounds,  and  is  suspended  by  a  shoulder  belt ;  the  pistol  rammer 
is  attached  to  this  belt. 

The  saddle  is  a  bare  wooden  tree,  very  similar  to  the  Hungarian  ;  a  small  pad  and  a  scha- 
braque  are  laid  on  top.  A  common  blanket,  folded  in  12  thicknesses,  is  placed  under  the  saddle. 
Girth  and  surcingle  of  leather  ;  stirrups  of  steel,  and  light. 

The  snaffle  is  attached  to  the  halter  head  stall  by  a  chain  and  T  ;  the  curb  is  also  of  steel,  and 
has  a  separate  head  stall,  to  which  it  is  buckled. 

The  valise  is  of  cloth,  and  24"  long  ;  a  shelter  tent,  like  that  of  the  French,  is  carried  under 
the  valise  flap. 

Spurs  of  steel,  and  fastened  permanently  to  the  boots. 


216  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

All  the  cavalry  wear  a  dark  blue  frock  coat,  with  short  skirts ;  pants  and  overcoat  very 
nearly  of  the  same  color  as  our  own.  The  cap  resembles  our  dragoon  shako  very  closely  ;  it 
has  a  yellow  water-proof  cover,  the  hind  flap  of  which  ties  over  the  shako,  and  a  red  spherical 
pompon  ;  there  is  also  a  cover  for  the  pompon. 

The  seat  of  the  pants  is  re-enforced  with  cloth,  the  bottom  of  the  legs  with  leather ;  the 
straps  button  on  one  side,  and  buckle  on  the  other  ;  the  pants  have  a  black  stripe. 

In  the  Crimea  there  were  4  squadrons  of  light  cavalry,  two  of  which  were  lancers ;  the 
squadrons  were  about  130  strong.  The  ration  of  forage  was  11  pounds  of  hay,  and  8  quarts 
of  barley. 

The  horses  were  partly  attached  to  the  picket  rope  by  the  right  fore  foot ;  some  of  them  by  a 
rope  or  strap  attached  to  a  collar. 

Their  horses  seemed  to  be  excellent  animals,  but  rather  low  in  flesh ;  they  were  mostly 
Italian  animals. 

The  appearance  of  the  Sardinian  cavalry,  as  indeed  was  that  of  their  whole  army  in  the 
Crimea,  was  excellent ;  indeed,  the  general  appearance  of  their  army  was  superior  to  that  of 
either  of  their  allies. 

It  will  be  observed  that  there  are  no  cuirassiers  in  the  Sardinian  army ;  and  that  their  heavy 
cavalry  differs  from  the  light  only  in  the  size  of  the  men  and  horses. 

GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  1st  Cavalry. 

December  25,.  1856. 


KEPORT 


UNITED  STATES  CAVALRY. 


Philadelphia,  December  19,  1856. 

Sir  :  I  have  the  honor  to  submit  the  following  remarks  upon  our  cavalry  : 

The  nature  of  its  service  being  quite  different  from  that  performed  by  any  in  Euroj^e,  we 
ought  not  to  follow  blindly  any  one  system,  but  should  endeavor  to  select  the  good  features, 
and  engraft  them  ujjon  a  system  of  our  own. 

The  proper  organization  of  our  cavalry  must  depend  upon  the  consideration  of  three  things  : 
1st,  the  nature  of  its  service  against  the  Indians  ;  2d,  its  employment  against  a  civilized  enemy 
invading  our  territory  ;  3d,  its  service  in  an  offensive  war,  carried  on  against  our  neighbors. 

The  Indians,  against  whom  our  cavalry  are  brought  to  bear,  are  generally  irregular  light 
horsemen,  sometimes  living  and  acting  altogether  on  the  plains,  in  other  localities  falling  back 
into  the  broken  country  when  pursued ;  the  difficulty,  always,  is  to  catch  them  ;  to  do  so,  we 
must  be  as  light  and  quick  as  they  are,  fWid  then,  superiority  of  weapons  and  discipline  must 
uniformly  give  us  the  advantage. 

Any  army  invading  our  territory  must  necessarily  be  deficient  in  cavalry  ;  in  addition,  the 
nature  of  the  parts  of  our  frontiers  most  liable  to  attack  is  not  suited  to  the  action  of  large 
bodies  of  cavalry,  while  in  partial  operations,  light  cavalry,  well  handled,  ought  always  to  be 
superior  to  heavy  cavalry. 

Canada,  Central  Mexico,  and  the  West  Indies,  are  also  unsuited  to  the  operations  of  masses 
of  cavalry,  and  in  none  of  them  are  we  likely  to  encounter  heavy  cavalry,  or  large  numbers  of 
light  cavalry  ;  infantry  and  artillery  must  generally  do  most  of  the  work,  while  light  cavalry 
will  afford  invaluable  assistance,  and  in  northern  Mexico  play  an  important  part. 

It  would,  therefore,  seem  that  heavy  cavalry  would  be  worse  than  useless  for  our  purj)oses, 
and  that  we  need  only  light  cavalry,  in  the  true  and  most  strict  sense  of  the  term. 

A  light  and  simple  model  of  horse  equipments  will  soon  be  submitted. 

I  would  propose  that  the  regiments  serving  in  localities  where  they  are  liable  to  be  called 
upon  to  dismount,  to  follow  the  Indians  on  foot,  be  armed  with  the  sabre,  (of  the  lio-ht  pattern 
recently  submitted,)  the  revolver,  and  the  pistol-carbine,  or  else  a  rifled  weapon,  longer  and 
more  effective  than  the  present  carbine  ;  that  those  serving  on  the  plains  be  armed  onlv  with 
the  sabre  and  revolver,  giving  to  about  10  men  in  each  platoon  the  pistol-carbine,  or  a  long 
rifled  carbine  in  addition. 

The  accoutrements  should  be  so  arranged  that  when  the  men  dismount  to  fight  on  foot,  they 
can  hang  the  sabre  to  the  saddle  ;  the  pistol  should  always  be  carried  on  the  person  ;  the 
carbine  slung  over  the  shoulder. 


278  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

The  horses  should  he  purchased  hy  cavalry  officers,  and  he  selected  for  activity,  hardiness, 
and  endurance. 

The  men  ought  to  be  light,  active,  and  intelligent. 

The  tactical  unit  should  he  small,  that  it  may  he  handled  with  the  greatest  possible  ease 
and  celerity,  and  that  it  may  never  he  broken.  The  regiments,  also,  should  be  small,  for  the 
same  reasons. 

The  FOKMAXION  OUGHT  TO  BE  IN  ONE  RANK,  as  Covering  the  greatest  extent  of  ground,  admit- 
ting the  most  rapid  movements,  and  bringing  every  man  to  bear  to  the  greatest  advantage ; 
suitable  reserves  should  always  be  held  in  hand. 

I  would  propose,  as  the  unit,  for  interior  service,  and  tactical  purposes,  the  company,  com- 
posed as  follows : 

1    captain. 

3  lieutenants. 

1  orderly  sergeant. 

1  quartermaster  sergeant. 

1  veterinary  sergeant.  * 

4  duty  sergeants. 
8  corporals. 

66  privates. 

2  trumpeters. 
1  farrier. 

1  saddler. 

Total,  4  officers,  85  non-commissioned  officers  and  rnen. 

Of  this  number,  6  privates  and  the  saddler  to  be  dismounted,  leaving  the  effective  force  of 
combatants,  4  officers,  78  men,  and  78  government  horses. 

It  would  be  advantageous  to  create  the  grade  of  first  class  privates,  say  20  in  each  company, 
as  a  means  of  rewarding  good  and  faithful  old  soldiers,  who  are  not  fitted  to  become  non-com- 
missioned officers  ;  they  should  receive  somewhat  more  pay  than  the  second  class  privates. 
The  company  to  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  four  sections,  and  sets  of  fours.  The  lieutenants 
and  non-commissioned  officers  to  be  attached  to  the  same  platoon  and  section,  for  the  purposes 
of  drill  and  interior  service. 

The  posts  of  the  officers,  &c.,  to  be  as  follows  : 
*^  The  captain  in  the  rank,  between  the  platoons ;  when  necessary,  he  can  move  to  the  front,  his 
place  being  left  vacant ;  the  1st  lieutenant,  commanding  the  1st  platoon,  on  the  right  of  the 
company;  the  2d  lieutenant,  commanding  the  2d  platoon,  on  the  left  of  the  company;  the  3d 
lieutenant,  as  file  closer,  4  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  ;  this  officer  not  to  be  replaced  if  absent ; 
the  orderly^  sergeant,  as  file  closer,  two  paces  behind  the  right  file ;  the  quartermaster  sergeant, 
two  paces  in  rear  of  the  left  file  ;  the  veterinary  sergeant,  half  way  between  the  orderly  sergeant 
and  the  1st  corporal ;  the  1st  duty  sergeant,  on  the  right  of  the  1st  platoon  ;  the  2d,  on  the 
left  of  the  2d  platoon  ;  the  3d,  on  the  left  of  the  1st  platoon  ;  the  4th,  on  the  right  of  the  2d 
platoon  ;  the  1st  corporal,  as  file  closer,  2  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  1st  section  ;  the  2d, 
behind  the  4th  section  ;  the  3d,  behind  the  2d  section  ;  the  4th,  behind  the  3d  section ;  the  5th, 
to  be  the  left  file  of  the  1st  section  ;  the  6th,  to  be  the  right  file  of  the  4th  section  ;  the  7th,  to 
be  the  right  file  of  the  2d  section ;  the  8th,  to  be  the  left  file  of  the  3d  section  ;  the  buglers, 
2  paces  behind  the  2d  files  from  the  inner  flanks  of  the  platoons  ;  the  farrier,  half  way  between 


i 


EEPOET  OF  CAPT  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  279 

the  quartermaster  sergeant  and  the  2(1  corporal ;  the  saddler  and  the  dismounted  men  to  remain 
with  the  train. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  strength  of  the  company  is  the  same  as  now  authorized  ;  it 
requires  another  lieutenant,  in  place  of  the  brevet  2d  lieutenant,  and  the  addition  of  2  sergeants, 
1  veterinary,  4  corporals,  and  1  saddler,  while  the  number  of  privates  is  diminished  by  8. 

Kegiments  composed  of  6  companies  would  be  preferable  to  the  present  organization  ;  by  the 
addition  of  2  companies  to  the  40  now  in  service,  7  effective  regiments  would  be  formed. 

If  this  cannot  be  done,  it  would  be  well  to  decrease  the  number  of  companies  in  a  regiinent 
to  8,  and  form  a  5th  regiment  of  the  8  superfluous  companies. 

If  neither  of  these  plans  can  be  adopted,  it  is  believed  that  the  modification  proposed  in  the 
organization  of  the  company  will  of  itself  produce  very  beneficial  results. 

To  the  staff  of  each  regiment  there  should  be  added  a  chief  veterinary,  with  the  rank  of 
sergeant  major,  or  even  as  a  commissioned  ofiicer,  and  a  chief  saddler ;  to  the  standard  company 
there  should  be  allowed  an  additional  sergeant  as  standard  bearer,  and  a  corporal  as  assistant, 
or  these  two  non-commissioned  ofiicers  might  be  attached  to  the  staff. 

If  a  band  is  considered  necessary,  the  men  ought  to  be  considered  as  belonging  to  the  staff, 
in  addition  to  the  usual  strength  of  the  regiment,  and  not  to  be  subtracted  from  the  strength  of 
the  companies  ;  it  should  be  supported  by  the  government,  and  not  by  the  officers  and  regi- 
mental fund. 

It  would  be  advisable  that  the  hospital  attendants  be  placed  on  the  same  footing  ;  and  that  a 
proper  number  of  teamsters  be  authorized  for  the  staff  and  each  company,  to  be  enlisted  or  hired 
as  such,  and  not  detailed  from  the  companies ;  those  for  the  companies  should  be  under  the 
sole  control  of  the  captains. 

The  junior  field  officers  should  have  a  direct,  specific,  and  well  defined  authority  over  a 
certain  number  of  companies,  the  colonel  taking  the  general  direction  ;  in  a  new  organization 
it  would  be  well  to  have  1  field  officer  for  every  2  companies. 

It  ought  to  be  laid  down  that  detachments  shall  always  be  composed  of  men  of  the  same  com- 
pany, and  never  of  details  from  different  companies ;  in  the  same  company,  platoons,  or  sections 
with  their  own  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  detached 
as  units. 

If  legislation  is  called  for,  and  obtained  in  effecting  a  re-organization  of  our  cavalry,  I  think 
that  it  would  be  advisable  to  call  the  unit  a  squadron  instead  of  company,  in  order  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  the  infantry  unit  in  reports,  returns,  &c.,  without  the  necessity  of  circumlocu- 
tion. It  is  also  of  importance  to  obtain  authority  to  enlist  supernumerary  recruits,  who  might 
be  kept  at  the  cavalry  school,  or  the  European  system  of  depot  squadrons  miglit  be  adopted ; 
in  time  of  war  this  system  will  be  found  to  be  absolutely  necessary  to  maintain  the  cavalry 
regiments  in  a  state  of  efficiency,  and  the  requisite  laws  should  be  obtained  in  time  of  peace 
that  there  may  be  no  delay  in  taking  the  i^roper  measures  at  the  right  time. 

A  proper  organization  would  authorize  a  moderate  number  of  supernumerary  officers  of  all 
grades,  for  detail  upon  detached  duty,  so  that  the  full  number  required  by  the  tactics  might 
always  be  present  with  the  regiments  and  companies. 

The  efficiency  of  the  arm  would  be  increased  were  there  a  general  of  cavalry,  whose  dutv  it 
would  be  to  inspect  the  troops  of  the  arm,  watch  over  their  interests,  and  secure  uniformity  in 
the  service.  This  officer  ought  to  have  a  number  of  aides  de  camp,  all  cavalry  officers,  who 
could  make,  under  his  orders,  more  frequent  inspections  than  any  one  man  could  accomi^lish. 
The  most  proper  station  for  this  officer  would  probably  be  Jefferson  barracks,  if  that  were 


280  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

selected  as  the  cavalry  school ;    he   should  never  be  located  in  Washington^  and  should  he 
req[uired  tomake  a  minimum  number  of  inspections. 

TACTICS. 

The  individual  instruction  of  man  and  horse  should  be  regarded  as  the  most  important  point 
of  the  whole  system,  and  should  be  as  simple  as  possible  ;  the  man  should  be  taught  to  manage 
his  horse  with  ease  and  address  over  all  kinds  of  ground  and  at  all  gaits,  to  swim  rivers,  to  go 
through  certain  gymnastic  exercises — such  as  vaulting,  to  fence,  to  fire  very  frequently  at  a  mark, 
and  to  handle  his  weapon  with  accuracy  and  effect  at  all  gaits,  and  in  all  situations. 

Some  of  the  preliminary  instruction  prescribed  in  the  Kussian  and  Austrian  tactics  nlight  be 
introduced  advantageously. 

Everything  in  reference  to  heavy  cavalry,  lancers,  hussars,  &c.,  should  be  omitted. 

I  would  adopt  the  Russian  sabre  exercise  as  the  basis  of  our  own  ;  insist  upon  the  sabre  being 
kept  sharp  in  the  field,  provide  the  men  with  means  of  doing  so,  and  lay  it  down  as  a  rule  that 
the  strength  of  cavalry  is  in  the  "spurs  and  sabre." 

The  instruction  on  foot  should  be  carried  no  further  than  its  true  object  requires — that  is,  to 
bring  the  men  under  disciiiline,  improve  their  carriage,  and  enable  them  to  comprehend  the 
movements  they  are  to  execute  mounted. 

The  formation  for  review,  parade,  inspection,  &c.,  to  be:  the  companies  deployed  in  one  line, 
with  intervals  of  12  paces,  or  else  in  a  line  of  columns  of  companies  by  platoons,  according  to 
the  ground. 

The  Russian  tactics  will  suggest  excellent  arrangements  for  the  orders  of  battle  of  commands 
composed  of  regiments  having  ten,  or  fewer  companies,  also  for  the  movements  of  brigades, 
divisions,  &c. 

It  should  be  laid  down  as  a  fixed  rule  that  no  cavalry  force  should  ever  charge  without  leaving 
a  reserve  behind  it,  and  that  against  civilized  antagonists  the  compact  charge  in  line  should  be 
used,  in  preference  to  that  as  foragers. 

Columns  to  be  formed  with  wheeling  distance,  and  closed  in  mass  ;  when  closed  in  mass,  the 
file-closers  close  up  to  1  j)ace  from  the  rank,  and  the  distance  between  the  subdivisions  to  be  just 
enough  to  j)ermit  each  company  to  wheel  by  fours. 

Marching  columns  to  be  by  file,  twos,  fours,  or  platoons  ;  by  fours  and  platoons  in  preference 
when  the  ground  permits. 

Columns  of  manoauvre  to  be  by  fours,  platoons,  companies,  or  in  double  column  ;  the  latter 
always  a  regimental  column,  and  to  be  formed  on  the  two  central  companies,  or  platoons, 
without  closing  the  interval  between  them. 

Deployments  to  be  made  habitually  at  a  gallop,  and  the  individual  oblique  to  be  used  as  mueh 
as  possible. 

The  instruction  in  two  lines  to  be  provided  for. 

The  Russian  tactics  give  a  good  basis  for  the  system  of  skirmishers,  and  charging  as  foragers. 
For  the  nse  of  the  mounted  rifles,  and  cavalry  acting  as  such,  there  should  be  a  thorough 
system  for  dismounting  rapidly,  and  fighting  on  foot ;  I  have  understood  that  such  a  system 
has  already  been  submitted  by  Lieutenant  Maury. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  281 

CAVALEY  SCHOOL  AND  DEPOT. 

This  ought  to  be  established  at  some  convenient  point  in  the  west,  as  for  instance  at  Jefiferson 
Barracks,  and  should  be  for  the  following  purposes  : 

1st.  To  afford  the  young  officers  of  mounted  regiments,  before  joining  their  regiments,  thorough 
instruction  in  the  tactics,  regulations  for  interior  service,  the  general  principles  of  field  service, 
all  necessary  knowledge  in  regard  to  the  horse,  the  use  of  weajsons,  &c. 

2d.  To  perfect  the  instruction  of  lieutenants  now  serving  with  the  regiments  in  the  same 
branches. 

3d.  The  instruction  of  non-commissioned  officers  sent  from  the  regiments ;  it  would  be  advisable 
to  detail  picked  corporals,  and  insure,  to  a  certain  number  of  the  best,  promotion  as  sergeants 
immediately  upon  leaving  the  school. 

4th.  To  instruct  the  recruits,  that  they  may  be  well  drilled,  and  thoroughly  instructed  before 
joining  their  regiments. 

5th.  To  break  the  remount  horses,  so  that  each  recruit  may  take  a  well  broken  horse  with 
him  when  he  joins  his  regiment,  and  that  other  remount  horses  may  also  be  broken  before  being 
sent  to  the  regiments. 

6th.  A  veterinary  school  should  be  attached  to  the  establishment,  for  the  instruction  of  officers 
and  veterinaries. 

7th.  A  school  for  farriers. 

8th.  A  school  for  trumpeters. 

The  systems  of  instruction  and  the  organization  of  the  French  veterinary  schools,  and  of  the 
cavalry  school  at  Saumur,  afford,  perhaps,  the  most  accessible  models  for  the  basis  of  our  own. 
The  text-books  there  in  use  can  readily  be  adapted  to  our  own  purposes,  until  experience  enables  us 
to  have  others  of  our  own. 

As  a  first  step,  we  should  have  detailed  special  regulations  for  the  use  of  mounted  troops  in 
garrison  and  the  field. 

To  establish  the  veterinary  school,  I  would  propose  the  following,  as  probably  the  best  and 
easiest  plan : 

Select  an  army  surgeon,  who  has  served  in  the  field  with  cavalry,  is  a  good  judge  of  horses, 
has  turned  his  attention  somewhat  to  the  subject,  and  would  be  willing  to  assume  the  proposed 
duty ;  place  him  at  the  head  of  the  veterinary  school,  and  let  him  prejiare  the  necessary  course  of 
instruction  and  text-books.  In  the  first  instance,  at  least,  his  assistants  should  also  be  of  the 
medical  staff. 

It  is  very  certain  that  no  officer  of  the  line  possesses  the  technical  and  anatomical  knowledge 
necessary  to  initiate  an  establishment  of  this  kind. 

Even  if  the  school  proposed  cannot  be  established,  there  ought  to  be  a  work  prepared  by  some 
of  the  medical  corps  on  the  veterinary  science,  for  the  use  of  cavalry  officers.  A  small  work  on 
farriery  would  also  be  very  serviceable. 

The  pupils  for  the  veterinary  school  might  be  selected  from  among  the  best  recruits — indeed, 
it  is  not  improbable  that  the  advantages  of  such  an  institution  would  induce  excellent  men  to 
enlist,  for  the  purpose  of  availing  themselves  of  its  benefits.  Should  such  be  found  to  be  the 
result,  it  would  then  be  well  to  require  them  to  enlist  for  longer  than  the  usual  time,  as  a  com- 
pensation for  the  time  spent  at  the  school.  The  pupils  at  the  farrier  school  should  be  recruits, 
who  are  blacksmiths  by  trade. 
36  © 


282  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

All  the  advantages  of  extra  duty  pay  ought  to  be  secured  both  to  the  veterinaries  and 
farriers. 

PURCHASE  OF  HORSES. 

It  would  be  advantageous  to  detail  officers  of  cavalry  on  this  duty,  just  as  they  now  are  for 
the  recruiting  service.  In  cases  when  cavalry  officers  are  recruiting  in  districts  where  horses 
abound,  they  could  attend  to  both  duties  at  the  same  time. 

It  might  at  jiresent  be  proper  to  select  the  purchasing  officers  for  their  knowledge  of  horses  ; 
but  it  is  believed  that  the  effect  of  the  education  received  at  the  proposed  cavalry  school  would 
be  such  that,  in  a  few  years,  all  officers  would  be  capable  of  purchasing.  Animals  bought  in 
this  way,  as  occasion  offered,  and  not  in  large  numbers  at  a  time,  would  be  obtained  for  a  more 
moderate  i^rice,  and  more  careful  selections  could  be  made. 

They  should  all  be  sent  to  the  cavalry  school,  when  the  commandant,  and  a  certain  number 
of  the  senior  officers  on  duty  there,  would  constitute  a  proper  commission  to  inspect  the  animals 
and  direct  the  service. 

There  should  be  regulations  determining  approximately  the  height,  age,  conformation,  and 
qualities  that  the  horses  should  possess;  also  a  maximum,  or  rather  an  average  price,  varying 
from  time  to  time,  according  to  the  state  of  the  market. 

UNIFORM. 

I  would  recommend  that  the  epaulette  be  entirely  dispensed  with  for  regimental  officers ;  it 
is  useless,  expensive,  and  inconvenient ;  the  strap  on  the  undress  uniform  is  a  sufficient  distinction 
of  rank. 

For  the  men,  I  would  replace  the  scales  by  a  strap  of  cloth,  of  the  same  shape  as  that  on  the 
old  fatigue  uniform,  but  sewed  fast  to  the  jacket. 

They  should  also  have  a  police  cap,  without  vizor,  and  of  such  a  nature  that  it  can  be  folded 
up,  and  carried  in  the  pouch,  or  wherever  may  be  most  convenient;  the  Scotch  bonnet,  Turkish 
fez,  a  Greek  cap  of  knit  or  woven  wool,  a  flexible  cap  of  the  shaj^e  of  the  old  forage  cap— any 
of  these  would  answer. 

For  service  on  the  jjrairies,  the  men  shoiild  have  a  loose  flannel  coat,  leaving  their  uniform 
coat  in  garrison;  the  ordinary  dark  blue  sailor's  shirt,  cut  open  in  front,  and  provided  with  a 
lining  and  pockets  is  as  good  as  anything  that  can  be  devised. 

The  French  fashion  of  giving  the  men  a  merino  scarf  in  the  field,  instead  of  a  stock,  is  worthy 
of  consideration. 

It  would  be  well,  on  many  accounts,  to  reinforce  the  pants  with  thin  leather. 

The  amount  of  clothing  to  be  carried  by  each  man  should  be  limited ;  I  do  not  see  that  they 
need  more  than  2  pairs  of  drawers,  1  shirt,  2  pairs  of  socks,  a  towel,  soap,  and  hair  comb,  in 
addition  to  what  they  wear ;  during  very  long  expeditions,  extra  clothing  should  be  carried 
in  the  train,  never  on  the  horses. 

The  method  of  cold  shoeing,  as  described  in  the  report  upon  the  French  cavalry,  should  be 
enforced,  and  the  shoes  carried  by  each  man  should  have  been  previously  fitted  to  the  horse. 

In  my  different  special  reports  will  be  found  full  information  as  to  the  cooking  utensils  carried 
in  the  field  by  the  European  cavalry ;  it  is  very  important  that  competent  cavalry  officers  should 
fully  consider  this  subject,  and  adopt  a  set  suitable  to  the  requirements  of  our  own  service ;  the 
proper  principle  would  be  to  have  small  messes  in  the  field,  each  mess  consisting  of  the  smallest 
number  that  are  likely  to  be  detached  as  a  unit,  so  that  they  may  always  have  their  cooking 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M"CLELLAN.  283 

utensils  with  them ;  the  utensils  should  he  such  that  the  men  can  habitually  carry  them  on  their 
own  horses  with  convenience. 

I  would  recommend  that  the  shelter  tent  be  adopted  as  a  part  of  our  system ;  a  specimen, 
slightly  altered  from  the  French,  will  he  submitted  with  the  saddle  shortly  to  be  forwarded. 

The  best  model  for  a  cavalry  stable  should  be  adopted,  determining  minutely  the  interior 
arrangements  and  the  general  plan  as  far  as  possible ;  and  all  stables  built  hereafter  should  be 
required  to  be  in  accordance  with  this  plan ;  the  drawings  and  descriptions  furnished  by  the 
different  members  of  the  commission  will  afford  the  means  of  doing  this  understandingly. 

The  English  system  for  the  transportation  of  horses  by  sea,  as  followed  in  the  Himalaya,  is 
beyond  doubt  the  most  perfect  that  has  been  devised ;  sketches  and  a  full  description  of  this 
will  be  forwarded  in  a  few  days,  and  it  is  recommended  that  it  be  inserted  in  our  regulations, 
and  adopted  as  our  own  system. 

There  are  other  suggestions  as  to  the  regulations  and  the  service  which  I  have  already  made 
in  official  and  unofficial  communications,  and  through  Captain  Sacket;  I  will  here  allude  again 
only  to  the  propriety  of  inscribing  upon  the  colors  of  each  regiment  the  names  of  the  actions  in 
which  it  has  borne  an  honorable  part,  and  of  placing  these  same  names  on  the  army  register, 
at  the  head  of  the  list  of  the  officers  of  the  regiment ;  for  few  things  are  more  important  than 
those  which  tend  to  inspire  and  jareserve  a  feeling  of  pride  in  the  regiment,  on  the  part  of  all 
its  officers  and  men. 

I  am,  sir,  very  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

.      GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  1st  Cavalry. 

Hon.  Jefferson  Davis, 

Secretary  of  War, 


REGULATIONS  AND  INSTRUCTIONS 


FIELD  SERVICE  OF  CAVALRY  IN  TIME  OF  WAR, 


UNITED    STATES    ARMY 


Philadelphia,  December  31,  1856. 

Sir  :  I  have  the  honor  to  submit  for  your  consideration  the  following  regulations  for  the  field 
service  of  cavalry  in  time  of  war. 

I  have  translated  them  from  the  original  Russian,  and  have  endeavored  to  adapt  them  to  our 
own  organization,  preserving  the  original  arrangement,  and  adding  merely  a  few  minor  details 
suggested  by  the  recollections  of  former  reading,  and  of  service  in  the  field.  It  is  more  than 
probable  that  they  will  be  found  to  fill  usefully  an  important  gap  in  our  military  literature, 
and  they  are  undoubtedly  based  upon  true  military  principles. 

I  am,  sir,  very  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  \st  Cavalry. 
Hon.  Jefferson  Davis, 

Secretary  of  War. 


CONTENTS. 


PAKT  I. 

Page. 

Movements  of  troops  in  tl.<s  vicinity  of  the  enemy 287 

Introduction 287 

CHAPTEE  I. 

Arrangements  for  the  march. 287 

Abticlb  1.  General  arrangements,  and  remarks  as  to  marches 287 

2.  Precautions  to  be  observed  on  the  march  against  sudden  attacks 288 

3.  Arrangements  during  a  flank  march - 290 

4.  Arrangement  and  movement  of  the  trains 291 

5.  The  defence  of  trains 292 

6.  Of  short  halts  during  the  march,  halts  for  the  night,  and  halts  for  an  entire  day 293 

CHAPTER  n. 

Duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  various  parts  of  the  troops  during  military  marches 295 

Akticle  1 .  Duties  of  the  commander-in-chief 295 

2.  Duties  of  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard .-  298 

3.  Duties  of  the  commander  of  the  rear  guard 300 

4.  Duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  advanced,  flank,  and  rear  detachments —  800 

CHAPTEE  in. 

Duties  of  patrols  during  the  march 301 

CHAPTER  IV. 

In  reference  to  regulating  marches  according  to  the  locality 304 

PAET  II. 

Precautions  to  be  observed  in  camps  for  security  against  the  enemy 308 

CHAPTER  I 

Duties  of  all  parts  of  the  outposts 308 

Akticle  1.  Of  the  outposts  in  general . 308 

2.  Duties  of  the  videttes  of  the  advanced  chain 309 

3.  Duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  pickets 311 

4.  Duties  of  the  commander  of  the  main  guard 315 

5.  The  reserves  of  the  outposts 317 

6.  Independent  pickets 318 

7.  The  general  duties  of  all  parts  of  the  outposts 318 

8.  Of  the  duties  of  the  outposts  in  covering  any  march  or  change  of  position  of  the  troops  under  their 

guard 321 

CHAPTER  n. 

The  arrangements  of  the  outposts  at  a  distance  from  the  enemy.. 322 


286  MILITAEY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE, 

CHAPTER  III. 

Page. 
Of  visiting  tlie  outposts - 323 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Of  patrols - 324 

CHAPTER  V. 
Of  the  command  of  the  outposts 327 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Of  the  duties  of  hunters,  friendly  Indians,  &c.,  at  the  outposts.. 328 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Of  the  arrangement  of  the  outposts  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground 329 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Precautions  to  be  observed  in  the  camp  of  the  main  body 334 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Precautions  to  be  observed  for  the  security  of  cantonments 336 

Article  1.  Of  advanced  detachments 336 

2.  Precautions  to  be  observed  by  the  main  body  in  cantonments 337 

PAKT  III. 

Of  the  principal  operations  of  special  detachments 338 

CHAPTER  I. 
Of  sudden  attacks  upon  the  enemy 338 

CHAPTER  II. 
Of  reconnaissances - _ 340 

CHAPTER  III. 

Of  convoys - —  342 

Article  1.  The  defence  of  convoys - 342 

2.  The  attack  of  convoys 344 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Of  foraging  and  attacks  upon  foragers - - - 344 

Article  1.  Of  foraging - 344 

2.  Of  attacks  upon  foragers - -  346 


REGULATIONS  FOR  THE  FIELD  SERVICE  OF  CAVALRY  IN  TIME  OF  WAR. 


PART  L 


MOVEMENTS   OF   TROOPS   IN   THE   VICINITY   OF   THE   ENEMY. 

INTRODUCTION. 

§  1.  The  principal  differences  between  marches  near  the  enemy,  and  those  during  peace,  are  : 

1st.  That  in  the  former  case  the  troops  are  not  so  much  divided,  hut  move  in  larger  bodies 
than  in  peace. 

2d.  That  proper  precautions  are  observed  to  guard  against  sudden  attacks. 

Remark. — In  time  of  war,  trooj^s  so  far  from  the  enemy  as  to  be  in  no  danger  of  attack  observe 
only  a  part  of  the  military  precautions  indicated  below,  increasing  them  as  they  approach  the 
enemy. 

CHAPTER  I. 

ARRANGEMENTS  FOR  THE  MARCH. 

ARTICLE   1. 

General  arrangements  and  remarks  as  to  marches. 

§2.  Military  marches  may  in  general  be  :   1.   Offensive;  2.  In  retreat ;  3.  To  the  flank. 

§  3.  In  each  of  these  cases  the  troops  may  move  in  one,  or  several  columns. 

§  4.  They  move  in  several  columns  when  in  strong  force,  and  having  convenient  roads,  neither 
far  apart,  nor  separated  by  impassable  obstacles.  But  if  it  is  necessary  that  a  great  number  of 
troops  follow  the  same  road,  the  column  should  be  divided  into  echelons,  following  each  other 
at  intervals,  in  order  to  avoid  delay  from  crowding. 

§  5.  It  is  impossible  to  determine,  with  exactness,  the  intervals  between  different  columns,  or 
between  the  echelons  of  the  same  column  ;  these  must  depend  upon  the  nature  and  relative 
positions  of  the  roads,  as  well  as  upon  the  strength  and  degree  of  independence  of  each  column. 
But  it  may  be  laid  down  as  a  general  rule  that  these  distances  should  be  such  that  the  com- 
mander can  concentrate  and  form  the  whole,  or  at  least  the  greater  part  of  his  command  before 
being  seriously  attacked. 

§  6.  For  the  details  of  the  distribution  of  the  troops  in  the  several  columns  and  echelons,  the 
rules  laid  down  in  the  tactics  for  the  formation  of  general  columns  must  be  taken  as  guides  ; 
observing  that  each  fraction  of  the  entire  force  must  be  so  arranged  that  it  can  always  form 
promptly  to  meet  the  enemy. 

§  7.  On  the  march  cavalry  may  move  by  twos  or  by  fours,  but  in  preference  by  platoons  when 
the  road  permits. 

Artillery  marches  by  piece  or  by  section. 


288         .  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

In  a  retreat,  those  parts  of  the  rear  guard  nearest  the  enemy  -vrill  always  march  hy  the  rear 
rank. 

§  8.  On  the  march,  the  distances  permitted  are  :  between  companies  about  25  paces  ;  between 
regiments,  about  50  paces  ;  between  brigades,  about  100  paces. 

ARTICLE   2. 

Precautions  against  sudden  attach  to  he  observed  on  the  march. 

§  9.  To  secure  troops,  on  the  march,  against  sudden  attacks,  there  are  sent  out  from  the  main 
body  :  an  advanced  guard ;  a  rear  guard  ;  and  flank  detachments,  or  guards'. 

§  10.  During  offensive  marches,  the  advanced  guard  consists  of  one-fourth,  or  one-fifth  of  the 
whole  force  ;  it  may  be  increased  or  diminished  according  to  circumstances  and  the  judgment  of 
the  commander.  Its  purpose  is,  to  march  at  some  distance  in  advance  of  the  main  body,  in 
order : 

1.  To  observe  the  enemy  betimes,  and  give  early  information  of  his  appearance,  strength,  and 
direction  of  march. 

2.  Having  discovered  the  enemy,  to  follow,  never  losing  sight  of  him,  and  endeavor  to  obtain 
all  possible  information  concerning  him. 

3.  Should  the  enemy  approach  and  attack,  to  delay  him  long  enough  to  enable  the  main  body 
to  form  in  order  of  battle. 

4.  To  examine  the  country  in  advance,  and  remove  all  obstacles  from  the  road, 

5.  During  the  arrangements  of  the  main  body  for  halting  or  encamping,  to  cover  it  on  the 
side  of  the  enemy. 

§  11.  On  the  march,  the  advanced  guard  should  be  so  far  in  front  that,  without  incurring  too 
great  risk,  it  may  delay  the  enemy  long  enough  to  enable  the  main  body  to  prepare  to  receive 
Jiim.  Therefore,  in  proportion  as  the  advanced  guard  is  stronger  and  more  independent,  and  as 
the  time  required  for  the  formation  of  the  main  body  is  greater,  the  further  should  the  advanced 
guard  be  pushed  forward,  up  to  one-half  a  day's  march,  or  further.  In  small  detachments,  not 
requiring  much  time  to  assemble  and  form,  the  advanced  guard  does  not  move  further  than  from 
one  and  a  half  to  three  miles  in  front. 

Bemark. — When,  under  peculiar  circumstances,  the  advanced  guard  is  pushed  forward  a 
considerable  distance,  and  therefore  exposed  to  a  separate  defeat,  or  when  the  nature  of  the 
ground  is  such  as  to  render  its  retreat  difficult,  there  is  sent  out  from  the  main  body  an  "  inter- 
mediate detachment,"  which  holds  itself  in  echelon  between  the  two,  to  support  the  advanced 
guard  if  suddenly  attacked.  This  detachment  is  under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the 
advanced  guard,  who,  upon  meeting  the  enemy,  either  orders  it  up  to  assist  him,  or  falls  back 
upon  it,  according  to  circumstances. 

§  12.  For  the  protection  of  its  own  march,  an  advanced  guard  should  have  an  advanced  guard 
of  its  own,  consisting  of  one  or  more  companies,  or  a  platoon,  according  to  the  strength  of  the 
party  ;  and  on  its  flanks,  flank  guards,  each  of  a  platoon  or  section. 

Bemark. — The  standard  is  always  left  with  the  main  body  of  the  regiment. 

§  13.  The  advanced  and  flank  detachments  keep  themselves  at  from  500  to  1,000  paces  from 
the  head  and  flanks  of  the  main  advanced  guard,  according  to  their  strength  and  the  nature  of 
the  country. 

§  14.  These  detachments  send  out  patrols  in  front  and  on  the  flanks,  to  examine  the  country, 
and  obtain  early  intelligence  of  the  enemy.     These  patrols  are  usually  at  from  500  to  1,000 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M-'CLELLAN.  289 

paces  from  their  detacliments,  and  ought  to  regulate  their  intervals  so  as  never  to  lose  sight  of 
■aach  other,  and  to  form  a  continuous  chain  around  the  head  and  flanks  of  the  main  advanced 
guard. 

§  15.  The  general  arrangement,  without  regard  to  the  ground,  of  an  advanced  guard,  com- 
posed of  10  companies  of  cavalry,  and  6  pieces  of  horse  artillery,  is  shown  in  Plate  I. 

§  16.  An  advanced  guard  during  a  march  in  retreat  consists  of  a  small  numher  of  troops, 
(isually  determined  as  in  time  of  peace. 

Its  purpose  is  : 

1.  To  open  the  way  for  the  main  body,  and  remove  all  obstacles  from  the  road. 

2.  To  serve  as  the  escort  of  the  train,  which  should  move,  at  least,  as  far  in  advance  of  the 
main  body  as  it  does  in  rear  of  it  during  an  offensive  march. 

§  17.  In  this  case,  the  advanced  guard  sends  out  front  and  flank  detachments  and  patrols, 
^vhich  are  arranged  precisely  as  in  offensive  marches.  Here  the  principal  object  to  be  kept  in 
view  is  that  all  the  detachments  may  be  promptly  united  at  any  moment. 

§  18.  During  an  offensive  march  the  rear  guard  is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles  as 
in  advanced  guard  during  a  retreat.     Its  duty  is  as  follows : 

1.  To  watch  over  the  preservation  of  order  in  the  rear  of  the  column. 

2.  To  pick  up  stragglers. 

3.  To  protect  the  rear  of  the  column  and  the  train  against  sudden  attacks  by  parties  of  the 
onemy. 

§  19.  In  a  retreat,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  rear  guard  to  cover  the  movements  of  the  main  body, 
as  well  as  to  repiilse  and  delay  the  enemy  in  every  possible  manner.  In  this  case,  its  duty 
becomes  as  difficult  as  that  of  the  advanced  guard  in  an  offensive  march,  and  sometimes  more 
;^o,  especially  when  the  retreat  is  effected  in  sight  of  the  enemy.  The  rear  guard  must,  at  every 
favorable  point,  use  all  means  to  check  the  enemy,  and  thus  render  it  possible  for  the  main 
body  to  retreat  without  precipitation.  To  efiect  this,  it  should  always  be  much  more  indepen- 
dent than  the  advanced  guard  in  offensive  marches,  for  the  latter  can  always  retreat  upon  the 
main  body,  or  be  readily  supported  by  it. 

§  20.  With  regard  to  the  safety  of  the  main  body,  the  rear  guard  in  a  retreat  observes  the 
rules  laid  down  in  numbers  1,  2,  and  5,  of  §  10. 

§  21.  The  strength  of  the  rear  guard  depends  upon  several  circumstances : 

1.  Upon  our  own  and  the  enemy's  designs. 

2.  Upon  the  proximity  of  the  enemy. 

3.  Upon  the  nature  of  his  operations. 

4.  Upon  the  distance  from  the  main  body,  and  the  order  of  march  of  the  latter. 

If  the  enemy  pursues  vigorously,  or  if  the  main  body  ought  to  fall  back  a  great  distance 
behind  the  rear  guard,  then  the  latter  should  be  strong  enough  to  operate  independently,  and 
defend  itself  obstinately  in  all  favorable  positions.  Such  a  rear  guard  should  be  one-fifth,  or 
even  one-third  of  the  whole  force. 

§  22.  The  rear  guard  should  cover  its  movements,  both  in  the  offensive  and  retreat,  in  the 
manner  laid  down  for  the  advanced  guard  in  §§  12,  13,  and  14. 

§  23.  If  the  main  body  marches  in  several  columns,  all  the  rear  guards  should  communicate 
with  each  other  by  means  of  patrols.  They  ought  also  to  move  in  line — that  is  to  say,  on  the 
same  general  line  perpendicular  to  the  general  direction  of  the  march. 

§  24.  To  the  advanced  guard  in  all  cases,  and  to  the  rear  guard  in  retreat,  mounted  engineer 
37  © 


290  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

troops  are  attached  ;  in  default  of  these^  mounted  working  parties  with  tools  ;  in  the  first  case, 
to  remove  obstacles  in  the  road  ;  in  the  second  case,  to  retard  the  pursuit  of  the  enemy,  by 
destroying  bridges^  breaking  uji  the  road,  &c. 

§  25.  The  distance  of  the  rear  guard  from  the  main  body  depends  upon  its  strength ;  generally, 
in  a  retreat,  the  rear  guard  is  held  at  such  a  distance  from  the  main  body  that  the  latter,  even 
when  the  enemy  attacks  in  force,  may  without  precipitation  or  impediment  select  its  own  time 
and  place  for  halting  or  encamping,  without  making  a  forced  march.  But  if  the  rear  guard  is 
weak,  and  the  enemy  pursues  vigorously,  the  main  body  should  remain  near  by  to  support  it. 
If  the  main  body  is  obliged  to  pass  defiles,  or  if  its  movements  are  in  any  way  retarded,  it 
must  be  at  such  a  distance  from  the  rear  guard  as  to  give  it  time  to  move  off  a  sufficient  distance, 
in  spite  of  any  unexpected  delay. 

§  26.  If  the  main  advanced  and  rear  guards  move  at  the  distance  of  some  miles  from  the 
main  body,  each  column  of  the  latter  detaches,  in  addition,  small  advanced  and  rear  parties, 
(one  or  two  companies,  or  a  platoon)  which  march  at  the  distance  of  some  few  hundred  paces 
from  each  column,  and  perform  the  duties  of  advanced  and  rear  guards  in  time  of  peace. 

§  27.  In  cases  where  the  nature  of  the  ground,  on  the  flanks  of  the  roads,  is  such  as  to  render 
the  march  of  the  columns  insecure,  small  detachments  are  sent  out  as  flankers ;  and  from  these 
patrols  on  the  extreme  flanks,  as  explained  in  §§  12,  13,  and  14. 

ARTICLE  3. 

Arrangements  during  a  Jlank  march. 

§  28.  In  a  march  to  the  flank,  if  it  is  in  the  power  of  the  enemy  to  attack  the  flank  of  the 
columns  in  march,  all  the  parts  should  be  so  arranged  that  they  may  pi'omptly,  and  without  a 
long  movement,  change  from  the  order  of  march  to  that  of  battle,  either  by  wheeling  into  line, 
or  by  changing  the  direction  of  the  columns,  and  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  able  to  resist  his 
attack.  Therefore,  in  such  cases,  certain  troojjs  are  designated  who  are  to  form  the  line  of 
combatants  in  the  order  of  battle,  others  to  form  the  reserve,  and  others  to  guard  the  trains,  on 
the  road  furthest  from  the  enemy. 

§  29.  During  flank  marches,  flank  detachments  are  sent  out  towards  the  enemy;  they  march 
parallel  to  the  main  column,  watch  the  enemy,  and,  if  necessary,  oppose  him  long  enough  to 
enable  the  main  body  to  form  in  order  of  battle. 

§  30.  The  duties  of  these  flank  detachments  correspond  to  those  of  advanced  guards  in  oifen- 
sive  marches,  and  rear  guards  in  retreat ;  because  the  flank  detachments  protect  the  main  body 
against  a  sudden  attack,  and  enable  them  either  to  pass  from  one  line  of  opertions  to  another, 
or  to  gain  a  position  on  the  flank  of  the  enemy,  or,  finally,  to  turn  him. 

It  should  be  observed,  however,  that  flank  marches  should  always  be  undertaken  and  executed 
with  many  precautions;  for,  when  making  them,  it  is  easy  to  lose  our  own  communications  and 
line  of  retreat,  if  we  have  not  time  to  gain  the  new  line  of  operations.  Therefore,  that  there 
may  be  no  impediment  during  the  intended  flank  march,  everything  possible  must  be  done  to 
conceal  it  from  the  enemy,  by  taking  advantage  of  the  ground,  and  by  the  movements  of  the 
flank  guard,  which  should  be  strong  enough  to  offer  an  obstinate  resistance,  and  keep  the  enemy 
away  from  the  main  body  until  the  completion  of  the  movement. 

§  31.  The  strength  of  the  flank  guard  must  be  in  proportion  to  the  duties  it  has  to  perform  ; 
its  strength  must  be  determined  upon  the  same  principles  as  that  of  advanced  and  rear  guards. 

§  32.  The  arrangements  for  the  march,  and  the  manner  of  operation  of  a  flank  guard,  depend 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  291 

entirely  upon  the  position  of  the  enemy,  the  nature  of  the  country,  and  the  direction  of  the 
roads.  To  secure  the  inarch,  the  flank  guard  pushes  out  detachments  and  patrols  on  the  ex- 
posed side,  to  cover  the  whole  flank  of  the  columns  in  march.  The  flank  guard  itself  either 
marches  opposite  the  main  body,  or  remains  in  position,  to  occupy  points  where  roads  coming 
in  from  the  side  of  the  enemy  would  enable  him  to  disturb  the  march  of  our  own  troops.  In 
the  last  case,  when  the  columns  of  the  main  body  have  passed  beyond  the  point  occupied  by 
the  flank  guard,  the  latter  either  occupies  another  point,  covering  the  march,  by  gradually 
sending  troops  there,  or  else  places  itself  as  a  rear  guard  behind  the  marching  column,  while, 
in  the  mean  time,  any  other  points  to  be  occupied  have  been  held  by  other  flank  guards  detached 
from  the  main  body. 

The  first  method  is  pursued  when  the  ground  permits  the  movement  of  the  flank  guard  to  be 
made  without  danger,  as  for  instance,  along  the  banks  of  a  stream  over  which  there  are  few 
crossings ;  the  latter  in  all  cases  where  the  march  of  the  fractions  of  the  flank  guard  would  be 
exposed  to  danger  from  the  attack  of  the  enemy. 

§  33.  The  distance  of  the  flank  guard  from  the  main  body  is  regulated  as  in  the  case  of  an 
advanced  guard  in  an  offensive  march. 

§  34.  Plate  No.  2  gives  an  example,  without  reference  to  the  ground,  of  the  flank  march  of 
a  division  of  cavalry,  under  the  protection  of  a  flank  brigade  and  a  battery  of  horse  artillery. 

§  35.  In  addition  to  the  main  flank  guard  sent  out  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  each  column 
of  the  main  body  detaches  small  advanced,  flank,  and  rear  guards. 

When  necessary,  a  special  guard  is  detailed  for  the  trains,  which,  in  such  cases,  usually  move 
in  one  body. 

ARTICLE  4. 

Arrangement  and  movement  of  the  trains. 

§  36.  To  avoid  confusion  and  delay  in  the  march  of  troops,  from  the  great  number  of  wagons 
with  them,  the  trains  are  divided  into  three  classes. 

§  37.  Trains  of  the  first  class,  tvhich  are  needed  during  the  march,  consist  of  the  ambulances, 
provided  with  the  means  of  dressing  wounds,  and  accompanied  by  the  surgeon  of  the  day,  an 
assistant  surgeon,  and  a  party  of  hospital  attendants. 

In  the  artillery,  the  spare  carriages  accompany  the  train  of  the  1st  class  ;  in  the  mounted 
engineer  troops,  the  ponton  wagons,  if  there  is  any  necessity  for  them.  In  addition  to  these, 
during  marches  near  the  enemy,  the  ammunition  wagons  accompany  the  trains  of  the  1st  class, 
that  the  troops  may  never  be  in  want  of  cartridges. 

§38.  Trains  of  the  1st.  class  follow  immediately  after  their  regiments,  batteries,  or  other 
integral  parts. 

§  39.  Trains  of  the  2d  class,  which  are  needed  by  the  troops  only  when  in  camp,  consist  of: 
the  wagons  for  ammunition,  money,  papers  and  records,  tools,  baggage,  medicines,  field  forges, 
artillery  wagons,  staff  baggage  wagons,  pack  animals  of  the  field  and  company  officers,  wagons 
of  the  office  of  the  commander-in-chief,  wagons  carrying  provisions  and  forage  for  immediate 
distribution,  and,  finally,  the  sutlers'  wagons.  Ammunition  wagons  are  separated  from  the 
others,  and  compose  in  each  column  a  separate  section,  marching  near  the  troops,  i.  e.,  in  an 
offensive  march,  they  move  at  the  head  of  the  trains  of  the  2d  class,  and  in  retreat,  behind  them. 
The  other  wagons  of  the  2d  class  move  by  kinds,  and  in  the  order  named  above. 

§  40.  Trains  of  the  2d  class  march  behind  the  troops,  in  the  interval  between  the  main  body 
and  the  rear  gUtard. 


292  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

If  there  is  no  probability  of  meeting  the  enemy,  or  if  the  advanced  guard  is  at  a  great  distance 
(e.  g.,  one-half  a  day's  march)  from  the  main  body,  then  the  wagons  of  the  2d  class,  belonging 
to  the  advanced  guard,  may  march  immediately  after  it ;  in  like  manner,  if  the  general  column 
moves  by  echelon,  with  intervals  of  half  a  day's  march,  then  the  wagons  of  the  2d  class,  belong- 
ing to  each  echelon,  may  march  immediately  behind  it. 

But  when  an  affair  with  the  enemy  is  anticipated,  all  the  trains  of  the  2d  class,  except  the 
ammunition  wagons,  follow  the  main  body,  at  a  distance  of  not  less  than  one-half  a  day's 
march  ;  so  that  in  the  event  of  a  retreat,  the  wagons  may  not  delay  the  movement.  But  in 
such  cases,  the  ammunition  wagons  follow  immediately  after  the  troops  to  whom  they  belong. 
In  a  general  retreat,  the  trains  of  the  2d  class  should  be  placed  at  least  one-half  a  day's  march 
in  front  of  the  troops,  i.  e.,  at  such  a  distance,  that  in  no  event  can  they  impede  or  delay  the 
movements  of  the  active  troops. 

§  41.  Trains  of  the  third  class  consist  of  those  for  which  the  troops  have  no  immediate  or  pressing 
necessity.  They  are  composed  of  provision  and  forage  wagons,  wagons  loaded  with  hospital 
stores  and  equipments,  ambulances  for  the  sick  who  are  in  the  general  hospital,  &c.,  &c. 

§  42.  Trains  of  the  3d  class  always  march  in  a  distinct  train,  separate  from  the  troops,  on  the 
principal  road,  and  under  the  protection  of  a  special  escort ;  the  strength  of  which  dej^ends  upon 
the  extent  of  the  train  and  the  position  of  the  enemy. 

§43.  The  number  of  wagons  allowed  in  the  2d  and  3d  classes  depends  ujjon  circumstances, 
and  special  orders  issued  during  the  campaign.  Commanders  of  separate  detachments  may  be 
allowed  to  vary  the  number  of  wagons  in  each  class  according  to  circumstances. 

§  44.  In  the  march  of  a  large  number  of  wagons,  any  obstacle  to  a  section,  or  a  single  wagon, 
delays  all  that  follow,  and  thus  extends  to  the  whole  train.  To  avoid  this  difficulty,  large 
trains  are  divided  into  sections  of  about  100  wagons  each,  which  march  about  one-third  of  a 
mile  apart. 

§  45.  If,  in  addition  to  the  ammunition  wagons,  there  are  some  loaded  with  loose  powder, 
they  are  formed  in  sej^arate  sections  and  placed  in  the  part  of  the  train  least  exposed  to  the 
enemy.     No  foreign  matter  is  to  be  placed  on  these  wagons. 

§  46.  The  head  of  each  section  must  occasionally  halt  for  a  moment,  that  the  rear  may  keep 
closed  up. 

§  47.  Detailed  arrangements  for  the  formation  and  march  of  trains  should  be  made. 

ARTICLE  5. 
The  defence  of  trains. 

§  48.  The  duties  of  troops  detailed  as  the  escort  of  a  train  are  :  1st.  To  enforce  the  preserva- 
tion of  order.  2d.  To  assist  their  rapid  and  uninterrupted  march.  3d.  To  defend  them  if 
attacked. 

§  49.  A  portion  of  the  escort,  detailed  to  watch  over  the  order  of  march,  distributes  itself  as 
a  chain  along  the  whole  length  of  the  train.  If  the  escort  is  small,  a  certain  number  of  privates, 
under  the  charge  of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  are  placed  in  charge  of  a  section,  or  certain 
number  of  wagons,  and  are  responsible  for  their  order  of  march. 

§  50.  When  the  roads  are  very  bad  some  of  the  escort  are  dismounted,  in  order  to  be  in  readi- 
ness to  assist  any  wagons  that  may  mire,  break  down,  or  meet  with  any  impediment. 

§  51.  A  working  party  marches  at  the  head  of  the  escort  to  repair  the  road.  The  strength 
of  this  party  will  depend  upon  the  number  of  wagons,  the  state  of  the  road,  &c. 


REPORT   OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M°CLELLAN.  293 

§  52.  The  strength  and  composition  of  the  escorl  of  a  train  must  depend  upon  the  probability 
of  attack,  the  extent  of  the  train,  and,  finally,  on  the  nature  of  the  country  through  which  the 
train  is  to  pass. 

§  53.  If  the  escort  is  of  infantry,  a  small  party  of  cavalry  must  be  added  to  look  out  for  the 
enemy,  patrol,  &c. 

§  54.  In  all  cases  the  commander  of  the  escort  has  absolute  control  over  all  persons  on  duty 
■with  or  accompanying  the  train. 

§  55.  The  commander  of  the  escort  should  possess  accurate  information  concerning  the  country 
through  which  the  train  is  to  pass,  that  he  may  make  the  proper  arrangements  for  its  security. 

§  56.  A  part  of  the  escort  always  marches  as  an  advanced  guard,  and  another  portion  as  a 
rear  guard.  The  main  body  is  concentrated  at  points  determined  by  the  danger  ;  if  necessary, 
it  detaches  flank  guards,  which  send  out  patrols.  In  an  open  country,  and  when  there  is  no 
reason  to  expect  the  enemy  at  any  particular  point,  the  main  body  of  the  escort  marches  along- 
side of  the  centre  of  the  train.  Under  other  circumstances,  they  are  concentrated  at  the  head, 
or  in  rear  of  the  train,  according  to  the  direction  in  which  the  enemy  is  expected. 

§  57.  The  advanced  guard  is  thrown  forward  a  sufBcient  distance  to  remove  all  obstacles  that 
would  delay  the  train.  By  means  of  its  patrols  it  examines  the  woods,  villages,  and  defiles  ; 
keeps  up  its  communication  with  the  main  body,  and  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  escort 
everything  observed. 

§  58.  The  advanced  guard  selects  suitable  positions  for  halting  places,  camps,  and  for  parking 
the  train. 

§  59.  The  advanced  guard  occupies  all  defiles  and  positions  which  would  enable  the  enemy  to 
attack  with  advantage  ;  it  does  not  abandon  them  before  the  arrival  of  the  main  body  of  the 
escort,  which  last  holds  them  until  the  train  arrives.  If  necessary,  the  escort  is  relieved  by  a 
small  flank  detachment,  or  may  itself  remain  in  position  until  the  whole  train  has  passed  by 
and  is  out  of  danger. 

§  60.  If  the  enemy  is  expected  from  the  rear,  the  suitable  measures  are  taken  ;  the  rear  guard 
destroying  the  bridges,  dikes,  &c.,  behind  it,  and  throwing  all  possible  obstacles  in  the  path  of 
the  enemy.  The  rear  guard  should  constantly  keep  up  its  communication  with  the  main  body 
by  means  of  patrols. 

§  61.  If  the  enemy  threatens  the  flanks,  and  the  ground  is  too  much  broken  for  the  action  of 
cavalry,  the  defence  of  the  train  becomes  difficult  for  that  arm.  In  such  cases,  small  parties  of 
cavalry  are  with  the  advanced  and  rear  guards ;  but  the  main  escort  is  composed  of  infantry, 
who  occupy  positions  favorable  for  protecting  the  train  before  its  head  arrives  opposite  to  them, 
and  do  not  abandon  those  positions  until  the  rear  of  the  train  has  passed  by. 

§  62.  Plate  No.  3  gives  an  example  of  the  march  of  a  train  escorted  by  10  companies  of 
cavalry,  2  pieces  of  horse  artillery,  and  two  regiments  of  infantry. 

ARTICLE   6. 
Of  short  halls  during  the  march,  halts  for  the  night,  and  halts  for  an  entire  day. 

§  63.  The  length  of  a  march  near  the  enemy  depends  upon  circumstances,  and  cannot  be 
determined  absolutely. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  the  length  of  march  may  be  about  17  miles,  but  in  case  of 
necessity  it  may  be  extended  to  30  miles.  Small  detachments  move  with  much  greater  rapidity 
than  entire  corps,  or  armies.     As  a  general  rule,  troops  should  not  be  exhausted  by  forced  marches. 


294  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

Small  detachments  of  cavalry  may  make  marches  of  40,  50,  or  even  70  miles,  but  this  refers 
only  to  exceptional  cases,  when  the  success  of  the  enterprise  in  hand  depends  upon  the  suddenness 
of  their  appearance. 

The  ordinary  rate  of  march  should  be  about  3  miles  per  hour.  When  the  roads  are  good  it  is 
advisable  to  move  at  a  moderate  trot,  walking  for  some  distance  before  each  halt,  and  before 
reaching  camp ;  for  it  is  proper  to  give  the  horses  as  much  time  as  possible  to  feed  and  rest  in  camp. 

Generals  and  other  officers,  furnished  with  an  escort  of  cavalry,  should  regulate  the  rate  of 
their  march  in  accordance  with  what  is  laid  down  above,  and  are  not  permitted,  except  in  cases 
of  absolute  necessity,  to  urge  the  escort  to  an  immoderate  speed,  for  the  sake  of  their  own 
convenience. 

§  64.  Short  halts  are  made  from  time  to  time,  as  prescribed  for  marches  in  time  of  peace ;  that 
is,  a  halt  for  10  or  15  minutes  every  hour,  and  in  long  marches,  one  or  two  long  halts  of  about 
an  hour  each. 

§  65.  When  near  the  enemy,  it  is  necessary  to  arrange  the  distances  between  the  camps,  or 
bivouacs,  so  that  the  columns  of  the  main  body  can  easily  be  assembled  at  the  general  point  of 
rendezvous  ;  then  the  reserves  are  to  be  placed  near  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy  is  expected, 
in  positions  convenient  to  wood  and  water. 

§  66.  The  various  parts  of  the  army  are  so  arranged  that,  if  the  enemy  attacks,  they  can 
readily  move  out  upon  the  roads,  or  quickly  form  in  order  of  battle  in  a  position  chosen  before- 
hand, either  in  front,  or  in  the  rear  of  encampment  or  bivouac. 

§  67.  The  main  body  should  always  be  secure  from  a  sudden  attack,  therefore,  (notwithstanding 
there  is  an  advanced  guard  in  front  and  a  rear  guard  behind,)  patrols  are  sent  out  from  it,  and 
a  party  is  detailed,  which  does  not  unsaddle,  and  always  remains  ready  for  action  ;  sometimes, 
to  prevent  being  turned,  separate  posts  are  sent  out  on  the  flanks,  and  sometimes  the  troops  are 
protected  in  their  camp  by  advanced  posts,  arranged  according  to  the  rules  laid  down  in  Part  II. 

§  68.  The  advanced  and  rear  guards  take  measures  not  only  for  their  own  safety,  but  also  for 
that  of  the  main  body,  placing  themselves  for  this  purpose  in  positions  suitable  for  action,  and 
watching  all  the  roads  leading  from  the  enemy. 

§  69.  When  it  is  perfectly  certain  that  none  of  the  enemy  are  in  the  vicinity,  each  column 
may  pass  the  night  by  itself,  on  the  road  by  which  it  marches. 

§  70.  In  flank  marches  of  several  days  duration,  the  camps  for  the  night  should  be  placed  in 
such  positions  that  the  main  body  may  be  secure  from  attack,  and  in  case  of  the  appearance  of 
the  enemy  in  superior  force,  be  able  to  retreat,  i.  e.,  either  to  preserve  the  old  road  of  march 
and  communication,  or  in  some  manner  to  gain  a  new  one.  The  arrangements  for  halts  and  camps 
for  the  night  are  the  same  as  in  oflensive  marches. 

§  71.  In  regard  to  the  short  halts  of  trains  the  following  rules  are  prescribed  :  As  in  the  case 
of  cavalry,  the  head  of  the  train  occasionally  makes  short  halts  to  enable  the  rear  to  close  up, 
and  if  the  train  is  divided  into  several  sections,  the  head  of  each  section  does  the  same  thing. 

During  these  halts  the  wagons  remain  in  the  road,  not  turning  to  one  side,  or  changing  the 
arrangement  of  the  wagons  and  escort  from  what  it  was  during  the  march. 

§  72.  Long  halts,  during  which  the  animals  are  fed,  are  made  only  when  the  march  is  very 
long,  or  the  roads  very  bad,  and  the  animals  fatigued.  When  the  object  is  not  to  overtake  the 
troops  when  at  a  halt,  it  is  better  to  leave  the  train  longer  in  camp,  and  then  make  the  whole  march 
without  a  halt ;  in  this  manner  the  animals  are  not  kept  so  long  in  harness,  and  can  therefore 
rest  and  feed  better. 

§  73.  During  long  halts,  and  camps  for  the  night,  the  train  is  placed  more  compactly  than 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  295 

usual ;  for  which  purpose  a  proper  place  is  selected  for  placing  all  the  wagons  together,  in  order 
that,  heing  less  scattered,  ahetter  watch  may  he  kept  upon  them,  and  hotter  order  he  preserved. 
When  danger  is  apprehended  from  the  enemy  it  is  hest  to  park  the  train  in  column,  hecause 
this  formation  is  changed  more  quickly  than  any  other,  and  from  it  it  is  easier  to  take  the  road  at 
the  end  of  the  halt,  or  when  leaving  camp. 

Remark. — In  this  formation  the  average  interval  of  8  yards  in  width  is  allowed  each  wagon. 
The  harness  is  either  piled  up  behind  the  wagon,  or  hung  on  the  wheels,  and  the  animals  are 
attached  to  the  pole.  The  distance  between  each  row  of  wagons  in  the  column  may  be  fixed  at 
about  20  paces. 

Light  wagons  of  the  2d  class,  although  they  move  in  separate  trains,  are  not  brought  together 
in  camp,  but  bivouac  in  rear  of  the  corps  to  which  they  belong.  If  there  are  wagons  loaded 
with  powder,  cartridges,  or  other  combustibles,  precautions  must  be  taken  to  guard  them  from 
fire,  and  it  is,  therefore,  best  to  park  them  in  a  separate  jjlace,  apart  from  the  rest  of  the  train. 
The  escort  bivouacs  at  the  head,  or  on  the  flanks  of  the  train,  as  may  be  most  convenient  ; 
guards  and  sentinels  are  posted  to  preserve  order  ;  if  the  teamsters  are  not  to  be  trusted,  and 
desertions  are  apprehended,  the  whole  train  is  surrounded  by  a  chain  of  sentinels. 

§  74.  When  an  attack  is  expected  the  train  should  be  coralled,  or  else  parked  in  a  square  with 
the  hind  wheels  outside,  and  the  animals  in  the  centre. 

In  this  case,  the  escort  places  itself  in  a  suitable  position,  keeping  in  view  the  defence  of  the 
position  occupied  by  the  park,  and  takes  all  the  military  measures  of  precaution  necessary  to 
secure  itself  and  the  train  against  a  sudden  attack. 

CHAPTER  II. 

DUTIES  OF  THE  COMMANDEES  OF  THE  YAEIOUS  PARTS  OF  THE  TROOPS  DURING  MILITARY  MARCHES. 

ARTICLE  1. 
Duties  of  the  commander-in-cMef. 

§  To.  The  commander-in-chief  must  cause  the  roads  by  which  he  intends  to  march,  as  well 
as  the  country  on  each  side,  to  be  examined  by  officers  of  the  general  staff,  or  by  patrols ; 
but  if,  from  the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  or  other  causes,  this  is  impossible,  it  is  necessary, 
at  least,  to  obtain  information  concerning  their  nature  and  practicability  by  inquiries  of  the 
inhabitants,  &c. 

§  V6.  He  must  take  steps  to  procure  a  sufficient  number  of  reliable  guides,  so  that  each  sepa- 
rate detachment  may  have  its  own  ;  this  is  especially  important  in  thinly  inhabited  districts, 
and  in  movements  by  cross  roads. 

§  11.  In  relation  to  seeking  and  employing  guides,  the  following  rules  are  laid  down  :  1.  To 
be  watchful,  lest  the  guides,  for  their  own  purposes,  prejiidice  us  in  any  manner  ;  2.  To  select 
guides  from  among  lumters,  woodsmen,  stage  or  wagon  drivers,  and  herdsmen,  as  well  as  pedlars 
and  travelling  beggars,  because  the  country  is  well  known  to  these  classes  of  people ;  3.  To 
change  the  guides  as  seldom  as  possible,  especially  in  localities  where  parties  of  the  enemy  may 
be  met  with  ;  4.  To  treat  the  guides  kindly  and  mildly,  and  to  reward  them  well ;  but  to  watch 
them  closely  and  prevent  them  from  passing  over  to  the  enemy,  and  to  send  them  back  by  the 
road  over  which  they  came. 

§  78.  He  regulates  the  distribution  of  the  troops,  the  order  of  march,  and  the  precautionary 
measures  ;  he  arranges  the  disposition  of  the  troops  for  the  movement,  by  means  of  the  maps  of 
the  country,  and  the  information  obtained  concerning  it  and  the  enemy. 


296  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

§  79.  The  orders  should  be  brief,  clear,  and  positive.  All  minute  details,  which  might,  in 
unforseen  cases,  trammel  the  subordinate  commanders  in  the  execution  of  their  orders  should 
be  avoided, 

§  80.  The  orders  for  the  march  should  specify  : 

1.  The  number  of  columns  ;  under  whose  command  each  column  is  to  be ;  precisely  where, 
and  by  what  roads  the  march  is  to  be  made. 

2.  The  strength  of  each  column,  echelon,  advanced,  rear,  and  flank  guard. 

3.  At  what  hour  each  column  or  party  is  to  move. 

4.  Where  and  when  the  train  is  to  assemble  and  move,  and  under  the  escort  of  what  detach- 
ment. The  road  by  which  the  train  is  to  move  should  be  carefully  considered,  in  order  that,  ic 
the  event  of  a  sudden  retreat,  the  troops  may  find  the  most  important  roads  clear. 

5.  The  principal  measures  of  precaution  to  be  observed. 

6.  Where  the  commander-in-chief  will  be  found  during  the  march,  so  that  the  subordinate 
commanders  may  know  whither  to  send  their  reports. 

7.  Finally,  everything  rendered  necessary  by  the  circumstances  is  mentioned  in  the  orders, 
and  sometimes  the  general  arrangements  in  case  of  meeting  the  enemy. 

§  81.  In  the  distribution  of  the  troops  into  several  columns,  for  the  march,  the  commander- 
in-chief  will  observe  the  following  rules  : 

1.  The  number  of  columns  must  depend  upon  the  whole  number  of  troops,  and  upon  the 
number,  nature,  and  degree  of  separation  of  the  roads. 

2.  The  movement  of  a  large  body  of  troops,  as,  for  instance,  an  army  corps,  by  one  road, 
besides  the  difficulty  of  supplying  them,  renders  the  march  difficult  and  slow ;  and,  in  addition,  a 
long  column  requires  much  time  to  take  up  its  order  of  battle.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the 
number  of  columns  is  very  great,  it  may  be  difficult  to  keep  up  the  proper  connexion  ;  besides, 
when  there  are  many  roads  near  and  parallel  to  each  other  they  are  seldom  of  a  nature 
favorable  to  the  movements  of  large  bodies  of  troojis. 

3.  The  intervals  between  the  columns  should  always  be  such  that  they  can  give  reciprocal 
support  upon  the  appearance  of  the  enemy,  and  not  be  in  danger  of  being  turned  or  separated. 
This  interval  will  depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  country  ;  the  more  broken  it  is  the  nearer 
should  the  columns  be  to  each  other,  for  in  this  case  more  time  is  required  to  concentrate  the 
troops,  the  transmission  of  orders  and  information  is  slower,  and  it  is  more  difficult  to  watch 
the  enemy.  In  addition  to  these  considerations,  the  intervals  between  the  columns  should  be 
regulated  by  the  proximity  of  the  enemy  ;  the  nearer  he  is  the  less  should  these  intervals  be. 

4.  The  principal  masses  of  the  troops  move  upon  the  roads  on  which  it  is  expected  to  meet 
the  main  body  of  the  enemy,  or  by  whicli  the  principal  attack  is  to  be  made  upon  him. 

5.  Each  kind  of  troops  is  moved  towards  the  locality  best  suited  for  its  operations. 

6.  If  one  flank  is  particularly  threatened  by  the  enemy,  the  columns  on  that  side  are  re- 
inforced, and  the  reserves  drawn  near  them. 

§  82.  To  secure  harmony  of  movement  and  the  facility  of  mutual  support,  the  commander-in- 
chief  should  : 

1.  Watch  that  the  main  columns  are  all  equally  advanced  ;  therefore,  he  equalizes  the  rate  of 
march  on  different  roads,  slackens  the  gait  of  certain  columns,  or  increases  the  number  and 
duration  of  the  halts  ;  regulating  these  things  not  only  upon  the  length  of  march  of  each 
column,  but  upon  all  the  circumstances  that  may  influence  the  velocity  of  the  movement,  such 
as  the  nature  of  the  road,  the  number  of  troops  in  the  several  columns,  and  the  obstacles  that 
mav  be  encountered. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  297 

2.  Take  care  that  the  columns  do  not  cross  each  other. 

3.  Maintain  a  constant  commnnication  between  the  columns  by  means  of  patrols,  which  at 
the  same  time  examine  the  intermediate  country. 

4.  Take  all  precautions  to  enable  the  columns  to  unite  at  any  moment ;  he  therefore  avoids 
separating  the  troops  by  insurmountable  obstacles. 

§  83.  That  he  may,  under  all  circumstances,  have  it  in  his  power  to  place  the  troops  in  posi- 
tion, the  commander-in-chief  should  know  not  only  where  the  troops  ought  to  be  at  any  given 
time,  but  also  where  they  actually  are.  For  this  purpose,  he  requires  every  commander  of  an 
advanced  guard,  or  chief  of  a  separate  column,  to  report  not  only  the  appearance  of  the  enemy, 
as  well  as  particular  events  and  delays,  but  also  his  distance  from  known  points  on  the  road, 
and  his  arrival  at  halting  places  and  camps.  These  reports  should  be  made  the  more  frequently 
in  proportion  to  the  proximity  of  the  enemy. 

§  84.  To  watch  over  the  order  of  march,  the  commanders  of  the  main  and  detached  columns 
should  occasionally  halt  and  allow  their  commands  to  pass  by  them,  so  as  to  see  that  the  column 
is  not  too  much  lengthened  out,  particularly  in  the  march  of  large  bodies  on  one  road. 

§  85.  The  commander-in-chief  and  the  subordinate  commanders  see  that  all  persons  belonging 
to  the  combatants,  and  for  duty,  march  in  the  jjroper  places.  The  non-combatants,  dismounted 
men,  led  horses  of  the  officers  and  men,  march  with  the  trains  of  the  second  class. 

§  86.  In  parties  near  the  enemy,  i.e.,  advanced  guards,  front  and  flank  detachments,  rear 
guards  in  retreat,  patrols,  &c.,  the  fire-arms  should  be  loaded.  In  the  main  body,  the  arms 
are  loaded  only  when  an  affair  is  anticipated. 

§  87.  When  passing  through  towns  or  villages,  by  farms,  inns^  wells,  and  such  places,  the 
commander-in-chief  and  the  subordinate  commanders  turn  their  attention  to  preventing  disorder, 
by  closely  watching  that  no  one  leaves  the  ranks. 

§  88.  In  passing  defiles  and  crossing  rivers  the  commander-in-chief  watches — 

1.  That  the  troops  do  not  crowd  together  at  the  entrance,  or  stretch  out  in  passing  through^ 
but  that  they  preserve  their  proper  distances. 

2.  That,  in  crossing  rivers  in  boats  or  ferries,  each  party  knows  when  and  after  what  other 
party  it  is  to  cross. 

3.  That,  as  soon  as  any  troops  have  crossed,  they  form  in  conformity  with  the  orders  they 
have  received. 

4.  That  the  drivers  of  the  artillery  and  train  do  not  dismount  without  orders. 

5.  That,  in  crossing  fords,  the  men  follow  each  other  at  the  prescribed  distance ;  that  the 
wagons  do  not  drive  in  one  after  another,  but  that  each  waits  until  the  one  in  front  has  gained 
a  certain  distance,  or  even  reached  the  opposite  shore.  In  case  of  necessity,  some  officers  are 
left  to  superintend  the  crossing.  At  difficult  crossings,  a  detachment  may  be  left  to  assist  the 
artillery  and  train. 

§  89.  During  secret  or  night  marches  trumpet  signals  are  not  used ;  orders  are  given  in 
a  low  tone  of  voice.     In  secret  night  marches  smoking  and  striking  fire  are  forbidden. 

§  90.  The  commander-in-chief  watches  that,  during  halts,  as  well  as  on  the  march,  the  troops 
are  protected  by  advanced  and  rear  guards,  flank  detachments,  and  patrols  ;  also,  when  in  camp, 
as  explained  hereafter  in  Part  II. 

§  91.  Upon  approaching  the  place  where  the  troops  are  to  halt,  bivouac,  or  encamp,  the 
commander-in-chief  sends  forward  betimes  officers  of  the  staff,  with  non-commissioned  officers 
from  every  party,  to  mark  the  place  to  be  occupied  by  each. 
3S  © 


298  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

§  92.  Since  the  advanced  and  rear  guards  are  more  fatigued  than  the  other  troops,  on  account 
of  their  continual  state  of  vigilance  and  preparation,  the  commander-in-chief  should  relieve  them 
by  fresh  troops  from  time  to  time. 

ARTICLE  2. 
Duties  of  Ihe  commander  of  the  advanced  guard. 

§  93.  Upon  commencing  the  march,  he  sends  out  front  and  flank  detachments,  as  explained 
in  §§  12,  13,  and  14. 

§  94.  He  places  an  officer,  or  non-commissioned  officer,  in  charge  of  every  party  detached, 
and  explains  to  them  what  patrols  they  are  to  send  out,  and  exactly  in  what  direction,  and 
gives  them  si3ecial  instructions  as  to  what  they  are  to  do  in  different  cases. 

§  95.  During  the  march  he  watches  that  the  detachments  and  patrols  maintain  their  com- 
munication with  each  other  and  himself,  and  that  they  perform  their  duties  strictly.  Not 
blindly  trusting  to  the  advanced  and  flank  detachments  for  security,  he  should  see  that  his 
command  marches  in  the  best  order,  and  in  the  habitual  formation,  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  ground. 

§  96.  When  in  pursuit  of  the  enemy,  he  should  never  lose  sight  of  him,  follow  all  his  move- 
ments promptly  and  continually,  and  ascertain  his  strength,  direction,  and  designs,  as  well  as 
possible. 

§  97.  He  should  exert  himself  to  obtain  reliable  and  detailed  information  concerning  the 
enemy  and  the  country  in  advance,  by  means  of  patrols,  spies,  inquiries  from  prisoners,  and 
the  inhabitants. 

§  98.  He  interrogates  deserters  and  prisoners  as  to — 

1.  The  names  and  strength  of  their  regiments,  and  the  detachment  to   which  they  belong. 

2.  What  brigade,  division,  and  army  corps  they  belonged  to  ;  the  names  of  their  commanders. 

3.  Where  their  corps  are  quartered. 

4.  What  are  the  dispositions  of  their  regiments,  brigades,  and  divisions.  If  the  corps  is  in 
position,  the  strength  of  its  advanced  i^osts,  and  whether  it  is  carefully  guarded. 

5.  What  corps  or  divisions  are  near  their  own  ;  where  they  are,  and  at  what  intervals. 

6.  When  and  where  they  left  their  regiments  ;  whether  detachments  were  sent  out  from  the 
corps,  in  what  force,  and  whether  they  expected  support. 

Y.  Whether  there  were  any  orders  or  rumors  in  regard  to  intended  movements,  and  exactly 
what  they  were. 

8.  Whether  provisions  and  suj)plies  were  abundant,  and  the  situation  of  the  magazines. 

9.  Whether  there  was  much  sickness,  or  any  epidemics,  and  the  situations  of  the  main  and 
temporary  hospitals. 

In  few  words,  endeavor  to  obtain  information  about  everything  which  relates  to  the  arrange- 
ments of  the  enemy,  his  strength,  designs,  and  means  of  all  kinds. 

§  99.  It  is  impossible  to  place  much  reliance  upon  the  testimony  of  prisoners  and  deserters  ; 
on  the  one  hand,  they  may  be  too  ignorant  to  give  a  definite  answer  ;  on  the  other,  they  may, 
from  fear,  reply  according  to  the  wishes  of  the  questioner,  or  they  may  deliberately  falsify.  It 
is  therefore  necessary  frequently  to  rejjeat  the  same  questions  unexpectedly,  so  as  to  compare 
the  different  answers,  and  also  to  compare  the  statements  of  different  individuals. 

§  100.  The  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  will,  without  delay,  rej^ort  to  the  commander- 
in-chief  everything  observed  with  regard  to  the  enemy,  every  considerable  detention,  his  arrival 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  299 

at  remarkable  points  on  the  road,  (such  as  towns,  rivers,  &c.,)  and  his  arrival  at  halting  places 
and  camps. 

§  101.  Upon  occupying  any  town,  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  should  take  every 
means  to  obtain  information  as  to  military  movements  ;  for  this  purpose,  he  should  at  once 
seize  the  archives  and  papers  of  the  authorities  of  the  place,  and  also  the  letters  and  papers  in 
the  post  office. 

§  102.  Upon  receiving  from  the  advanced  parties  or  patrols  any  intelligence,  especially  if  it 
concerns  the  movements  of  the  enemy,  he  should  endeavor  to  verify  it  in  person,  or  by  means  of 
reliable  officers,  and  then  make  his  own  report  positively  and  distinctly,  so  that  no  unfounded 
or  exaggerated  report  may  unnecessarily  alarm  the  main  body,  and  arrest  its  march.  The 
nearer  he  is  to  the  enemy,  the  more  fi'equently  should  he  send  reports  to  the  commander-in- 
chief. 

§  103.  These  reports  are  made  either  verbally  through  aides,  or  in  pencil.  The  time  and 
place  whence  the  report  is  sent  should  be  noted  on  the  paper.  The  greatest  attention  should 
always  be  paid  to  giving  the  correct  names  of  towns,  villages,  streams,  &c. 

§  104.  Reports  should  be  written  with  the  greatest  care  and  attention, for  upon  the  comparison 
of  reports  the  movements  of  the  main  body  must  depend.  The  most  important  qualities  of 
reports  are  clearness,  perspicuity,  precision,  and  reliability.  They  should  contain  only  what 
the  sender  has  seen  himself,  or  properly  inquired  into.  Everything  which  he  could  not  examine 
himself  ought  to  be  stated  separately,  with  the  degree  of  confidence  to  be  reposed  in  the  source 
v.'nence  it  was  derived. 

§  105.  When  sending  a  verbal  report,  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  must  satisfy 
himself  not  only  that  the  bearer  can  repeat  it  word  for  word,  but  that  he  comprehends  its  pre- 
cise meaning.  If  possible,  it  is  best  to  send  with  all  such  despatches  some  of  those  who  were 
ocular  witnesses  of  the  subject  of  the  re^jort.  If  the  report  is  important,  and  there  is  danger  of 
the  bearer  being  captured,  it  is  best  to  send  a  duplicate  after  the  lapse  of  a  short  interval.  It  is 
useful  to  number  all  reports,  for  should  one  be  captured  or  arrive  before  another  sent  previously, 
the  series  of  numbers  enables  this  to  be  detected.  These  remarks  apply  not  only  to  the  reports 
sent  by  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard,  but,  in  general,  to  all  reports  sent  in  time  of 
war.     The  adoption  of  a  simjile  cipher  will  often  be  of  advantage. 

§  106.  The  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  attends  to  the  repairs  of  the  road,  bridges, 
causeways,  &c.  If  the  repairs  are  heavy,  and  exceed  the  means  at  his  disposal,  he  promptly 
informs  the  commander-in-chief. 

§  107.  When  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  is  informed  of  the  appearance  of  the 
enemy,  he  at  once  takes  the  measures  rendered  proper  by  the  object  of  the  march  and  the  orders 
he  has  received  :  i.  e. — 

1.  He  takes  up  a  position  in  order  to  keep  the  enemy  in  check  until  the  arrival  of  the  main 
body  ;  or 

2.  Marches  to  meet  and  attack  the  enemy  ;  or,  finally, 

3.  Falls  back  upon  the  main  body,  endeavoring  to  delay  the  enemy  as  long  as  possible,  so  as 
to  give  the  main  body  time  to  form  and  change  from  the  order  of  march  to  that  of  battle. 

§  108.  For  camps,  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  selects  places  advantageous  for 
defence,  and  secure  against  sudden  attack.  Entire  detachments  should  not  be  placed  in  woods, 
defiles,  towns,  or  villages,  but  they  should  be  occupied  only  by  a  part  of  the  command,  the  rest 
remaining  near  by.  If  there  are  defiles  in  advance,  through  which  it  is  intended  to  march, 
their  debouches  should  be  occupied  in  force,  in  order  to  secure  them  for  our  ulterior  movements. 


300  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

§  109.  The  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  secures  his  camp  by  outposts. 

Bemarh. — All  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  in  offensive 
marches  apply  equally  to  the  commander  of  the  flank  guard  during  a  march  to  the  flank. 

§  110.  In  a  retreat,  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  follows  the  same  rules  as  in  the 
offensive,  and  takes  great  pains  to  remove  all  obstacles  that  might  impede  the  march  of  the 
train  and  the  main  body.  To  repair  the  road,  he  detaches  mounted  engineer  troops  or  work- 
ing parties,  with  the  requisite  tools,  and  pursues  his  march  with  the  remainder  of  his  command. 

ARTICLE  3. 
Duties  of  the  commander  of  the  rear  guard. 

§  111.  His  princijial  duties,  during  a  pursuit  by  the  enemy,  consist — 

1.  In  indefatigable  vigilance. 

2.  In  the  preservation  of  the  best  order  and  most  severe  discipline. 
'6.  In  sustaining  the  courage  and  spirits  of  his  troops. 

§  112.  He  should  use  every  exertion  to  ascertain  the  movements  and  designs  of  the  enemy, 
that  he  may  be  able  to  take  in  time  the  measures  necessary  to  thwart  and  oppose  him. 

§  113.  He  secures  and  guards  his  march  as  the  advanced  guard  does  on  the  ofiensive.  By  a 
turning  movement,  the  enemy  may  force  the  rear  guard  to  accelerate  its  march,  and  thus  throw 
it  into  disorder  ;  for  this  reason,  the  commander  should  pay  especial  attention  to  his  flanks 
and  to  the  cross-roads,  by  which  the  enemy  might  turn  and  attack  him  ;  if  necessary,  he  may 
send  out,  instead  of  the  usual  small  detachments,  large  and  independent  parties  which  can 
resist  the  attack. 

§  114.  The  rear  guard  should  always  be  in  a  condition  to  form  in  order  of  battle  ;  therefore, 
those  portions  near  the  enemy  retreat  by  the  rear  rank,  so  that  they  have  only  to  face  about. 

§  115.  That  he  may  be  able  to  preserve  order  in  the  rear  guard  when  retreating  in  sight  of 
the  enemy,  especially  during  the  rigor  of  his  pursuit,  the  commander  ought  not  to  conduct  the 
retreat  with  all  the  troops  at  once,  but  with  one  portion  fighting  to  protect  the  other,  which 
latter  in  the  meantime  retreats,  occujsies  an  advantageous  position  in  rear,  and  tlien  receives 
the  shock  of  the  enemy  in  turn,  thus  allowing  the  first  portion  to  pass  by  to  the  rear. 

§  116.  The  portion  of  the  rear  guard  covering  such  a  retreat  ought  to  avoid  engaging  in  a 
decisive  combat,  and  merely  check  the  enemy  long  enough  to  enable  the  portion  in  retreat  to 
gain  its  newly  chosen  position. 

§  117.  The  commander  of  a  rear  guard,  in  a  retreat,  should  resort  to  all  means  of  retarding 
the  pursuit  of  the  enemy ;  for  this  purpose,  he  orders  the  roads  to  be  broken  up,  bridges  to  be 
destroyed,  defiles  to  be  blocked  up,  &c. 

§  118.  During  an  ofiensive  march,  if  there  is  no  danger  of  an  attack  upon  the  rear  of  the 
column,  the  duties  of  the  commander  of  the  rear  guard  are  as  in  peace ;  he  superintends  the 
preservation  of  order  in  the  train,  and  picks  up  stragglers,  &c. 

§  119.  In  all  cases,  the  commanders  of  rear  guards  ought  to  report  to  the  commander  of  the 
main  body  everytliing  that  occurs  to  their  jjarty. 

ARTICLE  4. 

Duties  of  the  commanders  of  advanced,  flank,  and  rear  detachments. 
§  120.  Tliey  send  out  patrols,  as  laid  down  in  §  14,  to  examine  the  greatest  possible  amount 
of  ground  on  all  sides,  and  to  obtain  information  of  the  enemy  ;  the  number  of  the  patrols  must 
depend  upon  circumstances  and  the  nature  of  the  country. 


KEPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M°CLELLAN.  301 

In  open  country  they  are  small,  and  at  great  intervals  apart.  In  a  rough,  broken  country, 
in  foggy  or  very  rainy  weather,  in  night  marches,  the  number  of  patrols  is  increased,  and  they 
remain  near  their  detachments.  Patrols  are  not  sent  out  in  very  dark  nights,  unless  it  is 
absolutely  necessary. 

§  121.  The  commanders  of  detachments  upon  sending  out  patrols  should  instruct  them  in 
what  direction  to  march,  what  intervals  to  preserve,  and  to  what  objects  and  places  their  atten- 
tion should  chiefly  be  directed. 

§  122.  If  there  are  defiles,  woods,  villages,  &c.,  in  front,  the  advanced  and  flank  detachments 
should  examine  them  by  patrols  before  entering  them,  lest  they  should  be  suddenly  attacked 
and  cut  off. 

§  123.  On  approaching  a  village,  the  commander  of  a  detachment  orders  his  patrols  to  seize, 
in  some  way  or  other,  some  of  the  inhabitants  for  interrogation,  as  to  whether  the  enemy  is 
concealed  in  the  village,  or  its  vicinity ;  whether  he  has  passed  through  it ;  if  he  has  passed, 
in  what  force,  with  what  kind  of  troops,  when,  and  in  what  direction.  The  inhabitants  seized 
should  not  be  dismissed  until  the  whole  detachment  has  left  the  village. 

§  124.  Commanders  of  advanced,  flank,  and  rear  detachments,  upon  receiving  reports  from  their 
patrols,  should  endeavor  to  verify  them  in  person,  particularly  in  important  cases,  and  ought  not 
to  make  their  own  reports  until  fully  satisfied  of  the  truth  of  those  of  the  patrols. 

§  125.  Commanders  of  detachments  should  endeavor  to  maintain  a  constant  communication 
with  the  parties  on  their  flanks  by  means  of  patrols.  Flank  detachments  should  not  be  long 
separated  from  their  corps  by  imj)assable  places,  such  as  woods,  marshes,  lakes,  &c. ;  but  if 
these  obstacles  are  not  very  extensive,  the  detachment  and  its  patrols  march  on  the  outer  side  of 
them,  in  order  to  examine  the  country  more  fully. 

§  126.  If  the  enemy  appears,  or  attacks  in  force,  the  commanders  of  the  advanced,  flank,  and 
rear  detachments  call  in  their  patrols,  and,  without  accepting  combat,  retreat  upon  their  column 
under  cover  of  skirmishers,  merely  endeavoring  to  delay  the  enemy  as  long  as  possible.  If, 
however,  an  opportunity  offers  to  capture  one  of  the  enemy's  patrols,  without  delaying  its  own 
march,  the  detachment  should  undoubtedly  avail  itself  of  the  chance. 

CHAPTER  III. 

DUTIES  OF  PATROLS  DUEING  THE  MAECH. 

§  127.  Patrols  are  parties  of  various  strength  detached  either  from  troops  on  the  march  to 
examine  the  country,  or  from  troops  in  position  to  obtain  news  of  the  enemy. 

In  this  chapter,  patrols  of  the  first  kind  are  alone  treated  of ;  the  duties  of  patrols  sent  out  by 
troops  in  position  will  be  given  in  Part  II,  Chapter  IV. 

§  128.  The  principal  duty  of  patrols  is  to  discover  the  enemy  betimes,  and  thus  secure  the 
detachment  to  which  they  belong,  as  well  as  the  rest  of  the  army,  against  sudden  attacks. 

§  129.  Patrols  should  not  consist  of  less  than  12  or  15  men ;  for  they  ought  to  be  able  to 
attack  the  enemy's  patrols  by  surprise,  without  too  much  risk. 

§  130.  The  men  composing  a  patrol  should  not  keep  too  close  together,  but  stretch  out  as  much 
as  the  ground  and  the  force  of  the  patrol  will  permit ;  never  forgetting  that  it  is  very  important 
that  they  should  not  all  be  captured  at  once. 

§  131.  Patrols  on  the  march  move  at  a  fixed  distance  from  their  detachment,  keep  up  their 
communications,  never  lose  sight  of  each  other  if  they  can  avoid  it,  and  form  a  continuous  pro- 
tective chain  around  the  army. 


302  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

§  132.  In  a  patrol  of  15  men,  the  commander  arranges  them  as  follows  :  two  or  three  of  the 
most  intelligent  and  best  mounted  men  are  sent  in  advance  ;  if  one  is  sent  back  with  a  report, 
the  others  remain  in  advance,  and  keep  sight  of  the  object  reported.  The  rest  of  the  patrol 
march  according  to  the  arrangement  indicated  in  Plate  5,  fig.  1,  at  150  or  200  paces  behind 
these  advanced  men,  having  their  rear  guard  about  100  paces  behind. 

§  133.  Plate  5,  fig.  2,  shows  the  arrangement  of  a  patrol  of  30  men. 

Remarks. — 1st.  With  every  10  men  a  non-commissioned  officer  is  sent ;  30  men  and  over 
are  commanded  by  an  officer. 

2d.  The  men  in  front,  on  the  flanks,  and  in  rear  of  a  patrol,  are  caWedi  patrollers. 

§  134.  The  flank  patroUers  regulate  themselves  on  the  position  of  the  patrol,  which  is  on  the 
road,  and  endeavor  not  to  lose  sight  of  it.  They  take  care  not  to  be  separated  from  it  by 
impassable  obstacles  ;  for  this  reason,  when  they  meet  with  such  places,  they  join  the  advanced 
patrollers,  or  the  main  patrol  itself,  until  the  obstacle  is  passed. 

§  135.  During  the  night  the  patrols  draw  near  to  their  detachment,  and  endeavor  to  connect 
with  each  other  by  a  chain  of  men,  that  the  enemy  may  not  slip  through  the  intervals  under 
cover  of  the  darkness. 

§  136.  It  is  impossible  to  regulate,  with  exactness,  the  space  to  be  covered  by  patrols,  but  the 
following  remarks  will  serve  as  guides  : 

Patrols  should  cover  and  protect  the  march,  but  ought  not  to  scatter  so  much  as  to  be  unable 
to  assemble  quickly  if  they  meet  the  enemy.  In  a  level  country,  where  they  can  see  a  great 
distance  in  advance,  there  is  less  danger  in  stretching  out  than  in  a  broken,  wooded,  or  moun- 
tainous region.  The  main  consideration  is,  that  the  patrol  should  be  able  to  survey  at  a  glance 
the  whole  of  the  space  confided  to  it  ;  the  extent  of  this  space  will,  therefore,  depend  upon  the 
nature  of  the  ground,  as  well  as  upon  the  weather,  and  whether  the  march  is  at  night  or  in  the 
day  time. 

§  137.  A  detachment  destined  to  attack  the  enemy  by  surprise  should  not  send  out  its  jiatrols 
so  far  as  one  intended  merely  to  reconnoitre  ;  because  the  enemy,  being  warned  by  the  appear- 
ance of  the  patrols,  would  be  on  the  alert. 

§  138.  Patrollers  should  look  around  carefully  on  all  sides,  and  often  halt  to  listen.  If  they 
hear  the  slightest  sus^jicious  noise,  however  indefinite  in  its  nature,  particularly  at  night  or  in 
an  obstructed  country,  or  if  they  observe  dust,  smoke,  the  glitter  of  arms,  or  any  signs  whatever 
of  the  enemy,  such  as  the  sound  of  footsteps,  rumbling  of  wheels,  noise  of  horses,  &c.,  they  at 
once  inform  the  nearest  non-commissioned  officer,  who  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  detach- 
ment. The  whole  party  then  halts,  the  flank  patrols  face  outwards,  the  rear  guard  faces  to  the 
rear,  and  the  march  is  arrested  imtil  the  cause  of  the  noise  is  ascertained,  or  the  object  which 
attracted  attention  examined. 

Remark. — Reports  should  be  made  in  a  clear,  calm  tone  of  voice. 

§  139.  The  flank  patrols  ascend  every  eminence  on  the  side  of  their  route,  and  remain  there, 
facing  outwards,  until  the  detachment  passes  by  or  sends  another  patrol  to  relieve  them. 

Remark. — In  ascending  a  hill  to  reconnoitre,  one  man  should  precede  the  others,  riding  very 
slowly  ;  when  near  the  top  he  takes  ofi"  his  cap  and  moves  \r\)  just  far  enough  to  see  over,  covering 
himself  by  trees,  bushes,  &c.,  as  well  as  possible;  in  this  manner  he  may  see  the  enemy  without 
being  discovered  by  them. 

§  140.  Patrols  turn  their  attention  to  everything  which  may  disclose  the  movements  of  troops 
passing  by,  notice  the  direction  of  their  march,  &c. 

§141.  Patrols  should  examine  carefully  everything  which  may  conceal  the  enemy,  such  as 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  303 

houses,  woods,  coppices,  ravines,  &c.  In  passing  by  such  places,  the  patrols  endeavor  to 
ascertain  whether  they  are  occupied  hy  the  enemy,  and  then  either  occupy  them  themselves,  or 
pass  by  with  the  utmost  precaution.  Defiles,  bridges,  ravines,  hollow  ways,  dikes,  and  rivers, 
should  be  carefully  examined ;  having  passed  them,  the  front  patroUers  should  at  once  place 
themselves  on  the  highest  bank  to  observe  the  environs. 

§  142.  A  special  patrol  of  2  or  3  men  is  sent  to  examine  any  remarkable  object  which  is  too 
far  off  to  be  visited  by  the  flank  patroUers  ;  the  rest  halt,  and  await  their  return ;  such  patrols 
should  move  at  a  moderate  gait. 

§  143.  If  it  is  necessary  to  pass  through  a  village,  the  operation  is  conducted  as  follows  :  One 
of  the  front  patroUers  approaches  it.  If  it  is  in  the  day,  he  rides  through  several  streets  and 
asks  for  the  chief  person  of  the  place  ;  in  the  mean  time  the  other  front  patroUers  ride  along  the' 
skirts  of  the  village.  Having  found  the  chief  person  of  the  ^^lace,  the  front  patroUer  conducts 
him  to  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard,  which  now  approaches  the  village  ;  the  patroUer 
then  rides  through  the  village  with  his  comrades,  and  halts  on  the  further  side  in  some  elevated 
position.     There  they  await  the  arrival  of  the  advanced  guard. 

§  144.  If  a  village  is  to  be  passed  at  night,  the  front  patroUers  go  quietly  to  the  first  house, 
call  out  its  master,  take  him  away,  and  obtain  the  necessary  information  from  him  ;  afterwards 
they  go  for  the  chief  person  of  the  place. 

§  145.  Before  entering  a  woods,  the  front  patroUers  must  ascertain  that  the  enemy  does  not 
occupy  the  skirts,  and  one  or  two  men  should  ride  around  the  whole  woods,  if  it  is  not  too 
extensive  ;  all  the  cross-roads  should  be  examined  to  the  distance  of  several  hundred  paces  by 
flank  patrols,  who  afterwards  overtake  the  patrol.  Before  entering  open  fields  in  a  forest, 
patroUers  should  ride  all  around  the  edges. 

§  146.  The  patrols  detain  all  persons  met  on  the  road,  and  send  them  to  the  commander  of 
the  detachment  for  examination.  The  commander  retains,  under  guard,  all  who  are  suspicious 
characters,  as  well  as  those  who  have  witnessed  important  movements,  or  whose  testimony  is  of 
such  importance  as  to  need  verification. 

§  147.  Ui^on  the  appearance  of  hostile  patrols  and  patroUers,  flags  of  truce,  or  deserters,  our 
own  patroUers,  even  if  in  considerable  force,  at  once  inform  the  commander  of  the  patrol,  who, 
satisfying  himself  of  the  true  state  of  the  case,  at  once  takes  the  necessary  measures. 

If  he  sees  a  weak  patrol  of  the  enemy,  or  single  soldiers  straggling  off  for  pillage,  he  quietly 
endeavors  to  seize  and  disarm  them  ;  he  stops  the  flag  of  truce,  blindfolds,  and  places  him 
under  the  charge  of  a  trustworthy  soldier,  who,  not  allowing  him  to  turn  back,  conducts  him  to 
the  commander  of  the  detachment. 

§  148.  Whenever  the  commander  of  a  patrol  perceives,  from  a  distance,  the  approach  of  the 
enemy  in  strong  force,  he  at  once  informs  the  commander  of  the  detachment,  and  at  the  same 
time  endeavors  to  get  nearer  the  enemy  to  ascertain  his  strength,  &c.  ;  finally,  he  retreats  upon 
the  detachment  without  exposing  himself. 

Remark. — In  this,  and  all  similar  cases,  the  party  falling  back  should  move  as  slowly  and  in 
as  good  order  as  possible. 

§  149.  A  patrol  only  gives  notice  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy  by  firing  when  it  is  suddenly 
driven  in  and  has  no  time  to  send  a  report.  Therefore,  a  patrol  should  be  in  no  hurry  to  fire 
when  it  discovers  the  enemy ;  for  it  may  happen  that  we  see  him  before  he  discovers  us,  and  then, 
if  we  are  only  engaged  in  watching  him,  we  should  endeavor  to  fall  back  on  the  detachment 
without  being  observed. 

§  150.  Upon  the  first  shot  fired  by  the  patroUers,  the  whole  patrol  forms,  and  the  commander 


oU4  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

acts  according  to  circumstances.  If  the  enemy  is  the  stronger,  he  falls  back  upon  the  detach- 
ment, covering  himself  by  skirmishers  ;  but,  if  it  is  possible,  he  endeavors  ^to  caj^ture  the 
enemy's  patrollers,  and  sends  back  those  taken  to  the  commander  of  the  detachment. 

If  attacked  by  surprise,  the  patrol  should  defend  itself  to  the  utmost,  and  fire  a  few  shots, 
even  if  in  the  air,  to  warn  the  detachment  of  its  danger.  In  such  cases,  it  is  not  always  ad- 
visable to  retreat  by  the  direct  road. 

Remark. — The  commanders  of  parties  must  bear  in  mind  that  there  are  few  circumstances 
which  can  justify  the  surrender  of  cavalry  ;  proper  precautions  on  the  march  render  a  surprise 
next  to  impossible  ;  and  when  a  party  of  cavalry  is  attacked,  no  matter  how  suddenly,  or  by 
what  superiority  of  force,  a  determined  and  instantaneous  charge  will  always  enable  the  greater 
part  to  escape  in  safety.  Officers  and  men  should  therefore  always  have  have  their  wits  about 
them,  and  their  weapons  in  constant  readiness  for  use. 

§  151.  During  the  march,  patrols  are  not  permitted  to  wander  out  of  the  way,  nor  to  halt  to 
rest  at  their  discretion. 

§  152.  To  be  certain  that  their  orders  are  executed,  the  commanders  of  jjatrols  should  be 
alternately  at  the  head  and  on  the  flanks  ;  in  a  word,  everywhere,  that  they  may  see  and 
superintend  everything  for  themselves. 

§  153.  Should  it  happen  that  two  patrols  or  patrollers  meet  on  the  march,  even  if  they 
belong  to  the  same  regiment,  they  should  challenge  each  other,  as  directed  in  §  337. 

§  154.  During  halts,  the  patrols  continue  to  secure  the  troops  against  a  sudden  attack. 
Choosing  positions  from  which  it  is  easy  to  examine  the  country  around,  they  halt  in  the  same 
order  as  that  in  which  they  marched,  and  face  outward. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

IN  REFERENCE  TO  REGULATING  MARCHES  ACCORDING  TO  THE  LOCALITY. 
Of  advanced  guards. 

§  155.  It  is  but  seldom  that  any  one  arm  is  exclusively  employed  when  near  the  enemy  ;  on 
the  contrary,  it  is  usual  to  operate  with  a  combined  force  of  cavalry,  infantry  and  artillery,  so 
that  it  may  be  always  possible  to  employ  one  or  the  other  arm,  according  to  circumstances  and 
the  locality. 

§  156.  If  the  main  body  is  composed  of  the  different  arms,  then  the  advanced  guard  is  simi- 
larly constituted,  that  it  may  be  able  to  act  in  all  localities. 

§  157.  The  composition  of  such  an  advanced  guard  depends — 

1st.  Upon  the  object  and  nature  of  its  intended  operations.  During  marches  in  pursuit  it  is 
reinforced  by  cavalry;  but  if  it  is  to  make  an  obstinate  resistance,  it  is  strengthened  with  much 
infantry  and  artillery.  In  general,  light  cavalry  are  the  best  for  advanced  guards,  wherever 
the  nature  of  the  ground  permits  them  to  operate,  but  infantry  are  necessary  to  support  them. 
Mounted  rifles  and  mounted  engineer  troops  are  of  great  service  in  advanced  guards. 

2d.  The  composition  of  the  advanced  guard  depends  also  upon  the  locality  ;  if  the  ground  is 
broken,  much  infentry  is  required  ;  if  it  is  open,  much  cavalry,  and,  in  general,  light  troops. 

§  158.  The  order  of  march  of  an  advanced  guard  depends,  principally,  upon  its  composition, 
the  order  of  march  of  the  main  body,  the  locality,  &c.  The  main  rule  is,  that  it  should  never 
be  too  much  divided,  so  that  there  may  always  be  a  considerable  force  in  hand  to  seek  the 
enemy  more  boldly,  and  detain  him  longer.  Therefore,  even  when  the  main  body  moves  in 
several  columns,  the  principal  part  of  the  advanced  guard  marches  on  the  main  road,  sending 
only  small  parties  on  the  others  to  watch  the  enemy  and  detach  patrols  as  far  as  possible  in  all 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  305 

directions.  In  an  open,  level  country,  the  cavalry  marches  at  the  head  ;  in  a  broken  country, 
there  is  only  a  small  detachment  of  cavalry  at  the  head,  to  furnish  advanced  detachments  and 
patrols.  An  advanced  detachment  of  cavalry,  which  sends  out  patrols  in  front  and  on  its 
flanks,  moves  at  the  distance  of  a  few  miles  in  front  of  the  advanced  guard.  Small  detachments 
of  cavalry  move  in  a  line  with  it  on  the  other  roads  ;  also  others  on  the  flanks  of  the  main 
advanced  guard,  to  secure  it  against  being  turned.  All  the  front  and  flank  detachments  main- 
tain a  constant  mutual  communication  by  means  of  patrols,  and  thus  keep  in  sight  the  whole 
space  in  front  of  the  main  body  over  a  great  extent.  But  if  the  flank  columns  of  the  main  body 
march  at  a  great  distance  from  the  main  road  followed  by  the  advanced  guard,  then,  in  addition 
to  this  last,  each  flank  column  detaches  a  small  advanced  guard  for  its  own  security. 

§  159.  If  the  advanced  guard  is  composed  of  different  arms,  its  distance  from  the  main  body 
depends  not  only  upon  its  strength,  but  also  on  the  following  circumstances  :  1.  On  its  compo- 
sition. Cavalry  may  advance  much  further  than  infantry.  2.  Upon  the  locality.  The  more 
fully  the  nature  of  the  country  secures  the  advanced  guard  against  being  turned,  the  further 
may  it  move  from  the  main  body.  3.  Upon  the  object  in  view.  Prior  to  defensive  combats  in 
position,  it  is  advantageous  to  have  the  advanced  guard  as  far  from  the  main  body  as  possible, 
in  order  to  secure  time  for  making  the  necessary  arrangements  ;  but  if  the  main  body  is  already 
concentrated  for  a  decisive  attack  upon  the  enemy,  it  is  sometimes  well  to  be  entirely  without 
an  advanced  guard  ;  during  a  pursuit,  the  main  body  should  follow  the  advanced  guard  as 
closely  as  possible.  4.  Upon  the  order  of  march  of  the  main  body.  The  longer  the  time 
needed  by  the  main  body  to  form  in  order  of  battle,  on  account  of  the  intei^vals  between  the 
columns,  the  nature  of  the  ground  between  them,  the  length  of  the  columns,  &c.,  so  much 
further  forward  should  the  advanced  guard  be  pushed.  In  general,  the  distance  of  the 
advanced  guai'd  from  the  head  of  the  main  body  should  be  a  little  greater  than  the  interval 
between  the  outside  columns  of  the  main  body. 

§  160.  Plate  No.  4  gives  an  example  of  the  arrangement  of  an  advanced  guard  composed  of 
one  brigade  of  light  cavalry,  8  battalions  of  infantry,  one  battalion  of  sappers,  6  pieces  of  horse 
artillery,  and  12  pieces  of  foot  artillery  ;  the  main  body  following  in  3  columns.  Disregarding 
minute  details,  this  is  established  as  the  basis  of  the  arrangement  of  an  advanced  guard,  without 
regard  to  the  ground. 

Whatever  slight  changes  may  be  made  necessary  by  the  nature  of  the  country,  can  easily  be 
made  with  the  aid  of  a  map  and  the  special  information  obtained  in  other  ways. 

§  161.  If  the  country  is  partially  broken  and  obstructed,  it  is  advantageous  to  have  four  or  five 
companies  of  infantry  just  behind  the  leading  detachment  of  cavalry  to  examine  places  that  are 
difficult  or  dangerous  for  the  latter. 

§  162.  Upon  the  plains  the  patrols  are  of  cavalry  ;  in  a  mountainous  region,  of  infantry.  In 
the  latter  case,  not  only  the  advanced  detachments  and  patrols  are  of  infantry,  but  also  the  head 
and  rear  of  every  column  ;  the  cavalry  and  artillery  march  in  the  middle,  under  the  protection 
of  the  infantry. 

§  163.  In  passing  through  a  village,  the  infantry  enter  it  first,  if  there  are  any  with  the 
advanced  guard  ;  the  cavalry  either  ride  rapidly  around  it,  or,  according  to  circumstances,  halt 
a  little  before  reaching  the  village,  and  wait  until  the  infantry  have  passed  through. 

§  164.  The  passage  of  important  bridges,  ravines,  and  defiles,  should  be  effected  in  the  same 
manner,  the  infantry  examining  them.     As  soon  as  the  infantry  have  crossed  and  formed  on  the 

39  © 


306  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

other  side,  the  cavalry  send  out  patrols  to  a  great  distance  to  examine  the  ground  in  front 
before  the  main  body  of  the  advanced  guard  begins  to  cross. 

The  advanced  guard,  having  crossed  rapidly,  forms  in  front  of  the  passage  to  cover  the  debouche 
of  the  main  body.  The  distance  of  such  a  position  from  the  passage  should  be  such  that,  in  the 
event  of  being  attacked,  the  advanced  guard  may  not  be  too  quickly  forced  back  upon  the  main 
body  while  debouching,  and  that  the  latter  may  have  ample  time  to  form  without  disorder. 

§  IGo.  Since  attacks  should  be  most  expected  when  passing  through  defiles,  or  when  issuing 
from  them,  they  should  be  traversed  raj)idly,  and  with  the  most  extended  front  possible,  to  pre- 
vent the  column  from  stretching  out.  In  passing  long  defiles  the  troops  should  occasionally 
halt  for  a  moment,  to  close  up  and  re-establish  order. 

§  166.  As  for  the  rest,  an  advanced  guard  possessing  a  certain  degree  of  independence,  without 
neglecting  any  of  the  precautions  here  laid  dovv^n,  should  not  be  too  apprehensive,  and,  in  exam- 
ining the  country,  ought  not  to  detain  itself  with  objects  which,  from  their  nature,  cannot  con- 
ceal the  enemy  in  sufficient  force  to  make  him  dangerous  to  the  advanced  guard. 

§  1G7.  In  very  mountainous  regions  it  is  necessary  to  rely  upon  the  infantry  alone  ;  the  cavalry 
and  train  remaining  in  rear,  and  not  entering  the  defiles  until  they  have  been  occupied.  Here  the 
infantry  patrols  are  sent  out  as  far  as  possible,  and  occupy  the  heights  from  which  the  direction  of 
the  columns  may  be  seen,  until  relieved  by  the  patrols  of  the  rear  guard,  which  is  also  of  infantry. 
In  this  manner  the  cavalry,  which  the  enemy  would  attack  in  such  places  in  preference,  is 
protected.  Not  a  gorge  or  defile  should  be  left  unexamined,  for  in  the  mountains  an  attack  may 
be  expected  at  a%y  moment. 

§  168.  In  a  wooded  country  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  takes  nearly  the  same 
precaution  as  in  the  mountains. 

If  the  forest  is  deep,  but  not  broad,  detachments  of  cavalry  ride  along  the  skirts,  which 
are  occupied  by  infantry  skirmishers  as  sujjports  ;  if  the  forest  is  dense,  but  not  deep,  the 
infantry  lead.  The  infantry  place  themselves  along  the  skirts  of  the  wood  on  both  sides  of  the 
road  ;  the  cavalry  then  passes  through  at  a  fast  trot,  forms  on  the  plain  beyond,  and  there  awaits 
the  rest  of  the  column. 

§169.  When  the  road  passes  through  a  country  but  little  obstructed  by  defiles,  villages,  or 
other  obstacles  to  the  movements  of  cavalry,  and  there  is  no  infantry  with  the  advanced  guard, 
mounted  rifles  are  very  useful  ;  finally,  the  enemy,  in  retreating  through  such  a  country,  leaves 
infantry  at  these  obstacles  to  arrest  the  pursuit  of  the  cavalry,  and  delay  until  the  arrival  of  the 
infantry  ;  in  such  cases,  mounted  rifles  or  dismounted  dragoons  will  produce  sure  results  by  acting 
against  the  enemy's  infantry. 

OF  THE  MAIN  BODY. 

§  lYO.  It  remains  to  be  said,  in  reference  to  this,  that  the  nature  of  the  country  must  determine 
its  order  of  march,  whether  cavalry  or  infantry  are  to  lead.  If  the  country  is  broken,  particularly 
if  it  is  wooded,  there  is  great  danger  in  placing  the  cavalry  at  the  head  ;  for  it  may  not  only  be 
unable  to  act,  but,  if  forced  to  retreat,  may  carry  disorder  into  the  infantry  following. 

The  artillery  should  march  in  tlie  midst  of  the  other  troops,  but  a  few  pieces  may  move  with 
the  head  of  the  column,  to  protect  it  in  case  of  meeting  the  enemy  suddenly. 

§171.  If  there  are  infantry,  then  in  traversing  extensive  forests,  in  which  parties  of  the  enemy 
may  easily  conceal  themselves,  the  flank  detachments  and  patrols  of  cavalry  are  replaced  by 
infantry. 


KEPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  307 


OF  THE  REAR  GUARD. 

§172.  In  §19  the  duties  of  a  rear  guard  in  a  retreat  are  described  as  being  important,  and 
sometimes  even  more  important  than  those  of  the  advanced  guard  in  the  offensive.  Therefore, 
not  only  the  force  but  the  composition  of  the  rear  guard  should  correspond  to  the  importance  of 
its  duties ;  if  the  main  body  consists  of  troops  of  the  different  arms,  the  rear  guard  should  be  com- 
posed in  like  manner. 

§  173.  Its  order  of  march  must  depend  not  only  upon  the  locality,  the  number,  direction,  and 
separationof  the  roads,  and  the  degree  of  security  of  the  flanks,  but  also  upon  the  order  of  march 
of  the  main  body,  and  the  manner  in  which  the  pursuing  enemy  operates.  Frequ  entlj^  the 
march  of  the  rear  guard  becomes  a  fighting  retreat.  If  the  enemy  does  not  follow  directly  on  its 
heels,  its  arrangements  will  generally  be  nearly  the  same  as  those  of  an  advanced  guard  in  the 
offensive ;  but  in  this  case  it  is  necessary  to  turn  the  closest  attention  to  the  roads  on  the  flanks, 
because  the  pursuing  enemy  usually  endeavors  to  turn  the  retreating  rear  guard  with  a  part  of  his 
force,  in  order  to  keejJ  it  constantly  in  retreat,  and  prevent  it  from  holding  the  positions  it  has 
selected.  For  this  reason,  there  should  be  on  the  flank  roads  not  only  patrols  from  the  rear 
guard,  but  parties  strong  enough  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check. 

§  174.  In  districts  where  there  are  extensive  plains,  the  rear  of  the  rear  guard  is  reinforced 
by  all  its  cavalry,  so  that  the  infantry  may  move  forward  to  occupy  any  hills,  woods,  or  other 
favorable  positions. 

§  175.  As  in  a  mountainous,  wooded,  or  broken  country,  the  cavalry  of  the  advanced  guard 
marches  in  rear  of  the  other  troops,  so,  in  a  rear  guard  retreating  through  a  similar  country,  the 
cavalry  forms  the  head  of  the  column,  marching  under  the  protection  of  the  infantry,  with 
which  latter  there  is  only  a  small  party  of  cavalry  for  sending  rapid  information  of  the  approach 
of  the  enemy. 

§  17G.  It  is  stated  in  §  115  that,  to  preserve  the  requisite  good  order,  the  retreat  of  the  rear 
guard  should  not  be  by  all  the  troops  at  once,  but  by  alternate  portions,  so  that  one  part  may 
fight  to  protect  the  retreat  of  the  other.  According  to  this,  upon  approaching  a  defile  or  brido-e, 
around  which  the  cavalry  cannot  pass,  the  greatest  part  of  it  should  be  sent  on  early  to  pass 
through. 

A  few  guns  are  placed  in  front  of  such  obstacles,  under  the  protection  of  a  party  of  infantry, 
to  keep  the  enemy  at  a  distance,  while  the  rest  of  the  infantry  and  artillery  pass  the  defile, 
availing  themselves  of  all  the  heights  on  both  sides  to  protect  those  in  retreat  against  the  attack 
of  the  enemy,  and  to  cover  the  flanks.  Therefore,  the  ground  should  be  examined  early,  that 
it  may  be  occupied  betimes  for  defence  by  infantry  and  artillery.  After  having  passed  the 
defile,  the  cavalry  forms  in  order  of  battle,  out  of  cannon  range. 

If  the  enemy  endeavors  to  pursue  the  rear  guard  beyond  the  defile,  the  cavalry  should  if 
the  ground  permits,  stop  or  delay  his  pursuit  by  an  attack  upon  the  front  and  flanks  of  the  head 
of  his  column,  so  as  to  give  the  infantry  and  artillery  time  to  gain  the  necessary  ground.  In 
such  cases,  there  is  an  advantage  in  having  j^assed  the  defile,  so  as  to  attack  with  a  superior 
front  the  head  of  the  enemy's  column  as  he  debouches. 

§  177.  If  a  village  is  to  be  traversed,  it  is  first  occupied  by  a  suflScient  force  of  infantry,  and 
the  cavalry  then  either  passes  around  it,  or,  which  is  quicker,  rides  rapidly  throuo-h  it,  if  this 
can  be  done  without  masking  the  fire  of  the  infantry.  Having  passed  beyond  the  villao'e  the 
cav.alry  and  horse  artillery  come  into  position  to  cover  the  retreat  of  the  infantry. 


308  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

§  178.  In  a  reti-eat,  dismounted  rifles  or  dragoons,  availing  themselves  of  the  obstacles  of  the 
ground,  may  arrest  the  pursuit  of  the  enemy,  without  fearing,  as  in  the  case  of  infantry,  to 
remain  behind  the  main  body  of  the  rear  guard. 

§  179.  Finally,  if  the  enemy  acts  imprudently,  the  rear  guard  may  form  ambuscades  for  him, 
or  force  him  to  slacken  the  pursuit  by  resuming  the  offensive  for  a  time. 

§  180.  The  commander  of  the  rear  guard  should  always  regulate  himself  upon  the  movements 
of  the  main  body,  always  holding  every  position  as  obstinately  as  possible,  lest  a  premature 
retreat  on  his  part  should  bring  the  enemy  suddenly  upon  the  main  body. 

PART  II. 

PRECAUTIONS  TO  BE  OBSER^^D  IN  CAMPS(<»)  FOR  SECITRITY  AGAINST  THE  ENEMY. 

CHAPTER  I. 

DUTIES  OF  ALL  PARTS  OF  THE  OUTPOSTS. 
ARTICLE  1. 

Of  the  outposts  in  general. 

§  181.  The  outposts  are  detachments  upon  whom  is  imposed  the  duty  of  securing  the  other 
troops  against  sudden  attacks. 

§  182.  They  are  independent  of,  and  in  addition  to,  the  camp  and  quarter  guards,  whose  duty 
it  is  to  watch  over  the  interior  order  and  police  of  the  camp. 

§  183.  Light  cavalry  are  employed  on  outpost  duty  wherever  the  ground  permits  them  to 
act ;  in  cases  of  absolute  necessity,  the  outposts  consist  of  infantry. 

§  184.  The  outposts  consist  of: 

1.  A  chain  of  double  videttes. 

2.  Pickets,  which  are  the  immediate  supports  of  the  videttes. 

3.  Main  guards,  placed  as  supports  in  rear  of  the  pickets. 

§  185.  If  the  outposts  are  pushed  very  far  to  the  front,  or  if  the  nature  of  the  ground  is  such 
as  to  render  their  retreat  difficult,  parties,  called  reserves  of  the  outposts,  are  placed  between  the 
outposts  and  the  troops  guarded,  to  serve  as  a  reserve  and  sujijDort  for  the  former. 

§  186.  The  outposts  should  enclose  all  the  places  and  observe  all  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy 
can  approach  the  camp  guarded. 

§  187.  The  chain  of  outposts  is  placed  in  front  of  the  general  position  of  the  troops,  so  as  to 
intersect  all  the  roads  leading  towards  the  enemy.  It  forms  a  curved  line,  falling  back  on  the 
flanks. 

§  188.  The  outposts  should  be  pushed  so  far  to  the  front  that,  while  in  no  danger  of  being  cut 
off,  they  may  give  timely  notice  of  the  enemy's  approach,  and  keep  him  long  enough  in  check 
to  enable  the  troops  guarded  to  prepare  to  receive  him. 

For  this  purpose  the  chain  of  mounted  videttes  is  usually  placed  at  not  more  than  3  miles  in 
front  of  the  camj) ;  the  pickets  not  more  than  three-fourths  of  a  mile  in  rear  of  the  videttes  ;  the 
main  guards  at  about  the  same  distance  behind  the  pickets. 

§  189.  The  interval  between  the  pairs  of  videttes  composing  the  chain  should  be  such  that  in 
the  day  time  they  can  see  each  other,  and  in  the  night  hear  everj'thing  that  happens  between 
them. 

('•)Tlie  term  camp  is  here  used  in  its  most  general  sense,  Including  all  the  arrangements  of  the  troops  when  halted, 
whether  in  tents,  huts,  hivouac,  or  villages,  provided  they  are  not  in  cantonments  or  winter  quarters.  The  term  encamp- 
ment refers  particularly  to  a  camp  of  tents  or  huts. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  309 

§  190.  The  object  of  the  pickets  and  main  guards  being  merely  to  receive  the  chain,  they  are 
composed  of  small  numbers  of  men.  Therefore,  a  picket  consists  of  about  a  platoon,  and  a  main 
guard  of  about  a  company. 

§  191.  The  commander-in-chief  determines  approximately  the  general  direction  and  extent  of 
the  chain ;  in  conformity  therewith,  there  are  detailed  the  number  of  men  necessary  to  guard  the 
space  designated.     The  subordinate  commanders  carry  out  the  details  as  follows  : 

§  192.  A  field  officer,  or  captain,  commanding  two  companies,  conducts  them  to  the  place  where 
the  main  guard  is  to  be  posted ;  leaving  one  company  there,  he  takes  the  other  to  form  the 
pickets  and  videttes,  and  accompanies  one  of  the  platoons  himself,  to  superintend  the  proper 
posting  of  the  videttes.  Separating  gradually — one  moving  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the  left — the 
two  platoons  continue  to  move  on  until  the  interval  between  them  is  about  three-fourths  of  a 
mile,  and  their  distance  from  the  main  guard  about  the  same  ;  they  then  halt.  The  commander 
of  each  platoon,  having  cut  off  6  men  for  patrols  and  carrying  reports,  divides  the  rest  of  his 
platoon  into  3  reliefs. 

He  then  conducts  the  first  relief  to  the  chain.  The  non-commissioned  officer  designated  to  post 
the  videttes  accompanies  the  relief;  if  there  is  but  one  officer  with  the  platoon,  the  senior  non- 
commissioned officer  takes  command  of  the  picket  until  the  return  of  the  officer. 

The  commander  of  the  picket  having  conducted  the  first  relief  to  one  flank  of  the  line  he  is  to 
occupy,  posts  the  videttes  so  that  they  may  be  in  full  communication  with  the  videttes  of  the 
neighboring  pickets.  The  captain  of  the  company  which  furnishes  the  pickets  will  command 
the  more  important  of  the  two  pickets. 

§  193.  Supposing  each  platoon  to  consist  of  30  men,  the  main  guard  will  consist  of  60,  and 
each  picket,  deducting  the  6  men  for  patrols,  of  24  men  ;  each  picket  will  thus  furnish  4  pairs  of 
videttes,  the  two  together  8  pairs  ;  supposing  the  intervals  between  the  pairs  of  videttes  to  be 
from  300  to  500  paces,  the  line  occupied  will  be  from  2,400  to  4,000  paces.  In  this  manner  two 
companies,  each  60  strong,  will  furnish  a  main  guard  and  two  pickets,  which  may  watch  a  space 
of  about  2  miles. — (See  Plate  5,  Fig.  3.) 

ARTICLE  2. 

Duties  of  the  videttes  of  the  advanced  chain. 

§  194.  In  each  pair  of  videttes,  one  is  designated  as  the  chief  vidette.  Both  remain  mounted' 
the  one  in  front  has  his  carbine  advanced,  or  pistol  drawn  ;  the  vidette  in  rear  is  permitted  to 
sling  his  carbine. 

§  195.  For  the  purpose  of  challenging  all  who  approach  the  chain,  the  videttes  are  furnished 
with  the  countersign  ;  they  are  to  remember  it  and  keep  it  secret. 

§  196.  They  must  be  always  vigilant  and  cautious;  therefore,  everything  which  may  in  the 
least  distract  their  attention  is  strictly  forbidden,  such  as  talking,  smoking,  whistling,  sinking 
&c. ;  even  horses  that  are  much  in  the  habit  of  neighing  are  not  placed  in  the  chain. 

§  197.  They  must  keep  in  view  all  the  space  between  them,  so  that  individuals  may  not  cross 
clandestinely. 

Therefore,  one  man  in  each  pair  should,  in  turn,  look  and  listen  carefully,  lest  anythinf  occur 
in  the  direction  of  the  enemy  or  of  the  next  pairs  ;  the  other  man  places  himself  some  paces 
behind  the  first,  to  relieve  the  tension  of  sight  and  hearing. 

During  the  day,  in  open  country,  they  merely  look  towards  the  neighboring  pairs ;  in  a  rough, 
obstructed  country,  at  night,  or  in  a  fog,  when  it  is  impossible  to  see  the  next  pairs,  one  man, 


310  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

in  his  turn,  carrying  liis  weapons  as  prescribed  for  the  front  vidette  in  §  194,  must  constantly 
ride  along  the  chain  to  the  next  pair,  or  until  meeting  one  of  its  members.  When  they  are  posted 
in  sight  of  the  enemy,  or  very  near  him,  they  may  give  each  other  preconcerted  signals,  (such 
as  tapping  the  carbine,  or  some  such  noise,)  being  careful,  however,  that  the  signals  employed 
are  of  such  a  nature  as  not  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  enemy. 

§  198.  Upon  observing  anything  whatever  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  as,  for  example, 
extraordinary  movements,  dust,  noise,  kindling  or  extinguishing  fires,  cliangcs  in  his  outposts, 
drawing  them  in  or  reinforcing  them,  &c.,  the  chief  vidette  sends  in  the  other  to  inform  the 
commander  of  the  picket,  remaining  himself  on  the  spot  to  continue  watching  what  attracted 
iiis  attention. 

In  the  day  time,  when  in  full  view  of  the  picket,  instead  of  one  of  the  videttes  riding  in  to 
report,  they  may,  in  certain  cases,  act  as  follows :  If  anything  suspicious  is  observed  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  enemy,  such  as  dust,  glittering  of  arms_,  &c.,  one  of  the  videttes  will  move  his  horse 
in  a  circle  at  a  walk  ;  upon  this,  the  commander  of  the  picket  will  take  3  or  4  men  and  at  once 
ride  to  the  vidette  to  examine  the  matter  for  himself.  If  the  videttes  discover  a  party  of  the 
enemy  advancing  towards  them,  but  at  a  gi'cat  distance,  one  of  them  will  move  his  horse  in  a 
circle  at  a  trot,  on  which  the  officer  will  act  as  just  prescribed.  If  the  videttes  discover  a  jjarty 
of  the  enemy  coming  towards  them,  and  not  more  than  a  mile  off,  one  of  them  will  at  once 
move  his  horse  in  a  circle  at  a  gallop,  on  which  the  officer  will  act  according  to  circumstances. 

By  both  the  videttes  riding  in  a  circle  at  the  same  time,  in  the  same  and  opposite  directions, 
and  at  the  dift'erent  gaits,  the  number  of  signals  may  be  much  increased. 

§  199.  Unless  they  have  special  orders  to  the  contrary,  the  videttes  permit  no  one  to  cross  the 
chain  towards  the  enemy,  except  officers'  detachments,  and  patrols  personally  known  to  them. 
If  they  observe  any  one  attempting  to  steal  over,  they  detain  him  until  the  arrival  of  the  relief, 
or  patrol,  and  then  send  him  to  the  commander  of  the  picket. 

§  200.  If  the  commander  of  the  picket  approaches  in  the  day  time,  they  do  not  challenge 
him,  but  both  videttes  advance  carbine  or  draw  pistol,  and  the  chief  vidette  alone  reports 
whether  anything  worthy  of  the  slightest  attention  has  been  observed. 

§  201.  If  any  iserson,  not  personally  known  to  the  videttes,  approaches  along  the  chain,  the 
front  vidette  halts  him  at  50  paces  from  the  post,  by  crying,  in  a  low  tone,  "  Halt!  ivJio  comes 
there?"  If  the  reply  is  satisfactory,  and  the  orders  are  to  pass  persons  with  the  countersign, 
he  then  cries,  "  Advance  and  give  the  countersign !"  or,  if  it  is  a  party  that  has  approached,  he 
directs  one  person  to  advance  and  give  the  countersign,  not  allowing  him  to  approach  nearer 
than  ten  paces  for  the  purpose.  If  the  party  challenged  does  not  reply,  and  persists  in  at- 
tempting to  pass  the  chain,  the  front  vidette  cocks  his  piece,  goes  to  meet  him,  aiming  at  him, 
halts  close  to  him,  and  twice  repeats  the  challenge,  "  Halt !  who  comes  there  ?"  If  the  person 
does  not  reply  to  the  third  challenge,  the  vidette  shoots  him. 

liemark. — It  is  to  be  understood  that  videttes  fire  only  upon  persons  who  are  armed,  or  resist ; 
with  regard  to  others  who  approach  the  chain  without  the  countersign,  they  are  merely  stopped, 
and  treated  as  directed  in  the  following  section  : 

§  202.  If  the  person  approaching  has  the  coimtersign,  then,  in  the  day  time,  the  vidette 
allows  him  to  pass,  but  not  nearer  than  10  paces  to  the  post ;  if  he  has  not  the  countersign,  the 
vidette  directs  him  to  halt  at  50  paces  from  the  post,  and  turn  his  back  to  it,  (if  he  is  on  horse- 
back, he  is  made  to  dismount,)  and  awaits  the  arrival  of  the  relief  or  patrol,  to  whom  he  turns 
him  over  as  a  prisoner,  to  be  taken  to  the  commander  of  the  picket. 

§  203.  In  the  night,  when  it  is  impossible  to  recognize  the  faces  of  those  approaching,  the 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLA^.  3 1  1 

videttes  act  in  the  following  manner :  If  the  reply  to  the  challenge,  "  Halt!  ivlio  comes  there  h' 
is,  a  general,  an  officer,  patrol,  relief,  or  rounds,  the  countersign  is  demanded,  as  already 
explained,  and  if  it  is  properly  given,  the  party  is  allowed  to  pass.  If  the  party  does  not 
know  the  countersign,  one  of  the  sentinels  at  once  rides  to  the  commander  of  the  picket  and 
receives  his  orders.  But  other  military  employes,  and  enlisted  men,  even  if  they  have  the 
countersign,  are  not  permitted  to  cross  the  chain  at  night,  but  are  treated  as  is  directed  in  the 
preceding  §  for  people  who  do  not  know  the  countersign  in  the  day. 

§204.  Whilst  the  chief  vidette  interrogates  the  person  who  has  approached  the  chain,  the 
other  cocks  his  piece,  and  watches  in  all  directions  with  redoubled  attention. 

§  205.  If  a  flag  of  truce,  or,  in  general,  any  one  whose  business  is  of  such  a  nature  as  not  to 
permit  him  to  await  the  arrival  of  a  relief  or  patrol,  approaches  the  chain,  the  chief  vidette 
sends  in  the  other  to  report  to  the  commander  of  the  picket. 

Flags  of  truce  are  not  received  at  night,  excej^t  under  very  peculiar  circumstances. 

§  206.  If  any  one  whatsoever  approaches  the  post  from  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  even  if  of 
th^ir  own  command,  the  videttes  halt  them,  and  do  not  allow  them  to  approach  within  50 
paces  ;  the  junior  vidette  then  rides  in  to  report  to  the  commander  of  the  picket. 

The  only  exception  to  this  rule  is  the  case  of  a  returning  patrol,  if  it  consists  of  men  of  the 
same  regiment  as  the  videttes,  and  if  the  latter  recognize  the  persons  of  the  officer  and  men 
composing  it. 

§  207.  If  deserters  from  the  enemy  approach,  the  vidette  halts  them  also  at  50  paces,  orders 
them  to  lay  down  their  arms,  to  dismount,  if  mounted,  and  to  retire  a  little  beyond  the  50  paces. 

Then  the  junior  vidette  rides  in  to  rej^ort  to  the  commander  of  the  picket,  while  the  other, 
cocking  his  piece,  watches  the  new  arrivals. 

§  208.  If  the  videttes  discover  the  approach  of  the  enemy,  they  at  once  inform  the  commander 
of  the  picket ;  but  if  he  appears  suddenly  in  front  of  the  chain,  they  give  the  alarm  by  tiring. 
They  should  fire  only  when  he  approaches  resolutely ;  to  fire  without  necessity,  and  without 
being  satisfied  that  it  is  really  the  enemy,  would  be  merely  to  create  useless  alarm. 

§  209.  Upon  hearing  a  shot,  the  other  videttes  redouble  their  vigilance  and  attention,  exerting 
themselves  to  discover  what  is  going  on  where  the  shot  was  fired;  but  not  leaving  their  posts 
without  receiving  a  signal  or  special  orders  to  do  so,  unless  driven  in,  when  they  will  rally  on 
the  picket. 

ARTICLE  3. 

Duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  pickets. 

§  210.  With  every  picket  there  must  be  an  officer  and  a  trumpeter. 

§  211.  The  officer  detailed  for  duty  with  a  picket  should  have  the  parole,  watchword  and 
countersign  for  the  day. 

Upon  reaching  his  post,  he  communicates  the  countersign  to  all  the  men  ;  he  gives  the  loatch- 
word  only  to  the  non-commissioned  officers  who  are  to  be  sent  out  with  patrols  and  reliefs. 

§  212.  Having  conducted  his  platoon  to  the  position  it  is  to  occupy,  he  acts  as  directed  in 
§  192,  and  posts  the  1st  relief  in  person.     The  non-commissioned  officer  who  is  to  post  the 
next  relief  rides  with  him ;  if  there  is  no  other  officer  present,  the  senior  non-commissioned 
officer  remaining  with  the  picket  sees  that  all  the  men  remain  mounted  and  fully  ready  to  move 
until   the  return  of  the  commander. 

§  213.  The  first  relief  is  posted  as  in  time  of  peace. 

§  214.  When  posting  each  vidette,  the  commander  of  the  picket  gives  them  their  instructions 


312  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

■where  to  stand,  and  to  what  their  attention  should  be  chiefly  directed  ;  he  points  out  the 
direction  in  which  they  are  to  retreat  in  case  of  necessity,  and  designates  the  number  of  each 
post.  He  designates  the  most  reliable  and  experienced  man  of  each  pair  of  videttes  as  chief 
vidette. 

§  215.  In  arranging  the  intervals  between  the  pairs  of  videttes,  he  should  endeavor  to  post 
them  in  positions  whence  they  can  see  as  far  as  possible  in  all  directions,  and  at  the  same  time 
be  as  little  conspicious  to  the  enemy  as  practicable  ;  for  this  purpose  it  is  best  to  place'  them  on 
the  heights  during  the  day,  and  behind  the  hill,  at  its  foot,  during  the  night. 

§  216.  The  intervals  between  the  pairs  should  be  such  that  they  can  see  all  the  ground 
between  them  ;  no  precise  rules  can  be  laid  down  in  respect  to  this,  as  in  some  cases  the  chain 
will  be  close,  and  in  others  scattered;  as  in  an  open  country  there  is  no  advantage  in  an 
unnecessarily  close  chain,  so  in  an  obstructed  country  it  is  improper  to  place  the  v'dettes  far 
apart.  In  some  localities  it  may  be  necessary  to  post  them  not  more  than  100  paces  apart, 
while  in  others  the  intervals  may  be  500  paces. 

§  217.  If  the  chain,  or  a  portion  of  it,  is  placed  in  advance  of  a  stream,  ravine,  wide  ditch, 
or  other  obstacle,  the  commander  of  the  picket  must  see  that  the  passages  across  are  in  good 
condition,  so  that  in  case  of  attack  the  videttes  can  easily  rally  on  the  picket,  and  the  latter 
have  free  communication  with  its  videttes. 

§  218.  It  is  also  absolutely  necessary  that  the  commander  of  the  picket  should  see  that 
no  pair  of  videttes  is  entirely  composed  of  men  ignorant  of  the  duty,  but  that  as  far  as  possible 
one  of  them  should  be  an  experienced  and  reliable  soldier,  to  be  designated  as  chief  vidette;  he 
should  also  watch  that  no  near-sighted  person  is  placed  on  the  chain  during  the  day,  nor  any 
one  dull  of  hearing  in  the  night. 

§  219.  Upon  posting  the  chain  of  videttes,  it  becomes  evident  whether  the  picket  can  furnish 
a  sufficient  number  of  men  to  keep  one-third  on  duty;  if  there  is  a  deficiency  in  the  chain,  the 
requisite  number  of  men  are  taken  from  the  picket,  which  is  reinforced  from  the  main  guard. 
If  there  are  more  men  than  necessary,  the  commander  of  the  picket  disposes  of  the  supernumera- 
ries in  accordance  with  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  main  guard. 

§  220.  Having  posted  the  1st  relief  of  videttes,  the  commander  returns  to  his  picket,  and 
places  it  in  the  best  position ;  that  is  to  say,  one  convenient  for  receiving  and  supporting  the 
videttes,  not  visible  from  the  side  of  the  enemy,  and  which  the  latter  cannot  j^ass  around ;  it  is 
selected  in  preference  on  a  road  leading  towards  the  enemy,  and  especially  at  cross  roads,  j 

§  221.  At  the  picket  a  sentinel  is  posted,  mounted  or  dismounted,  according  to  the  locality, 
and  so  placed  that  he  can  see  the  whole  or  the  greater  part  of  the  chain,  and  observe  what 
occurs  there.  If  this  sentinel  is  mounted,  he  carries  his  weapons  as  directed  for  the  front  vidette 
in  §  194. 

§  222.  After  this,  the  commander  orders  the  men  to  dismount;  during  the  day,  one-half  of  the 
men  at  a  time  may  be  allowed  to  unbit  and  feed  their  horses.  In  the  night,  all  the  horses  ought 
to  be  bitted,  and  one-half  the  men  in  perfect  readiness  to  mount.  One-half  of  the  men  may  be 
allowed  to  sleep  in  the  day  time.  Under  certain  circumstances  it  may  be  necessary  to  keep  the 
whole  or  a  part  of  the  picket  mounted  during  the  night. 

§  223.  Having  arranged  the  videttes  and  picket,  the  commander  reports  his  dispositions,  as 
well  as  everything  he  has  observed,  to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard,  unless  the  latter  was 
present  at  the  time. 

§  224.  All  reports  concerning  the  outposts  are  made  either  verbal!/,  through  a  non-commissioned 
officer,  or  in  pencil,  with  the  most  concise  expressions,  and  not  observing  the  ordinary  forms. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  313 

Here  the  main  point  is,  that  the  report  is  ■well  founded  and  clearly  expressed.  The  reports 
should  he  numhered,  state  what  party  it  refers  to,  and  the  date  and  hour  when  sent. 

§  225.  For  patrols  and  orderlies,  6  men  are  detailed  from  the  picket,  independently  of  those 
who  supply  the  videttes ;  two  of  these,  besides  any  already  sent  out,  should  always  be  in  readiness 
to  start  in  an  instant;  the  others  may  rest,  and  in  the  day  unbit  their  horses. 

§  226.  The  pickets  should  always  be  vigilant,  careful,  quiet,  and  ready  to  move.  The  arms 
ought  to  be  loaded,  the  men  fully  accoutred,  all  the  horses  saddled,  and  the  whole  picket  in  an 
effective  condition;  the  horses  are  sent  to  water  in  parties  of  two  or  three  at  a  time,  under  charge 
of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  and  take  everything  with  them.  The  horses  should  not  be 
hobbled  or  picketed.  The  use  of  fire  is  forbidden,  without  special  permission.  The  men  change 
their  dress,  from  the  uniform  to  the  overcoat,  and  the  reverse,  one  at  a  time.  Under  peculiar 
circumstances,  in  the  night,  one-half  the  men  (by  turns)  may  be  allowed  to  take  off  their  shakos 
and  sleep,  but  the  rest  be  on  the  alert,  or  stand  to  horse. 

§  227.  When  a  relief  is  sent  out,  which  habitually  is  done  every  two  hours,  but  oftener  in  bad 
weather,  severe  cold,  or  after  great  fatigue,  the  whole  picket  mounts,  and  so  remains  until  the 
return  of  the  relief. 

§  228.  It  being  easy  for  the  enemy  to  approach  the  chain  during  the  night,  in  order  to  make  a 
sudden  attack  at  daybreak,  the  whole  picket  should  be  mounted  some  time  before  dawn. 

§  229.  If  it  appears  to  be  necessary  to  draw  in  the  videttes  upon  the  picket,  or  to  close  in  the 
videttes  on  each  other  for  the  night,  then,  by  the  special  order  of  the  commander  of  the  outposts, 
the  chain  removes  to  its  new  position  upon  the  approach  of  twilight.  The  decrease  of  the 
intervals  between  the  pairs  of  videttes  is  regulated  by  the  darkness  of  the  night  and  the  weather ; 
in  a  dark  night,  with  heavy  rain,  a  thick  fog,  or,  most  especially,  with  a  wind  blowing  towards 
the  enemy,  this  interval  is  made  very  small.  The  extra  men  needed  in  these  cases  are  supplied 
by  the  main  guards  or  the  reserve  of  the  outposts.  At  daybreak,  the  chain  again  advances  to 
the  position  designated  for  it  during  the  day. 

§  230.  If  the  ground  occupied  by  the  videttes  during  the  day  is  so  advantageous  that  it  would 
be  injurious  to  throw  them  back  at  night,  and  it  is  necessary  to  decrease  their  distance  from  the 
picket,  then  the  chain  is  left  where  it  stands,  the  intervals  between  the  videttes  are  diminished, 
and  the  picket  moved  up  closer  to  the  chain. 

§  231.  Besides  the  original  posting  of  the  chain,  the  commander  of  the  j^icket  should  also 
suj)erintend  its  removal  to  the  night  position ;  and  if  the  videttes  were  originally  posted  at 
night,  he  should  be  present  when  they  take  up  their  new  position  for  the  day,  also  when  his 
picket  is  relieved  by  other  troops.  The  other  reliefs  of  the  videttes  not  only  may,  but  ought  to 
be  made  by  non-commissioned  officers,  so  as  not  to  take  the  commander  from  his  j)icket,  where 
his  presence  may  be  very  necessary. 

§  232.  All  the  men  of  a  relief,  while  marching,  carry  their  weapons  as  prescribed  for  the  front 
vidette  in  §  194,  and  the  act  of  relieving  is  performed  as  in  time  of  peace  ;  the  instructions  are 
given  quietly,  and  all  orders  in  a  low  tone. 

§  233.  The  returning  relief  is  received  at  the  picket  as  in  time  of  peace,  with  the  difference 
that  the  whole  picket  is  mounted. 

§  234.  When  the  rounds  arrive  at  a  picket,  they  are  received  as  directed  below  in  Chapter  III, 
on  visiting  the  outposts  ;  in  this  case,  all  orders  are  given  in  a  low  tone,  and  the  necessary  quiet- 
ness is  preserved. 

§  235.  At  the  proper  hours,  the  commander  of  the  picket  will  send  out  patrols  to  verify  the 
40  © 


314  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

exactness  of  the  videttes,  (see  Chapter  III  ;)  he  should  also  despatch  the  reliefs  punctually,  and 
report  to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  after  every  relief,  although  there  may  be  nothing 
new. 

§  236.  When  a  report  comes  in  from  the  chain  of  the  arrival  of  men  without  the  countersign, 
or  in  the  night  of  those  who  (see  §  203)  are  not  entitled  to  pass  with  it,  the  commander  of  the 
picket  at  once  sends  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  men  to  bring  them  in.  Upon  their 
arrival,  he  demands  the  parole,  ivatchicord,  and  countersign;  and  if  all  their  replies  are  correct, 
he  permits  them  to  pass  freely ;  but  if  they  do  not  know  the  parole,  he  sends  them,  under  guard, 
to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard. 

§  237.  If  a  flag  of  truce  or  deserters  from  the  enemy  arrive  at  the  chain,  the  commander  of 
the  picket  goes  there  himself,  taking  with  him  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  some  privates. 
When  near  the  flag  of  truce,  he  demands  who  he  is,  by  whom  and  to  whom  sent ;  and  then, 
having  blindfolded  him,  directs  the  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  privates  to  conduct  him 
to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard.  If  deserters  have  arrived,  he  directs  his  escort  to  take 
their  arms,  and  bring  them  within  the  chain  ;  he  then  calls  up  one  of  the  deserters  and  questions 
him,  and  having  ordered  them  all  to  be  searched,  lest  they  carry  concealed  weapons,  he  sends 
them  to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard,  with  an  escort  in  profiortion  to  their  number. 

§  238.  If  a  report  arrives  from  the  chain  of  anything  important  in  the  direction  of  the 
enemy,  or  of  his  appearance,  the  commander  of  the  picket  verifies  it  in  person,  at  once  sends  a 
report  to  the  commander  of  the  main  guard,  and  informs  the  neighboring  pickets;  in  the  mean- 
time the  picket  mounts. 

§  239.  If  it  appears  that  the  enemy,  in  small  force,  merely  alarms  the  outposts,  the  videttes 
commence  firing,  the  pickets  advance,  and  either  endeavor  to  overthrow  the  enemy's  detachment, 
or  to  keep  him  in  check  until  the  arrival  of  the  main  guard  or  the  reserve  of  the  outposts. 

§  240.  If  it  appears  that  the  enemy  is  not  in  superior  force,  then  the  pickets  should  attack 
and  drive  him  ofi";  afterwards  they  resume  their  original  positions. 

§  241.  If  it  is  ascertained  that  the  enemy  attacks  vigorously  in  force,  and  has  already  approached 
so  near  the  chain  that  the  videttes  are  in  danger  of  being  cut  off',  the  commander  of  the  picket 
gives  them  the  signal  to  retreat,  and,  using  them  as  a  chain  of  skirmishers,  he  begins,  if  it  is 
necessary,  his  retreat  upon  the  main  guard,  again  reporting  the  state  of  aff"airs  to  the  commander 
of  the  latter,  and  the  nearest  pickets. 

§  242.  While  retreating,  he  should  endeavor  to  delay  the  enemy  as  long  as  possible,  also  to 
observe  as  well  as  he  can  his  force,  kind  of  troops,  and  direction,  taking  care,  however,  not  to 
be  cut  off. 

§  243.  In  the  night  the  enemy  does  not  see  the  strength  of  the  picket,  and  moves  over  ground 
with  which  he  is  unacquainted,  while  the  picket  knows  the  ground.  Therefore,  it  is  sometimes 
advantageous  for  cavalry  pickets,  in  the  night,  to  commence  their  retreat  by  attacking ;  if  the 
attack  fails,  nothing  is  lost,  and  the  jjicket  falls  back  upon  the  main  guard ;  if  it  succeeds,  even 
if  it  is  impossible  to  drive  the  enemy  off,  his  pursuit  is  at  least  delayed,  and  his  force  more  closely 
examined. 

§  244.  Upon  heai-ing  firing  at  the  chain,  the  commander  of  the  picket  at  once  sends  to  learn 
the  cause,  and  causes  the  picket  to  mount;  if  the  enemy  really  attacks,  the  commander  acts  as 
directed  above ;  but  if  the  firing  was  only  upon  individuals,  he  at  once  sends  word  to  the  main 
guard  and  neighboring  pickets,  to  prevent  unnecessary  alarm. 

§  245.  The  other  pickets  mount  at  once  upon  hearing  firing  at  any  part  of  the  chain;  and  if 


REPORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M-'CLELLAN.  315 

the  picket  attacked  retreats,  they  regulate  their  movements  on  it,  so  as  to  keep  up  the  communi- 
cation and  not  be  cut  off,  and  at  once  inform  the  next  picket  on  the  opposite  side. 

§  246.  After  every  skirmish  the  commanders  of  the  pickets  make  an  inspection  to  ascertain 
whether  any  of  their  men  are  captured  or  missing ;  if  there  are  any  such  cases,  they  at  once 
inform  the  commander  of  the  main  guard.  Until  the  countersign  is  changed,  the  commanders 
of  the  pickets  forbid  the  videttes  to  allow  any  one  to  cross  the  chain,  even  with  the  old  counter- 
sign; this  they  do  in  all  cases  when  a  man  is  missing  from  the  videttes  or  pickets,  even  if  there 
has  been  no  skirmish. 

ARTICLE  4. 

Duties  of  the  commander  of  the  main  guard. 

§  247.  The  main  guard  is  commanded  by  a  field  officer  or  captain;  there  must  always  be  a 
trumpeter  with  him. 

§  248.  He  communicates  to  the  commanders  of  the  pickets  the  parole,  watchword,  and 
countersign. 

§  249.  Having  reached  the  position  designated  for  the  main  guard,  its  commander  details 
and  sends  forward  the  platoons  that  are  to  supply  the  pickets  and  videttes.  Having  turned 
over  the  command  of  the  main  guard  to  the  next  in  rank  of  those  remaining  with  it,  he  goes 
himself  to  the  advanced  chain,  to  superintend  the  posting  of  the  pickets  and  videttes;  he  gives 
all  the  parties  their  instructions,  how  they  are  to  act  upon  the  appearance  of  the  enemy,  and 
how  in  case  of  retreat;  he  carefully  examines  the  'ground.  The  main  guard  remains  mounted 
until  the  videttes  and  pickets  arq  posted. 

§  250.  If  it  is  impossible  for  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  to  be  present  at  the  original 
posting  of  the  pickets  and  videttes,  he  should  at  least  ride  over  all  the  ground  committed  to  his 
charge. 

§  251.  If  in  any  of  the  pickets  one  relief  is  short  of  men,  the  commander  of  the  main  guard 
supplies  the  deficiency  from  it ;  if  a  picket  has  more  men  than  enough,  he  either  directs  the 
superfluous  men  to  join  the  main  guard,  or  sends  them  to  reinforce  another  picket  which  has  not 
men  enough,  or,  finally,  directs  the  picket  which  has  the  most  men  to  occupy  a  greater  portion 
of  the  chain  than  its  neighbors. 

Remarh. — In  these  cases,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  bear  in  mind  that  the  parties  sent  to  the 
outposts  must  be  units,  so  that  their  interior  organization  may  not  be  disturbed  ;  especially  that 
two  companies  of  the  same  regiment  must  furnish  a  main  guard  and  the  corresponding  pickets 
and  videttes.  From  this  there  will  result  greater  unity  in  the  conduct  of  the  outposts,  and  each 
officer  being  with  his  own  men,  can  assign  them  to  the  particular  duty  best  suited  to  the 
character  and  capacity  of  each. 

§  252.  In  the  disposition  of  the  videttes  and  pickets,  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  should 
look  to  the  connexion  of  the  whole  chain  and  all  the  pickets  under  his  charge,  and  particularly 
to  the  facility  of  communication  with  the  neighboring  main  guards. 

§  253.  Having  returned  to  the  main  guard,  its  commander  arranges  it  as  follows  :  the  guard 
dismounts  ;  during  the  day  one-half,  by  turns,  unbit  and  feed  their  horses,  holding  them  by  the 
reins  ;  the  rest  of  the  men  remain  with  their  horses,  in  perfect  readiness,  some  20  to  50  paces  in 
front  of  those  who  are  feeding.  During  the  night  all  the  horses  must  be  bitted,  and  one-half 
the  men  perfectly  ready  to  mount. 


316  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

§  254.  Having  arranged  the  main  guard,  its  commander  reports  to  the  commander  of  the 
outposts  his  arrangements,  and  everything  of  importance  that  he  has  observed. 

Remarh. — Sketching  the  ground  occupied  by  the  outposts  is  a  part  of  the  duty  of  the  staff 
officers  ;  but  if  tliere  are  none  present,  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  should  annex  to  his 
report  a  rough  pencil  sketch  of  the  ground,  for  the  better  elucidation  of  his  arrangements. 

§  255.  A  sentinel  is  placed  at  the  main  guard,  as  at  the  jjicket,  (§  221;)  he  challenges  all 
who  approach  in  the  same  manner  as  the  videttes.  All  other  precautions  are  observed  by  the 
main  guard  as  by  the  pickets. — (§  226.) 

§  256.  If  it  is  necessary  to  cook  in  a  covered  place,  and  the  commander  of  the  outposts  has 
given  permission  to  use  a  fire,  the  men  do  not  leave  their  position  to  eat,  but  the  food  is  brought 
to  them,  and  they  eat,  a  few  at  a  time. 

§  257.  The  commander  of  the  main  guard  receives  the  rounds  in  the  same  manner  as  the  com- 
mander of  a  picket  does. — (§234.) 

§  258.  If  men  without  the  countersign,  flags  of  truce,  or  deserters  from  the  enemy,  are  sent  in 
from  the  pickets,  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  interrogates  them,  and  then  sends  them, 
under  guard,  to  the  reserve,  if  there  is  any,  or  direct  to  the  commander  of  the  outj^osts. 

§  259.  Upon  receiving  from  the  pickets  news  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy,  or  on  hearing 
firing  at  the  chain,  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  at  once  sends  an  officer,  or  a  sergeant, 
with  two  men  to  ascertain  what  is  taking  place,  and  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts. 
That  part  of  the  main  guard  whose  horses  are  bitted  mount  and  ride  to  the  front  to  receive  or 
support  the  retreating  pickets  in  case  of  necessity  ;  in  the  meantime  the  other  portion  prepare, 
and,  if  the  firing  continues,  join  the  advanced  party. 

§  260.  If  the  commander  of  the  main  guard  is  satisfied  th^t  the  enemy  attacks  really  and 
decidedly,  he  reports  again  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts,  and  acts  according  to  the  preceding 
instructions  ;  that  is,  he  either  endeavors  to  resist  the  enemy  and  hold  his  ground,  or  keeps  up 
the  firing  and  retards  his  advance,  or  simply  falls  back  upon  the  reserves. 

§  261.  In  the  night,  the  main  guard  may,  as  in  the  case  of  a  picket,  (§  243,)  try  an  immediate 
attack  ;  but  this  should  be  made  by  only  a  part  of  the  main  guard,  holding  the  rest  in  reserve 
to  support  the  attacking  party. 

§  262.  The  commander  of  each  main  guard  should  constantly  keep  up  his  connexion  with  his 
pickets  and  the  nearest  main  guards  by  patrols  ;  if  the  enemy  advances,  he  must  regulate  his 
movements  in  conformity  with  those  of  the  other  main  guards,  so  that,  being  as  nearly  as  possible 
on  the  same  line,  they  may  be  in  a  condition  to  render  mutual  assistance. 

§  263.  The  commander  of  a  main  guard  should  be  very  careful  as  to  his  reports ;  upon  receiving 
any  news  about  the  enemy  from  the  pickets,  he  should  endeavor  to  verify  it  in  person ;  if  that  is 
impracticable,  it  is  best  to  send  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts  the  original  report  received 
from  the  picket. 

§  264.  If  the  same  two  companies  remain  upon  outpost  duty  for  several  days,  the  pickets 
are  usually  relieved  every  24  hours.  It  is  best  to  relieve  them  in  the  morning,  that  the  new 
pickets  may  be  able  to  see  the  country.  If  the  two  companies  are  detailed  for  24  hours  only, 
the  pickets  may  be  relieved  during  the  day,  especially  if  they  have  been  alarmed,  and  have  not 
had  time  to  unbit  their  horses.  Such  reliefs  should  be  effected  one  or  two  hours  before  sunset, 
to  give  the  new  reliefs  time  enough  to  become  acquainted  with  the  ground. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M'CLELLAN.  317 

ARTICLE  5. 

The  reserves  of  tJie  outposts. 

§  265.  These  may  be  employed  with  two  objects  : 

1.  To  facilitate  the  retreat  of  the  outposts,  if  they  are  very  distant  from  the  camp  ;  or, 

2.  To  retard  the  advance  of  the  enemy  if  the  ontposts  are  close  in. 

In  the  first  case,  the  reserve  need  not  be  very  strong  ;  if  the  ground  permits  the  action  of 
cavalry,  it  is  composed  of  that  arm  in  preference  ;  from  two  to  four  companies  or  more  may  be 
detailed  for  the  service.  In  the  second  case,  the  composition  of  the  reserve  depends  upon  the 
ground  and  the  length  of  time  it  is  desired  to  detain  the  enemy  ;  in  localities  at  all  favorable 
to  infantry,  the  reserve  is  composed  of  that  arm,  and  it  is  of  cavalry  only  on  perfectly  open 
plains ;  in  this  last  case,  the  deficiency  in  defensive  strength  is  supplied  by  the  addition  of  horse 
artillery. 

§  266.  In  general  a  reserve  of  the  outposts  is  detailed  only  for  the  protection  of  a  considerable 
body  of  troops,  as,  for  instance,  3  or  4  divisions.  For  detachments  consisting  only  of  a  division 
or  so,  there  is  no  reserve  of  the  outposts  ;  the  detachment  itself  constitutes  the  reserve. 

§  267.  The  bivouac  of  the  reserve  of  the  outposts  is  selected  as  near  as  possible  to  water,  wood, 
straw,  forage,  &c. ;  but  in  no  case  should  any  military  advantages  be  lost  sight  of,  they  being 
much  more  important  in  such  a  case  than  any  considerations  of  mere  convenience. 

§  268.  An  inlying  picket,  of  from  J  to  ^  of  the  entire  reserve,  is  detailed,  which  should  be 
perfectly  ready  to  mount,  to  support  the  outposts  if  necessary.  The  inlying  picket  is  placed  a 
little  in  advance  of  the  rest,  and  acts  as  the  guard  of  the  artillery,  if  there  is  any ;  its  men 
should  wear  their  accoutrements,  and  have  their  horses  constantly  saddled  and  bitted. 

§  269.  The  rest  of  the  horses  are  not  unsaddled,  but  stand  at  the  picket  ropes,  or  are  hobbled, 
except  the  horses  of  the  guns,  which  are  fed  in  harness,  and  are  unhitched  only  to  go  to  water, 
and  that  by  turns  ;  the  caisson  horses  may  be  unhitched. 

§  270.  The  reserve  always  bivouacs  in  order  of  battle,  that  is  with  the  companies  in  line ; 
the  guns  ought  to  be  in  position,  in  full  readiness  for  action,  a  little  in  advance.  If  the  reserve 
is  partly  composed  of  infantry,  the  cavalry  is  so  placed  that  the  party  standing  to  horse  may  be 
covered  by  the  infantry. 

§  271.  The  arms  should  be  loaded.  The  men  change  their  dress,  and  unsaddle  to  examine 
their  horses  backs,  a  few  at  a  time  ;  in  a  company  by  section,  in  a  regiment  by  companies. 

The  men  who  are  reposing  may  take  off  their  shakos,  but  not  their  accoutrements. 

§  272.  The  use  of  fire  is  allowed,  unless  peculiar  circumstances  render  it  improi3er. 

§  273.  The  reserve  secures  itself  by  camp  and  quarter  guards,  posted  as  in  time  of  jjeace. 
The  duty  in  the  reserve  is  performed  as  in  ordinary  bivouacs ;  guards  and  sentinels  present 
arms  as  usual,  but  no  signals  by  drum  or  trumpet  are  allowed. 

§  274.  When  the  outposts  take  up  their  jjositions,  if  it  becomes  necessary  to  reinforce  any  of 
the  main  guards,  or  to  establish  new  pickets,  it  is  done  from  the  reserve. 

§  275.  The  commander  of  the  outposts  is  habitually  with  the  reserve  ;  therefore,  all  reports 
from  the  main  guards  and  independent  pickets  are  sent  thither,  that  its  movements  may  be 
regulated  in  conformity  with  the  reports  received. 

§  276.  When  the  commander  of  the  reserve  receives  a  report  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy  he 
acts  according  to  circumstances  ;  that  is,  he  either  sends  a  reinforcement  to  the  pickets,  or 
advances  to  support  them  with  the  whole  reserve,  or  joining  them  himself  does  everything  that 


318  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

is  necessary  or  possible.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  reserve  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  falling  sud- 
denly in  force  upon  the  main  body,  and  to  use  every  exertion  to  retard  his  advance,  in  order  to 
afford  the  main  body  time  to  prepare  to  receive  him,  and  take  the  measures  necessary  under  the 
circumstances.  The  more  vigorously  the  enemy  attacks,  the  more  stubbornly  must  the  reserve 
resist  him. 

§  277.  The  troops  composing  the  reserve  may  relieve  the  main  guards  and  independent 
pickets  ;  this  relief  is  effected  once  or  twice  in  24  hours.  The  reserve  itself  is  relieved  by  the 
special  order  of  the  commander  of  the  main  body. 

ARTICLE   6. 
Independent  pickets. 

§  278.  If  there  is  near  the  advanced  chain  any  point  the  occupation  of  which  is  necessary  or 
very  advantageous — for  example,  if  it  will  strengthen  a  flank  of  the  chain  not  sufficiently  secured 
by  the  nature  of  the  ground,  if  it  commands  an  extensive  view,  or  if  the  enemy  must  necessarily 
pass  over  it,  and  its  distance  is  such  that  the  chain  cannot  be  extended  to  it  without  a  consid- 
erable increase  in  the  number  of  men,  then  this  point  is  occupied  by  a  special  detachment, 
called  an  independent  picket. 

§  279.  They  are  sent  out  from  the  nearest  main  guard,  or  from  the  reserve  of  the  outposts, 
and  are  under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  outposts.  They  are  posted  as  the  ordinary 
pickets,  with  the  difference  that  their  videttes  are  solely  for  their  own  security,  and  are  so 
placed  as  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  attacking  the  picket  unawares. 

§  280.  Not  having  a  direct  connexion  with  the  other  parties,  they  must  maintain  it  by  means 
of  patrols,  and  should  also  send  patrols  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy  ;  therefore  the  strength  of 
an  independent  picket  will  be  determined  by  the  indispensable  number  of  videttes  and  jjatrols  to 
be  furnished.  For  examjjle,  if  it  is  necessary  to  post  two  pairs  of  videttes  and  one  sentinel  at 
the  picket,  and  to  send  out  patrols  on  two  roads  leading  towards  the  enemy,  and  on  one 
towards  the  nearest  picket,  then,  each  patrol  consisting  of  two  men,  there  will  be  11  men  in 
each  relief,  or  33  privates  in  the  whole  picket. 

§  281.  The  greater  the  distance  of  an  independent  picket  from  the  other  parties  of  the  out- 
posts the  stronger  should  it  be.     In  all  cases  it  should  have  a  secure  retreat. 

§  282.  It  is  the  duty  of  independent,  as  of  ordinary  pickets,  to  be  always  prudent,  to  watch 
the  enemy,  to  obtain  information  of  his  nearest  parties  and  distant  movements  ;  but  as  they  are 
more  exposed  than  the  others  to  be  attacked  and  cut  off,  they  should  redouble  their  vigilance 
and  precautions. 

ARTICLE    7. 

The  general  duties  of  all  parts  of  the  outposts. 

§  283.  Precaution  and  indefatigable  vigilance  are  the  first  duties  of  all  parts  of  the  outposts. 
Independently  of  the  security  of  the  outposts  themselves,  this  duty  assumes  a  peculiar  im- 
portance from  the  fact  that  upon  its  fulfilment  depend  the  tranquillity,  safety,  and  sometimes 
the  existence  of  the  troops  guarded. 

§  284.  If  the  positions  of  the  outposts  are  not  already  occupied  by  our  own  troops,  the  parties 
detailed  for  outpost  duty  will  march  to  their  posts  with  all  the  usual  military  precautions — 
that  is,  with  advanced,  flank  and  rear  patrols.     Besides  this,  it  is  well,  upon  approaching  the 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  319 

ground,  to  send  out  small  j^atrols  in  all  directions,  to  examine  the  country  and  ascertain 
whether  the  enemy  is  concealed  in  the  vicinity.  It  is  safer  not  to  commence  posting  the  chain 
until  the  return  of  the  patrols,  at  all  events,  not  until  they  have  occupied  points  whence  they 
can  see  for  a  long  distance  in  all  directions. 

§  285.  At  the  outposts  it  is  necessary  to  preserve  quietness,  and  to  avoid  everything  which 
might  discover  them  to  the  enemy.  For  this  reason  the  use  of  trumpet  signals  is  forbidden, 
except  in  case  of  a  skirmish  ;  directions,  orders,  and  challenges  are  given  in  a  low  tone  ;  the 
use  of  fire  is  prohibited,  except  at  the  reserve,  and  is  permitted  there  only  when  there  is  no 
particular  reason  for  forbidding  it. 

§  286.  Every  commander  despatching  a  party  for  outpost  duty  under  his  orders  must  give  its 
chief  detailed  instructions  ;  he  must  satisfy  himself  that  the  instructions  are  fully  understood, 
and  must  exercise  the  greatest  personal  vigilance  in  watching  over  their  execution  by  his 
subordinates. 

§  287.  If  it  is  impossible  to  carry  out  the  instructions  fully,  the  subordinate  must  at  once 
report  to  his  superior,  explaining  the  cause  of  the  impossibility. 

§  288.  The  gradation  of  subordination  is  as  follows  :  the  videttes  are  immediately  subordinate 
to  the  pickets  from  which  they  are  detached  ;  the  pickets  to  their  main  guards,  the  main  guards 
and  indeijendent  pickets  to  the  reserve  of  the  outposts.  The  commander  of  the  reserve  is  imme- 
diately subordinate  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts  ;  the  latter  to  the  commander  of  the  ad- 
vanced guard. 

§  289.  The  commander  of  every  post  should  at  once  report  to  his  immediate  superior,  and  if 
necessary  to  the  commanders  of  the  nearest  parties,  everything  he  has  observed  in  person,  or 
learned  through  his  subordinates,  especially  what  refers  to  the  movements  of  the  enemy. 

§  290.  The  subordinate  should  always  endeavor  to  verify  the  information  in  person,  and  then 
make  his  report ;  always  remembering  that  an  unfounded  report  may  produce  serious  conse- 
quences to  the  whole  army. 

§  291.  If  it  is  impossible  for  him  to  verify  the  information  in  person,  he  should  forward  to  his 
superior  the  original  report  received. 

§  292.  Keports  should  be  written  clearly  and  with  precision,  especially  with  regard  to  the 
force  of  the  enemy,  noting  not  only  his  numbers,  but  of  what  arms,  and  the  direction  in  which 
he  marches.  In  reports  positive  facts  should  be  distinguished  from  probabilities — noting  the 
degree  of  confidence  to  be  reposed  in  the  latter. 

§  293.  If  it  is  unnecessary  to  forward  the  original  report  received,  it  is  preserved  until,  by  the 
progress  of  events,  it  has  lost  all  importance  and  significance. 

§  294.  All  reports  to  the  commanders  of  main  guards  are  of  especial  importance,  and  those 

to  the  commander  of  the  outposts  still  more  so.     Every  exaggerated  or  ill  founded  report  renders 

it  necessary  to  turn  out  and  fatigue  the  troojjs  uselessly  ;  on  the  contrary,   contempt  for  the 

'enemy,  and  tardiness  in  reporting  may  not  only  compromise  the  one  making  the  report,  but  even 

endanger  the  security  of  the  army,  and  place  it  in  a  precarious  situation. 

§  295.  It  is  the  duty  of  every  party  of  the  outposts  to  preserve  its  connexion  and  communica- 
tion with  the  nearest  corresponding  parties,  with  those  subordinate  to  it,  and  with  that  to  which 
it  is  immediately  subordinate. 

§  296.  The  commander  of  every  post  should  carefully  examine,  in  person,  the  ground  in  his 
vicinity,  not  only  in  reference  to  his  relations  with  the  nearest  posts,  but  in  regard  to  his  move- 
ments if  attacked.     He  must  also  find  suitable  watering  places. 

§  297.  In  case  of  an  attack  it  is  the  duty  of  every  party  not  only  to  reinforce  and  support  the 


320  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE 

parties  immediately  subordinate  to  it,  but  also  to  assist  the  neighboring  parties  whenever  it  is 
necessary  and  possible.  If  a  retreat  is  ordered,  or  forced  upon  them,  each  party  rallies  on  that  to 
which  it  is  subordinate. 

§  298.  In  conformity  with  what  has  been  said  before,  if  firing  at  the  chain  is  heard,  the 
portions  of  the  pickets  and  main  guards  ordered  to  be  in  constant  readiness  at  once  move 
forward,  even  if  they  have  received  no  reports  as  to  the  advance  of  the  enemy.  In  such  cases, 
the  reserve,  although  fully  ready  to  meet  the  enemy,  makes  no  movement,  without  orders,  until 
the  pickets  and  main  guards  are  driven  in. 

§  299.  Upon  an  attack  by  the  enemy,  the  commander  of  every  party  should  regulate  his 
movements  in  accordance  with  those  of  the  nearest  parties,  so  that  he  may  not  expose  them  to 
be  cut  ofi'  by  a  premature  retreat  on  his  part,  or  expose  himself  either  by  too  tardy  a  retreat,  or 
by  moving  to  the  front  with  unnecessary  rapidity. 

§  300.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  parties  of  the  outposts  and  of  all  videttes  to  hold  their  positions 
as  long  as  possible.  In  the  event  of  an  attack  they  do  not  retreat  without  orders  or  pressing 
necessity ;  because,  although  there  may  be  no  difficulty  in  the  retreat,  and  although  the  ground 
abandoned  may  easily  be  reoccupied,  yet  the  enemy  gains  something  of  which  we  cannot  deprive 
him,  that  is,  a  knowledge  of  the  ground,  which  may  have  been  the  only  object  of  his  attack. 

§  301.  If  any  party  is  ordered  to  defend  itself  to  the  utmost,  then,  although  the  enemy  is  in 
superior  force,  they  resist  him  on  the  spot,  and,  if  necessary,  unhesitatingly  sacrifice  themselves 
to  the  last  man. 

§  302.  The  commanders  of  all  the  posts  should  see  that  their  subordinates  have  betimes  the 
parole,  ivatchword,  and  countersign. 

§  303.  The  commanders  of  pickets  allow  all  persons  who  know  the  parole,  ivatchioord,  and 
countersign  to  cross  the  chain  in  any  direction,  both  by  day  and  night,  without  obstacle. 
Therefore,  in  time  of  war,  the  parole  is  not  given  to  the  men,  but  only  to  those  persons  whose 
duty  renders  it  necessary  for  them  to  possess  it,  and  they  preserve  it  with  the  utmost  secrecy. 

§  304.  On  this  principle  the  parole  is  given  only  to  the  commanders  of  the  main  guards  and 
pickets,  and  to  those  persons  who  are  entrusted  by  the  proper  authorities  with  missions  which 
render  it  necessary  for  them  to  cross  the  chain  without  detention. 

The  watchword  is  given  only  to  the  non-commissioned  officers  sent  out  with  patrols  and 
reliefs,  and  serves  for  mutual  challenges. 

The  countersign  is  given  to  all  on  duty  at  the  outposts,  and  serves  to  challenge  all  who  ap- 
proach the  chain. 

§  305.  Upon  the  arrival  at  any  post  of  people  who,  by  the  regulations,  or  by  special  orders, 
are  not  to  be  allowed  to  pass,  the  commander  of  that  post  sends  them  to  his  immediate  chief. 
Upon  the  arrival  of  flags  of  truce  he  watches  that  they  do  not  enter  into  conversation  with  any 
but  the  authorized  persons. 

§  306.  At  the  outposts  arms  are  not  presented,  nor  the  men  mounted  for  any  of  the  commanders. 
Upon  the  approach  of  a  superior  officer,  the  party  on  duty  at  once  stand  to  horse,  the  com- 
mander of  the  post  orders  the  rest  to  do  the  same,  and  places  himself  in  that  position  ;  if  the 
superior  stops  at  the  post,  its  commander  reports  what  he  has  observed. 

§  307.  Upon  the  approach  of  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard,  or  of  the  main  body,  to 
the  position  of  the  outposts,  he  is  met  and  accompanied  only  by  the  commander  of  the  outposts ; 
the  commander  of  each  post  remains  with  it. 

§  308.  When  a  post  is  relieved  the  old  commander  will  explain  to  the  new  one  everything 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.         y  321 

which  is,  in  his  opinion,  of  importance,  and  everything  that  he  has  observed  in  reference  to 
the  enemy  and  the  locality. 

§  309.  If  the  commander  of  a  party,  newly  placed  on  duty  at  the  outposts,  finds  anything 
wrong  in  the  original  arrangement  of  the  videttes,  pickets,  or  main  guards,  he  must  report  it, 
through  his  immediate  chief,  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts,  and  ask  his  permission  to  rectify 
the  dispositions  ;  until  he  receives  this  permission  he  preserves  the  former  arrangement. 

§  310.  The  commanders  of  all  posts  watch  over  the  punctual  despatch  of  the  reliefs  of 
videttes  and  posts  sent  out  from  their  commands.  It  is  best  to  relieve  all  the  parties  of  the  out- 
posts before  dawn  ;  for  the  enemy  can  advantageously  avail  himself  of  the  darkness  to  approach 
the  chain,  in  order  to  attack  at  daybreak,  and  the  presence  of  the  reliefs  at  this  time  doubles 
the  force  of  the  outposts. 

§  311.  The  commanders  especially  see  that  the  required  rounds  and  patrols  are  sent  at  the 
proper  times,  never  sending  them  at  known  hours  or  regular  intervals  ;  for,  as  they  are  sent  to 
verify  the  exactness  of  the  posts,  it  is  best  that  they  should  be  constantly  expected. 

ARTICLE  8. 

Of  the  duties  of  the  outposts  in  covering  any  march  or  change  of  position  of  the  troops  under  their 

guard. 

§  312.  If  the  troops,  covered  by  the  outposts,  are  ordered  to  make  any  movement,  then  to 
avoid  a  change  of  troops  the  parties  who  have  formed  the  outposts  constitute,  if  there  is  no 
special  reason  to  the  contrary,  the  advanced  guard,  if  the  march  is  to  the  front;  the  rear  guard, 
if  it  is  in  retreat ;  in  the  latter  case,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  videttes  and  pickets  to  cover  the  retreat 
of  the  rear  guard. 

§  313.  If  the  movement  is  to  be  concealed  from  the  enemy,  particular  precautions  are  required 
on  the  part  of  the  outposts. 

They  must  redouble  their  vigilance,  and  take  measures  to  ensure  that  no  one  from  the  side  of 
the  enemy,  neither  patrols  nor  reconnaissances,  penetrates  our  position ;  and  they  must  manage 
these  measures  of  precaution  in  such  a  way  that  the  enemy  may  not  observe  what  is  going  on 
among  us,  or  that  anything  extraordinary  is  being  undertaken. 

§  314.  Besides  keeping  all  the  posts  perfectly  ready  for  action,  the  means  of  effecting  this 
consist  in  not  sending  more  patrols  than  usual  in  front  of  the  chain,  but  in  sending  them  behind 
it  as  secretly  and  frequently  as  possible,  to  prevent  the  enemy's  patrols  from  crossing  it. 

In  addition,  if  it  is  necessary  to  place  a  party  of  troops  near  the  chain,  under  cover,  they 
should  be  in  ambuscade,  that  they  may  attack  the  enemy  unexpectedly  if  he  endeavors  to  break 
through  the  chain. 

§  315.  In  these  cases,  the  outposts  are  ordered  to  resist  the  enemy  as  obstinately  as  possible, 
not  only  to  prevent  him  from  penetrating  within  our  lines,  but  to  hinder  him  from  seeing  any- 
thing. Sometimes,  in  order  to  distract  the  attention  of  the  enemy,  attacks  are  made  upon  his 
outposts  during  the  retreat  of  our  own  troops.  Such  attacks  promise  greater  success  in  the 
night  than  in  the  day,  because  when,  on  the  alarm,  the  supports  of  the  enemy's  outposts 
approach  the  chain,  they  may  thence  perceive  things  that  were  imperceptible,  even  to  the 
strongest  vision,  from  their  usual  posts. 

§  316.  If  a  retreat  is  to  be  effected  secretly,  it  is  best  not  to  relieve  the  outposts  by  fresh  troops 
before  their  retreat,  because  the  sight  of  the  new  troops  may  excite  the  attention  of  the  enemy  ; 
while,  on  the  contrary,  the  sight  of  old  troops  and  posts  may  tend  to  diminish  his  vigilance. 
41   © 


322  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

§  317.  Secret  retreats  are  usually  made  at  night,  during  wliich  time  it  is  endeavored  to  keep 
up  the  hivouac  fires,  that  the  enemy  may  not  observe  the  absence  of  the  troops. 

§318.  To  facilitate  the  retreat  of  the  outposts  themselves,  should  they  be  attacked  during  the 
night,  certain  measures  of  precaution  are  adoirted.  The  officers  should  thoroughly  acquaint 
themselves  with  the  roads  of  retreat,  placing  several  posts  on  the  roads,  for  greater  security, 
and  especially  at  crossings  of  streams,  on  cross  roads,  and  in  places  where  the  roads  diverge. 

§  319.  A  little  before  dawn,  all  the  main  guards  are  assembled  and  gradually  retreat  in  the 
required  direction  ;  after  them  follow  the  pickets,  and  finally,  at  dawn,  the  whole  chain  com- 
mences its  retreat,  joining  the  pickets  at  a^trot  or  gallop. 

§  320.  With  a  certain,  although  small,  extension  of  the  line  of  outposts  it  is  impossible  for  them 
all  to  retire  by  one  road  without  serious  delay.  Therefore  there  should,  if  possible,  be  designated 
for  their  retreat  several  roads  which  unite  with  the  main  road,  even  if  at  a  great  distance  ;  if 
this  is  impossible,  it  is  best  to  concentrate  them  rapidly  on  one  point,  in  order  thus  to  form  a 
detachment  of  sufficient  strength  to  resist  the  attempts  of  the  enemy. 

§321.  As  a  general  rule,  the  moment  when  troops  are  breaking  up  their  camp  is  the  most 
favorable  for  the  enemy  to  attack ;  it  is,  therefore,  best  to  execute  such  things  secretly,  although 
there  may  be  no  other  reason  than  this.  If  the  means  thus  adopted  are  successful,  the  main 
body  may  sometimes  accomplish  theobject  of  its  movement  before  the  enemy  perceives  its  absence. 

CHAPTER  II. 

THE  ARRANGEMENTS  OF  THE  OUTPOSTS  AT  A  DISTANCE  FROM  THE  ENEMY. 

§322.  If  the  enemy  is  so  far  from  us  that  he  cannot  pass  over  the  intervening  space  in  a 
single  march,  and  is,  therefore,  obliged  to  move  by  the  roads,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  limit  the 
operations  of  the  outposts  to  watching  the  roads. 

§323.  In  such  cases  it  is  only  necessary  to  send  out  independent  cavalry  pickets  on  the  roads 
leading  towards  the  enemy  ;  they  communicate  with  each  other  by  means  of  patrols. 

§  324.  As  far  as  regards  obtaining  information  of  the  enemy,  it  is  best  to  push  out  these  pickets 
as  far  as  possible,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  more  dangerous  for  the  pickets  themselves  ; 
therefore  they  should  not  be  pushed  so  far  in  advance  as  to  be  in  great  danger  of  being  cut  oif. 

§  325.  The  distance  to  which  they  may  be  advanced  will  be  increased  in  proportion  to  the  number 
of  roads  occupied,  the  difficulty  which  the  enemy  must  experience  in  moving  secretly  by  each 
road,  the  distance  to  which  patrols  are  sent  out  from  each  post,  and  the  distance  of  the  enemy 
from  our  position.  It  is  necessary  to  be  more  cautions,  and  to  draw  in  the  pickets  as  the  enemy 
approaches. 

§  326.  The  force  of  each  independent  picket  must  depend  upon  the  number  of  videttes  and 
patrols  it  is  to  furnish,  and  upon  the  degree  of  strength  it  ought  to  possess. 

§  327.  Every  such  picket  is  posted  according  to  the  rules  laid  down  in  §  §  220  and  221.  The 
routine  of  duty,  and  the  measures  of  precaution  are  exactly  as  in  ordinary  pickets. 

§  328.  As  a  general  rule  they  preserve  their  mutual  communication  by  patrols  ;  in  addition, 
they  send  out  j)atrols  as  far  as  possible  towards  the  enemy,  to  obtain  the  earliest  possible 
news  of  him. 

§  329.  If  they  are  far  from  the  army,  they  must  be  supported  by  small  detachments  placed  in 
reserve  at  points  when  several  roads  unite,  or  at  places  whence  it  is  easiest  to  afibrd  prompt 
assistance  to  those  pickets  which  may  be  expected  to  be  attacked  first. 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.    M^CLELLAN.  3213 

§  330.  Intelligent  irregular  cavalry,  inured  to  war,  may  be  employed  advantageously  as  inde- 
pendent pickets  and  patrols  ;  but  the  supports  must  always  be  of  the  regular  cavalry. 

§  331.  Sometimes,  even  when  at  a  great  distance  from  the  main  body  of  the  enemy,  there  may 
arise  the  necessity  for  the  greatest  precautions  ;  for  example,  when  the  population  is  disposed  to 
insurrection,  or  when  the  country  is  full  of  hostile  partisans. 

In  such  cases  the  precautions  should  be  in  proportion  to  the  danger. 


CHAPTEK  III. 

OF  VISITING  THE  OUTPOSTS. 

§  332.  Small  parties,  consisting  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  good  men,  are  sent  out 
by  the  pickets  and  main  guards  to  ascertain  whether  the  videttes  observe  the  proper  vigilance 
and  precaution.  These  parties  are  called  patrols.  Patrols  also  offer  the  advantage  that  they 
may  happen  to  stumble  upon  the  enemy  stealing  across  the  chain. 

§  333.  The  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  patrol  must  have  the  loatcktvm-d  and  countersign. , 

§  334.  A  patrol  sent  to  visit  the  videttes  proceeds  as  follows :  the  non-commissioned  officer 
has  his  sabre  at  a  carry ;  the  two  men  follow  him  with  carbines  advanced,  or  pistols  drawn  and 
cocked.  They  proceed  to  one  flank  of  the  chain  belonging  to  their  command ;  cross  to  the 
outside  of  the  chain  near  the  flank  videttes,  and  approach  the  chain  silently  from  the  outside  to 
test  the  vigilance  of  the  videttes.  When  the  vidette  challenges,  the  non-commissioned  officer 
replies,  "patrol,"  and,  at  the  command,  "advance,  sergeant,  with  the  countersign/'  advances 
to  about  10  paces  from  the  vidette,  and  gives  the  countersign  in  a  low  voice.  The  patrol  then 
proceeds,  in  the  same  manner,  to  the  first  vidette  of  the  next  picket^  or  main  guard,  near  which 
it  recrosses  to  the  interior  of  the  chain,  returns  to  its  party,  and  reports  whatever  has  been 
observed. 

§  335.  If  the.  non-commissioned  officer  finds  the  post  of  any  pair  of  videttes  abandoned,  he 
leaves  one  of  his  own  men  there,  and  sends  in  a  man  of  the  next  pair  to  inform  the  commander 
of  the  picket. 

§  336.  The  patrol  must  carry  back  with  it  all  persons  found  detained  at  the  chain,  and  all 
met  with  without  the  countersign. 

§  337.  If  two  patrols  meet  at  night,  and  cannot  recognize  each  other's  faces,  the  one  which 
first  perceives  the  other  cries,  "Salt!  who  comes  there?"  and,  having  received  the  reply, 
"Patrol!"  cries  "Advance,  sergeant,  ivith  the  countersign!"  the  non-commissioned  officer  of 
the  second  patrol  gives  the  countersign,  and,  in  his  turn,  then  demands  the  watchword  ;  if  the 
replies  are  all  correct,  both  patrols  then  proceed  on  their  march,  each  having  informed  the 
other  of  anything  extraordinary  observed  or  suspected. 

§  338.  Upon  suddenly  meeting  the  enemy,  patrols  act  as  prescribed  for  videttes. 

§  339.  The  number  of  patrols  sent  to  visit  the  videttes  must  be  increased  in  proportion  to  the 
difficulty  of  seeing  the  videttes  from  the  pickets,  the  darkness  of  the  night,  the  obstructions  of 
the  ground,  the  thinness  of  the  chain,  and  the  fatigue  of  the  men,  whether  arising  from  a  long 
march  or  a  combat. 

Under  these  circumstances  patrols  are  sent  out  continually,  that  is,  on  the  return  of  one, 
another  is  at  once  sent  out. 

In  the  day  time,  in  clear  weather,  and  in  open  country,  but  few  patrols  are  despatched, 
though  the  videttes  must  be  kept  in  constant  expectation  of  them. 


324  MILITARY   COMMISSION  TO   EUEOPE. 

§  340.  To  inspect  the  jiickets  and  main  guards,  the  commander  of  the  outposts  sends  out 
"rounds,"  from  time  to  time. 

§  341.  Bounds  consist  of  an  officer  with  two  privates  ;  all  the  main  guards  and  pickets  should 
he  informed  betimes  what  officers  are  ordered  to  make  the  rounds. 

§  342.  The  officer  making  the  rounds  must  know  the  parole,  watchiuord,  and  countersign. 

§  343.  In  reply  to  the  challenge  of  the  sentinel  at  the  main  guard  or  picket,  the  officer  making 
the  rounds  answers  "rounds!" 

To  receive  the  rounds,  that  part  of  the  main  guard  or  picket  which  is  ordered  to  be  in  constant 
readiness  mounts,  without  drawing  sabre  ;  those  reposing  are  not  disturbed.  In  other  regards 
the  rounds  are  received  as  in  time  of  peace. 

§  344.  The  commander  of  the  party  visited  reports  to  the  rounds  the  number  of  men  under 
his  command,  the  arrangements  of  all  his  posts,  the  number  of  men  absent  on  duty,  the  number 
present,  and  everything  that  has  been  observed. 

§345.  After  this  the  officer  making  the  rounds  examines  the  command,  satisfies  himself  that 
they  are  in  the  required  state  of  preparation,  and  verifies  the  general  number  of  men.  Then,  if 
he  has  been  ordered  to  test  whether  the  wliole  command  can  be  promptly  in  the  saddle,  he 
notifies  the  commander  of  the  post,  who  at  once  orders  all  the  men  to  mount. 

§  346.  Everything  prescribed  here  should  be  done  quietly,  and  all  orders  be  given  in  a  low 
tone.  After  this  the  rounds  proceed  to  the  next  post ;  but  the  officer  may  demand  an  escort  from 
the  party  just  inspected. 

§347.  The  rounds  are  not  limited  to  visiting  the  main  guards  and  pickets,  but  may  be  required 
to  visit  the  videttes  ;  in  this  case  they  act  as  prescribed  for  patrols  sent  for  the  same  purpose- 

§  348.  The  rounds  are  not  sent  out  at  fixed  hours  ;  the  hours  of  their  visits  depend  upon  the 
judgment  of  the  commander  of  the  outposts,  and  should  be  so  regulated  that  the  parties  to  be 
visited  may  not  know  when  to  expect  them  ;  they  are  sent  out  most  frequently  at  night,  and 
just  before  dawn. 

§349.  Upon  the  return  of  the  rounds  the  officer  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts  the 
condition  in  which  he  found  afiairs  and  everything  he  observed. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

OF  PATROLS. 

§  350.  The  duties  oi patrols  sent  out  by  troops  on  the  march  were  described  in  Part  I,  Chapter  II, 
article  5. 

In  this  chapter  will  be  described  the  duties  oi patrols  sent  out  by  troops  in  camp. 

§  351.  Besides  the  patrols  sent  out  to  visit  the  videttes,  (§  §  332  to  339,)  patrols  are  sent  out 
for  other  purposes,  namely  : 

1.  To  keep  up  the  communication  between  the  different  parties  of  the  outposts. 

2.  To  reconnoitre  the  enemy  ;  and, 

3.  To  examine  the  country. 

.  §  352.  When  a  patrol  is  sent  out  to  keep  up  the  communication  between  different  parts  of  the 
outposts,  it  rides  to  the  post  whither  it  is  sent,  reports  to  the  commander  whatever  it  was  directed 
to  communicate,  and  everything  observed  on  the  way  ;  having  received  his  instructions,  the 
patrol  returiis  to  its  party. 

§  353.  To  insure  the  safety  and  tranquillity  of  the  troops  it  is  not  sufficient  for  the  outposts 
merely  to  watch  the  space  visible  from  the  chain,  because  the  enemy  may  send  out  small  parties 


KEPORT   OF   CAPT.   GEOEGE   B.    M'CLELLAN.  325 

to  make  partial  attacks,  in  order  to  exhaust  the  troops  by  forcing  them  to  assemble  on  continual 
alarms.  To  secure  the  outposts  against  such  attacks,  as  well  as  to  discover  the  enemy  and 
examine  the  country,  patrols  are  sent  out  in  advance  of  the  chain. 

§354.  Such  patrols  are  divided  into  near  and  distant  patrols ;  they  are  composed  of  light 
cavalry  in  preference. 

§  355.  Near  patrols  consist  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  with  two  or  three  prompt  men,  and 
are  sent  out  by  all  parties  of  the  outposts.  They  move  on  all  the  main  roads  leading  towards 
the  enemy,  and  do  not  go  more  than  1  or  2  miles  from  the  videttes,  so  that  they  may  give 
prompt  information  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy ;  they  limit  themselves  to  watching  him. 
These  patrols  are  sent  out  the  more  frequently  in  proportion  as  the  enemy  can  approach  more 
secretly  ;  so  that  in  an  obstructed  country,  in  thick  fogs,  dark  nights,  and  close  to  the  enemy, 
they  are  sent  out  continually — that  is,  one  immediately  upon  the  return  of  another. 

§  356.  Distant  patrols  are  sent  out  to  discover  the  enemy  and  examine  the  country  at  consider- 
able distances,  (from  2  to  10,  and  even  more  miles,)  and  are  composed  of  a  greater  number  of 
men,  (of  10,  20,  30,  and  more,)  that  they  may  sometimes  be  able  to  attack  hostile  patrols,  and 
make  prisoners.  They  are  usually  commanded  by  an  officer,  to  whom  is  explained  in  detail  the 
object  of  bis  mission,  the  means  of  accomplishing  it,  and  the  direction  he  is  to  take  ;  he  is  also 
instructed  whether  to  engage  the  enemy's  patrols,  or  to  avoid  a  combat. 

§  357.  Distant  patrols  sometimes  consist  of  a  company,  or  more,  especially  if  they  cannot 
return  the  same  day.  They  are  sent  out  by  the  advanced  guard  or  main  body,  and  take  the 
name  of  flying  detachments.  As  a  general  rule,  all  distant  patrols  are  under  the  orders  of  the 
commander  of  the  outposts. 

§  358.  The  moment  a  patrol  passes  beyond  the  chain,  it  should  detach  front,  flank,  and  rear 
patroUers,  to  secure  itself  against  sudden  attack.  In  plate  No.  5  are  given  examples  of  the 
arrangements  of  patrols  of  15  and  30  men  ;  larger  patrols  are  arranged  according  to  the  same 
principles.  Smaller  patrols  are  arranged  according  to  their  strength  ;  for  example,  a  patrol  of 
five  men  sends  out  one  in  front,  and  one  on  each  side ;  a  patrol  of  three  men  places  one  in  front, 
the  others  move  at  a  little  distance  apart — one  watching  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the  left. 

§359.  It  is  a  great  advantage  for  a  patrol  to  see  the  enemy  before  being  discovered  itself; 
this  renders  it  possible  to  avoid  a  stronger  force,  and  to  apprize  the  outposts  of  its  approach, 
or  to  attack,  by  surprise,  an  equal  or  inferior  force. 

§  360.  In  order  to  secure  themselves  against  a  sudden  attack,  patrols  should  use  all  possible 
precautions,  and  observe  the  deepest  silence  ;  the  patroUers  carry  their  pieces  cocked.  In  the 
night,  and  in  thick  weather,  all  jirecautions  are  redoubled.  The  patrol  should  occasionally 
halt  and  listen;  the  men  in  front  and  on  the  flanks,  dismounting  by  turns,  place  the  ear  to 
the  ground,  &c. 

§  361.  On  their  return  march  the  patrols  should  be  even  more  cautious  ;  because  the  enemy, 
having  perceived  them,  may  select  this  very  time  for  the  attack,  on  the  supppsition  that  the 
outposts,  being  relieved  from  apprehension  by  the  return  of  the  patrols,  may  somewhat  relax 
their  vigilance. 

§  362.  The  commander  of  a  patrol  should  concert  certain  signals  with  \n.8  patroUers  by  which 
they  are  to  indicate  their  discoveries.  If  the  necessary  precautions  are  observed,  it  is  impossible 
for  the  enemy  to  attack  unawares  ;  therefore  the  commander  of  a  patrol  is  always  held  respon- 
sible for  its  loss. 

§  363.  In  Part  I,  Chapter  II,  article  5,  are  explained  the  precautions  to  be  observed  by  patrols 


326  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

sent  out  by  troops  on  the  march  ;  these  measures  are  equally  applicable  in  the  present  case,  and 
the  following  are  prescribed  in  addition : 

§  364.  If  a  patrol  leaves  in  its  rear  defiles  by  which  it  is  intended  to  return,  a  few  men  should 
be  left  to  hold  them — in  preference  the  men  having  the  worst  horses.  If  these  men  are  driven 
off  by  a  superior  force,  they  can,  by  means  of  preconcerted  signals,  (such  as  rockets,  lighted  straw 
on  poles,  &c.,)  inform  the  patrol  of  the  fact,  so  that  it  may  seek  another  line  of  retreat. 

§  365.  As  these  patrols  are  iisually  intended  merely  to  discover  the  enemy  and  examine  the 
country,  they  should  generally  avoid  a  combat  unless  success  seems  certain. 

§  366.  That  he  may  be  able  to  avoid  the  enemy  when  still  unperceived  by  him,  the  commander 
of  a  patrol  pays  special  attention  to  the  ground,  so  that  in  case  of  necessity  he  may  avail  him- 
self of  its  accidents  for  concealment. 

§  367.  Upon  meeting  the  enemy  in  superior  force,  the  patrol  should  at  once  commence  its 
retreat  if  already  discovered. 

§  368.  If  a  patrol  suddenly  stumbles  upon  the  enemy  in  the  night  it  is  best  to  attack  at  once ; 
in  the  night  the  advantage  is  always  on  the  side  of  those  who  attack  first,  for  to  the  habitual 
disorder  following  a  sudden  attack  is  added  the  uncertainty  as  to  the  strength  of  the  attacking 
party.  In  such  cases,  decision  and  the  advantage  of  the  initiative  insure  success.  When  the 
enemy  is  beaten  off  and  retreats,  he  ought  not  to  be  pursued  far,  lest  we  fall  into  an  ambuscade; 
and  it  is  best,  not  being  allured  by  success,  to  avail  ourselves  of  it,  and  retreat  in  good  order. 

§  369.  The  guides  of  patrols  ought  to  be  chosen  for  their  thorough  knowledge  of  the  country 
and  fidelity,  but  their  suggestions  should  not  be  blindly  followed  ;  to  verify  them,  constant 
inquiries  shoidd  be  made  of  the  inhabitants,  and  of  all  persons  met  on  the  road  ;  for  greater 
security,  the  guides  should  be  detained  until  the  patrol  is  in  perfect  safety. 

§  370.  To  rest  and  feed  the  horses,  the  patrol  avails  itself  of  some  covered  place  off 
the  road,  as  a  forest,  ravine,  &c.  During  the  halt,  the  patrol  secures  itself  by  means  of 
videttes,  small  patrols,  and  the  precautions  described  for  independent  pickets.  In  these  cases 
the  use  of  fire  is  rigorously  forbidden,  no  matter  how  well  concealed  the  place  may  be.  If  any 
inhabitants  are  found  on  the  spot,  they  must  be  detained  until  the  patrol  departs.  During  the 
winter,  halts  are  made  at  isolated  houses,  or  small  hamlets,  taking  care  that  none  of  the  inhabit- 
ants pass  beyond  the  chain  of  sentinels  established  by  the  patrol. 

§  371.  Patrols  being  in  small  force,  in  order  to  avoid  the  danger  of  being  cut  off,  should 
never  remain  long  in  any  one  place. 

§372.  All  patrols,  especially  those  intended  to  examine  the  country,  should,  if  possible, 
return  by  a  different  route  from  that  by  which  they  advanced  ;  besides,  thus  increasing  their 
own  security,  they  examine  a  greater  space,  and  bring  back  information  concerning  two  roads 
instead  of  one. 

§  373.  It  is  very  desirable  that  the  commander  of  a  patrol  sent  to  examine  the  country  should 
make  sketches  of  the  ground  passed  over,  or  at  least  describe  in  great  detail  all  the  objects  met 
with  of  any  importance  in  a  military  point  of  view,  such  as  roads,  rivers,  forests,  and  defiles. 
Whether  the  roads  are  practicable  for  all  kinds  of  troops ;  the  nature  of  the  road  bed ;  whither 
the  roads  lead ;  and  whether  they  are  the  shortest.  The  extent  of  the  forests ;  whether  they 
are  dense  or  open,  marshy  or  dry.  The  size  of  the  villages;  whether  they  are  situated  on 
heights  or  in  hollows  ;  whether  they  contain  churches  and  mills ;  whether  a  stream  runs  through 
them  in  one  channel,  or  in  several  branches,  or  aroimd  them  ;  whether  the  inhabitants  have 
many  cattle  and  much  provisions.  With  regard  to  rivers,  he  observes  their  depth,  fords  and 
bridges ;  whether  the  bottom  is  boggy  or  hard  ;  the  declivity  and  height  of  the  banks  ;  which 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  327 

bank  is  the  higher,  and  where  it  is  easiest  to  cross.  As  to  marshes,  he  notes  their  extent ; 
whether  they  are  passable ;  whether  there  are  dykes  across  them,  and  of  what  kind.  In  reference 
to  defiles,  he  notes  their  length  and  breadth  ;  describes  the  adjacent  country,  and  whether  the 
defiles  can  be  turned.  Where  the  commanders  of  jjatrols  cannot  go  in  person,  they  interrogate 
the  inhabitants  concerning  these  things,  and  compare  the  various  replies  received. 

§  374.  Since  special  acquirements  are  necessary  for  the  successful  accomplishment  of  the  object 
of  these  patrols,  an  oflicer  of  the  staff  is  sent  with  each  of  them,  or  is  placed  in  command. 

§  375.  Sometimes  patrols  are  sent  out  to  alarm  the  enemy's  outposts.  These  attempts  usually 
succeed  when  the  latter  are  very  much  scattered  ;  for  then,  to  repulse  the  attack,  he  collects  his 
posts  ;  but  the  patrol  having  gained  its  object,  that  is,  having  alarmed  the  enemy,  in  the  mean- 
while retreats  in  safety. 

§  376.  Such  attacks  are  made  in  preference  in  the  night,  or  in  dark,  and  bad  weather.  The 
patrol,  concealing  its  weakness,  should  silently  steal  up  to  the  enemy  ;  for  on  this  depends  its 
success. 

Having  approached  the  outposts,  it  should  rapidly,  noisily,  and  with  warm  firing,  fall  on  them 
as  foragers,  create  an  alarm,  seize,  if  jjossible,  some  of  the  videttes  or  pickets,  and  then  retreat 
rapidly  before  the  enemy  recovers. 

§377.  As  a  conclusion  to  the  rules  laid  down  in  this  chapter,  it  may  be  stated  that  the  prin- 
cipal duties  of  the  commander  of  a  patrol  are  the  following  : 

1.  To  be  always  cautious. 

2.  Always  to  provide  for  the  security  of  his  retreat. 

3.  Never  to  allow  himself  to  be  surrounded  and  captured. 

4 .  To  examine  the  country  carefully,  and  remember  its  features. 

5.  To  obtain  all  possible  information  from  the  inhabitants. 

6.  To  understand  how  to  select  guides  and  how  to  treat  them  ;  and, 

7.  To  endeavor  to  examine  everything  in  person. 

§  378.  As  for  the  rest,  it  is  impossible  to  give  the  commander  of  a  patrol  instructions  in  suffi- 
cient detail  to  cover  all  the  exceptional  cases  that  may  arise ;  therefore  the  success  of  his  mission 
must  depend  chiefly  upon  his  discretion  and  presence  of  mind. 

Rashness,  equally  with  cowardice,  both  here  and  everywhere,  fails  to  secure  the  desired 
advantages. 

CHAPTER  V. 

OF   THE   COMMAND  OF  THE  OUTPOSTS. 

§  379.  In  order  to  secure  unity  in  the  arrangements  and  operations  of  the  outposts,  a  field  or 
general  officer  is  detailed  as  the  commander  of  the  outposts ;  all  the  parties  are  under  his 
command. 

There  is  usually  detailed  for  duty  with  him  an  officer  of  the  staff,  whose  particuPar  duty  it  is 
to  prepare  an  accurate  and  rapid  description  of  the  ground. 

§  380.  The  commander  of  the  outposts  may  either  be  detailed  for  a  certain  length  of  time,  or 
be  relieved  at  the  same  time  with  his  troops ;  in  the  latter  case, he  is  usually  the  senior  officer  of 
the  troops  detailed  for  outpost  duty. 

§381.  Having  received  from  the  commander-in-chief,  or  the  chief  of  staff,  instructions  as  to 
their  operations,  the  general  direction  and  extent  of  the  chain,  information  of  the  number  of 
troops,  and  destination  of  the  parties  detailed  for  the  service,  he  sees  to  the  prompt  occupation  of 
the  places  designated  for  the  positions  of  the  outposts — making,  in  general,  such  modifications  of 
the  arrangement  as  may  appear  necessary. 


328  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

§  382.  He  receives  everyday  from  the  commander-in-chief,  in  writing,  and  under  an  envelope, 
the  parole,  ivatcliword,  and  countersign;  he  communicates  these  to  the  commanders  of  the  main 
guards  for  the  use  of  their  posts. 

§  383.  He  gives  the  necessary  instructions  to  the  commanders  of  the  main  guards,  pickets,  and 
other  posts,  and  maintains  a  constant  watch  over  their  punctuality  and  vigilance  in  the  execu- 
tion of  their  duty,  and  sees  that  they  keep  up  the  necessary  connexion  with  each  other. 

§  384.  He  should  he  informed  of  everything  that  happens  at  the  chain ;  nothing  should  escape 
his  attention  with  respect  to  the  posts,  and  guarding  the  ground  around  them ;  it  is  his  duty 
not  only  to  correct,  hut  anticipate  negligence,  and  to  give  all  necessary  directions. 

§385.  He  makes  the  distrihution  of  patrols,  determining  from  what  parties,  hy  what  roads, 
and  how  far  they  are  to  move  ;  he  despatches  distant  patrols,  and  gives  to  their  commanders 
detailed  and  precise  orders. 

§386.  He  arranges  the  despatching  of  rounds  to  visit  the  outposts,  and  also  goes  around  in 
person.  He  informs  hetimes  the  commanders  of  the  main  guards  and  pickets  as  to  who  will 
he  sent  on  the  rounds.  The  hours  of  sending  out  the  rounds  depend  upon  his  judgment ;  usually 
they  go  out  during  the  night  and  before  dawn. 

§  387.  Upon  the  arrival  of  flags  of  truce,  deserters,  or  strangers,  he  acts  according  to  the 
instructions  received  from  the  commander-in-chief,  or  chief  of  staff,  to  whom  he  ought  to  refer  in 
all  doubtful  cases. 

§388.  The  post  of  the  commander  of  the  outposts  is  with  the  reserve,  whither  all  reports  are 
sent  from  the  outposts ;  hut  if  there  is  no  reserve,  he  places  himself  with  the  main  guard  which  is 
nearest  the  centre  of  the  general  position.  In  every  case  he  notifies  all  the  commanders  where 
he  will  he,  that  they  may  know  where  to  send  their  reports. 

§  389.  But  he  so  arranges  matters  that,  if  he  is  not  found  at  the  place  designated,  the  report, 
no  matter  what  it  is,  may  be  forwarded  direct  to  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard,  and 
also  that  this  may  in  general  be  carried  out  in  cases  where  the  point  from  which  the  report 
originates  is  nearer  to  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard  than  to  his  own  habitual  position; 
but  he  takes  care  that  he  himself  shall,  in  all  cases,  be  promptly  informed  of  everything  that 
occurs. 

§  390.  The  commander  of  the  outposts,  having  received  reliable  reports  from  all  his  parties, 
regulates  their  operations  in  conformity  with  his  instructions,  and  conducts  their  movements 
either  so  as  to  repulse  the  attempts  of  the  enemy,  or  to  concentrate  the  parties,  or  to  afford 
support  to  any  of  them,  or,  finally,  to  make  a  general  retreat. 

§  391.  He  promptly  reports  to  the  commander-in-chief  everything  deserving  attention  that 
has  been  observed,  and  also  sends  him  early  reports  of  his  intentions. 

§  392.  Upon  the  arrival  of  the  commander-in-chief  at  the  outposts,  their  commander 
accompanies  him  over  the  whole  position. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

OF  THE  DUTIES  OF  HUNTERS,  FRIENDLY  INDIANS,   ETC.,  AT  THE  OUTPOSrS.o 

§  393.  Outpost  service  is  performed  by  these  kinds  of  troops  rather  differently  from  the 
manner  pursued  in  the  regular  cavalry.  Adopting  for  them  the  rules  herein  contained,  and 
which  can  be  explained  to  them  by  their  chiefs,  they  may  be  advantageously  employed  in  ad- 
vance of  the  regular  cavalry. 

*  This  chapter  is  taken  from  one  in  the  Russian  regulations,  relating  to  the  duty  of  Cossacks  at  the  outposts. 


IlErORT    OF   CAPT.    GEORGE    B.    M'CLELLAN.  329 

§  394.  The  main  difference  is,  that  the  advanced  chain  does  not  consist  of  double  videttes, 
relieved  every  two  hours,  but  of  pickets  of  3  or  4  men  each,  on  duty  for  24  hours,  and  relieving 
each  other  in  the  task  of  watching  the  enemy. 

§  395.  These  pickets  are  placed  at  such  a  distance  apart  that  they  can  see  each  other,  or  at 
least  that  the  enemy  cannot  slip  through  without  being  seen  by  one  or  other  of  the  pickets. 

§  396.  In  each  picket  one  man,  mounted,  or  on  foot,  with  his  horse  bridled  by  his  side,  con- 
stantly watches  the  whole  space  committed  to  the  picket ;  another  remains  behind  him  in  full 
readiness  to  mount ;  but  the  others  repose,  feed  their  horses,  lead  them  to  water,  and  even 
go  in  search  of  forage. 

§  397.  If  the  pickets  are  pushed  very  far  in  advance  of  the  regular  cavalry,  lines  of  supports 
are  j^laced  behind  them.  These  sujiports  are  placed  in  preference  near  roads,  or  points  of  special 
importance,  where  they  may  serve  as  points  of  assembly  for  the  chain  of  pickets. 

§  398.  The  supports  usually  consist  of  from  6  to  12  men  each.  One  of  them,  usually  standing 
to  horse,  places  himself  in  sight  of  the  chain  of  pickets,  also  turning  his  attention  to  the  ground 
on  each  side.  Of  the  rest  of  the  men  a  part  hold  themselves  in  readiness,  while  the  others 
rest,  feed  and  water  their  horses,  and  if  necessary  go  for  forage. 

§  399.  The  remainder  of  the  companies,  or  the  regiment  on  duty,  usually  form  a  reserve, 
about  a  mile  in  rear  of  the  line  of  supports,  on  the  principal  road,  or  behind  the  centre  of  the 
chain.  A  part  of  this  reserve  is  held  in  readiness  to  mount,  but  the  greater  part  repose,  and 
even  hobble  or  jiicket  their  horses. 

§  400.  The  quick  sight,  activity,  and  vigilance  of  the  men,  referred  to  in  this  chapter,  are 
such  as  to  allow  a  greater  interval  between  these  pickets  than  between  the  pairs  of  ordinary 
videttes.  The  supports,  not  being  intended  to  relieve  the  chain,  but  merely  to  serve  as  rallying 
points,  may  also  be  placed  further  apart  than  the  pickets  of  regular  cavalry.  Finally,  instead 
of  main  guards,  there  is  in  tliis  case  but  one  main  reserve.  From  these  facts  it  would  appear 
that  reliable  men,  of  the  kind  alluded  to  here,  may  guard  a  given  space  with  a  smaller  number 
of  men,  and  less  fatigue,  than  regular  cavalry.  Keserves  of  light  cavalry  should  be  posted  on  a 
line  with  the  main  reserve  of  the  irregulars.  The  Indian  horses  being  peculiarly  capable  of 
enduring  the  fatigue  of  outpost  duty,  the  friendly  Indians,  if  there  are  any  present,  should 
compose  the  outposts  in  preference. 

§  401.  During  the  night  and  in  dark  weather  the  intervals  between  the  irregular  pickets 
must  be  decreased,  as  prescribed  for  videttes. 

§  402.  Regular  patrols  and  rounds  need  not  be  so  much  resorted  to,  but  each  particular  chief 
should  often  ride  around  the  whole  circuit  of  his  command. 

§  403.  The  irregular  reserve  will  from  time  to  time  send  out  patrols  of  5,  10,  or  15  men  to 
reconnoitre  in  all  directions. 

CHAPTER  YII. 

OF  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF  THE  OUTPOSTS  ACCORDING  TO  THE  NATURE  OF  THE  GROUND. 

§  404.  The  art  of  arranging  the  outposts  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  is  founded 
upon  :  1.  The  proper  general  direction  of  the  advanced  chain  ;  2.  The  distribution  of  the  sup- 
ports ;  and,  3.  The  composition  of  the  supports.  The  object  to  be  gained  is  to  discover  the 
enemy  at  the  greatest  possible  distance  with  the  smallest  possible  number  of  men,  without  ex- 
posing any  of  the  posts  to  be  cut  off. 

§  405.  The  general  line  of  the  outposts  is  generally  determined  by  some  natural  objects,  such 
as  the  banks  of  rivers,  creeks,  borders  of  ravines,  marshes,  skirts  of  woods,  crests  of  heights,  &c. 
42  © 


330  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO    EUROPE. 

§  406.  The  chain  of  videttes  should  cross  objects  favoring  the  view  of  the  surrounding  country, 
and  its  flanks  should  rest  on  impracticable  places.  It  should  be  neither  too  far  advanced,  nor 
too  close  in  ;  in  the  first  case,  it  would  be  difficult  for  the  videttes  to  retreat ;  in  the  last  case, 
the  troops  guarded  would  not  have  the  necessary  time  given  them. 

§  407.  The  chain  should  not  be  so  placed  as  to  have  close  in  front  of  it  covered  places,  villages, 
woods,  and  such  objects;  if  it  is  not  possible  to  throw  the  chain  in  advance  of  these  places  with- 
out too  great  an  extension,  it  is  best  to  draw  it  a  great  deal  to  the  rear.  If  this  last  cannot  be 
done,  for  want  of  space,  it  only  remains  to  redouble  vigilance  and  send  out  more  frequent  patrols. 

§  408.  If  the  chain  is  placed  behind  an  impassable  object,  such  as  a  broad  river  or  a  very  bad 
marsh,  it  may  be  made  thinner  than  usual,  or  even  be  entirely  dispensed  with  ;  in  the  latter 
case,  patrols  must  be  sent  out,  more  or  less  frequently,  in  proportion  to  the  degree  of  imprac- 
ticability of  the  ground  and  the  difficulty  of  examining  it.  In  no  case  should  any  portion  of 
the  ground  remain  entirely  unwatched,  however  impracticable  it  may  appear  to  be. 

§  409.  In  mountainous  regions,  where  the  broken  nature  of  the  country  embarasses  communi- 
cations and  facilitates  the  concealment  of  the  enemy's  movements  on  all  sides,  the  outposts  draw 
nearer  together  than  the  specified  normal  distances,  and  sometimes  the  camp  is  entirely 
surrounded  by  a  chain  of  videttes. 

§  410.  In  the  general  line  of  the  outposts  there  may  be  places  unfit  for  the  operations  of 
cavalry  ;  such  portions  are  necessarily  occupied  by  infantry,  all  the  rest  by  cavalry ;  in  such 
cases,  one  part  of  the  chain  will  consist  of  mounted  videttes,  the  rest  of  pairs  of  infantry 
sentinels.  In  this  case,  the  outposts  are  formed  of  cavalry  and  infantry,  each  guarding  the 
ground  destined  for  it  according  to  the  rules  laid  down  for  that  arm  ;  but  such  a  chain  of  out- 
posts should  form  one  general  whole,  and  the  different  parts  must  maintain  a  constant  union, 
unless  separated  by  wholly  impassable  obstacles. 

§  411.  The  videttes  should  be  posted  at  the  points  commanding  the  most  distant  views  ;  in 
the  day  they  are  placed  on  the  summits  of  the  hills,  at  night  they  fall  back  to  the  foot  of  the 
slope.  They  should  also  be  concealed  by  some  natural  object,  which,  at  the  same  time,  permits 
them  to  see  all  around.  Between  the  pairs  of  videttes  there  should  be  no  covered  places  which 
might  conceal  the  approach  of  the  enemy. 

§  412.  In  the  distribution  of  the  supports  of  the  chain,  that  is,  the  pickets,  main  guards,  and 
reserves,  they  are  posted  in  preference  at  places  around  which  the  enemy  cannot  pass,  or,  at 
least,  at  places  where  he  may  most  probably  be  expected ;  therefore,  they  are  usually  posted 
near  the  roads,  especially  at  cross-roads. 

§  413.  Another  condition  in  the  distribution  of  the  supports  is  that  each  should,  if  possible, 
see  the  parties  directly  subordinate  to  it,  and  to  which  it  ought  to  give  immediate  support. 
This  is  particularly  important  for  the  pickets  in  relation  to  the  videttes,  because  on  the  approach 
of  the  enemy  the  latter  form  part  of  the  former. 

§  414.  A  third  condition  for  the  proper  distribution  of  the  supports  is  that  they  should  be 
concealed  until  the  moment  for  action  arrives. 

§  415.  Finally,  a  fourth  condition  is  that  they  should  be  placed  in  positions  suitable  for  their 
operations  ;  that  is,  cavalry  should  have  an  open  unobstructed  space  in  their  front,  but  infantry, 
an  obstructed  country.  This  condition  is  of  peculiar  importance  in  regard  to  the  reserve,  which 
is  expected  to  make  a  more  obstinate  resistance  than  the  main  guard  and  pickets. 

§  416.  In  order  to  preserve  the  general  union  between  all  parts  of  the  outposts,  and  more 
especially  between  the  outjjosts  and  the  troops  guarded  by  them,  there  should  be  no  impassable 
obstacles  between  them ;  this  is  to  avoid  exposing  any  party  to  being  cut  oflFand  defeated  separately. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN.  331 

If  there  is  behind  the  chain  of  videttes  a  place  across  which  communication  is  difBciilt,  it  is  best 
to  place  the  main  guards  or  pickets  near  it,  that  they  may  hold  the  crossings,  and  permit  the 
fulfilment  of  the  other  conditions  for  a  good  arrangement. 

§417.  Pickets  relieving  videttes  should  always  be  composed  of  the  same  kind  of  troops  as  their 
videttes  ;  the  main  guards  and  reserves  are  composed  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground 
between  the  pickets  and  the  camp  ;  in  places  suitable  for  cavalry  they  consist  of  that  arm,  in 
defensive  positions  they  are  of  infantry. 

§418.  To  secure  their  greater  independence  the  reserves  of  the  outposts  may  sometimes  be 
composed  of  all  three  arms  ;  but  in  an  open,  unobstructed  country  they  may  be  of  cavalry  and 
horse  artillery  alone. 

§419.  Example  of  the  arrangement  of  outposts  composed  of  cavalry  alone,  Plate  6. 

It  is  supposed  that  an  advanced  guard,  consisting  of  a  brigade  of  cavalry  and  a  division  of 
infantry,  is  in  the  village  A,  and  that  it  is  necessary  to  guard  it  against  the  enemy,  expected 
by  the  roads  B. 

§  420.  To  determine  the  line  of  observation  to  be  occupied  by  the  outposts,  the  whole  ground 
between  the  position  of  the  advanced  guard  and  the  points  accessible  by  the  enemy  must  first  be 
carefully  examined  on  the  map  ;  from  the  selection  of  the  line  of  observation  results  the  com- 
position of  the  chain  and  its  supports. 

§421.  In  this  example,  according  to  the  conditions  already  mentioned,  the  most  advantageous 
line  of  observation  is  that  proceeding  from  the  village  L,  through  the  villages  M  and  N,  thence 
following  the  ridge  0  to  the  lake  P.     This  line  is  favorable,  because: 

1.  The  right  flank,  resting  on  the  marsh  near  the  village  L,  cannot  be  turned,  and  requires 
no  further  extension. 

2.  The  left  flank,  resting  on  the  lake,  allows  us  to  observe  from  the  ridge  the  distant  movements 
of  the  enemy  ;  the  ridge  also  conceals  our  own  movements  from  the  enemy  in  that  direction. 

3.  Without  being  too  far  ofi",  the  chain  is  at  such  a  distance  that  every  movement  of  the  enemy 
can  be  discovered  in  season  to  enable  the  advanced  guard  to  take  all  its  measures  for  operating 
against  him. 

§  422.  Upon  the  nature  of  the  ground  over  which  the  line  of  observation  extends  must  depend 
the  kind  of  troops  who  are  to  hold  it. 

In  this  example,  from  the  appearance  of  the  ground  towards  the  enemy  and  towards  the  advanced 
guard,  it  seems  that  cavalry  can  act  with  advantage';  therefore  all  the  outposts  are  of  that  arm. 

The  extent  of  the  line  is  a  little  more  than  5  miles,  therefore,  according  to  the  estimate  in  §  193, 
6  companies  will  be  required  for  the  videttes,  pickets,  and  main  guards.  As  the  ground  opposes 
no  obstacles  to  the  action  of  cavalry,  the  reserve  should  also  be  of  that  arm.  This  reserve, 
consisting  of  4  companies  of  cavalry  and  2  pieces  of  horse  artillery,  is  posted  at  the  central 
point  C,  whence  it  can  easily  move  to  all  parts  of  the  outposts. 

§  423.  In  accordance  with  the  principles  just  explained,  the  commander  of  the  advanced  guard 
issues  in  this  case  instructions  to  the  following  purport : 

1.  The  N'"  regiment  of  cavalry  and  2  pieces  of  the  N'"  battery  of  horse  artillery  are  detailed 
for  outpost  duty.  These  troops  will  post  a  chain  of  videttes  from  the  village  L,  through  the 
villages  M  and  N,  and  along  the  ridge  0  to  the  lake  P. 

2.  Patrols  will  be  sent  out :  from  the  village  L  to  F  ;  from  the  picket  E'",  along  the  road  G  ; 
and  from  the  other  posts,  in  the  direction  in  which  the  enemy  is  expected. 

3.  If  the  enemy  attacks  in  force,  the  outposts  will  fall  back  upon  the  advanced  guard. 

With  these  instructions  as  a  basis,  the  commander  of  the  outposts  makes  his  assignments  ; 


332  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

each  company  is  directed  where  to  take  position,  and  between  what  points  to  occupy  the  line  of 
observation  ;  all  the  parties  are  posted  as  explained  above  and  shown  in  Plate  6. 

§  424.  If,  in  the  example  given  in  Plate  6,  the  right  flank  of  the  advanced  guard  is  not 
regarded  as  sufficiently  protected  by  the  marsh,  then  an  independent  picket,  consisting  of  a 
platoon,  is  posted  at  H,  to  watch  the  road  leading  through  the  village  I;  this  picket  posts  two 
pairs  of  videttes. 

§  425.  Example  of  the  arrangement  of  outposts  composed  of  hoth  cavalry  and  infantry,  Plate  7. 

It  is  supposed  that  the  advanced  guard  A,  consisting  of  a  brigade  of  cavalry  and  a  division  of 
infantry,  is  placed  behind  the  village  B,  and  that  outposts  are  to  be  posted  to  guard  against  an 
attack  by  the  enemy  arriving  from  the  direction  of  the  village  C. 

§  426.  With  this  arrangement  of  the  advanced  guard,  it  is  best  to  place  the  outposts  on  the 
left  side  of  the  creek  M,  because  if  the  line  of  posts  were  limited  by  the  stream  it  would  be  difficult 
to  obtain  information  of  the  movements  of  the  enemy's  advanced  guard. 

§  427.  The  best  line  of  observation  is  from  the  lake  N  to  the  corner  of  the  village  B,  then 
along  the  edge  of  this  village  to  the  marsh  Q.  On  account  of  its  shortness  and  the  nature  of  the 
objects  on  which  its  flanks  rest,  this  line  is  very  advantageous.  From  the  lake  N  to  the  village 
B  (about  1\  mile)  it  may  be  held  by  cavalry ;  along  the  edge  of  the  village,  (about  |  of  a  mile,) 
by  infantry. 

§  428.  To  prevent  the  line  from  being  turned,  independent  pickets  must  in  this  case  be  posted 
on  the  left  flank,  near  the  lake  N  and  the  height  0,  on  the  right  flank  on  the  road  L ;  to  support 
the  pickets  and  defend  the  villages  and  crossings,  it  is  best  that  all  the  main  guards  should  be 
of  infantry. 

§  429.  Thus  the  line  will  consist  of  2  cavalry  and  2  infantry  pickets,  holding  the  main  line  of 
observation,  of  3  independent  cavalry  pickets,  and  of  4  infantry  main  guards.  To  supply  these 
5  platoons  of  cavalry  and  about  9  companies  of  infantry  will  be  necessary  ;  so  that  for  the  whole 
outpost  service,  including  the  reserve,  there  may  be  detailed  4  companies  of  cavalry,  2  battalions 
of  infantry,  and  2  pieces  of  foot  artillery. 

§  430.  On  this  basis  the  commander  of  the  outposts  receives  the  following  instructions: 

1.  Four  companies  of  the  Nth.  regiment  of  cavalry,  the  Mtli.  and  Nth.  regiments  of  infantry, 
and  2  pieces  of  the  Nth.  foot  battery  are  detailed  for  the  outposts. 

2.  The  cavalry  will  occupy  the  line  of  the  outposts  from  the  lake  N,  along  the  ravine  P,  to 
the  corner  of  the  village  B ;  the  infantry,  from  this  last  point,  along  the  edge  of  the  village  to 

the  marsh  Q. 

One  independent  cavalry  picket  will  be  posted  near  the  village  K,  another  in  front  of  the 
village  I,  a  third  on  the  road  L. 

3.  The  main  guards  will  be  of  infantry,  posted  as  follows :  one,  of  2  companies,  in  the  cemetery 
near  the  end  of  the  village  B ;  another,  of  3  companies,  in  that  village  ;  a  third,  of  2  companies, 
in  the  village  G;  a  fourth,  of  2  companies,  in  the  village  I. 

4.  The  rest  of  the  troops  detailed  will  form  the  reserve  of  the  outposts,  and  be  posted  at  U,  on 
the  main  road,  behind  the  crossing  over  the  stream  M. 

5.  As  long  as  the  enemy  does  not  show  a  strong  force  of  infantry,  every  efibrt  will  be  made  to 
keep  him  beyond  the  villages. 

Under  the  forgoing  instructions  the  outposts  may  be  arranged  as  shown  in  Plate  7. 

§  431.  Finally,  among  the  examples  of  the  disposition  of  outposts  according  to  the  ground 
may  be  considered  the  case  of  a  locality  which  permits  the  enemy  to  approach  only  by  a  few 
passes.     If  he  is  separated  from  us  by  a  river,  a  marsh,  rough  hills,  &c.,  and  can  approach  only 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  337 

hy  known  fords,  passages,  or  narrow  defiles,  then,  if  these  points  are  occupied  by- 
pickets,  there  will  no  necessity  for  a  continuous  chain  of  videttes. 

Bemark. — Whenever  the  camp  is  behind  a  river,  the  outposts  should  convey  to  their  own  side 
all  the  boats  and  other  means  of  crossing. 

§  432.  In  such  cases,  the  independent  pickets  are  posted  at  points  which  the  enemy  cannot  turn. 

§  433.  For  their  own  safety,  they  post  videttes  ;  if  the  ground  permits,  they  communicate  with 
each  other  by  means  of  patrols. 

§  434.  If  it  is  necessary  to  support  the  independent  pickets,  reserves  are  placed  as  directed  in 
§412. 

§  435.  Example  of  the  arrangement  of  the  outposts  in  a  locality  where  the  enemy  can  approach 
only  by  a  few  passes,  Plate  8. 

It  is  supposed  that  a  detachment,  composed  of  a  brigade  of  cavalry  and  a  division  of  infantry, 
is  placed  at  the  village  A  to  guard,  in  connexion  with  another  detachment  at  B,  the  troops 
following  from  the  north,  and  that  outposts  are  to  be  posted ;  and  that  it  is  known  that  the 
advanced  troops  of  the  enemy,  approaching  from  the  south,  have  not  yet  occupied  the  village  N, 
and  that  they  cannot  turn  the  passages  over  the  stream  P. 

§  436.  It  is  evident  that  it  is  unnecessary,  in  this  case,  to  post  a  continuous  chain  of  videttes 
and  that  it  will  be  sufficient  to  place  independent  pickets  on  the  main  roads,  at  proper  distances 
from  the  advanced  detachment  to  be  supported  by  it,  and  keep  up  the  communication  with  the 
detachment  at  B. 

§  437.  Upon  examining  the  ground  in  front  of  A  and  B,  it  is  evident  that  the  stream  P  is  the 
most  advantageous  line  of  observation,  and  that  the  main  detachment  will  be  perfectly  secure  if 
the  crossings  of  the  stream  are  occupied  by  independent  pickets. 

§  438.  The  crossings  are  at  the  points  Q,  K,  S,  T,  U,  and  V.  Supposing  the  crossing  at  Q  to 
be  occupied  by  a  picket  from  the  detachment  at  B,  and  that  each  picket  consists  of  a  platoon,  the 
detachment  at  A  must  furnish  5  platoons,  or  6  if  the  flank  picket  at  K  consists  of  a  company. 

§  439.  Main  guards,  consisting  of  a  company  each,  are  posted  near  the  villages  F  and  I;  and 
there  may  be  a  reserve  of  4  or  5  companies  and  a  few  guns  at  the  village  D. 

§  440.  The  pickets  posted  near  K,  S,  and  T,  should  send  out  patrols  to  the  village  N,  and  the 
pickets  near  U  and  V  send  patrols  to  the  village  W ;  a  small  detachment  should  be  sent  through 
the  village  N,  to  keep  on  until  it  finds  the  enemy;  this  should  be  composed  of  a  company. 

§  441 .  On  these  principles  the  commander  of  the  outposts  receives  the  following  instructions  : 

1.  The  Nth.  regiment  of  cavalry  and  2  pieces  of  the  Nth.  horse  battery  are  detailed  for  the 
outposts. 

2.  Until  the  enemy  arrives  at  the  village  N,  the  outposts  will  keep  only  independent  pickets 
at  the  crossings  of  the  stream  P,  at  E,  S,  T,  U,  and  V ;  the  main  guards  to  be  companies  near 
F,  I,  and  L  ;  in  order  to  observe  the  enemy  better,  one  company  will  be  sent  through  the  villao'e 
N,  to  keep  on  until  it  finds  the  enemy;  the  remainder  of  the  cavalry  and  the  guns  will  be  posted 
in  reserve  near  the  village  D.  Near  patrols  will  be  sent  out,  as  usual,  from  all  the  pickets  in 
the  direction  of  the  villages  N  and  W,  and  distant  patrols  to  keep  on  until  they  find  the  enemy. 

To  carry  out  these  instructions  the  outposts  may  be  arranged  as  shown  in  Plate  8. 

§  442.  If  the  line  observed  by  the  independent  pickets  is  very  far  from  the  camp,  and  it  is  not 
intended  to  defend  it,  but  they  are  restricted  to  observation  and  giving  notice  of  the  enemy's 
approach,  then  this  line  is  occupied  by  cavalry  alone,  according  to  the  rules  for  independent 
pickets. 

§  443.  But  if  the  line  is  near  the  camp,  or  for  other  reasons  it  is  necessary  to  defend  as  well 


334  MILITARY   COMMISSION   TO   EUROPE. 

as  observe  it,  then  it  should  be  occupied  by  infantry  in  force  proportionate  to  the  importance  oi 
the  case,  or  the  possibility  of  holding  it  long  enough  to  permit  other  troops  to  arrive. 

§  444.  Such  posts  are  called  independent  defensive  posts. 

If  an  independent  defensive  post  is  far  from  camp,  and  it  is  only  intended  to  delay  the  advance 
of  the  head  of  the  enemy's  column,  and  then  fall  back  on  the  other  troops,  cavalry  should  occupy 
it  in  preference. 

§  445.  In  such  cases  mounted  riflemen  are  of  great  use,  because  they  repulse  the  enemy  by 
acting  as  infantry,  and  can  retreat  with  the  rapidity  of  cavalry  when  it  becomes  necessary ;  and, 
when  covering  the  retreat  of  other  troops,  they  can  act  sometimes  as  infantry,  sometimes  as 
cavalry,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the  necessity  of  the  case. 

§  446.  In  an  independent  defensive  post,  the  party  on  duty  dismounts  and  occupies  the  point 
to  be  defended  as  infantry  ;  the  rest  of  the  men  repose  near  the  horses,  observing  the  precautions 
prescribed  for  main  guards  ;  they  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  men  acting  as  infantry,  and  keep 
the  horses  bitted. 

§  447.  In  all  the  cases  mentioned  in  this  chapter,  precise  instructions  are  given  to  the  com- 
mander of  each  party  as  to  what  is  to  be  done  in  the  event  of  the  appearance  of  the  enemy. 

§  448.  As  a  conclusion  to  this  chapter,  it  may  be  stated  that,  although  the  disposition  of  the 
outposts,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground,  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  for  the  reason  that 
success  in  watching  the  enemy  depends  neither  on  the  number  nor  strength  of  the  outposts,  but 
on  their  skilful  arrangement,  all  that  can  be  said  on  the  subject  is  limited  rather  to  an  explanation 
of  the  general  importance  of  objects  than  to  laying  down  any  precise  rules.  In  all  cases  theory 
must  yield  to  the  judgment  of  the  commander,  for  a  blind  and  unconditional  following  of  rules 
may  result  in  injury  rather  than  advantage. 

From  all  that  precedes,  it  appears  that  troops  may  be  guarded  either  by  continuous  chains 
with  lines  of  supports,  or  by  independent  posts,  or  by  patrols,  or,  finally,  by  all  three  methods 
combined. 

But  there  is  no  doubt  that,  if  we  carefully  conform  to  the  principles  laid  down  for  each  of 
these  arrangements,  one  of  them  will  often  suffice  ;  while,  on  the  contrary,  if  we  neglect  these 
principles,  the  employment  of  all  three  may  be  insufficient. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

PRECAUTIONS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  THE  CAMP  OF  THE  MAIN   BODY. 

§  449.  To  avoid  fatiguing  the  troops  by  keeping  all  of  them  constantly  ready  for  a  movement 
and  combat,  but  at  the  same  time  to  secure  them  against  attack,  and  be  able  to  afford  prompt 
assistance  to  the  outposts,  a  portion  of  the  main  body  is  detailed  as  an  inlying  picket. 

§  450.  The  inlying  picket  must  always  be  ready  for  action  on  the  first  order  or  signal.  The 
men  should  therefore  always  be  to  the  front,  and  be  dressed  both  by  day  and  night ;  their  arms 
should  be  loaded,  and  their  horses  saddled  but  unbitted  and  picketed  ;  they  are  taken  to  water 
by  turns,  in  parties.  In  the  artillery,  the  men  of  the  inlying  picket  are  always  dressed,  the 
horses  have  their  collars  on,  and  are  taken  to  water  only  by  piece  or  by  section. 

§  451.  It  rests  with  the  commander  of  the  main  body,  according  to  the  news  he  has  of  the 
enemy,  whether  to  direct  additional  precautions  on  the  part  of  the  inlying  picket ;  for  instance, 
that  the  men  should  wear  their  accoutrements,  &c. 

§452.  The  strength  of  the  inlying  picket  is  regulated  by  the  commander  of  the  detachment. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  335 

or  army,  in  conformity  with  the  degree  of  danger,  the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  and  his  means 
of  turning  our  position.     Approximately,  the  inlying  picket  is  |  or  -J  of  the  whole  force. 

§  453.  In  small  detachments  from  which  it  is  impossible  to  send  out  many  men  on  outpost 
duty,  and  in  general  near  the  enemy,  the  whole  detachment  sometimes  forms  a  kind  of  inlying 
picket ;  in  this  case  only  a  small  number  are  relieved  at  a  time,  according  to  the  judgment  of 
the  commander,  but  the  greater  portion  remain  in  readiness  for  action. 

§  454.  Upon  receiving  from  the  outposts  news  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy,  the  inlying  picket 
at  once  moves  to  the  front  to  receive  the  outposts  and  aiford  the  other  troops  time  to  prepare. 

§455.  For  greater  security,  the  inlying  picket  is  sometimes  posted  a  little  to  the  front,  and 
then  picket  their  horses  somewhat  in  advance  of  the  general  camp.  This  is  done  whenever 
there  is  anything  immediately  in  front  of  the  camp  to  cause  delay. 

§  456.  The  commander  and  all  the  officers  of  the  inlying  picket  will  strictly  superintend  the 
observation  of  all  the  precautions  required. 

§  457.  To  prevent  confusion  in  the  camp,  in  case  of  an  alarm  or  an  attack,  it  is  necessary  to 
watch — 

1.  That  all  parts  of  the  troops  are  arranged  in  conformity  with  the  movements  they  are  to 
make,  so  that  they  can  form  in  order  of  battle  without  confusion,  and  without  crossing  each 
other's  paths. 

2.  That  all  commanders,  down  to  those  of  regiments  and  batteries,  inclusive,  know  the  places 
their  commands  are  to  occupy  in  the  general  order  of  battle,  if  it  is  determined  to  accept  battle 
at  or  near  the  camp. 

3.  That  all  impediments  to  the  free  communications  and  movements  of  the  troops  are  removed 
in  season  as  far  as  practicable. 

4.  That  the  commander  of  the  train  is  always  informed  whither  to  direct  it,  in  case  of  leaving 
camp  suddenly. 

5.  That  the  parties  of  troops,  from  whom  mixed  detachments  are  sent  out  for  forage  and  other 
necessaries,  are  formed  immediately  after  their  departure,  to  count  and  organize  those  remaining. 

§  458.  The  commander  of  the  main  body  should  be  well  informed  in  regard  to  all  the  country 
in  the  vicinity  of  his  j^osition,  and  especially  as  to  the  roads  and  crossings  of  streams  in  the 
direction  in  which  he  expects  to  move. 

§  459.  In  camps  of  the  main  body,  the  inlying  picket  posts  camp  and  quarter  guards  imme- 
diately after  reaching  camp ;  this  is  done  as  in  time  of  peace. 

§  460.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  sentinels  of  the  camp  and  quarter  guards  to  see  that  no  one  leaves 
camp  between  evening  twilight  and  reveille  without  a  special  permit  from  the  commander,  unless 
on  duty. 

Men  who  are  not  known,  and  do  not  belong  to  the  troops,  or  who  have  not  the  necessary  per- 
mission, are  allowed  to  leave  camp  neither  by  day  nor  night ;  but  are  stopped  by  the  sentinels 
and  sent  to  the  guards,  by  whom  they  are  sent  to  the  inlying  picket. 

§  461.  In  the  night  the  sentinels  of  the  camp  and  quarter  guards  challenge  all  who  approach 
from  the  exterior,  and  act  as  prescribed  for  videttes. 

§  462.  In  general,  all  the  rules  laid  down  for  camp  and  garrison  service  in  time  of  peace  are 
carried  out  as  far  as  possible  in  the  camps  of  the  main  body. 


336  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPK. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

PRECAUTIONS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  FOR  THE  SECURITY  OF  CANTONMENTS. 

ARTICLE  1. 

Of  advanced  detachments. 

§463.  Troops  in  cantonments  being  scattered  over  a  great  space,  and  requiring  much  time  to 
assemble,  are  not  covered  by  a  continuous  chain  of  outposts.  In  this  case,  the  arrangements  for 
the  early  discovery  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy  are  made  entirely  by  the  cavalry,  who  must,  by 
means  of  their  outposts,  patrols,  and  parties,  watch  the  whole  space  in  front  of  the  cantonments 
towards  the  enemy. 

§  464.  These  outposts  consist  entirely  of  independent  posts,  whose  arrangement  depends  alto- 
gether upon  circumstances.  It  can  only  be  said  that,  as  they  are  sent  out  to  discover  the  enemy, 
they  are  posted  in  preference  on  the  main  roads,  at  the  junctions  of  roads  on  which  the  enemy 
must  move,  and  in  places  favorable  to  defensive  operations.  If  there  is  any  place  on  the  flank 
of  the  cantonments  oifering  advantages  to  the  enemy,  it  must  be  occupied. 

§465.  The  posts  should  be  strong  in  proportion  to  the  importance  of  the  road  on  which  they 
are  placed,  their  distance  from  the  cantonments,  and  the  facility  for  defence  offered  by  the  ground. 

§  466.  The  precautions  to  be  observed  by  these  posts  have  a  two-fold  object :  (a)  their  own 
safety;  (b)  to  afford  timely  information  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy.  In  this  matter  they  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  in  Part  II,  Chapter  I,  article  6,  of  these  regulations. 

§467.  The  more  extensive  the  space  over  which  the  outposts  are  scattered,  the  more  are  they 
left  to  their  own  resources,  and  the  more  must  their  success  depend  upon  the  good  sense  of  the 
commander  of  each  party.  His  only  means  of  obtaining  news  of  the  enemy  are  his  own  eyes, 
sentinels,  videttes,  patrols,  and  information  from  travellers  and  the  inhabitants  ;  but  it  depends 
upon  his  own  sagacity  to  apply  them  with  the  greatest  success. 

§468.  To  support  the  independent  pickets,  there  may  be  sent  out  main  guards,  and  on  the 
most  important  points  of  all  the  roads  leading  towards  the  enemy  main  advanced   detachments. 

§  469.  These  last,  being  intended  not  only  to  support  the  cavalry  outposts  and  parties,  but 
also  to  check  the  enemy  long  enough  to  enable  the  troops  in  the  cantonments  to  assemble  at  the 
designated  rendezvous,  should  possess  a  certain  independent  strength ;  therefore  they  should 
consist  of  all  three  arms,  according  to  the  importance  of  the  point. 

§  470.  These  detachments  are  j)ushed  one  or  two  marches  from  the  cantonments,  and  occupy 
strong  positions,  which  they  may  sometimes  strengthen  by  field  works. 

§  471.  If  the  intervals  between  them  are  considerable,  smaller  posts  are  placed  between  them, 
to  keep  up  the  communication  and  secure  the  cantonments  from  being  alarmed  by  light  detach- 
ments of  the  enemy. 

§472.  The  commander  of  a  main  advanced  detachment  must  make  himself  well  acquainted 
with  the  country  in  the  vicinity,  examine  all  the  approaches  by  which  the  enemy  may  arrive, 
and  take  all  measures  to  discover  his  movements  betimes,  as  well  as  to  secure  the  best  possible 
defence  of  the  post. 

§  473.  All  the  outposts  are  subordinate  to  the  commander  of  the  main  advanced  detachment ; 
he  arranges  their  movements,  and  receives  from  them  all  news  of  the  enemy. 

§  474.  The  main  advanced  detachments  post  camp  and  quarter  guards.  All  the  men  should 
be  in  readiness  for  action  ;  therefore  the  horses  are  saddled  at  the  picket  ropes,  arms  loaded, 


REPORT   OF   CAPT.    GEORGE   B.   MTLELLAN.  337 

accoutrements  close  at  hand,  and  they  do  not  undress  at  night ;  their  inlying  pickets  keep  their 
horses  bridled  and  accoutrements  on.  The  guns  in  position  should  be  loaded,  artillery  horses 
■with  their  collars  on,  the  detachments  close  to  their  pieces. 

§475.  All  the  posts  mentioned  in  this  article  guard  themselves  by  the  various  dispositions 
for  outpost  service,  that  is  to  say,  they  detach  independent  posts  or  surround  themselves  by 
chains,  according  to  their  distance  from  the  enemy.  They  send  out  patrols  and  flying  detachments 
as  far  as  the  position  of  the  enemy,  and  also  patrols  to  keep  up  their  communication  with  each 
other  and  with  the  cantonments. 

§476.  In  order  to  embarrass  and  retard  his  approach,  preparations  are  made  betimes  to  take 
up  the  bridges,  destroy  the  causeways,  &c.,  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  so  that  the  advanced 
parties  may  accomplish  the  purpose  immediately  upon  their  retreat  across  them.  But  the 
communications  with  the  cantonments  should  be  perfectly  open ;  therefore  all  obstacles  should  be 
removed  betimes. 

§477.  If  the  commander  of  a  main  advanced  detachment  receives  news  of  the  enemy,  he  at 
once  reports  it  to  the  commander-in-chief,  and,  if  necessary,  to  the  commanders  of  the  nearest 
posts  and  detachments.  In  such  cases  it  is  necessary  to  be  unusually  circumspect  with  regard  to 
reports  ;  and  in  case  of  the  appearance  of  the  enemy,  to  endeavor  to  ascertain  his  force  and 
designs,  in  order  to  avoid  alarming  the  cantonments  without  cause. 

§  478.  That  the  commander-in-chief  may  be  constantly  informed  of  what  is  going  on  at  the 
outposts,  the  commanders  of  the  main  advanced  detachments  send  reports  to  him  at  the  hours 
he  may  specify,  several  times  a  day,  even  if  nothing  of  importance  has  been  observed. 

§479.  Signal  stations,  telegraphs,  &c.,  are  established  at  convenient  j)oints  to  convey  prompt 
information  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy. 

§  480.  If  a  main  advanced  detachment  is  attacked,  its  movements  must  depend  upon  the 
orders  it  has  received  from  the  commander-in-chief. 

§  481.  Only  their  wagons  of  the  1st  class,  with  a  part  of  those  of  the  2d,  are  with  the  main 
advanced  detachments. 

If  the  enemy  advances,  the  wagons  at  once  move  to  the  rear,  so  as  not  to  impede  the  move- 
ments of  the  troops  if  they  are  forced  to  retreat. 

§  482.  On  account  of  the  fatiguing  nature  of  the  outpost  duty,  the  troops  should  be  relieved 
from  time  to  time,  according  to  the  judgment  of  the  commander-in-chief. 

ARTICLE  2. 
Precautions  to  be  observed  by  the  main  body  in  cantonments. 

§  483.  In  addition  to  the  outposts  and  advanced  detachments  for  guarding  the  cantonments, 
certain  measures  of  precaution  are  taken  by  the  main  body  itself,  especially  in  reference  to  the 
rapid  assembly  of  the  troops  in  the  event  of  an  attack.  These  measures  are  regulated  by  the 
commander-in-chief,  according  to  the  proximity  of  the  enemy  and  the  degree  of  the  danger. 

§  484.  The  troops  nearest  the  enemy,  being  most  exposed  to  attack,  are  placed  in  crowded 
quarters  to  secure  a  prompt  assembly ;  the  others  may  be  placed  further  apart  and  in  more 
roomy  quarters,  for  the  greater  facility  of  obtaining  supplies. 

§  485.  In  the  distribution  of  the  troops,  their  position  in  the  cantonments  must  correspond, 
as  nearly  as  possible,  with  their  position  in  the  order  of  battle.  The  artillery  is  placed  near 
the  points  where  it  is  destined  to  act,  the  men  and  horses  being  in  the  same  villages  with  the 
parks. 

43  © 


338  MILITARY    COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

§  486.  If  it  is  necessary,  inlying  pickets  are  detailed  in  the  villages  nearest  the  enemy;  the 
state  of  preparation  in  -which  they  are  kept  is  regulated  by  the  commander-in-chief  according 
to  circumstances.     If  necessary,  distant  patrols  are  sent  out  by  these  inlying  pickets. 

§  487.  In  addition  to  the  guards  at  regimental  head(|uarters,  and  in  the  different  parts  of 
large  villages,  infantry  guards  are  posted  at  the  outlets  of  the  villages  on  the  side  of  the  enemy. 
These  guards  post  sentinels,  and  are  ordered  to  prevent  the  passage  of  people  without  the 
countersign  at  night,  or  both  by  day  and  night,  according  to  circumstances. 

§  488.  Signal  stations  and  telegraphs  must  be  arranged  in  the  cantonments.  The  signals  to 
turn  out  and  form  must  be  explained  to  the  troops. 

§  489.  That  the  troops  may  meet  the  enemy  in  force  if  he  attacks,  points  of  rendezvous  must 
be  designated  near  the  quarters  for  regiments,  divisions,  and  other  parties. 

§  490.  In  addition  to  the  general  rendezvous,  there  is  a  special  one  for  the  troops  in  each 
village.  This  is  chosen  outside  of  the  village,  on  the  side  nearest  the  general  rendezvous  ;  and 
measures  are  taken  betimes  that  all  the  roads  leading  to  the  rendezvous  may  be  open  and  free 
from  obstacles. 

§  491.  When  the  troops  march  to  the  rendezvous,  only  the  wagons  of  the  1st  class  accompany 
them  ;  special  rendezvous  are  given  for  the  other  wagons,  so  that  the  troops  may  not  be  delayed 
or  embarrassed  by  them  either  when  moving  to  the  rendezvous  or  in  case  of  retreat. 

§  492.  For  the  march  of  the  troops  to  the  rendezvous  roads  are  chosen  for  each  party,  so  that 
they  may  neither  cross  nor  delay  each  other  on  the  march. 

The  roads  should  be  examined  and  repaired  betimes. 

PART  III. 

OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  OPERATIONS  OF  SPECIAL  DETACHMENTS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

OF  SUDDEN  ATTACKS  UPON  THE  ENEMY. 

§  493.  Sudden  attacks  upon  the  enemy  are  made  with  several  objects  : 

1.  To  alarm  his  posts  ; 

2.  To  capture  one  or  more  of  them  ;  and 

3.  To  attack  his  quarters. 

§  494.  For  all  such  enterprises,  cavalry  are  chosen  in  preference.  Mounted  rifles,  or  dragoons, 
uniting  the  defensive  force  of  infantry  with  the  velocity  of  cavalry,  may  be  of  particular  advantage 
in  the  last  two  cases,  esi3ecially  in  passing  to  the  defensive  and  covering  a  retreat,  in  case  of  a 
failure  in  the  enterprise. 

§  495.  The  principal  conditions  of  success  in  all  enterprises  of  this  kind  may  be  stated  to  be  : 
1.  Complete  knowledge  of  the  ground,  and  positive  information  as  to  the  force  and  distribution 
of  the  enemy  ;  2.  A  concealed  approach  to  the  point  on  which  the  attack  is  to  be  made ;  3. 
Rapidity  of  movement,  seconded  by  the  secresy  and  unexpectedness  of  the  attack  ;  and  4.  To 
keep  the  movements  of  the  different  parties  as  closely  united  as  possible  until  the  last  moment, 
so  that  no  one  of  them  may  be  delayed  by  unexpected  obstacles,  or  discovered  by  the  enemy  on 
account  of  having  separated  too  soon ;  finally,  the  whole  force  must  be  perfectly  ready  for  action 
at  a  moment's  notice. 

§  496.  In  accomplishing  a  concealed  approach  to  the  point  on  which  the  attack  is  to  be  made 
we  will  be  assisted  by  selecting  the  time  when  the  enemy  least  expects  an  attack,  that  is,  in  the 


EEPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'^CLELLAN.  339 

night,  or  thick  weather ;  hy  choosing  the  route  affording  the  hest  cover ;  hy  announcing  an  enter- 
prise of  an  entirely  different  nature  ;  and,  sometimes,  hy  starting  in  the  opposite  direction,  that 
after  having  made  a  considerable  circuit  we  may  finally  come  out  in  the  real  direction. 

§  497.  Besides  the  general  conditions  specified,  there  are  also  particular  conditions,  relating 
to  each  of  the  cases  specified  in  §  493,  which  are  discussed  in  the  following  §  §. 

§  498.  Attacks  upon  the  enemy's  outposts  are  undertaken  either  to  harass  him,  by  obliging 
him  to  be  in  constant  readiness  for  action,  or  to  divert  his  attention,  in  order  to  cover  some 
movement  favorable  to  us. 

In  this,  and  the  other  cases,  we  should  endeavour  to  extend  the  alarm  over  the  greatest  possible 
space  with  the  fewest  possible  men. 

For  this,  it  is  advantageous  to  divide  the  party  into  several  sections,  which,  attacking  at 
several  points,  either  simultaneously  or  successively,  break  through  the  chain,  gallop  up  to  the 
main  guards,  and  having  alarmed  them,  at  once  fall  back ;  if  successful  they  seize  some  videttes 
or  even  pickets.  In  such  an  attack  every  section  exerts  itself  to  appear  as  strong  as  possible, 
they  therefore  scatter,  and  generally  keep  up  a  warm  firing  and  great  noise. 

§  499.  Besides  harassing  the  enemy,  which  is  the  direct  object  of  these  attacks,  they  may 
procure  the  advantage  of  making  the  enemy  careless  if  they  are  frequently  repeated,  and  thus 
facilitate  the  success  of  more  important  operations. 

§  500.  In  making  an  attack  for  the  purpose  of  capturing  a  post  of  the  enemy,  it  is  well  to  divide 
the  detachment  detailed  for  the  service  into  three  parts  ;  one  moves  to  the  roar  of  the  post,  on 
its  road  of  retreat  and  reinforcement ;  another  part  makes  the  direct  attack  ;  the  third  is  held  in 
reserve  to  support  the  attack,  or,  in  case  of  failure,  cover  the  retreat  of  the  other  parts.  If 
possible,  it  is  well  to  conceal  the  reserve  until  the  moment  when  the  enemy  is  allured  to  pursue 
the  repulsed  party  ;  then  the  reserve,  acting  as  an  ambuscade,  endeavors  to  take  the  enemy  in 
flank  or  in  rear,  and  seize  the  abandoned  post. 

§  501.  If  the  post  attacked  is  in  a  village,  the  place  of  assembly  should  be  ascertained,  and  a 
party  of  men  sent  there  to  seize  the  enemy  as  they  arrive  singly  upon  the  alarm. 

§  502.  In  general,  in  attacking  a  post  with  the  design  of  taking  possession  of  it,  the  greatest 
silence  should  be  observed  and  the  firing  commenced  only  when  the  attacking  party  has  been 
already  discovered ;  then  rapidity  and  decision  are  necessary,  so  that  the  enemy  may  not  have 
time  to  recover;  rapidity  and  audacity  in  the  attack  usually  command  success. 

§  503.  If  the  enemy  retreats,  then  on  the  return  march  the  reserve  usually  marches  in  front 
with  the  prisoners ;  the  attacking  party  follows;  the  party  which  moved  on  the  enemy's  rear 
acts  as  a  rear  guard. 

§  504.  If  the  ground  permits  the  attack  may  be  combined  with  an  ambuscade.  For  this 
purpose  veteran  troops  are  detailed,  who  are  concealed  with  the  object  of  falling  suddenly  upon 
the  enemy  when  he  has  been  decoyed  to  their  position.  In  this  case,  success  depends  much  upon 
the  conduct  of  the  troops  who  act  openly,  and  who  should  endeavor  to  decoy  the  enemy  into  an 
imprudent  pursuit,  and  draw  him  into  the  ambuscade. 

§  505.  The  success  of  the  ambuscade  itself  depends  chiefly  upon  seizing  the  proper  moment 
for  action.  As  a  general  rule  it  should  not  begin  to  act  too  soon,  lest  the  enemy  retreat  without 
loss.  It  is  best  to  allow  his  leading  parties  to  pass  so  far  by  that  he  may  be  attacked  in  flank, 
or,  still  better,  in  rear  and  his  retreat  cut  off. 

§  506.  Apart  from  the  object  of  seizing  important  points,  attacks  are  sometimes  made  upon 
the  enemy's  posts  with  the  special  object  of  encouraging  the  military  spirit  of  our  own  troops, 
and  increasing  their  boldness  and  self  confidence  by  partial  successes. 


340  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE, 

In  this  case  prudence  requires  progression  iu  the  undertakings ;  beginning  with  those  that 
require  small  numbers  and  at  the  same  time  promise  full  success,  such  as  capturing  single 
videttes  ;  then,  upon  success,  to  undertake  the  capture  of  pickets,  and  finally  to  pass  to  more 
important  enterprises.  Inital  successes  in  a  campaign  are  of  particular  importance ;  they  produce 
favorable  impressions  upon  our  own  people  and  depress  the  courage  of  the  enemy. 

If  the  enemy  is  at  all  negligent  in  guarding  his  horses,  small  parties  may  accomplish  important 
results  by  stampeding  them  at  night. 

§  507.  The  object  of  attacks  upon  the  cantonments  of  the  enemy  may  be  to  alarm  him,  to 
capture  important  points,  or  to  profit  by  his  dispersion  and  attack  in  force  so  as  to  defeat  him  in 
detail. 

§  508.  In  the  first  two  cases  the  operations,  although  on  a  larger  scale,  will  be  nearly  like 
those  for  attacking  the  outposts. 

In  the  last  case,  when  the  detachment  making  the  attack  succeeds  in  carrying  any  important 
point,  it  should  be  at  once  supported  by  the  co-operation  of  other  troops.  Thus,  not  being 
delayed  by  the  first  success,  it  can  at  once  move  on,  and,  taking  advantage  of  the  dispersion  of  the 
enemy,  endeavor  to  capture  his  troops  before  they  are  assembled  and  ready  for  action  trusting 
to  the  troops  in  rear  of  it  for  a  safe  retreat. 

§  509.  It  is  evident  that  the  strength  of  detachments  detailed  for  sudden  attacks  must  vary 
very  much ;  to  capture  a  vidette  3  or  4  men  are  enough,  the  fewer  the  better.  To  capture  a 
picket,  and  generally  to  attack  the  enemy's  outposts,  parties  of  our  own  advanced  troops  maybe 
employed  ;  to  attack  posts  of  importance  detachments  of  considerable  strength  may  be  sent  out ; 
while  to  attack  the  cantonments  of  the  enemy,  the  whole  of  the  main  body  is  sometimes  employed. 

CHAPTER  II. 

OF  RECONNAISSANCES. 

§  510.  A  reconnaissance — that  is,  an  ocular  examination — should  precede  every  military 
enterprise.  It  is  always  necessary  to  know  beforehand  with  what  troops  we  have  to  deal, 
and  the  nature  of  the  country  in  which  the  operation  is  to  be  effected  ;  this  information  can  be 
fully  obtained  neither  by  interrogation  nor  from  maps  ;  there  is  no  other  way  than  by  a  recon- 
naissance. 

§  511.  Information  obtained  by  a  reconnaissance  is  preferable  to  that  by  interrogation,  as 
being  more  full,  and  generally  obtained  with  less  delay. 

§  512.  If  the  enemy  is  so  near  that  our  own  chain  can  see  everything,  the  reconnaissance  is 'made 
under  its  protection.  In  such  a  case  the  reconnoitring  officer  either  takes  no  escort,  or  a  very 
small  one,  and,  for  greater  secresy,  leaves  even  that  at  some  distance. 

§  513.  If  the  enemy  is  at  some  distance,  distant  patrols  are  detailed  for  the  reconnaissance  ; 
the  duty  is,  according  to  its  importance,  entrusted  either  to  the  commander  of  the  patrol  or  to 
a  special  officer  (sometimes  an  officer  of  the  stafi")  to  whom  the  patrol  is  given  as  an  escort. 

§  514.  If  it  is  necessary  to  make  a  close  reconnaissance  of  the  position  and  arrangements  of 
the  enemy,  detachments  of  considerable  strength  must  be  employed.  Their  composition  must 
be  such  that  they  can  drive  in  the  enemy's  outposts,  break  through  his  lines  to  the  required 
distance,  and  remain  long  enough  to  gain  satisfactory  information.  Such  reconnaissances  made 
openly  and  in  force  are  called  forced  reconnaissances.  Their  object  is  sometimes  not  only  to 
examine  the  ground  and  the  arrangements  of  the  enemy,  but  also  to  ascertain  his  strength ; 
consequently,  to  alarm  him  to  such  a  degree  as  to  make  him  show  the  parties  at  first  concealed. 


REPORT    OF    CAPT.    GEORGE    B.   MTLELLAN.  341 

§  515.  To  insure  the  success  of  a  reconnaissance,  whatever  its  object  may  be,  it  is  necessary 
to  attack  suddenly,  and  have  a  secure  retreat. 

§  516.  Small  reconnoitring  parties  usually  consist  of  cavalry  alone  ;  but  if  a  certain  effort  is 
required  to  seize  any  point,  or  if  we  must  leave  it  occupied  while  we  pass  beyond  it,  then 
artillery  and  infantry  must  be  added.  Here,  as  in  all  cases  when  it  is  necessary  to  combine 
rapidity  of  movement  with  some  defensive  strength,  mounted  rifles  may  be  advantageously 
employed. 

§  517.  The  strength  of  a  reconnoitring  party  can  only  be  determined  by  its  object  and  the 
obstacles  it  may  be  expected  to  encounter,  not  only  from  the  greater  or  less  force  of  the  enemy, 
but  from  the  nature  of  the  ground,  the  distance  of  the  place  to  be  examined  from  our  main  body, 
the  degree  of  security  of  the  retreat,  &c.  If  the  affair  consists  merely  in  driving  in  an  indepen- 
dent picket  and  holding  its  position  long  enough  to  make  an  examination,  a  strong  patrol  will 
be  sufficient ;  but  if  it  is  necessary  to  examine  a  large  portion  of  the  enemy's  position,  or  to 
ascertain  his  strength,  a  considerable  force  may  be  required.  But  everything  stated  in  this 
chapter  relates  more  particularly  to  reconnaissances  made  with  small  detachments. 

§  518.  Whatever  may  be  the  object  of  the  reconnaissance  and  the  composition  of  the  detach- 
ment, the  first  thing  is  to  determine  the  point  from  which  the  examination  can  be  best  made, 
and  the  principal  effort  must  be  directed  to  the  occupation  of  this  point.  This  effort  should  not 
be  limited  to  a  direct  attack,  but  should  be  aided  by  several  simultaneous  attacks  upon  other 
points,  in  order  to  distract  the  attention  of  the  enemy,  divide  his  force,  and  throw  him  into 
irresolution.  Such  operations  will  be  particularly  useful  if  the  object  is  to  ascertain  the  strength 
of  the  enemy,  for  the  partial  attacks  force  him  to  show  his  whole  force. 

§  519.  Having  occupied  the  point  from  which  the  reconnaissance  is  to  be  made,  we  should  not 
be  enticed  into  a  pursuit  of  the  beaten  enemy,  but  proceed  at  once  to  strengthen  ourselves  in 
the  position — that  is,  we  should  take  measures  for  meeting  the  enemy  with  advantage  when  he 
returns  to  the  attack  ;  with  this  view,  the  safety  of  the  flanks  must  be  particularly  attended  to, 
to  prevent  the  enemy  from  endangering  the  retreat  of  the  detachment  by  turning  the  position. 

§  520.  If  the  enemy  makes  a  resolute  attack  before  the  reconnaissance  is  completed,  the  degree 
of  defence  must  depend  upon  the  importance  of  the  object,  that  the  sacrifice  may  be  in  proportion. 
A  retreat  commenced  at  the  wrong  time  may  encounter  peculiar  difficulty ;  to  commence  the 
retreat  before  the  completion  of  the  reconnaissance,  is  to  abandon  the  work  when  nearly  finished ; 
remaining  too  long  in  position  may  expose  us  to  useless  loss.  Therefore,  if  the  object  is  to 
ascertain  the  strength  of  the  enemy,  the  retreat  should  be  commenced  at  once,  because  the  enemy 
will  soon  recover  from  the  first  attack  and  gain  the  means  of  assuming  the  offensive. 

§  521.  When  a  party  has  made  a  reconnaissance,  its  arrangements  during  the  retreat  present 
nothing  unusual ;  it  should  carefully  guard  its  flanks  by  strong  parties  or  patrols,  and  always 
expect  to  be  violently  attacked. 

§  522.  This  is  particularly  to  be  anticipated  when  the  object  was  to  ascertain  the  strength  of 
the  enemy,  and  the  retreat  was  commenced  late.  In  such  cases,  prudence  demands  that  we 
should  place,  beforehand,  on  the  road  of  retreat,  separate  supports  of  sufficient  strength  to  stop 
the  pursuit  and  cover  the  retreat  of  the  party. 

§  523.  When  the  supports  of  the  reconnoitring  party  are  shown,  and  the  enemy  is  near,  it 
is  prudent  to  have  a  considerable  part,  if  not  the  whole,  of  the  main  body  ready  for  action. 
For  it  may  easily  happen  that  the  enemy,  having  been  alarmed  by  the  reconnaissance,  and 
afterwards  excited  by  its  repulse  and  pursuit,  may  change  his  operations  into  a  general  attack, 


342  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

especially  if  he  observes  the  slightest  negligence  on  our  part ;  in  this  case,  all  the  advantage 
would  be  on  his  side. 

Remark. — There  are  two  kinds  of  reconnaissances  :  those  to  ascertain  the  general  nature  of 
the  country,  jjosition  and  movements  of  the  enemy,  &c.  ;  and  those  immediately  preceding  an 
action.  The  first  should  he  made  with  extreme  minuteness,  and  as  much  time  given  to  them 
as  possible  ;  they  may  he  well  done  by  a  man  with  but  little  genius  and  of  a  careful  business 
turn  of  mind.  The  second  rec[uire  the  highest  order  of  military  genius,  a  rapid  and  unerring 
coup  d'ceil,  an  accurate  and  instinctive  knowledge  of  the  tactics  of  all  arms  ;  they  must  he  made 
with  extreme  rapidity,  and  acted  upon  at  once. 

There  have  been  innumerable  instances  in  military  history,  and  not  a  few  in  our  own,  where, 
on  the  one  hand,  invaluable  time  and  opportunity  have  been  lost  by  the  system  of  slow  and 
minute  reconnaissances  in  front  of  the  enemy — obtaining  the  horizontal  curves  of  a  field  of 
battle ;  on  the  other  hand,  plunging  headlong  into  action  without  a  proper  knowledge  of  the 
ground. 

The  important  points  are :  the  strength  of  the  enemy,  the  key  points  of  his  position,  the 
nature  of  the  ground  between  your  own  position  and  his — that  is,  is  it  passable,  and  for  what 
arms?  Let  the  subordinate  commanders  attend  to  minor  obstacles.  As  soon  as  the  proper 
information  is  obtained  on  these  points,  act.  The  mere  moral  efiect  of  a  rapid  and  unhesitating 
movement  is  very  great.  During  the  ordinary  marches  and  intervals  of  rest,  the  cavalry  and 
staff  officers  should  collect  every  possible  item  of  information ;  nothing  is  too  trifling  to  be  worth 
knowing ;  if  they  have  done  their  duty  properly,  no  general  need  hesitate  more  than  a  few 
minutes  when  he  finds  himself  in  presence  of  the  enemy. 

CHAPTEE  III. 

OF  CONVOYS. 
ARTICLE  1. 

The  defence  of  convoys. 

§524.  The  rules  for  escorting  trains,  and  the  arrangements  for  securing  them  against  attack, 
were  explained  in  Part  I,  Chapter  I,  article  5  ;  in  the  present  article  will  be  explained  the 
manner  of  defending  the  convoy  when  attacked. 

§525.  The  immediate  defence  of  a  very  large  train  is,  if  not  wholly  impossible,  at  least  very 
difiicult,  for  it  involves  an  injurious  division  of  force. 

§526.  The  following  rules  are  laid  down  as  the  most  important:  to  keep  the  force  as  much 
concentrated  as  possible,  in  order  to  act  ofiensively,  leaving  with  the  wagons  only  the  number 
of  men  absolutely  necessary ;  if  this  is  impossible,  an  eiFort  should  be  made  to  keep  the  enemy 
away  from  the  train  as  long  as  possible. 

§  527.  In  accordance  with  this,  on  the  approach  of  the  enemy,  if  the  force  of  the  escort  is  at 
all  in  proportion  to  that  of  the  attacking  party,  it  is  best  to  move  out  to  meet  the  enemy  with 
the  greater  part  of  the  escort,  overthrow  him,  and  clear  the  country  in  the  direction  of  the  march 
of  the  train.  Even  if  the  escort  is  much  weaker  than  the  enemy,  it  should  move  out  to  meet  him, 
but  must  limit  its  subsequent  operations  to  the  defensive,  endeavoring  to  keep  the  enemy  away 
from  the  train  long  enough  for  it  to  gain  a  good  defensive  position. 

§  528.  In  the  latter  case,  the  train  is,  if  possible,  parked  in  square,  or  corralled.  The  escort, 
having  kept  off  the  enemy  long  enough  to  permit  this,  retreats  upon  the  train ;  the  defence, 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  343 

facilitated  by  the  diminution  of  the  space  occupied,  is  now  conducted  in  accordance  with  the 
general  rules  for  the  defence  of  the  ground  occupied,  taking  advantage  of  the  obstacle  presented 
by  the  wagons. 

§  529.  If  the  attack  is  altogether  by  surprise,  and  is  made  on  several  points  at  once,  so  that  it 
is  impossible  to  collect  all  the  wagons  in  one  place,  then  each  section  of  the  train  should  be 
formed  into  a  separate  column,  square,  or  corral. 

§  530.  Any  wagons  loaded  with  powder  or  combustibles  should  be  placed  by  themselves  inside 
the  square,  or  else  formed  into  a  separate  park  outside,  placing  them  under  cover  of  some 
defensible  object. 

§  531.  In  these  cases,  it  is  very  necessary  to  watch  the  movements  of  the  wagons,  which  should 
move  to  their  places  at  such  a  gait  as  to  render  confusion  impossible. 

Remarks. — At  the  commencement  of  the  expedition,  the  commander  of  the  convoy  should  issue 
detailed  instructions  as  to  the  manner  of  forming  square  or  corral  in  case  of  attack.  In  square, 
the  hind  wheels  of  the  wagons  should  be  towards  the  exterior,  the  wagons  should  be  fastened 
together  by  the  lock  chains,  and  in  all  cases  intervals  should  be  left  for  the  passage  of  the  escort 
at  proper  points  ;  these  intervals  should  be  closed  by  chevaux-de-frise,  chains,  &c. 

The  train  is  most  readily  corralled  when  moving  in  two  columns  by  file  and  abreast.  The 
leading  wagons  halt  at  a  suitable  distance  apart,  the  others  oblique  outwards,  each  wagon  moving 
to  the  front  as  soon  as  it  clears  the  wagon  next  in  front  of  it ;  each  wagon  then  halts  with  its 
inner  hind  wheel  close  to  the  outer  fore  wheel  of  the  wagon  which  preceded  it  in  the  column, 
and  these  wheels  are  chained  together ;  any  desirable  shape  may  be  given  to  the  corral  by 
throwing  the  pole  of  each  successive  wagon  more  or  less  inward. 

§  532.  If  there  is  a  reasonable  probability  of  saving  the  train  by  the  operation,  it  is  best  to  con- 
centrate it  in  a  favorable  position,  and  await  assistance  ;  if  the  escort  is  altogether  inferior  in 
force,  it  may  be  best  to  save  the  train  by  a  retreat. 

§  533.  When  the  wagons  are  formed  in  column,  square,  or  corral,  their  defence  devolves  upon 
the  infantry  portion  of  the  escort ;  the  cavalry,  remaining  outside  the  park,  can  only  co-operate 
by  endeavoring  to  take  the  enemy  in  flank,  &c. 

§  534.  The  enemy  may  send  out  small  detachments  with  the  object  of  alarming  the  convoy 
and  delaying  its  march  by  forcing  it  to  halt  and  form.  Such  parties  should  be  driven  off  by 
detachments  from  the  escort,  without  assembling  the  train,  which  should  be  j^arked  only  when 
the  enemy  attacks  decisively  and  in  considerable  force.  Therefore  patrols  should  be  sent  out  as 
far  as  possible,  to  discover  the  approach  of  the  enemy  and  ascertain  his  force  betimes. 

§  535.  Having  repulsed  the  enemy,  the  escort  must  not  be  induced  to  pursue  him  too  far  from 
the  wagons  ;  it  is  only  necessary  to  take  measures  to  allow  the  train  to  pursue  its  march. 

§  536.  If  the  convoy  is  attacked  when  halted,  the  defence  is  conducted  as  already  prescribed  • 
but  in  this  case  the  defence  is  easier,  because  the  wagons  are  already  formed  and  the  escort  in 
position.  Even  here  it  is  best  to  try  to  keep  the  enemy  at  a  distance,  or,  if  the  forces  are  at  all 
equal,  to  defeat  him,  and  then  return  to  the  train. 

§  537.  The  selection  of  the  positions  for  rests  and  camps  will  have  a  great  influence  upon  the 
success  of  the  defence  of  the  convoy.  In  the  selection,  preference  will  be  given  to  those  places 
which  are  favorable  to  the  action  of  the  troops  composing  the  escort,  or  the  greater  part  of  it. 
For  parking  the  train,  j^laces  must  be  chosen  at  a  distance  from  objects  which  would  conceal  the 
approach  of  the  enemy,  and  enable  him  to  hold  a  position  dangerously  near  ;  on  the  other 
hand,  it  should  be  surrounded  by  objects  preventing  easy  access,  but  not  interfering  with 
observation. 


844  MILITAEY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

§  538.  At  the  park,  tlie  troops  of  the  escort  are  posted  as  follows  :  the  infantry  and  artillery 
bivouac  inside  the  square ;  the  first  places  its  parties  along  the  faces  they  are  respectively 
detailed  to  defend,  and  posts  guards  and  a  chain  of  sentinels  around  the  park ;  the  guns  are 
placed  at  the  angles,  and  generally  at  the  weakest  points,  or  where  it  is  easiest  to  sweep  the 
ground  in  front. 

The  cavalry,  bivouaced  outside  the  park,  places  outposts  and  sends  out  patrols  according  to 
the  niles  for  outpost  service. 

The  draught  animals  should  be  collected  in  the  centre,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  defence 
of  the  sides. 

ARTICLE     2. 

The  attack  of  convoys. 

§  539.  An  attack  upon  a  convoy  may  be  intended  either  to  capture  it,  to  destroy  it,  or  merely 
to  alarm  and  delay  it. 

Independently  of  other  considerations,  the  composition  and  force  of  the  attacking  party  must 
depend  upon  the  object  in  view. 

§  540.  The  general  conditions  for  success  in  the  attack  of  convoys  are  usually  the  same  as  for 
sudden  attacks.  The  most  favoi-able  moment  for  attacking  a  convoy  is  when  it  is  passing  a 
defile,  crossing  hills,  streams,  &c. 

§  541.  The  main  efibrt  of  the  attack  should  be  directed  against  the  escort,  especially  if  it  is 
marching  in  one  body,  not  only  to  occupy  its  attention,  but  also  to  separate  it  from  the  train  if 
possible.  At  the  same  time  small  parties  should  move  upon  different  parts  of  the  train,  to 
prevent  it  from  parking,  carry  it  ofi",  or  destroy  the  wagons.  A  part  of  the  troops  must  be  held 
in  reserve. 

§  542.  If  the  train  succeeds  in  parking,  the  operations  against  it  become  difficult  for  cavalry 
alone  ;  in  that  case,  the  infantry  and  artillery  must  act. 

§  543.  If  the  train  or  a  part  of  it  is  captured,  and  it  is  possible  to  carry  it  off,  the  operations  of 
the  detachment  change  ;  it  then  escorts  the  wagons,  as  directed  in  Part  I,  Chapter  I,  article  5, 
and  acts  as  is  laid  down  in  the  preceding  article. 

§  544.  When  the  attacking  detachment  is  sent  out  merely  to  delay  and  annoy  the  convoy, 
it  passes  in  advance  of  it,  destroys  the  roads,  ruins  the  crossings  of  streams,  and  alarms  the 
convoy  by  partial  attacks,  particularly  during  the  night  and  at  well  known  places. 

CHAPTEK  IV. 

OF  FORAGING  AND  ATTACKS  UPON  FORAGERS. 

ARTICLE  1. 

0/  foraging. 

§  545.  Under  the  head  of  foraging,  are  included  the  operations  of  parties  detailed  to  obtain 
not  only  forage,  but  supplies  of  all  kinds. 

§  546.  Foraging  is  efi'ected  sometimes  out  of  all  danger  from  the  enemy,  sometimes  in  places 
where  an  attack  may  be  expected,  and,  in  cases  of  extreme  necessity,  sometimes  in  places  actually 
occupied  by  the  enemy.  The  manner  of  conducting  the  operation  is  somewhat  different  in  the 
three  cases. 

Remark. — If  the  enemy  is  so  near  that  an  attack  may  be  expected,  the  artillery  send  out  no 


REPORT    OF   CAPT     GEORGE    B.    MTLELLAX.  345 

foragers,  so  as  not  to  break  up  the  detacliments  with  the  guns  and  interfere  with  their  readiness 
for  action.  In  sucli  cases,  if  it  is  not  possible  to  supply  the  batteries  from  the  temporary  maga- 
zines, their  foraging  is  imposed  upon  the  cavalry. 

§  oiT.  Foraging  out  of  all  danger  from  the  enemy  is  effected  as  follows :  a  sj^ace  for  foraging 
is  assigned  to  each  party  of  the  troops,  and  if  it  is  expected  to  remain  some  time  in  the  same 
position,  the  villages  are  occupied  by  safeguards  sent  by  the  party  in  whose  ground  each  falls. 
The  foraging  is  commenced  at  the  places  nearest  the  enemy,  falling  back,  as  he  approaches,  to 
those  immediately  in  our  front,  and  finally  to  those  in  rear. 

§  548.  For  foraging,  parties  of  men,  with  the  proper  number  of  officers,  are  detailed,  and 
the  necessary  wagons  sent  with  them  ;  if  the  forage  is  to  be  packed  on  the  troop  horses, 
this  is  done  as  shown  in  Plate  9.  If  the  foraging  is  to  be  effected  in  villages,  severe  measures 
must  be  taken  to  prevent  disorder  and  plundering  on  the  j)art  of  the  foragers. 

§  549.  In  this  case,  it  is  best  not  to  take  the  party  into  the  village,  but  to  send  for  the  chief 
persons  and  stipulate  with  them  that  the  inhabitants  shall  bring  the  required  forage  and  other 
stores  out  to  the  troops.  If  the  inhabitants  do  not  promptly  comply  with  this  moderate  com- 
mand, it  is  necessary  to  take  the  party  in. 

§  550.  In  this  event,  all  possible  means  must  he  taken  to  jjrevent  disorder,  as  for  instance : 

1.  A  certain  number  of  houses  are  assigned  to  each  company,  so  that  the  commander  of  the 
detachment  may  hold  each  company  responsible  for  the  disorders  committed  within  its  limits. 

2.  Guards  are  posted  and  patrols  sent  out,  who  arrest  any  foragers  guilty  of  disorder. 

3.  If  the  form  of  the  village  permits,  a  part  of  the  detachment  remains  at  the  centre  to  pack 
the  horses  and  load  the  wagons  as  fast  as  the  other  men  bring  the  forage  from  the  houses. 

§  551.  In  places  where  an  attack  may  be  expected,  the  foraging  is  conducted  as  follows : 
Either  fatigue  parties  are  sent  with  wagons,  or  parties  of  cavalry  with  their  own  horses ;  in  both 
cases  a  special  escort  is  added  for  the  protection  of  the  foragers. 

§  552.  In  all  cases,  the  strength  of  the  escort  depends  upon  the  degree  of  danger,  the  space 
over  which  the  foraging  is  to  extend,  and  the  distance  from  the  enemy, 

§  553.  During  the  march  of  foragers  to  and  from  the  foraging  ground,  if  they  consist  of  a 
fatigue  party  with  wagons,  an  escort  is  added,  which  acts  in  conformity  with  the  rules  for  escort- 
ing convoys. 

If  the  foragers  consist  only  of  cavalry  with  their  own  horses,  then  on  the  outward  march  they 
move  in  one  b:dy,  observing  the  precautions  prescribed  for  movements  near  the  enemy;  on  the 
return  march,  if  the  horses  of  the  foragers  are  packed  and  led,  the  detachment  acting  as  escort 
should  not  pack  more  than  40  pounds  on  their  horses,  so  that  the  load  may  not  prevent 
them  from  acting  against  the  enemy. 

Bemarks. — Hay  is  packed  as  shown  in  Plate  9. 

One  hundred  and  twelve  pounds  may  be  packed  on  a  horse,  as  shown  in  Plate  9,  fig.  2,  and 
the  horse  must  be  led  ;  56  pounds  are  packed  as  shown  in  Plate  9,  fig  1,  in  two  trusses. 

§  554.  Sometimes  the  escort,  or  a  part  of  it,  may  be  sent  out  early  to  the  foraging  ground,  to 
take  measures  for  the  security  of  the  foragers  before  they  arrive. 

§  555.  For  the  safety  of  the  foragers  when  at  their  work,  the  escort  is  divided  into  two  or  three 
parts,  according  to  circumstances  ;  one  part  places  a  chain  of  outposts  and  sends  out  patrols,  to 
guard  the  whole  ground;  another  furnishes  the  supports  of  the  outposts,  and  if  there  are  infantry 
or  mounted  rifles  with  it  they  occupy  the  points  which  cover  the  ap]:)roaches ;  the  third  part  is 
placed  in  reserve  near  the  centre  of  the  ground,  that  it  may  easily  reach  any  point  attacked. 
44  © 


34 G  MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 

§  55G.  If  the  enemy  attacks  while  the  foraging  is  going  on,  the  escort  shoukl  go  to  meet  him 
or  defend  itself  in  position,  endeavoring  to  stop  him  nntil  the  foragers  have  finished  their  work, 
and  arc  drawn  out  on  the  road  for  their  return  march ;  then  the  escort  commences  its  retreat, 
acting  as  a  rear  guard,  and  endeavoring  to  keep  the  enemy  as  far  from  the  foragers  as  possihle. 
If  it  is  impossihle  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check  long  enough  to  finish  the  work,  they  should  at 
least  send  forward  and  protect  all  the  foragers  who  have  packed  their  horses  or  loaded  their 
wagons  ;  the  rest  join  the  escort.  If  there  is  a  probability  of  driving  off  the  enemy  by  uniting 
all  the  foragers  to  the  escort,  it  is  best  to  abandon  the  forage  already  packed,  and  to  begin  foraging 
anew  after  having  repulsed  the  enemy.  It  is  j^ermitted  to  abandon  the  forage  entirely  only  in 
extreme  urgency,  when  there  is  absolutely  no  other  way  of  saving  the  foragers. 

§  557.  If  the  enemy  is  repulsed  we  must  not  be  induced  to  pursue  him  any  further  than  enough 
to  prevent  a  renewal  of  the  attack,  but  must  endeavor  to  complete  the  foraging. 

§  558.  The  foraging  must  not  be  extended  over  any  ground  not  guarded  by  the  escort.  If  the 
escort  is  too  weak  to  cover  the  whole  space  designated  for  foraging,  the  ground  is  divided  into 
parts,  and  the  foraging  effected  in  the  different  portions  successively. 

§559.  If  the  foragers  are  attacked  on  their  return  march,  the  defence  is  conducted  as  jjre- 
scribed  in  the  preceding  chapter. 

§  5G0.  If  the  foraging  ground  is  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  camji,  it  will  be  a  proper 
precaution  to  post  a  special  detachment  in  sujijiort  half  way. 

§  561.  Foraging  in  places  occupied  by  the  enemy  is  undertaken  only  upon  the  entire  exhaustion 
of  the  ground  occupied  by  our  own  troops.  Such  foraging  is  covered  by  ofi"ensive  operations,  so 
that,  having  driven  in  the  enemy's  advanced  troops  or  other  parties,  we  may  rapidly  seize  all 
the  supplies  to  be  found  in  the  vicinity.     This  is  called  forced  foraging. 

§  5C2.  The  strength  and  composition  of  a  detachment  for  forced  foraging  must  be  such  that  it 
can  overwhelm  the  enemy's  troops,  and  remain  long  enough  in  position  to  enable  the  accompanying 
detachment  of  foragers  to  complete  their  work  and  retreat  out  of  danger. 

§  563.  The  main  conditions  of  success  in  such  an  enterprise  are  suddenness,  rapidity,  and  deter- 
mination in  the  attack,  promptness  in  the  work  of  the  foragers,  and  tenacity  in  holding  the 
positions  taken  from  the  enemy  as  long  as  necessary.  Success  will  be  greatly  facilitated  bj' 
partial  attacks  made  upon  different  points  of  the  enemy's  position  while  the  foraging  is  going  on. 

ARTICLE  2. 
Of  allacJcs  ujwn  foragers. 

§  564.  Attacks  upon  foragers  should  be  sudden  and  rapid,  in  order,  by  not  giving  the  escort 
time  to  defend  the  points  attacked,  to  produce  confusion  among  the  foragers  and  thus  prevent 
them  from  working. 

§  565.  The  approach  of  the  attacking  party  should  be  concealed,  rapid,  and  compact;  that  is.  it 
should  not  send  out  parties  to  any  great  distance  in  front  or  on  the  flanks,  and^  as  a  general  rule, 
should  not  divide  its  force  prematurely,  but  only  the  moment  before  the  attack. 

§  566.  The  force  of  a  detachment  sent  to  attack  foragers  depends  chiefly  ujion  the  object  of  the 
attack — that  is,  whether  it  is  designed  to '  capture  the  foragers,  or  only  to  prevent  them  from 
foraging  by  alarming  them,  or  to  prevent  them  from  carrying  off  forage  already  packed. 

§  56*7.  It  is  in  all  cases  advantageous  to  begin  with  several  simultaneous  false  attacks  by  small 
parties,  to  perplex  the  enemy  and  oblige  him  to  divide  the  escort ;  then  to  direct  the  main  party 
of  the  detachment  upon  the  principal  point  of  tlie  enemy's  arrangements,  overthrow  his  weakened 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN.  347 

escort,  aud  penetrate  to  tlie  road  of  retreat,  so  as  either  to  cut  oif  and  destroy  a  part  of  the  escort 
and  foragers,  or  to  force  them  to  abandon  their  work  and  fly,  by  threatening  to  cut  them  off. 

§  5G8.  If  from  the  disproportion  of  force  it  is  impossible  to  prevent  the  foraging  entirely,  the 
attacking  party  confines  itself  to  delaying  the  work  ;  its  operations,  therefore,  should  consist  in 
partial  attacks  upon  several  points,  in  order  to  alarm  and  disperse  the  foragers  by  breaking 
through  the  outposts  at  several  points.  Upon  meeting  a  considerable  force  of  the  enemy  these 
attacking  parties  should  at  once  retreat,  and  renew  the  attack  in  a  different  place.  In  such 
operations  a  portion  of  the  attacking  detachment  should  be  kept  togetlier  and  held  in  reserve,  as 
a  support  and  rallying  point  for  the  small  parties. 

§  569.  If  they  do  not  succeed  in  preventing  the  foraging,  they  may  try  to  attack  the  foragers 
on  the  return  march  ;  observing  in  this  case  the  rules  laid  down  in  the  preceding  chapter  for 
attacks  upon  convoys. 

GEOKGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

Captain  Ist  Cavalry. 

Philadelphia,  Decemher  31,  1856. 


348 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUKOl'E. 


Plate  1. 

Advanced  Guard,  cumibtiiir/  of  10  comjMinies  i>f  Cai-alnj  and  (!  i/iiiiii      &v  §  15. 


Cornftait^_  _    ^ 


aimi'  i^mtfo 


altiiU  \miU 


\IPIaicon- 


S  Cfm/mu'ei  ^  ^  S^tit 


n 


about  ijniU 


00 


ffkui  afih  J  _\7/ia^  hefy 


REPOET  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M'CLELLAN. 

Plate  2. 

FlanJc  march  of  a  Division  of  Cavalry,  ^oUh  Us  toMeries,  under  m protect, 


349 


^Broach  aicnehiy 


of  ajlank  hrigade  and  6  gum.     See  §  34, 


\ 
\ 


^miU 


\ 


\ 


\4Comfanies 


■  km-ii  ^^^' "ImiU,' 


I*  \\ 


k I C Gmis  'l^'omi'iiaSmdes ' 


,|i  ♦ 


^SCempanies 


i 


.  IJPUbm 


"M^ompanies 


1 


t^dmpmm 
'/Mile 


The  arruwf  indicate  Ihc  (lirections  in  which  patrols 


arc  seiii  out. 


45  © 


*  i|i  6Ganf 


^^OCampaiUes 


^, 


«  ( 


^Companies 

yzitiik 
ilPlatotn 


350  MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUEOPE. 

Plate  3. 

Arrangement  of  a  convoy,  escorted  by  10  cimpanies  of  Cavalry,  2  pieces  of  horse  Artillery,  and  2  regiments  of  Infantry. 


'^       t 


J  Conyjafur  Cavetlry 


Platoon. 


JCornpaK^,' 


flauoji.. 


PtatoBii 


a  Cimgiimiesh2qim.f 


-  -  ' '  "^"i — I 
ill  ill 


Comjianj 


Cuvrpaity 


W 


'platoon  Cavctliy 

Bitrnl  \  ^ofJnian  tij 


iCoinffsInftaaty  IComfy 


Cemjiy.Jtifcmlij' 
\CompaTries  Infantry 


---a 


=^  Com/ff fi'^- '  ' 


^i 


■AWrti' !■"<%!>,  f5f4  '^'•?'i 


*Wwr 


M|4^;gg:«&v 


A,r*S 


Platoi^nCaxalty 


Cavaliy. 


The  arrow  lieads  intUcatc  tho  diiecUons  in  which  patroU  are  eent  out. 


Inlantrjr. 


li_ 


Infantry  patrol. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M-'CLELLAN. 


351 


Plate  4. 

March  of  an  Advanced  Guard  composed  of  1  brigade  of  Ca.alry,  (20  campar^ie.,)  2  rfm.io,«  of  Infantry,    (8  bat,aJ,o,u,)    1  batlalion  of 

Sappers,  6  pieces  of  horse  and  12  of  foot  Artillery.     See  §  160. 


P/tifyon 


WPlatoon 


7em      ^— 


JFrom  26idmiles 


aboui^nule 

Tnm  2  to  4  mius 


MaiiifmamJ 


JYwn,lKit)2  miles 


SOuns  ft  \  8lijn/fsae:P'Sefft 


%milf 


B 

I 
M  , 

,|n|- 

□ 

o 


mi 


iJijnila 


Lijht 


-)MComf(s  MBe^. 


> 


3  tread  of  main  Tjortj 


\  Platoon 

< -i^ ^ 


^lil-^  Companies  2  ^^. 


,~~',- —         'JVtztoan 


^  Wxd  afmmn  todj 


352 


MILITARY   COMMISSION    TO   EUROPE. 

Plate  5. 


Fig.  2. 
March  of  a  patrol  of  30  men.     §  133. 


Pig.  1. 
March  of  apairol  of  15  mm.     ^  132 


Fig.  3. 
Arrangemeni  of  the  chain  of  mdettes,  picUs,  and  maingvard furnished  by  two  companies.     §  103. 


H 


'i 


rcftctteA' 


..nioitt  S,  miles 


Vidrtten      t^ 
... 


Kilrt-Ulatma    '= 


.Jlmck^mile 


«U 


JPtatt-JHataxi 


z^^  MimG\[ai^J.Ci>mpiuiy 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B.  M^CLELLAN, 

Plate  6. 

Example  of  the  arrangement  of  Oulposls  composed  of  Cavalry  alone.     §  419. 


353 


The  advanced  guard  A,  composed  of  a  brigade  of  cavalry  and  a  division  of  infantry,  is  in  the  village  A,  and  it  is  necessarj"  to  post  outposts  to  "uard  it 
against  the  enemy,  expected  by  the  roads  H  ;  10  companies  of  cavalry  and  2  pieces  of  horse  artillery  are  drtaiJed  for  the  oulposls  and  resen'e.  C  is  the 
reser\p,  consisting  of  4  companies  and  2  guns.  D,  D'  and  U'  are  the  main  guards,  consisting  of  one  company  each.  E,  E,  E',  E'  E"  E'"  are  the 
pickets,  of  a  platoon  each.    H  is  an  independent  picket  of  one  platoon,  observing  the  road  K. 


Infantry. 


[-^^^^_ 


Cavalry. 


Cavalrj-  videttes. 


Scale  ol  miles. 


,354 


MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO  EUROPE. 


Plate  7. 

Example  of  the  arrangemenl  of  Outposts  composed  of  both  Infantry  and  Cavalry.     §  425. 


The  advanced  guard  A,  consisting  of  a  brigade  oi  cavalry  and  a  diviyion  of  infantry,  is  placed  bcliind  Ihe  village  B,  and  nniposis  are  to  be  posted  to 
guard  against  an  attack  by  the  enemy  arriving  from  the  direction  of  the  village  C  ;  4  companios  of  cavalry,  2  regiments  of  infantry,  and  2  pieces  of  foot 
artillery  are  detailed  to  furnish  the  outposts  and  reserve. 

D  is  the  reserve,  consisting  of  1^  companies  of  cavalry,  11  companies  of  infantry,  and  2  pieces  of  font  artillery. 

E  is  a  main  guard  of  3  companies  of  infantry,  which  furnishes  the  two  pickets  F,  each  of  which  posts  5  pairs  of  sentinels. 

E'  is  an  infantry  main  guard  of  two  companies,  which  supports  the  two  cavalry  pickets  H,  each  of  which  consists  of  a  platoon  and  posts  3  pairs  of 
videttes.  E"  is  an  infantry  main  guard  of  2  companies,  to  support  the  cavalry  picket  H',  which  posts  4  videttes,  and  H",  which  posts  I  vidette.  E'"  is 
an  infantry  main  guard  of  2  companies,  which  holds  the  cemetery  and  supports  the  cavalry  picket  H'",  posting  3  videttes. 


Infantry. 


f'^^mi    Cavalry. 


:  Scale  of  miles. 


REPORT  OF  CAPT.  GEORGE  B  M«CLELLAN. 


355 


Plate  8. 


E^„.j,le  of  the  arrangcnent  of  the  Outj>osts  in  a  local,,  u„.re  the  enemy  can  approach  only  by  afeu>pas^. 


§435. 


The  enemy  is  beyond  the  village  N ;  our  own  detacliments  occudv  A  inrt  ll  •  ,h„  p 
infantry  ;  10  companies  of  cavaTy  and  .vo  p.eces  of  ,.„.e  ar,  lery    ".d.t  led  "on   I  ^Zl^^'T       '  V""""  °'  ^"="^^  '""  ^  O™-"  °' 
.ng  of  5  companies  and  a  guns.    E  is  a  n,a„,  guard  of  1  con,pa„y/s„ppor  in     he  picket,  crdG    eae.r  r''  T     "'""■    ""  "  '"'  "''"''  '°"^"'- 
S  respectively.    E'  is  a  main  guard  of  1  company,  supportin.-  the  pickerr"  whi  h        .  .   '  "  ''"'"  "  """"^  "'  '^e  crossings  R  and 

posts  a  vidette  at  V.    The  pickets  G,  G',  G"  G'"  each  consist  nf  iT,         '  Z         ^       ""'  """'"'  "  ^  ""''  ""'  "'  ="  "°^™g  ="'°™.  "■"i  G'",  which 
village  L,  and  patrols  the  road  beyond.  '  '  °'  '  "''"""'■    "^  "  =■  P'-^""'  ^"--""^  "^  «  ^-P-y  which  posts  two  videttes  nel  the 

videl^e^t'thlrornri"'""'^'^™''"'''"'''^'^'"""''^  °  "  '^  P'^""  "^'onging  to  the  detachment  B,  which  p„,„  . 


i  Infantry. 


I  •"""^'imm  lOavalry. 


Scale  of  miles. 


356 


MILITARY    COMMISSION   TO    EUROPE. 


Fig.  1. 


Plate  9. 

6  553. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  1  reprdsents  the  manner  of  packing  from  40  to  56  pounds  of  forage  on  a  company  horse. 
Fig.  2  shows  the  manner  of  packing  1 12  pounds  on  a  horse. 


INDEX. 


-do-. 


A. 

Advanced  guards,  United  States  cavalry,  In  time  of 
war 

Do do do... 

Arms,  &o. ,  of  Austrian  cavalry 

of  French  cavalry 

of  Prussian  cavalry 

infantry 

of  Russian  cavalry 

infantry 

militia 

of  Sardinian  infantry 

Army,  Russian,  composition 

Army  corps,  Russian 

Artel,  Russian 

Artillery,  Russian 

AUSTRIAN  CAVALRY,  Arms,  &c"."V.V  ."".'."  .'.'."." 

Clothing- 

Cooking  utensils 

Daily  duty  in  garrison... 

Duties  of  officers 

Equitation,  school  of,  at 

Vienna 

Forage 

Horses 

Horse  equipments 

Marches,  &c 

Organization 

Quarters 

Rations 

Stahles 

Swimming 

Tactics,  &c 

Austrian  engineer  troops 

infantry 

pioneers 


B. 

Battalion,  school  of,  Russian  infantry. 

Berlin,  veterinary  school  at 

Bivouacs  of  Prussian  cavalry 

Bivouacs  of  Russian  infantry 

Bridges,  military,  Prussian 

Russian. 

46  © 


Page. 

298 

304 

227 

245 

212 

55 

120 

176 

178 

59 

62 

67 

80 

66 

227 

231 

233 

235 

236 

238 
234 
233 
229 
237 
221 
236 
232 
234 
225 
222 

34 

45 

35 


159 
219 
217 
175 
33 
26 


C. 


;  war. 
-do... 


Camps,  United  States  cavalry,  In  time  of  i 

Do do do 

Camp  equipage,  Sardinian  infantry . 
Cantonments,  United  States  cavalry,  in  time  oVwlr 

Caucasus,  army  of  the 

Cavalry,  Austrian 

English 

French 

Prussian 

Russian 

Russian 

Russian 

Sardinian 

United  States 

Clothing  of  Austrian  cavalry 

Colonies,  military,  of  Russia 

Commander-in-chief,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 
Commander  of  the  advanced  guard.  United  States 

cavalry,  in  war 

of   the    rear    guard.    United     States 

cavalry,  in  war 

Company,  school  of,  Russian  infantry 

Convoys,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Cooking  utensils  of  Austrian  cavalry 

of  Sardinian  infantry 

Cossacks,  &c 

Cossacks,  &c 

Crimea,  operations  in 


Defence  of  trains.  United  States  cavalry,  in  war.. 

Detachments,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

advanced,    flank   and  rear.    United 

States  cavalry,  in  war 

Dragoons,  &c.,  Russian. 

Duties  of  Austrian  cavalry  ofBcers,  &c 


E. 


Page. 
308 
334 

60 
336 

71 
221 
270 
242 
207 

65 

82 
119 
275 
277 
231 
76 
295 

298 

300 
157 
342 
233 

60 

73 
124 

5 


292 
338 

300 
124 
236 


Emperor  of  Russia,  grand  staff  of  , 
Encampments  of  Russian  infantry  . 
Engineer  troops,  Austrian 

English 

French 


62 
169 
34 
36 
36 


358 


INDEX. 


Engineer  troops,  Prussian 

Russian 

Russian 

ENGLISH  CAVALRY,  organization 

Horse  equipments 

Tactics,  &c 

Transportation  by  sea 

Equipments,  horse,  Austrian  cavalry 

English do 

French do 

Prussian do 

Russian do 

Equitation,  Austrian  school  of,  at  Vienna 

Prussian,  school  of,  at  Schwedt  ... 

Evolutions  of  the  line,  Russian  cavalry. 

infantry 


Farriers,  school  of,  at  Saumur 

Field  service  of  French  cavalry 

Prussian  .do 

infantry 

Russian  cavalry 

United  States  cavalry,  in  war,  regu- 
lations for 

Field  works,  Russian 

Flank  march.  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Forage  of  Austrian  cavalry 

French do 

Prussian  ..do 

Foragers,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Foraging do do 

FRENCH  CAVALRY,  Arms,  &c 

Field  service 

Forage 

Horse  equipments 

Horses 

Organization 

Quarters 

Rations 

Stables 

Stable  duty 

Tactics 

Transportation  by  sea 

Uniform 

French  engineer  troops 

infantry 

G. 


Garrison,  daily  duty  in,  of  Austrian  cavalry. 

Generals,  jx)sts  of,  &c.,  Russian  cavalry 

General  columns,  Russian  cavalry . 

infantry 

Guards,  Russian  infantry 


Page. 
32 
25 
G6 
270 
271 
270 
272 
229 
271 
245 
211 
119 
238 
218 
105 
160 


266 
253 
216 
58 
124 

287 
27 
290 
234 
250 
214 
346 
344 
245 
253 
250 
245 
248 
242 
250 
249 
251 
253 
245 
256 
247 
36 
40 


235 
106 
116 
161 
171 


Halts  of  troops,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war. 

Horse  equipments  of  Austrian  cavalry 

of  English  cavalry . 


293 
229 
271 


Page. 

Horse  equipments  of  French  cavalry 245 

of  Prussian  cavalry 211 

of  Russian  cavalry 119 

Horses,   Austrian 233 

French 248 

Prussian 213 

Russian 122 

purchase  of,  for  United  States  cavalry 282 

Hospitals,  Russian 80 


I. 


Independent  pickets,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war.  318 

Infantry,  Austrian . 45 

French 40 

Prussian 49 

Russian 64, 152 

Sardinian .  58 

Inspections  of  Russian  army 79 

Irregular  troops,  Russian 73 

L. 

Lancers,  &c., Russian 124 

M. 

Main  body,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 306,334 

guard,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 315 

Marches,  &c  ,  of  Austrian  cavalry 237 

Marches  of  troops.  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 287 

Military  schools,  Russian 73 

Militia,   Russian 177 

Mines,  Russian 31 

Model  regiments,  Russian 73 

0. 

Operations  in  the  Crimea 5 

Order  of  battle,  Russian  cavalry  regiment 103 

Orders  of  battle,  Russian  cavalry 114 

infantry .  161 

reserve,  Russian  infantry 161 

Organization  of  Austrian  cavalry 221 

of  English  cavalry 270 

of  French  cavalry 242 

of  Prussian  cavalry 207 

infantry 49 

of  Russian  cavalry 65 

infantry 64 

of  Sardinian  infantry 58 

Outposts,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war..  308,317,321,327 

P. 

Patrols,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 301,324 

Pay  of  Russian  army 81 

Pickets,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 311 

Pickets,  independent.  United  States  cavalry,  in  war  318 

Pioneers,  Austrian 36 


INDEX. 


359 


Platoon,  school  of,  Russian  cavalry 

Pontons,   leather,    of  Russian  mounted   engineer 

troops  

PRUSSIAN  CAVALRY,  Arms,  &e 

Bivouacs 

Equitation,   school  of,    at 

Schwedt 

Field  service 

Forage 

Horse  equipments 

Horses 

Organization 

Quarters 

Rations 

Skirmishers 

Stables 

Stable  duty 

Tactics,  &c. 

Uniform 

Prussian  engineer  troops i. 

Infantry,  Arms,  &c 

Field  service 

Organization 

Quarters 

Rations 

Tactics,  &c 

Uniform 

Q. 

Quarters  of  Austrian  cavalry 

French  cavalry 

Prussian  cavalry 

in  fan  try 

Russian  army 


B. 

Rations  of  Austrian  cavalry  soldiers 

French  cavalry  soldiers 

Prussian  cavalry  soldiers 

infantry 

Russian  army 

Rearguard,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Reconnaissances,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Recruit,  school  of,  Russian  cavalry 

Recruiting,  &c. ,  of  Russian  army 

Regiment,  school  of,  Russian  cavalry 

Regulations   for   field    service    of    United   States 

cavalry  in  war.  .. 

Reserve,  orders  of,  &c. ,  Russian  infantry 

Reserve  troops  of  the  grand  army  of  Russia 

Reviews,  Russian  cavalry 

Riding  houses,  Russian 

Rules  for  forming  in  order  of  battle,  Russian  cavalry 

RUSSLA.N  ARMY,  Composition 

Inspections 

Irregular  troops 

Pay 

Quarters 

Rations 


Page. 
94 

27 
212 
217 

218 
216 
214 
211 
213 
207 
214 
214 
210 
215 
216 
208 
212 
32 
55 
58 
49 
67 
57 
53 
57 


236 

250 

214 

57 

79 


232 

249 

214 

57 

80 

300,307 

340 

82 

74 

102 

287 

161 

71 

105 

123 

117 

62 

79 

73 

81 

79 

80 


Page. 

RUSSIAN  ARMY,  Recruiting,  &c. 74 

Reserve  troops 71 

Staff,  general 63 

Uniform 77 

RUSSIAN  CAVALRY,  Arms,  &c 120 

Equipment,  &c.. II9 

Evolutions  of  the  line .  105 

Field  service 124 

Generals,  posts  of,  &c 106 

General  columns 116 

Horses 122 

Manfegeriding 83 

Order  of  battle  for  a  regiment.  103 

Orders  of  battle 114 

Organization 65 

Platoon,  school  of  the 94 

Recruit,  school  of  the 82 

Regiment,  school  of  the 102 

Reviews 105 

Rules  for  forming  in  order  of 

battle 117 

Sabre  exercise 87 

Skirmishers 100 

Squadron,  schoolofthe 95 

Stables 123 

Tactics,  &o 82 

Uniform.. 78 

Russian  Emperor,  grand  staff  of 62 

Engineer  troops 25 

Engineer  troops 66 

RUSSIAN  INFANTRY,  Arms,  &c 176 

Battalion,  school  of  the 159 

Bivouacs 175 

Company,  school  of  the 157 

Encampments 169 

Evolutions  of  the  line 160 

General  columns 161 

Guards 171 

Orders  of  battle 161 

Orders  of  reserve 161 

Organization 64 

Skirmishers 158 

Tactics,  &c 152 

Uniform 78 

S. 

Sabre  exercise,  Russian 87 

Saps,  Prussian 33 

Sardinian  Cavalry 275 

Infantry,     Arms,  &c 59 

Camp  equipage 60 

Cooking  utensils.. 60 

Organization 58 

Uniform 59 

Saumur,  cavalry  school  at 269 

Schools,  company  and  battalion,  of  Russian  engineer 

troops 25 

Schwedt,  school  of  equitation  at 218 

Siege  materials,  Russian 29 


360 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Siege  operations,  Russian 30 

Skirmishers  of  Prussian  cavalry --  210 

of  Russian  cavalry 100 

of  Russian  infantry -  158 

Squadron,  school  of,  Russian  cavalry 95 

Stables,  Austrian. 234 

French 251 

Stable  duty  of  French  cavalry 253 

Stables,  Prussian 215 

Stable  duty  of  Prussian  cavalry 216 

Stables,  Russian - 123 

Staff,  general,  Russian  army 63 

Staff,  grand,  of  the  Russian  emperor 62 

Standards  and  their  escort,  Russian  cavalry 103 

Swimming,  Austrian  cavalry 225 

T. 

Tactics,  &c. ,  of  Austrian  cavalry 222 

English  cavalry.. 270 

French  cavalry 215 

Prussian  cavalry —  208 

infantry 63 

Russian  cavalry -  82 

infantry 152 

United  States  cavalry 280 

Tents,  Russian 80 

Topographical  corps,  Russian — 63 

Ti-ains,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 291 


Transportation  of  English  cavalry  by  sea 

French  cavalry  by  sea 

U. 

Uniform  of  French  cavalry 

Prussian  cavalry 

infantry 

Russian  army .. 

cavalry 

infantry 

militia 

United  States  cavalry 

UNITED  STATES  CAVALRY,  proposed  organization. 

system  of  tac- 
tics   

school  and  depot 

purchase  of  horses 


V. 


Veterinary  school  at  Berlin 

schools  of  France -. 

school  at  Vienna 

surgeons,  &c.,  of  Austrian  cavalry. 

Videttes,  United  States  cavalry,  in  war 

Vienna,  schools  of  equitation,  &c.,  at 


Page. 
272 
256 


247 

212 

57 

77 

78 

78 

177 

282 

277 

280 
281 

282 


219 
258 
238 
239 
309 
238 


Z. 


Zouaves . 


43 


j 


^ 


\ 


»,famiWUt)ratv  of  Velennaiv  Medicine 


University" 
MeslboroRoad 
1  Grafton.  WIA  01538 


